100% found this document useful (3 votes)
1K views769 pages

Huawei Genex Probe v18 User Manual

Huawei Genex Probe v18 User Manual

Uploaded by

Denmark Wilson
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
100% found this document useful (3 votes)
1K views769 pages

Huawei Genex Probe v18 User Manual

Huawei Genex Probe v18 User Manual

Uploaded by

Denmark Wilson
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 769

GENEX Assistant

V3R18

User Guide

Issue 01
Date 2017-03-21

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document provides the guidelines for installing and using the GENEX Assistant and
methods for analyzing the test data.

Product Version
The following table lists the product and version related to this guide.

Product Name Product Version

GENEX Assistant V3R18

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

l Network design engineers


l Network monitoring engineers
l System maintenance engineers

Change History
01 (2017-03-21)
This issue is the third version. Compared with issue 03 (2016-07-29) of V300R017C00, this
issue incorporates the changes listed in the following table.

Change Description

21.1.8 Description of NB-IoT IEs New

6.1 Creating a Project The content descriptions are changed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 New Functions of Assistant V300R018 Compared with V300R017..................................... 1
2 Introduction to the Assistant.......................................................................................................2
2.1 Overview of Assistant.................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Application Scenario of Assistant.................................................................................................................................. 4
2.3 Basic Concept of Assistant............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.4 Procedure of Assistant.................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.5 Assistant Main Window..................................................................................................................................................8

3 Installing the Assistant...............................................................................................................21


3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Assistant.................................................................................................................22
3.2 Checking the Integrity of the Software.........................................................................................................................23
3.3 Installing the Assistant Main Program......................................................................................................................... 24

4 License Application Management............................................................................................27


5 Starting the Assistant..................................................................................................................30
6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually.......................................................................................... 31
6.1 Creating a Project......................................................................................................................................................... 32
6.2 Configuring an Analysis Task...................................................................................................................................... 34
6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template..................................................................................................................... 34
6.2.2 Setting Report Attributes........................................................................................................................................... 36
6.2.3 Setting the Theme Analysis Type.............................................................................................................................. 37
6.2.4 Setting CDF Statistics................................................................................................................................................44
6.2.5 Setting Conditions for Filtering DT Logfiles............................................................................................................ 44
6.2.6 Setting the Binning Mode..........................................................................................................................................46
6.2.7 Setting Site Display Properties.................................................................................................................................. 48
6.2.8 Setting Other Attributes.............................................................................................................................................49
6.3 Importing Engineering Parameters and Neighboring Cell Data...................................................................................50
6.3.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems.......................................................................... 51
6.3.2 Importing Engineering Parameters............................................................................................................................ 60
6.3.3 Importing Neighboring Cell Data..............................................................................................................................64
6.4 Importing Map Data..................................................................................................................................................... 67
6.4.1 Basic Concepts About Maps......................................................................................................................................67

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide Contents

6.4.2 Importing a Map........................................................................................................................................................ 69


6.4.3 Map-related Operations............................................................................................................................................. 71
6.5 Importing DT Log Files................................................................................................................................................81

7 Creating an Analysis Group...................................................................................................... 84


8 Executing an Analysis Task.......................................................................................................86
9 Data Analysis (GSM).................................................................................................................. 89
9.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (GSM).........................................................................................................................90
9.2 GSM Theme Analysis.................................................................................................................................................. 92
9.2.1 GSM Theme Analysis............................................................................................................................................... 92
9.2.2 GSM Coverage Analysis........................................................................................................................................... 95
9.2.3 GSM Handover Analysis...........................................................................................................................................97
9.2.4 GSM Interference Analysis....................................................................................................................................... 99

10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)...................................................................................................... 101


10.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (WCDMA)..............................................................................................................102
10.2 WCDMA Theme Analysis....................................................................................................................................... 104
10.2.1 WCDMA RF Theme Analysis.............................................................................................................................. 104
10.2.2 WCDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis........................................................................................................................ 107
10.2.3 WCDMA Downlink Interference Analysis........................................................................................................... 110
10.2.4 WCDMA Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis......................................................................................................113
10.2.5 WCDMA Coverage Analysis................................................................................................................................ 115
10.2.6 WCDMA Handover Analysis................................................................................................................................118
10.2.7 WCDMA Interference Analysis............................................................................................................................ 122
10.2.8 WCDMA Throughput Analysis.............................................................................................................................125
10.2.9 WCDMA Abnormal Event Analysis..................................................................................................................... 127

11 Data Analysis (LTE)................................................................................................................ 130


11.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (LTE).......................................................................................................................131
11.2 Theme Analysis (LTE)..............................................................................................................................................133
11.2.1 Theme Analysis (LTE)...........................................................................................................................................133
11.2.2 Coverage Theme Analysis (LTE).......................................................................................................................... 136
11.2.3 Handover Theme Analysis (LTE)..........................................................................................................................139
11.2.4 InterFerence Theme Analysis (LTE)..................................................................................................................... 142
11.2.5 Throughput Theme Analysis (LTE).......................................................................................................................145
11.2.6 Exception Event Theme Analysis (LTE)............................................................................................................... 147
11.2.7 VoLTE Theme Analysis (LTE).............................................................................................................................. 149

12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA).................................................................................................159


12.1 TD-SCDMA Coverage Overlap Analysis................................................................................................................ 160
12.2 Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis (TD-SCDMA)................................................................................................. 163

13 Viewing the Analysis Results............................................................................................... 167


13.1 Viewing IE Analysis Results.................................................................................................................................... 168
13.1.1 Viewing the Analysis Results on the Project Tab Page......................................................................................... 168

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide Contents

13.1.2 Viewing the Analysis Results in the IE View Windows........................................................................................169


13.1.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Predefined View Windows.......................................................................... 173
13.1.4 Configuring the View Window..............................................................................................................................173
13.2 Viewing KPI Analysis Results................................................................................................................................. 174
13.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Event View Windows..................................................................................... 176
13.4 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Messages View Windows............................................................................... 178
13.5 IE Combination Query..............................................................................................................................................178

14 Drilling Down Analysis Results.......................................................................................... 184


14.1 Drilling Down IE Analysis Results.......................................................................................................................... 185
14.2 Drilling Down Event Analysis Results.....................................................................................................................188
14.3 Customizing the Display of IE/Event Analysis Results........................................................................................... 192
14.4 Exporting Drilling Results........................................................................................................................................193

15 Generating an Analysis Report.............................................................................................195


15.1 Analysis Report Types..............................................................................................................................................197
15.2 Using Report Wizard to Generate a Report ............................................................................................................. 197
15.3 Generating Reports by Analysis Group....................................................................................................................200
15.4 Generating a Benchmark Report.............................................................................................................................. 203
15.5 Generating a Single Site Verification Report........................................................................................................... 204
15.6 Generating Service Statistical Reports..................................................................................................................... 207
15.7 Generating Custom Cluster Reports......................................................................................................................... 208
15.8 Generating a Cross Table Report..............................................................................................................................209
15.9 Generating a Speech Quality Evaluation Report...................................................................................................... 210
15.10 Generating an Indoor Distribution Report..............................................................................................................210

16 Automatic Data Processing....................................................................................................212


16.1 Creating an Automatic Analysis Task...................................................................................................................... 213
16.2 Executing an Automatic Analysis Task....................................................................................................................214

17 Customizing Functions...........................................................................................................217
17.1 Customizing KPIs.....................................................................................................................................................218
17.1.1 Creating Custom KPIs........................................................................................................................................... 218
17.1.2 Managing Defined KPIs........................................................................................................................................ 220
17.1.3 Example: Creating a Counting KPI....................................................................................................................... 221
17.1.4 Example: Creating a Calculation KPI................................................................................................................... 222
17.2 Customizing Events.................................................................................................................................................. 224
17.2.1 Creating Custom Events........................................................................................................................................ 224
17.2.2 Managing Events................................................................................................................................................... 226
17.3 Customizing Reports................................................................................................................................................ 226
17.3.1 Creating a Custom Report Template......................................................................................................................226
17.3.2 Modifying Existing Report Templates...................................................................................................................228
17.3.3 Creating an Office Report Template......................................................................................................................229
17.3.4 Example: Creating a Report Template...................................................................................................................230
17.4 Customizing Delays..................................................................................................................................................234

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide Contents

17.4.1 Creating Custom Delay......................................................................................................................................... 234


17.4.2 Creating Custom Segmentdelay............................................................................................................................ 235
17.4.3 Creating a User-Defined Call Delay......................................................................................................................237
17.5 Predefined IEs...........................................................................................................................................................237
17.6 Custom Chart............................................................................................................................................................ 239

18 Typical Application.................................................................................................................242
18.1 IP Packet Detailed Decoding.................................................................................................................................... 243
18.1.1 HTTP..................................................................................................................................................................... 243
18.1.2 FTP........................................................................................................................................................................ 244
18.1.3 Video Streaming.................................................................................................................................................... 245
18.1.4 Email......................................................................................................................................................................246
18.2 Viewing the Delta Analysis for Network Optimization........................................................................................... 247
18.3 View Combine Analysis Results.............................................................................................................................. 249
18.4 Exporting Data Based on the Preset Filter Conditions............................................................................................. 252

19 Interface Reference..................................................................................................................256
19.1 Interface Description: Map Window........................................................................................................................ 260
19.2 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Chart View Window.............................................................................. 265
19.3 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Table View Window...............................................................................267
19.4 Interface Description: View Window Management................................................................................................. 269
19.5 Interface Description: Custom Report interface....................................................................................................... 270
19.6 Interface Description: KPI Editor Dialog Box......................................................................................................... 275
19.7 Parameters for Customizing Events......................................................................................................................... 278
19.8 Interface Description: Setting the Analysis Task Template......................................................................................279
19.9 Parameters for Configuring Layer Control Properties..............................................................................................281
19.10 Parameters for Configuring Legends......................................................................................................................284
19.11 Parameters in a Report Generated for Engineering Parameter Checking Failure.................................................. 288
19.12 Parameters for Setting GSM Theme Analysis Types............................................................................................. 289
19.13 Parameters for Setting the WCDMA Analysis Type..............................................................................................294
19.14 Parameters for Setting LTE Theme Analysis Types............................................................................................... 312
19.15 Parameters for Setting the VoLTE Analysis Type.................................................................................................. 324
19.16 Parameters for Setting the TD-SCDMA Analysis Type.........................................................................................331
19.17 Parameters for Setting Display Properties of Sites.................................................................................................333
19.18 Parameters for Importing DT Logfiles................................................................................................................... 333
19.19 Parameters for Creating an Analysis Group........................................................................................................... 334
19.20 Interface Description: Viewing KPI Results in the KPI Result Window............................................................... 335
19.21 Parameters for Viewing the Drilldown Analysis Result of a WCDMA Event.......................................................337
19.22 Parameters for Viewing the GSM Coverage Analysis Result................................................................................ 338
19.23 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Coverage Analysis Result......................................................................... 340
19.24 Parameters for Viewing the LTE Coverage Analysis Result..................................................................................342
19.25 Parameters for Viewing the TD-SCDMA Coverage Analysis Result.................................................................... 343
19.26 Parameters for Viewing the Missing Neighboring TD-SCDMA Cell Analysis Result..........................................345
19.27 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis Result................................................................. 346

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide Contents

19.28 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Downlink Interference Analysis Result.................................................... 347
19.29 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Missing Neighboring Analysis Result...................................................... 347
19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs.................................................................................................................................. 349
19.31 Parameters for Custom Report Templates.............................................................................................................. 371
19.32 Parameters for Exporting CSV............................................................................................................................... 373
19.33 Parameters for Custom IEs..................................................................................................................................... 375
19.34 Parameters for Custom Events............................................................................................................................... 376
19.35 Parameters for Custom Delay.................................................................................................................................398
19.36 Parameters for Setting an Automatic Analysis Task.............................................................................................. 403
19.37 Parameters for Executing an Automatic Analysis Task......................................................................................... 403
19.38 Parameters for Measurement Information.............................................................................................................. 404
19.39 Parameters for Map Setting.................................................................................................................................... 407
19.40 Parameter Description: Indoor Report....................................................................................................................409

20 FAQs...........................................................................................................................................413
20.1 How Do I Uninstall the Main Program of the Assistant?.........................................................................................416
20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information...........................................................................................................416
20.3 How Do I Export Configuration Information...........................................................................................................418
20.4 What Should I Do to Troubleshoot the Failure of Starting the Assistant After the Microsoft Office Software Is
Uninstalled?...................................................................................................................................................................... 419
20.5 How to Prepare an Engineering Parameter File?......................................................................................................419
20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme Analysis Result Is Displayed?....................................................................... 421
20.7 What Should I Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the Drilldown and Data View
Synchronization?.............................................................................................................................................................. 422
20.8 What Should I Do to Solve the Common Problems in Automatic Analysis Tasks?................................................ 423
20.9 What Should I Do When IEs Fail to Be Displayed on a Map in the Further Analysis Report in Quick Analysis
Mode?............................................................................................................................................................................... 424
20.10 How to Handle the Problem of Abnormal Breakdown of the Assistant When Moving a Legend on the Map?....425
20.11 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?................................................................................................425
20.12 What Should I Do When the Assistant Fails to Start the Google Earth?............................................................... 426
20.13 How to View Segmentation Points of DT Logs?....................................................................................................426
20.14 How Do I Resolve the Problem that an Error Message Is Displayed When an Excel Report Is Exported?.......... 427
20.15 How Do I Resolve the Problem that the Assistant Window Is Displayed in the Front but Other Windows Cannot
Be Displayed?...................................................................................................................................................................428
20.16 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Selected Data Points Cannot Be Highlighted When a Multi-selection Tool on
a Map Is Used to Select IEs?............................................................................................................................................ 428
20.17 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Assistant Icons Are Displayed as Garbled Characters?............................... 429
20.18 How Do I Solve the Compatibility Problem Between the Project of an Earlier Version and the Assistant?......... 429
20.19 What Do I Do If the Manually Calculated KPIs Are Slightly Different from Those Displayed on the Assistant?
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 430
20.20 What Do I Do If the Volumes of Data Related to RF Modes Are Different Before and After Parsing?................430
20.21 What do I do if one time repeately appear when using Time Binning way to analyze data and display the IEs?. 431
20.22 If the IEs Under the Delay Node Have No Value, They Still Need to Be Displayed in the IE Tree......................431

21 Appendixes............................................................................................................................... 433

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide Contents

21.1 IE Descriptions......................................................................................................................................................... 434


21.1.1 Common IEs.......................................................................................................................................................... 434
21.1.2 Description of GSM MS IEs................................................................................................................................. 442
21.1.3 IEs of the GSM DTI Scanner................................................................................................................................ 452
21.1.4 Description of WCDMA UE IEs...........................................................................................................................453
21.1.5 Description of WCDMA Scanner IEs................................................................................................................... 481
21.1.6 Description of CDMA UE IEs...............................................................................................................................482
21.1.7 Description of LTE UE IEs....................................................................................................................................484
21.1.8 Description of NB-IoT IEs.................................................................................................................................... 562
21.1.9 Description of LTE Scanner IEs............................................................................................................................ 567
21.1.10 Predefined IEs......................................................................................................................................................571
21.1.11 Description of WLAN UE IEs.............................................................................................................................580
21.1.12 Description of TD-SCDMA UE IEs....................................................................................................................583
21.1.13 MOS Description................................................................................................................................................. 586
21.1.14 vMOS Result....................................................................................................................................................... 588
21.1.15 L3 Message Description...................................................................................................................................... 590
21.1.16 IP Key Message Description............................................................................................................................... 590
21.2 B Description of Predefined Events......................................................................................................................... 591
21.2.1 FTP Service Process.............................................................................................................................................. 591
21.2.2 General Events.......................................................................................................................................................592
21.2.3 GSM Predefined Events........................................................................................................................................ 593
21.2.4 WCDMA Predefined Events................................................................................................................................. 595
21.2.5 CDMA Predefined Events..................................................................................................................................... 605
21.2.6 LTE Predefined Events.......................................................................................................................................... 608
21.2.7 vMOS Predefined Events...................................................................................................................................... 614
21.2.8 VoLTE Events........................................................................................................................................................ 616
21.2.9 CDMA and LTE Interoperation Events................................................................................................................. 617
21.2.10 WLAN Events..................................................................................................................................................... 618
21.2.11 TD-SCDMA Events.............................................................................................................................................618
21.2.12 IP Packet Predefined Events................................................................................................................................626
21.3 C Description of Predefined KPIs............................................................................................................................ 630
21.3.1 Description of Common Predefined KPIs............................................................................................................. 630
21.3.2 Description of Predefined GSM KPIs................................................................................................................... 650
21.3.3 Predefined WCDMA KPIs.................................................................................................................................... 654
21.3.4 Predefined LTE KPIs............................................................................................................................................. 672
21.3.5 VoLTE Predefined KPIs.........................................................................................................................................702
21.3.6 vMOS KPI............................................................................................................................................................. 710
21.3.7 NB-IoT KPIs..........................................................................................................................................................711
21.3.8 Predefined KPIs for CDMA and LTE Interoperation............................................................................................715
21.3.9 Predefined TD-SCDMA KPIs............................................................................................................................... 717
21.3.10 WLAN Pre-Defined KPIs....................................................................................................................................721
21.3.11 IP Packet Predefined KPIs...................................................................................................................................722

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide Contents

21.4 D Description of Predefined Reports........................................................................................................................732


21.4.1 Predefined GSM Reports.......................................................................................................................................732
21.4.2 Predefined WCDMA reports................................................................................................................................. 735
21.4.3 Predefined LTE reports..........................................................................................................................................739
21.4.4 Predefined TD-SCDMA Reports...........................................................................................................................742
21.4.5 SSV Analysis Report............................................................................................................................................. 745
21.4.6 Cross Table Predefined Report.............................................................................................................................. 745
21.4.7 Speech Quality Evaluation Predefined Report...................................................................................................... 748
21.5 Description of Shortcut Keys................................................................................................................................... 751

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant 1 New Functions of Assistant V300R018 Compared with
User Guide V300R017

1 New Functions of Assistant V300R018


Compared with V300R017

This section describes new functions of Assistant V300R018 compared with V300R017.

New and Enhanced Functions


New or enhanced functions of Assistant V300R018 are listed as follows:
l NB-IoT related IEs
l TEMS data analysis
l Microsoft windows 10 adaptation

New Test Terminals


New test terminals supported by Assistant V300R018 are listed as follows:
l HUAWEI NB Boudica
l HUAWEI NB Device
l HUAWEI Mate9
l HUAWEI MLA

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

2 Introduction to the Assistant

About This Chapter

The Assistant is drive test (DT) logfiles Analysis software, which is used to analyze and
process test data of GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA, and LTE networks. The Assistant
can also generate network test reports to meet network analysis requirements of customers.
The generated test reports effectively reflect the operation status of radio networks and
provide guidelines for network verification, network evaluation, network optimization, and
fault location. Therefore, the test reports help users learn about network performance, quickly
locate network problems, and improve work efficiency.
2.1 Overview of Assistant
This section describes the positioning and features of the Assistant. Analyzing and optimizing
network performance is an important means for operators to expand network capacity and
improve quality of service (QOS). The Assistant enables network planning engineers and
network optimization engineers to learn about network performance clearly, locate network
problems quickly, improve work efficiency, and reduce the operational expenditure (OPEX)
of operators.
2.2 Application Scenario of Assistant
This section describes the application scenario. The Assistant is applicable to multiple
scenarios such as project acceptance, routine optimization, integrated optimization, complaint
handling, and automatic import and analysis of DT data.
2.3 Basic Concept of Assistant
The basic concepts of the Assistant consist of the project, drive test (DT) logfile, signaling
message, and IE. To analyze DT data effectively by using the Assistant, you need to
familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.
2.4 Procedure of Assistant
This section describes two analysis modes and the operation procedure that provide guidelines
for data analysis.
2.5 Assistant Main Window
This section describes the main window of the Assistant, including the menu bar, toolbar,
navigator, operation interface, and required entries.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

2.1 Overview of Assistant


This section describes the positioning and features of the Assistant. Analyzing and optimizing
network performance is an important means for operators to expand network capacity and
improve quality of service (QOS). The Assistant enables network planning engineers and
network optimization engineers to learn about network performance clearly, locate network
problems quickly, improve work efficiency, and reduce the operational expenditure (OPEX)
of operators.

Positioning
The Assistant is drive test (DT) logfiles Analysis software, which is used to analyze and
process GSM, WCDMA,CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE drive test (DT) logfiles. It helps in
locating network problems and generating multiple analysis reports.

Figure 2-1 shows the position of the Assistant on the network.

Figure 2-1 Networking diagram of the Assistant

Features
l Powerful custom function
The Assistant supports the function of customizing events, KPIs, query criteria, and
reports to meet the actual service requirements and the requirements of extended
services.
l Theme-based problem location
The GENEX Assistant locates and analyzes the causes of the problems in DT logfiles
and lists the potential network problems related to radio parameters, neighboring cell
configuration, and radio frequency configuration.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

The Assistant displays the problem cells and helps in analyzing problem cells according
to the following problems: over coverage, poor coverage, no serving cell dominance,
azimuth garbled, pilot pollution, downlink interference, and missing neighboring cells.
l Multiple formats of DT logfiles
The Assistant analyzes the data in multiple formats, such as the data in .gen format
collected by GENEX Probe, data in .phu format collected by GENEX PHU, data
in .fmt(.fm5, .fm7, .fm8) format collected by Ericsson TEMS, .dlf and .RSCMD. In
addition, the Assistant can convert DT data to .csv format. This facilitates the problem
location by using other software.

2.2 Application Scenario of Assistant


This section describes the application scenario. The Assistant is applicable to multiple
scenarios such as project acceptance, routine optimization, integrated optimization, complaint
handling, and automatic import and analysis of DT data.
In terms of services, the Assistant is mainly applicable to the following scenarios, as shown in
Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Application scenarios of Assistant

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

2.3 Basic Concept of Assistant


The basic concepts of the Assistant consist of the project, drive test (DT) logfile, signaling
message, and IE. To analyze DT data effectively by using the Assistant, you need to
familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.
Table 2-1 describes the basic concepts and corresponding descriptions of the Assistant.

Table 2-1 Basic concepts of the Assistant


Basic Concept Description

Project The Assistant analyzes data based on project management. A project


contains all the information required for data analysis, such as
engineering parameters, maps, legends, templates, themes, and DT
logfiles. You can create projects according to the test duration, test
area, or service to be tested.

DT logfile A DT logfile is the record of the data collected during a DT. The test
data is stored in one or multiple files during a DT. These files are
called DT logfiles.

Binning Binning refers to the method of combining multiple DT points that


meet certain conditions into one DT point according to the specified
statistical rules such as distance, time or grid.
The Assistant supports the statistics of original DT points according to
the distance.

Analysis group The Assistant groups DT logfiles according to the service type, test
area, and test duration, and analyzes DT logfiles and generates reports
by analysis group.

Event Based on the rules for defining events, the Assistant determines events
according to the air interface messages or Layer 3 signaling messages.
This helps in locating radio network problems. Call drop and call
setup can be considered as events.

Signaling message The signaling messages provided by the Assistant refer to the air
interface messages.
The air interface messages are messages measured by terminals,
including Layer 3 signaling messages.

IE The information element (IE) refers to the basic unit that records the
measurement information in DT logfiles.

Engineering Engineering parameters include base station engineering parameters,


parameter base station technical parameters, and antenna parameters. After
engineering parameters are imported, the Assistant can search for the
information about the best matched base station in time and consider
these engineering parameters as network parameters for analysis.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Basic Concept Description

Map A map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo
map and the raster map. The map information is displayed in the map
window on the Assistant. The map information includes basic
information, test route, events, and engineering parameters of the test
area.
l MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, each of which is saved
in a file. The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst
(GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for
saving the layer sequence, layer label information, and legend.
l Raster map
An entire map can be considered as a layer. The raster map
supported by the Assistant is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif or .png
format.

Layer The layer is a series of data displayed in the map view window. The
layer consists of the following types:
l A map consists of multiple map layers.
l An indicator layer consists of events, IEs, and cells and is
composed of a series of themes.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer
contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains
multiple engineering parameters.

Legend Legends are classified into system legends and custom legends. Both
system legends and custom legends contain two types of legends:
l Ranged Legend
This type is used for the parameters with consecutive values, such
as RSCP and Ec/Io. The parameter values can be segmented, and
each value range is provided with a different display symbol.
Generally, gradient colors are used to indicate different value
ranges, thus helping you view the distribution of parameter values.
l Individual Legend
This type is used for parameters with discrete values, such as
events. Each parameter value is provided with a different display
symbol.

Label The labels indicates the objects in various layers of maps in text form.
The objects include field names of engineering parameters in cell
layers, IE values and numbers in IE layers.

Theme analysis The theme analysis enables the Assistant to extract experience from
network planning engineers, and quickly analyze and locate customer-
concerned network problems.
The theme analysis enables the Assistant to analyze problem cells,
display problem cells on a map, and synchronously display radio
parameter information related to the problem cells, thus helping you
locate network problems.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Basic Concept Description

Drilldown Drilling down analysis results is to perform multi-level query of


analysis results by object. This helps in further locating network
problems.

2.4 Procedure of Assistant


This section describes two analysis modes and the operation procedure that provide guidelines
for data analysis.

Figure 2-3 shows the procedure for analyzing data on the Assistant,Table 2-2 describes the
detailed information of Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Procedure for analyzing data on the Assistant

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Table 2-2 Descriptions of procedure for analyzing data on the Assistant


Proced Operation Reference
ure

1 Create a project. 6.1 Creating a Project

2 Set an analysis task template. 6.2 Configuring an Analysis Task

3 Import engineering parameters and l 6.3.2 Importing Engineering


map files. Parameters
l 6.4.2 Importing a Map

4 Automatic Create an 16.1 Creating an Automatic Analysis


analysis mode automatic analysis Task
tasks.

Execute an 16.2 Executing an Automatic Analysis


automatic analysis Task
tasks.

Manual Manually import 6.5 Importing DT Log Files


analysis mode DT data.

Manually set an 7 Creating an Analysis Group


analysis group.

Manually execute 8 Executing an Analysis Task


an analysis task.

5 Generate an analysis report. 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Analyze network KPIs. l 13.2 Viewing KPI Analysis Results


l 14.2 Drilling Down Event Analysis
Results

Execute a theme analysis. l 9.2.1 GSM Theme Analysis


l 10.2 WCDMA Theme Analysis
l 11.2.1 Theme Analysis (LTE)
l 12.2 Missing Neighboring Cell
Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

2.5 Assistant Main Window


This section describes the main window of the Assistant, including the menu bar, toolbar,
navigator, operation interface, and required entries.
Figure 2-4 shows the main window of the Assistant, and Table 2-3 provides the detailed
information about the main window shown in Figure 2-4.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Figure 2-4 Assistant main window

Table 2-3 Assistant main window


No. Name Description

1 Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For


details, see Toolbar.

2 Menu bar Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see
Menu Bar.

3 Operation Provides various view windows and configuration


interface interfaces. Each tab page in the lower part of the operation
interface displays a window. For details, see Operation
Interface.

4 Progress bar Displays the name of the log file that is being imported.
When you browse IE information, perform drill-down
analysis, perform correlated theme analysis tasks, or
switch between windows, the name of the file where the
KPIs belong is displayed.

5 Navigator Provides shortcut icons for the main operations of the


system. For details, see Navigator.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Bar
The menu bar of the Assistant shows the main menu of the system. The menus on the menu
bar are arranged according to the main functions of the Assistant to facilitate your operations.

Table 2-4 describes the menu bar of the Assistant and the corresponding functions.

Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar

Main Menu Description

Provides entries for creating analysis tasks. For details, see


Table 2-5.

Project Provides entries to operations related to project management.


For details, see Table 2-6.

Analysis Provides entries to operations related to dataset management,


including:
l Import of engineering parameters, map files, and
neighboring cell data
l Management of DT log files and analysis groups
For details, see Table 2-7.

Report Provides entries for operations related to reports. For details,


see Table 2-10.
NOTE
Reporting for TEMS data is not supported.

View Provides entries to operations related to the analysis results of


analysis groups, including:
l Display of KPI analysis results and theme analysis results
l Display of the toolbar or navigator
For details, see Table 2-8.

Tool Provides entries to operations related to data export and


customization, including:
l Export of maps and engineering parameter templates
l Customization of events, KPIs, and reports
For details, see Table 2-9.

Table 2-5 Description of the menu for creating analysis tasks

Menu Item Description

New Creates a project.

Open Opens a project.

Close Closes the current project.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Item Description

Save Saves the current project.

Save As Saves the current project as a new one.

System Setting Modifies and view the current analysis task template of
a project, including the settings of KPIs, IEs, themes,
filtering, binning, display properties of engineering
parameter conditions.

Recent Projects Shows the names of the recently opened projects.


Provides the shortcut entries to operate these projects.

Exit Exits the Assistant.

Table 2-6 Description of the Project menu


Menu Item Description

Setting Project Setting Modifies and view the current analysis task
template of a project, including the settings
of KPIs, IEs, themes, filtering, binning,
display properties of engineering parameter
conditions.

Map Load Outdoor Imports an outdoor map.


Map

Load Indoor Imports an indoor map.


Map

View Map Opens a map.

Engineering Parameter GSM: Views and exports a GSM engineering


l View parameter file. Exports and loads
Engineering neighboring cell file.
Parameter
l Export
Engineering
Parameter
l Load
Neighbor
Cell
Configuratio
n
l Export
Neighbor
Cell Table

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Item Description

WCDMA: Views and exports a WCDMA engineering


l View parameter file. Exports and loads
Engineering neighboring cell file.
Parameter
l Export
Engineering
Parameter
l Load
Neighbor
Cell
Configuratio
n
l Export
Neighbor
Cell Table

LTE: Views and exports a LTE engineering


l View parameter file. Exports and loads
Engineering neighboring cell file.
Parameter
l Export
Engineering
Parameter
l Load
Neighbor
Cell
Configuratio
n
l Export
Neighbor
Cell Table

CDMA: View Views a CDMA engineering parameter file.


Engineering
Parameter

Export Template Exports a GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-


l GSM SCDMA, or LTE engineering parameter
file.
l WCDMA
l LTE
l TD-SCDMA

LogFile LogFile Views and imports log files.


Manager

Analysis Group Creates and sets an analysis group.


Manager

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Item Description

VoLTE Theme Theme Setting Sets the VoLTE Theme analysis type. For
details about the parameters, see 19.15
Parameters for Setting the VoLTE
Analysis Type.

Table 2-7 Description of the Analysis menu


Menu Item Shortcut Description

Analysis Run Analysis F9 Executes an analysis task of


an analysis group.

Auto Analysis Ctrl+A Automatic analysis wizard


Wizard

Custom Custom - Customization wizard.


Analysis: l KPI is used to customize
l KPI KPIs. For details, see
l IE 17.1.1 Creating Custom
KPIs.
l Delay
l IE is used to customize
l Legend IEs. For details, see 17.5
l Combine Predefined IEs.
Query l Delay is used to customize
l Event delay.
l Legend is used to view the
customized Legend tab
page.
l Combine Query is used to
combine query.
l Event is used to customize
events. For details, see
17.2.1 Creating Custom
Events.
NOTE
Legend can be Ranged or
Individual.

Replay - Data replay. For details, see


Toolbar.

Map Labels l Previous - Label functions in indoor test


Label data replay.
l Add Label
l Next Label

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Table 2-8 Description of the View menu


Menu Item Description

View KPI Result Views the result about the


KPI.

Measurement Information Views the information


about the Measurement.

DrillDown GSM > Serving + Views the information


NOTE Neighbor Cell about the serving cell and
The drilldown is neighboring cells.
performed based
on one terminal. If GSM > Serving Views the information
the drilldown Cell about parameters of the
period is not serving cells.
within the time
range GSM > Basic Views the basic
corresponding to
Information information about the
the DT file, "The
drilldown time is selected DT point.
invalid." is
displayed. GSM > Radio Views the air interface
Parameter indicators of the serving
cell.

GSM > GPRS Views the information


Parameter about parameters of the
Windows GPRS.

GSM > GPRS Views the information


Parameter Chart about parameters of the
GPRS chart.

WCDMA > Views the block error rate


BLER (BLER) of the transport
channel.

WCDMA > Data Views the indicators related


Service to data services, such as the
rate at the application layer
and the rate at the radio link
control (RLC) layer.

WCDMA > Views air interface


Radio indicators.
Parameters

WCDMA > Views the information


Serving/Active about the active set,
Set + Neighbors monitor set, and detected
set.

WCDMA > Views High Speed


HSDPA Link Downlink Packet Access
Statistics (HSDPA) link statistics.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Item Description

WCDMA > HS- Views decoding statistics of


SCCH Decoding carrier 1, carrier 2, and all
Statistics carriers for the HS-SCCH.

WCDMA > Views High Speed Uplink


HSUPA link Packet Access (HSUPA)
Statistic link statistics.

TD-SCDMA > Views the information


Serving and about cell.
Neighboring
Cells

TD-SCDMA > Views information about


Radio the UE transmit power and
Parameters SIR of various channels.

TD-SCDMA > Views the throughput at the


Throughput application layer (APP),
packet data convergence
protocol (PDCP), and RLC
layers.

TD-SCDMA > Views the BLER of the


BLER transport channel.

TD-SCDMA > Views the UE state


UE State information.

LTE > Serving + Views the information


Neighboring about the serving cell,
Cells listed cell, and detected
cell.

LTE > Radio Views information about


Parameters the UE transmit power and
signal to interference plus
noise ratio (SINR) of
various channels.

LTE > Views the throughput at the


Throughput medium access control
(MAC), packet data
convergence protocol
(PDCP), and RLC layers.

LTE > BLER Views the BLER of the


transport channel.

LTE > Antenna Views the antenna


Measurement measurement information.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Item Description

LTE > MIMO Views multiple-input


multiple-output (MIMO)
information.

LTE > LTE Views statistics on


Modulation modulation algorithms
including the quadrature
phase shift keying (QPSK),
16 quadrature amplitude
modulation (16QAM), and
64QAM.

LTE > Inter-RAT Views information about


Measurements inter-frequency handoffs in
the LTE system.

LTE > vMOS Views information about


vMOS.

Positioning > Views the DT data


Map displayed in the map
window.

Templates > Customizes list views.


Custom Window

Templates > Customizes chart views.


Custom Chart

Message > L3 Views Layer 3 messages.


Message

Message > Event Views event information.

Chart > GSM/ Views GSM/WCDMA/LTE


WCDMA/LTE chart.
Chart

Chart > GSM/ Views GSM/WCDMA/LTE


WCDMA/LTE RRC chart.
RRC Chart

Chart > GSM/ Views GSM/WCDMA/LTE


WCDMA/LTE Data chart.
Data Chart

Window Tile Horizontally Arranges view windows in


horizontal tile mode.

Tile Vertically Arranges view windows in


vertical tile mode.

Switch Switches a window.

Close All Closes all view windows.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Item Description

Show/Hide Bar Project Displays the Project tab


page.

Legend Displays the Legend tab


page.

DrillDown Layout Save Saves the current drill-


down view.

Save as Save a drill-down view as a


new one.

Delete Deletes a drill-down view.

Drill Down View Switches a drill-down view.


Layout

Table 2-9 Description of the Tool menu


Menu Item Description

Configuration Import Allows you to import an analysis task


Configuration template.
l Full NOTE
Full is used to import all analysis task templates
l Custom in the system. Custom is used to import custom
templates.

Export Allows you to export an analysis task


Configuration template.
l Full NOTE
Full is used to export all analysis task templates
l Custom in the system. Custom is used to export custom
templates.

Export Export FMT Exports TEMS templates in FMT format.


Template for TEMS

License View ESN Views the electronic serial number (ESN).

Update License Updates the license information.

License Info Views the license information.

Cutter Cutter Captures screenshots. The results are saved


in BMP or JPEG format.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Menu Item Description

Feedback Custom Feedback Customer feedback options are used to


collect improvement plans.
l When Yes, I am willing to participate.
(Recommended) is selected, the
Assistant information collection and
calculation function takes affect. User
data is periodically collected and
uploaded to a specified server based on
the requirements of this function.
l When No, I would not like to
participate. is selected, the Assistant
information collection and calculation
function is disabled and user information
is no longer collected.

Check Update Check Update Checks version updates.


If the current version is not the latest, a list
of versions is provided. Select a version that
needs to be updated and update it to the
latest version.

Table 2-10 Description of the Report menu


Menu Item Description

Report Report Wizard Report wizard.

Benchmark Report Generate comparison analysis report.

SSV Report Generate single-site verification report.

Indoor Report Generate indoor report.

Custom Report Generate custom report.


l Business Statistics Report
l Custom Cluster Report

Custom Report Template Operation about report template.

Export Export CSV Export files in CSV format.

Toolbar
Table 2-11 shows the toolbar. You can click the corresponding icon to navigate to related
interface or perform related operations.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

Table 2-11 Description of the toolbar


Icon Name Description

New Project Creates a project.

Open Project Opens a project in .gaprj format.

Save Project Saves the currently opened project.

Save As New Saves the current project as a new project.


Project

Close Project Closes the current project.

- Replays backward at N times the standard rate.

- Replays forward at N times the standard rate.

- Replays backward in single step mode.

- Replays forward in single step mode.

- Replay speed.

- Pause.

Frame - Replay by frame.

Navigator
The navigator, located in the left pane of the main interface, provides shortcut icons for the
main operations of the system. The navigator consists of two tab pages.

l Project: displays the data and analysis groups of the current project.
You can right-click the nodes in the navigator to manage and view data and all the
analysis groups.
l Legend: displays the predefined and customized legends of the system.
For details about customized legends, see Configuring Legends.

Operation Interface
The operation interface is used to display data analysis results. It consists of seven tab pages:
l Overview: displays KPI analysis results, IE view window, and event view window.
l Drill Down: displays the analysis results after data is drilled down.
l GSM Theme: displays GSM theme analysis results.
l WCDMA Theme(UE): displays the WCDMA theme analysis results of UE DT data.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 2 Introduction to the Assistant

l WCDMA Theme(Scanner): displays the WCDMA theme analysis results of scanner


DT data.
l LTE Theme(UE): displays the LTE theme analysis results of UE DT data.
l LTE Theme(Scanner): displays the LTE theme analysis results of scanner DT data.
l TD-SCDMA Theme(UE): displays the TD-SCDMA theme analysis results of UE DT
data.
l TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner): displays the TD-SCDMA theme analysis results of
scanner DT data.
l VoLTE Theme: displays the LTE theme analysis results of the VoLTE DT data.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 3 Installing the Assistant

3 Installing the Assistant

About This Chapter

This section describes how to install the main program of the Assistant. To complete the
installation of the Assistant, you need only to run the installation program and then perform
operations as prompted by the installation wizard.t.
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Assistant
This section describes the preparations for installing the Assistant. Before installing the
Assistant, you must check that the installation requirements are met. The installation
requirements are as follows: The software package of the Assistant is available. The
configuration of the PC meets the requirement for the installation.
3.2 Checking the Integrity of the Software
To prevent the software package from being maliciously tampered with or damaged during
transfer, which may jeopardize the carrier network security, you must verify the integrity of
software packages after downloading them. Software packages can be deployed only after
their integrity is verified.
3.3 Installing the Assistant Main Program
This section describes how to install the main program of the Assistant, You can install the
main program of the Assistant by using an automatic installation wizard. The wizard guides
you through the installation of the Assistant.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 3 Installing the Assistant

3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Assistant


This section describes the preparations for installing the Assistant. Before installing the
Assistant, you must check that the installation requirements are met. The installation
requirements are as follows: The software package of the Assistant is available. The
configuration of the PC meets the requirement for the installation.

Hardware requirements
Table 3-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC.

Table 3-1 Hardware requirements


Hardware Recommended Minimum Configuration
Configuration

CPU Core I7(2.60GHz) or Core I5(2.60GHz)or above


above

Memory 8GB 4GB

Hard Disk 1TB 160GB

Monitor 1280 x 1024, 32-bit color 1024 x 768, 16-bit color

Miscellaneous DVD-ROM drive, USB DVD-ROM drive, USB port, and


port, and mouse/keyboard mouse/keyboard

NOTE

The memory required for running the Assistant is closely related to the PC operating system and amount of
data to be analyzed. The required hard disk space is directly related to the amount of data to be analyzed.

Software requirements
Table 3-2 lists the software requirements of the PC.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 3 Installing the Assistant

Table 3-2 Software requirements


Software How to Obtain Recommended Rema
Configuration rks

Operating system - Microsoft Windows 7 for 32 or Manda


(OS) 64. tory
Microsoft Windows 8 for 32 or
64.
Microsoft Windows 10 for 64.
NOTE
You are advised to install the
operating system in NTFS format.
The security-based NTFS file
system traces and monitors the
disk usage of each user.

Operating - Microsoft Office 2003, 2007 or Manda


software 2010. tory

Installation l Download the software The user must have an account Manda
package of the installation package in http://support.huawei.com. In tory
GENEX from http:// addition, the user is authorized
Assistant support.huawei.com. to download the GENEX
V300R018 The directory for Assistant V300R018 software
downloading the patch installation package or the user
package is Support > has purchased the GENEX
Product Support > Assistant V300R018.
Wireless Network >
FDD > LTE FDD
RAN > LTE FDD
Services > GENEX
Assistant > GENEX
Assistant V300R018.
l Installation DVD of
the GENEX Assistant
V300R018.

License Contact Huawei technical - Manda


support engineers to tory
obtain the license.

3.2 Checking the Integrity of the Software


To prevent the software package from being maliciously tampered with or damaged during
transfer, which may jeopardize the carrier network security, you must verify the integrity of
software packages after downloading them. Software packages can be deployed only after
their integrity is verified.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 3 Installing the Assistant

Prerequisites
Prepare the Assistant installation program and check whether the PC meets the hardware
requirements for installing the Assistant. For details, see 3.1 Preparations Before Installing
the Assistant.

Procedure
Step 1 Download the patch package, corresponding OpenPGP digital signature file, and OpenPGP
Signature Verification Guide.pdf from http://support.huawei.com.
l The directory for downloading the patch package is Support > Product Support >
Globle Service > Telecom Network Rollout & Integration Service > Mobile Network
Rollout & Integration Service > GENEX Assistant > GENEX Assistant V300R018.
l Click on the right of the software package name and download the corresponding
OpenPGP digital signature file.
l Click Digital Signature Authentication Mode in the upper right part of the software
package list to download OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide.pdf.

Step 2 For details about how to verify the software using the OpenPGP digital signature file, see
OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide.pdf.
NOTE

To prevent the software package from being maliciously tampered with or damaged during transfer,
which may jeopardize the carrier network security, you must verify the integrity of software packages
after downloading them. Software packages can be deployed only after their integrity is verified.
l If the verification is passed, install the software package. For detailed operations, see 3.3
Installing the Assistant Main Program.
l If the verification fails, the software package has security risks. In such case, download
the software package again.

----End

3.3 Installing the Assistant Main Program


This section describes how to install the main program of the Assistant, You can install the
main program of the Assistant by using an automatic installation wizard. The wizard guides
you through the installation of the Assistant.

Prerequisites
The main program of the Assistant is available, and the PC meets the conditions of installing
the main program of the Assistant. For details, see 3.1 Preparations Before Installing the
Assistant.

Context
l Before installing the main program of the Assistant, you are advised to close all the
running programs to ensure the successful installation of main Assistant program.
l Before installing the main program of the Assistant, you are advised to log in to the PC
as user administrator. Otherwise, installing the main program of the Assistant may fail
or the main program of the Assistant cannot be used.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 3 Installing the Assistant

l Before installing the Assistant software, you are advised not to change the name of
vcredist_x86_vs2008.exe in the installation package. otherwise, the installation of the
Assistant software may fail.

Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Assistant V300R018 installation package.

If... Then...

You have downloaded the software installation Decompress the downloaded


package from http://support.huawei.com. software installation package, and
then perform Step 2.

You have obtained the installation DVD-ROM of Perform Step 2.


the GENEX Assistant V300R018

Step 2 Double-click setup.exe to start the installation.

Step 3 Click Next.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license
agreement.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 Select the installation mode.


l Typical: refers to the default installation mode. If users have installed the Shared before,
directly install the Assistant and dependent components. If the Shared is not installed,
install all dependent components.
l Complete: refers to the mode that all Assistant components are installed.

Step 7 Click Browse to select the installation directory.

Step 8 Click Next.

Step 9 Click Install.

Step 10 After the installation, a dialog box is displayed, prompting you to install the Framework 4.6.1,
clickOK.
If DT data in .trp format needs to be analyzed, you are required to click Microsoft .NET
Framework 4.6.1 to download and install the software after the Assistant installation.

NOTE

The Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.1 is provided by Microsoft. The Assistant uses this software for
TEMS data analysis and does not provide the Framework package and subsequent maintenance and
upgrade services. Microsoft is liable for providing Framework security and risk information.

Step 11 Click Finish.

You are advised to restart the PC after the installation so that the font used by the Assistant is
displayed normally.

Step 12 Optional: Verify that the Assistant is installed successfully installed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 3 Installing the Assistant

Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Suite > Assistant V300R018 > GENEX Assistant
3.18 to check that the information about the Assistant is listed.

If... Then...

The information about the The main program of the Assistant is successfully
Assistant is listed installed.

The information about the Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 until the main
Assistant is not listed program of the Assistant is installed successfully.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 4 License Application Management

4 License Application Management

This section describes how to apply for a license and related precautions. When the Assistant
is restarted, whether a license is available is checked. If it is unavailable, the Assistant cannot
be used (only the replay function can be used). A license is used to limit the application scope
of the Assistant.

Applying for a License


The following methods of applying for a license is available:
l Login China Domain: authentication through a China domain account
l Login License Server: authentication through a server
l Offline Update: manual application in offline mode

NOTE

Login China Domain and Login License Server are used only in versions for internal delivery.
If you use iAccess to access the China domain network of Huawei and domain authentication fails for
multiple times, use another method, such as Login License Server.

Login China Domain


Connect the PC to the China domain network of Huawei. Enter related domain account
information. The license you have applied for is automatically saved on the local PC. The
default storage duration is 30 days.
Procedures for Applying for a License
1. Choose Tool > Update License. The Update Assistant License window is displayed.
2. Select Login China Domain. In the displayed Login China Domain dialog box, set
related parameters. For detailed parameters, see Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Login China Domain


Parameter Name Description

Username Indicates the China domain account name.

Password Indicates the password of the China


domain account.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 4 License Application Management

Parameter Name Description

Region Indicates a region. Select a value from the


drop-down list.

Rep.office Indicates a region where a representative


office is located. Select a value from the
drop-down list.

Operator Indicates an operator providing a network.


Select a value from the drop-down list.

Reason Indicates the reason for applying for a


license. English and Chinese characters
are supported.

3. Click OK. A message is displayed, indicating that a license is successfully updated.


The license validity period is 30 days by default. You can click License Info to view
detailed license information.

Login License Server


If the PC cannot connect to the China domain network of Huawei but can connect to the
Internet, you can apply for a license through server authentication. Enter related domain
account information. The license you have applied for is automatically saved on the local PC.
The default storage duration is 30 days.

Procedures for Applying for a License

1. Choose Tool > Update Assistant License. The Update Assistant License window is
displayed.
2. Select Login License Server. In the displayed Login License Server dialog box, set
related parameters. For detailed parameters, see Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Login License Server

Parameter Name Description

ESN Indicates the China domain account name.

E-mail Indicates the email address. Format:


user@host.domainnames.

Region Indicates a region. Select a value from the


drop-down list.

Rep.office Indicates a region where a representative


office is located. Select a value from the
drop-down list.

Operator Indicates an operator providing a network.


Select a value from the drop-down list.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 4 License Application Management

Parameter Name Description

Reason Indicates the reason for applying for a


license. English and Chinese characters
are supported.

3. Click OK. A message is displayed, indicating that a license is successfully updated.


The license validity period is 30 days by default. You can click License Info to view
detailed license information.

Offline Update
If the PC cannot connect to the China domain network of Huawei or the Internet, apply for a
license in offline mode.
Procedures for Applying for a License
1. Choose Tool > View ESN on the menu bar to obtain the ESN.
Send the obtained ESN to Huawei technical support to obtain a new license file.
2. Choose Tool > Update license > License File. The Open window is displayed.
3. Select a license file.
4. Click OK. A message is displayed, indicating that a license is successfully updated.
Click License Info to view detailed license information.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 5 Starting the Assistant

5 Starting the Assistant

The startup of the Assistant provides entries to the operations of the Assistant. After the
Assistant starts, data analysis can be performed.

Prerequisites
l The main program of the Assistant is already installed. For details, see 3.3 Installing the
Assistant Main Program.
l The license file is obtained..

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the shortcut icon of the Assistant on the desktop to start the Assistant.
Alternatively, you can start the Assistant through the Start menu or by double-clicking
Software installation path/Bin/Assistant.exe.
Step 2 If License Info window occurs, hints Failed to get license file or license file is not correct,
you must click Update to obtain the License so that you can use the relevant functions
authorized by the license. For details about how to obtain the license, see 4 License
Application Management.
Alternatively, you can send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new
license. Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days.
Step 3 After the Assistant starts successfully, you can create a project or open the created project for
subsequent operations.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

About This Chapter

This section describes how to manually create analysis tasks.


6.1 Creating a Project
This section describes how to create a project. All the operations of the Assistant are
performed on the basis of projects. A project consists of all the information required for data
analysis, such as information about engineering parameters, maps, themes, and DT Logfiles.
Therefore, you need to create a project or open a saved project before the data analysis.
6.2 Configuring an Analysis Task
This section describes how to configure an analysis task before using the Assistant to analyze
drive test (DT) logfiles. To configure an analysis task, you need to set theme templates, KPI
templates, IE templates, and conditions for filtering the DT logfiles.
6.3 Importing Engineering Parameters and Neighboring Cell Data
The project data consists of the engineering parameters and neighboring cell data. The
engineering parameters describe the information about the cell, and the neighboring cell data
describes the relationships between neighboring cells. You can import project data based on
requirements so that the test data can be analyzed on the basis of the cell information.
6.4 Importing Map Data
A map consists of a series of geographic elements. It can be classified into the MapInfo map
and raster map. The map information is displayed in the map view window on the Assistant
for test data analysis. The map information includes the test area map, test routes, events, and
engineering parameters.
6.5 Importing DT Log Files
This section describes how to import DT log files into the Assistant. The Assistant can
analyze the DT log files of multiple devices, including the GENEX Probe, GENEX PHU
terminal, scanner, and TEMS. The recommended size of imported data does not exceed 2 GB.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

6.1 Creating a Project


This section describes how to create a project. All the operations of the Assistant are
performed on the basis of projects. A project consists of all the information required for data
analysis, such as information about engineering parameters, maps, themes, and DT Logfiles.
Therefore, you need to create a project or open a saved project before the data analysis.

Context
NOTE

If you use the software of the new version to open or reallocate a project created using the old version,
the analysis result may be different between old and new versions.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Project > New Project on the menu bar, or click . The New Project dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 New Project dialog box

l Type the project name in Project Name.

NOTICE
A project cannot be named as CON, AUX, PRN, NUL, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7,
LPT8, or LPT9.

l Specify the path for saving the project in Save Path.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

l Select an analysis task template in Template.


l Logfile Type supports GEN, ROMES, CU and TRP file formats.
Step 2 Click OK.
NOTE

If a dialog box occurs and hints Failed to create project. Please install NDP461-DevPack-
KB3105179-ENU.exe, Click Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.1 to download and install the software
and retry.

Step 3 Perform the following operations to configure a project.


1. Click Manage. The System Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.
For details about how to set in the System Setting dialog box, see 19.8 Interface
Description: Setting the Analysis Task Template.

Figure 6-2 System Setting dialog box

2. On the KPI and IE tab pages, select KPIs and IEs to be analyzed.
For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
3. On the Report tab page, select the properties of report.
For details, see 6.2.2 Setting Report Attributes.
NOTE
Reporting for TEMS data is not supported.
4. On the Theme tab page, select themes to be analyzed.
For details, see 6.2.3 Setting the Theme Analysis Type.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

NOTE

– Theme analysis for TEMS data is not supported.


– If you need to perform air interface correlation during VoLTE theme analysis, set the
parameters related to Coverage, Handover, and InterFerence under the LTE node.
5. On the Filter tab page, select the conditions of filtering DT Logfiles.

For details, see 6.2.5 Setting Conditions for Filtering DT Logfiles.


6. On the CDF Statistics tab page, set the CDF percentage.

For details, see 6.2.4 Setting CDF Statistics.


7. On the Binning tab page, select the binning algorithm.

For details, see 6.2.6 Setting the Binning Mode.


8. On the Sites Display tab page, select the display properties of base stations.

For details, see 6.2.7 Setting Site Display Properties.


9. On the Others tab page, select Other attributes.

For details, see 6.2.8 Setting Other Attributes.


10. Click OK.
NOTE

After a project is created, you can modify the properties of the selected analysis task template, but
cannot perform the following operations: adding a new template; deleting or renaming the selected
analysis task template.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Select Project > Save Project to save a project.

----End

6.2 Configuring an Analysis Task


This section describes how to configure an analysis task before using the Assistant to analyze
drive test (DT) logfiles. To configure an analysis task, you need to set theme templates, KPI
templates, IE templates, and conditions for filtering the DT logfiles.

6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template


This section describes how to set the key performance indicator (KPI) template and
information element (IE) template. After the KPI template and IE template are set, the
analysis of drive test (DT) data will be more effective.

Context
One project contains one KPI template and one IE template. All analysis groups of a project
analyze DT data according to the template.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

NOTE

If you want to modify the KPI template and IE template after a project is created, choose Project >
Project Setting. After the Project Setting dialog box is displayed, proceed to the following steps:

Step 2 Click the KPI tab and set the KPI template, as shown in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 KPI tab page

1. Select a KPI to be analyzed in the KPI list in the left pane.


2. Set the KPI alarm threshold in the Alarm Threshold Setting area.
NOTE

After the data is analyzed, the KPI is marked in red if the KPI value exceeds the alarm threshold.
3. If the quick analysis mode is used, select whether to perform event judgment during KPI
analysis in the Event Analysis Mode area.
– Normal: indicates that event judgment is performed again during analysis.
The default value is Normal.
– Not Rejudge: indicates that the event judgment is not performed again during
analysis. The event information recorded by Probe can be obtained directly.
Step 3 Click the IE tab and set the IE template, as shown in Figure 6-4.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Figure 6-4 IE tab page

1. Select an IE to be analyzed in the IE list in the left pane.


2. In the CrossingTable Enable area, select whether to use the cross table report for the
HSDPA data.
The cross table describes the relationships between different indicators for HSDPA data.
– Yes: indicates that the cross table function is enabled.
– No: indicates that the cross table function is disabled.
The default value is No.
Step 4 Click OK.

----End

6.2.2 Setting Report Attributes


This section describes how to set the report template and report displaying attributes,
including the report generating method.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

To modify the Report attributes for an existing project, choose Project > Project Setting. In the
displayed Project Setting dialog box, perform subsequent operations.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Step 2 Click the Report tab page and set the following parameters:
l In the report template selection area, set the report template. For detailed operations,
seeTable 19-8.
NOTE
Only the selected report templates can be exported. Unselected report templates are not displayed
on the GUI or cannot be selected for export.
l Report composite show: indicates whether to combine multiple reports into one Word
reports.
l Map legend composite show: indicates whether to display both the legend and map on
one picture.
l Grid show: indicates whether to display the grid.
l Indoor min PCI: indicates the minimum PCI in indoor reports.
l Indoor max PCI: indicates the maximum PCI in indoor reports.
l RSRP Difference Value: indicates the difference between RSRP values.
l CPU Counter: indicates the number of CPUs. The maximum value is the value obtained
by subtracting 1 from the number of CPUs of a PC.
l Power-off Protection: when Power-off Protection is set to Yes, power-off protection is
enabled and data is saved in real time during analysis. However, performance is affected.

Step 3 After the setting is complete, click OK.

----End

6.2.3 Setting the Theme Analysis Type


This section describes how to set the theme analysis type. The setting of the theme analysis
type helps you to analyze network problems. After the corresponding theme analysis is
performed, you can view problem cells on the map, therefore facilitating problem location.

Context
The Assistant provides various theme analysis types, as shown in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Theme analysis types

Theme Theme Description


Analysis Analysis Type

GSM RF over The RF over coverage results in improper handover


coverage coverage (handover to an improper target cell), frequency
analysis interference, and signal island problems. The Assistant
can identify over-coverage cells, therefore providing
reference for the network planning engineers.

RF poor A poor-coverage cell has the following feature: a large


coverage number of low-level signal points exist. The Assistant can
identify poor-coverage cells, therefore providing reference
for the network planning engineers.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Theme Theme Description


Analysis Analysis Type

RF no serving If no serving cell dominance is available, the signals are


cell dominance garbled in a coverage area. In such an area, the level
values of the serving cell and its neighboring cells have
little differences. Therefore, cell reselection and
handovers occur frequently, and the network quality is
poor. The Assistant can identify RF no serving cell
dominance, therefore providing reference for the network
planning engineers.

RF azimuth The antenna polarities are connected reversely. Therefore,


garbled a large number of serving cells are in the non-major-lobe
direction. The Assistant can determine the antenna
azimuth that may be garbled, therefore providing
reference for the network planning engineers.

GSM Poor coverage A poor-coverage cell usually has a large number of low-
Coverage level signal points. The Assistant can identify poor-
analysis coverage cells for reference by network planning
engineers.

GSM Frequent Frequent handovers affect service quality of users and


Handover handovers may easily cause call drops. The Assistant can identify
analysis cells where handovers occur frequently for reference by
network planning engineers.

GSM Interference If Interference is available, the signals are garbled in a


Interferen coverage area. The Assistant can identify cells where
ce interference occur frequently for reference by network
analysis planning engineers.

WCDMA RF over The RF over coverage results in improper handover


coverage coverage (handover to an improper target cell), frequency
analysis interference, and signal island problems. The Assistant
can identify over-coverage cells, therefore providing
reference for the network planning engineers.

RF no serving If no serving cell dominance is available, the signals are


cell dominance garbled in a coverage area. In such an area, the level
values of the serving cell and its neighboring cells have
little differences. Therefore, cell reselection and
handovers occur frequently, and the network quality is
poor. The Assistant can identify RF no serving cell
dominance, therefore providing reference for the network
planning engineers.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Theme Theme Description


Analysis Analysis Type

WCDMA Pilot pollution Pilot pollution results in little difference between the
pilot RSCP of the serving cell and the RSCP of other cells. As
pollution a result, cell reselection and handovers occur frequently.
analysis After the DT data is analyzed, the Assistant can
automatically calculate the RSCP mapping between the
serving cell and a neighboring cell so that you can check
whether signals are garbled in the area where the DT point
is located.

WCDMA Downlink Downlink interference results in interference signals


downlink interference received by UEs. As a result, normal signals of a NodeB
interferen cannot be identified, and therefore the communication
ce between a UE and a NodeB is interrupted. As a result, call
analysis drops occur and channel allocation fails. In this case, the
Assistant can identify the cells where downlink
interference problems occur, therefore providing reference
for the network planning engineers.

WCDMA Missing Missing neighboring cells result in call drops. The


missing neighboring cells Assistant can determine the neighboring cells of the
neighbori serving cell of a DT point, compare the determined result
ng cell with the imported neighboring cell data to filter out
analysis missing neighboring cells, therefore providing reference
for network planning engineers.

WCDMA Poor coverage A poor-coverage cell usually has a large number of low-
Coverage level signal points. The Assistant can identify poor-
analysis coverage cells for reference by network planning
engineers.

No serving cell No serving cell dominance can result in garbled signals in


dominance a coverage area. In such an area, the level values of the
serving cell and its neighboring cells have little
differences. Therefore, cell handovers and reselection
occur frequently, and the network quality is poor. The
Assistant can identify cells with no primary serving cells
for reference by network planning engineers.

Over coverage Overshoot coverage can result in abnormal coverage in an


area. In such an area, the probability of generating
interference increases and problems, such as isolated
island cells, may occur. The Assistant can identify
overshoot coverage cells for reference by network
planning engineers.

Limited uplink Limited uplink quality can result in problems, such as


quality uplink quality deterioration and communication quality
deterioration. The Assistant can identify cells with limited
uplink quality for reference by network planning
engineers.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Theme Theme Description


Analysis Analysis Type

Wrong coverage Wrong coverage can result in the difference between the
coverage area of a cell and the planned coverage area,
greatly affecting network performance. The Assistant can
identify cells where wrong coverage occur frequently for
reference by network planning engineers.

WCDMA Frequent Frequent handovers affect service quality of users and


Handover handovers may easily cause call drops. The Assistant can identify
analysis cells where handovers occur frequently for reference by
network planning engineers.

Handover delay Handover delay can result in coverage or quality problems


in an area, affecting service quality of users or causing
call drops in severe situations. The Assistant can identify
cells where handover delay occur frequently for reference
by network planning engineers.

High proportion If the proportion of soft handovers is high, network


of soft HO interference is caused. This affects service quality of users
and reduces network capacity. The Assistant can identify
the cells with a high proportion of soft handovers and
provide reference for network planning engineers.

WCDMA Interference If Interference is available, the signals are garbled in a


Interferen coverage area. The Assistant can identify cells where
ce interference occur frequently for reference by network
analysis planning engineers.

WCDMA Throughput The Assistant can identify cells where throughput occur
Throughp frequently for reference by network planning engineers.
ut analysis

WCDMA Abnormal Event The Assistant can identify cells where abnormal event
Abnormal occur frequently for reference by network planning
Event engineers.
analysis

WCDMA PSC The Assistant can identify cells where PSC interference
PSC Optimization occur frequently for reference by network planning
Optimizat engineers.
ion

LTE RF RF over The RF over coverage results in improper handover


analysis coverage (handover to an improper target cell), frequency
interference, and signal island problems. The Assistant
can identify over-coverage cells, therefore providing
reference for the network planning engineers.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Theme Theme Description


Analysis Analysis Type

RF no serving If no serving cell dominance is available, the signals are


cell dominance garbled in a coverage area. In such an area, the level
values of the serving cell and its neighboring cells have
little differences. Therefore, cell reselection and
handovers occur frequently, and the network quality is
poor. The Assistant can identify RF no serving cell
dominance, therefore providing reference for the network
planning engineers.

Azimuth Garbled The reverse connection of the antenna feeder makes the
coverage area of a cell different from the planned
coverage area and therefore greatly degrades network
performance. The Assistant can locate the reverse
connection of the antenna feeder quickly based on the
azimuth.

LTE Poor coverage A poor-coverage cell usually has a large number of low-
Coverage level signal points. The Assistant can identify poor-
analysis coverage cells for reference by network planning
engineers.

No serving cell No serving cell dominance can result in garbled signals in


dominance a coverage area. In such an area, the level values of the
serving cell and its neighboring cells have little
differences. Therefore, cell handovers and reselection
occur frequently, and the network quality is poor. The
Assistant can identify cells with no primary serving cells
for reference by network planning engineers.

Over coverage Overshoot coverage can result in improper handover


relationships, frequency interference, and signal island
problems. The Assistant can identify overshoot coverage
cells for reference by network planning engineers.

Limited uplink Limited uplink quality can result in problems, such as


quality uplink quality deterioration and communication quality
deterioration. The Assistant can identify cells with limited
uplink quality for reference by network planning
engineers.

Wrong coverage The wrong coverage makes the coverage area of a cell
different from the planned coverage area and therefore
greatly degrades network performance. The Assistant can
identify cells where wrong coverage occur frequently for
reference by network planning engineers.

Overlay Overlay can result in garbled signals in a coverage area.


The Assistant can identify cells where Overlay occur
frequently for reference by network planning engineers.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Theme Theme Description


Analysis Analysis Type

Inter Nb Missing neighboring cells result in call drops. The


Analysis Assistant can determine the neighboring cells of the
serving cell of a DT point, compare the determined result
with the imported neighboring cell data to filter out
missing neighboring cells, therefore providing reference
for network planning engineers.

LTE Frequent Frequent handovers occur in a cell, and the network


Handover handovers quality is poor. The Assistant can identify cells where
analysis handovers occur frequently for reference by network
planning engineers.

Handover delay Handover delay occur in a cell, and the network quality is
poor. The Assistant can identify cells where handover
delay occur frequently for reference by network planning
engineers.

LTE Interference If Interference is available, the signals are garbled in a


Interferen coverage area. The Assistant can identify cells where
ce interference occur frequently for reference by network
analysis planning engineers.

LTE Abnormal Event The Assistant can identify cells where abnormal event
Abnormal occur frequently for reference by network planning
Event engineers.
analysis

LTE Throughput The Assistant can identify cells where throughput occur
Throughp frequently for reference by network planning engineers.
ut analysis

TD- RF over The RF over coverage results in improper handover


SCDMA coverage (handover to an improper target cell), frequency
coverage interference, and signal island problems. The Assistant
analysis can identify over-coverage cells, therefore providing
reference for the network planning engineers.

TD- Missing Missing neighboring cells result in call drops. The


SCDMA neighboring cells Assistant can determine the neighboring cells of the
missing serving cell of a DT point, compare the determined result
neighbori with the imported neighboring cell data to filter out
ng cell missing neighboring cells, therefore providing reference
analysis for network planning engineers.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

If you want to modify the theme analysis type after a project is created, choose Project > Project
Setting to open the Project Setting dialog box.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Step 2 Click the Theme tab to set the theme analysis type.

If You Need To... Then...

Set the GSM analysis type Perform Step 3 only.

Set the WCDMA analysis type Perform Step 4 only.

Set the LTE analysis type Perform Step 5 only.

Set the TD-SCDMA analysis type Perform Step 6 only.

NOTE

You can select the themes as required so that analysis efficiency is improved.

Step 3 Set the GSM analysis type.


1. Select the theme type to be analyzed under the GSM node in the Theme List area.
2. Click the theme type to be analyzed in the Theme List area, and then set the parameters
of the corresponding theme analysis type in the Property area.
For details, see 19.12 Parameters for Setting GSM Theme Analysis Types.
3. Click OK or press Enter.
4. Click Yes or press Enter to save the modification.
NOTE
If you do not need to save the modification, click No.

Step 4 Set the WCDMA analysis type.


1. Select the theme type to be analyzed under the WCDMA node in the Theme List area.
2. Click the theme type to be analyzed in the Theme List area, and then set the parameters
of the corresponding theme analysis type in the Property area.
For details, see 19.13 Parameters for Setting the WCDMA Analysis Type.
3. Click OK or press Enter.
4. Click Yes or press Enter to save the modification.
NOTE
If you do not need to save the modification, click No.

Step 5 Set the LTE analysis type.


1. Select the theme type to be analyzed under the LTE node in the Theme List area.
2. Click the theme type to be analyzed in the Theme List area, and then set the parameters
of the corresponding theme analysis type in the Property area.
For details, see 19.14 Parameters for Setting LTE Theme Analysis Types.
3. Click OK or press Enter.
4. Click Yes or press Enter to save the modification.
NOTE
If you do not need to save the modification, click No.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Step 6 Set the TD-SCDMA analysis type.


1. Select the theme type to be analyzed under the TD-SCDMA node in the Theme List
area.
2. Click the theme type to be analyzed in the Theme List area, and then set the parameters
of the corresponding theme analysis type in the Property area.
For details, see 19.16 Parameters for Setting the TD-SCDMA Analysis Type.
3. Click OK or press Enter.
4. Click Yes or press Enter to save the modification.
NOTE
If you do not need to save the modification, click No.

----End

6.2.4 Setting CDF Statistics


This section describes how to set CDF statistics. After CDF statistics is set, the Assistant
helps you analyze the causes of network problems.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

To modify the theme analysis type for an existing project, choose Project > Project Setting. In the
displayed Project Setting dialog box, perform subsequent operations.

Step 2 Click the CDF Statistics tab and set the CDF percentage.
The default value is 5.

----End

6.2.5 Setting Conditions for Filtering DT Logfiles


This section describes how to set conditions for filtering drive test (DT) logfiles. The system
obtains useful information according to the preset filtering conditions, which helps to improve
the efficiency of data import and analysis.

Context
The Assistant supports following methods for filtering DT logfiles:
l By IE
Filtering data by the IE values recorded in DT logfiles.
l By time
Filtering data by the time information recorded in DT logfiles.
l By combination of IE and time
Filtering data by both the IE values and time information recorded in DT logfiles.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

NOTE

If you want to modify the site display properties for a created project, choose Project > Project Setting.
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Filter.

If you want to... Then...

Filter DT logfiles by IE Perform Step 3 only.

Filter DT logfiles by time Perform Step 4 only.

Filter DT logfiles by combination of IE and time Perform Step 5 only.

Step 3 Filter DT logfiles by IE.


1. Click Add on the right side of the IE filter condition area.
2. In the AIE Condition dialog box, select an IE name and a condition for filtering DT
logfiles.
a. Select an IE from the left drop-down list, select the operator from the middle drop-
down list, and then enter the values in the right text box, as shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 IE Condition dialog box

b. Click OK.
The system adds the preset filtering condition to the IE filter condition area.

NOTICE
After the setting is complete, the system analyzes only the data meeting the preset
filtering condition.

3. Select a proper logical operator in Logical Operator.


4. Optional: Perform Step 3.1 and Step 3.2 to add multiple conditions for filtering DT
logfiles.
– Click Delete to delete the selected IE-based filtering conditions.
– Click Clear to clear IE-based filtering conditions.
5. Click OK.

Step 4 Filter DT logfiles by time.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

1. Click Add on the right side of the Time filter condition area. The Add Time Condition
Item dialog box is displayed.
Set the start time in Start Time and set the end time in End Time.
NOTE

The start time must be earlier than the end time.


2. Click OK.
The system adds the preset filtering condition to the Time filter condition area.
– Add multiple time-based filtering conditions to the Time filter condition area.
– Click Delete to delete the selected time-based filtering conditions.
– Click Clear to clear time-based filtering conditions.
3. Click OK.
Step 5 Filter DT logfiles by combination of IE and time.
1. Perform Step 3 to set IE-based filtering conditions.
2. Perform Step 4 to set time-based filtering conditions.
3. Click OK.

----End

6.2.6 Setting the Binning Mode


The binning refers to the mode for combining multiple DT points that meet certain conditions
into one DT point according to the specified statistical rules such as distance, time and grid.
After the data binning is performed, DT data is present on IE view windows according to the
statistical rules of the binning.

Context
The Assistant uses different binning modes to retrieve DT data for meeting different
requirements of customers.
The binning mode affects the theme analysis and the display of IEs on a map, in a chart, or in
an Excel worksheet, but does not affect the analysis of messages and events.
Data binning can be performed by distance, time, or grid.
l By time
Data is collected by time. That is, all DT points within a certain period are combined into
a DT point.
l By distance
Data is collected by distance. That is, all DT points within a certain distance are
combined into a DT point.
l By grid
The longitude and latitude divide the surface area of the Earth into multiple grids. The
data of all DT points within a certain grid is collected as a DT point.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The Template Setting dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

NOTE

If you want to set binning after a project is created, choose Project > Project Setting to open the
Project Setting dialog box.

Step 2 Click the Binning tab.

Step 3 Select a binning mode from the Binning Type drop-down list.

If ... Then perform ...

By distance 1. Select Distance Binning from the Binning Type drop-down list.
2. Set the value of Binning Param Distance(m).
The value of Binning Param Distance(m) ranges from 0.01 to 1,000. The
default value is 5 and the unit is meter (m).

By time 1. Select Time Binning from the Binning Type drop-down list.
2. Set the value of Binning Param Time Span(s).
The value of Binning Param Time Span(s) ranges from 0.01 to 1,000.
The default value is 1 and the unit is meter (m).

By grid 1. Select Binning Type from the Location Binning drop-down list.
2. Set Binning Param Height(m) and Binning Param Width(m).
The value of Binning Param Height(m) ranges from 2 to 1000. The
default value is 5 and the unit is meter (m). The value of Binning Param
Width(m) ranges from 2 to 1000. The default value is 5 and the unit is
meter (m).

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Example
The following examples show the presentation of data on a map in case of different binning
modes are used.
l Figure 6-6 shows the presentation of data a map in case that no binning mode is used.

Figure 6-6 Example: no binning

l Figure 6-7 shows the presentation of data on a map in case that the distance binning is
used and Binning Param Distance(m) is set to 20.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Figure 6-7 Example: distance binning (distance: 20 m)

l Figure 6-8 shows the presentation of data on a map in case that the time binning is used
and Binning Param Time Span(s) is set to 10.

Figure 6-8 Example: time binning (time: 10s)

l Figure 6-9 shows the presentation of data on a map in case that the grid binning is used
with a grid of 10 m x 10 m.

Figure 6-9 Example: grid binning (grid: 10 m x 10 m)

6.2.7 Setting Site Display Properties


This section describes how to set the site display properties such as shape, color, size, and
labeling on a map.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The Template Setting dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

NOTE

If you want to modify the site display properties for a created project, choose Project > Project Setting.
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click Sites Display, as shown in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10 Sites Display tab

Step 3 In the Layer List area, select a layer where the site display properties are to be set.

Step 4 In the Property area, set related parameters.


For details, see 19.17 Parameters for Setting Display Properties of Sites.
Step 5 Click OK.
NOTE

The site properties will automatically apply to site layers on maps in the Map window and report maps.

----End

6.2.8 Setting Other Attributes


This section describes how to set Other attributes, including CPU Count and power-off
protection.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

NOTE

To modify Other attributes for an existing project, choose Project > Project Setting. In the displayed
Project Setting dialog box, perform subsequent operations.

Step 2 Click the Others tab sheet and set the CPU and power-off protection. For details about the
parameters, see Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Others attribute setting


Parameter description

CPU Setting area CPU Count Indicates the number of


CPUs. The values are as
follows:
l 1
l 2
l 3
The default value is 2.
NOTE
The maximum value is the
value obtained by subtracting
1 from the number of CPUs of
a PC.

Power-off Protection Power-off Protection The values are as follows:


Setting area l Yes
l No
The default value is No.
NOTE
when Power-off Protection is
set to Yes, power-off
protection is enabled and data
is saved in real time during
analysis. However,
performance is affected.

Step 3 After the setting is complete, click OK.

----End

6.3 Importing Engineering Parameters and Neighboring


Cell Data
The project data consists of the engineering parameters and neighboring cell data. The
engineering parameters describe the information about the cell, and the neighboring cell data
describes the relationships between neighboring cells. You can import project data based on
requirements so that the test data can be analyzed on the basis of the cell information.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

6.3.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network


Systems
This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported
in different network system, such as GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA, and LTE. You
can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters of different
network protocol.

NOTE
If you use NB-IoT terminal to execute the test, please refer to the LTE engineering parameters.

l For details about GSM engineering parameters, see Descriptions of GSM Engineering
Parameters.
l For details about WCDMA engineering parameters, see Descriptions of WCDMA
Engineering Parameters.
l For details about CDMA engineering parameters, see CDMA Engineering Parameters.
l For details on LTE engineering parameters, see LTE Engineering Parameters.
l For details about TD-SCDMA engineering parameters, see TD-SCDMA Engineering
Parameters.

Descriptions of GSM Engineering Parameters


Paramete Mandat Description Value
r ory
(Yes/No
)

Indicates the antenna Data type: integer; value range: 0


Azimuth Yes azimuth (degree). to 360, excluding 360.

Indicates the cell identity Data type: integer; value range: 0


CI Yes (CI). to 65535.

Indicates the broadcast Data type: integer; value range: 0


BCCH Yes control channel number. to 1023.

Indicates the longitude Data type: double; value range:


Longitude Yes (degree). -180.0 to 180.0.

Indicates the Latitude Data type: double; value range:


Latitude Yes (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.

Indicates the ID of a base


BTS ID Yes transceiver station. Data type: integer.

Indicates the name of a BTS.


It is the unique identity of a
Site Name Yes site. Data type: character string.

Cell Name No Indicates the name of a cell. Data type: character string.

Indicates the cell global


CGI No identity (CGI). Data type: integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Paramete Mandat Description Value


r ory
(Yes/No
)

Indicates the location area Data type: integer; value range: 0


LAC Yes code (LAC). to 65535.

Indicates the traffic channel


TCH No (TCH) list. Data type: character string.

Indicates the base station


identity code (BSIC), which
is composed of the network
color code (NCC) and base
BSIC No station color code (BCC). Data type: integer.

Indicates the antenna height Data type: float; value range: 0 to


Height No relative to the ground. 65535.

Mechanica Indicates the mechanical Data type: float; value range:


l Downtilt No down tilt (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.

Electrical Indicates the electric down Data type: float; value range:
Downtilt No tilt (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.

Indicates the site altitude in Data type: float; value range: 0 to


Altitude No most cases. 65535.

Indicates whether the general


GPRS packet radio service (GPRS) Data type: character string; value
Support No is supported. range: Yes or No.

Polarizatio Indicates the polarization


n No mode. Data type: character string.

Antenna
Gain No Indicates the antenna gain. Data type: float.

Frequency Indicates the GSM frequency


Band No band name. Data type: character string.

Indicates whether the


enhanced data rates for GSM
EDGE evolution (EDGE) are Data type: character string; value
Support No supported. range: Yes or No.

Hopping Indicates the frequency


Mode No hopping (FH) mode. Data type: character string.

Site Type No Indicates the site type. Data type: character string.

Indicates the city where a site


City No is located. Data type: character string.

Indicates the region where a


Region No site is located. Data type: character string.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Paramete Mandat Description Value


r ory
(Yes/No
)

BTS Type No Indicates the type of a BTS. Data type: character string.

Antenna No Indicates the antenna type. Data type: character string.

BSC Indicates the name of a base


Name No station controller (BSC). Data type: character string.

Project
Phase No Indicates the project phase. Data type: character string.

Indicates the routing area


RAC No code (RAC). Data type: integer.

Indicates the mobile


MA No allocation (MA). Data type: character string.

TMA Indicates the type of a tower


Type No mounted amplifier (TMA). Data type: character string.

TMA Gain No Indicates the TMA gain. Data type: float.

H-
Beamwidt Indicates the horizontal
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.

V-
Beamwidt Indicates the vertical
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.

Cell Type No Indicates the type of a cell. Data type: character string.

Cell Indicates the cell radius


Radius No (meter). Data type: float.

Data type: character string; value


Active No Indicates the active state. range: Yes or No.

Data type: character string; value


Scene No Indicates outdoor/indoor. range: Outdoor or Indoor.

Indicates the Neighbor Cell


cell ID, the range of N is 1 to Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
NCellN No 32. 65535.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Descriptions of WCDMA Engineering Parameters


Paramete Mandat Description Value
r ory
(Yes/No
)

Data type: integer; value range: 0


CI Yes Indicates the ID of a cell. to 65535.

Data type: integer; value range: 0


RAC No Indicates the RAC. to 65535.

Indicates the location area Data type: integer; value range: 0


LAC No code (LAC). to 65535.

Indicates the downlink


UTRA absolute radio
frequency channel number Data type: integer; value range: 0
ARFCN Yes (UARFCN). to 65535.

Indicates the primary Data type: integer; value range: 0


PSC Yes scrambling code of a cell. to 511.

Indicates the azimuth Data type: integer; value range: 0


Azimuth Yes (degree). to 360, excluding 360.

Indicates the longitude Data type: double; value range:


Longitude Yes (degree). -180.0 to 180.0.

Indicates the Latitude Data type: double; value range:


Latitude Yes (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.

Data type: integer; value range: 0


RNC ID No Indicates the ID of a RNC. to 4095.

Data type: integer; value range: 0


NodeB ID Yes Indicates the ID of a NodeB. to 65535.

NodeB Indicates the name of a


Name Yes NodeB. Data type: character string.

NodeB Indicates the type of a


Type No NodeB. Data type: character string.

Sector ID No Indicates the ID of a sector. Data type: integer.

Cell Name No Indicates the name of a cell. Data type: character string.

Indicates the total down tilt Data type: float; value range:
DownTilt No (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.

Electrical Indicates the electric down Data type: float; value range:
Downtilt No tilt (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.

Mechanica Indicates the mechanical Data type: float; value range:


l Downtilt No down tilt (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Paramete Mandat Description Value


r ory
(Yes/No
)

Indicates the antenna height Data type: float; value range: 0 to


Height No relative to the ground. 65535.

Altitude No Indicates the site altitude. Data type: float.

Antenna No Indicates the antenna model. Data type: character string.

Antenna
Gain No Indicates the antenna gain. Data type: float.

H-
Beamwidt Indicates the horizontal
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.

V-
Beamwidt Indicates the vertical
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.

Feeder
Type No Indicates the feeder type. Data type: character string.

Feeder
Length(D Indicates the downlink feeder
L) No length. Data type: float.

Indicates the channel element


NodeBCE No of a NodeB. Data type: integer.

Cell Type No Indicates the cell type. Data type: character string.

Cell Indicates the cell radius


Radius No (meter). Data type: float.

Data type: character string; value


Active No Indicates the active state. range: Yes or No.

Data type: character string; value


Scene No Indicates outdoor/indoor. range: Outdoor or Indoor.

TMA No Indicates the TMA device. Data type: character string.

CDMA Engineering Parameters


Field Description Value Mandat
ory
(Yes/No
)

PN Pseudo-random number Data type: integer. Range: 0 to Yes


511.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Field Description Value Mandat


ory
(Yes/No
)

Longitude Longitude Data type: double. Range: -180.0 Yes


to 180.0.

Latitude Latitude Data type: double. Range: -90.0 Yes


to 90.0.

Azimuth Azimuth (degree) Data type: integer. Range: 0 to Yes


360.

Cell ID Cell ID Data type: integer. Yes

ARFCN Frequency number Data type: integer. Yes

Sector ID Sector ID Data type: integer. Yes

DownTilt Downtilt (degree) Data type: integer. Range: 0 to No


90.

Site ID Site ID Data type: integer. No

Site Name Site name Data type: character string. No

Carrier ID Carrier ID Data type: integer. No

SID System ID Data type: integer. No

NID Network ID Data type: integer. No

Antenna Antenna height (m) Data type: integer. No


Height

BeamWidt Angle of the horizontal lobe Data type: integer. Range: 0 to No


h (degree) 90.

Area Area Data type: character string. No

LTE Engineering Parameters


Field Mandato Description Value
ry
(Yes/No)

eNodeB Yes Indicates the ID of an Data type: integer. Range: 0 to


ID eNodeB. 1048575.

eNodeB Yes Indicates the name of an Data type: character string.


Name eNodeB.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Field Mandato Description Value


ry
(Yes/No)

Sector ID Yes Indicates the sector device Data type: integer.


ID for a cell. It uniquely
specifies a sector device
under an eNodeB.

Local Cell Yes Indicates the internal code of Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
ID a cell for differentiating the 255.
cell from other cells under
the same eNodeB.

Cell ID Yes Indicates the ID of a cell. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to


255.

DLEARF Yes Indicates the downlink Data type: integer. Range: 0 to


CN frequency. 262143.

PCI Yes Indicates the ID of the Data type: integer. Range: 0 to


primary cell 503.

Longitude Yes Indicates the longitude Data type: double. Range:


(degree). -180.0 to 180.0.

Latitude Yes Indicates the Latitude Data type: double. Range: -90.0
(degree). to 90.0.

Azimuth Yes Indicates the azimuth Data type: integer. Range: 0 to


(degree). 360, excluding 360.

eNodeB No Indicates the type of an Data type: character string.


Type eNodeB.

Cell Name Yes Indicates the name of a Cell. Data type: character string.

DownTilt No Indicates the total down tilt Data type: float. Range: -90.0 to
(degree). 90.0.

Electrical No Indicates the electric down Data type: float. Range: -90.0 to
Downtilt tilt (degree). 90.0.

Mechanica No Indicates the mechanical Data type: float. Range: -90.0 to


l Downtilt down tilt (degree). 90.0.

Height No Indicates the antenna height Data type: float.


relative to the ground.

Altitude No Indicates the site altitude. Data type: float.

Antenna No Indicates the antenna model. Data type: character string.

Antenna No Data type: float.


Gain Indicates the antenna gain.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Field Mandato Description Value


ry
(Yes/No)

H- No Data type: float.


Beamwidt Indicates the horizontal
h beamwidth.

V- No Data type: float.


Beamwidt Indicates the vertical
h beamwidth.

Feeder No Indicates the Feeder type. Data type: character string.


Type

Feeder No Indicates the downlink Data type: float.


Length(D feeder length.
L)

Active No Indicates the active state. Data type: character string;


value range: Yes or No.

Scene No Indicates outdoor/indoor. Data type: character string;


value range: Outdoor or Indoor.

TMA No Indicates the TMA device. Data type: character string.

TAC No Indicates the tracking Area Data type: integer. Range: 0 to


Code. 65535.

TD-SCDMA Engineering Parameters


Field Description Value Mandato
ry
(Yes/No)

CellID Cell ID Data type: integer. Range: 0 to Yes


65535.

UARFCN Carrier ARFCN Data type: integer. Range: 0 to Yes


65535.

CPID Cell parameter ID Data type: integer. Range: 0 to Yes


127.

Azimuth Azimuth (degree) Data type: integer. Range: 0 to Yes


360.

Longitude Longitude Data type: double. Range: Yes


-180.0 to 180.0.

Latitude Latitude Data type: double. Range: -90.0 Yes


to 90.0.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Field Description Value Mandato


ry
(Yes/No)

RNCID Radio network controller Data type: integer. Range: 0 to No


(RNC) ID 65535.

NodeBID NodeB ID Data type: integer. Range: 0 to No


65535.

NodeBNa NodeB name No


me Data type: character string.

CellType Cell type Data type: character string. No

CellName Cell name Data type: character string. No

DownTilt Downtilt (degree) Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No

ElecTilt Internal electronic downtilt Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No


(degree)

MechTilt Mechanical downtilt (degree) Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No

AntHeight Antenna height above the Data type: float. No


ground

Altitude Antenna altitude Data type: float. No

AntType Antenna type Data type: character string. No

Antgain Antenna gain Data type: float. No

Horizontal Width of horizontal half- Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No


Beamwidt power beam
h

VerticalBe Width of vertical half-power Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No


amwidth beam

FeederTyp Feeder type Data type: character string. No


e

FeederLen Feeder length Data type: float. No


gth

OnAir Whether the cell is available Value: Y or N. No


l Y: indicates the cell is
available.
l N: indicates the cell is
unavailable.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Field Description Value Mandato


ry
(Yes/No)

Outdoor Whether the cell is an Value: 0 or 1. No


outdoor cell. l 0: indicates that the cell is an
indoor cell.
l 1: indicates that the cell is an
outdoor cell.

TMAGain TMA gain Data type: character string. No

Area Area Data type: character string. No

6.3.2 Importing Engineering Parameters


This section describes how to import engineering parameters. After you import the
engineering parameters, the Assistant can search for the best matched information according
to the provided network parameter values and display the corresponding data on the map and
view windows.

Prerequisites
l A GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA, or LTE engineering parameter file in .xls
or .csv format is available. The Assistant supports the engineering parameter files in .xls
or .csv format.
Engineering parameter files to be imported into the Assistant must be in certain formats.
You can choose Project > Export Template on the main menu to export a specific
engineering parameter template provided by the Assistant.
l A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Context
Matching and checking are two important processes for importing engineering parameters to
the Assistant.
l Engineering parameters are classified into mandatory fields and optional fields.
Matching is to match mandatory fields and optional fields in engineering parameters
with those in the system.
– The mandatory fields must be matched. Otherwise, the corresponding engineering
parameters cannot be imported.
– The optional fields are matched according to the actual situation. If some optional
fields are not matched, the system displays a message to show the unmatched fields
during the import of engineering parameters. This does not affect the import of
engineering parameters.
l Checking GSM engineering parameters is to check the validity of GSM engineering
parameters, CGI repeatability, and repeatability of LAI and CI.
l Checking WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE engineering parameters is to check
the validity of engineering parameters.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

The procedure for importing GSM engineering parameters is the same as the procedure for
importing WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE engineering parameters. The following
description takes the procedure for importing GSM engineering parameters as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Import an engineering parameter file.
1. On the Project tab page, choose Site > GSM.
2. Right-click GSM and choose View Engineering Parameter from the shortcut menu.
The GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

On the Project tab page, click GSM and choose View Engineering Parameter. The GSM
Engineering Parameter window dialog box is displayed.

3. Click . The Select Excel File dialog box is displayed.


4. Click Browse to select an engineering parameter file.
5. Select the sheet that saves the engineering parameter file to be imported in Sheet list.
6. (Optional) Select engineering parameters in the specified area.
After importing engineering parameters into the Assistant, users can view and analyze
engineering parameters of specified areas.

a. Click next to Area Field.


The Add Field dialog box is displayed.
b. In the Add Field drop-down list, select the parameter type.
c. In the Add Value area, select the parameter value range.
d. Click OK.
7. (Optional) Select Combine.

When multiple engineering parameter files are imported, they are combined into one file
if you select Combine. If you do not select Combine, the existing engineering parameter
file will be replaced by the newly imported file. The duplicate engineering parameter
files with the same mandatory fields will be deleted after the engineering parameter files
are combined.

If the firstly imported engineering parameter file is incorrect, close the file and then
import other engineering parameter files.

If you import the engineering parameters again, you cannot view the theme analysis
results. In this case, clear the analysis results and perform the parameter analysis again to
view the theme analysis results.
8. Click OK.

Step 2 Match engineering parameters.

If... Then...

Engineering parameters in Perform Step 4.


the file match the default
fields in the system

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

If... Then...

Engineering parameters in The Assistant displays the unmatched mandatory


the file do not match the parameters in red and the message Please Match in the
default fields in the system GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box, as shown in
Figure 6-11.
NOTE
In this case, you must manually match these mandatory
parameters. Otherwise, the corresponding engineering parameters
cannot be imported into the database. For details about the
matching method, see Step 3.
If optional fields are not matched, you simply need to select
whether to manually match mandatory fields and optional fields in
the file with the mandatory fields and optional fields in the
system. The import of engineering parameters into the database is
not affected.

Figure 6-11 GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box

Step 3 Optional: Manually match the mandatory fields and optional fields in the file with the
mandatory fields and optional fields in the system.
If You Need To... Then...

Match a mandatory Select the mandatory field to be matched, right-click it, and then
field choose Please Match > Required Field > Matched Field Name
from the shortcut menu.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

If You Need To... Then...

Match an optional Select the optional field to be matched, right-click it, and then
field choose Please Match > Optional Field > Matched Field Name
from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

Each field can be matched only once. When you attempt to match a field repeatedly, the system displays
a message, indicating that the field is matched successfully.
You must select a field to be matched, right-click it, and then choose Cancel Matched Field from the
shortcut menu. After that, clear the matched field.

Step 4 Click to check and import engineering parameters.

If... Then...

The check on all the field The system displays a message, prompting you to confirm
values is successful the imported result.

The check on the values of The system considers this error as an alarm, records it in
optional fields fails the report, and then prompts you to view the alarm
information.

The check on the values of The system considers this error as a failure, records it in
mandatory fields fails the report, and then prompts you to view the failure
information.

The check on the values of The system prompts you to view the alarm information.
both the mandatory fields and
optional fields fails

The field length exceeds 100 The system prompts you to continue the import of
characters engineering parameters.
l If you select to continue the import of engineering
parameters, the Assistant imports the field contents of
the field length within 100 characters.
l If you cancel the data import, the Assistant cancels the
import of engineering parameters.

The report contains the specific location where the check fails and the corresponding error
level. For details, see 19.11 Parameters in a Report Generated for Engineering Parameter
Checking Failure.

NOTE

l In the GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box, the rows of the values indicating that the check
fails are marked by pink. For the mandatory fields, the values indicating that the check fails are
marked by dark red. For the optional fields, the values that the check fails are marked by yellow.
l The data in rows that are marked by dark red and yellow cannot be imported into the system.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Step 5 Optional: Modify the values that the check fails in the engineering parameter file by referring
to Descriptions of GSM Engineering Parameters and 19.11 Parameters in a Report
Generated for Engineering Parameter Checking Failure. After modification, perform Step
1 through Step 4 to import engineering parameters again.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
l Query engineering parameters.
On the Project tab page, choose Site > GSM, right-click GSM, and then choose View
Engineering Parameter from the shortcut menu. The information about the imported
engineering parameters is displayed.
l Export engineering parameters.

In the GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box, click to export the engineering
parameters in .xls format for future use.
NOTE

The cell radius calculated on the basis of engineering parameters ranges from 0 to 5,000 (m).
If the calculated cell radius is greater than 5,000 m, the system considers this cell radius as 5,000
m. If the calculated cell radius is less than 100 m, the system considers this cell radius as 100 m.

6.3.3 Importing Neighboring Cell Data


The section describes how to import neighboring cell data. The Assistant supports import
neighboring cell data. After the analysis of DT logfiles is complete, the Assistant compares
the neighboring cell coverage based on the analysis with the actual neighboring cell coverage
to implement the neighboring relationship analysis. This helps you learn about the network
quality.

Prerequisites
l The neighboring cell data in .csv files or MML scripts is available.
The neighboring cell data in .csv files must contain four fields. You can obtain the
neighboring cell data template from the following path: Software installation path
\SystemConfig\Neighboring Cell Template.csv.
l The engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.

Context
The neighboring cell data files in .csv format must contain the following fields: RNC ID, Cell
ID, NRNC ID, and NCell ID.

l RNC ID: indicates the RNC ID.


l Cell ID: indicates the cell ID.
l NRNC ID: indicates the neighboring RNC ID.
l NCell ID: indicates the neighboring cell ID.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Procedure
Step 1

If you need to... Then...

Import GSM/ For example, to import WCDMA data, perform the following
WCDMA/TD-SCDMA operations:
neighboring cell data l On the Project tab page, choose Site > WCDMA. Right-
click WCDMA and choose Load Neighbor Cell
Configuration from the shortcut menu. The Open dialog
box is displayed.
l Choose GSM/CDMA/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA > Load
Neighbor Cell Configuration from the menu. The Open
dialog box is displayed.

Import LTE neighboring l On the Project tab page, choose Site > LTE. Right-click
cell data LTE and choose Load Neighbor Cell Configuration >
By CellID and PCI or Load Neighbor Cell
Configuration > By eNodeBID and localCellID from
the shortcut menu. The Open dialog box is displayed.
l Choose LTE > Load Neighbor Cell Configuration > By
CellID and PCI or LTE > Load Neighbor Cell
Configuration > By eNodeBID and localCellID from
the menu. The Open dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select the neighboring cell data file, and then click Open.
You can select multiple neighboring cell data files at a time.

Step 3 Optional: Click OK.


If the neighboring cell data exists in the database, you are prompted with a message indicating
that the neighboring cell data exists. Then, click OK to overwrite the neighboring cell data
that exists in the database.

Step 4 Click OK.


After the neighboring cell data is imported, you are prompted with a message that shows the
number of valid files and number of invalid files.

If the neighboring cell data file in .csv format is inconsistent with the format specified in the
template or the MML command does not contain the neighboring cell data, the Assistant
considers the neighboring cell data file as an invalid file.

Step 5 Select whether to view the detailed results in the Information window.
After the neighboring cell data is imported, you are prompted to view the detailed results. The
detailed results contain the invalid file names, and error information and error type of the
import failures, therefore helping you analyze error cause.
NOTE
The data that is successfully imported can be saved in the Assistant. The data that fails to be imported
cannot be saved in the Assistant.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Follow-up Procedure
l View neighboring cell data

a. Select for the mouse pointer in the Map window.


b. Click a cell to display its neighboring cells in a unique color.
The selected cell is displayed in red and the neighboring cells of the selected cell
are displayed in blue. as shown in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12 Displaying neighboring cells

c. Optional: Right-click on the map and choose Neighbor Cell from the shortcut
menu. The neighboring cell data is not displayed. To view neighboring cell data,
right-click on the map then choose Neighbor Cell from the shortcut menu again.
l Add neighboring cell data

a. Select for the mouse pointer in the Map window.


b. Click a cell to display its neighboring cells in a unique color.
The selected cell is displayed in red and the neighboring cells of the selected cell
are displayed in blue.
c. Right-click a missing neighboring cell, and then choose Set as Configured NB Cell
from the shortcut menu.
If the missing neighboring cell is an intra-frequency neighboring cell of the serving
cell, it is displayed in blue. If the missing neighboring cell is an inter-frequency
neighboring cell of the serving cell, it is displayed in green.
NOTE
A maximum of 32 neighboring cells can be added.
l Delete neighboring cell data

a. Select for the mouse pointer in the Map window.


b. Click a cell to display its neighboring cells in a unique color.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

The selected cell is displayed in red and the neighboring cells of the selected cell
are displayed in blue.
c. Right-click a highlighted cell, and choose Delete Configured NB Cell from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE
The deleted neighboring cells are still listed in the exported neighboring cell data table and
identified with Delete.
l Export the neighboring cell data from the Assistant
a. On the Project tab page, select Site > WCDMA.
b. Right-click Export Neighbor Cell Table. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
Export the required neighboring cell data as a .csv file.

6.4 Importing Map Data


A map consists of a series of geographic elements. It can be classified into the MapInfo map
and raster map. The map information is displayed in the map view window on the Assistant
for test data analysis. The map information includes the test area map, test routes, events, and
engineering parameters.

6.4.1 Basic Concepts About Maps


This section describes the basic concepts about maps. You are advised to learn basic concepts
about maps before performing related operations in the map window.

Map
A map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map.
The map information is displayed in the map window on the Assistant. The map information
includes basic information, test route, events, and engineering parameters of the test area.
l MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, each of which is saved in a file. The files
supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special
type of workspace used for saving the layer sequence, layer label information, and
legend.
l Raster map
An entire map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the Assistant is
in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif or .png format.

Layer
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map
layers and indicator layers.
l A map consists of multiple map layers.
l An indicator layer consists of a series of themes, such as IEs and cells.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and
water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters. Figure 6-13
shows the cell layer on the map.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Figure 6-13 Cell layer

Table 6-3 describes the detailed information of Figure 6-13.

Table 6-3 Description of cell layer


Parameter Description

GSM Cells 900 Indicates the GSM900 cell layer.

GSM Cells 1800 Indicates the DCS1800 cell layer.

WCDMA Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
UARFCN imported WCDMA engineering parameter file.

WCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
Second UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported WCDMA engineering parameter file.

WCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
Third UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported WCDMA engineering parameter file.

LTE Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
UARFCN imported LTE engineering parameter file.

LTE Cells Second Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported LTE engineering parameter file.

LTE Cells Third Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported LTE engineering parameter file.

TD-SCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
First UARFCN imported TD-SCDMA engineering parameter file.

TD-SCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
Second UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported TD-SCDMA engineering parameter file.

TD-SCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
Third UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported TD-SCDMA engineering parameter file.

CDMA Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
UARFCN imported CDMA engineering parameter file.

CDMA Cells Second Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported CDMA engineering parameter file.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Parameter Description

CDMA Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported CDMA engineering parameter file.

Label
Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each layer in the map window. For
example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and indexes of the
IEs on an IE layer.

Legend
Legends are classified into system legends and custom legends. Both system legends and
custom legends contain two types of legends:
l Ranged Legend
This type is used for the parameters with consecutive values, such as RSCP and Ec/Io.
The parameter values can be segmented, and each value range is provided with a
different display symbol. Generally, gradient colors are used to indicate different value
ranges, helping you view the distribution of parameter values.
l Individual Legend
This type is used for parameters with discrete values. Each parameter value is provided
with a different display symbol.
Legends can be set in the following methods:
l Automatic segmentation
This method is used to set the parameters with specific value ranges or number of values,
such as the RSCP and handover events. This method can specify a precise value range.
l No segmentation
This method is used to set the parameters with unknown value ranges, such as
scrambling codes. The method can set the shape properties of legends only. The system
automatically sets different symbols and colors for different parameter values.
l Custom segmentation
This method is used to set Ranged legends only. You can set the value range, number of
segments, and color.

6.4.2 Importing a Map


The Assistant enables users to import common maps and indoor pictures into the Assistant.
The map window displays the map of the analysis area and the DT route. The map window
also displays engineering parameters, events, and theme analysis results in multiple modes.

Prerequisites
l A MapInfo map file or a raster map file is available.
l A project is already created. For details about how to create a project, see 6.1 Creating a
Project.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Context
l MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, each of which is saved in a file.
The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is
a special type of workspace used for saving the layer sequence, layer label information,
and legend.
l Raster map
An entire map can be considered as a layer.
The raster map supported by the Assistant is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif or .png format.

NOTICE
The projection coordinate used by the Assistant is Longitude/Latitude[WGS 84]\p4326 and
this projection coordinate is used by measuring counters and cell-sectors. Therefore, set the
projection coordinate to Longitude/Latitude[WGS 84]\p4326 when converting a picture into
an electronic map. Otherwise, the counter measurement result and the mutual-aid cell sector
may be inconsistent with the electronic map.

The Assistant supports the import of indoor maps, such as the indoor raster maps. The
imported map file can be displayed on the all opened map windows of the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Project tab page.

Step 2 right-click and choose Map > Display On Map, The Map dialog box is displayed.
l Import an outdoor map.

a. Click or choose Project > Load Outdoor Map.


b. Select a map file.
If You Select... Then...

MapInfo map file 1. Select MapInfo File(*.gst) or MapInfo Map


Files(*.tab) in File Type in the displayed dialog box.
2. Select a map file.
3. Click Open.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

If You Select... Then...

Raster map file 1. Select Raster Image(*.bmp;*.jpg;*.gif) in File Type


in the displayed dialog box.
2. Select a map file.
3. Click Open.
4. In the Raster Image dialog box, click the map to add
a coordinate reference point.
5. In the Add Control Point dialog box, type the name,
longitude, and altitude of the coordinate reference
point. Then, click OK.
6. Repeat 4 through 5. You need to add a minimum of
three coordinate reference points that are not aligned.
7. Click OK.

l Import an indoor map.

a. Click or choose Project > Load Indoor Map.


b. Select a raster map file, and then click Open.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the map is imported, you can view the map information in the map window and set
relevant parameters. For details, see Setting Layer Display Properties.

6.4.3 Map-related Operations


The map window is an important function window of the Assistant. Most of analysis and
display functions need to be implemented through the map window. The map window can
display all the map layers and indicator layers.

Common Operations on a Map


This section describes common operations on a map. This helps you perform operations on a
map efficiently.

Prerequisites
l A project is already created. For details about how to create a project, see 6.1 Creating a
Project.
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details about how to import engineering
parameters, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering Parameters.
NOTE
If the hint Custom dataset error. Could not find a CLSID for the type of custom dataset
specified. Check that the custom dataset is properly registered occurs, please uninstall the
Assistant and choose the Complete type to install the Assistant.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Procedure
l Search for cells.

a. Click . The Cell Search dialog box is displayed.


b. Select the network type.
c. Select the search field and enter the corresponding field value of the cell.
The fields support fuzzy match. You can query two fields at the same time.
d. Click Search to search for appropriate cells.
The results are displayed in the left area of Cell Search dialog box.
e. In the left pane of the Cell Search window, select one or more query results.
The selected cells are displayed in red in the middle of the map window.
l Modify the cell radius.
a. Double-click a record next to e. The Modify Cell Radius dialog box is displayed.

Alternatively, you can click the button on the toolbar to select the cell radius
and then double-click the radius to open the Modify Cell Radius dialog box.
NOTE

If the cell radius is not displayed on the map, click on the toolbar to configure an IE
layer for the Assistant. After that, select the cell radius to be displayed on the map window,
and then click OK.
b. Enter the modified cell radius in Current Radius area.
c. Click OK.
l Enable the multi-label function.
a. In the Map Layers window, choose Data Layers > Engineering Layer >
WCDMA to select a layer.
b. Right-click Engineering Layer and choose Edit Cell Label from the shortcut
menu. The Label Edit dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can right-click on a map and choose Edit Cell Label from the shortcut
menu.
c. In the Label Edit area, set Field1 and Field2 to select the combination of cell fields
to be viewed.
d. In the Visibility area, set Min Zoom, Max Zoom, and Maximum Labels, as
shown in Figure 6-14.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Figure 6-14 Label Edit dialog box

e. Click OK.
NOTE
Assume that the zoom value of the map is 3048.32, the preset label is displayed within the range
from 0.01 to 20000, and the number of cells displayed within the current range is less than 500
(maximum number of cells displayed on the map). Then, the labels of Longitude + Latitude are
displayed on the map. If the number of labels to be displayed on the map exceeds Maximum
Labels, the labels of this layer are not displayed on the map.
l Check cell connection lines.
– Check the connection line between a DT point and its corresponding cell.

i. Select for the mouse pointer in the map window.


ii. Select a DT point.
The connection line between the DT point and its corresponding cell is
displayed, as shown in Figure 6-15.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Figure 6-15 Connection line between a DT point and its corresponding cell

NOTE

Generally, serving cells are connected by a green solid line and neighboring cells are
connected by a black dotted line.
– Check the connection lines between multiple DT points and their corresponding
cells.
n During the analysis of LTE UE or GSM UE data, a corresponding cell is a
serving cell that corresponds to the selected DT point.
n During the analysis of WCDMA UE data, a corresponding cell is an active cell
that corresponds to the selected DT point.
n During the analysis of Scanner data, a corresponding cell is the one that
receives the strongest signals among the cells that correspond to the selected
DT point.

i. Select or or for the mouse pointer in the map window.


ii. Select multiple DT points.
iii. Right-click the DT points, and then choose Region CellLine from the shortcut
menu.
The connection line between the selected DT point and its corresponding cell
is displayed in the map window, as shown in Figure 6-16.
When operating connection lines between multiple DT points and cells, the
Map view will render the cells with a color that is the same as the color of the
connection lines.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Figure 6-16 Connection lines between multiple DT points and their


corresponding cells

l Set connection line between a DT point and its corresponding cell.


Click . The Map Setting dialog box is displayed. You can set the color and style,
border, and grid of the connection line between a DT point and its corresponding cell.

For details about the parameters of Map Setting, see 19.39 Parameters for Map
Setting.
l Set the map layer projection.
Right-click the map and choose Projection from the shortcut menu. The Choose
projection dialog box is displayed. Select a projection type from the Category drop-
down list and select a project mode from the Category Members drop-down list.

----End

Setting Layer Display Properties


The Assistant manages different parameters and map elements by using different layers. The
layer control function enables you to add, delete, and change the mode of displaying the layer
so that you can view the presentation information on a map as required.

Prerequisites
l If the map layer display properties need to be set, the map file must be imported. For
details, see 6.4.2 Importing a Map.
l If the engineering parameter layer display properties need to be set, the engineering
parameter file must be imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l If the IE layer display properties need to be set, the conditions of displaying IEs on the
map must be met. For details, see 13.1.2 Viewing the Analysis Results in the IE View
Windows.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Context
The map window consists of a series of layers. The layer is categorized into the following
types:
l Map layer: consists of geographic data such as data about the roads, streets, and streams.
l Indicator layer: consists of cell layer, cell radius layer, IE layer, base station layer, single-
cell coverage layer, and theme layer.
NOTE

l If the cell radius layer needs to be displayed, either of the following conditions must be met:
(1) After engineering parameters are imported, the Cell Radius parameter is matched
successfully. (2) After engineering parameters are imported, the cell radius needs to be
calculated.
l The base station layer is displayed on the map only when engineering parameters are imported
and grouped into analysis groups.
l The single-cell coverage layer is displayed on the map only when you view the single-cell
coverage.
l The theme layer is displayed on the map only when the theme analysis results of a cell are
drilled down.

You are advised to set the map window to display necessary layers such as layers related to
the main streets and engineering parameters.

Procedure
l Set the layer properties of the display object.
a. In the Map window, right-click on the map and choose Layer Control from the
shortcut menu.
b. In the Layer Control dialog box, select the map layer to be displayed in the Layers
area, as show in Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17 Layer Control

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

For details about parameters, see 19.9 Parameters for Configuring Layer Control
Properties.
c. In the Layer Control dialog box, set the map layer properties in the Properties
area.
d. Click OK.
l Set the layer offset.

a. Click in the Map window.


b. In the Layer Offset dialog box, configure the offset for each layer.
For details about parameters, see Parameters in the Layer Offset Dialog Box.
c. Click OK.
l Display or hide the layer.

If ... Then ...

The required layers are Select or deselect the check box of the layer to display
displayed in the Map or hide the layer.
Layers area in the Map
window

The required layers are not Add a layer.


displayed in the Map
Layers area in the Map 1. Click in the toolbar. The IE & Event Display
window On Map dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the layer to be displayed.
3. Click OK.
The added layer is displayed in the Map Layers
area in the right pane. You can also select or deselect
the check box of the layer to display or hide the
layer.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the setting, you can save the layer data.
l To save the data of the map layers to a .gst file, do as follows:

a. Click . The Save this Map dialog box is displayed.


b. Select the save path.
c. Click Save to save the data of the map layers to a .gst file.
l To save the data of the map layer and parameter layer to a .tab file, do as follows:

a. Click . The Export Map To Tab dialog box is displayed.


b. Select objects from the list on the left.
c. Click Browse to specify a save path.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

d. Click OK. The data of the map layer and parameter layer is saved in the
corresponding .tab files.

Configuring Legends
To configure the legends, you need to configure the legend properties, including the legend
color, legend shape, and legend font. Therefore, the IEs and events are displayed in different
legends. If you do not configure any legend, the system displays the IEs and events in default
legends.

Context
Each project can be configured with only a set of legends. By configuring legends, you can
achieve the following purposes on the map:
l Different IEs are displayed as different layers.
l In different value ranges, the same IE is displayed in different colors and sizes.
l Different events are displayed as different icons.
Legends are classified into system legends and custom legends.

Procedure
Step 1 Click the Legend tab.

Step 2 Configure the information about a new legend, in the navigation tree of the Legend tab page,
select the object node (IE or event) to be configured. Figure 6-18 shows the structure of the
navigation tree.

Figure 6-18 Structure of the legend navigation tree

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Legends are categorized into the following types:


l System legends: consist of common legends, GSM legends, WCDMA legends, CDMA
legends, TD-SCDMA legends, WLAN legends, and LTE legends that contain the default
legends of certain IEs or events provided by the system. You can edit these legends but
cannot add or delete them.
l Custom legends: You can add, edit, and delete the legends under this node.

If you want to... Then...

Configure system legends See Step 3.

Configure custom legends See Step 4.

Step 3 Configure system legends.


1. Right-click the object node whose legends need to be configured, and then choose Edit
from the shortcut menu.
2. Set the legend properties.
If you want to... Then...

Configure event Set legend properties in the Symbol Setting dialog box. For
legends details, see Symbol Setting Dialog Box.

Configure IE legends Set legend properties in the Ranged Legend Property dialog
box. For details, see Description of Parameters in the
Ranged Legend Property Window.

3. Click OK. The settings of system legends are complete.


Step 4 Configure custom legends.
1. Create IEs.
– Right-click Custom Legend > Add New > Ranged to configure objects that can be
segmented.
– Right-click Custom legend > Add New > Individual to configure objects that
cannot be segmented.
2. Input the IEs whose legends need to be created in the IE Name text box.
3. Select a proper network type from the Common Model drop-down list.
4. Configure the properties of new IE legends in the Setting area.
5. Click OK. The settings of custom legends are complete.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
The system displays the IEs and events on a map according to the configured legends. You
can modify legends of indicators or load legends in the Map Layers window.
l To modify the legends of an indicator, do as follows:
a. Right-click an indicator and choose Modify Legend from the shortcut menu.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

b. In the displayed Ranged Legend Property dialog box, set the legends of the
indicator.
For details about parameters, see Description of Parameters in the Ranged
Legend Property Window.
l To load legends, do as follows:
a. Right-click an indicator and choose Load Legend from the shortcut menu.
b. In the displayed Legend dialog box, select an indicator that is configured with
legends.
c. Click OK.
The legends of the selected indicator are applied to the current indicator.

Synchronizing the Serving Cell Color with the IE Color


This section describes how to synchronize the serving cell color with the IE color. The
Assistant provides the function of synchronizing the serving cell color with the IE color on
the GIS, which helps you learn the IE distribution of the serving cell.

Prerequisites
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Context
Currently, the colors of the following IEs can be synchronized with the serving cell color:
l SC For 1st Best in Active Set(WCDMA UE)
l SC For 1st Best Service Cell(WCDMA Scanner)
l GSM Serving Cell(GSM UE)
l GSM Serving BCCH(GSM UE)
l LTE Serving_PCI(LTE UE)
l LTE Serving_EARFCN(LTE UE)
l LTE CellId(LTE UE)

Procedure

Step 1 On the Project tab page, search for the IE name to be viewed in .
NOTE
The selected IE must be one of IEs that support the color synchronization on the Assistant.

Step 2 Drag the IE to be synchronized to the Map window.

Step 3 Click in the Map window.

Step 4 Select the IE whose color needs to be synchronized with the serving cell color in the
Synchronize Cell Color dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-19.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Figure 6-19 Synchronizing the serving cell color with the IE color

Step 5 Optional: On the Map Layers navigator tree, select Data Layers > Engineering Layer >
Cell Color to disable the function of synchronizing the IE color with the serving cell color.

----End

6.5 Importing DT Log Files


This section describes how to import DT log files into the Assistant. The Assistant can
analyze the DT log files of multiple devices, including the GENEX Probe, GENEX PHU
terminal, scanner, and TEMS. The recommended size of imported data does not exceed 2 GB.

Context
The Assistant can import the following types of DT log files:

l .gen DT log files collected by GENEX Probe V100R005, V200R002, V200R003 and
V300R005.
l .phu DT log files collected by GENEX PHU V100R002 and V100R003
l DT log files collected by TEMS 5.0, 7.0, or 8.0. The extension of the TEMS filenames
is .fmt or .fm*, where * indicates the version of the TEMS. For example, the DT log files
of TEMS 5.0 are in .fm5 format.
Both the GENEX Probe and the GENEX PHU can slice DT log files automatically.
During the import of DT log files, the Assistant can automatically determine whether the
imported DT log files are sliced, and combine these automatically sliced DT log files
into one log file for analysis.
l DT logs in DLF, RSCMD and RSCMD.asc format.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

Procedure
Step 1 On the Project tab page, right-click LogFile and choose Logfile Manager from the shortcut
menu. The Logfile Manager window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20 Logfile Manager Window

If you need to... Then...

Import multiple log 1. Click Add File.


files in different folders 2. In the Open dialog box, select one or multiple DT log files to
be imported.
The Assistant can import DT log files in multiple formats at a
time.
3. Click Open.

Import all log files in a 1. Click Add Folder.


specific folder 2. In the displayed dialog box, select the folder where DT log
files are saved.
The Assistant can import DT log files in multiple formats at a
time.
3. Click OK.

Step 2 Optional: In the Logfile Manager dialog box, select Auto Combine to combine multiple
sliced DT log files into one file.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually

After Auto Combine is selected, the sliced DT log files displayed in the Logfile Manager
dialog box are automatically organized by service types.

NOTE
The system can automatically combine DT log files that are imported recently with DT log files that are
not analyzed or analyzed unsuccessfully into one log file, but cannot automatically combine DT log files
that are imported recently with DT log files that are analyzed successfully into one log file.

In the Logfile Manager dialog box, click Delete to delete one or multiple selected DT log
files.

NOTE

You can delete only the DT log files that are not analyzed or analyzed unsuccessfully.
You can delete the DT log files after clearing the analysis results.

Step 3 Optional: If the indoor maps are contained in the imported data, click Indoor Logfile Edit.
In the displayed Indoor Logfile Edit dialog box, set the default latitude and longitude about
the indoor data and click OK.
After the setting and the data analysis, the indoor and outdoor data can be displayed jointly.
Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
The imported DT log files are displayed under the Logfile node in the project navigation tree.
To view the test plan of the imported log file, right-click this log file and choose Properties
from the shortcut menu. To view the test plan of the terminal, right-click the terminal recorded
in the log file and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Alternatively, click the Analysis Group node to analyze log files by analysis group. For
details about analysis groups, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 7 Creating an Analysis Group

7 Creating an Analysis Group

By creating an analysis group, you can manage different types of test terminals in each DT
logfile according to the service type, test area, and test duration. The functions of analyzing
KPIs and generating reports are all dependent on analysis groups. If analysis groups are not
created on the Assistant, DT data cannot be analyzed.

Prerequisites
You have created an analysis task. For details, see 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually .

Context
You can create multiple analysis groups for a project. In each analysis group, multiple
analysis report templates can be set, and multiple analysis reports or an integrated one can be
generated. An integrated analysis report can also be generated for multiple analysis groups.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Project > Analysis Group Manager on the menu bar. The Analysis Group
Manager window is displayed. as shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Analysis Group Manger window

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 7 Creating an Analysis Group

Alternatively, on the Project tab page, right-click Analysis group, and choose Analysis
group Manager from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Create an analysis group.

If you need to... Then...

Manually create an analysis Click Add, and perform Step 3 to Step 5.


group

Automatically create an Click Auto. Alternatively, right-click the Project tab, and
analysis group by test choose Analysis group > Auto Grouping By MS ID
terminal from the shortcut menu. Then, perform Step 5.

Automatically create an Click Auto By Logfile. Alternatively, right-click the


analysis group by Logfile Project tab, and choose Analysis group > Auto
Grouping By Logfile from the shortcut menu. Then,
perform Step 5.

l To modify an analysis group, you need to select an analysis group to be modified and
click Edit.
Alternatively, right-click the Project tab and choose Analysis Group Name > Edit
Analysis Group from the shortcut menu; or double-click Analysis Group Name, and
modify the attributes of the analysis group.
l To delete an analysis group, you need to select an analysis group to be deleted and click
Delete.
NOTE

The analysis group named All Log cannot be deleted.


Step 3 Set the parameters related to the analysis group in the Add Analysis Group dialog box.
For details about parameters, see 19.19 Parameters for Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Click OK.


The progress bar Begin background logic set analysis is displayed stating that the created
analysis group is being added. After the analysis group is added, the progress bar disappears
and the main window is displayed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After analysis groups are created, imported DT logfiles are displayed by analysis group under
the Analysis Group node in the project navigation tree.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 8 Executing an Analysis Task

8 Executing an Analysis Task

This section describes how to execute an analysis task. After setting an analysis task and
importing DT data, you need to execute an analysis task. After the analysis is complete, you
can view analysis results and analysis reports.

Prerequisites
l You have created an analysis task. For details, see 6 Creating Analysis Tasks
Manually.
l An analysis group is created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Context
After DT log files are imported, the DT data is not imported to the database of the Assistant.
The Assistant imports the DT data to the database, analyzes it, and generates analysis reports
only after the analysis task is executed.
You can execute an analysis task for a specific analysis group. Alternatively, you can execute
an analysis task for all the analysis groups in a project at a time.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the object of an analysis task to be executed.

If You Want To... Then...

Execute an analysis The following methods can be applied:


task for all the analysis 1. Choose Analysis > Run Analysis on the menu bar, or Press
groups in a project F9, or Right-click Analysis Group > Run Analysis On the
Project tab page.
2. Click OK.
3. Perform Step 2 through Step 4.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 8 Executing an Analysis Task

If You Want To... Then...

Execute an analysis 1. On the Project tab page, Choose Analysis Group > Analysis
task for a specific Name.
analysis group 2. Right-click this analysis group and choose Run Analysis
from the shortcut menu.
3. Click OK.
4. Perform Step 2 through Step 4.

Step 2 When the system displays the Originator-Target RelationSetting dialog box, set the calling
and called parties for the PTT call test.
NOTE

If the system finds that the first data file in the analysis group contains PTT tests and there are more than
two MSs, the Originator-Target Relation Setting dialog box is displayed.
After the calling and called parties are set for the PTT call test, the system collects statistics on and
displays Initial/In-call Media Latency.
The automatic analysis function does not collect statistics on Initial/In-call Media Latency.
1. Select a group of MSs used for PTT call test in the Originator-Target Relation Setting
dialog box and click Add.
Repeat Step 2.1 to set multiple groups of MSs. One MS can be set only once. For
example, if MS1 calls MS2 and MS3 calls MS4 during the PTT test, add MS1-MS2 and
MS3-MS4.
2. Click OK. The setting is complete.
After the analysis is complete, the Initial/In-call Media Latency window displays
parameters related to the Media latency. You can view by choosing UE > Delay >
WCDMA > PTT > Initial/In-call Media Latency from the IE navigation tree in the left
pane.
Step 3 View the task execution status.
l In the Run Analysis dialog box, the information about the DT log files to be imported to
the database is displayed, including the file name, file size, import progress, and import
status.
l Import all files progress displays the import progress of all the log files.
l The After Analysis window displays the desired result after analysis.
– Select View Analysis Result to view KPI analysis results.
– Select View Theme Result to view theme analysis results.
You can select View Theme Result only when the theme analysis type is set and
the cell radius is calculated.

NOTE

During the execution of an analysis task, if you want to cancel the analysis of DT log files, select the DT
log files in the Run Analysis dialog box, and then click Cancel.
During the execution of an analysis task, you can import new log files or delete the log files that have
not been analyzed yet. You can import a file whose name has existed before to replace the imported files
that have not been analyzed, but you are not allowed to replace the analyzed file.
During the execution of an analysis task, if a power failure occurs or the Assistant is powered off, the
analyzed data is still available. You can create an IE tree using the analyzed data.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 8 Executing an Analysis Task

Step 4 View the execution results of analysis group.


Right-click the analysis group and choose View KPI Result from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the analysis group and choose GSM/WCDMA/LTE/TDS Theme Result from
the shortcut menu to view theme analysis results.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After all the log files are imported to the database, you can view and drill down KPI analysis
results and theme analysis results, and view analysis reports.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

9 Data Analysis (GSM)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to analyze the GSM data.

9.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (GSM)


This section describes how to view the coverage of a single cell. After an analysis task is
executed, you can view the coverage of a single cell in the map window, which helps you
analyze the cell coverage problems.
9.2 GSM Theme Analysis
This section describes GSM theme analyses, which help network problem location.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

9.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (GSM)


This section describes how to view the coverage of a single cell. After an analysis task is
executed, you can view the coverage of a single cell in the map window, which helps you
analyze the cell coverage problems.

Prerequisites
l You have selected the IEs related to RxLev during the setting of the IE template. For
details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l The analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l GSM engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Map window, click to select a cell.


The selected cell is highlighted in red.
Step 2 View the coverage of the cell.
This section describes how to view the RxLev coverage.

If you need to... Then...

View the RxLev coverage of the Right-click the cells and choose GSM RxLev for Cell
GSM serving cell and Coverage from the shortcut menu. Figure 9-1 shows
neighboring cells the coverage of each of the cells.

View the RxLev coverage of the Right-click the serving cell and choose GSM RxLev
GSM serving cell for ServingCell Coverage from the shortcut menu.
Figure 9-2 shows the coverage of the serving cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Figure 9-1 Single cell coverage — GSM serving cell and neighboring cells

Figure 9-2 Single cell coverage — GSM serving cell

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

NOTE

The query results are automatically displayed under the Data Layers > SingleCellCoverage Layer
node on the Map Layers tab page.
GSM RxLev for Cell_(13+3501) Coverage_All Log in Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2 is the name of the
coverage layer of a GSM cell. 13 indicates the location area code (LAC) of the cell. 3501 indicates the
cell identity (CI). All Log indicates the name of the analysis group that includes the queried coverage
indicator.

----End

9.2 GSM Theme Analysis


This section describes GSM theme analyses, which help network problem location.

9.2.1 GSM Theme Analysis


The Assistant supports the GSM coverage analyses such as radio frequency (RF) over
coverage analysis, RF poor coverage analysis, RF no serving cell dominance analysis, and RF
azimuth garbled analysis. The GSM coverage analyses enable you to obtain the data about the
network quality at each drive test (DT) point in a GSM cell and cell relationship, which helps
network problem location.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import GSM engineering parameters by referring to Importing GSM Engineering


Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the GSM Theme tab page containing the theme analysis
results is automatically displayed. Figure 9-3 describes the GSM Theme tab page. Table 9-1
describes the windows on the GSM Theme tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Figure 9-3 GSM Theme tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Table 9-1 Description of windows on the GSM Theme tab page


Window Description

Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each cell occupies a
row, and each parameter occupies a column. The fixed
parameters are listed in the first six columns, and the
parameters listed in the other columns vary according to the
theme analysis type. The analysis results are identified in
different colors. For example, the analysis results are
identified in red if the over coverage rate of a cell exceeds
the alarm threshold.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar and set the parameters to be


displayed in the Theme Result View window in the displayed
Columns dialog box.
l You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the
Theme Result View window to drill down the cell analysis
results. If the map window changes to red during the drilldown
process, solve this problem by referring to 20.7 What Should I
Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the
Drilldown and Data View Synchronization?.

Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart, as
shown in Figure 9-3.
l The Over Coverage tab page displays the details about
the over coverage analysis. For details about parameters,
see Over Coverage Tab Page.
l The Poor Coverage tab page displays the details about
the poor coverage analysis. For details about parameters,
see Poor Coverage Tab Page.
l The Azimuth Garbled tab page displays the details
about the azimuth garbled analysis. For details about
parameters, see Azimuth Garbled Tab Page.
l The No Serving Cell Dominance tab page displays the
details about the no serving cell dominance analysis. For
details about parameters, see No Serving Cell
Dominance Tab Page.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Window Description

GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
l Gray indicates that the DT point is not in the cell.
l Orange indicates that the DT point has the greatest
interference with the serving cell because the cell of the
DT point for which the no serving cell dominance
analysis results are drilled down is the neighboring cell
with the smallest level difference from the serving cell.

GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.

GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.

----End

9.2.2 GSM Coverage Analysis


Results of GSM coverage analysis help you obtain the data, such as network quality and cell
relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network problems.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import GSM engineering parameters by referring to Importing GSM Engineering


Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the GSM Theme tab page containing the theme analysis
results is automatically displayed. Figure 9-4 describes the GSM Theme tab page. Table 9-2
describes the windows on the GSM Theme tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Figure 9-4 GSM Theme tab page

Table 9-2 Description of windows on the GSM Theme tab page


Window Description

GSM Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the GSM Theme Point Information window, each line
indicates a problem area and each column indicates the
parameters related to the problem area.
NOTE
You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the GSM
Theme Point Information window to drill down the cell analysis
results.

GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.

GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Window Description

GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.

----End

9.2.3 GSM Handover Analysis


Results of GSM handover analysis help you obtain the data, such as network quality and cell
relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network problems.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import GSM engineering parameters by referring to Importing GSM Engineering


Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the GSM Theme tab page containing the theme analysis
results is automatically displayed. Figure 9-5 describes the GSM Theme tab page. Table 9-3
describes the windows on the GSM Theme tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Figure 9-5 GSM Theme tab page

Table 9-3 Description of windows on the GSM Theme tab page


Window Description

GSM Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the GSM Theme Point Information window, each line
indicates a problem area and each column indicates the
parameters related to the problem area.
NOTE
You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the GSM
Theme Point Information window to drill down the cell analysis
results.

GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.

GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Window Description

GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.

----End

9.2.4 GSM Interference Analysis


Results of GSM interference analysis help you obtain the data, such as network quality and
cell relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network problems.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import GSM engineering parameters by referring to Importing GSM Engineering


Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the GSM Theme tab page containing the theme analysis
results is automatically displayed. Figure 9-6 describes the GSM Theme tab page. Table 9-4
describes the windows on the GSM Theme tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 9 Data Analysis (GSM)

Figure 9-6 GSM Theme tab page

Table 9-4 Description of windows on the GSM Theme tab page

Window Description

GSM Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
NOTE
You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the GSM
Theme Point Information window to drill down the cell analysis
results.

GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.

GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.

GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to analyze the WCDMA data.


10.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (WCDMA)
This section describes how to view the coverage of a single cell. After an analysis task is
executed, you can view the coverage of a single cell in the map window, which helps you
analyze the cell coverage problems.
10.2 WCDMA Theme Analysis
This section describes WCDMA theme analyses, which help network problem location. The
WCDMA theme analyses involve the coverage analysis, pilot pollution analysis, downlink
interference analysis, and missing neighboring cell analysis.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

10.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (WCDMA)


This section describes how to view the coverage of a single cell. After an analysis task is
executed, you can view the coverage of a single cell in the map window, which helps you
analyze the cell coverage problems.

Prerequisites
l You have selected the IEs related to the Ec/Io and RSCP during the setting of the IE
template. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l Engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l An analysis task has been executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Context
The UE-based single cell coverage analysis and the scanner-based single cell coverage
analysis are conducted with the same method. This section describes the UE-based single cell
coverage analysis.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Map window, click to select a cell.


The selected cell is highlighted in red.
Step 2 View the Ec/Io coverage of a WCDMA cell.
This section describes how to view the Ec/Io coverage.

If you need to... Then...

View the Ec/Io coverage of a Choose WCDMA Ec/Io for cell Coverage >
WCDMA cell that is a serving cell WCDMA UE Ec/Io Max for Cell Coverage in
Activeset.
Figure 10-1 shows the coverage of the serving cell.

View the Ec/Io coverage of a Choose WCDMA Ec/Io for cell Coverage >
WCDMA cell that is a serving cell WCDMA UE Ec/Io Max for Cell Coverage.
and a neighboring cell
Figure 10-2 shows the coverage of each of the
cells.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Figure 10-1 RxLev coverage of a WCDMA cell that is a serving cell and a neighboring cell

Figure 10-2 RxLev coverage of a WCDMA cell that is a serving cell and a neighboring cell

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

NOTE

The query results are automatically displayed under the the Data Layers > Single Cell Coverage Layer
node on the Map Layers tab page.
WCDMA UE Ec/Io for Cell(201+31) Coverage_All Login Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2 is the name
of the coverage layer of a WCDMA cell. 201 indicates the cell identity (CI), 31 indicates the RNC ID of
the cell, and All Log indicates the name of the analysis group to be viewed.

----End

10.2 WCDMA Theme Analysis


This section describes WCDMA theme analyses, which help network problem location. The
WCDMA theme analyses involve the coverage analysis, pilot pollution analysis, downlink
interference analysis, and missing neighboring cell analysis.

10.2.1 WCDMA RF Theme Analysis


The Assistant supports the WCDMA coverage analyses such as radio frequency (RF) over
coverage analysis and RF no serving cell dominance analysis. The WCDMA coverage
analyses enable you to obtain the data about the network quality at each drive test (DT) point
in a GSM cell and cell relationship, which helps network problem location.

Context
You can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information only by cell. In addition, you
can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information about only one cell at a time.

The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Coverage
Theme Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering


Parameters.

Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.

After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-3 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-1 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Figure 10-3 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-1 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates one
cell and each column indicates the parameters related to the
cell. The first three columns are fixed parameters. The
parameters in other columns are configured coverage-
related parameters, for example, the over-coverage rate. The
File List column lists the DT logfile list, that is, the list of
DT logfiles related to the serving cell of the DT point.The
analysis results are identified in different colors. For
example, if the over-coverage rate of the cell exceeds the
alarm threshold, the analysis result is displayed in red.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar and set the parameters to be


displayed in the Theme Result View window in the displayed
Columns dialog box.
l You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the
Theme Result View window to drill down the cell analysis
results. If the map window changes to red during the drilldown
process, solve this problem by referring to 20.7 What Should I
Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the
Drilldown and Data View Synchronization?.

Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
l The No Serving Cell Dominance tab page displays the
details about the no serving cell dominance analysis. For
details about parameters, see No Serving Cell
Dominance Tab Page.
l The Over Coverage tab page displays the details about
the over coverage analysis. For details about parameters,
see Over Coverage Tab Page.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Window Description

WCDMA Theme(UE) Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
Map window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
l Gray indicates the DT points that do not belong to the
cell.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

10.2.2 WCDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis


Pilot pollution means that there are too many strong pilots, but no pilot is strong enough to be
the primary pilot at a point. When pilot pollution problems occur, the network quality
deteriorates, call drops occur during handovers, and the system capacity reduces. Based on the
pilot pollution analysis, you can accurately locate the pilot pollution area and analyze the
causes.

Context
The Assistant supports the pilot pollution analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs
and scanners. The methods for viewing the pilot pollution analysis results of DT logfiles
collected by UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
pilot pollution analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Pilot
Pollution Theme Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering


Parameters.

Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.

After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-4 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-2 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 10-4 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-2 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates one
cell and each column indicates a parameter related to the
cell. The PP All column lists the number of DT points with
pilot pollution problems in the cell. The File List column
lists the DT logfile list, that is, the list of DT logfiles related
to the serving cell of the DT point.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar and set the parameters to be


displayed in the Theme Result View window in the displayed
Columns dialog box.
l You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the
Theme Result View window to drill down the cell analysis
results. If the map window changes to red during the drilldown
process, solve this problem by referring to 20.7 What Should I
Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the
Drilldown and Data View Synchronization?.

Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
View the statistical information about DT points with pilot
pollution on the displayed Pilot Pollution tab page. For
details about parameters, see 19.27 Parameters for
Viewing the WCDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis Result.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Window Description

WCDMA Theme(UE) Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
Map window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l The hand-like icon in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window indicates a DT point with pilot pollution.
Choose Legend > System Legend > WCDMA > PP
Pilot on the Legend tab page. View the map according
to the legends of the DT points with pilot pollution.
l Click the DT point with pilot pollution in the WCDMA
Theme(UE) Map window. Then, the cells that cause
pilot pollution to the DT point are marked in black
circles.
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, In the two area boxes in the lower part of the
Theme Detail window, you can view the latitude and
longitude information about the selected DT point and
the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set
through solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set
through broken lines.
l Under the Theme Layer node on the Map Layers tab
page, select WCDMA Pilot Pollution and WCDMA
Pilot Pollution Cell. Then, you can clearly view the
results of pilot pollution analysis.

----End

10.2.3 WCDMA Downlink Interference Analysis


Downlink interference is caused by interference signals sent from the interference source in
the downlink frequency band of a mobile network. After receiving interference signals, the
UE cannot identify the normal signals from the NodeB. Therefore, the communication
between the UE and the NodeB is interrupted. As a result, call drops occur and channels fail
to be allocated. The downlink interference analysis enables you to accurately locate the
interference area and analyze the cause of downlink interference.

Context
The Assistant supports the downlink interference analysis on DT logfiles collected by both
UEs and scanners. The methods for viewing the downlink interference analysis result of DT
logfiles collected by both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes
how to view the downlink interference analysis result of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an
example.

The Assistant determines whether to perform the downlink interference analysis according to
the RSCP and Ec/Io. The Assistant performs downlink interference analysis on the DT points
with high RSCP value (RSCP value > RSCP threshold) and low Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value <
Ec/Io threshold).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA downlink interference analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA
Downlink Interference Theme Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-5 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-3 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 10-5 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-3 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates a
cell, and each column indicates a parameter related to the
cell. The DL Interference(%) column lists the percentage
of downlink interference DT points in each cell. The File
List column lists the DT logfiles. Only the DT logfiles
related to the cells that serve the DT points are listed.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar and set the parameters to be


displayed in the Theme Result View window in the displayed
Columns dialog box.
l You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the
Theme Result View window to drill down the cell analysis
results. If the map window changes to red during the drilldown
process, solve this problem by referring to 20.7 What Should I
Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the
Drilldown and Data View Synchronization?.

Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
On the DL Interference tab page, view the statistical result
of downlink interference DT points. For details about the
parameters, see 19.28 Parameters for Viewing the
WCDMA Downlink Interference Analysis Result.

WCDMA Theme(UE) Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
Map window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red DT points have downlink interference.
l Green DT points are normal.
l Orange DT points have low receive level and high
speech quality.
l Purple DT points have low receive quality and low
receive level.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

----End

10.2.4 WCDMA Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis


This section describes the WCDMA missing neighboring cell analysis. Missing neighboring
cells are neighboring cells whose data is not included in the neighboring cell data of a
network. If the problem of missing neighboring cells occurs, handovers may fail, and
therefore call drops occur. Based on the missing neighboring cell analysis, you can accurately
locate the areas where the problem of missing neighboring cells occurs and obtain the
information about the missing intra-frequency neighboring cells and missing inter-frequency
neighboring cells. The missing neighboring cell analysis provides guidelines for optimizing
intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells to improve the neighboring cell
optimization efficiency.

Context
The Assistant determines whether measurement cells are neighboring cells according to the
RSCP and Ec/Io values of measurement cells. After that, the Assistant compares the data of
these determined neighboring cells with the imported neighboring cell data, if the imported
neighboring cell data does not contain the data of any determined neighboring cells, the
determined neighboring cell is considered as a missing neighboring cell.
The Assistant can perform the WCDMA missing neighboring cell analysis for the DT logfiles
collected by scanners.

Procedure
Step 1 Importing neighboring cell data by referring to Importing Neighboring Cell Data.

Step 2 Set the WCDMA missing neighboring cell Analysis type by referring to Setting the
WCDMA Missing Neighboring Cell Theme Analysis Type.
Step 3 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 4 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page containing the
theme analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-6 describes the WCDMA
Theme(Scanner) tab page. Table 10-4 describes the windows on the WCDMA
Theme(Scanner) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > Scanner Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Figure 10-6 WCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page

Table 10-4 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates a
cell and each column indicates a parameter related to this
cell. For details about parameters, see Theme Result
Review window.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar and set the parameters to be


displayed in the Theme Result View window in the displayed
Columns dialog box.
l You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the
Theme Result View window to drill down the cell analysis
results. If the map window changes to red during the drilldown
process, solve this problem by referring to 20.7 What Should I
Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the
Drilldown and Data View Synchronization?.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Window Description

Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
On the Missing Neighbor Cell tab page, view the missing
neighboring cell information. For details about the
parameters, see Missing Neighbor Cell tab page.

WCDMA Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
According to the colors of DT points, you can determine the
size of missing neighboring cell area and focus on the area
where a large number of missing neighboring cells are
located
l Blue cells on a map indicate the configured intra-
frequency neighboring cells of the serving cell.
l Green cells on a map indicate the configured inter-
frequency neighboring cells of the serving cell.
l Orange cells indicate the missing neighboring cells of
the serving cell.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

10.2.5 WCDMA Coverage Analysis


Results of WCDMA coverage analysis help you obtain the data, such as network quality and
cell relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network problems.
Coverage analysis results include Poor Coverage, No Serving Cell Dominance, Over
Coverage, Wrong Coverage, and Up-Link Power Limited.

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
The Coverage theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Coverage
Theme Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-7 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-5 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 10-7 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-5 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

WCDMA UE Theme Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no


Point Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the WCDMA UE Theme Point Information window,
each line indicates a problem area and each column
indicates the parameters related to the problem area.
Overshoot coverage parameters are used as an example.
Parameters of other coverage-related themes are similar.
l Index: serial number
l No. of a Problem Point: problematic point number
l Start Time of a Problem Point: start time of a
problematic road
l Start Time of a Problem Point: end time of a problematic
road
l Start Longitude of a Problem Point: start longitude of a
problematic road
l Start Latitude of a Problem Point: start latitude of a
problematic road
l End Longitude of a Problem Point: end longitude of a
problematic road
l End Latitude of a Problem Point: end latitude of a
problematic road
l ID of an Involved Serving Cell: serving cell ID of a
problematic point
l PSC of an Involved Serving Cell: serving cell PSC of a
problematic point
l RSCP of an Involved Serving Cell: serving cell PSCP of
a problematic point
l Distance Between a Problem Point and the Serving Cell:
distance between a problematic point and the serving
cell
l Average ISD: average distance between sites
l ID of a Cell Closest to a Problem Point: ID of a cell
closest to a problematic point
l PSC of a Cell Closest to a Problem Point: PSC of a cell
closest to a problematic point
l Distance Between a Problem Point and the Cell to
Which the Problem Point Is the Closest: distance
between a problematic point and the cell to which the
problem point is the closest
l RSCP of a Cell Closest to a Problem Point: RSCP of a
cell closest to a problematic point

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Window Description

l Reason: problem cause


– Over Coverage: Overshoot coverage occurs on a
problematic road.
– Non-Over Coverage: Overshoot coverage does not
occur on a problematic road.
l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion
– When Reason is Over Coverage, you are advised to
adjust the serving cell as follows: Increase the
downtilt, adjust the azimuth, and reduce the pilot
power. The priorities are in descending order.
– When Reason is Non-Over Coverage, site survey is
required for the adjustment.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

WCDMA UE Theme In the WCDMA UE Theme Map window, click a sampling


Detail window point to view the longitude and latitude of the selected
sampling point and related cell information.

WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

10.2.6 WCDMA Handover Analysis


Results of WCDMA handover analysis help you obtain the data, such as network quality and
cell relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network problems.
Handover analysis results include High proportion of soft HO, Continual HO, HO Delay.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
The Handover theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-8 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-6 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Figure 10-8 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-6 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

WCDMA UE Theme Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no


Point Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the WCDMA UE Theme Point Information window,
each line indicates a problem area and each column
indicates the parameters related to the problem area.
The parameters for the frequent handover theme are used as
an example. The parameters for the delayed handover theme
are the similar.
l Index: serial number
l Question Road NO.: problematic point number
l Begin Time of Question Road: start time of a
problematic road
l End Time of Question Road: end time of a problematic
road
l Time for the First Handover Event: time for the first
handover event
l Time for the Last Handover Event: time for the last
handover event
l Start Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Start Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l Name of the First Handover Event (Event Name): name
of the first handover event
l Information About the First Handover Event (Event
Info): information about the first handover event
l Name of the Last Handover Event (Event Name): name
of the last handover event
l Information About the Last Handover Event (Event
Info): information about the last handover event
l Handover Time Difference (s): handover time difference
l Number of Handover Attempts: number of handover
attempts
l Serving Cell ID: ID of an involved serving cell
l Serving Cell PSC: PSC of an involved serving cell
l Serving Cell RSCP: RSCP of an involved serving cell
l Reason: problem cause
– Continually Handover
– ping-pong handovers

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Window Description

l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion


– When Reason is Continually Handover, you are
advised to check handover parameter settings.
– When Reason is ping-pong handovers, you are
advised to check handover threshold parameters and
the number of handovers.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

WCDMA UE Theme In the WCDMA UE Theme Map window, click a sampling


Detail window point to view the longitude and latitude of the selected
sampling point and related cell information.

WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

10.2.7 WCDMA Interference Analysis


Results of WCDMA interference analysis help you obtain the data, such as network quality
and cell relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network problems.

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
The Interference theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-9 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-7 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 10-9 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-7 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

WCDMA UE Theme Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no


Point Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the WCDMA UE Theme Point Information window,
each line indicates a problem area and each column
indicates the parameters related to the problem area.
Parameters of the interference theme:
l Index: serial number
l Question Road NO.: problematic point number
l Begin Time: start time of a problematic road
l End Time: end time of a problematic road
l Begin Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Begin Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l Serving Cell ID: serving cell ID of a problematic point
l Serving Cell PSC: serving cell PSC of a problematic
point
l Serving Cell RSCP: serving cell RSCP of a problematic
point
l Serving Cell EcIo: serving cell Ec/Io of a problematic
point
l To Serving Distance: distance between a problematic
point and the serving cell
l Avg Distance: average distance between sites
l Near Neighbor Cell Name: neighboring cell name of a
problematic point
l Near Neighbor PSC: neighboring cell PSC of a
problematic point
l Near Neighbor Distance: distance between a problematic
point and a neighboring cell
l Near Neighbor RSCP: neighboring cell RSCP of a
problematic point
l Reason: problem cause
– Interference
– scrambling code conflict
– Coverage problems exist. Output corresponding
coverage causes.
l Optimization Advice: optimization suggestion

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Window Description

– When Reason is Interference, output check


parameter settings.
– When Reason is scrambling code conflict, output
to-be-adjusted serving cells or neighboring cell
scrambling codes.
– Coverage problems exist. Output corresponding
coverage optimization suggestions.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

WCDMA UE Theme In the WCDMA UE Theme Map window, click a sampling


Detail window point to view the longitude and latitude of the selected
sampling point and related cell information.

WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

10.2.8 WCDMA Throughput Analysis


Results of WCDMA throughput analysis help you obtain the data, such as network quality
and cell relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network problems.

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT log files collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by UEs as an example.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-10 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-8 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 10-10 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-8 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

WCDMA UE Theme Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no


Point Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the WCDMA UE Theme Point Information window,
each line indicates a problem area and each column
indicates the parameters related to the problem area.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

WCDMA UE Theme In the WCDMA UE Theme Map window, click a sampling


Detail window point to view the longitude and latitude of the selected
sampling point and related cell information.

WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

10.2.9 WCDMA Abnormal Event Analysis


Results of WCDMA Abnormal Event analysis help you obtain the data, such as network
quality and cell relationship about all DT points, so that you can easily locate network
problems. Abnormal Event analysis results include AccessFail Event, Dropped, Handover
Fail.

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT log files collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by UEs as an example.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-11 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-9 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 10-11 WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 10 Data Analysis (WCDMA)

Table 10-9 Description of windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

WCDMA UE Theme Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no


Point Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the WCDMA UE Theme Point Information window,
each line indicates a problem area and each column
indicates the parameters related to the problem area.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

WCDMA UE Theme In the WCDMA UE Theme Map window, click a sampling


Detail window point to view the longitude and latitude of the selected
sampling point and related cell information.

WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

11 Data Analysis (LTE)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to analyze the LTE data.


11.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (LTE)
This section describes how to view the coverage of a single cell. After an analysis task is
executed, you can view the coverage of a single cell in the map window, which helps you
analyze the cell coverage problems.
11.2 Theme Analysis (LTE)
This section describes how to use the LTE theme analysis function for locating network
problems. The LTE theme analysis function includes the RF, Coverage, Handover, Exception
Event, Throughput and InterFerence themes.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

11.1 Single Cell Coverage Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to view the coverage of a single cell. After an analysis task is
executed, you can view the coverage of a single cell in the map window, which helps you
analyze the cell coverage problems.

Prerequisites
l You have selected the IEs related to the RSRP, RSRQ, and RSSI during the setting of the
IE template, such as Serving RSRP, Serving RSRQ, and Serving RSSI. For details, see
6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l The analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l Engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Context
The UE-based single cell coverage analysis and the scanner-based single cell coverage
analysis are conducted with the same method. This section describes the UE-based single cell
coverage analysis.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Map window, click to select a cell.


The selected cell is highlighted in red.
Step 2 View the coverage of an LTE cell.
This section describes how to view the RSRP coverage.

If you need to... Then...

View the RSRP coverage of Right-click the serving cell and choose LTE RSRP for
the serving cell Cell Coverage > LTE UE RSRP for Serving Cell
Coverage from the shortcut menu. Figure 11-1 shows the
coverage of the serving cell.

View the RSRP coverage of Right-click the cells and choose LTE RSRP for Cell
the serving cell and Coverage > LTE UE RSRP for Cell Coverage from the
neighboring cells shortcut menu. Figure 11-2 shows the coverage of each of
the cells.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Figure 11-1 Single cell coverage — LTE serving cell

Figure 11-2 Single cell coverage — LTE serving cell and neighboring cells

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

NOTE

The query results are automatically displayed under the Data Layers > SingleCellCoverage Layer
node on the Map Layers tab page.
LTE RSRP for Cell_(6+0) Coverage -All Log in Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-2 is the name of the
coverage layer of an LTE cell. 6 indicates the cell identity (CI). 0 indicates the physical cell identifier
(PCI). All Log indicates the name of the analysis group that includes the queried coverage indicator.

----End

11.2 Theme Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to use the LTE theme analysis function for locating network
problems. The LTE theme analysis function includes the RF, Coverage, Handover, Exception
Event, Throughput and InterFerence themes.

11.2.1 Theme Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to analyze the LTE coverage theme. The analysis results help you
obtain the information such as network quality and cell relationship about all drive test (DT)
points within the coverage of an LTE cell, therefore easily locating network problems.

Context
The LTE coverage analysis involves two themes: RF over coverage, RF no serving cell
dominance and azimuth garbled.

An over-coverage cell must be a primary serving cell and its signals cover the areas to be
planned.

The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the KTE Coverage Theme
Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering


Parameters.

Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.

Step 4 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.

After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-3 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-1 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Figure 11-3 LTE Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Table 11-1 Description of windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

LTE UE Theme Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no


MapTheme Result View theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
window referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme MapTheme Result View window,
each row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. The first three columns are
fixed parameters. The parameters in other columns are
configured coverage-related parameters, for example, the
over-coverage rate. The File List column lists the DT
logfile list, that is, the list of DT logfiles related to the
serving cell of the DT point.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar and set the parameters to be


displayed in the LTE UE Theme MapTheme Result View
window in the displayed Columns dialog box.
The analysis results are identified in different colors. For
example, if the over-coverage rate of the cell exceeds the alarm
threshold, the analysis result is displayed in red.
l You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the
LTE UE Theme MapTheme Result View window to drill
down the cell analysis results. If the map window changes to
red during the drilldown process, solve this problem by
referring to 20.7 What Should I Do When the Map View Is
Displayed in Red During the Drilldown and Data View
Synchronization?.

LTE UE Theme Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.


MapTheme Detail window l The No Serving Cell Dominance tab page displays the
details about the no serving cell dominance analysis. For
details about parameters, see No Serving Cell
Dominance Tab Page.
l The Over Coverage tab page displays the details about
the over coverage analysis. For details about parameters,
see Over Coverage Tab Page.
l The Azimuth Garbled tab page displays the detailed
azimuth garbled information. For details about the
parameters, see Azimuth Garbled tab page.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Window Description

LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
l Gray indicates the DT points that do not belong to the
cell.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

11.2.2 Coverage Theme Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to analyze the LTE coverage theme. The analysis results help you
obtain the information such as network quality and cell relationship about all drive test (DT)
points within the coverage of an LTE cell, therefore easily locating network problems.

Context
The LTE coverage theme analysis includes: analysis of weak coverage, no serving cell
dominance, overshoot coverage, wrong coverage, overlay, limited uplink quality and Inter Nb
Analysis.

The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

The Coverage theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Coverage Theme
Analysis Type.

Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering


Parameters.

Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-4 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-2 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 11-4 LTE Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Table 11-2 Description of windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style, Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
The parameters for the frequent handover theme are used as
an example. The parameters for the delayed handover theme
are the similar.
l Index: serial number
l Road NO.: problematic point number
l Problem Type: problem type. Value: OverCoverage.
l Start Time: start time of a problematic road
l End Time: end time of a problematic road
l Start Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Start Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l OverCoverage Cell Name: name of an overshooting cell
l OverCoverage TAC: TAC of an overshooting cell
l OverCoverage PCI: PCI of an overshooting cell
l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion
– Adjust the downtilt or azimuth, or reduce the pilot
power.
– You are advised to increase the downtilt of the
primary serving cell by 2 degrees.
– You are advised to increase the downtilt of the cell
which is the farthest from a UE by 2 degrees.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Window Description

LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

11.2.3 Handover Theme Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to use the LTE HO theme analysis result to obtain information
about cells on the LTE network where frequent handovers occur. The information helps you
locate network problems more intuitively.

Context
The LTE HO theme analysis includes frequency handovers and handover delay.

The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

The Handover theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE HO Theme Analysis
Type.

Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering


Parameters.

Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.

Step 4 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.

After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-5 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-3 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 11-5 LTE Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Table 11-3 Description of windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
The parameters for the frequent handover theme are used as
an example. The parameters for the delayed handover theme
are the similar.
l Index: serial number
l Road NO.: problematic point number
l Problem Type: problem type. Value: Continually
Handover.
l Start Time: start time of a problematic road
l End Time: end time of a problematic road
l Start Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Start Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l Number of Frequent Handovers: number of frequent
handovers
l Primary Serving Cell Name: name of a primary serving
cell
l Primary Serving Cell PCI: PCI of a primary serving cell
l Ping-Pong Handover Occurred: whether ping-pong
handovers occur. Value: YES or NO.
l Ping-Pong Handover Cells: ping-pong handover cell
l Possible Cause: possible cause. Value: Continually
Handover.
l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion
– You are advised to check handover parameter
settings.
– Increase the power of the cell with the longest
coverage duration on a road.
– Increase the downtilt of the cell which is the farthest
from a UE.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Window Description
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.

LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points form the track of cells where frequent
handovers occur.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

11.2.4 InterFerence Theme Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to analyze the LTE interFerence theme. The analysis results help
you obtain the information such as network quality and cell relationship about all drive test
(DT) points within the interFerence of an LTE cell, therefore easily locating network
problems.

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

The Interference theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Interference Theme
Analysis Type.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering


Parameters.
Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.

Step 4 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.


After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-6 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-4 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 11-6 LTE Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Table 11-4 Description of windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
Parameters of the interference theme:
l Index: serial number
l Road NO.: problematic point number
l Start Time: start time of a problematic road
l End Time: end time of a problematic road
l Start Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Start Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l Primary Serving Cell Name: name of a primary serving
cell
l Primary Serving Cell PCI: PCI of a primary serving cell
l Neighboring Cell PCI(NoDom): PCI of a neighboring
cell (no primary serving cell)
l Primary Serving Cell PCI(OverCoverage): PCI of the
primary serving cell (overshoot coverage)
l Primary Serving Cell Name(OverCoverage): name of the
primary serving cell (overshoot coverage)
l Neighboring Cell PCI(OverCoverage): PCI of a
neighboring cell (overshoot coverage)
l Neighboring Cell Name(OverCoverage): name of a
neighboring cell (overshoot coverage)
l Neighboring Cell PCI(Overlay): PCI of a neighboring
cell (overlapping coverage)
l Neighboring Cell Name(Overlay): name of a
neighboring cell (overlapping coverage)
l MOD3 Cell PCI: PCI of a cell between which and the
primary serving cell mod 3 conflicts exist
l MOD3 Cell Name: name of a cell between which and
the primary serving cell mod 3 conflicts exist
l Interference Cause: interference cause
– Interference

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Window Description

– Neighboring OverCoverage
– MOD3
l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion
– If this theme does not overlap the coverage theme,
you are advised to check parameter settings.
– If this theme overlap the coverage theme, the
optimization suggestion is the same as that for the
coverage theme.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.

LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

11.2.5 Throughput Theme Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to analyze the LTE throughput theme. The analysis results help
you obtain the information such as network quality and cell relationship about all drive test
(DT) points within the throughput of an LTE cell, therefore easily locating network problems.

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Throughput Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.

Step 4 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.


After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-7 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-5 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 11-7 LTE Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Table 11-5 Description of windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.

LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

11.2.6 Exception Event Theme Analysis (LTE)


This section describes how to analyze the LTE exception event theme. The analysis results
help you obtain the information such as network quality and cell relationship about all drive
test (DT) points within the exception event of an LTE cell, therefore easily locating network
problems.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Exception Event Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.

Step 4 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.


After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-8 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-6 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 11-8 LTE Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Table 11-6 Description of windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page


Window Description

LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style, End Time, End Longitude, End
Latitude, Serving Cell, Serving Cell PCI.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.

LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.

LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.

----End

11.2.7 VoLTE Theme Analysis (LTE)


VoLTE theme analysis results help you obtain abnormal call data of all drive test (DT) points
covered by an LTE cell. The purpose is to conveniently and straightforwardly locate network
problems.

Context
Earlier Assistant versions do not support intelligent analysis on GEN VoLTE DT data, and
high engineer skills are required. Analysis on ROMES VoLTE DT data is also not supported,
causing low project delivery efficiency and high costs. If intelligent analysis on VoLTE DT

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

data is supported, VoLTE DT problem locating efficiency can be improved, engineer skill
requirements can be lowered, and costs can be reduced.

Procedure
Step 1 Create a project by referring to Setting the LTE Exception Event Theme Analysis Type.

Step 2 Choose Project > Theme Setting.

Step 3 In the displayed VoLTE Theme Setting dialog box, set the VoLTE theme analysis type. For
details about the parameters, see 19.15 Parameters for Setting the VoLTE Analysis Type.

Step 4 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering


Parameters.
NOTE

l If you need to query RF parameters, import LTE engineering parameters.


l If the first column of the first row in the engineering parameters file is ID or ID_*, you need to
change it to id or id_*, respectively.

Step 5 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.

After the analysis task is executed, the VoLTE Theme tab page containing the theme analysis
results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-9 (GEN VoLTE) or Figure 11-10 (ROMES
VoLTE) describes the VoLTE Theme tab page. Table 11-7 describes the windows on the
VoLTE Theme tab page.

NOTE

You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > VoLTE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the VoLTE
Theme tab page containing the theme analysis results.

Figure 11-9 VoLTE Theme (GEN VoLTE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Figure 11-10 VoLTE Theme (ROMES VoLTE) tab page

Table 11-7 Description of windows on the VoLTE Theme tab page


Window Description

GEN VoLTE VoLTE Theme Displays statistics on each theme type in


Result View > tables. For details, see Table 11-8.
Problem
Evaluation window

VoLTE Theme Displays problematic point information


Point Information about each theme type in tables. For details,
window see Table 11-9.
After double-clicking a problematic point,
you can view the optimization advice on this
problematic point in the lower area.

ROMES VoLTE VoLTE Theme Displays statistics on each theme type in


Result View tables. For details, see Table 11-10.
window

VoLTE Theme Displays problematic point information


Point Information about each theme type in tables. For details,
window see Table 11-11.
After double-clicking a problematic point,
you can view the optimization advice on this
problematic point in the lower area.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Window Description

VoLTE Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results
on a map. For relevant operations in the
VoLTE Theme Map window, see 6.4.3
Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the VoLTE Theme Map
window, In the two area boxes in the lower
part of the Theme Detail window, you can
view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-
related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the
active set through solid lines and to the cells
in the monitor set through broken lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab
page on the map, you can select different
layers to view the abnormal DT points and
cell information related to different themes.

Table 11-8 Problem Evaluation (GEN VoLTE) window


Item Type Parameter Description

Access Failure Count Indicates the number of


failures.

Total Access Count Indicates the number of


access times.

Access Failure Rate Indicates the access success


rate.

TopN Problem Time Point Indicates the TopN


problematic time point and
Access Failure Count the corresponding number
of access failures.

TopN Problem eNodeB Indicates the TopN


problematic eNodeB and the
Access Failure Count corresponding number of
access failures.

Call Drop Failure Count Indicates the number of


failures.

Total Call Count Indicates the total number of


calls.

Call Drop Rage Indicates the call drop rate.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Item Type Parameter Description

TopN Problem Time Point Indicates the TopN


problematic time point and
Call Drop Count the corresponding number
of call drops.

TopN Problem eNodeB Indicates the TopN


problematic eNodeB and the
Call Drop Count corresponding number of
call drops.

Access Delay Average Delay Indicates the average delay.

Total Call Count Indicates the total number of


calls.

Top 20% Low Value Indicates the Top20% low


value.

Greater Than Threshold Indicates the number of


Count times a threshold is
exceeded.

TopN Problem Time Point Indicates the TopN


problematic time point and
Large Access Delay Count the corresponding number
of times the access delay is
large.

TopN Problem eNodeB Indicates the TopN


problematic eNodeB and the
Large Access Delay Count corresponding number of
times the access delay is
large.

MOS MOS Indicates the MOS.

TOP 20% Low Value Indicates the Top20% low


value.

Lower Than Threshold Indicates the number of


times when a threshold is
not exceeded.

Sampling Point Count Indicates the number of


sampling points.

TopN Problem Time Point Indicates the TopN


problematic time point and
Low MOS Count the corresponding number
of times the MOS is low.

TopN Problem eNodeB Indicates the TopN


problematic eNodeB and the

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Item Type Parameter Description

Low MOS Count corresponding number of


times the MOS is low.

SRVCC Failure Count Indicates the number of


failures.

Execution Count Indicates the number of


execution times.

SRVCC Success Rate Indicates the SRVCC


success rate.

TopN Problem Time Point Indicates the TopN


problematic time point and
SRVCC Exception Count the corresponding number
of SRVCC exceptions.

TopN Problem eNodeB Indicates the TopN


problematic eNodeB and the
SRVCC Exception Count corresponding number of
SRVCC exceptions.

TopN Problem eNodeB Indicates the TopN


problematic eNodeB and the
Abnormal B1B2 Issuing corresponding number of
Count times B1 or B2 is issued.

Table 11-9 VoLTE Theme Point Information (GEN VoLTE) window


Item Type Parameter Description

Access Fail Access Attempt Time Indicates the access attempt


start time point.

Access Failure Time Indicates the access attempt


failure time point.

Call Drop Call Connection Success Indicates the call connection


Time success time point.

Call Drop Time Indicates the call drop time.

Access Delay Access Attempt Time Indicates the access attempt


start time point.

Access Success Time Indicates the access attempt


success time point.

MOS Abnormal MOS Time Indicates the time for the


sampling point whose MOS
is lower than the threshold.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Item Type Parameter Description

Longitude Indicates the longitude of


the sampling point whose
MOS is lower than the
threshold.

Latitude Indicates the latitude of the


sampling point whose MOS
is lower than the threshold.

SRVCC SRVCC Attempt Time Indicates the SRVCC


attempt start time point.

SRVCC Failure Time Indicates the SRVCC failure


time point.

Same for All Index Indicates the problematic


point number.

Filename Indicates the name of a file


where a problematic point is
located.

Exception Side Indicates the exception side.

Failure Classification Indicates layer 1


demarcation.

Deeper Failure Indicates layer 2


Classification demarcation.

Root Cause Indicates layer 3


demarcation, that is, RF
causes (empty if air
interface causes do not
exist).

Cell Name Indicates the cell name


between the attempt and
success or during the VoLTE
problematic point evaluation
period.

eNodeBID Indicates the eNodeB ID


between the attempt and
success or during the RF
correlation period.

RSRP Avg Indicates the average RSRP


between the attempt and
success or during the RF
correlation period.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Item Type Parameter Description

SINR Avg Indicates the average SINR


between the attempt and
success or during the RF
correlation period.

Tx Power Avg Indicates the average Tx


power between the attempt
and success or during the
RF correlation period.

Optimization Suggestion Indicates the optimization


suggestion.

Table 11-10 VoLTE Theme Result View (ROMES VoLTE) window


Item Type Parameter Description

Access Fail Route Name Indicates the route name.

Fail Times Indicates the number of


failures.

Access Times Indicates the number of


access times.

Call Setup Success Rate Indicates the access success


rate.

Percentage in Call Setup Indicates the problematic


point percentage.

Call Drop Route Name Indicates the route name.

Dropped Times Indicates the number of


failures.

Access Times Indicates the total number of


calls.

Call Drop Rate Indicates the call drop rate.

Percentage in Call Dropped Indicates the problematic


point percentage.

Setup Latency Route Name Indicates the route name.

Average latency Indicates the average delay.

Top Poor 20% Latency Indicates the Top20% low


value (in descending order).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Item Type Parameter Description

Times of Latency Longer Indicates the number of


than 4s times the delay is greater
than the threshold.

Percentage in Setup Latency Indicates the problematic


point percentage.

MOS Route Name Indicates the route name.

Average MOS Indicates the MOS.

Top Poor 20% Latency Indicates the Top20% low


value (in descending order).

Times of MOS Lower than 2 Indicates the number of


times when a MOS
threshold is not exceeded.

Percentage in Poor MOS Indicates the problematic


point percentage.

Table 11-11 VoLTE Theme Point Information (ROMES VoLTE) window


Parameter Description

Side1 Indicates the calling/called terminal.

Side2

Filename Indicates the name of a file where a


problematic point is located.

Call End Indicates call termination.

LON/LAT Indicates the longitude and latitude.

Problem type Indicates the problem type.

Cause Indicates the problem cause.

RF Analysis Indicates the problem cause.

Suggestion Indicates the optimization suggestion.

Resource Usage Rate Indicates the resource utilization.

Serving Cell Indicates the serving cell.

Neighbour Cell Indicates the neighboring cell.

UE Txpower Indicates the average power.

Distance between place1 and place2 Indicates the distance between place 1 and
place 2.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 11 Data Analysis (LTE)

Parameter Description

RSRP/RSCP/RSSI Indicates the reference signal received


power/received signal code power/received
signal strength indicator.

PCI/PSC/BSIC Indicates the physical cell identifier/primary


scrambling code/base transceiver station
identity code.

POLQA Indicates MOS.

RF Mode Indicates the RF mode.

Call Type Indicates the call type. MTC indicates the


mobile terminated call and MOC indicates
the mobile originated call.

Route Name Indicates the route name.

Call Technology Indicates the call technology.

Sample Technology Indicates the voice MOS sample


technology.

Vocoder Indicates the voice coding rate.

Bitrate Indicates the bit rate.

Sample Start para Indicates the sample start para. For


example, Side1 Sample StartLAT indicates
sample start latitude of system 1.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to analyze the TD-SCDMA data.


12.1 TD-SCDMA Coverage Overlap Analysis
This section describes TD-SCDMA coverage overlap analysis. The results of TD-SCDMA
coverage overlap analysis enable you to obtain data, such as the network quality and cell
relationships at all DT points within the coverage of a TD-SCDMA cell, thereby easily
locating network problems.
12.2 Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis (TD-SCDMA)
This section describes the TD-SCDMA missing neighboring cell analysis. Missing
neighboring cells are neighboring cells whose data is not included in the neighboring cell data
of a network. If the problem of missing neighboring cells occurs, handovers may fail,
resulting in call drops. Based on the missing neighboring cell analysis, you can accurately
locate the areas where the problem of missing neighboring cells occurs and obtain the
information about the missing intra-frequency neighboring cells and missing inter-frequency
neighboring cells. The missing neighboring cell analysis provides guidelines for optimizing
intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells to improve the neighboring cell
optimization efficiency.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

12.1 TD-SCDMA Coverage Overlap Analysis


This section describes TD-SCDMA coverage overlap analysis. The results of TD-SCDMA
coverage overlap analysis enable you to obtain data, such as the network quality and cell
relationships at all DT points within the coverage of a TD-SCDMA cell, thereby easily
locating network problems.

Context
You can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information only by cell. In addition, you
can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information about only one cell at a time.
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles of both UEs and scanners.
The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles of UEs and scanners are
the same. The following description takes how to view the coverage analysis results of DT
logfiles of UEs as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the TD-SCDMA coverage overlap analysis type.

Step 2 Import TD-SCDMA engineering parameters.

Step 3 Calculate cell radius.

Step 4 Execute the analysis task.


After the analysis, the Assistant automatically opens the TD-SCDMA Theme(UE) tab page,
which displays the analysis result. For pictures of the TD-SCDMA Theme(UE) tab page, see
Figure 12-1. For details about each window, see Table 12-1.
NOTE

On the Project tab page, right-click an analysis set node for which the analysis task is complete and
choose TD-SCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually enter the TD-
SCDMA Theme(UE) tab page and view the analysis results of UEs.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

Figure 12-1 TD-SCDMA Theme(UE) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

Table 12-1 Windows on the TD-SCDMA Theme(UE) tab page


Window Name Description

Theme Result View window Lists detailed information about the


coverage analysis result in a table. If the
analysis result is empty, see 20.6 What
Should I Do When No Theme Analysis
Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, cell
parameter information is displayed by row.
The first three columns are fixed
parameters. The parameters in other
columns are configured coverage-related
parameters, for example, the coverage
overlap rate. The File List column lists the
DT logfiles, that is, the list of DT logfiles
related to the serving cell of the DT point.
The analysis results are identified in
different colors. For example, if the over-
coverage rate of a cell exceeds the alarm
threshold, the analysis results are displayed
in red.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar. In the


displayed Columns Setting dialog box, set
the parameters to be displayed in the Theme
Result View window.
l In the Theme Result View window, double-
click the cell analysis result in a row to drill
down the analysis result. If the map view is
displayed in red during the drilldown and
data view synchronization, see 20.7 What
Should I Do When the Map View Is
Displayed in Red During the Drilldown
and Data View Synchronization?.

Theme Detail window Shows detailed information about the


coverage analysis result in charts.
The Over Coverage tab page displays
detailed information about the coverage
overlap analysis result. For parameter
description, see Over Coverage tab.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

Window Name Description

TD-SCDMA Theme(UE) Map window Displays detailed information about the


coverage analysis result on a map. For
details about the operations on the map, see
6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Coverage overlap DT points or DT
points with no primary serving cells are
displayed in red.
l Normal DT points are displayed in
green.
l DT points that do not belong to the
current cell are displayed in gray.
NOTE
l You can click a DT point in the TD-SCDMA
Theme(UE) Map window and query the
longitude and latitude information, as well as
related cell information about the selected
DT point in the two areas in the lower part of
the Theme Detail window.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the
active set through solid lines and to the cells
in the monitor set through broken lines.
l Under the Theme Layer node on the Map
Layers tab page in the right side of the map,
click the required layer to view the problem
DT points and cell information of a specific
theme.

----End

12.2 Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis (TD-SCDMA)


This section describes the TD-SCDMA missing neighboring cell analysis. Missing
neighboring cells are neighboring cells whose data is not included in the neighboring cell data
of a network. If the problem of missing neighboring cells occurs, handovers may fail,
resulting in call drops. Based on the missing neighboring cell analysis, you can accurately
locate the areas where the problem of missing neighboring cells occurs and obtain the
information about the missing intra-frequency neighboring cells and missing inter-frequency
neighboring cells. The missing neighboring cell analysis provides guidelines for optimizing
intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells to improve the neighboring cell
optimization efficiency.

Context
The Assistant determines whether measurement cells are neighboring cells according to the
RSCP and Ec/Io values of the measurement cells. After that, the Assistant compares the data
of these determined neighboring cells with the imported neighboring cell data, if the imported
neighboring cell data does not contain the data of any determined neighboring cells, the
determined neighboring cell is considered as a missing neighboring cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

The Assistant supports the TD-SCDMA missing neighboring cell analysis for the DT logfiles
collected by scanners.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the missing neighboring TD-SCDMA cell analysis type.

Step 2 Import TD-SCDMA engineering parameters.

Step 3 Calculate cell radius.

Step 4 Execute the analysis task.


After the analysis, the Assistant automatically opens the TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab
page, which displays the analysis result. For pictures of the TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner)
tab page, see Figure 12-2. For details about each window, see Table 12-2.
NOTE

On the Project tab page, right-click an analysis set node for which the analysis task is complete and
choose TD-SCDMA Theme Result > Scanner Result from the shortcut menu to manually enter the
TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page and view the analysis results.

Figure 12-2 TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

Table 12-2 Windows on the TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page


Window Name Description

Theme Result View window Lists the missing neighboring cell analysis
result in a table. If the analysis result is
empty, see 20.6 What Should I Do When
No Theme Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, cell
parameter information is displayed by row.
For parameter description, see Theme
Result Review window.
NOTE

l You can click on the toolbar. In the


displayed Columns dialog box, set the
parameters to be displayed in the Theme
Result View window.
l In the Theme Result View window, double-
click the cell analysis result in a row to drill
down the analysis result. If the map view is
displayed in red during the drilldown and
data view synchronization, see 20.7 What
Should I Do When the Map View Is
Displayed in Red During the Drilldown
and Data View Synchronization?.

Theme Detail window Displays detailed information about the


missing neighboring cell analysis result in
charts.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 12 Data Analysis (TD-SCDMA)

Window Name Description

TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner) Map Displays detailed information about the


window missing neighboring cell analysis result on a
map. For details about the operations on the
map, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
You can learn about the size and location of
the missing neighboring cell area based on
different colors of the DT points.
l Blue cells indicate configured intra-
frequency neighboring cells of the
serving cell.
l Green cells indicate configured inter-
frequency neighboring cells of the
serving cell.
l Orange cells indicate missing
neighboring cells of the serving cell.
NOTE
l You can click a DT point in the TD-SCDMA
Theme(UE) Map window and query the
longitude and latitude information, as well as
related cell information about the selected
DT point in the two areas in the lower part of
the Theme Detail window.
DT points and top N cells are connected by
solid lines.
l Under the Theme Layer node on the Map
Layers tab page in the right side of the map,
click the required layer to view the problem
DT points and cell information of a specific
theme.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

13 Viewing the Analysis Results

About This Chapter

This section describes how to view the analysis results. The Assistant can display the IEs and
KPIs in charts and tables in the map, chart, and list views.
13.1 Viewing IE Analysis Results
This section describes how to view IEs. After an analysis task is executed, you can take
analysis group as an object and view the statistical results of IEs in each analysis group on the
IE tab page or in multiple IE view windows. You can also present multiple IEs in a view
window so that different IEs or the same IE of different analysis groups can be compared and
analyzed.
13.2 Viewing KPI Analysis Results
This section describes how to view KPI analysis results. After an analysis task is executed,
you can view and analyze KPI or events related to KPIs by analysis group.
13.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Event View Windows
After an analysis task is executed, you can view the Event information in a map window, , or
a table window on the Event tab page. This helps you learn the overall distribution of each
Event of DT data in an analysis group.
13.4 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Messages View Windows
After an analysis task is executed, you can view the messages information in a map window, a
chart window, or a table window on the Messages tab page. This helps you learn the overall
distribution of each messages of DT data in an analysis group.
13.5 IE Combination Query
This section describes how to use the IE combination query function to query IE statistics
when one or more IEs meet certain conditions. You can also query the statistical result of
events that occur at the same time with these IEs so that you can efficiently learn the network
status and analyze network problems.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

13.1 Viewing IE Analysis Results


This section describes how to view IEs. After an analysis task is executed, you can take
analysis group as an object and view the statistical results of IEs in each analysis group on the
IE tab page or in multiple IE view windows. You can also present multiple IEs in a view
window so that different IEs or the same IE of different analysis groups can be compared and
analyzed.

13.1.1 Viewing the Analysis Results on the Project Tab Page


After an analysis task is performed, you can browse the IEs recorded in DT logfiles on the
Project tab page. This helps you view the IE statistical results in multiple view windows.

Prerequisites
l You have set an IE template and selected IEs to be viewed. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting
KPI Template and IE Template.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Procedure
Step 1 Click the Project tab and select an analysis group to be viewed in Analysis Group.

Step 2 View the IE information about a selected analysis group.

l Click the IEs one by one in the lower part of the Project tab page. For details about the
IEs, see Table 13-1.

l Type an IE to be queried in the text box of the line where is located, and press
Enter.

For detailed description about the IEs, see 21.1 IE Descriptions.

Table 13-1 Structure of the IE navigation tree

First-Level Second-Level Description


Directory Directory

UE Common Common IEs.

Custom Customized IEs.

GSM GSM UE IEs.

WCDMA WCDMA UE IEs.

LTE LTE UE IEs.

Vocoder Usage IEs related to GSM voice coding schemes.

Delay Delay-related IEs.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

First-Level Second-Level Description


Directory Directory

AppLayer Application layer throughput on the uplink and


Analysis downlink.

MOS IEs related to speech quality evaluation.


It includes PESQ LQ, PESQ Score, PESQ P862.1, and
PESQ Ie.
NOTE
The Assistant can analyze the speech quality evaluation data
collected by the GENEX Probe.

Crossing Table The counters are displayed in the crossing table.

Event Event List.

Scanner WCDMA TopN IEs of a WCDMA network that are displayed after the
top N data of a scanner is analyzed.

GSM TopN IEs of a GSM network that are displayed after the top N
data of a scanner is analyzed.

LTE TopN IEs of an LTE network that are displayed after the top N
data of a scanner is analyzed.

WCDMA CW Data reported during the WCDMA CW test.

WCDMA RSSI Data reported during the WCDMA RSSI test.

Custom Customized IEs.

WCDMA WCDMA frequency spectrum analysis.


Spectrum
Analysis

GMS Spectrum GSM frequency spectrum analysis.


Analysis

LTE Spectrum LTE frequency spectrum analysis.


Analysis

Query IE combination query.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
You can view the statistical information about the IEs that are listed on the Project tab page in
multiple view windows.

13.1.2 Viewing the Analysis Results in the IE View Windows


After an analysis task is executed, you can view the IE information in the map window, chart
window, or table window on the IE tab page. This section helps you learn the overall
distribution of each IE of drive test (DT) data in an analysis group.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Prerequisites
l The IEs are displayed on the IE tab page. For details, see 13.1.1 Viewing the Analysis
Results on the Project Tab Page.
l You have installed the Google Earth on your PC before viewing indicators on the Google
Earth.

Context
The modes of displaying IEs are as follows:

l Map
Different IEs are displayed as different layers in a map window. The statistical
information of multiple IEs (including IEs of different analysis groups) can be displayed
in a map window.
l Chart window
The chart window is categorized into the line chart window, pie chart window, and
histogram window. The statistical information of multiple IEs (including IEs of different
analysis groups) can be displayed in a line chart window. The statistical information of
only one IE can be displayed on a pie chart window or a histogram window.
l Table window
The statistical information of multiple IEs (including IEs of different analysis groups)
can be displayed in a table window.
Each window can be displayed in two modes:
l The window, displayed in a new window, is used to display the distribution of a certain
IE.
l The window, displayed in the current active window, is used to compare the data of the
same IE in different analysis groups.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Project tab and search for the IE name to be viewed in .
NOTE

Dynamic IEs cannot be searched for.

Step 2 Select an IE to be viewed.

Step 3 Select the mode of displaying IEs.

If You Need To... Then...

View data in a Map window Right-click an IE and choose Display On Map from the
new window shortcut menu.

Google Earth Right-click an IE and choose Display On GoogleEarth


window from the shortcut menu.

Line chart Right-click an IE and choose Display On Chart from


window the shortcut menu.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

If You Need To... Then...

Pie chart Right-click an IE and choose Display On Caky from


window the shortcut menu.

Histogram Right-click an IE and choose Display On Histogram


window from the shortcut menu.

Table view Right-click an IE and choose Display On Sheet from


window the shortcut menu.
IE details are displayed on the Sheet tab page.
IE statistics (such as IE maximum value, minimum
value, average value, CDF 5%, variance, IE quantity
and percentage in each distribution range, and IE total
number) is displayed on the Statistic tab page.

Custom linear 1. Right-click an IE and choose Custom Display on


chart view Chart > X Axis from the shortcut menu.
window 2. Right-click another IE and choose Custom Display
on Chart > Y Axis from the shortcut menu.
A custom chart with the selected IE in a as the x-axis
and the selected IE in b as the y-axis is automatically
generated in the Assistant.
Right-click a chart and the shortcut menus include:
l Modify Series Data: enables you to modify the
display scales of the x-axis and y-axis.
l Edit: enables you to edit the chart.
l Curve Fitting: enables you to fit discrete points on
the x-axis and y-axis to a smooth curve based on an
algorithm.

Web map Right-click an IE and choose Display On Web Map


window from the shortcut menu.

IE alarm Right-click an IE and choose Alarm Threshold Setting


threshold from the shortcut menu.
settings After you set an IE threshold value, the IEs meet the
window threshold are displayed in red.
Value Setting: The IE value can be set bi-directionally.
and indicates that the intersection set of two values can
be used. or indicates that the union set of two values
can be used.
Region Setting: in indicates inside the area and outside
indicates outside the area.

View data in the current active Right-click an IE and choose Display On Active View
window Type from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
View Type can be map window, line chart window, or table
window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

NOTE
The IEs under the Common node on the IE tab page can be displayed in a map window, Google Earth
window, line chart window, or table window. IEs under the Common node are displayed on a map,
Google Earth, line chart, or table.

Step 4 View the selected IE windows on the Overview tab page. IE windows can be synchronously
displayed on the Overview tab page.
NOTE
You can drag and drop an IE on the IE tab page to display it in the current active window. Alternatively,
you can drag and drop multiple IEs to display them in the current active window. You can drag an NE to
an open view or drag multiple IEs to one view.
l View data in the map window. For details, see Figure 13-1.

Figure 13-1 Map window

In the Map Layers navigation tree, choose Data Layers > IE Layer, select the IE
names and legends to be viewed on the map.
You can also select multiple IEs to display them as layers on the map.
For details on relevant operations in the map window, see Setting Layer Display
Properties and Configuring Legends.
l View IEs in a chart window or a table window.
– For details on the chart window, see 19.2 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in
the Chart View Window.
– For details on the table window, see 19.3 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in
the Table View Window.
l View data in the Measurement Information window.
Choose View > Measurement Information on the menu bar. The Measurement
Information window is displayed.
On the Overview tab page, the information in the Measurement Information window
and table view window can be displayed synchronously.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

l In the map window, locate the pointer to a cell layer, the information about engineering
parameter fields of this cell is displayed. Engineering parameter fields vary according to
the network system.
NOTE
After engineering parameters are imported into the Assistant, the information about an engineering
parameter field is displayed only after the engineering parameter field matches the field in the
Assistant. Otherwise, the field information is not displayed.
l In the map window, select a DT point and then view the related information in the sub-
windows in the Theme Detail window. Note that you can press the UP (LEFT) arrow
key or DOWN (RIGHT) arrow key to switch from one DT point to another DT point.
NOTE
Press the UP (LEFT) arrow key to switch to the previous DT point or DOWN (RIGHT) arrow
key to switch to the next DT point.

----End

13.1.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Predefined View


Windows
View windows are used to display test data. When drilling down KPI analysis result and
theme analysis result, you can open view windows as required to view the test data.

Context
The Assistant provides the following types of view windows: air interface parameter view,
message view, theme result view, map view, and theme detail view. If the existing view
windows cannot meet your requirement, you can customize view windows.
On the Assistant, data in the view windows are displayed in charts, lists, or combination of
charts and lists. For details about view windows, see 13.1.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in
the Predefined View Windows.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > Forms or shortcut menu options to open the view windows to view the test
data.
The view windows that can be opened vary according to analysis scenarios. For example, the
Theme Result View can be opened only when theme analysis results are queried.
Step 2 Optional: Set the attributes of view windows as required.
For details, see 13.1.4 Configuring the View Window.

----End

13.1.4 Configuring the View Window


This section describes how to configure the Layer-3 message view window, event view
window, and theme result view window.

Prerequisites
You have opened the view window to be configured. For details about how to open a view
window, see 13.1.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Predefined View Windows.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Context
For details about view windows, see 19.4 Interface Description: View Window
Management.

Procedure
l Configure the Layer-3 message view window and event view window.
a. In the L3 Message window or Event window, Right-click and then choose one
message or event > Properties, A dialog box is displayed for you to configure the
attributes of the view window.
b. Set the window name in Name.
c. Select the messages to be analyzed on the Messages tab page.
d. Select the events to be analyzed on the Events tab page.
e. Set the parameter display style on the Columns tab page.
n Select the parameters to be displayed by clicking >, >>, <, or <<.
n Adjust the sequence of displayed parameters by clicking Up or Down.
n Set the parameter name by clicking Edit.
f. Click OK.
l Configure the theme result view window.

a. Click on the toolbar in the Theme Result View window. The Columns dialog
box is displayed.
b. Set the parameter display style.
n Select the parameters to be displayed by clicking >, >>, <, or <<.
n Adjust the sequence of displayed parameters by clicking Up or Down.
c. Click OK.
----End

13.2 Viewing KPI Analysis Results


This section describes how to view KPI analysis results. After an analysis task is executed,
you can view and analyze KPI or events related to KPIs by analysis group.

Prerequisites
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l A KPI is selected. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.

Context
The KPI analysis results are the analysis results of only the KPIs that are selected in the KPI
template.
After an analysis task is executed, you can view or copy KPI analysis results on the Overview
tab page.
The Assistant can search for and filter the KPI drilldown events, which help you search for
certain KPI events.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > KPI Result on the menu bar. The KPI Result window is displayed.

If... Then...

View KPI analysis results of all The following methods can be applied:
analysis groups l Choose View > KPI Reslut on the menu bar. The
KPI Result window is displayed.
l On the Project tab page, right-click Analysis Group
and choose View KPI Result from the shortcut menu.
The KPI Result dialog box is displayed.

View KPI analysis results of a 1. On the Project tab page, choose Analysis Group >
specific analysis group Analysis Group Name.
2. Right-click an analysis group and choose View KPI
Result from the shortcut menu. The KPI Result
dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 In the KPI Result dialog box, view or copy KPI analysis results and search for or filter KPI-
related events.
For the details about the area divisions of the interface, see 19.20 Interface Description:
Viewing KPI Results in the KPI Result Window.

If... Then...

View KPI analysis l In area (1) in the KPI Result dialog box, double-click a
results KPI. Then, the related information is displayed in areas (2),
(3), and (4).

l In area (1), select a KPI value and then click to view


the KPI analysis result by test terminal. Then, click to
return to the KPI analysis window that takes the analysis
group as the analysis object.

Copy KPI analysis In area (1), right-click one or multiple KPIs and choose Copy
results from the shortcut menu to copy KPI analysis results.
NOTE
l You can also press Ctrl + C to copy KPI analysis results.
l To export results successfully, you must ensure that the format of
the copied KPIs must be consistent with the format selected in the
KPI Results dialog box.

Export KPI analysis


results Click on the toolbar to export the analysis results of the
KPIs that are displayed in the current window as an .xml file.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

If... Then...

Search for or filter KPI- 1. Double-click a KPI in area (4) to view the KPI-related
related events events in area (2).
2. Right-click one or multiple KPIs in area (2) and choose
Find from the shortcut menu to search for KPI-related
events.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
You can further drill down events in area (2) to view the details about KPI analysis results.
For details, see 14.2 Drilling Down Event Analysis Results.

13.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Event View


Windows
After an analysis task is executed, you can view the Event information in a map window, , or
a table window on the Event tab page. This helps you learn the overall distribution of each
Event of DT data in an analysis group.

Prerequisites
l The Events are displayed on the Event tab page. For details, see 13.1.1 Viewing the
Analysis Results on the Project Tab Page.
l You have installed the Google Earth on your PC before viewing indicators on the Google
Earth.

Context
The modes of displaying Events are as follows:

l Map
Different Events are displayed as different layers in a map window. The statistical
information of multiple Events (including Events of different analysis groups) can be
displayed in a map window.
l Table window
The statistical information of multiple Events (including Events of different analysis
groups) can be displayed in a table window.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Project tab and search for the Event name to be viewed in .

Step 2 Select an Event to be viewed.

Step 3 Select the mode of displaying Events.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

If You Need To... Then...

View data in a Map window Right-click an Event and choose Display On Map from
new window the shortcut menu.

Google Earth Right-click an Event and choose Display On


window GoogleEarth from the shortcut menu.

Table view Right-click an Event and choose Display On Sheet


window from the shortcut menu.

Web map Right-click an Event and choose Display On Web Map


window from the shortcut menu.

View data in the current active Right-click an Event and choose Display On Active
window View Type from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
View Type can be map window, or table window.

Step 4 View the selected Event windows on the Overview tab page. Event windows can be
synchronously displayed on the Overview tab page.
NOTE
You can drag and drop an Event on the Event tab page to display it in the current active window.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop multiple Events to display them in the current active window. You
can drag an NE to an open view or drag multiple Events to one view.
l View data in the map window. For details, see Figure 13-2.

Figure 13-2 Map window

In the Map Layers navigation tree, choose Data Layers > Event Layer, select the
Event names and legends to be viewed on the map.
You can also select multiple Events to display them as layers on the map.
For details about relevant operations in the map window, see Setting Layer Display
Properties and Configuring Legends.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

l In the map window, locate the pointer to a cell layer, the information about engineering
parameter fields of this cell is displayed. Engineering parameter fields vary according to
the network system.
NOTE
After engineering parameters are imported into the Assistant, the information about an engineering
parameter field is displayed only after the engineering parameter field matches the field in the
Assistant. Otherwise, the field information is not displayed.

----End

13.4 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Messages View


Windows
After an analysis task is executed, you can view the messages information in a map window, a
chart window, or a table window on the Messages tab page. This helps you learn the overall
distribution of each messages of DT data in an analysis group.

Context
The statistical information of multiple Messages (including Messages of different analysis
groups) can be displayed in a table window.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Project tab and search for the message name to be viewed in .

Step 2 Select a messages to be viewed.

Step 3 Select the mode of displaying IEs.


If You Need To... Then...

View data in a Table view Right-click an IE and choose Display On Sheet from
new window window the shortcut menu.

----End

13.5 IE Combination Query


This section describes how to use the IE combination query function to query IE statistics
when one or more IEs meet certain conditions. You can also query the statistical result of
events that occur at the same time with these IEs so that you can efficiently learn the network
status and analyze network problems.

Prerequisites
l You have set an IE template and selected the IEs to be queried. For details, see 6.2.1
Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Context
The IE combination query function enables you to obtain the query results from the database
by setting a set of IE query conditions. The query results are displayed by analysis group on
the Assistant. For example, to learn the coverage status of an island, you can set TA to greater
than or equal to 2 and RxLev to greater than -80 dBm to query the statistical results of TA,
RxLev, and other IEs (such as BER and FER) and of the events that occur at the same time
with these IEs (such as handovers and call drops). You can also query the results on a map or
in a table.
You can query the results by IE, time, or region. Alternatively, you can query the results by
combining the three conditions in any form.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Combine Query. The New Query dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 13-3.

Figure 13-3 New Query dialog box

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Step 2 In the Query Name text box, edit the query name. The first query name is Query1 by default.

Step 3 Set the query condition combination relationships.

Step 4 Set the query conditions.

If You Need To... Then...

Query the statistics by See Setting the conditions for querying by IE.
IE NOTE
If you need to view dynamic IEs after the query, expand the dynamic IE
nodes in the IE tree before creating a query task.

Query the statistics by See Setting the conditions for querying by time.
time

Query the statistics by See Setting the conditions for querying by region.
region

l Setting the conditions for querying by IE


If you set Logical Operation to and, the query result must meet all preset IE filter
conditions. If you set Logical Operation to or, the query result meets any one of the
preset IE filter conditions.
a. In the IE Filter Condition area, click Add. The Add IE Condition Item dialog
box is displayed.
b. Select the name and range of an IE to set an IE subcondition.
Expand the IE navigation tree and double-click an IE. The selected IEs are
displayed in the text box in the left pane. Select an operator from the drop-down list
in the middle and enter a value in the text box in the right pane, as shown in Figure
13-4.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Figure 13-4 Add IE Condition Item dialog box

c. Click OK.
The system adds the set query conditions to the IE Filter Condition area.
d. Optional: Perform step a through c to add more conditions for querying by IE.
Select a set condition for querying by IE and click Delete to delete the condition.
Click Clear to delete all set conditions for querying by IE.
l Setting the conditions for querying by time
a. In the Time Filter Condition area, click Add. The Add Time Condition Item
dialog box is displayed.
b. Set Start Time and End Time, as shown in Figure 13-5.
NOTE
The start time must be earlier than the end time.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Figure 13-5 Add Time Condition Item dialog box

c. Click OK.
Then, the system adds the set query conditions to the Time Filter Condition area.
You can add multiple subconditions in the Time filter condition area. The system
analyzes the IEs that meet any of the subconditions.
l Setting the conditions for querying by region
a. Select the region mode in the row where Logical Operation resides.
n in: statistics within the region are collected.
n outside: statistics outside the region are collected.
b. In the Region Filter Condition area, select the region where the IE resides.

Step 5 (Optional) Click Save to export the set query conditions.


The conditions can be exported as an XML file. You can also click Import in the upper part
of the New Query window to import the query conditions.

Step 6 Then, click Next.

Step 7 In the Available IE area, select the IEs to be queried and add them to the Selected IE area.

Step 8 (Optional) Click Save to export the set query IEs.


The IEs can be exported as an XML file. You can also click Import in the upper part of the
New Query window to import the query IEs.

Step 9 Click OK.

Step 10 View the IE combination query result.


1. On the IE tab page, select a newly created query name under Query.
2. Right-click the Result node of the query task and choose a IE view mode from the
shortcut menu. The system provides various IE view modes. For details, see 13.1.2
Viewing the Analysis Results in the IE View Windows.
NOTE
If you select Display on sheet to view the IE combination query results, you are advised to view
the details about the IEs that meet the conditions on the sheet page and statistical results on the
Statistic page.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 13 Viewing the Analysis Results

Follow-up Procedure
The IE combination query result is automatically saved in the project. You can view the IE
combination query result when opening the project next time.
l You can create a maximum of five query tasks for one analysis group. The query
comparison results are displayed on a map or sheet.
l If you need to modify the query conditions, right-click a query name and choose Modify
Query from the shortcut menu to reset the IE combination query conditions.
l If you need to delete a query task, right-click the query task name and choose Delete
Query from the shortcut menu to delete the query task.
l If you need to delete all query tasks, right-click a query task name and choose Query >
Clear Query to delete all query tasks.
l If you need to modify a query task name, right-click the query task name and choose
Rename Query from the shortcut menu to change the query task name.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

About This Chapter

After an analysis task is executed, you can drill down IEs and KPI-related events in the map
window. After drilling down an IE or event, the Assistant provides detailed analysis
information about the IE or event, which helps locate network problems.

NOTE

The drill-down page does not display key HiSilicon events and user-defined software events.
When you drill down the analysis result of an IE or event, the result is displayed associatedly based on
the DT data parsing sequence. Locate the row of the latest time point and search for the specific IE or
event upwardly.

14.1 Drilling Down IE Analysis Results


This section describes how to drill down IEs. You can drill down one or multiple DT points of
an IE in the map window. Drilling down IEs can help you locate network problems.
14.2 Drilling Down Event Analysis Results
This section describes how to drill down event analysis results. Event drilldown can help you
obtain the detailed information about KPIs of an event or multiple events and help you learn
about the detailed information about air interface messages, network quality, and DT tracks
before and after one event or multiple events occur. In this way, you can locate network
problems easily.
14.3 Customizing the Display of IE/Event Analysis Results
After the drilling analysis is completed, you can view the details about an IE/event (or some
events). To query the information about the results of other IEs, you can customize the display
of the IE/event analysis results.
14.4 Exporting Drilling Results
After an analysis task is complete, drill and export the result about a specific IE or event to
query the network status before and after exceptions occur, and export and save the result.
You can export required IE and events without drilling them.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

14.1 Drilling Down IE Analysis Results


This section describes how to drill down IEs. You can drill down one or multiple DT points of
an IE in the map window. Drilling down IEs can help you locate network problems.

Prerequisites
l An IE template is set. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Procedure
l Drill down a DT point.

a. Click the Project tab and search for the IE name to be viewed in .
b. Right-click the required IE and choose Display On Map. The Map window is
displayed.
c. Double-click a DT point. The IE Drill Down window is displayed.
In the IE Drill Down window, set the drilldown time range. The Assistant then
drills down the detailed indicators of the IE according to the DT data collected
within the specified time range.
d. Click OK.
After the system drills down the IEs, windows are displayed to show the drilldown
results. For description about each window, see View Windows Predefined for IE/
Event Drilldown Analysis Results.
NOTE
IE drilldown can be performed in the Chart window or Sheet window.
l Drill down multiple DT points.

a. Click the Project tab and search for the IE name to be viewed in .
b. Right-click the required IE and choose Display On Map. The Map window is
displayed.

c. Select the mouse pointer as .


d. Select multiple DT points to be drilled down while holding down the Ctrl key.
double-click the selected DT point. The Event Drill Down window is displayed.
In the IE Drill Down window, set the drilldown time range. The Assistant then
drills down the detailed indicators of the IE according to the DT data collected
within the specified time range.
e. Click OK.
After the system drills down the IEs, windows are displayed to show the drilldown
results. For description about each window, see View Windows Predefined for IE/
Event Drilldown Analysis Results.
----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

Example
l Figure 14-1 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of GSM IEs.

Figure 14-1 Drilldown analysis results of GSM IEs

l Figure 14-2 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of WCDMA
IEs.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

Figure 14-2 Drilldown analysis results of WCDMA IEs

l Figure 14-3 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of LTE IEs.

Figure 14-3 Drilldown analysis results of LTE IEs

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

l Figure 14-4 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of TD-SCDMA
IEs.

Figure 14-4 Drilldown analysis results of TD-SCDMA IEs

14.2 Drilling Down Event Analysis Results


This section describes how to drill down event analysis results. Event drilldown can help you
obtain the detailed information about KPIs of an event or multiple events and help you learn
about the detailed information about air interface messages, network quality, and DT tracks
before and after one event or multiple events occur. In this way, you can locate network
problems easily.

Prerequisites
l You have viewed the KPI analysis results. For details, see 13.2 Viewing KPI Analysis
Results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.

Context
You can drill down GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE events. The procedure
for drilling down GSM events is the same as that for drilling down WCDMA events and LTE
events.

Procedure
l In area (2) in the KPI Result window, drill down events.

For details about the area divisions of the KPI Result dialog box, see 19.20 Interface
Description: Viewing KPI Results in the KPI Result Window.

a. Drill down events.


If you want to... Then...

Drill down a single event The following methods can be applied:


l Double-click an event.
l Right-click an event, and then choose Drill Down
from the shortcut menu.

Drill down multiple 1. Right-click in area (2), and then choose Select
events All from the shortcut menu.
2. Right-click the selected events, and then choose
Drill Down from the shortcut menu.

b. Set the time range for the event drilldown in the Event Drill Down dialog box.

The Assistant drills down the indicators related to one or multiple events in the DT
data that is collected within the specified time range.
c. Click OK.
After the system drills down the events, windows are displayed to show the
drilldown results. For description about each window, see View Windows
Predefined for IE/Event Drilldown Analysis Results.
l Drill down events in the map window.
a. Drill down events.
If you want to... Then...

Drill down an event in 1. On the IE tab page, right-click an event and


the map window choose Display On Map from the shortcut menu.
The Map window is displayed.
2. Select an event and double-click the left mouse
button. The Event Drill Down window is
displayed.
NOTE
Events can be drilled down in the Chart window or
Sheet window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

If you want to... Then...

Drill down multiple 1. On the IE tab page, right-click an event and


events in the map choose Display On Map from the shortcut menu.
window The Map window is displayed.

2. Select the mouse pointer as .


3. Select multiple events to be drilled down while
holding down the Ctrl key. Double-click the left
mouse button. The Event Drill Down window is
displayed.

b. In the Event Drill Down window, set the drilldown time range.
The Assistant then drills down the detailed indicators of events according to the DT
data collected within the specified time range.
c. Click OK.
After the system drills down the events, windows are displayed to show the
drilldown results. For description about each window, see View Windows
Predefined for IE/Event Drilldown Analysis Results.
----End

Example
l Figure 14-5 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of GSM events.

Figure 14-5 Drilldown analysis results of GSM events

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

l Figure 14-6 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of WCDMA
events.

Figure 14-6 Drilldown analysis results of WCDMA events

l Figure 14-7 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of LTE events.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

Figure 14-7 Drilldown analysis results of LTE events

14.3 Customizing the Display of IE/Event Analysis Results


After the drilling analysis is completed, you can view the details about an IE/event (or some
events). To query the information about the results of other IEs, you can customize the display
of the IE/event analysis results.

Prerequisites
The drilling analysis has been performed.

Context
After the drilling analysis is performed, you can customize the display of IE analysis results in
the current view or a new view to browse details.

Procedure
Step 1 Add IEs.

If you need to... Then...

Add IEs to a new view Perform Step 2 to Step 7.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

If you need to... Then...

Add IEs to the current view Go to Step 6.

Step 2 Choose View > Forms > Templates > Custom Window. The Custom Window dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Right-click in the Custom Window dialog box, and choose Set Title. The Dialog dialog box
is displayed.
Step 4 Set the view name in the Window Title dialog box.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Customize the display of IEs.


1. Right-click in the view, and choose Custom View from the shortcut menu. The ListView
Custom Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Mode tab, set the numbers of columns and rows in the dialog box according to
the number of IEs.
a. Select the number of columns from the Columns drop-down list box.
b. Select the number of rows from the Rows drop-down list box.
c. Click Font, and set the font of the IEs.
3. On the Cell Contents tab, set the names and values of IEs.
a. Double-click an IE column.
b. Select [1]<>-'', and click Edit. The IE Information dialog box is displayed.
c. Select Text to edit the IE names.
d. Click OK.
e. Select [2]<>-'', and click Edit. The IE Information dialog box is displayed.
f. Select IEs from the Indication list box, and click OK.
g. In the ListView Custom Properties dialog box, click OK.
Step 7 View the values of the IEs in the view.

----End

14.4 Exporting Drilling Results


After an analysis task is complete, drill and export the result about a specific IE or event to
query the network status before and after exceptions occur, and export and save the result.
You can export required IE and events without drilling them.

Prerequisites
l You have configured the IE template. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and
IE Template.
l You have imported the engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 14 Drilling Down Analysis Results

Procedure
l The steps are as follows:

a. Click the Project tap page. Enter the name of the IE in to search for it.
b. Right-click the required IE and choose Display On Map from the shortcut menu.
The Map window is displayed.
c. Double-click a DT point, The IE Drill Down dialog box is displayed.
In the IE Drill Down dialog box, set the time for drilling the data. The Assistant
will drill detailed counters of the IE from the DT data specified by the time range.
d. Click Export. The Drill Down Export Data window is displayed.
Select the IE or events to be exported.
NOTE

The contents for the nodes except Session App Throughput UL and Session App
Throughput DL under the PS Analysis node are exported as separate tables.
e. Select Export Path. The Please Select the file path window is displayed. Enter the
file name and click Save.
The file is saved in csv format.
f. Click OK. The selected IE or events are exported. Open the file to view the result.
NOTE
The result can be drilled in the Chart and Sheet windows of the IE.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

15 Generating an Analysis Report

About This Chapter

This section describes how to generate an analysis report. The Assistant supports the
generation of comprehensive and professional network analysis reports in batches. After an
analysis task is executed, the Assistant generates an analysis report according to the
configured report template. After an analysis task is executed, if you want to generate an
analysis report in other formats, you can selectively generate an analysis report for the
analysis groups that are analyzed completely. The analysis task needs not to be executed
again, thus improving analysis efficiency.
15.1 Analysis Report Types
This section describes the report types supported by the Assistant. The report types supported
are word, excel and PDF.
15.2 Using Report Wizard to Generate a Report
This section describes how to generate one or multiple custom reports with report wizard.
15.3 Generating Reports by Analysis Group
After an analysis task is executed for analysis groups, the Assistant generates an analysis
report according to the preset report template. If you want to generate an analysis report in
other formats, you can selectively generate an analysis report for the analysis groups that are
analyzed completely. The analysis task does not need to be executed again, and therefore
analysis efficiency is improved.
15.4 Generating a Benchmark Report
This section describes how to generate a benchmark report. The benchmark report can show
the comparison analysis of the network data of different operators in different scenarios so
that operators evaluate the network quality by observing the statistical rank of the network
performance. In addition, the benchmark report can show the comparison analysis of the data
before and after the network optimization so that operators learn the operating status of the
swapped network by observing the differences between the KPIs before and after the network
optimization.
15.5 Generating a Single Site Verification Report
This section describes how to generate a single site verification report. A single site
verification report is an analysis report for a single site, which consists of the information
about the common indicators such as the call drop rate, handover success rate, and FTP rate.
Especially at the early stage of network deployment, a single site verification report can help

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

you learn the operating status of a single site so that the workload of manual report output is
reduced and work efficient is improved.
15.6 Generating Service Statistical Reports
This section describes how to generate service statistical reports, which contain MOC and
MTC event and delay information and can help optimization engineers analyze failure causes.
15.7 Generating Custom Cluster Reports
This section describes how to generate custom cluster reports, and can help optimization
engineers analyze failure causes.
15.8 Generating a Cross Table Report
A cross table report is an .xls file composed of multiple sheets. It shows the HSDPA-related
IEs. A comparison report chart can be generated for users to learn the relationship between
HSDPA-related IEs.
15.9 Generating a Speech Quality Evaluation Report
A speech quality evaluation report is an .xls file composed of three sheets. This report
provides the percentage and coding mode of each MOS. A comparison report chart can be
generated for users to learn the relationship between MOSs and speech coding modes.
15.10 Generating an Indoor Distribution Report
Based on the tests on the indoor network environment and the corresponding test logs,
engineers can obtain the indoor distribution reports differentiated by scenario and analyze
those reports. This helps engineers to save time and improve efficiency and accuracy.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

15.1 Analysis Report Types


This section describes the report types supported by the Assistant. The report types supported
are word, excel and PDF.

The Assistant can generate the following types of reports as required:


l For the GSM system:
– CS analysis report. For details, see CS Analysis Report.
– PS analysis report. For details, see PS Analysis Report.
l For the WCDMA system:
– CS analysis report. For details, see CS Analysis Report.
– PS analysis report. For details, see PS Analysis Report.
– Scanner analysis report. For details, see Scanner Analysis Report.
– Cross table report. For details, see 21.4.6 Cross Table Predefined Report.
l For the LTE system:
– ATU analysis report. For details, see ATU Analysis Report.
– UE analysis report. For details, see UE Analysis Report.
– Scanner analysis report. For details, see Scanner Analysis Report.
l For the TD-SCDMA system:
– CS analysis report. For details, see CS Analysis Report.
– PS analysis report. For details, see PS Analysis Report.
l 15.9 Generating a Speech Quality Evaluation Report
l 15.4 Generating a Benchmark Report
l 15.5 Generating a Single Site Verification Report

15.2 Using Report Wizard to Generate a Report


This section describes how to generate one or multiple custom reports with report wizard.

Prerequisites
The data has been analyzed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose report mode.
1. Choose Report > Report Guide. The Report Guide window is displayed.
2. Select a report template, as shown in Figure 15-1.
NOTE
If KPIs and IEs in the report template are not present in a project, the data related to the KPIs and
IEs are not displayed in the generated report.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Figure 15-1 Selecting a report template

3. (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to generate a report
in PDF format.
Step 2 Set the report.
1. Click Project Setting to open the dialog box for setting a report.
You can set the attributes of the report, for example, whether to combine reports and
whether to display Legend on the map. For detailed parameter descriptions, see 6.2.2
Setting Report Attributes.
2. Click OK.
Step 3 (Optional) Set the report filtering criteria.
1. Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-2.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Figure 15-2 Report Guide dialog box

2. In the IE Filter area, click Add.


The Add IE Condition Item dialog box is displayed.
3. Double-click an IE whose report is to be exported. Set the IE value range in the lower
part of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 15-3.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Figure 15-3 Add IE Condition Item

4. Click OK.
5. In the Time Filter Condition area, click Add.
The Add Time Condition Item dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-4.

Figure 15-4 Add Time Condition Item

6. Set the start time and end time. Then, click OK.
7. Click Next.
8. In the displayed dialog box, select the value for Logical Operation.
9. Click OK. The Assistant starts to export the report.

----End

15.3 Generating Reports by Analysis Group


After an analysis task is executed for analysis groups, the Assistant generates an analysis
report according to the preset report template. If you want to generate an analysis report in
other formats, you can selectively generate an analysis report for the analysis groups that are

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

analyzed completely. The analysis task does not need to be executed again, and therefore
analysis efficiency is improved.

Prerequisites
l A project has been created. For details about how to create a project, see 6.1 Creating a
Project.
l DT logfiles have been imported. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
l An analysis group has been created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
l Engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Context
The Assistant generates analysis reports in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1
Before an analysis task is executed, you need to set the analysis report template for the
analysis group. After the analysis task is executed, the Assistant generates an analysis
report according to the preset analysis report template.
l Scenario 2
After an analysis task is executed, if you need to generate analysis reports that are not set
in the analysis report template, you can select the required analysis report templates and
do not need to execute the analysis task again.
If KPIs and IEs in the report template are not present in a project, the values of the KPIs
and IEs are empty in the generated report.
If the report templates available in the system cannot meet your need, you can contact Huawei
engineers to customize a template, and then choose Tool > Import System Configuration
from the menu bar to import the configuration file. For details, see 20.2 How Do I Import
Configuration Information.

Procedure
l Generate an analysis report in scenario 1.
a. Configure a report template.
If You Need To... Then...

Use the predefined Select the predefined report template without


report template configuring the report template.

Use the customized Customize the report template that meets the actual
report template service requirements according to the method of
customizing the report template. For details, see 17.3
Customizing Reports.

b. Import DT logfiles. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.


c. Create an analysis group and select the report template. For details, see 7 Creating
an Analysis Group.
d. Execute an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

e. View the analysis report.


After the analysis is completed, the Assistant generates an integrated analysis report
and automatically saves it. The report name is composed of the report generation
time and report template name. The report is a .doc or .xls document and is saved in
the following path: project\Report, for example, D:\Untitled Project\Report.
l Generate an analysis report in scenario 2.
– Use one or multiple report templates to generate multiple reports.
i. Under the Analysis Group node on the Project tab page, right-click the
analysis group to be viewed.
ii. Choose Report > Report Templates from the shortcut menu. The Generate
Report dialog box is displayed. as shown in Figure 15-5.

Figure 15-5 Generate Report dialog box

iii. In the Generate Report dialog box, select one or multiple analysis report
templates.
iv. (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to
generate a report in PDF format.
v. Click OK.
After you select the analysis report template, the system displays the report
generation progress automatically. After an analysis report is generated, the
system switches to the report save path. The report format is DOC, XLS, or
PDF. The name of a report is composed of report template name and analysis
group name. The default path for saving the report is: Path for saving the
project file\Report, for example, D:\Untitled Project\Report.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

15.4 Generating a Benchmark Report


This section describes how to generate a benchmark report. The benchmark report can show
the comparison analysis of the network data of different operators in different scenarios so
that operators evaluate the network quality by observing the statistical rank of the network
performance. In addition, the benchmark report can show the comparison analysis of the data
before and after the network optimization so that operators learn the operating status of the
swapped network by observing the differences between the KPIs before and after the network
optimization.

Prerequisites
An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Context
The Benchmark report can be generated as Word or Excel files. The Assistant provides the
following Benchmark report templates by default:
l GSM CS Report
l GSM PS Report
l LTE ATU Report
l LTE Scanner Report
l LTE Theme(Word)
l LTE UE Report
l TD-SCDMA CS Report
l TD-SCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA CS Report
l WCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA Scanner Report

The report includes a cover, comparison analysis result of common KPIs, display of key IEs
on a map, and statistical information about key events.

The Assistant can perform analysis on two to six analysis groups and generate analysis groups
based on the benchmark report template. This helps you view analysis results of different
analysis groups.

If the benchmark report template provided by the Assistant does not meet your requirements,
you can contact Huawei engineers to customize a template. Then, choose Tools > Import
System Configuration on the menu bar to import configuration files information. For details,
see 20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Benchmark on the menu bar. The Generate Benchmark Report window
is display. as shown in Figure 15-6.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Figure 15-6 Generate Benchmark Report window

Step 2 Click Add in the Generate Benchmark Report dialog box.

Step 3 Select the analysis groups to be compared and viewed in the Choose Analysis Group dialog
box.
NOTE
The analysis task for the analysis groups must be executed.

Step 4 Click OK.


Up: enables you to move the analysis group upwards.
Down: enables you to move the analysis group downwards.
Remove: enables you to delete the analysis group.
Step 5 Select the benchmark analysis report template in Report Template drop-down list.

Step 6 (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to generate a report in
PDF format.
Step 7 Select the path for saving the benchmark analysis report in Save Path.
The default path for saving the report is: Path for saving the project file\Report, for
example, D:\Untitled Project\Report.
Step 8 Click OK.
After a benchmark report is generated, the Assistant automatically switches to the save path of
the benchmark report for you to view it.

----End

15.5 Generating a Single Site Verification Report


This section describes how to generate a single site verification report. A single site
verification report is an analysis report for a single site, which consists of the information
about the common indicators such as the call drop rate, handover success rate, and FTP rate.
Especially at the early stage of network deployment, a single site verification report can help

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

you learn the operating status of a single site so that the workload of manual report output is
reduced and work efficient is improved.

Prerequisites
l The neighboring cell data is imported. For details, see 6.3.3 Importing Neighboring
Cell Data.
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Context
By default, the Assistant provides the following single site verification reports:
l Excel:
– CDMA SSV
– GSM SSV
– LTE SSV
– LTE VoLTE SSV
– TD-SCDMA SSV
– WCDMA SSV
l Word:
– GSM SSV
– WCDMA SSV
– LTE SSV
– LTE VoLTE SSV
The Assistant generates a report according to the selected single site verification report
template, which helps you learn the operating status of the site.
If the single site verification report template provided by the Assistant does not meet your
requirements, you can contact Huawei engineers to customize a template. Then, choose Tools
> Import System Configuration on the menu bar to import configuration files information.
For details, see 20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > SSV on the menu bar. The Generate Single Site Verification Report
window is displayed. as shown in Figure 15-7.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Figure 15-7 Generate Single Site Verification Report window

Step 2 Select the analysis groups to be viewed in the Generate Single Site Verification Report
dialog box.
1. Click Add to select a site.
In the Select One Site window, you can use the Filter function to filter Site ID or Site
Name to quickly find a site.
2. Click OK.
3. Double-click the Report Template column in the line where the selected site belongs.
The SSV Template Select dialog box is displayed. Select an RAT and format and click
OK.
4. In the Stationary Test Analysis Group line, click Select. The Choose Analysis Group
dialog box is displayed. Select a fixed-point test data analysis group and click OK.
5. In the Drive Test Analysis Group line, click Select. The Choose Analysis Group
dialog box is displayed. Select a fixed-point drive test data analysis group and click OK.
6. In the Report Map Background line, select a report map background.
– No Background: indicates no background map.
– MapInfo Map: indicates the MapInfo map background.
– Google Earth: indicates the Google Earth map background.
7. Click Browse next to Save Path to select a path for saving the site verification analysis
report.
The default path for saving the report is: Path for saving the project file\Report, for
example, D:\Untitled Project\Report.
8. (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to generate a report
in PDF format.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Step 3 Click OK.


After a single site verification report is generated, the Assistant automatically switches to the
save path of the single site verification report for you to view it.

----End

15.6 Generating Service Statistical Reports


This section describes how to generate service statistical reports, which contain MOC and
MTC event and delay information and can help optimization engineers analyze failure causes.

Prerequisites
l You have imported the engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l You have added a report tepmlate. For details, see 17.3.3 Creating an Office Report
Template.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Business Statistics > Business Statistics Report from the menu bar. The
Business Statistics window is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-8.

Figure 15-8 Business Statistics window

Step 2 Select an analysis set in the Analysis Group text box and
Step 3 Select a report template from the template list.
Step 4 Select Report Base, The Report Base Select window is displayed, select the type of the
business.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

Step 5 Click OK.


After a report is generated, the Assistant automatically switches to the path saving the report
for you to view it.

----End

15.7 Generating Custom Cluster Reports


This section describes how to generate custom cluster reports, and can help optimization
engineers analyze failure causes.

Prerequisites
l You have imported the engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l You have added a report template. For details, see 17.3.3 Creating an Office Report
Template.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Custom Report > Custom Cluster Report from the menu bar. The
Generate Custom Cluster Report window is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-9.

Figure 15-9 Generate Custom Cluster Report

Step 2 Select a report template from the template list.

Step 3 Drag the analysis group on the left to the right.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

The analysis group on the left is created during project implementation and the analysis group
on the right is used for editing an Excel report template.
You can map the .gen files and terminals in the analysis group on the left to the analysis group
on the right. A report is generated and contains statistical information about the selected .gen
files or terminals.
You can double-click Cell in the right area. Site information is displayed. Select cell
information about a site. A report is generated and contains statistical information about the
selected cell.
Double-click Query in the right area. In the displayed window, set conditions in IE, Time,
and Region. A report is generated and contains statistical information about the set items.x
Step 4 Select Save Path.

Step 5 Click OK.


After a report is generated, the Assistant automatically switches to the path saving the report
for you to view it.

----End

15.8 Generating a Cross Table Report


A cross table report is an .xls file composed of multiple sheets. It shows the HSDPA-related
IEs. A comparison report chart can be generated for users to learn the relationship between
HSDPA-related IEs.

Prerequisites
l The cross table template has been set in the IE template. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting
KPI Template and IE Template.
l DT logfiles have been imported. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
l An analysis group has been created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
l Engineering parameters have been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l An analysis task has been executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Procedure
Step 1 On the Project tab page, right-click Analysis group name and choose Report > HSDPA
CrossingTable Report from the shortcut menu.
The Assistant automatically displays the progress bar for the report generation. After the
analysis report is generated, the Assistant automatically navigates to the report save path. The
format of the report name is current date (Year+Month+Date+Hour+Minute+Second) and
analysis group name. For details, see 21.4.6 Cross Table Predefined Report.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

NOTE

l The cross table shows the mapping between KPIs and is valid only for HSDPA data. If you select
HSDPA CrossingTable Report to generate a report, you must select the IEs related to the HSDPA
in the IE report template.
l The HSDPA CrossingTable Report template can be used for all analysis groups under the Analysis
Group node to generate cross table reports.

----End

15.9 Generating a Speech Quality Evaluation Report


A speech quality evaluation report is an .xls file composed of three sheets. This report
provides the percentage and coding mode of each MOS. A comparison report chart can be
generated for users to learn the relationship between MOSs and speech coding modes.

Prerequisites
l DT logfiles have been imported. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
l Engineering parameters have been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l An analysis group has been created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
l An analysis task has been executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Procedure
Step 1 On the Project tab page, right-click Analysis group name and choose Report > MOS
Statistic Report from the shortcut menu.

The Assistant automatically displays the progress bar for the report generation. After the
analysis report is generated, the Assistant automatically navigates to the report save path. The
report name consists of the report template name and analysis group name. For details, see
21.4.7 Speech Quality Evaluation Predefined Report.
NOTE

l The analysis on the relationship between the MOSs and the speech coding rates is only valid for the
speech quality evaluation data. If you select MOS Statistic Report to generate a report, you must
select the IEs related to the MOS in the IE report template.
l The MOS Statistic Report template can be used for all analysis groups under the Analysis Group
node to generate speech quality evaluation reports.

----End

15.10 Generating an Indoor Distribution Report


Based on the tests on the indoor network environment and the corresponding test logs,
engineers can obtain the indoor distribution reports differentiated by scenario and analyze
those reports. This helps engineers to save time and improve efficiency and accuracy.

Prerequisites
l You have created a project. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 15 Generating an Analysis Report

l You have imported LTE engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the DT logs. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 2 Execute an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 3 Choose Report > Indoor from the main menu. The Indoor Report Setting window is
displayed.

Figure 15-10 Indoor Report Setting window

Step 4 Set parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see 19.40 Parameter Description:
Indoor Report.
Step 5 Click OK.
After a single site verification report is generated, the Assistant automatically switches to the
path for saving the report for you to view it.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 16 Automatic Data Processing

16 Automatic Data Processing

About This Chapter

The Assistant supports unattended automatic data processing. By monitoring a specific data
directory, the Assistant automatically imports, analyzes, and collects the statistics of data
according to the preset analysis requirements.
16.1 Creating an Automatic Analysis Task
This section describes how to create an automatic analysis task. Each project corresponds to
one automatic analysis task. After setting the analysis configuration items of a project, you
can create and execute an automatic analysis task. Compared with the manual analysis, the
automatic analysis can reduce the time for manually importing data in batches and implement
unattended automatic data processing.
16.2 Executing an Automatic Analysis Task
After creating an automatic analysis task, you need to execute the automatic analysis task to
make the Assistant enter the automatic analysis mode.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 16 Automatic Data Processing

16.1 Creating an Automatic Analysis Task


This section describes how to create an automatic analysis task. Each project corresponds to
one automatic analysis task. After setting the analysis configuration items of a project, you
can create and execute an automatic analysis task. Compared with the manual analysis, the
automatic analysis can reduce the time for manually importing data in batches and implement
unattended automatic data processing.

Prerequisites
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task template is set. For details, see 6.2 Configuring an Analysis Task.
l The directory in which DT logfiles are monitored is created. One project corresponds to
one directory.

Context
The Assistant can analyze the DT data in two modes, that is, manual analysis and automatic
analysis. The two modes cannot be used at the same time but can be mutually switched.
l Manual analysis mode
After setting the analysis configuration items of the project, you can import all DT data
manually and execute the analysis task.
l Automatic analysis mode
After setting the analysis configuration items of the project, you can create and execute
an automatic analysis task. The Assistant automatically completes the data import and
analysis according to the preset analysis requirements.
The automatic analysis function provides the uninterrupted analysis service, shortening the
time difference between tests and test analysis, reducing analysis time, and maximizing the
analysis efficiency.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Automatic Analysis Wizard on the menu bar. The Automatic Analysis
Setting window is displayed. as shown in Figure 16-1.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 16 Automatic Data Processing

Figure 16-1 Automatic Analysis Setting window

Step 2 Set an automatic analysis task.


For details about how to set an automatic analysis task, see 19.36 Parameters for Setting an
Automatic Analysis Task.
NOTE

When analyzing multiple projects, you can click Add to add a maximum of 100 projects.

Step 3 Select the check box next to the automatic analysis task to make the settings take effect.

Step 4 Click OK. Then, the system displays the Automatic Analysis Manager window for
executing the automatic analysis task. For details, see 16.2 Executing an Automatic
Analysis Task.

----End

16.2 Executing an Automatic Analysis Task


After creating an automatic analysis task, you need to execute the automatic analysis task to
make the Assistant enter the automatic analysis mode.

Prerequisites
l An automatic analysis task is created. For details, see 16.1 Creating an Automatic
Analysis Task.
l DT logfiles are available and are saved in the monitoring directory.
All DT logfiles are categorized by folders. If the folders are categorized by time, the DT
logfiles of different time periods are saved in different folders.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 16 Automatic Data Processing

Procedure

Step 1 In the Automatic Analysis Manager window, click on the toolbar to execute the
automatic analysis task, as show in Figure 16-2.

Figure 16-2 Auto Analysis Manager

The Assistant starts to monitor the configured monitoring directory for DT logfiles.
Step 2 Add DT logfile folders to the monitoring directory.
When a new DT logfile is added to the monitoring directory, the system identifies all files in
the folder and displays the files through the import list in the Automatic Analysis Manager
window.
Step 3 Check that the DT logfile folders to be imported are added to the monitoring directory.
l If the automatic analysis task mode is set to Time mode, the Assistant automatically
starts to analyze the DT logfiles in these folders when Start time arrives.
l If the automatic analysis task mode is set to Text mode, you need to manually upload
OK.txt to all the folders. After identifying OK.txt, the Assistant starts to analyze the DT
logfiles in these folders.
Step 4 In the Automatic Analysis Manager window, monitor the execution status of the automatic
analysis task, including the logfile name, logfile size, execution progress, and execution
status.
The information about the successfully imported DT logfiles is displayed under the analysis
group node on the navigation tree in the left pane. The corresponding folder name is the name
of the analysis group.

Click on the toolbar. Then, the Assistant stops all automatic analysis tasks and switches
to the manual analysis mode.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 16 Automatic Data Processing

NOTE
If the system is analyzing data, the analysis result is incomplete if you stop the automatic analysis task.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

17 Customizing Functions

About This Chapter

This section describes how to customize functions. The Assistant provides different
predefined events, KPIs, and report templates. In addition, the Assistant provides the function
of customizing KPIs and customizing report templates to meet the actual service requirements
and extended service requirements.
17.1 Customizing KPIs
If the existing KPIs fail to meet service requirements, you can create custom KPIs to meet
different analysis requirements. You can customize a KPI based on the predefined KPIs,
events, and IEs.
17.2 Customizing Events
If the existing events fail to meet service requirements, you can create custom events to meet
different analysis requirements. You can customize events based on the predefined events and
IEs.
17.3 Customizing Reports
This section describes how to customize reports. The Assistant displays different analysis
results in reports. You can use the predefined report template to generate analysis reports. If
the existing report template cannot meet the service analysis requirements, you can create
custom report templates.
17.4 Customizing Delays
This section describes how to create a delay through the custom delay provided by the
Assistant when the predefined delay cannot meet the service requirements.
17.5 Predefined IEs
If existing predefined IEs cannot meet service requirements, you can change the threshold
values for predefined IEs to meet the service requirements.
17.6 Custom Chart
The Custom Chart window displays the change of IE value with time. You can customize the
IE indicators to be viewed in the Custom Chart window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

17.1 Customizing KPIs


If the existing KPIs fail to meet service requirements, you can create custom KPIs to meet
different analysis requirements. You can customize a KPI based on the predefined KPIs,
events, and IEs.

17.1.1 Creating Custom KPIs


When the KPIs provided by the system fail to meet your analysis requirements, you can create
simple or complicated custom KPIs. The Assistant provides the functions of customizing
counting KPIs and calculation KPIs.

Prerequisites
A project is created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Context
l Counting KPI
A counting KPI consists of the event, IE, and value according to certain calculation
rules. For example, KPI.A = KPI.A + variable + 4. For details about examples, see
17.1.3 Example: Creating a Counting KPI.
l Calculation KPI
A calculation KPI is generated according to simple calculation rules based on existing
counting KPIs or calculation KPIs. For example, KPI.A = KPI.B / KPI.C. For details
about examples, see 17.1.4 Example: Creating a Calculation KPI.
l Modification of KPI parameter thresholds
The Assistant provides the function of modifying the thresholds of certain KPI
parameters, such as Distance on CPICH Ec/Io ≥ -12 dB, CPICH RSCP ≥ -95 dBm
(WCDMA), UE Pilot Pollution Points (WCDMA), Scanner Pilot Pollution Points
(WCDMA), and Distance Sum For RxLev All ≥ -90 dBm (GSM).

Procedure
l Create a counting KPI.
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI Manager dialog
box is displayed.
b. Choose New > Counting KPI. The Counting KPI Editor dialog box is displayed.
n Click Edit to modify the selected KPI.
n Click Delete to delete the selected KPI.
c. Type the basic information about the custom KPI.
For details, see KPI Editor.
d. Optional: Click Format. The KPI Format Setting dialog box is displayed. Set the
data type. For detailed parameter descriptions, see 19.30 Parameters for Custom
KPIs.
e. Edit the expression for calculating the KPI.
Edit the expression for calculating the KPI in area 2 shown in Figure 17-1. For
descriptions on the dialog box, see KPI Editor.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

NOTE
When editing the expression, select the required elements such as IE, event, KPI, and
message for the custom KPI in area 6 shown in Figure 17-1. Select the required function in
area 4, and create a new KPI using the KPI formula. For examples, see 17.1.3 Example:
Creating a Counting KPI.

Figure 17-1 Counting KPI Editor dialog box

f. Click OK.
l Create a calculation KPI.
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI Manager dialog
box is displayed.
b. Choose New > Calculation KPI. The Calculation KPI Editor dialog box is
displayed.
c. Type the basic information about the KPI.
For detailed parameter descriptions, see KPI Editor.
d. Optional: Click Format. The KPI Format Setting dialog box is displayed. For
detailed parameter descriptions, see 19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs.
e. Edit the expression for calculating the KPI, as shown in Figure 17-2.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Figure 17-2 Calculation KPI Editor dialog box

f. Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After customizing a KPI, you can view it in the Custom KPI Manager window. For details,
see 17.1.2 Managing Defined KPIs.

17.1.2 Managing Defined KPIs


The system provides the functions of ranking, filtering, and modifying KPIs for you to
selectively view and manage KPIs. In addition, you can export all the KPIs that can be
imported into the system for future use.

Prerequisites
l Multiple KPIs exist, including predefined KPIs and custom KPIs.
l A project is created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
l Filter defined KPIs.
– Search for KPIs in the Custom KPI Manager dialog box.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

n Type the keyword of the KPIs in the Filter text box. Then, you can search for
KPIs.
n Choose a KPI system from the System drop-down list.
n In Group drop-down list, select the group for filtering.
l Add KPIs. For details, see 17.1.1 Creating Custom KPIs.
l Modify KPIs
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI Manager dialog
box is displayed.
b. Select KPIs to be modified in the KPI area.
c. Click Edit. The Counting KPI Editor/Calculation KPI Editor dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE

You can open the Counting KPI Editor/Calculation KPI Editor dialog box by double-
clicking the KPIs to be modified.
d. Modify parameters related to the KPI. For detailed parameter descriptions, see
19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs.
e. Click OK.
l Delete one or more defined KPIs.
Select one or more KPIs in the Custom KPI Manager window. Click Delete. The
confirmation dialog box is displayed. The deleted KPIs cannot be restored.
----End

17.1.3 Example: Creating a Counting KPI


This section describes how to create a KPI that counts the number of tests.

Context
In this example, you will create a KPI named TestDuring.
The KPI is calculated by using the following formula: TestDuring = TestDuring + 1
The KPI is counted when an RRCSetupReq or GSMRRCSetupSuc event occurs.

Procedure
1. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI dialog box is displayed.
2. Choose New > Counting KPI. The Counting KPI window is displayed.
3. Type the basic information about the KPI.
– Name: Type the name of the KPI. In this example, the parameter is set to
TestDuring.
– Unit: Set the unit. In this example, the parameter is set to null.
– Group: Set the group information. Custom KPIs are added to the Common-
Custom group.
4. Edit the expression for calculating the KPI.
In this example, the KPI expression is: TestDuring = TestDuring + 1. The expression is
built as follows:

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

IF(During(HasElement(EVENT(RRCSetupReq)),HasElement(EVENT(RRCSetupSuc))))
{
IF(HasElement(IE(Serving PCI)))
{
KPI(TestDuring) = KPI(TestDuring) + 1;
}
}
Figure 17-3 shows the KPI expression.

Figure 17-3 Counting KPI Editor

5. Click OK. The TestDuring custom KPI is defined successfully.

17.1.4 Example: Creating a Calculation KPI


This section describes how to create a calculation KPI that is used to collect the statistics of
the call setup success rate.

Prerequisite
l The calculation KPI DNSResponseSuccess Counter already exists.
l The calculation KPI DNSFailure Counter already exists.

Context
In this example, you can create a KPI named DNS Successs Rate.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

The formula is as follows: DNS Successs Rate = DNSResponseSuccess Counter/(DNSFailure


Counter+DNSResponseSuccess Counter)*100.
When the KPI value exceeds the upper alarm threshold or lower alarm threshold, the KPI
value is displayed in statistical results in colors.

Procedure
1. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI on the menu bar. The Custom KPI
Manager window is displayed.
2. Choose Add > Counting KPI. The Calculation KPI Editor window is displayed.
3. Type the basic information about the KPI.
– Name: Type the name of the KPI. In this example, the parameter is set to DNS
Successs Rate.
– Group: Set the group information. The custom KPIs are added to the Custom
group.
– Description: Type the description of the KPI. For example, the call setup success
rate.
4. Click Format. Fill in KPI format information.
– Data Type: Select Float.
– Initial Value: Set the initial value. The default value is 0. You can also enter the
value manually.
– Visible: Select True.
– Data Source: Select Binning.
– Description: Type the description of the KPI. For example, the call setup success
rate.
5. Edit the custom expression for calculating the KPI.
The following KPI formula is used as an example: DNS Successs Rate =
DNSResponseSuccess Counter/(DNSFailure Counter+DNSResponseSuccess
Counter)*100. The setting is as follows:
KPI(DNS Successs Rate) = KPI(DNSResponseSuccess Counter) / (KPI(DNSFailure
Counter) + KPI(DNSResponseSuccess Counter)) * 100

Figure 17-4 shows the KPI expression.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Figure 17-4 Calculation KPI Editor

6. Click OK in the Calculation KPI Editor window.

17.2 Customizing Events


If the existing events fail to meet service requirements, you can create custom events to meet
different analysis requirements. You can customize events based on the predefined events and
IEs.

17.2.1 Creating Custom Events


When the events provided by the Assistant fail to meet your analysis requirements, you can
create simple or complicated custom events.

Prerequisites
A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Event from the menu bar. The Custom Event
Manager dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click New. The Custom Event Editor dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Step 3 Type the basic information about the custom event.


For details, see Parameters in the Custom Event Editor window.

Step 4 Click Format. The Event Format Setting dialog box is displayed. Set the parameter in this
dialog box. For details, see 19.34 Parameters for Custom Events.

Step 5 Edit the expression for calculating the event.

You can edit the expression for calculating the event in area 2 in Figure 17-5. For details
about the dialog box, see Parameters in the Custom Event Editor window.
NOTE
When editing the expression, select the required elements, such as IEs, events, and messages for the
custom event in area 6 shown in Figure 17-5. Select the required functions in area 4 to create an event
based on the event expression.

Figure 17-5 Custom Event Editor dialog box

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the event is customized, you can view the customized event in the Custom Event
Manager dialog box. For details, see 17.2.2 Managing Events.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

17.2.2 Managing Events


This section describes how to manage events, including querying, modifying, and deleting
events.

Prerequisites
l Multiple events are available, including predefined and custom events.
l A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
l Filtering events
– You can query an event by entering the event keyword in the Filter text box in the
Custom Event Manager dialog box.
l Creating events. For details, see 17.2.1 Creating Custom Events.
l Modifying events
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Event from the menu bar. The Custom
Event Manager dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an event to be modified in the Event area.
c. Click Edit. The Custom Event Editor window is displayed.
NOTE

You can also double-click an event to be modified to enter the Custom Event Editor
window.
d. Modify the event information.
e. Click OK.
l Deleting one or more events

In the Custom Event Manager dialog box, select one or more events. Click Delete. A
confirmation dialog box is displayed.

The deleted events cannot be restored.

----End

17.3 Customizing Reports


This section describes how to customize reports. The Assistant displays different analysis
results in reports. You can use the predefined report template to generate analysis reports. If
the existing report template cannot meet the service analysis requirements, you can create
custom report templates.

17.3.1 Creating a Custom Report Template


This section describes how to create a custom report template. You can set the contents to be
displayed in the report, including the text, table, map, and chart. After a custom report
template is created and applied, each analysis group of the project generates analysis reports
according to the report template.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Prerequisites
A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Context
The report template consists of objects such as the text, table, map, and chart.

The Assistant provides the following methods for adding objects to a template:
l Select the existing object group and add multiple objects at a time to generate a new
report template. The Assistant provides multiple predefined object groups.
l Add objects one by one to generate a new report template.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Report Template on the menu bar. The Custom Report dialog box is
displayed.

Step 2 Create a report template.


1. Right-click in the blank area on the Template tab page and choose Add from the
shortcut menu.
2. Type the template name in Template Name in the displayed Add Template dialog box.
3. Click OK.

Step 3 Add objects one by one.


l Click TT on the Description tab page in the report object area, and set the Title
properties such as the font, format, and color.
l Click T on the Description tab page in the report object area, and set the Text properties
such as the font, format, and color.
l Click KPI on the Description tab page in the report object area and select KPIs. The
KPIs are displayed in tables.
l Click IE on the Description tab page in the report object area, set the indicators to be
displayed in the report, and select the display mode.
NOTE
A custom report template does not support customized delay addition.
l Click TH on the Description tab page in the report object area, set the themes to be
displayed in the report.
l Click EV on the Description tab page in the report object area, set the events to be
displayed in the report, and select the display mode.

Step 4 Optional: Adjust the order of report contents.


1. Select the object to be adjusted in the report property area.

2. Click on the toolbar to move the object up and click to move the object down.

Click to delete the object.

Step 5 Click to save the current custom template.

In the project, the analysis reports of various analysis groups are generated according to the
custom report template.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Click to delete all the elements in the current template.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After you click , the custom report template is exported in the xml format. You can click
to import this template into the Assistant again.

17.3.2 Modifying Existing Report Templates


This section describes how to modify existing report templates. The existing report template
refers to the report template predefined by the system and custom report template saved by
users. You can modify the properties of the existing report template to generate a new report
template.

Prerequisites
l A report template already exists.
l A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Custom > Custom Report on the menu bar. The Custom Report dialog box is
displayed.

Step 2 Click the template to be modified on the Template tab page in the report object area.

Step 3 Double-click the object to be modified and modify its properties in the report properties area.

You can modify the properties of the text, table, map, and chart. For details about parameters,
see 19.31 Parameters for Custom Report Templates.

Step 4 In the report properties area, double-click the indicator to be modified and modify the
properties of the indicator.
Modifying the properties of an indicator involves adding the indicator, deleting the indicator,
and modifying the display mode of the indicator. For details about parameters, see 19.31
Parameters for Custom Report Templates.

Step 5 Optional: Adjust the order of report contents.


1. Select the object to be adjusted in the report properties area.

2. Click on the toolbar to move the object up and click to move the object down.

Step 6 Click to apply the modified template.

In the project, the analysis reports of each analysis group are generated according to the report
template.

Click to delete all the objects in the current report template.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Follow-up Procedure
After you click , the modified report template is exported in the xml format. You can click
to import this template into the Assistant.

17.3.3 Creating an Office Report Template


This section describes how to create a user-defined Office report template if the existing
report templates do not meet the requirements.

Prerequisites
You have created a project. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Report Template from the main menu to open the report template window.

Step 2 Select the UsercustomReportTemplate node. Right-click Business Statistics Report or


Excel. Then, select Add.
In the displayed dialog box, click the icon following the Put in template file text box and
select an Excel file to be imported. Click the name of the imported file. The UE- and scanner-
related counters are displayed in the lower left corner of the window.

Step 3 In the upper area of the Excel file, select the counter replacement format, analysis group
name, and value type.
l The following replacement formats are available:
– Replace Oneself: replaces the selected cell only and supports the report templates
under the Excel node.
– Replace and Down: replaces cell contents downward and supports the report
templates under the Business Statistics Report node.
l If the number of current analysis groups is insufficient when you select analysis group
names, click the last line Add Analysis Group to add analysis groups.
l The following value types are available:
– SUM: total number of counters
– AVG: average value of counters
– MAX: maximum value of a counter
– MAX: minimum value of a counter
– %: ratio of counters in the predefined range

Step 4 Click a cell in the imported Excel file. Then, select a required IE, event, or KPI from the UE-
and scanner-related counters in the window.
You can right-click a counter and select a map display type to view it on a map. The following
types are available:
l Display On Map
l Display On Chart: Multiple counters can be displayed on a chart simultaneously. You
can hold down Ctrl and click the IE tree to select multiple IEs.
l Display On Caky

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

l Display On Histogram
l Custom Display On Chart: The curve fitting of two counters with different number types
is supported. You can select one counter as X axis and another as Y axis, and set orders.
Step 5 After you edit a template, click another report template name. A dialog box is displayed,
prompting you to save the editing. Click Yes.
Step 6 Generate a report. For detailed operations, see 15.6 Generating Service Statistical Reports
or 15.7 Generating Custom Cluster Reports.

----End

17.3.4 Example: Creating a Report Template


The following operations use generating a Word report as an example. This section describes
how to create a report template that contains the statistical results of KPIs and the detailed
analysis results of IEs and events. Reports can be generated according to the template. This
example helps you create a custom report template easily and quickly.

Overview
The report consists of the cover, contents, statistical results of KPIs, IE analysis results, and
event analysis results. You can query the point locations of IEs and events on the map and
their CDF and PDF charts.
Figure 17-6 shows the created template. For details, see 19.31 Parameters for Custom
Report Templates.

Figure 17-6 An example of the created report template

Figure 17-7 shows the report generated according to the created template. You can find that
the objects in Figure 17-6 are in a one-to-one relationship with the reports generated in
Figure 17-7.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Figure 17-7 An example of the report generated according to the report template

Cover, Contents, Header, Footer, and Report Name


l Cover:
The cover is automatically generated by the system without manual intervention. The
default report name is GENEX Assistant Custom Report. The report date is the date
when the report is generated, and the author of the report is Assistant User by default.
l Contents:
The contents are automatically generated by the system without manual intervention.
l Header and footer:
The header and footer are automatically generated by the system without manual
intervention. By default, the header is a GENEX icon, and the footer contains the logo
and website of Huawei.
l Report name:
The report name is automatically generated by the system. The default report name is
YYYYMMDDhhmmss-Analysis Group Name.

Statistical Information About KPIs


To display the statistical information about KPIs, do as follows:
1. Choose Report > Report Template on the menu bar. The Custom Report window is
displayed.
2. Create a report template.
a. Right-click in the blank area on the Template tab page and choose Add from the
shortcut menu.
b. Type the template name in Template Name in the displayed Add Template dialog
box.
c. Click OK.
3. Choose TT on the Element tag page.
Create a level-two title named Statistics Information.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

4. Choose TT on the Element tag page.


Create a level-three title named CS Event Summary.
5. Choose KPI on the Element tab page in the report object area.
Select KPIs, the KPIs are displayed in tables.

Figure 17-8 shows the report that is generated according to the template settings.

Figure 17-8 An example of the statistical information about KPIs

NOTE

l If you do not select a KPI, the status of the KPI is Unselected.


l If you do not calculate a KPI during report generation, the status of the KPI is N/A.
A KPI may not be calculated if the DT logfile does not contain the required data for calculating this
KPI. For example, GPS data is required for calculating the mileage-based call drop rate. If the DT
logfile does not contain the required GPS data, the mileage-based call drop rate cannot be calculated.

Analysis Results of IEs and Events


To display the analysis results of IEs and events, do as follows:

1. Choose TT on the Element tag page.


Create a level-two title named IE Statistics.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

2. Click IE.
Add a counter whose IE is RxLev Sub. Select Map, Legend, Chart-CDF, Chart-PDF,
Statistic Table, LineChart, CakyChart, and Screenshot.
3. Refer to the previous steps to create another report template that shows event analysis
results.
Figure 17-9 shows the report that is generated according to the template settings.

Figure 17-9 An example of the analysis results of IEs

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

17.4 Customizing Delays


This section describes how to create a delay through the custom delay provided by the
Assistant when the predefined delay cannot meet the service requirements.

17.4.1 Creating Custom Delay


This section describes how to create a delay through the custom delay provided by the
Assistant when the predefined delay cannot meet the service requirements.

Prerequisites
A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Delay on the menu bar. The Custom Delay Manager
dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click New. The Custom OneDelay Config dialog box is displayed. Create a delay.
l Click Edit to modify the selected delay.
l Click Delete to delete the selected delay.
Step 3 Set the basic information for the custom delay in the Custom OneDelay Config dialog box,
as shown in Figure 17-10.
l Type the name of the custom delay in the Name text box.
l Select the network system that the current custom delay belongs to in the System list.
l Select the group where the custom delay belongs in the Group list.
l Click Add Message in the Begin Message and End Message area and add the begin
message (begin event) and end message (end event), respectively.
l Type the threshold of the custom delay in the Times Out text box.
When the delay reported by the terminal is more than Times Out, the Assistant does not
display this delay.

NOTE

If Overlay is selected, after receiving the end message, the Assistant uses the time of the latest
begin message as the counting time; if Overlay is not selected, the Assistant uses the time of the
begin message as the counting time.
l Click OK, the created delay display in the Custom Delay Manager dialog box.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Figure 17-10 Custom OneDelay Config dialog box

----End

17.4.2 Creating Custom Segmentdelay


This section describes how to create a delay through the custom segmentdelay provided by
the Assistant when the predefined delay cannot meet the service requirements.

Prerequisites
A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Segment Delay on the menu bar. The Custom Delay
Manager dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Step 2 Click New. The Custom SegmentDelay Config dialog box is displayed. Create a delay.
l Click Edit to modify the selected delay.
l Click Delete to delete the selected delay.

Step 3 Set the basic information for the custom delay in the Custom SegmentDelay Config dialog
box, as shown in Figure 17-11.
l Type the name of the custom delay in the Name text box.
l Select the network system that the current custom delay belongs to in the System list.
l Select the group where the custom delay belongs in the Group list.
l Click Add in the Message area and add the begin message (begin event) and end
message (end event), respectively.
l Type the threshold of the custom delay in the Max Delay text box.
When the delay reported by the terminal is more than Max Delay, the Assistant does not
display this delay.

NOTE

If Overlay is selected, after receiving the end message, the Assistant uses the time of the latest
begin message as the counting time; if Overlay is not selected, the Assistant uses the time of the
begin message as the counting time.
l Click OK, the created delay display in the Custom Delay Manager dialog box.

Figure 17-11 Custom SegmentDelay Config dialog box

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

17.4.3 Creating a User-Defined Call Delay


This section describes how to create a delay using the delay defining function provided by the
Assistant when the predefined call delay cannot meet service requirements.

Prerequisites
You have created a project. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
Step 1 On the menu bar, choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Delay > CallDelay Setting. The
MOC&MTC delay rate dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click the IE whose delay needs to be modified and enter a new delay in the Timeout
Length text box.
Step 3 Click OK.

----End

17.5 Predefined IEs


If existing predefined IEs cannot meet service requirements, you can change the threshold
values for predefined IEs to meet the service requirements.

Prerequisites
A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > IE on the toolbar. The Custom IE window is
displayed, as shown in Figure 17-12.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Figure 17-12 Custom IE dialog box

Step 2 Set the basic information.


l Enter an IE name in Filter By Name.
l Select the system for the IE in Protocol.
l Select the IE type in Device Type. For details about parameters, see Custom IE dialog
box.

Step 3 Double-click an IE. In the IE Information dialog box shown in Figure 17-12, view the basic
information about the IE. For details about the parameters, see IE Information dialog box.

Step 4 Double-click the selected IE, the ThresHold Change dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 17-13.

Figure 17-13 ThresHold Change dialog box

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Step 5 Set the threshold value for the predefined IE in Value. For detailed parameter descriptions,
see ThresHold Change dialog box.
Step 6 Click OK.

----End

17.6 Custom Chart


The Custom Chart window displays the change of IE value with time. You can customize the
IE indicators to be viewed in the Custom Chart window.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > DrillDown > Templates > Custom Chart on the menu bar. The Custom
Chart window is displayed.
Step 2 Set the properties of a custom chart.
1. Right-click and choose Time from the shortcut menu and set the data volume that can be
displayed currently.
– Default: display the data collected within 3600 seconds.
– Custom: display the data collected within the customized time period.
2. Select IE counters.
Right-click in the window and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Set
Chart Properties dialog box is displayed. Select the required IE counters.
a. Select the IE counter display area: Chart1, Chart2, Chart3, or Chart4. This
section uses Chart1 as an example.
b. Click Edit. The Modify Chart1 Properties dialog box is displayed. Select the IE
counters, as shown in Figure 17-14.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

Figure 17-14 Modify Chart1 Properties dialog box

c. Optional: Select an IE in the Selected IE and click Edit. Set the IE display
properties including color, maximum value, and minimum value, as shown in
Figure 17-15.

Figure 17-15 GSM Serving Cell Distance

d. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 17 Customizing Functions

3. After the setting is complete, click Close.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

18 Typical Application

About This Chapter

18.1 IP Packet Detailed Decoding


18.2 Viewing the Delta Analysis for Network Optimization
This section describes how to analyze the delta of two data analysis sets so that DT analysis
engineers can view the network optimization results.
18.3 View Combine Analysis Results
This section describes how to perform combine analysis of two data analysis sets so that DT
analysis engineers can view the network optimization results.
18.4 Exporting Data Based on the Preset Filter Conditions
This section describes how to export data based on the preset filter conditions for specified
analysis groups. This function helps drive test (DT) analysis engineers efficiently query the
analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

18.1 IP Packet Detailed Decoding


18.1.1 HTTP

Viewing Events and KPIs


Viewing events and KPIs helps DT analysis engineers to locate problems during tests to
evaluate the wireless network performance.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the HTTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see HTTP Events.

Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test. For descriptions of the KPIs, see HTTP KPI.

----End

Generating Event and KPI Reports


After an analysis task is executed for an analysis set, the Assistant generates an analysis report
according to the configured report template.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the HTTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.

Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.
Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.

----End

18.1.2 FTP

Viewing Events and KPIs


Viewing events and KPIs helps DT analysis engineers to locate problems during tests to
evaluate the wireless network performance.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the FTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see PS Session Events.
Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test.

----End

Generating Event and KPI Reports


After an analysis task is executed for an analysis set, the Assistant generates an analysis report
according to the configured report template.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the FTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.

Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.

Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.

----End

18.1.3 Video Streaming

Viewing Events and KPIs


Viewing events and KPIs helps DT analysis engineers to locate problems during tests to
evaluate the wireless network performance.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Video Streaming tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see Video Streaming Events.

Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test. For descriptions of the KPIs, see Video Streaming KPIs.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Generating Event and KPI Reports


After an analysis task is executed for an analysis set, the Assistant generates an analysis report
according to the configured report template.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Video Streaming tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.

Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.

Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.

----End

18.1.4 Email

Viewing Events and KPIs


Viewing events and KPIs helps DT analysis engineers to locate problems during tests to
evaluate the wireless network performance.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Email tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see Email Events.

Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test. For descriptions of the KPIs, see Email KPIs.

----End

Generating Event and KPI Reports


After an analysis task is executed for an analysis set, the Assistant generates an analysis report
according to the configured report template.

Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Email tests.
l You have created and configured the project.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.

Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.

Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.

Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.

Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.

Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.

Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.

----End

18.2 Viewing the Delta Analysis for Network


Optimization
This section describes how to analyze the delta of two data analysis sets so that DT analysis
engineers can view the network optimization results.

Prerequisites
You have created two analysis sets and executed analysis tasks. For detailed operations, see 6
Creating Analysis Tasks Manually.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an analysis set and choose Delta Analysis from the shortcut menu.
The Delta Analysis Setting window is displayed, as shown in Figure 18-1.

Figure 18-1 Delta Analysis Setting window

For descriptions of the parameters in the Delta Analysis Setting window, see Table 18-1.

Table 18-1 Parameters in the Delta Analysis Setting window


Parameter Parameter Description

Current Analysis Group Analysis set operated by the current user.

Older Analysis Group Reference analysis set. During delta


analysis, the value of a counter in the Older
Analysis Group is subtracted from the value
of a counter in the Current Analysis Group.

Delta IE Select Select the IEs for which delta analysis needs
to be performed.

Result Node Name The node name for the final delta analysis
result. The name can be automatically
generated by the system or manually
modified.

Grid Binning Lenth Grid side length for grid binning. During
delta calculation, the value is used as the
side length of the square for delta averaging.
The unit is meter.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Parameter Parameter Description

Original Point Algorithm Indicates the original point algorithm.

Track Point Algorithm Indicates the track point algorithm. The


system analyzes the delta based on the logs
of the analysis set in the Current Analysis
Group.

Step 2 After the parameters are set, click OK.


The system calculates the delta for the specified IEs based on the specified analysis set.
Step 3 Click Query. The node named after the value of Result Node Name is generated under the
node.
Step 4 Right-click a node and choose a method to view the delta from the shortcut menu.

----End

18.3 View Combine Analysis Results


This section describes how to perform combine analysis of two data analysis sets so that DT
analysis engineers can view the network optimization results.

Prerequisites
You have created two analysis sets and executed analysis tasks. For detailed operations, see 6
Creating Analysis Tasks Manually.
NOTE

One analysis set contains the DT data of only one terminal.

Procedure
l View Combine Analysis Results of IEs
a. Right-click an analysis set and choose Combine Analysis from the shortcut menu.
The Combine Analysis Setting window is displayed, as shown in Figure 18-2.

Figure 18-2 Combine Analysis Setting window

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Table 18-2 lists detailed description about the parameters in the Combine Analysis
Setting window.

Table 18-2 Parameters in the Combine Analysis Setting window


Parameter Description

Current Analysis Group Indicates the analysis set operated by


the current user.

IE Select an IE from the drop-down list


for combine analysis.
The IEs applicable to combine analysis
include:
l Session App Throughput DL
l Session App Throughput UL
l Serving PCC SINR
l Serving RSRP

Operator The options are as follows:


l <
l =
l >
l <=
l >=
l !=

Value Indicates the value range of an IE.

Current Analysis Operator The values include AND and OR.

Other analysis Group Indicates the analysis set selected for


combine analysis.
The algorithm is: The denominator is
the union of the analysis time of the
selected IEs of the two analysis sets
(unit: s). The value of the numerator is
calculated every second. The algorithm
calculates whether the selected IEs
meet the Current Analysis Operator
setting in a second. If the IEs meet the
setting in a second, the value one is
added to the numerator. If the IEs do
not meet the setting in a second, no
value is added to the numerator, and
the algorithm proceeds with the
calculation in the next second till the
last second of the union. The result is
obtained by dividing the numerator by
the denominator.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Parameter Description

Result Node Name Indicates the node name for the


combine analysis result. The name can
be automatically generated by the
Assistant or manually modified.

b. After the parameters are set, click OK.


The Assistant performs combine analysis for the specified IEs based on the
specified analysis set.
c. Click Query. The node named after the value of Result Node Name is generated
under the node.
d. Right-click a node and choose a method to view the analysis result from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE
If you select Display on sheet to view the combine analysis results, you are advised to click
Statistic. All the selected IEs are displayed on the sheet page.
l View Combine Analysis Results of E2E Delays
a. Right-click an analysis set and choose Combine Analysis Delay from the shortcut
menu.
The Combine Delay Setting window is displayed, as shown in Figure 18-3.

Figure 18-3 Combine Delay Setting window

Table 18-3 lists detailed description about the parameters in the Combine Delay
Setting window.

Table 18-3 Parameters in the Combine Delay Setting window

Parameter Description

Current Analysis Group Indicates the analysis set operated by


the current user.

Other analysis Group Indicates the analysis set selected for


combine analysis.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Parameter Description

Result Node Name Indicates the node name for the


combine analysis result. The name can
be automatically generated by the
Assistant or manually modified.

b. After the parameters are set, click OK.


The Assistant performs combine analysis for the E2E delay based on the specified
analysis set.
c. Click Combined Analysis Results > E2E Delay. The node named after the value
of Result Node Name is generated under the node.
d. Right-click a node and choose a method to view the analysis result from the
shortcut menu.
For details about the E2E delays which can be viewed, see Table 18-4.

Table 18-4 Description of the E2E delays


Parameter Scope/Unit Description

Audio RTP Delay Unit: ms Audio RTP Delay.

Video RTP Delay Unit: ms Video RTP Delay.

Audio RTP Jitter Unit: ms Audio RTP Jitter.

Video RTP Jitter Unit: ms Video RTP Jitter.

----End

18.4 Exporting Data Based on the Preset Filter Conditions


This section describes how to export data based on the preset filter conditions for specified
analysis groups. This function helps drive test (DT) analysis engineers efficiently query the
analysis results.

Prerequisites
You have created analysis groups and executed the analysis tasks. For detailed operations, see
6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an analysis group and choose Conditions Export Data from the shortcut menu.
The Conditions Export Data window is displayed, as shown in Figure 18-4.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Figure 18-4 Conditions Export Data window

Table 18-5 lists descriptions of the Conditions Export Data window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Table 18-5 Conditions Export Data window description


Filter Condition Operation Description

IE Filter Condition If you set Logical Operation to and, the


query result must meet all preset IE filter
conditions. If you set Logical Operation to
or, the query result meets any one of the
preset IE filter conditions.
1. Click Add. The Add IE Condition Item
dialog box is displayed.
2. Expand the counter navigation tree and
double-click an IE counter. The selected
counters are displayed in the text box in
the left pane. Select an operator from the
drop-down list in the middle and enter a
value in the text box in the right pane.

Time Filter Condition 1. Click Add. The Add Time Condition


Item dialog box is displayed.
2. Set Start Time and End Time.
NOTE
The start time must be earlier than the end
time.
3. Click OK.
Then, the system adds the preset filter
time to the Time Filter Condition area.
You can add multiple subconditions in
the Time filter condition area. The
system analyzes the IEs that meet any of
the subconditions.

Region Filter Condition Select a region mode from the Logical


Operation row. in: statistics within the
region are collected. outside: statistics
outside the region are collected.
In the Region Filter Condition area, select
the region where the IE resides.

Step 2 Then, click Next.

Step 3 In the Available IE area, select the IEs to be exported and add them to the Selected IE area.
NOTE

The contents for the nodes except Session App Throughput UL and Session App Throughput DL
under the PS Analysis node are exported as separate tables.

Step 4 Click the icon corresponding to the Export Path parameter to select a data export path and
click Save.
The data can be exported into CSV and TXT files.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 18 Typical Application

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19 Interface Reference

About This Chapter

This section shows the involved interfaces and the corresponding parameter information.

19.1 Interface Description: Map Window


This section describes the Map window. This helps you understand the window components,
functions of components, and functions of shortcut icons.
19.2 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Chart View Window
This section describes the chart view window and helps you understand the window
components, the function of each component, and the functions of the shortcut icons.
19.3 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Table View Window
This section describes the parameters in the table view window and helps you understand the
table components when viewing IEs in the table view window.
19.4 Interface Description: View Window Management
This section describes the test data view windows and helps you learn the mode in which the
Assistant displays the data.
19.5 Interface Description: Custom Report interface
This section describes the Report Templateinterface and helps you understand the interface
components, the function of each component, and the functions of shortcut icons.
19.6 Interface Description: KPI Editor Dialog Box
This section describes the parameters in the KPI Editor dialog box.
19.7 Parameters for Customizing Events
This section describes parameters in the Custom Event Editor window. You can refer to this
section when customizing events.
19.8 Interface Description: Setting the Analysis Task Template
This section describes the parameters in the System Setting dialog box. You can refer to this
section when viewing, modifying, or adding an analysis task template.
19.9 Parameters for Configuring Layer Control Properties
This section describes the parameters for configuring layer display properties in the Layer
Control dialog box. You can refer to this section when viewing the layer control properties,
layer display properties, layer label properties, and layer offset.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.10 Parameters for Configuring Legends


This section describes the parameters for configuring IE legends and event legends. You can
refer to this section to set the related parameters when configuring the legend properties.
19.11 Parameters in a Report Generated for Engineering Parameter Checking Failure
This section describes the parameters in a report generated for the engineering parameter
checking failure. You can refer to this section when modifying engineering parameters.
19.12 Parameters for Setting GSM Theme Analysis Types
This section describes the parameters for setting GSM theme analysis types. You can refer to
this description when setting the parameters of the theme analysis types.
19.13 Parameters for Setting the WCDMA Analysis Type
This section describes the parameters for setting the WCDMA analysis type. You can refer to
this section when setting the parameters for each analysis type.
19.14 Parameters for Setting LTE Theme Analysis Types
This section describes the parameters for setting the LTE theme analysis types. You can refer
to this section when setting the parameters for each theme analysis type.
19.15 Parameters for Setting the VoLTE Analysis Type
This section describes the parameters for setting the VoLTE analysis types. You can refer to
this section when setting the parameters for each analysis type.
19.16 Parameters for Setting the TD-SCDMA Analysis Type
This section describes the parameters for setting the TD-SCDMA analysis types. You can
refer to this section when setting the parameters for each analysis type.
19.17 Parameters for Setting Display Properties of Sites
This section describes the parameters for setting display properties of sites. You can refer to
this section when setting such parameters.
19.18 Parameters for Importing DT Logfiles
This section describes the parameters in the Logfile Manager dialog box. You can refer to
this section to set the related parameters when importing the DT logfiles.
19.19 Parameters for Creating an Analysis Group
This section describes the parameters in the Add Analysis Group dialog box. You can refer
to this section to set the related parameters when creating an analysis group.
19.20 Interface Description: Viewing KPI Results in the KPI Result Window
This section describes the KPI Result window. You can refer to this section when viewing the
KPI analysis results.
19.21 Parameters for Viewing the Drilldown Analysis Result of a WCDMA Event
This section describes the parameters in some windows after a WCDMA event is drilled
down. You can refer to this section when drilling down the analysis result of a WCDMA
event.
19.22 Parameters for Viewing the GSM Coverage Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the GSM coverage analysis result. You can
refer to this section to set the related parameters when viewing the detailed information about
the GSM coverage analysis.
19.23 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Coverage Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA coverage analysis result. You
can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the detailed
information about the WCDMA coverage analysis.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.24 Parameters for Viewing the LTE Coverage Analysis Result


This section describes the parameters involved in the LTE coverage analysis result. You can
refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the detailed information
about the LTE coverage analysis.
19.25 Parameters for Viewing the TD-SCDMA Coverage Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the TD-SCDMA coverage analysis result.
You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down detailed
information about the TD-SCDMA coverage analysis.
19.26 Parameters for Viewing the Missing Neighboring TD-SCDMA Cell Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the missing neighboring TD-SCDMA cell
analysis. You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down
detailed information about the missing neighboring TD-SCDMA cell analysis.
19.27 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis result.
You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the detailed
information about the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis.
19.28 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Downlink Interference Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA downlink interference
analysis result. You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down
the detailed information about the WCDMA downlink interference analysis.
19.29 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Missing Neighboring Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA missing neighboring analysis
result. You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the
detailed information about the WCDMA missing neighboring analysis.
19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs
This section describes the parameters in the Custom KPI Manager dialog box and the
Counting KPI Editor/Calculation KPI Editor dialog box. You can refer to this section
when you create and set a custom KPI.
19.31 Parameters for Custom Report Templates
This section describes the parameters in the Text, Table, Map, and Chart dialog boxes. You
can refer to this section to set the related parameters when creating custom report templates or
modify predefined report templates.
19.32 Parameters for Exporting CSV
This section describes parameters in the Export CSV window. You can refer to this section
when exporting files in CSV format.
19.33 Parameters for Custom IEs
This section describes the parameters in the Custom IE dialog box. You can refer to this
section when creating or modifying a custom IE.
19.34 Parameters for Custom Events
This section describes the parameters in the Custom Event Manager dialog box and the
Custom Event Editor dialog box. You can refer to this section when creating or modifying a
custom event.
19.35 Parameters for Custom Delay
This section describes the parameters in the Custom Delay dialog box. You can refer to this
section to set the related parameters when you modify custom delays.
19.36 Parameters for Setting an Automatic Analysis Task

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

This section describes the parameters in the Automatic Analysis Setting dialog box. You can
refer to this section when setting an automatic analysis task on the Assistant.
19.37 Parameters for Executing an Automatic Analysis Task
This section describes the parameters for executing an automatic analysis task. You can refer
to this section when you view the properties of an automatic analysis task.
19.38 Parameters for Measurement Information
This section describes the parameters in the Measurement Information window.
19.39 Parameters for Map Setting
This section describes the parameters in the Map Setting dialog box. You can set the color of
lines connecting drive test (DT) points to the cells, borders, and grids.
19.40 Parameter Description: Indoor Report
This section describes the parameters in the Indoor Report Setting dialog box. You can refer
to this section to set the related parameters when you modify the indoor reports.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.1 Interface Description: Map Window


This section describes the Map window. This helps you understand the window components,
functions of components, and functions of shortcut icons.
Figure 19-1 shows the Map window. Table 19-1 provides the description of Figure 19-1.

Figure 19-1 Map window

Table 19-1 Description of the Map window


No. Name Description

1 Map Layers window Indicates the layer management window that


provides the operation entry for managing the map
layers and data layers involved in the imported map.

2 Map toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common map


operations.

3 Map display area Displays the information such as the imported map,
DT events, and DT routes.

4 Map status bar Displays the longitude and latitude of the current
position, distance of the test points, and zoom
information of the map.

Map Toolbar
The toolbar in the Map window provides the entry to common outdoor map operations. You
can open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For
details, see Table 19-2.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Table 19-2 Toolbar in the Map window


Icon Map Name Description
Shortcut
Menu

- Arrow -

- Open Enables you to import an


Indoor indoor grid map.
Map

- Open Map Enables you to open the


MapInfo map and the grid
map. The extension of a
map file can
be .tab, .gst, .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .
jpeg, .gif or .png.

- Save Map Enables you to save the map


layer to a .gst file.

- Export Enables you to save the map


Map layer and parameter layer
to .tab files.

Tools > Zoom In Zoom In Enlarges a portion of the map to view it


in more detail.

Tools > Zoom Zoom Out Enables you to zoom out on the map.
Out

- Tools > Delete Delete Enables you to delete temporary map


TempLayer TempLayer layers.

- Tools > Delete Delete Enables you to delete selected temporary


Feature Feature map layers.

Tools > Pan Pan Enables you to move the map. You can
click the map and hold down the mouse
to move the map.
NOTE
In the map window, hold down Ctrl+Alt and
drag the map to move it.

Tools > Center Align Enables you to set any point on the map
Center as the center. You can click the icon and
then click any point on the map. After
that, the map is displayed with the point
as the center.

Tools > Select Single Enables you to select the object contained
Select in the current layer. You can select
multiple objects by holding down Ctrl.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Tools > Rectangle Enables you to select all the objects in a


Rectangle Select Select rectangle. You can click the icon and then
drag the mouse on the map to select a
rectangle area.

Tools > Radius Radius Enables you to select all objects in a


Select Select circular area. You can click the icon and
then drag the mouse on the map to select
a circular area.

Tools > Polygon Polygon Enables you to select all objects in a


Select Select polygon area. You can click the icon and
then drag the mouse on the map to select
a polygon area.

Tools > Distance Measureme Enables you to measure the distance of a


nt Distance DT route. You can click a point on the
map as the starting point and drag the
mouse to any direction. In the status bar
of the outdoor map window, the system
displays the distance from the starting
point to the point where the mouse stops.

Layer Control Layer Enables you to edit the layer properties.


Control You can click the icon to open the Layer
Control dialog box to manage the layer
or modify the layer properties.

- Layer Offset Enables you to set the layer offset. You


can click the icon to open the Layer
Offset dialog box and then set the layer
offset in the dialog box.

- Add Layers Enables you to add parameter layers. You


can click the icon to open the IE &
Event Display On Map dialog box and
then select the parameter layers to be
displayed in the dialog box to add
parameter layers.

- Synchronize Enables you to synchronize the cell color


Cell Color with the IE color.

- Cell Search Enables you to search for a cell in the


map window. You can click the icon to
open the Cell Search dialog box and then
set the searching criteria in the dialog box
to locate a cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

- Switch to Enables the Assistant to switch to the


Google Google Earth window.
Earth All the parameter layers under the Data
Layers node in the Map Layers window
can be displayed in the Google Earth
window. The map layers under the Tab
Layers node in the Map Layers window
cannot be displayed in the Google Earth
window.

- Enable/ Enables or Edits the legend style of a


disable selected indicator layer.
Legend

- Enable/ Enables or disables the grid and legend of


disable Grid a map.
Line NOTE
The grids are not displayed if the scale is less
than 2 m or greater than 500 km.

- Show/hide Enables the Assistant to display the test


Track track of DT data.
NOTE
The track function can be used only if one
indicator layer is displayed on the map.

- Tools > Delete Delete Enables you to delete temporary map


TempLayer TempLayer layers.

- Tools > Delete Delete Enables you to delete selected temporary


Feature Feature map layers.

- Add Region Enables you to set a region on a map.


You can set a region on a map as required
by clicking and dragging the mouse
on the map.

- Save Region Enables you to name and save a region


that is set on a map.

After you click , specify the name of


the region and click OK, the name of the
region is displayed under the Region
node on the menu bar.
l You can right-click the name of the
region and choose Display On Map
from the shortcut menu or double-
click the name of the region to enable
the region to be displayed on the map.
l You can right-click the name of the
region and choose Delete Region
from the shortcut menu to delete the
region.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

- Map Setting Enables you to set the color of lines


connecting DT points and the cells,
borders, grids, and wireless parameters.
For details about the parameters of Map
Setting, see 19.39 Parameters for Map
Setting

- Delta Enables you to set the delta analysis


Analysis parameters for two data analysis sets.

- Antenna Marks an antenna icon on an indoor map.


Table

- Drawing Sets the shapes and colors of graphics on


a map.
l Line
l OVAL
l Star
l Circle
l Rectangle
l Text
l Polygon

Map Layers window (1)


The Map Layers window is in the right pane of the Map window. You can right-click the
map and then choose Map Layers from the shortcut menu. The Map Layers window is
displayed.
As shown in Figure 19-2, the Map Layers window contains the parameter layers and map
layers.

Figure 19-2 Map Layers window (2)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.2 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Chart View


Window
This section describes the chart view window and helps you understand the window
components, the function of each component, and the functions of the shortcut icons.

Chart Toolbar
The chart view can be categorized into line chart, pie chart, and histogram, as shown in
Figure 19-3. Table 19-3 describes the items in Figure 19-3. You can right-click an indicator
to navigate to the chart view window.

Figure 19-3 Chart view window

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Table 19-3 Description of the chart view window


No. Name Description

(1) Chart Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common chart
operations.

(2) Chart display area Displays the distribution of data.

The chart toolbar provides the entry for common chart operations. You can open the related
window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For details about the toolbar,
see Table 19-4.

Table 19-4 Description of the chart toolbar


Icon Description

Enables you to view a position of the chart.


You can zoom in on a portion of the chart by clicking the chart and
dragging it with the mouse; or you can move the chart by right-clicking the
chart and dragging it with the mouse.

Enables you to rotate the chart.


If you click this icon, the chart is displayed in three-dimensional mode.
You can hold down the left mouse button and drag the chart with the
mouse to any direction to view the chart in a rotating manner. You can

click to switch to the two-dimensional display mode.

Enabled you to move the chart.


If you click this icon, the chart is displayed in three-dimensional mode.
You can hold down the left mouse button and drag the chart with the

mouse up and down to move the chart. You can click to switch to the
two-dimensional display mode.

Enables you to zoom in or out on the chart.


If you click this icon, the chart is displayed in three-dimensional mode.
You can hold down the left mouse button to zoom in or zoom out on the

chart with the mouse up and down. You can click to switch to the
two-dimensional display mode.

Enables you to adjust the depth of the chart.


If you click this icon, the chart is displayed in three-dimensional mode.
You can hold down the left mouse button and drag the chart with the

mouse up and down to adjust the depth of the chart. You can click to
switch to the two-dimensional display mode.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Icon Description

Indicates the three-dimensional mode.


If you click this icon, the icon is highlighted. In this case, the chart is
displayed in three-dimensional mode. Then, you can click this icon to
switch to the two-dimensional display mode.

Enables you to edit the basic information about the chart, including
coordinate axis, color, and marks.
After you click this icon, the Editing dialog box is displayed. You can
click on a certain tab page to view the parameters on the tab page.

Enables you set the print information.


When the PC is installed with a printer, you can click this icon to print the
chart information displayed in the current chart view window.

Enables you to copy the information displayed in the current chart view
window. You can copy the contents of the current chart to the Windows
clipboard by clicking this icon.

Enables you to save a chart.

19.3 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Table View


Window
This section describes the parameters in the table view window and helps you understand the
table components when viewing IEs in the table view window.
The table view window consists of the Sheet tab and the Statistics tab, as shown in Figure
19-4. You can right-click an indicator to navigate to the table view window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Figure 19-4 Table view window

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

l The Sheet tab page displays the IE information. The information about multiple IEs in
different analysis groups can be displayed on the tab page at a time.
NOTE

l Select an IE in the navigation tree on the left and drag the IE to the Sheet tag page.
Information about the IE is displayed on the Sheet tab page.
l Right-click on the Sheet tab page and choose Drill Down from the shortcut menu to drill
down the IE.
l Right-click on the Sheet tab page and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the
Sheet tab page.
l Right-click on the Sheet tab page and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the
Sheet tab page.
l Select the column containing information about an IE on the Sheet tab page. Right-click and
choose Delete from the shortcut menu to delete the IE.
l The Statistics tab page displays the IE statistical information. The statistical information
about multiple IEs in different analysis groups can be displayed on the tab page at a time.

19.4 Interface Description: View Window Management


This section describes the test data view windows and helps you learn the mode in which the
Assistant displays the data.
Figure 19-5 shows the test data view of the Assistant and Table 19-5 provides the description
of Figure 19-5.

NOTE

This section takes the Theme Detail view, GSM Serving + Neighbor Cell view, Theme Result View
view, and Map view as examples.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 269


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Figure 19-5 Interface of the view

Table 19-5 Description of the view

No. View Type Description

(1) List view Displays test data in tables.

(2) Combination view Displays test data by using both the chart and the table
to reflect the value change of each parameter.

(3) Other view Displays test data in tables but the setting of other
view is different from that of the list view. For details,
see 13.1.4 Configuring the View Window.

(4) Map view Displays the statistical results in the map window.

19.5 Interface Description: Custom Report interface


This section describes the Report Templateinterface and helps you understand the interface
components, the function of each component, and the functions of shortcut icons.

Figure 19-6 shows the Report Template interface. Table 19-6 provides the description of
Figure 19-6.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 270


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Figure 19-6 Report Template interface

Table 19-6 Description of the Report Template interface

No. Name Description

1 Report toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common report


operations.

2 Report property area Displays the property information about a report.

3 Report object area Displays the predefined report templates and


existing report templates.

Report Toolbar
The toolbar in the Custom Report interface provides the entry for common outdoor map
operations. You can open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain
icons. For the description of the toolbar, see Table 19-7.

Table 19-7 Toolbar in the Report Template interface

Icon Name

Create report template

Rename report template

Copy report template

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 271


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Icon Name

Export report template

Import report template

Add an information element (IE) Row at the selected


position

Add a KPI row at the selected position

Add a title row at the selected position

Add a comment row at the selected position

Add a theme row at the selected position

Add an event Row at the selected position

Add a picture at the selected position

Edit selected contents

Delete object

Clear contents of the report template

Save current template

Move object up

Move object down

Move object left

Move object right

Report Object Area


The report object area is in the left pane of the window. Table 19-8 describes the tab pages
involved in this area.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 272


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Table 19-8 Description of the report object area


Report Format Report Type Report Template

Excel BenchMark Report l GSM CS Report


Template l GSM PS Report
l LTE ATU Report
l LTE Scanner Report
l LTE UE Report
l TS-SCDMA CS Report
l TS-SCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA CS Report
l WCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA Scanner Report

Cluster Report l GSM CS Report


Template l GSM PS Report
l LTE ATU Report
l LTE Scanner Report
l LTE UE Report
l TS-SCDMA CS Report
l TS-SCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA CS Report
l WCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA Scanner Report

SSV Report l CDMA SSV


Template l GSM SSV
l LTE SSV
l LTE VoLTE SSV
l TD-SCDMA SSV
l WCDMA SSV

UserCustomRep Business Statistics l CDRforOmstarByCall


ortTemplate Report Template l CDRforOmstarBySecond

Excel l LTE Single Site Verification Report


l LTE Theme Report
l Parameters Statistics Report 1
l Parameters Statistics Report 2
l WCDMA Theme Report

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 273


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Report Format Report Type Report Template

Word BenchMark Report l GSM CS Report


Template l GSM PS Report
l LTE ATU Report
l LTE Scanner Report
l LTE UE Report
l TS-SCDMA CS Report
l TS-SCDMA PS Report
l Theme Report
l WCDMA CS Report
l WCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA Scanner Report

Cluster Report l GSM CS Report


Template l GSM PS Report
l LTE ATU Report
l LTE MOS Report
l LTE Scanner Report
l LTE UE Report
l NB-IoT UE Report
l TS-SCDMA CS Report
l TS-SCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA CS Report
l WCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA Scanner Report

SSV Report l GSM SSV


Template l LTE SSV
l LTE VoLTE SSV
l WCDMA SSV
NOTE
In a report template, you can add and delete Basic
Information which includes related site information
and corresponding cell information. The information
cannot be edited.

Report Property Area


In the report object area, if you double-click an object, the property of the object is displayed
in the report property area. In the report property area, you can view the components of a
report template.
NOTE

You can modify the property of an object by double-clicking the object in the report property area.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 274


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Shortcut Menu
On the Template tab page of the report object area, you can right-click a template and then
add, delete, or rename the report template by using the shortcut menu.

19.6 Interface Description: KPI Editor Dialog Box


This section describes the parameters in the KPI Editor dialog box.

KPI Editor
Figure 19-7 shows the KPI Editor dialog box.

Figure 19-7 KPI Editor dialog box

No. Parameter Description

1 Basic information Sets the custom KPI name,


unit, group, and format.

2 Area for editing a KPI Displays the custom KPI


expression expression.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 275


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

No. Parameter Description

3 Operator Provides calculation and


logical operators used to
create custom KPIs.

4 Function tree Provides common functions


used to create custom KPIs.
NOTE
The Assistant provides
different functions when you
create counting KPIs and
calculation KPIs.
You can add a function to the
expression edit area by double-
clicking a node in the function
tree.

5 Value - Name list Displays enumeration data.


NOTE
If you double-click an IE of
the enumeration type on the IE
tab page in the KPI cluster, the
IE value is displayed in the
Value - Name list.

6 KPI cluster Provides IEs, events, KPIs,


and messages. For details.
NOTE
For details about RTP Message
IE field parameters, see Table
19-9.

Table 19-9 RTP Message IE parameters


IE Name Description

Direction Indicates the packet transmission direction.


The values are as follows:
l 0(UE->Network)
l 1(Network->UE)

Rat Type Indicates the RAT type. The values are as


follows:
l Unknown
l LTE
l WLAN

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 276


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

IE Name Description

Codec type Indicates the code type. The values are as


follows:
l AMR
l AMR-WB
l H.264
l H.263(1998 and 2000)
l H.263(1996)

Media Type Indicates the media type. The values are as


follows:
l Audio
l Video

Frame Type Index AMR_MB Indicates the transmission rate. When the
value of Codec type is AMR, the values are
as follows:
l AMR 4.75 KBIT/S
l AMR 5.15 KBIT/S
l AMR 5.9 KBIT/S
l AMR 6.7 KBIT/S
l AMR 7.4 KBIT/S
l AMR 7.95 KBIT/S
l AMR 10.2 KBIT/S
l AMR 12.2 KBIT/S
l AMR SID (COMFORT NOISE
FRAME)
When the value of Codec type is AMR-
WB, the values are as follows:
l AMR_WB 6.6 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 8.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 12.65 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 14.25 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 15.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 18.25 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 19.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 23.05 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 23.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB SID (COMFORT NOISE
FRAME)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 277


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

IE Name Description

IsMoreFrame The values are as follows:


l True
l False

IsFrameGood The values are as follows:


l True
l False

19.7 Parameters for Customizing Events


This section describes parameters in the Custom Event Editor window. You can refer to this
section when customizing events.

Parameters in the Custom Event Editor window


The Custom Event Editor window is shown in Figure 19-8.

Figure 19-8 Custom Event Editor window

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 278


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Table 19-10 Parameters in the Custom Event Editor window


No. Name Description

1 Basic Sets the name of the custom event.


information
bar

2 Area for Sets the expression of the custom event.


editing an
event
expression

3 Operator tool Provides the calculation and logical operators used to


bar creating custom events.

4 Function area Provides common functions used to create custom events.


NOTE
You can add a function to the expression editing area by double-
clicking a function.

5 Value- Name Displays enumeration data. You can view detailed


list information about an IE in the Value- Name list by double-
clicking an enumeration IE on the IE counter tab page.

6 Counter tab Selects the IE, event, or message included in the customized
event expression.
NOTE
For details about RTP Message IE field parameters, see Table 19-9 .

19.8 Interface Description: Setting the Analysis Task


Template
This section describes the parameters in the System Setting dialog box. You can refer to this
section when viewing, modifying, or adding an analysis task template.

Toolbar
The System Setting dialog box consists of the toolbar, template list, and template content.as
shown in Figure 19-9.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 279


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Figure 19-9 System Setting window

The toolbar in the System Setting dialog box provides entries for common template settings
so that you can add or delete a template by clicking the corresponding icon. For details about
the toolbar, see Table 19-11.

Table 19-11 Description of the icons on the toolbar

Icon Name Description

New Template Enables you to create an analysis task template.

Rename Enables you to rename the template selected in


Template Template List.

Duplicate Enables you to copy the template selected in


Template Template List.

Delete Template Enables you to delete the template selected in


Template List.

Template List area


The Template List area, in the left side of the System Setting dialog box, enables you to
view the name of the analysis task template and to select an analysis task template as required.
The Assistant provides the follow templates by default: ALL template, GSM template, LTE
template, WCDMA template, CDMA template, TD-SCDMA template and WLAN template.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 280


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Template Content area


The Template Content area, in the right side of the System Setting dialog box, enables you
to set the contents of the analysis task template. For details about the Template Content area,
see Table 19-12.

Table 19-12 Description of parameters in the Template Content area


Parameter Description

KPI tab page Enables you to select one or multiple KPIs to set the
corresponding alarm thresholds.

IE tab page Enables you to select one or multiple IEs.

Report tab page Enables you to set the report properties.

Theme tab page Enables you to set the theme analysis type.

CDF Statistics tab page Enables you to set the CDF percentage.

Filter tab page Enables you to set the conditions for filtering DT logfiles.

Binning tab page Enables you to set the binning type.

Site Display tab page Enables you to set the engineering parameter display
properties.

Others tab page Enables you to set Other properties.

19.9 Parameters for Configuring Layer Control Properties


This section describes the parameters for configuring layer display properties in the Layer
Control dialog box. You can refer to this section when viewing the layer control properties,
layer display properties, layer label properties, and layer offset.

Parameters in the Layer Control Dialog Box


Parameter Description

Up Moves a layer upwards on the map.

Down Moves a layer downwards on the map.

Add Adds a layer above a selected layer. Click Add, select a .tab file
in the displayed dialog box, and then click Open.

Remove Deletes a selected layer.

Visible Sets a selected layer to the visible or invisible state.

Selectable Determines whether a specified layer can be selected. After you


select the check boxes, you can click , , , and on
the map toolbar to select the NEs on the layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 281


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Editable Sets whether to edit the selected layer.

Display Sets the display properties of a selected layer. Click this button.
The Display Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the display
properties of the selected layer in this dialog box. For details, see
Parameters in the Display Properties Dialog Box.

Labels Sets the label properties of a selected layer. Click this button.
The Label Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the label
properties of the selected layer in this dialog box. For details, see
Parameters in the Label Properties Dialog Box.

Parameters in the Display Properties Dialog Box


Parameter Description

Override style Indicates whether to change the default map element


format.
l Four map element formats are available, that is,
area, line, symbol, and text.
l Each lay corresponds to only one format. The
system automatically determines the format
corresponding to a layer. Therefore, the format
cannot be changed manually.
l You can set the properties of a map element
format, such as bolding, zoom in, or changing the
color of a map element.

Zoom Display Within Indicates whether to display a map layer within the
Layering Zoom Range zoom range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom).

Min Zoom Indicates the minimum zoom range of a layer. You


can set the minimum zoom range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.

Max Zoom Indicates the maximum zoom range of a layer. You


can set the maximum zoom range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.

Show Line Direction Indicates whether to show line direction.

Show Nodes Indicates whether to show nodes.

Show Centroids Indicates whether to show centroids.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 282


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Label Properties Dialog Box


Parameter Description

Label with DataSet Indicates the data contained in a selected layer.

Field Indicates the field list of a label.

Visibility Display within Indicates whether to display a label within the zoom
Range range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom).

Min Zoom Indicates the minimum zoom range of a label. You


can set the minimum zoom range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.

Max Zoom Indicates the maximum zoom range of a label. You


can set the maximum zoom range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.

Allow Overlapped Text Indicates whether to allow overlapped texts.

Allow Duplicated Text Indicates whether to allow duplicated texts.

Label Partial Objects Indicates whether to label partial objects.

Maximum labels Indicates the maximum number of labeled objects.

Styles Sets the style of a label text.

Label Lines Selects label lines.

None Indicates no label lines.

Simple Indicates simple label lines.

Arrow Indicates the label lines with an arrow.

Sets line styles.

Position Orientation Sets the direction of an anchor point.

Rotation Sets the rotation direction.

None Indicates no rotation.

Parallel to One Rotates a text to make its direction parallel to one


Segment line segment.

Parallel to Rotates a text to make its direction parallel to all line


Multiple segments.
Segments

Label Offset Sets the offset of a label.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 283


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Edit Cell Radius Dialog Box


Parameter Description

Current Radius Indicates the current radius of a cell. The unit is kilometer (km).

Modified Radius Indicates the modified radius of a cell. The unit is kilometer
(km).
You can select the value of the radius from the drop-down list.
The value range is from 0.02 to 5 kilometers.

Parameters in the Layer Offset Dialog Box


Parameter Description

OffsetX Indicates the distance of the selected layer offset horizontally.


The unit is meter (m).
The positive value offsets right. The negative value offsets left.

OffsetY Indicates the distance of the selected layer offset vertically. The
unit is meter (m).
The positive value offsets upwards. The negative value offsets
downwards.

< Offsets by one meter left based on the current value.

> Offsets by one meter right based on the current value.

Λ Offsets by one meter upwards based on the current value.

V Offsets by one meter downwards based on the current value.

19.10 Parameters for Configuring Legends


This section describes the parameters for configuring IE legends and event legends. You can
refer to this section to set the related parameters when configuring the legend properties.

Description of Parameters in the Ranged Legend Property Window


You need to configure the parameters listed in the following table when configuring the
legends with segmented values.

Parameter Description

IE Name Indicates the name of the IE or event for which the legend is
configured.

Setting Indicates the configuration form of a legend.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 284


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Custom Enables you to configure the legend by using the default segmented
values. For details, see Custom.

Auto Arrange Enables you to configure the legend by using the unsegmented
values. For details, see Auto Arrange.

Custom Arrange Enables you to configure the legend by using the custom segmented
values. For details, see Custom Arrange.

Reverse Enables the system to display the PDF and CDF charts by legend
range of an indicator in descending order in the bar chart view
window.

Custom
You can configure the parameters in the Symbol area by referring to the following table.

Parameter Description Value

Insert Before Enables you to insert a legend This option is valid when the IE has
before the legend. a free data area.

Insert After Enables you to insert a legend This option is valid when the IE has
after the legend. a free data area.

Edit Enables you to edit a legend. For -


details, see Symbol Setting
Dialog Box.

Remove Enables you to remove a legend. -

Symbol Setting Dialog Box


The Symbol Setting dialog box is displayed when you edit the IE legend or event legend. The
information in the displayed dialog box, however, varies according to the legend type. You
need to set the parameters in the Symbol Setting area by referring to the following table.

Parameter Description Remarks

Font Specifies the display font of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.

Size Specifies the display size of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 285


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description Remarks

Shape Specifies the display shape of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.

Color Specifies the display color of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.

example Enables you to preview the You can refer to the parameter
configured legend example. description when editing IE and
event legends.

Min Value Specifies the minimum value of a You can refer to the parameter
range. description when editing IE legends.
If you select the bracket from the
drop-down list, it indicates that
the minimum value is greater
than or equal to the specified
value. If you select the
parenthesis from the drop-down
list, it indicates that the minimum
value is greater than the specified
value.
NOTE
The edited value range cannot
overlap with an existing value
range. This parameter is not
displayed in the dialog box for
modifying event legends.

Max Value Specifies the maximum value of You can refer to the parameter
a range. description when editing IE legends.
If you select the bracket from the
drop-down list, it indicates that
the maximum value is smaller
than or equal to the specified
value. If you select the
parenthesis from the drop-down
list, it indicates that the
maximum value is smaller than
the specified value.
NOTE
The edited value range cannot
overlap with an existing value
range. This parameter is not
displayed in the dialog box for
modifying event legends.

Value Indicates the name of an edited You can refer to the parameter
event. description when editing event
legends.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 286


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Auto Arrange
You can configure the parameters in the Symbol area by referring to the following table.

Parameter Description

Font Specifies the display font of a legend.

Size Specifies the display size of a legend.

Shape Specifies the display shape of a legend.

example Enables you to preview the configured legend example.

Custom Arrange
You can configure the parameters in the Symbol area.

Parameter Description Value

Font Specifies the display font of a -


legend.

Size Specifies the display size of a -


legend.

Shape Specifies the display shape of a -


legend.

example Enables you to preview the -


configured legend example.

Arrange...to... Indicates the value range. The default value of the current IE is
the value range.

paraNo Specifies the number of The default value is 6, and the


segments. The system maximum value is 50.
automatically divides the value
range into paraNo segments.

red->green Highlights different value ranges -


in different colors (from red to
green progressively).

green->red Highlights different value ranges -


in different colors (from green to
red progressively).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 287


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.11 Parameters in a Report Generated for Engineering


Parameter Checking Failure
This section describes the parameters in a report generated for the engineering parameter
checking failure. You can refer to this section when modifying engineering parameters.

Parameter Description

Total Number Indicates the number of engineering parameters that do not pass the
check.

Error—Required Indicates that the error level is error when a mandatory field value is
Field invalid.

Warning— Indicates that the error level is warning when an optional field is
Optional Field invalid or the cell global identities (CGIs) of different cells are the
same.

Row Indicates the row of the engineering parameter that does not pass the
check.

Column Indicates the column of the engineering parameter that does not pass
the check.

Name Indicates the field name of the engineering parameter that does not
pass the check.

Value Indicates the value of the engineering parameter that does not pass the
check.

Error Level Indicates the error level of the check failure. The error levels are as
follows:
Error: indicates the error level when a mandatory field value is
invalid.
Error(Duplicate Row Number): indicates the error level when the
location area codes (LACs) and cell identities (CIs) of two or more
cells are the same. The information in the brackets indicates the row
of the engineering parameter of a cell that has the same LAC and CI
with that of another cell.
Warning: indicates the error level when an optional field is invalid or
the cell global identities (CGIs) of different cells are the same.
Warning(Duplicate Row Number): indicates the error level when the
cell global identities (CGIs) of two or more cells are the same. The
information in the brackets indicates the row of the engineering
parameter of a cell that has the same CGI with that of another cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 288


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.12 Parameters for Setting GSM Theme Analysis Types


This section describes the parameters for setting GSM theme analysis types. You can refer to
this description when setting the parameters of the theme analysis types.

Project Setting Dialog Box - Theme Tab Page


Configuration Item Description

Theme List Indicates the theme list.

Property Indicates the property of a parameter.

Value Indicates the value of a parameter.

Common Expand Distance(%) is set in the Property area.


Expand Distance(%): indicates the extension rate of the cell
radius. The unit is percentage (%).

GSM > RF Theme Parameters related to the theme analysis type are set.
The parameters to be set vary according to the analysis type. For
details, see Parameters for Over Coverage Analysis,
Parameters for Poor Coverage Analysis, Parameters for
Azimuth Garbled Analysis, and Parameters for No Serving
Cell Dominance Analysis.

GSM > Coverage Sets the parameters of the GSM Coverage theme.

GSM > Handover Sets the parameters of the GSM Handover theme.

GSM > Interference Sets the parameters of the GSM Interference theme.

Parameters for Over Coverage Analysis


Configuration Value Range and Description
Item Unit

Distance Threshold The default value is 2. Indicates the coefficient of the cell
The recommended coverage distance threshold.
value ranges from 2 to Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell
2.5. radius x Distance Threshold

Alarm Threshold The default value is 50 Indicates the alarm threshold of over
and the unit is %. coverage. If the value of a data record
exceeds this threshold, the data record is
displayed in red in the analysis results.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 289


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Configuration Value Range and Description


Item Unit

Ratio of Start The default value is 0 Ratio of Start Distance: Indicates the ratio
Distance and the unit is %. of the start distance of a coverage
segment.
Start Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
Start Distance

Ratio of End The default value is Ratio of End Distance: Indicates the ratio
Distance 1000 and the unit is %. of the end distance of a coverage
segment.
End Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
End Distance

Bound Number The default value is 10. Bound Number: Indicates the number of
coverage segments between the start
distance and the end distance.

Parameters for Poor Coverage Analysis


Configuration Value Range and Description
Item Unit

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[0,500) -70 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
dBm. range of [0,500).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[500,100 -78 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
0) dBm. range of [500,1000).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[1000,15 -90 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [1000,1500).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[1500,20 -90 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [1500,2000).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[2000,25 -90 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [2000,2500).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[2500,30 -95 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [2500,3000).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[3000,35 -95 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [3000,3500).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 290


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Configuration Value Range and Description


Item Unit

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[3500,40 -95 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [3500,4000).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[4000,45 -95 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [4000,4500).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold[4500,50 -95 and the unit is level at a position within the distance
00) dBm. range of [4500,5000).

RxLev The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received


Threshold>5000 -95 and the unit is level at a position where the distance is
dBm. more than 5000.

Alarm Threshold The default value is 10 Indicates the alarm threshold of the poor-
and the unit is %. coverage rate. If the value of a data
record exceeds this threshold, the data
record is displayed in red in the analysis
results.

Parameters for Azimuth Garbled Analysis


Configuration Value Range and Description
Item Unit

Angle Threshold The default value is 20 Indicates the threshold of the azimuth
and the unit is degree. deviation.

Alarm Threshold The default value is 50 Indicates the alarm threshold of the
and the unit is %. azimuth. If the value of a data record
exceeds this threshold, the data record is
displayed in red in the analysis results.

Parameters for No Serving Cell Dominance Analysis


Configuration Value Range and Description
Item Unit

RxLev Threshold The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received
-78 and the unit is level. If the received level exceeds the
dBm. value of this parameter, it exceeds the
threshold.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 291


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Configuration Value Range and Description


Item Unit

Alarm Threshold The default value is 40 Indicates alarm threshold of no serving


and the unit is %. cell dominance. If the value of a data
record exceeds this threshold, the data
record is displayed in red in the analysis
results.

Ratio of Start The default value is 0 Ratio of Start Distance: Indicates the
Distance and the unit is %. ratio of the start distance of a coverage
segment.
Start Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
Start Distance

Ratio of End The default value is Ratio of End Distance: Indicates the ratio
Distance 1000 and the unit is %. of the end distance of a coverage
segment.
End Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
End Distance

Bound Number The default value is 10. Indicates the number of boundaries that
are divided for setting distance ranges.

RxLev Diff The default value is 5 Indicates the threshold received level
Threshold and the unit is dBm. difference between the serving cell and
the neighboring cell. If the received level
difference is smaller than the value of this
parameter, it exceeds the threshold.

Neighbour Cell The default value is 3. Indicates the threshold number of


Count Threshold neighboring cells whose RxLev Diff
Threshold is smaller than the specified
value. If the number of problem
neighboring cells exceeds this threshold,
it indicates that no serving cell
dominance occurs at the current DT
point.

Parameters for Handover Analysis


Configuration Item Value Range and Description
Unit

The RxLev Threshold Value range: -110 to Indicates the threshold of the received
-47. The default level.
value is -90 (unit:
dBm).

The Rxqual Threshold Value range: 0 to 7. Indicates the threshold of the Rxqual
The default value is 6 level.
(unit: dBm).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 292


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Configuration Item Value Range and Description


Unit

The Time Threshold of Value range: 3 to 30. Specifies the upper time threshold for
Continually Handover The default value is consecutive handovers of
10 (unit: s). ContinuallyHO_Times_Thd times in
the areas where handovers occur
frequently.

The Times Threshold Value range: 2 to 10. Specifies the lower threshold for the
of Continually The default value is number of handovers within
Handover 2. ContinuallyHO_Time_Thd in the areas
where handovers occur frequently.

Parameters for Poor Coverage Analysis


Configuration Item Value Range and Description
Unit

The RxLev Threshold Value range: -110 to Indicates the threshold of the received
of Poor Coverage -47. The default level.
value is -90 (unit:
dBm).

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive Collection 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Handover value is 8.

Parameters for Interference Analysis


Configuration Item Value Range and Description
Unit

The RxLev Threshold Value range: -110 to Indicates the threshold of the received
1 of Interference -47. The default level.
value is -90 (unit:
dBm).

The Rxqual Threshold Value range: 0 to 7. A sampling point is an interference


1 of Interference The default value is sampling point when RxLev of a
4. sampling point in the serving cell is
greater than or equal to the interference
RxLev threshold and RxLev is greater
than to the interference Rxqual
threshold.

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive Collection 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Point value is 8.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 293


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.13 Parameters for Setting the WCDMA Analysis Type


This section describes the parameters for setting the WCDMA analysis type. You can refer to
this section when setting the parameters for each analysis type.

Project Setting Dialog Box - Theme Tab Page


Configuration Item Description

WCDMA > Pilot Sets the parameters of the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis.
Pollution For details, see Parameters in the Pilot Pollution Window.

WCDMA > DL Sets the parameters of the WCDMA downlink interference


Interference analysis.
For details, see Parameters in the DL Interference
Window.

WCDMA > Neighbor Sets the parameters of missing WCDMA neighboring cell
Cell Analysis theme.
For details, see Parameters in the Neighbor Cell Analysis
Window.

WCDMA > RF Theme Sets the parameters of the WCDMA RF theme.


The parameters vary according to the analysis type. For
details, see Parameters in the Over Coverage Window and
Parameters in the No Serving Cell Dominance Window.

WCDMA > Coverage Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Coverage theme.

WCDMA > HO Theme Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Handover theme.

WCDMA > WCDMA Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Interference theme.
Interference

WCDMA > Abnormal Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Abnormal Event theme.
Event In the Abnormal Event dialog box of the Theme tab page,
click Custom Event to add user-defined events.

WCDMA > Throughput Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Throughput theme.

WCDMA > PSC Sets the parameters of the WCDMA PSC Optimization
Optimization theme.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 294


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Pilot Pollution Window


Parameter Value Range and Description
Unit

RSCP Threshold Value range: -150 Indicates the threshold of the RSCP.
to 0. The default When the maximum RSCP of a DT point is
value is -100 (unit: greater than this threshold, you need to use the
dBm). RSCP Difference parameter to make a
judgment.

RSCP Difference The default value Indicates the threshold of RSCP difference.
is 5 (unit: dBm). If the difference between the maximum RSCP
of a DT point and the RSCP of a neighboring
cell is smaller than this threshold, the
neighboring cell is considered as a neighboring
cell with pilot pollution problem.

NB Cell Count The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells.
is 3. If the number of neighboring cells with pilot
pollution problem is greater than or equal to
this threshold, the DT point has the pilot
pollution problem.

Parameters in the DL Interference Window


Parameter Value Range and Description
Unit

Alarm Threshold Value range: 0 to Indicates the alarm threshold.


100. The default If the proportion of the number of downlink
value is 50 (unit: interference DT points to the total number of
%). DT points is greater than this threshold, the
theme analysis result is displayed in red in the
Theme Result View window.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[0,500) is -95 (unit: dBm). distance between a DT point and the dominant
serving cell is greater than or equal to 0 and is
smaller than 500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 295


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[500,1000) is -95 (unit: dBm). distance between a DT point and the dominant
serving cell is greater than or equal to 500 and
is smaller than 1000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[1000,1500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 1000
and is smaller than 1500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[1500,2000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 1500
and is smaller than 2000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[2000,2500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 2000
and is smaller than 2500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 296


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[2500,3000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 2500
and is smaller than 3000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[3000,3500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 3000
and is smaller than 3500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[3500,4000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 3500
and is smaller than 4000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[4000,4500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 4000
and is smaller than 4500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 297


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[4500,5000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 4500
and is smaller than 5000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[5000, ∞) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 5000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.

Ec/Io Threshold The default value Indicates the Ec/Io threshold.


is -10 (unit: dB). If the Ec/Io of a DT point is greater than this
threshold, it indicates that the Ec/Io signal
quality of the DT point is good.

Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with
is 50 (unit: m). downlink interference problem and the total
number of DT points by Distance Step.

Parameters in the Neighbor Cell Analysis Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

Missing Intra- - Sets the parameters of missing neighboring


Frequency cells analysis when the analysis of the serving
Neighbor Cell cell and the intra-frequency test cell is
area performed.

Ec/Io Offset The default value Indicates the threshold of the Ec/Io difference
Threshold is 3 (unit: dB). between a serving cell and an intra-frequency
test cell.
If the Ec/Io difference (absolute value) between
a serving cell and an intra-frequency test cell is
greater than this threshold, the test cell is
considered as a neighboring cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 298


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range Description


and Unit

Missing Inter- - Sets the parameters of missing neighboring


Frequency cells analysis when the analysis of the serving
Neighbor Cell cell and the inter-frequency test cell is
area performed.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold of the RSCP.
is -105 (unit: When the RSCP of a serving cell is greater
dBm). than this threshold, you need to use the NB
RSCP Threshold and NB Ec/Io Threshold
parameters to make a judgment.

NB Cell RSCP The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -90 (unit: dBm). frequency test cell.
If the RSCP of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the Ec/Io of the test cell is
greater than NB Ec/Io Threshold, the test cell
is considered as a neighboring cell.

NB Cell Ec/Io The default value Indicates the Ec/Io threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -12 (unit: dB). frequency test cell.
If the Ec/Io of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the RSCP of the test cell is
greater than NB RSCP Threshold, the test cell
is considered as a neighboring cell.

Parameters in the Over Coverage Window


Parameter Value Range and Description
Unit

Alarm Threshold Value range: 0 to Indicates the alarm threshold.


100. The default If the proportion of the number of over
value is 50 (unit: coverage DT points to the total number of DT
%). points is greater than this threshold, the theme
analysis result is displayed in red in the Theme
Result View window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 299


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

Coverage The default value Indicates the coefficient of the cell coverage
Extended Radius is 2.5. distance threshold.
Coefficient Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell radius
x Value of this parameter
You need to check whether a DT point is
within the cell coverage distance threshold
according to the distance between the DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the DT point
is not within the cell coverage distance
threshold, you need to use the RSCP Offset
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Offset The default value Indicates the RSCP difference.


is 8 (unit: dBm). For a DT point, if the difference between the
receive level of the serving cell and the
maximum receive level of the neighboring cell
is smaller than the difference threshold and the
DT point is not within Coverage Extended
Radius Coefficient, it is considered as the DT
point with over coverage problem.

Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with over
is 50 (unit: m). coverage problem and the total number of DT
points by Distance Step.

Parameters in the No Serving Cell Dominance Window


Parameter Value Range and Description
Unit

Analysis Mode - Indicates the analysis type.


RSCP: indicates that the RSCP is
the basis for judging whether no
serving cell dominance problem
occurs.

Alarm Threshold Value range: 0 to Indicates the alarm threshold.


100. The default If the proportion of the number of
value is 30 (unit: %). the DT points with no serving cell
dominance problem to the total
number of DT points is greater
than this threshold, the theme
analysis result is displayed in red
in the Theme Result View
window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 300


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

RSCP Threshold [0,500) The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold
-95 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to 0
and is smaller than 500.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Threshold [500,1000) The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold
-95 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to 500
and is smaller than 1000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[1000,1500) -95 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
1000 and is smaller than 1500.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 301


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[1500,2000) -95 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
1500 and is smaller than 2000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[2000,2500) -100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
2000 and is smaller than 2500.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[2500,3000) -100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
2500 and is smaller than 3000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 302


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[3000,3500) -100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
3000 and is smaller than 3500.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[3500,4000) -100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
3500 and is smaller than 4000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[4000,4500) -100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
4000 and is smaller than 4500.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 303


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range and Description


Unit

RSCP Threshold The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold


[4500,5000) -100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
4500 and is smaller than 5000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Threshold [5000, ∞) The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold
-100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
5000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.

RSCP Difference The default value is Indicates the RSCP difference.


5 (unit: dBm). If the difference between the
maximum RSCP of a DT point
and the RSCP of a neighboring
cell is smaller than this threshold,
the neighboring cell is considered
as a neighboring cell with
interference problem.

NB Cell Count The default value is Indicates the number of


3. neighboring cells.
If the number of neighboring cells
with interference problem of a DT
point is greater than or equal to
this threshold, the DT point is
considered as the DT point with
no serving cell dominance
problem.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 304


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Poor Coverage Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -115 Weak coverage RSCP threshold.
of Poor Coverage to -25. The Determines weak-coverage-related
default value is conditions when the RSRP value reported
-95 (unit: dBm). by a terminal is less than the threshold.

The ECIO Threshold Value range: -24 Screens out sampling points with poor
of Poor Coverage to 0. The default coverage.
value is -12 (unit:
dB).

Use ECIO TRUE or FALSE Determines whether to use the Ec/Io to


screen out sampling points with poor
coverage.

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Collection Point value is 10.

The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.

Parameters in the No Serving Cell Dominance Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The Threshold of Value range: -125 Minimum receive RSCP threshold.


Minimum Downlink to -25. The Determines the conditions related to no
RSCP default value is serving cell dominance when the RSCP
-110 (unit: dBm). values of a serving cell and neighboring cell
are greater than the threshold.

The Margin Value range: 0 to Threshold for the RSCP difference between
Threshold between 10. The default a serving cell and neighboring cell.
Service Cell's RSCP value is 3 (unit: Determines the conditions related to no
of NCell's dB). serving cell dominance when the RSCP
difference between a serving cell and
neighboring cell is less than the threshold.

The NCell Number Value range: 0 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Threshold of Non 6. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
Main Coverage value is 2. sampling points in a problem area is greater
than or equal to the threshold.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 305


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range Description


and Unit

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Collection Point value is 10.

The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.

Parameters in the Over Coverage Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Minimum receive RSCP. Determines the
of Weak Coverage to -25. The conditions related to overshoot coverage
default value is when the RSCP of a serving cell is greater
-95 (unit: dBm). than the threshold.

The Tiers Threshold Value range: 1 to Specifies the essential condition for
of Over Coverage Cell 5. The default overshoot coverage: The number of tiers
value is 3. between sampling points and the serving
cell must be greater than the threshold.

The Distance Value range: 1 to Specifies the essential condition for


Threshold of Over 6. The default overshoot coverage: The distance between
Coverage value is 1.5. sampling points and the serving cell must be
greater than or equal to the average inter-
site distance (ISD) multiplied by the
threshold.

The count Threshold Value range: 1 to Specifies the threshold for the number of
of Average Station 9. The default sites among all sites under the non-serving
Distance value is 6. cell (the distances between each site and the
serving cell are calculated and sorted in
ascending order). Then the average value is
obtained based on the threshold.

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Collection Point value is 10.

The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 306


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Wrong Coverage Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The Collection Point Value range: 1 to Determines incorrect coverage when the
Number Threshold of 100. The default number of sampling points of a serving cell
Service Cell value is 20. is greater than or equal to the threshold.

The Number of Value range: 1 to Specifies the essential condition for


Consecutive 100. The default incorrect coverage of a serving cell: The
Collection Point value is 40 (unit: proportion of incorrect coverage points in
%). all sampling points must be greater than or
equal to the threshold.

Parameters in the Up-Link Power Limited Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -115 Weak coverage RSCP threshold.
of Weak Coverage to -25. The Determines the conditions related to limited
default value is uplink quality when the RSCP of the
-95 (unit: dBm). serving cell at the sampling point with
limited uplink quality is greater than or
equal to the threshold.

The UE TX The default value Determines whether the UE transmit power


Threshold of Uplink is 10 (unit: dB). is greater than the threshold to identify
Limited uplink quality limitation.

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Collection Point value is 10.

The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.

Parameters in the Continually Handover Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The Time Threshold Value range: 5 to Specifies the upper time threshold for
of Continually 30. The default consecutive handovers of
Handover value is 10 (unit: ContinuallyHO_Times_Thd times in the
s). areas where handovers occur frequently.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 307


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range Description


and Unit

The Times Threshold Value range: 2 to Specifies the lower threshold for the number
of Continually 10. The default of handovers within
Handover value is 2. ContinuallyHO_Time_Thd in the areas
where handovers occur frequently.

Parameters in the Handover Delay Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The Time Threshold Value range: 0.1 Determines handover delays. After a UE
of Untimely to 10. The default reports the 1A/1B/1C event, it is determined
IntraHandover Event value is 0.6 (unit: that there is a handover delay if an intra-
s). frequency handover event is not initiated
within the duration specified by the
threshold.

The Time Threshold Value range: 0.1 Determines handover delays. After a UE
of Untimely to 10. The default reports the 2A/2B/2C event, it is determined
InterHandover Event value is 0.6 (unit: that there is a handover delay if an inter-
s). frequency handover event is not initiated
within the duration specified by the
threshold.

The Time Threshold Value range: 0.1 Determines handover delays. After a UE
of Untimely to 10. The default reports the 3A event, it is determined that
InterUTRANHandove value is 0.6 (unit: there is a handover delay if an inter-RAT
r Event s). handover event is not initiated within the
duration specified by the threshold.

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines a missing neighboring cell.
of Miss Neighbor to -25. The When there is a handover delay, it is
default value is determined that a neighboring cell is a
-95 (unit: dBm). missing neighboring cell when the RSCP of
the neighboring cell is greater than the
threshold but the cell is not configured as
the neighboring cell.

The Distance Value range: 1 to Determines a scrambling code conflict. It is


Threshold of Pilot 10. The default determined that there is a scrambling code
Pollution value is 4 (unit: conflict if the distance between the two cells
km). with the same frequency and scrambling
code is less than or equal to the threshold.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 308


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range Description


and Unit

Switch Don't in time Value range: 0.1 Time threshold for delayed inter-frequency
RSCP threshold to 10. The default handovers. A handover does not occur in
value is 0.6 (unit: time if inter-frequency handover events are
s). not triggered after the UE reports the
2A/2B/2C events and after a period
indicated by the threshold.

Parameters in the HO Delay(ROMES) Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The difference The default value RSCP difference between the primary
between Active RSCP is 3. serving cell and neighboring cell
and Neighbour RSCP

The Value of Value range: -125 Neighboring cell RSCP threshold


Neighbour RSCP to -25. The
threshold default value is
-95 (unit: dBm).

The Value of Active Value range: -125 Primary serving cell RSCP threshold
RSCP threshold to -25. The
default value is
-105 (unit: dBm).

Period threshold The default value Handover delay threshold


is 2 (unit: s).

Parameters in the High proportion of soft HO Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The Proportion Value range: 1 to Specifies the lower threshold for


Threshold of Soft 100. The default determining high soft handover proportions
Handover value is 40 (unit: in an area.
%).

The Collection Point Value range: The Collection Point Threshold of serving
Threshold of serving more than 20. cell.
cell The default value
is 20.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 309


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Interference Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point1.
1 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-85 (unit: dBm).

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point2.
2 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-95 (unit: dBm).

The EcIo Threshold 1 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if the
value is -12 (unit: RSCP of the serving cell is greater than or
dB). equal to the RSCP Threshold 1 of
Interference and Ec/Io is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 1 of Interference.

The EcIo Threshold 2 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if
value is -14 (unit: RSCP is less than the interference RSCP
dB). threshold of the serving cell, and is greater
than or equal to the RSCP Threshold 2 of
Interference, and EcIo is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 2 of Interference.

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Collection Point value is 10.

The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.

The Distance Value range: 1 to Determines a scrambling code conflict. It is


Threshold of Pilot 10. The default determined that there is a scrambling code
Pollution value is 4 (unit: conflict if the distance between the two cells
km). with the same frequency and scrambling
code is less than or equal to the threshold.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 310


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Throughput Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

UL Throughput Value range: 1 to Determines whether the uplink throughput


Threshold 10000. The is too low. The uplink throughput in an area
default value is is too low if it is less than the threshold.
5000 (unit:
kbit/s).

DL Throughput Value range: 1 to Determines whether the downlink


Threshold 50000. The throughput is too low. The downlink
default value is throughput in an area is too low if it is less
5000 (unit: than the threshold.
kbit/s).

UL Throughput Value range: 1 to Specifies the lower threshold for the


Abnormal Threshold 100. The default abnormal sampling point proportion of a
value is 1 (unit: cell. Subsequent analysis is required only
%). when the abnormal sampling point
proportion of a cell is greater than the
threshold.

DL Throughput Value range: 1 to Specifies the lower threshold for the


Abnormal Threshold 100. The default abnormal sampling point proportion of a
value is 1 (unit: cell. Subsequent analysis is required only
%). when the abnormal sampling point
proportion of a cell is greater than the
threshold.

Throughput Value range: 1 to Determines whether there are other theme


Abnormal Time 100. The default analysis problems within the time range
Threshold value is 15 (unit: obtained by adding or subtracting
s). Throughput _Abnormal_Time_Thd to or
from the sampling point time range with
low throughput.

Parameters in the PSC Optimization Window


Parameter Value Range Description
and Unit

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point1.
1 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-85 (unit: dBm).

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point2.
2 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-95 (unit: dBm).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 311


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range Description


and Unit

The EcIo Threshold 1 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if the
value is -12 (unit: RSCP of the serving cell is greater than or
dB). equal to the RSCP Threshold 1 of
Interference and Ec/Io is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 1 of Interference.

The EcIo Threshold 2 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if
value is -14 (unit: RSCP is less than the interference RSCP
dB). threshold of the serving cell, and is greater
than or equal to the RSCP Threshold 2 of
Interference, and EcIo is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 2 of Interference.

The Number of Value range: 1 to Calculates the number of consecutive


Consecutive 100. The default sampling points in a problem area.
Collection Point value is 10.

The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.

The Distance Value range: 1 to Determines a scrambling code conflict. It is


Threshold of Pilot 10. The default determined that there is a scrambling code
Pollution value is 4 (unit: conflict if the distance between the two cells
km). with the same frequency and scrambling
code is less than or equal to the threshold.

19.14 Parameters for Setting LTE Theme Analysis Types


This section describes the parameters for setting the LTE theme analysis types. You can refer
to this section when setting the parameters for each theme analysis type.

Project Setting Dialog Box - Theme Tab Page


Configuration Item Description

LTE > RF Theme Sets the parameters of the LTE RF theme.


The parameters vary according to the analysis type.

LTE > Coverage Sets the parameters of the LTE Coverage theme.

LTE > HO Theme Sets the parameters of the LTE HO theme.

LTE > InterFerence Sets the parameters of the LTE InterFerence theme.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 312


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Configuration Item Description

LTE > Abnormal Event Sets the parameters of the LTE Abnormal Event theme.
In the Abnormal Event dialog box of the Theme tab page,
click Custom Event to add user-defined events.

LTE > Throughput Sets the parameters of the LTE Throughput theme.

Parameters in the Over Coverage-RF Theme Window


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Alarm Threshold Value range: 0 to Indicates the alarm threshold.


100. The default If the proportion of the number of over
value is 50 (unit: coverage DT points to the total number of
%). DT points is greater than this threshold, the
theme analysis result is displayed in red in
the Theme Result View window.

Coverage Extended The default value Indicates the coefficient of the cell coverage
Radius Coefficient is 2.5. distance threshold.
Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell
radius x Value of this parameter
You need to check whether a DT point is
within the cell coverage distance threshold
according to the distance between the DT
point and the dominant serving cell. If the
DT point is not within the cell coverage
distance threshold, the Assistant uses the
RSRP Offset parameter to make a
judgment.

RSRP Offset The default value Indicates the RSRP difference.


is 8 (unit: dB). For a DT point, if the difference between
the receive level of the serving cell and the
maximum receive level of the neighboring
cell is smaller than the difference threshold
and the DT point is not within Coverage
Extended Radius Coefficient, it is
considered as the DT point with over
coverage problem.

Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with
is 50 (unit: m). over coverage problem and the total number
of DT points by Distance Step.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 313


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the No Serving Cell Dominance-RF Theme Window


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Alarm Threshold Value range: 0 to Indicates the alarm threshold.


100. The default If the proportion of the number of over
value is 30 (unit: coverage DT points to the total number of
%). DT points is greater than this threshold, the
theme analysis result is displayed in red in
the Theme Result View window.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[0,500) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 0 and is smaller than 500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[500,1000) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 500 and is smaller than 1000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[1000,1500) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 1000 and is smaller than 1500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 314


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[1500,2000) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 1500 and is smaller than 2000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[2000,2500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 2000 and is smaller than 2500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[2500,3000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 2500 and is smaller than 3000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[3000,3500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 3000 and is smaller than 3500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 315


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[3500,4000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 3500 and is smaller than 4000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[4000,4500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 4000 and is smaller than 4500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[4500,5000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 4500 and is smaller than 5000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[5000,∞) is -100 (unit: distance between a sampling point and the
dBm). serving cell dominance is greater than or
equal to 5000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 316


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

RSRP Difference The default value Indicates the RSRP difference.


is 5 (unit: dB). If the difference between the maximum
RSRP of a DT point and the RSRP of a
neighboring cell is smaller than this
threshold, the neighboring cell is considered
as a neighboring cell with interference
problem.

NB Cell Count The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells.
is 3. If the number of neighboring cells with
interference problem of a DT point is
greater than or equal to this threshold, the
DT point is considered as the DT point with
no serving cell dominance problem.

Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with no
is 50 (unit: m). serving cell problem and the total number of
DT points by Distance Step.

Azimuth Garbled Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold for a DT
is -100 (unit: point.
dBm). This parameter is used to determine whether
a DT point is valid. If the RSRP of a service
cell exceeds the threshold, the DT point is
valid. Otherwise, neglect the DT point to
prevent incorrect judgment caused by weak
coverage.

DT Point Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold for the number of
is 10. DT points in a service cell.
This parameter is used to determine whether
the antenna feeder for a cell is faulty. If the
number of DT points in a service cell is less
than the threshold, DT points are
insufficient and the analysis of antenna
feeder faults is not required.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 317


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

Serving Ration The default value Indicates the threshold for the ratio of DT
Threshold is 50. points in the coverage area of a service cell
to all DT points in the service cell.
This parameter is used to determine whether
the antenna feeder for a cell is faulty. If the
ratio of DT points in the coverage area of a
service cell to all DT points in the service
cell is less than the threshold, the antenna
feeder may be faulty.

Neighbor Ration The default value Indicates the threshold for the ratio of DT
Threshold is 70. points in the coverage area of a service cell
under the same BTS to all DT points in the
service cell.
This parameter is used to determine whether
the antenna feeder for a cell is faulty. If the
ratio of DT points in the coverage area of a
service cell under the same BTS to all DT
points in the service cell is less than the
threshold, the antenna feeder may be faulty.

Angle Threshold The default value Indicates the angle margin.


is 20. This parameter is used to determine whether
a DT point is in the coverage area of a cell.
If a DT point is out of the range of Angle
margin±Beamwidth/2, the DT point is out
of the coverage area of the cell.

Poor Coverage Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Serving Cell RSRP The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold of a serving
Threshold is -100 (unit: cell. When the RSRP value reported by a
dBm). UE is less than this threshold, the Assistant
determines whether weak coverage exists in
the serving cell.

Neighboring Cell The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold of a


RSRP Threshold is -110 (unit: neighboring cell. When the RSRP value
dBm). reported by a UE is less than this threshold,
the Assistant determines whether weak
coverage exists in the serving cell.

Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 318


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.

Average inter-site The default value Indicates the average distance between sites.
distance is 2000.

The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Sort the cells according to the distance
of Average inter-site Value range: between the serving cell site and all sites
dist integers greater (from near to far). Select the cell number
than or equal to 1. specified by this threshold and obtain the
average inter-site distance.

Over Coverage-Coverage Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Latterly Cell RSRP The default value RSRP threshold for the cell closest to a
Threshold is -100. sampling point.

The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Threshold for the number of sites among all
of Average inter-site Value range: sites under the non-serving cell (the
dist integers greater distances between each site and the serving
than or equal to 1. cell are calculated and sorted in ascending
order). Then, the average inter-site distance
is obtained based on the threshold.

Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.

Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.

The Tiers Threshold Default value: 3. Indicates the mandatory condition for
of Over Coverage Cell Value range: 1 to overshoot coverage. The number of tiers
6. between a sampling point and the serving
cell is greater than or equal to this threshold.

Average inter-site The default value Indicates the distance of the inter-site.
distance is 2000.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 319


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

No Serving Cell Dominance-Coverage Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold. If the RSRP
is -100 (unit: values of the serving cell and its
dBm). neighboring cells are greater than this
threshold, the no-serving-cell-dominance
conditions are met.

RSRP Difference The default value Indicates the threshold for the RSRP
is 3 (unit: dB). difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells. If the RSRP difference
between the serving cell and its neighboring
cells is less than this threshold, the no-
serving-cell-dominance conditions are met.

Calculation Cell Num The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells in
is 2. which the RSRP value is less than the RSRP
difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells.

Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.

Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.

The distance between The default value Indicates the distance between UE and site.
UE and site is 2000.

Wrong Coverage Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Serving Ration The default value Indicates the threshold for the ratio of DT
Threshold is 40 (unit: %). points in the coverage area of a service cell
to all DT points in the service cell.
This parameter is used as a condition to
determine whether wrong coverage exists. If
the ratio of DT points in the coverage area
of a service cell to all DT points in the
service cell is less than the threshold, the
problem may exist.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 320


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Up-Link Power Limited Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Serving Cell RSRP The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold of a serving
Threshold is -100 (unit: cell. If the value reported by the terminal is
dBm). less than the threshold, this parameter is
used as a condition to determine whether the
weak coverage exists.

PCC PUCCH Power The default value Indicates the uplink transmit power.
is 10 (unit: dBm).

Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.

Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.

Average inter-site The default value Indicates the distance of the inter-site.
distance is 2000.

The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Sort the cells according to the distance
of Average inter-site Value range: between the serving cell site and all sites
dist integers greater (from near to far). Select the cell number
than or equal to 1. specified by this threshold and obtain the
average inter-site distance.

Overlay Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold. If the RSRP
is -100 (unit: values of the serving cell and its
dBm). neighboring cells are both greater than this
threshold, this condition is met.

RSRP Difference The default value Indicates the threshold for the RSRP
Threshold is 6 (unit: dB). difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells. If the RSRP difference
between the serving cell and its neighboring
cells is less than this threshold, this
condition is met.

Calculation Cell Num The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells in
is 3. which the RSRP value is less than the RSRP
difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells.

Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 321


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.

Average inter-site The default value Indicates the distance of the inter-site.
distance is 2000.

The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Sort the cells according to the distance
of Average inter-site Value range: between the serving cell site and all sites
dist integers greater (from near to far). Select the cell number
than or equal to 1. specified by this threshold and obtain the
average inter-site distance.

Inter Nb Analysis Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

The RSRP Threshold Value range: -140 Indicates the RSRP threshold of LTE weak
of LTE Weak to -43. The coverage.
Coverage default value is
-110 (unit: dBm).

The Number of Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of consecutive


Consecutive 100. The default collection point.
Collection Point value is 5.

The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 10 Indicates the proportion of Iffy collection
Collection Point to 100. The point.
default value is
60 (unit: %).

The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Indicates the RSCP threshold of LTE-to-
of LTE-to- to -25. The UMTSiRAT neighbor cell.
UMTSiRAT neighbor default value is
cell -95 (unit: dBm).

The Distance Value range: 2 to Indicates the distance threshold of LTE-to-


Threshold of LTE-to- 20. The default UMTS iRAT neighbor cell.
UMTS iRAT neighbor value is 5 (unit:
cell km).

The RSSI Threshold Value range: -110 Indicates the RxLev threshold of L2G iRAT
of L2G iRAT to -47. The neighbor cell.
neighbor cell default value is
-95 (unit: dBm).

The Distance Value range: 2 to Indicates the distance threshold of L2G


Threshold of L2G 20. The default iRAT neighbor cell.
iRAT neighbor cell value is 5 (unit:
km).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 322


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

The Distance Value range: 2 to Indicates the distance threshold of UMTS


Threshold of UMTS 20. The default Finding-Cellname.
Finding-Cellname value is 10 (unit:
km).

The Distance Value range: 2 to Indicates the distance threshold of GSM


Threshold of GSM 20. The default Finding-Cellname.
Finding-Cellname value is 10 (unit:
km).

Continually Handover Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

The Time Threshold The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
of Continually is 10 (unit: s).
Handover

The Times Threshold The default value Indicates the maximum number of
of Continually is -2. handovers allowed in a week.
Handover

HO Delay Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

ThemeAttr LTE HO The default value Indicates the user-defined period for
Delay HO Period is 100 (unit: ms). reporting an event.

ThemeAttr LTE HO The default value Indicates the signal level threshold for a
Delay HO RSRP is -100 (unit: handover.
dBm).

Interference Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Serving Cell RSRP The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold of a serving
Threshold is -100 (unit: cell. When the RSRP value reported by a
dBm). UE is less than this threshold, this condition
is used to determine whether interference
exists.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 323


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

Serving Cell SINR The default value Indicates the SINR threshold of the serving
Threshold is 6 (unit: dBm). cell. When the SINR value reported by a UE
is less than this threshold, this condition is
used to determine whether interference
exists.

Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.

Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.

Throughput Rate Parameter Description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Throughput The default value Indicates the throughput threshold.


Threshold is 100 (unit: MB).

Point Interval The default value Indicates the number of interval points.
is 2.

Calculation Window The default value Indicates the number of thresholds of


Size is 5. exception points.

19.15 Parameters for Setting the VoLTE Analysis Type


This section describes the parameters for setting the VoLTE analysis types. You can refer to
this section when setting the parameters for each analysis type.

Parameters in the VoLTE Theme Setting Dialog Box


Configuration Item Description

GEN VoLTE VoLTE Theme > VoLTE voice call completion rate
Access Fail The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
Parameters in the Access Fail dialog box
(GEN VoLTE).

VoLTE Theme > VoLTE voice call drop


Call Drop The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
Parameters in the Call Drop dialog box
(GEN VoLTE).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 324


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Configuration Item Description

VoLTE Theme > VoLTE access delay


Access Delay The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
Parameters in the Access Delay dialog box
(GEN VoLTE).

VoLTE Theme > VoLTE video call completion rate


MOS The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
Parameters in the MOS dialog box (GEN
VoLTE).

VoLTE Theme > VoLTE voice SRVCC analysis


SRVCC The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
Parameters in the SRVCC dialog box
(GEN VoLTE).

VoLTE Theme > Save path for VoLTE theme analysis reports
Report Setting You can click Browse... after selecting the
check box before Report to set the report save
path. After the analysis is complete, you can
open the report to view analysis results.

ROMES VoLTE VoLTE Theme > VoLTE voice call completion rate
Access Fail The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
VoLTE Theme >
Parameters in the VoLTE Theme Setting
Call Drop
dialog box (ROMES VoLTE) .
VoLTE Theme >
MOS

VoLTE Theme > Save path for VoLTE theme analysis reports
Report Setting You can click Browse... after selecting the
check box before Report to set the report save
path. After the analysis is complete, you can
open the report to view analysis results.

VoLTE Theme > File to be imported for VoLTE theme analysis


Next and its save path. For details about the Theme
Import File window, see Table 19-13.

Parameters in the Access Fail dialog box (GEN VoLTE)


Parameter Unit/Value Description
Range

Common

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 325


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Unit/Value Description


Range

Pre_Alerting The values are as Indicates the early alerting switch.


follows: True indicates late alerting and False
l True indicates early alerting.
l False
The default value
is True.

OneOrTwoStage The values are as Indicates the dialing mode.


follows: One indicates dialing once and Two
l One indicates dialing twice.
l Two
The default value
is Two.

TCALL_Active The values are as TCALL has been set.


follows:
l True
l False
The default value
is True.

TCALL Time Value range: 1 to Indicates the TCALL time. This parameter
60 (unit: s). The is displayed when the value of
default value is TCALL_Active is True.
10.

TQOS_Active The values are as TQOS has been set.


follows:
l True
l False
The default value
is True.

TQOS Time Value range: 1 to Indicates the TQOS time. This parameter is
60 (unit: s). The displayed when the value of TQOS_Active
default value is 6. is True.

Statistic Period Value range: 1 to Indicates the statistical period.


24 (unit: h). The
default value is 1.

TOP N Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of top problems.


10. The default
value is 5.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 326


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameters in the Call Drop dialog box (GEN VoLTE)


Parameter Unit/Value Description
Range

Common

Statistic Period Value range: 1 to Indicates the statistical period.


24 (unit: h). The
default value is 1.

TOP N Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of top problems.


10. The default
value is 5.

Parameters in the Access Delay dialog box (GEN VoLTE)


Parameter Unit/Value Description
Range

Common

Pre_Alerting The values are as Indicates early alerting.


follows: True indicates late alerting and False
l True indicates early alerting.
l False
The default value
is True.

One_or_Two_Stage The values are as Indicates the dialing mode.


follows: One indicates dialing once and Two
l One indicates dialing twice.
l Two
The default value
is One.

Latency_Thd_Idle Value range: 0.00 Indicates the access delay threshold in idle
to 15.00 (unit: s). mode (MTC).
The default value
is 3.50.

Latency_Thd_Con Value range: 0.00 Indicates the access delay threshold in


to 15.00 (unit: s). connected mode (MTC).
The default value
is 2.50.

TIME_THD The value ranges Indicates the delay multiple.


from 1 to 10, and
the default value
is 3.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 327


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Unit/Value Description


Range

Statistic Period Value range: 1 to Indicates the statistical period.


24 (unit: h). The
default value is 1.

TOP N Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of top problems.


10. The default
value is 5.

Parameters in the MOS dialog box (GEN VoLTE)


Parameter Unit/Value Description
Range

Common

MOS_BAD_THD The value ranges Indicates the poor MOS threshold.


from 1.00 to 4.75,
and the default
value is 3.00.

AMR_LOW_THD The minimum Indicates the low AMR threshold.


value is 4.50 and
the default value
is 12.65.

TOP N Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of top problems.


10. The default
value is 5.

Statistic Period Value range: 1 to Indicates the statistical period.


24 (unit: h). The
default value is 1.

Parameters in the SRVCC dialog box (GEN VoLTE)


Parameter Unit/Value Description
Range

Common

TOP N Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of top problems.


10. The default
value is 5.

A2 Threshold Value range: – Indicates the A2 measurement threshold.


140 to –40 (unit:
dBm). The default
value is –144.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 328


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Unit/Value Description


Range

RSRP estimate The values are as Indicates the RSRP evaluation switch.
follows: True indicates enabled and False indicates
l True disabled.
l False
The default value
is True.

Parameters in the VoLTE Theme Setting dialog box (ROMES VoLTE)


Parameter Unit/Value Description
Range

Access Fail RF Range

Start Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: start time point during access.
s). The
default value
is 5.

End Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: end time point during access.
s). The
default value
is 5.

Call Drop RF Range

Start Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: start time point during a call.
s). The
default value
is 5.

End Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: end time point during a call.
s). The
default value
is 5.

MOS RF Range

Start Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: start time point during MOS
s). The analysis.
default value
is 5.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 329


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Unit/Value Description


Range

End Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: end time point during MOS
s). The analysis.
default value
is 1.

MOS IMS and EPC

MOS Threshold Value range: Indicates the low MOS threshold.


1 to 4.75.
Default
value: 3.00.

Top Percent Value range: Indicates the top problem


0 to 100 percentage.
(unit: %).
The default
value is
20.00.

Table 19-13 Theme Import File (ROMES VoLTE) window


Parameter Description

CDR Parameter Indicates the CDR parameter file which is


used for evaluating access failure and call
drop problematic points.

CDR MOS Indicates the CDR MOS file which is used


for evaluating MOS abnormal points.
NOTE
If the MOS theme is not selected, the file does
not need to be imported.

eNodeB Statistic Indicates the eNodeB traffic statistics file


which is used for resource check on the
eNodeB or CN side, such as resource usage
check.

eNodeB Alarm Indicates the eNodeB alarm file which is


used for correlating system alarms.

Pcap Indicates the Pcap file which is used for


correlating the related SIP signaling in
ROMES data analysis.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 330


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

File Path Indicates the file path. You can click


Browse... to select the desired file.
NOTE
Before clicking OK to complete the theme
setting, you need to set the files with an asterisk
(*), such as the Pcap file.

Sheet List Indicates the sheet name in a file.


NOTE
You need to set the names of the sheets in the
File Path file as required.

19.16 Parameters for Setting the TD-SCDMA Analysis


Type
This section describes the parameters for setting the TD-SCDMA analysis types. You can
refer to this section when setting the parameters for each analysis type.

Theme tab in the Project Setting dialog box


Configuration Item Description

TD-SCDMA > RF Sets the parameters of the TD-SCDMA RF theme.


Theme The parameters vary according to the analysis type. For
details, see Over Coverage parameter description.

TD-SCDMA > Neighbor Sets the parameters of the missing TD-SCDMA neighboring
Cell Analysis cell theme.
The parameters vary according to the analysis type. For
details, see Neighbor Cell Analysis parameter description.

Over Coverage parameter description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Alarm Threshold Value range: 0 to Indicates the alarm threshold.


100. The default If the proportion of the number of coverage
value is 50 (unit: overlap DT points to the total number of DT
%). points is greater than this threshold, the
theme analysis result is displayed in red in
the Theme Result View window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 331


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

Coverage Extended The default value Indicates the coefficient of the cell coverage
Radius Coefficient is 2.5. distance threshold.
Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell
radius x Value of this parameter
You need to check whether a DT point is
within the cell coverage distance threshold
according to the distance between the DT
point and the dominant serving cell. If the
DT point is not within the cell coverage
distance threshold, the Assistant uses the
RSRP Offset parameter to make a
judgment.

RSRP Offset The default value Indicates the RSRP difference.


is 8 (unit: dBm). For a DT point, if the difference between
the level of the serving cell and the
maximum level of the neighboring cell is
smaller than the difference threshold and the
DT point is not within Coverage Extended
Radius Coefficient, it is considered as the
DT point with coverage overlap problem.

Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with
is 50 (unit: m). coverage overlap problems and the total
number of DT points by Distance Step.

Neighbor Cell Analysis parameter description


Parameter Value Range/ Description
Unit

Missing Intra- - Sets the parameters of missing neighboring


Frequency Neighbor cells analysis when the analysis of the
Cell area serving cell and the intra-frequency test cell
is performed.

Ec/Io Diff Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold of the Ec/Io
is 3 (unit: dB). difference between a serving cell and an
intra-frequency test cell.
If the Ec/Io difference (absolute value)
between a serving cell and an intra-
frequency test cell is greater than this
threshold, the test cell is considered as a
neighboring cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 332


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value Range/ Description


Unit

Missing Inter- - Sets the parameters of missing neighboring


Frequency Neighbor cells analysis when the analysis of the
Cell area serving cell and the inter-frequency test cell
is performed.

RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold of the RSCP.
is -105 (unit: When the RSCP of a serving cell is greater
dBm). than this threshold, you need to use the NB
RSCP Threshold and NB Ec/Io
Threshold parameters to make a judgment.

NB Cell RSCP The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -90 (unit: dBm). frequency test cell.
If the RSCP of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the Ec/Io of the test cell is
greater than NB Ec/Io Threshold, the test
cell is considered as a neighboring cell.

NB Cell Ec/Io The default value Indicates the Ec/Io threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -12 (unit: dB). frequency test cell.
If the Ec/Io of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the RSCP of the test cell is
greater than NB RSCP Threshold, the test
cell is considered as a neighboring cell.

19.17 Parameters for Setting Display Properties of Sites


This section describes the parameters for setting display properties of sites. You can refer to
this section when setting such parameters.

Parameter Description

Shape Indicates the display shape of each site layer.

Color Indicates the display color of each site layer.

Size Indicates the size of icons on each site layer.

Label Field Indicates the display name of each site layer.

Visible in Report Indicates whether to display a site layer in the generated


report.

19.18 Parameters for Importing DT Logfiles


This section describes the parameters in the Logfile Manager dialog box. You can refer to
this section to set the related parameters when importing the DT logfiles.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 333


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Add Logfile Enables you to add one or multiple DT logfiles.

Add Folder Enables you to add all the DT logfiles in a folder.

Delete Enables you to delete one or multiple DT logfiles.

LogName Indicates the name of a DT logfile.

Size Indicates the size of a DT logfile.

MS_Num Indicates the number of MSs involved in a DT logfile.

Logfile Path Indicates the path for saving a DT logfile.

Status Indicates the import status of a DT logfile.


The import status of a DT logfile can be Succeeded, Ready, or Failed.

19.19 Parameters for Creating an Analysis Group


This section describes the parameters in the Add Analysis Group dialog box. You can refer
to this section to set the related parameters when creating an analysis group.
Figure 19-10 shows the dialog box. Figure 19-10 provides the description of Table 19-14.

Figure 19-10 Add Analysis Group dialog box

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 334


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Table 19-14 Description of the Add Analysis Group dialog box


Parameter Description

Group Name Indicates the name of an analysis group.

Description Describes an analysis group. This parameter is optional.

Filter Enables you to filter the imported DT logfiles.

Cell Indicates the information of a cell. The tool analyzes a cell in the DT
logs and displays only information of this cell.
Click the Cell column. The Cell dialog box is displayed. Select
Network and the corresponding cell information.

MS ID Indicates the ID of a UE, which maps with the DT plan.

Log Name Indicates the name of a DT logfile.

IMSI Indicates the IMSI recorded in the imported DT logfile.

IMEI Indicates the IMEI recorded in the imported DT logfile.

> Enables you to move one or multiple logfiles from the left area to the
right area.

>> Enables you to move all logfiles from the left area to the right area.

< Enables you to move one or multiple logfiles from the right area to the
left area.

<< Enables you to move all logfiles from the right area to the left area.

19.20 Interface Description: Viewing KPI Results in the


KPI Result Window
This section describes the KPI Result window. You can refer to this section when viewing the
KPI analysis results.

Area Division of the KPI Result Window


For details about the division of areas in the KPI Result window, see Figure 19-11. For
details about the division of areas, see Table 19-15.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 335


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Figure 19-11 KPI Result window

Table 19-15 Areas in the KPI Result window

Area Description

(1) Displays the KPI analysis results of analysis groups.


Double-click the value of a KPI for an analysis group, as shown in
the blue area in area (1). Then, the information about the KPI is
displayed in areas (2), (3), and (4).

(2) Displays the event information about the selected KPI in area (1).

(3) Displays the formula for calculating the selected KPI in area (1).

(4) Displays the values of calculation factors in area (3). For details, see
Table 19-16.

Table 19-16 Parameters in area (2)

Parameter Description

Index Displays the serial number of an event in the table.

Time Displays the time when an event occurs.

Event Name Displays the name of an event.

Analysis Group Displays the name of an analysis group.


Name

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 336


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Logfile Displays the name of a DT logfile.

MS Displays the name of a test terminal.

19.21 Parameters for Viewing the Drilldown Analysis


Result of a WCDMA Event
This section describes the parameters in some windows after a WCDMA event is drilled
down. You can refer to this section when drilling down the analysis result of a WCDMA
event.

Parameters in the WCDMA Serving/Active Set + Neighbors Window


Parameter Description

Type Three types are provided:


l Active Set
l Monitor Set
l Detected Set

CellName Indicates the name of a cell.

P-SC Indicates the primary scrambling code.

Cell ID Indicates the ID of a cell.

UARFCN Indicates the uplink UTRAN absolute radio frequency


channel number (UARFCN).

CPICH Ec/Io Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip of the common
pilot channel to the total power density of the received
bandwidth.

CPICH RSCP Indicates the code power of the received signal of the
common pilot channel.

Parameters in the WCDMA BLER Window


Parameter Description

TrCH Indicates the ID of the transport channel.

BLER(%) Indicates the block error rate.

CRC REC Indicates the total number of blocks received within a


statistical period.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 337


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

CRC ERROR Indicates the number of the received CRC errors within a
statistical period.

19.22 Parameters for Viewing the GSM Coverage Analysis


Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the GSM coverage analysis result. You can
refer to this section to set the related parameters when viewing the detailed information about
the GSM coverage analysis.

Over Coverage Tab Page


Parameter Description

Properties area Displays the over-coverage threshold information. You can modify
the value of a parameter when configuring the theme analysis type.

Distance(m) Indicates the cell distance threshold.

Alarm(%) Indicates the alarm threshold for the over-coverage rate.

Theme Summary Indicates the over-coverage statistical information.


area

Total Count Indicates the total DT count.

Bad Count Indicates the over-coverage count.

Rate(%) Indicates the over-coverage rate. The algorithm is as follows:


(Over-coverage count/Total DT count) x 100%.

Chart area Displays the over-coverage statistical information in charts.


l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the count.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.
l Normal DT points are marked by green.

Poor Coverage Tab Page


Parameter Description

Threshold area Displays the poor-coverage threshold information. You can modify
the value of the parameter when configuring the theme analysis
type.

Alarm(%) Indicates the alarm threshold for the poor-coverage rate.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 338


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Theme Summary Indicates the poor-coverage statistical information.


area

RxLev Average Indicates the average received level.

RxLev Max Indicates the maximum received level.

RxLev Min Indicates the minimum received level.

Total Count Indicates the total DT count.

Bad Count Indicates the poor-coverage count.

Rate(%) Indicates the poor-coverage rate. The algorithm is as follows: (Pool-


coverage count/Total DT count) x 100%.

Chart area Displays the poor-coverage statistical information in charts.


l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the count.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.
l Normal DT points are marked by green.

Azimuth Garbled Tab Page


Parameter Description

Threshold area Displays the information about the azimuth garbled threshold. You
can modify the value of a parameter when configuring the theme
analysis type.

Angle Indicates the azimuth deviation threshold.

Alarm Indicates the alarm threshold for the azimuth garbled rate.

Theme Summary Indicates the azimuth garbled statistical information.


area

Total Count Indicates the total DT count.

Bad Count Indicates the azimuth garbled count.

Rate(%) Indicates the azimuth garbled rate. The algorithm is as follows:


(Azimuth garbled count/Total DT count) x 100%.

Chart area Displays the azimuth garbled statistical information in charts.


l The horizontal coordinate indicates the azimuth angle.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the count.
l The change in colors (green-yellow-red) shows the range of the
azimuth difference. The red color indicates that the azimuth
exceeds the beamwidth of the antenna.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 339


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

No Serving Cell Dominance Tab Page


Parameter Description

Threshold area Displays the information about the no-serving-cell-dominance


threshold. You can modify the value of the parameter when
configuring the theme analysis type.

Alarm(%) Indicates the no-serving-cell-dominance alarm threshold.

RxLev Diff(dBm) Indicates the threshold of the received level difference between the
current serving cell and the neighboring cell.

RxLev(dBm) Indicates the received level threshold for the current serving cell.

Neighbor cell Indicates the threshold for the number of neighboring cells whose
Count RxLev Diff(dBm) is smaller than the specified value.

Theme Summary Displays the no-serving-cell-dominance statistical information.


area

Total Count Indicates the total DT count.

Bad Count Indicates the no-serving-cell-dominance count.

Rate(%) Indicates the no-serving-cell-dominance rate. The algorithm is as


follows: (No-serving-cell-dominance count/Total DT count) x
100%.

Chart area Displays the no-serving-cell-dominance statistical information in


charts.
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the count.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.
l Normal DT points are marked by green.

19.23 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Coverage


Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA coverage analysis result. You
can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the detailed
information about the WCDMA coverage analysis.

Over Coverage tab page


Parameter Description

Total Count Total number of DT points.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 340


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Over Coverage Count Number of over-coverage DT points.


The DT point is considered as a over-coverage DT point when
both of the following conditions are met: (1) The distance
between the DT point and the serving cell exceeds the cell
coverage threshold. (2) The difference between the RSCP of the
serving cell and the RSCP of the neighboring cell with the
strongest signal strength is smaller than the RSCP offset.

Over Coverage Over-coverage rate.


Rate(%) The formula for calculating the parameter value is as follows:
Over Coverage Rate(%) = Over Coverage Count/Total Count.

Distance Threshold for the cell coverage distance.


Threshold(m)

((1st - 2nd)RSCP < ((1st - 2nd)RSCP < Threshold)Count is counted when both of
Threshold)Count the following conditions are met: (1) The distance between the
DT point and the serving cell is shorter than the cell coverage
threshold. (2) The difference between the RSCP of the serving
cell and the RSCP of the neighboring cell with the strongest
signal strength is smaller than the RSCP offset.

Chart area Displays the over-coverage statistical information in charts. In


which,
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the DT point count.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.

No Serving Cell Dominance tab page


Parameter Description

Total Count Number of DT points.

No Serving Cell Count Number of DT points with no serving cell dominance.

No Serving Cell Rate of no serving cell dominance.


Rate(%) The formula for calculating the parameter value is as follows:
No Serving Cell Rate(%) = No Serving Cell Count/Total Count.

Chart area Displays the no-serving-cell-dominance statistical information


in charts. In which,
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the DT point count.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 341


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.24 Parameters for Viewing the LTE Coverage Analysis


Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the LTE coverage analysis result. You can
refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the detailed information
about the LTE coverage analysis.

Over Coverage tab page


Parameter Description

Total Count Total number of DT points.

Over Coverage Count Number of over-coverage DT points.


The DT point is considered as an over-coverage DT point when
both of the following conditions are met: (1) The distance
between the DT point and the serving cell exceeds the cell
coverage threshold. (2) The difference between the RSRP of the
serving cell and the RSRP of the neighboring cell with the
strongest signal strength is smaller than the RSRP offset.

Over Coverage Rate(%) Over-coverage rate.


The formula for calculating the parameter value is as follows:
Over Coverage Rate(%) = Over Coverage Count/Total Count.

Distance Threshold(m) Threshold for the cell coverage distance.

Chart area Displays the over-coverage statistical information in charts. In


which,
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the DT point count.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.

No Serving Cell Dominance tab page


Parameter Description

Total Count Number of DT points.

No Serving Cell Count Number of DT points with no serving cell dominance.

No Serving Cell Rate of no serving cell dominance.


Rate(%) The formula for calculating the parameter value is as follows:
No Serving Cell Rate(%) = No Serving Cell Count/Total Count.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 342


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Chart area Displays the no-serving-cell-dominance statistical information


in charts. In which,
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the DT point count.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.

Azimuth Garbled tab page


Parameter Description

Total Count Indicates the total number of sampling


points.

Azimuth Garbled Count Indicates the number of azimuth garbled


sampling points.

Azimuth Garbled Rate(%) Indicates the azimuth garbled rate.


Azimuth Garbled Rate(%) = Azimuth
Garbled Count/Total Count

Chart area Displays the azimuth garbled statistics in


charts. The chart contains the following
items:
l The horizontal ordinate indicates the
azimuth angle.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the
number of DT points.
l Abnormal DT points are marked by red.

19.25 Parameters for Viewing the TD-SCDMA Coverage


Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the TD-SCDMA coverage analysis result.
You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down detailed
information about the TD-SCDMA coverage analysis.

Over Coverage tab


Parameter Description

Total Count Indicates the total number of DT points.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 343


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Over Coverage Count Indicates the number of coverage overlap DT points.


If the distance between the DT point and the primary serving
cell is longer than Distance Threshold (m), and the difference
between the RSCP of the primary cell at the DT point and the
RSCP of the strongest neighboring cell is lower than RSCP
Offset, the DT point is considered as coverage overlap DT
points.

Over Coverage Indicates the coverage overlap rate.


Rate(%) Over Coverage Rate (%) = Over Coverage Count/Total Count.

Distance Threshold Indicates the cell coverage distance threshold.


(m)

((1st - 2nd)RSCP < Indicates the number of DT points. The distance between the DT
Threshold) Count point and the primary serving cell is shorter than Distance
Threshold (m), and the difference between the RSCP of the
primary cell at the DT point and the RSCP of the strongest
neighboring cell is lower than RSCP Offset.

Chart area Displays the coverage overlap statistical information in charts,


where:
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the number of DT points.
l The red points indicate the abnormal DT points in the
distance range.

No Serving Cell Dominance tab


Parameter Description

Total Count Indicates the total number of DT points.

No Serving Cell Count Indicates the DT points with no primary serving cells.

No Serving Cell Indicates the rate that no primary serving cell is covering the DT
Rate(%) point.
No Serving Cell Rate(%) = Number of DT points that have no
primary serving cells/Total number of DT points.

Chart area Displays the DT points with no primary serving cell in charts,
where:
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the number of DT points.
l The red points indicate the abnormal DT points in the
distance range.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 344


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.26 Parameters for Viewing the Missing Neighboring


TD-SCDMA Cell Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the missing neighboring TD-SCDMA cell
analysis. You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down
detailed information about the missing neighboring TD-SCDMA cell analysis.

Theme Result Review window


Parameter Description

Missing Intra-Frequency Indicates the number of intra-frequency missing


Neighboring Cell Count neighboring cells.

Configured Intra-Frequency Indicates the configured intra-frequency


Neighboring Cell Count neighboring cells.

Missing Inter-Frequency Indicates the number of inter-frequency missing


Neighboring Cell Count neighboring cells.

Configured Inter-Frequency Indicates the configured inter-frequency


Neighboring Cell Count neighboring cells.

File List Indicates the DT logfile list, that is, the list of DT
logfiles related to the serving cell of the DT point.

Missing Neighbor Cell tab


Parameter Description

Cell Name Indicates the name of the neighboring cell.

UARFCN Indicates the UARFCN of a neighboring cell.

P-SC Indicates the primary scrambling code of a


neighboring cell.

Suggestion Indicates suggestions, including Recommended,


Not Recommended, and Configured.

Total Point Indicates the number of DT points in the


neighboring cell.

Rate Rate = Number of all DT points of a neighboring


cell/Number of all DT points of a serving cell x
100%

Max RSCP Indicates the maximum RSCP of all the DT points


of a neighboring cell.

Min RSCP Indicates the minimum RSCP of all the DT points


of a neighboring cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 345


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Avg RSCP Indicates the average RSCP of all the DT points of


a neighboring cell.

Max Ec/Io Indicates the maximum Ec/Io of all the DT points


of a neighboring cell.

Min Ec/Io Indicates the minimum Ec/Io of all the DT points


of a neighboring cell.

Max Ec/Io Indicates the average Ec/Io of all the DT points of


a neighboring cell.

NOTE
A neighboring cell refers to a cell that has the neighboring relationship with the cell whose analysis
results are drilled down.

19.27 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Pilot Pollution


Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis result.
You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the detailed
information about the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis.

Pilot Pollution tab page


Parameter Description

SC Best Number of pilot pollution DT points with the strongest RSCP in the
cell whose analysis results are drilled down.

SCN Number of pilot pollution DT points with the N strongest RSCP in the
cell whose analysis results are drilled down.
The value of N can be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

SC≥7 Number of pilot pollution DT points with the RSCP values equal to
or greater than 7 in the RSCP rank statistics for a cell whose analysis
results are drilled down.

SC≥2 Number of pilot pollution DT points with the RSCP values equal to
or greater than 2 in the RSCP rank statistics for a cell whose analysis
results are drilled down.

PP All Total number of pilot pollution DT points. That is, the parameter
value is the sum of the value of SC Best, SC2-6 and SC≥7.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 346


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.28 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Downlink


Interference Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA downlink interference
analysis result. You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down
the detailed information about the WCDMA downlink interference analysis.

DL Interference tab page


Parameter Description

High RSCP High Number of DT points with high RSCP value (RSCP value >
Ec/Io Count RSCP threshold) and high Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value > Ec/Io
threshold).

High RSCP Low Ec/Io Number of DT points with high RSCP value (RSCP value >
Count RSCP threshold) and low Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value < Ec/Io
threshold). The Assistant performs interference analysis on such
DT points.

Low RSCP Low Ec/Io Number of DT points with low RSCP value (RSCP value <
Count RSCP threshold) and low Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value < Ec/Io
threshold).

Low RSCP High Ec/Io Number of DT points with low RSCP value (RSCP value <
Count RSCP threshold) and high Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value > Ec/Io
threshold).

Total Total number of DT points.

19.29 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Missing


Neighboring Analysis Result
This section describes the parameters involved in the WCDMA missing neighboring analysis
result. You can refer to this section to set the related parameters when you drill down the
detailed information about the WCDMA missing neighboring analysis.

Theme Result Review window


Parameter Description

Missing Intra-Frequency Number of missing neighboring cells in the case that the
Neighboring Cell Count missing neighboring cells have the same frequency with
the serving cell.

Configured Intra-Frequency Number of configured neighboring cells that have the


Neighboring Cell Count same frequency with the serving cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 347


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Missing Inter-Frequency Number of missing neighboring cells in the case that the
Neighboring Cell Count missing neighboring cells do not have the same
frequency with the serving cell.

Configured Inter-Frequency Number of configured neighboring cells that do not have


Neighboring Cell Count the same frequency with the serving cell.

File List DT logfile list that lists the DT logfiles of cells that
provide services for DT points.

NOTE
A neighboring cell refers to a cell that has neighboring relation with the cell whose analysis results are
drilled down.

Missing Neighbor Cell tab page


Parameter Description

Cell Name Name of a neighboring cell.

UARFCN UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number


(UARFCN) of a neighboring cell.

P-SC Primary scrambling code (PSC) of a neighboring cell.

Suggestion Suggestion on a neighboring cell. The value is


Recommended, Not Recommended, or Configured.

Total Point Number of DT points corresponding to a neighboring


cell.

Rate Rate calculated by the following formula: Number of all


DT points of a neighboring cell/Number of DT points of
a serving cell x 100%

Max RSCP Maximum RSCP of all DT points of a neighboring cell.

Min RSCP Minimum RSCP of all DT points of a neighboring cell.

Avg RSCP Average RSCP of all DT points of a neighboring cell.

Max Ec/Io Maximum Ec/Io of all DT points of a neighboring cell.

Min Ec/Io The minimum Ec/Io of all DT points of a neighboring


cell.

Max Ec/Io The average Ec/Io of all DT points of a neighboring cell.

NOTE
A neighboring cell refers to a cell that has neighboring relation with the cell whose analysis results are
drilled down.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 348


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs


This section describes the parameters in the Custom KPI Manager dialog box and the
Counting KPI Editor/Calculation KPI Editor dialog box. You can refer to this section
when you create and set a custom KPI.

Parameters in the Custom KPI Manager dialog box


Parameter Description

Filter Enables you to search for KPIs by entering keywords.

System drop-down list Enables you to select the system that a KPI belongs to.

Group drop-down list Enables the Assistant to display KPIs by groups.

New Enables you to create a KPI.


l Counting KPI indicates counting KPIs.
l Calculation KPI indicates calculation KPIs.

Edit Enables you to edit the selected KPI.

Delete Enables you to delete the selected KPI.

Parameters in the Counting KPI Editor/Calculation KPI Editor - Format Dialog


Box
Parameter Value or Range Description

Basic Information area - Enables you to set the basic


information about a KPI.

Name - Indicates the name of a KPI.

Data Type l Integer: The KPI data Indicates the data type of a
type is integer. KPI.
l Float: The KPI data type
is float.
The default value is Float.

Visible l True Controls whether a KPI is


l False displayed in the KPI Result
dialog box.
The default value is True.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 349


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Value or Range Description

Data Source l Binning Indicates the data source


l DataBase used for calculating a KPI.
l Original Data l Binning indicates that
data obtained after
The default value is Binning is used for
Binning. calculating KPIs.
l DataBase indicates that
data imported to the
database is used for
calculating KPIs.
l Original Data indicates
that raw data is used for
calculating KPIs.
Binning is recommended.

Initial Value The default value is 0. Indicates the initial value of


a KPI.

Lower Threshold - Indicates the lower


threshold of a KPI.

Upper Threshold - Indicates the upper


threshold of a KPI.

Description - Enables you to describe a


KPI briefly.

KPI Editor - Operator Description


Parameter Description

+ Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the addition
operation.

- Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the subtraction
operation.

* Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the multiplication
operation.

/ Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the division
operation.

(, ) Indicates the parenthesis used in the


calculation expression.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 350


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

<, <=, >, >=, ==, and != Indicates the comparison signs in the
calculation expression that is used for
comparing two elements.

= Indicates the value setting expression used


for setting the element on the left to the
value given on the right of the expression.

, Indicates the parameter used for separating


parameters in a function.

; Indicates the parameter used for separating


expressions.

AND After you click AND, && is added to the


area for editing a KPI expression.

OR After you click OR, || is added to the area


for editing a KPI expression.

NOT After you click NOT, ! is added to the area


for editing a KPI expression.

XOR After you click XOR, ^ is added to the area


for editing a KPI expression.

Common Functions
Function Function Description Example Example
Type Name Description

OtherTypeElem VARIABLE This function VARIABLE(Ti This function


ent specifies a me)= 0 specifies a
variable. variable named
Time with an
initial value of
0.

ARRAY - - -

Expression IF This function is IF(HasElement( This function


an IF EVENT(Data sets the value of
expression for Transfer Start))) VARIABLE(Ti
determining {VARIABLE(T me) to Time if
whether a ime) = the data flow
condition is IE(Time)} contains the
met. Data Transfer
Start event.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 351


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

INITIAL This function Initial{ VARIA This function


initializes a BLE(Time) = initializes the
variable. 0} value of the
temporary
variable
VARIABLE(Ti
me) to 0.

SpecialFunction GetLastValue This function IF(HasElement( If the data


obtains the IE(IE5))) packet contains
current data { KPI(Exp) = IE5, this
packet last KPI(Exp) + function
value of an IE. GetLastValue(I performs the
The Time E(IE1)); } calculation in
parameter in the the expression.
value indicates IE1 is the last
the valid value of IE1 in
duration of the the data packet.
IE. The unit is The calculation
millisecond. If result is as
the value does follows:
not contain the KPI(Exp) =
Time parameter, KPI(Exp) +
the IE is always IE(IE1)
valid.
The parameter
can be IE or
Time.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 352


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

CalcDistance This function INITIAL{VARI -


calculates the ABLE(LastLon
distance gtitude) =
between two 0;VARIABLE(
points. The unit LastLatitude) =
is kilometer. 0}
The parameters IF(HasElement(
are: IE(Longitude))
&&
l Longitude: HasElement(IE(
(mandatory) Latitude)))
longitude of { IF((VARIAB
the current LE(LastLongtit
location. ude) != 0) &&
l Latitude: (VARIABLE(L
(mandatory) astLatitude) !=
latitude of 0))
the current { KPI(AllDista
location. nce) =
KPI(AllDistanc
l LastLongitu e) +
de: CalcDistance(I
(mandatory) E(Longitude),I
longitude of E(Latitude),VA
the RIABLE(LastL
preceding ongtitude),VAR
location. IABLE(LastLat
l LastLatitude itude)) }
: VARIABLE(La
(mandatory) stLongtitude) =
latitude of IE(Longitude);
the VARIABLE(La
preceding stLatitude) =
location. IE(Latitude); }

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 353


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

During The parameters IF(During(IE(I When the value


are: E1) == 100, 100 for IE1 in
l Condition1: IE(IE1) == the data packet
mandatory. 200)) is parsed, the
If only { KPI(Exp) = calculation in
Condition1 KPI(Exp) + the expression
is specified IE(IE5); } starts. When the
and it is value 200 for
true, TRUE IE1 in the data
is returned. packet is
If parsed, the
Condition1 calculation in
is not true, the expression
FALSE is ends.
returned.
l Condition2:
optional. If
Condition2
is specified,
TRUE is
returned
when
Condition1
is true.
FALSE is
returned
when
Condition2
is true.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 354


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetAfterPeriod This function IE(PDCP This function


sAverageValue calculates the Throughput DL specifies the
average value Average After average value
of an IE during LTEIntraFreqH of PDCP
a period after an OSuc) = Throughput DL
event. GetAfterPeriod in a period after
The parameters sAverageValue( the
are as follows: PDCP LTEIntraFreqH
Throughput OSuc event.
l IE Name: IE DL,VARIABL
name. It is E(EventTime),
configured VARIABLE(Pe
according to riod));
the IE tree. VARIABLE(Ev
l Time: time entTime) = 0;
point when VARIABLE(Fl
an event is ag)=0;
reported. In VARIABLE(En
most cases, dTime) = 0;
it refers to VARIABLE(Fl
EventTime. ag)=0; }
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
average
value of an
IE is
calculated
before an
event.
l Returned
value:
average
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 355


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetAverageVal This function - -


ueFromArray obtains the
average value
of a created
array.
l ARRAY:
created
array
l Returned
value:
average
value of a
data record

GetBandEndTi This function IF(HasElement( This function


me obtains the time IE(Serving obtains the time
when an IE is RSRP))) when the value
reported for the { IF(SetIEValu of Serving
last time in a e(Serving RSRP is
period. RSRP,IE(Time), reported for the
l IE Name: IE IE(Serving last time in a
name. It is RSRP),VARIA period.
configured BLE(Period)))
according to { VARIABLE(
the IE tree. StartTime) =
GetBandEndTi
l Returned me(Serving
value: time RSRP); } }

GetBandStartTi This function IF(HasElement( This function


me obtains the time IE(Serving obtains the time
when an IE is RSRP))) when the value
reported for the { IF(SetIEValu of Serving
first time in a e(Serving RSRP is
period. RSRP,IE(Time), reported for the
l IE Name: IE IE(Serving first time in a
name. It is RSRP),VARIA period.
configured BLE(Period)))
according to { VARIABLE(
the IE tree. StartTime) =
GetBandStartTi
l Returned me(Serving
value: time RSRP); } }

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 356


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetBeforPeriod This function IE(PDCP This function


sAverageValue calculates the Throughput DL specifies the
average value Average After average value
of an IE during LTEIntraFreqH of PDCP
a period before OSuc) = Throughput DL
an event. GetBeforPeriod in a period
The parameters sAverageValue( before the
are as follows: PDCP LTEIntraFreqH
Throughput OSuc event.
l IE Name: IE DL,VARIABL
name. It is E(EventTime),
configured VARIABLE(Pe
according to riod));
the IE tree. VARIABLE(Ev
l Time: time entTime) = 0;
point when VARIABLE(Fl
an event is ag)=0;
reported. In VARIABLE(En
most cases, dTime) = 0;
it refers to VARIABLE(Fl
EventTime. ag)=0; }
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
average
value of an
IE is
calculated
before an
event.
l Returned
value:
average
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 357


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetInteger This function VARIABLE(Vo This function


changes a iceCountTmp) obtains the
variable from a = integer of
floating point VARIABLE(Ti VARIABLE(Vo
type to an me) / (90 * iceCountTmp).
integer type. 1000);
The parameters VARIABLE(Vo
are as follows: iceCount) =
GetInteger(VA
l Value: RIABLE(Voice
variable or CountTmp));
IE value
l Returned
value:
integer

GetMaxValueFr This function - -


omArray obtains the
maximum value
of a created
array.
The parameter
is a created data
element.

GetMinValueFr This function - -


omArray obtains the
minimum value
of a created
array.
The parameter
is a created data
element.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 358


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetPeriodsAver This function IE(RSRP This function


ageValue calculates the Average In obtains the
average value LTEIntraFreqH average value
of an IE during OSuc) = of Serving
a period before GetPeriodsAver RSRP before
an event. ageValue(Servi and after the
The parameters ng LTEIntraFreqH
are as follows: RSRP,VARIAB OSuc event.
LE(EventTime)
l IE Name: IE ,VARIABLE(Pe
name. It is riod1));
configured VARIABLE(Ev
according to entTime) = 0;
the IE tree. VARIABLE(Fl
l Time: time ag)=0;
point when VARIABLE(En
an event is dTime) = 0;
reported. In VARIABLE(Fl
most cases, ag)=0; }
it refers to
EventTime.
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
average
value of an
IE is
calculated
before and
after an
event.
l Returned
value:
average
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 359


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetPeriodsMax This function IE(RSRP This function


Value calculates the Period Min obtains the
maximum value LTERRCSetup maximum value
of an IE during Suc) = of Serving
a period before GetPeriodsMax RSRP before
an event. Value(Serving and after the
The parameters RSRP,VARIAB LTEIntraFreqH
are as follows: LE(EventTime) OSuc event.
,VARIABLE(Pe
l IE Name: IE riod1));
name. It is VARIABLE(Ev
configured entTime) = 0;
according to VARIABLE(Fl
the IE tree. ag)=0;
l Time: time VARIABLE(En
point when dTime) = 0;
an event is VARIABLE(Fl
reported. In ag)=0; }
most cases,
it refers to
EventTime.
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
maximum
value of an
IE is
calculated
before and
after an
event.
l Returned
value:
maximum
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 360


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetPeriodsMin This function IE(RSRP This function


Value calculates the Period Min obtains the
minimum value LTERRCSetup minimum value
of an IE during Suc) = of Serving
a period before GetPeriodsMin RSRP before
an event. Value(Serving and after the
The parameters RSRP,VARIAB LTEIntraFreqH
are as follows: LE(EventTime) OSuc event.
,VARIABLE(Pe
l IE Name: IE riod1));
name. It is VARIABLE(Ev
configured entTime) = 0;
according to VARIABLE(Fl
the IE tree. ag)=0;
l Time: time VARIABLE(En
point when dTime) = 0;
an event is VARIABLE(Fl
reported. In ag)=0; }
most cases,
it refers to
EventTime.
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
maximum
value of an
IE is
calculated
before and
after an
event.
l Returned
value:
minimum
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 361


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

HasElement This function IF(HasElement( This function


determines IE(IE5)) || adds 1 to the
whether the HasElement(E result if the
current data VENT(EVENT current data
packet contains 1))) { KPI(Exp) packet contains
the specified = KPI(Exp) IE5 or
element. If it + 1; } EVENT1.
contains the
specified
element, TRUE
is returned.
Otherwise,
FALSE is
returned.
The parameter
can be IE,
Event, or
Message.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 362


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

SetIEValue This function IF(HasElement( This function


saves the values IE(Serving obtains the
of an IE in a RSRP))) value of
period. If the { IF(SetIEValu Serving RSRP
period exceeds e(Serving in a period.
the threshold, RSRP,IE(Time),
the values are IE(Serving
deleted. RSRP),VARIA
The parameters BLE(Period)))
are as follows: { VARIABLE(
StartTime) =
l IE Name: IE GetBandStartTi
name. It is me(Serving
configured RSRP); } }
according to
the IE tree.
l Time: time
for the
current
packet. In
most cases,
it refers to
FullTime,
that is, time
in the IE
tree.
l IEValue: IE
value
l Period:
period for
saving an IE
value
l Returned
value:
TRUE or
FALSE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 363


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

AddValueToArr This function - -


ay adds the values
of an IE to a
created array.
The parameters
are as follows:
l ARRAY:
created
array
l IE(): value
of an IE
l Period:
period for
saving an IE
value

GenerateEvent This function { GenerateEven This function


generates t(EVENT(PKG generates the
specified 108A)); } PKG108A
events. event.
The parameters
are as follows:
l EVENT():
generated
event
l STRING():
information
about an
event

SIPMessage This function IF(SIPMessage( This function


determines STRING(UE- adds 1 to the
whether the >Network::INV result if the
current data ITE::100 current data
packet contains Trying::Call- packet contains
the specified ID::100))) preset
element. If it { KPI(Exp) = messages.
contains the KPI(Exp) + 1; } Click this
specified function. The
element, TRUE Select SIP
is returned. Message dialog
Otherwise, box is
FALSE is displayed. For
returned. details about
The parameter the parameters,
type is SIP see Table
Message. 19-17.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 364


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

SpecialFunction CountPPScanne This function IF(CountPPSca This function


r specifies the nner(-100, 5 ,3) calculates the
number of cells > 0) number of cells
when the { KPI(Scanner in which the
following Pilot Pollution RSRP for
parameters are Points) = Scanner is
set. The number KPI(Scanner greater than
is obtained by Pilot Pollution -100 and the
subtracting Points) + 1; } difference
Pilot_Num between the
from the RSRP and that
number of cells of the strongest
when the cell is greater
following than 5. If the
parameters are value obtained
set: by subtracting 3
The parameters from the cell
are as follows: number is
greater than 0,
l RSCP_Thre pilot pollution
shold: RSRP exists The
threshold returned value
l RSCP_Diff_ is the number of
Threshold: cells with pilot
threshold for pollution.
the RSRP
difference
between a
cell and the
strongest
cell
l Pilot_Num:
threshold for
the cells
with pilot
pollution,
including
the strongest
cell

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 365


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

DistanceSecond This function IF(HasElement( -


ary calculates the IE(Longitude)
distance )&&(HasEleme
between two nt(IE(Latitude))
points. The time ))
parameter is { IF((VARIAB
used to LE(dLastLon) !
determine =
whether 0)&&(VARIAB
longitude and LE(dLastLat) !
latitude = 0)&&(IE(RF
reporting are Mode) ==
abnormal. STRING(GSM)
The parameters ))
are as follows: { VARIABLE(
Flag1)=((IE(Rx
l LastLongitu Lev(Idle+Sub))
de: >=
longitude of -120)&&(IE(Rx
the last point Lev(Idle+Sub))
l LastLatitude <= -10))?1:0;
: latitude of VARIABLE(Fl
the last point ag2)=VARIAB
LE(Flag1)+VA
l LastTime:
RIABLE(Flag);
time
KPI(RxLev All
reported for
Distance Total)
the last point
= KPI(RxLev
l CurrLongitu All Distance
de: Total) +
longitude of DistanceSecond
the current ary(VARIABL
point E(dLastLon),V
l CurrLongitu ARIABLE(dLa
de: latitude stLat),VARIAB
of the LE(dLastTime),
current point IE(Longitude),I
E(Latitude),IE(
l Time: time
Time),VARIAB
reported for
LE(Flag2)); }
the current
VARIABLE(dL
point
astLon)=IE(Lon
l Return gitude);
value: VARIABLE(dL
distance astLat)=IE(Latit
from the ude);
current point VARIABLE(dL
(CurrLongit astTime)=IE(Ti
ude, me);
CurrLatitude

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 366


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

) to the last VARIABLE(Fl


point ag)=((IE(RxLe
(LastLongit v(Idle+Sub))
ude, >=
LastLatitude -120)&&(IE(Rx
) Lev(Idle+Sub))
<= -10))?1:0; }

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 367


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

PilotPollution This function IF(PilotPollutio This function


specifies the n(WCDMA,-10 calculates the
number of cells 0,5,3) > 0) number of pilot
when the { (UE Pilot pollution points
following Pollution for WCDMA.
parameters are Points) =
set. The number KPI(UE Pilot
is obtained by Pollution
subtracting Points) + 1; }
Pilot_Num
from the
number of cells
when the
following
parameters are
set:
The parameters
are as follows:
l RF MODE:
RAT.
Currently,
WCDMA
and LTE are
supported.
l RSCP_Thre
shold: RSRP
threshold
l RSCP_Diff_
Threshold:
threshold for
the RSRP
difference
between a
cell and the
strongest
cell
l Pilot_Num:
threshold for
the cells
with pilot
pollution,
including
the strongest
cell
l Return
value:
number of

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 368


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

cells with
pilot
pollution

ScannerPilotPol Pilot pollution ScannerPilotPol This function


lution is calculated by lution(LTE, sets LTE
frequency. -100, 5, 3, Scanner in IE
The parameters IE(Pilot Pilot Pollution
are as follows: Pollution Point(Scanner)
Point(Scanner)) based on the
l RF MODE: ) number of pilot
RAT. pollution points
Currently, after frequency
WCDMA group statistics
and LTE are collection.
supported.
l RSCP_Thre
shold: RSRP
threshold
l RSCP_Diff_
Threshold:
threshold for
the RSRP
difference
between a
cell and the
strongest
cell
l Pilot_Num:
threshold for
the cells
with pilot
pollution,
including
the strongest
cell
l IE Name:
customized
IE for
WCDMA or
LTE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 369


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

Calculation Count This function KPI(Exp) = This function


counts the Count(EVENT( calculates the
number of the event1)); number of
specified event1 in the
parameter in a data flow.
data flow.
The parameter
can be IE,
Event, or
Message.

Average This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Average calculates the
average value (IE(ie1)); average value
of an IE. of ie1 in the
data flow.

Max This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Max (IE(ie1)); calculates the
maximum value maximum value
of an IE. of ie1 in the
data flow.

Min This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Min (IE(ie1)); calculates the
minimum value minimum value
of an IE. of ie1 in the
data flow.

Sum This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Sum (IE(ie1)); calculates the
sum of an IE. sum of ie1 in
the data flow.

Table 19-17 Select SIP Message


Name Description

Direction Indicates the packet transmission direction.


The values are as follows:
l UE->Network
l Network->UE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 370


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Name Description

Message Indicates the name of a message. The values


are as follows:
l INVITE
l PRACK
l UPDATE
l ACK
l BYE
l REGISTER
l NOTIFY
l CANCEL
l REFER
l MESSAGE
l INFO
l PUBLISH
l OPTIONS

Response Code Indicates the response code.

Information Indicates a message. The values are as


follows:
l Empty
l Call-ID
l Cseq
l tag
The default value is Empty.
NOTE
Select the Information field first. Then, enter
the field value which is used as a filtering
criterion.

19.31 Parameters for Custom Report Templates


This section describes the parameters in the Text, Table, Map, and Chart dialog boxes. You
can refer to this section to set the related parameters when creating custom report templates or
modify predefined report templates.

Text Dialog Box


Parameter Description

Title Indicates the text information entered in the report, including the title
and body text.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 371


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Font Enables you to set the font, typeface, size, color, and effect of
characters.
By default, Font is set to Times New Roman, Typeface is set to
Regular, Size is set to Little Four, and Color is set to Black.

Align Indicates the alignment mode. You can select an alignment mode from
the drop-down list. Currently, the following alignment modes are
available:
l Right: indicates that the words are right-aligned in the .doc file.
l Center: indicates that the words are center-aligned in the .doc file.
l Left: indicates that the words are left-aligned in the .doc file.
By default, the parameter is set to Left.

KPI Dialog Box


Parameter Description

Filter Enables you to filter the KPIs to be searched for.

KPI Name Indicates the name of a KPI. For details about the KPIs, see 21.3 C
Description of Predefined KPIs.
The left box lists all the predefined KPIs, and the right box lists the
KPIs to be displayed in the report.
NOTE
Currently, the left box lists only the predefined KPIs and cannot display the
custom KPIs.

> Enables you to add one or multiple KPIs selected from the left box to
the right box.

>> Enables you to add all the KPIs displayed in the left box to the right
box.

< Enables you to remove one or multiple KPIs from the right box.

<< Enables you to remove all the KPIs displayed in the right box.

Up Enables you to move a KPI up.

Down Enables you to move a KPI down.

IE Dialog Box
Parameter Description

Filter Enables you to filter the IEs to be searched for.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 372


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Name Lists all the IE information to be displayed on the report map.

Parameter Lists all the IE value to be displayed on the report map.

Map Displays the IEs on a map.

Legend Displays the legends of IEs .

Statistic Table Displays the IEs in a table.

Chart-CDF Chart-CDF: In this view, a line chart is displayed.


NOTE
If the BenchMark report is an Excel file, IE information is displayed in bar
charts instead of line charts.

Chart-PDF Chart-PDF: In this view, a bar chart is displayed.

Caky Displays the IEs in a caky.

Line Displays the IEs in a line.

19.32 Parameters for Exporting CSV


This section describes parameters in the Export CSV window. You can refer to this section
when exporting files in CSV format.

Parameters in the Export CSV window


The Export CSV window is shown in Figure 19-12.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 373


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Figure 19-12 Export CSV window

Table 19-18 Parameters in the Export CSV window


Area Name Description

Log File area Index Displays the serial number of the log file in the
table.

File Displays the log file name.

Add Enables you to add files in .gen format.

Delete Enables you to delete selected files.

Export Path area Browse Enables you to select a path to save exported files.

Export Template Start Enables you to start exporting files.


area
close Enables you to close the Export CSV window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 374


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.33 Parameters for Custom IEs


This section describes the parameters in the Custom IE dialog box. You can refer to this
section when creating or modifying a custom IE.

Custom IE dialog box


Parameter Description

Filter By Name Indicates the name of an IE to be customized.

Protocol Indicates the network technology of a custom IE.

Device Type Indicates the type of a custom IE, that is:


l GSM:
– UE IEs: GSM Island, GSM Poor Coverage, GSM DL
CI on BCCH, GSM DL Interference
– Scanner IEs: Null
l WCDMA:
– UE IEs: WCDMA Poor Coverage, WCDMA DL
Interference, R99 App Throughput UL, HSUPA App
Throughput UL, R99 App Throughput DL, HSDPA
App Throughput DL, and Whole PP(UE)
– Scanner IEs: WCDMA Poor Coverage, WCDMA DL
Interference, Whole PP(Scanner)
l LTE:
– UE:Pilot Pollution Point(UE), Period MAC
Throughput DL, Period RLC Throughput DL, Period
DPCP Throughput DL, RSRP Average In
InterFreqHOFail
– Scanner: Pilot Pollution Point(Scanner)
l TD-SCDMA:
– UE IEs: Null
– Scanner IEs: Null

IE Name Indicates the name of a custom IE.

IE Information dialog box


Parameter Description

Basic Name Indicates the name of a custom IE.


Informatio
n Description Indicates the condition for customizing an IE.

Name Indicates the name of a custom IE to be modified.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 375


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Data Type Indicates the data type of a custom IE to be modified.

Value Indicates the threshold of a custom IE to be modified.

ThresHold Change dialog box


Parameter Description

Name Indicates the name of a custom IE to be modified.

Type Indicates the data type of a custom IE to be modified.

Value Indicates the threshold of a custom IE.


If the IE threshold provided by the Assistant cannot meet your
requirements, manually type the IE threshold as required.

19.34 Parameters for Custom Events


This section describes the parameters in the Custom Event Manager dialog box and the
Custom Event Editor dialog box. You can refer to this section when creating or modifying a
custom event.

Custom Event Manager Dialog Box


Name Description

Filter Enables you to search for events by entering keywords.

New Enables you to create an event.

Edit Enables you to edit the selected event.

Delete Enables you to delete the selected event.

Custom Event Editor Dialog Box - Format Parameters


Parameter Description

Symbol Setting Font Indicates the field font of


the custom event.

Size Indicates the field size of the


custom event.

Shape Indicates the field shape of


the custom event.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 376


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Color Indicates the field color of


the custom event.

Value Indicates the value of the


custom event.

Event Editor - Operator Description


Name Description

+ Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the addition
operation.

- Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the subtraction
operation.

* Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the multiplication
operation.

/ Indicates the operator in the calculation


expression that is used for the division
operation.

(, ) Indicates the parenthesis used in the


calculation expression.

<, <=, >, >=, ==, != Indicates the comparison signs in the
calculation expression that is used for
comparing two elements.

= Indicates the value setting expression used


for setting the element on the left to the
value given on the right of the expression.

, Indicates the parameter used for separating


parameters in a function.

; Indicates the parameter used for separating


expressions.

AND After you click AND, && is added to the


area for editing an event expression.

OR After you click OR, || is added to the area


for editing an event expression.

NOT After you click NOT, ! is added to the area


for editing an event expression.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 377


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Name Description

XOR After you click XOR, ^ is added to the area


for editing a KPI expression.

Basic Information
Parameter Description

Name Indicates the name of the custom event.

Format Sets other basic information of the custom event.

Common Functions
Function Function Description Example Example
Type Name Description

OtherTypeElem VARIABLE This function VARIABLE(Ti This function


ent specifies a me)= 0 specifies a
variable. variable named
Time with an
initial value of
0.

ARRAY - - -

Expression IF This function is IF(HasElement( This function


an IF EVENT(Data sets the value of
expression for Transfer Start))) VARIABLE(Ti
determining {VARIABLE(T me) to Time if
whether a ime) = the data flow
condition is IE(Time)} contains the
met. Data Transfer
Start event.

INITIAL This function Initial{ VARIA This function


initializes a BLE(Time) = initializes the
variable. 0} value of the
temporary
variable
VARIABLE(Ti
me) to 0.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 378


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

SpecialFunction GetLastValue This function IF(HasElement( If the data


obtains the IE(IE5))) packet contains
current data { KPI(Exp) = IE5, this
packet last KPI(Exp) + function
value of an IE. GetLastValue(I performs the
The Time E(IE1)); } calculation in
parameter in the the expression.
value indicates IE1 is the last
the valid value of IE1 in
duration of the the data packet.
IE. The unit is The calculation
millisecond. If result is as
the value does follows:
not contain the KPI(Exp) =
Time parameter, KPI(Exp) +
the IE is always IE(IE1)
valid.
The parameter
can be IE or
Time.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 379


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

CalcDistance This function INITIAL{VARI -


calculates the ABLE(LastLon
distance gtitude) =
between two 0;VARIABLE(
points. The unit LastLatitude) =
is kilometer. 0}
The parameters IF(HasElement(
are: IE(Longitude))
&&
l Longitude: HasElement(IE(
(mandatory) Latitude)))
longitude of { IF((VARIAB
the current LE(LastLongtit
location. ude) != 0) &&
l Latitude: (VARIABLE(L
(mandatory) astLatitude) !=
latitude of 0))
the current { KPI(AllDista
location. nce) =
KPI(AllDistanc
l LastLongitu e) +
de: CalcDistance(I
(mandatory) E(Longitude),I
longitude of E(Latitude),VA
the RIABLE(LastL
preceding ongtitude),VAR
location. IABLE(LastLat
l LastLatitude itude)) }
: VARIABLE(La
(mandatory) stLongtitude) =
latitude of IE(Longitude);
the VARIABLE(La
preceding stLatitude) =
location. IE(Latitude); }

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 380


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

During The parameters IF(During(IE(I When the value


are: E1) == 100, 100 for IE1 in
l Condition1: IE(IE1) == the data packet
mandatory. 200)) is parsed, the
If only { KPI(Exp) = calculation in
Condition1 KPI(Exp) + the expression
is specified IE(IE5); } starts. When the
and it is value 200 for
true, TRUE IE1 in the data
is returned. packet is
If parsed, the
Condition1 calculation in
is not true, the expression
FALSE is ends.
returned.
l Condition2:
optional. If
Condition2
is specified,
TRUE is
returned
when
Condition1
is true.
FALSE is
returned
when
Condition2
is true.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 381


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetAfterPeriod This function IE(PDCP This function


sAverageValue calculates the Throughput DL specifies the
average value Average After average value
of an IE during LTEIntraFreqH of PDCP
a period after an OSuc) = Throughput DL
event. GetAfterPeriod in a period after
The parameters sAverageValue( the
are as follows: PDCP LTEIntraFreqH
Throughput OSuc event.
l IE Name: IE DL,VARIABL
name. It is E(EventTime),
configured VARIABLE(Pe
according to riod));
the IE tree. VARIABLE(Ev
l Time: time entTime) = 0;
point when VARIABLE(Fl
an event is ag)=0;
reported. In VARIABLE(En
most cases, dTime) = 0;
it refers to VARIABLE(Fl
EventTime. ag)=0; }
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
average
value of an
IE is
calculated
before an
event.
l Returned
value:
average
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 382


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetAverageVal This function - -


ueFromArray obtains the
average value
of a created
array.
l ARRAY:
created
array
l Returned
value:
average
value of a
data record

GetBandEndTi This function IF(HasElement( This function


me obtains the time IE(Serving obtains the time
when an IE is RSRP))) when the value
reported for the { IF(SetIEValu of Serving
last time in a e(Serving RSRP is
period. RSRP,IE(Time), reported for the
l IE Name: IE IE(Serving last time in a
name. It is RSRP),VARIA period.
configured BLE(Period)))
according to { VARIABLE(
the IE tree. StartTime) =
GetBandEndTi
l Returned me(Serving
value: time RSRP); } }

GetBandStartTi This function IF(HasElement( This function


me obtains the time IE(Serving obtains the time
when an IE is RSRP))) when the value
reported for the { IF(SetIEValu of Serving
first time in a e(Serving RSRP is
period. RSRP,IE(Time), reported for the
l IE Name: IE IE(Serving first time in a
name. It is RSRP),VARIA period.
configured BLE(Period)))
according to { VARIABLE(
the IE tree. StartTime) =
GetBandStartTi
l Returned me(Serving
value: time RSRP); } }

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 383


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetBeforPeriod This function IE(PDCP This function


sAverageValue calculates the Throughput DL specifies the
average value Average After average value
of an IE during LTEIntraFreqH of PDCP
a period before OSuc) = Throughput DL
an event. GetBeforPeriod in a period
The parameters sAverageValue( before the
are as follows: PDCP LTEIntraFreqH
Throughput OSuc event.
l IE Name: IE DL,VARIABL
name. It is E(EventTime),
configured VARIABLE(Pe
according to riod));
the IE tree. VARIABLE(Ev
l Time: time entTime) = 0;
point when VARIABLE(Fl
an event is ag)=0;
reported. In VARIABLE(En
most cases, dTime) = 0;
it refers to VARIABLE(Fl
EventTime. ag)=0; }
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
average
value of an
IE is
calculated
before an
event.
l Returned
value:
average
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 384


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetInteger This function VARIABLE(Vo This function


changes a iceCountTmp) obtains the
variable from a = integer of
floating point VARIABLE(Ti VARIABLE(Vo
type to an me) / (90 * iceCountTmp).
integer type. 1000);
The parameters VARIABLE(Vo
are as follows: iceCount) =
GetInteger(VA
l Value: RIABLE(Voice
variable or CountTmp));
IE value
l Returned
value:
integer

GetMaxValueFr This function - -


omArray obtains the
maximum value
of a created
array.
The parameter
is a created data
element.

GetMinValueFr This function - -


omArray obtains the
minimum value
of a created
array.
The parameter
is a created data
element.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 385


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetPeriodsAver This function IE(RSRP This function


ageValue calculates the Average In obtains the
average value LTEIntraFreqH average value
of an IE during OSuc) = of Serving
a period before GetPeriodsAver RSRP before
an event. ageValue(Servi and after the
The parameters ng LTEIntraFreqH
are as follows: RSRP,VARIAB OSuc event.
LE(EventTime)
l IE Name: IE ,VARIABLE(Pe
name. It is riod1));
configured VARIABLE(Ev
according to entTime) = 0;
the IE tree. VARIABLE(Fl
l Time: time ag)=0;
point when VARIABLE(En
an event is dTime) = 0;
reported. In VARIABLE(Fl
most cases, ag)=0; }
it refers to
EventTime.
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
average
value of an
IE is
calculated
before and
after an
event.
l Returned
value:
average
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 386


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetPeriodsMax This function IE(RSRP This function


Value calculates the Period Min obtains the
maximum value LTERRCSetup maximum value
of an IE during Suc) = of Serving
a period before GetPeriodsMax RSRP before
an event. Value(Serving and after the
The parameters RSRP,VARIAB LTEIntraFreqH
are as follows: LE(EventTime) OSuc event.
,VARIABLE(Pe
l IE Name: IE riod1));
name. It is VARIABLE(Ev
configured entTime) = 0;
according to VARIABLE(Fl
the IE tree. ag)=0;
l Time: time VARIABLE(En
point when dTime) = 0;
an event is VARIABLE(Fl
reported. In ag)=0; }
most cases,
it refers to
EventTime.
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
maximum
value of an
IE is
calculated
before and
after an
event.
l Returned
value:
maximum
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 387


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

GetPeriodsMin This function IE(RSRP This function


Value calculates the Period Min obtains the
minimum value LTERRCSetup minimum value
of an IE during Suc) = of Serving
a period before GetPeriodsMin RSRP before
an event. Value(Serving and after the
The parameters RSRP,VARIAB LTEIntraFreqH
are as follows: LE(EventTime) OSuc event.
,VARIABLE(Pe
l IE Name: IE riod1));
name. It is VARIABLE(Ev
configured entTime) = 0;
according to VARIABLE(Fl
the IE tree. ag)=0;
l Time: time VARIABLE(En
point when dTime) = 0;
an event is VARIABLE(Fl
reported. In ag)=0; }
most cases,
it refers to
EventTime.
l Period:
period. It
refers to the
period
during
which the
maximum
value of an
IE is
calculated
before and
after an
event.
l Returned
value:
minimum
value of an
IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 388


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

HasElement This function IF(HasElement( This function


determines IE(IE5)) || adds 1 to the
whether the HasElement(E result if the
current data VENT(EVENT current data
packet contains 1))) { KPI(Exp) packet contains
the specified = KPI(Exp) IE5 or
element. If it + 1; } EVENT1.
contains the
specified
element, TRUE
is returned.
Otherwise,
FALSE is
returned.
The parameter
can be IE,
Event, or
Message.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 389


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

SetIEValue This function IF(HasElement( This function


saves the values IE(Serving obtains the
of an IE in a RSRP))) value of
period. If the { IF(SetIEValu Serving RSRP
period exceeds e(Serving in a period.
the threshold, RSRP,IE(Time),
the values are IE(Serving
deleted. RSRP),VARIA
The parameters BLE(Period)))
are as follows: { VARIABLE(
StartTime) =
l IE Name: IE GetBandStartTi
name. It is me(Serving
configured RSRP); } }
according to
the IE tree.
l Time: time
for the
current
packet. In
most cases,
it refers to
FullTime,
that is, time
in the IE
tree.
l IEValue: IE
value
l Period:
period for
saving an IE
value
l Returned
value:
TRUE or
FALSE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 390


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

AddValueToArr This function - -


ay adds the values
of an IE to a
created array.
The parameters
are as follows:
l ARRAY:
created
array
l IE(): value
of an IE
l Period:
period for
saving an IE
value

GenerateEvent This function { GenerateEven This function


generates t(EVENT(PKG generates the
specified 108A)); } PKG108A
events. event.
The parameters
are as follows:
l EVENT():
generated
event
l STRING():
information
about an
event

SIPMessage This function IF(SIPMessage( This function


determines STRING(UE- adds 1 to the
whether the >Network::INV result if the
current data ITE::100 current data
packet contains Trying::Call- packet contains
the specified ID::100))) preset
element. If it { KPI(Exp) = messages.
contains the KPI(Exp) + 1; } Click this
specified function. The
element, TRUE Select SIP
is returned. Message dialog
Otherwise, box is
FALSE is displayed. For
returned. details about
The parameter the parameters,
type is SIP see Table
Message. 19-17.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 391


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

SpecialFunction CountPPScanne This function IF(CountPPSca This function


r specifies the nner(-100, 5 ,3) calculates the
number of cells > 0) number of cells
when the { KPI(Scanner in which the
following Pilot Pollution RSRP for
parameters are Points) = Scanner is
set. The number KPI(Scanner greater than
is obtained by Pilot Pollution -100 and the
subtracting Points) + 1; } difference
Pilot_Num between the
from the RSRP and that
number of cells of the strongest
when the cell is greater
following than 5. If the
parameters are value obtained
set: by subtracting 3
The parameters from the cell
are as follows: number is
greater than 0,
l RSCP_Thre pilot pollution
shold: RSRP exists The
threshold returned value
l RSCP_Diff_ is the number of
Threshold: cells with pilot
threshold for pollution.
the RSRP
difference
between a
cell and the
strongest
cell
l Pilot_Num:
threshold for
the cells
with pilot
pollution,
including
the strongest
cell

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 392


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

DistanceSecond This function IF(HasElement( -


ary calculates the IE(Longitude)
distance )&&(HasEleme
between two nt(IE(Latitude))
points. The time ))
parameter is { IF((VARIAB
used to LE(dLastLon) !
determine =
whether 0)&&(VARIAB
longitude and LE(dLastLat) !
latitude = 0)&&(IE(RF
reporting are Mode) ==
abnormal. STRING(GSM)
The parameters ))
are as follows: { VARIABLE(
Flag1)=((IE(Rx
l LastLongitu Lev(Idle+Sub))
de: >=
longitude of -120)&&(IE(Rx
the last point Lev(Idle+Sub))
l LastLatitude <= -10))?1:0;
: latitude of VARIABLE(Fl
the last point ag2)=VARIAB
LE(Flag1)+VA
l LastTime:
RIABLE(Flag);
time
KPI(RxLev All
reported for
Distance Total)
the last point
= KPI(RxLev
l CurrLongitu All Distance
de: Total) +
longitude of DistanceSecond
the current ary(VARIABL
point E(dLastLon),V
l CurrLongitu ARIABLE(dLa
de: latitude stLat),VARIAB
of the LE(dLastTime),
current point IE(Longitude),I
E(Latitude),IE(
l Time: time
Time),VARIAB
reported for
LE(Flag2)); }
the current
VARIABLE(dL
point
astLon)=IE(Lon
l Return gitude);
value: VARIABLE(dL
distance astLat)=IE(Latit
from the ude);
current point VARIABLE(dL
(CurrLongit astTime)=IE(Ti
ude, me);
CurrLatitude

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 393


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

) to the last VARIABLE(Fl


point ag)=((IE(RxLe
(LastLongit v(Idle+Sub))
ude, >=
LastLatitude -120)&&(IE(Rx
) Lev(Idle+Sub))
<= -10))?1:0; }

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 394


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

PilotPollution This function IF(PilotPollutio This function


specifies the n(WCDMA,-10 calculates the
number of cells 0,5,3) > 0) number of pilot
when the { (UE Pilot pollution points
following Pollution for WCDMA.
parameters are Points) =
set. The number KPI(UE Pilot
is obtained by Pollution
subtracting Points) + 1; }
Pilot_Num
from the
number of cells
when the
following
parameters are
set:
The parameters
are as follows:
l RF MODE:
RAT.
Currently,
WCDMA
and LTE are
supported.
l RSCP_Thre
shold: RSRP
threshold
l RSCP_Diff_
Threshold:
threshold for
the RSRP
difference
between a
cell and the
strongest
cell
l Pilot_Num:
threshold for
the cells
with pilot
pollution,
including
the strongest
cell
l Return
value:
number of

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 395


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

cells with
pilot
pollution

ScannerPilotPol Pilot pollution ScannerPilotPol This function


lution is calculated by lution(LTE, sets LTE
frequency. -100, 5, 3, Scanner in IE
The parameters IE(Pilot Pilot Pollution
are as follows: Pollution Point(Scanner)
Point(Scanner)) based on the
l RF MODE: ) number of pilot
RAT. pollution points
Currently, after frequency
WCDMA group statistics
and LTE are collection.
supported.
l RSCP_Thre
shold: RSRP
threshold
l RSCP_Diff_
Threshold:
threshold for
the RSRP
difference
between a
cell and the
strongest
cell
l Pilot_Num:
threshold for
the cells
with pilot
pollution,
including
the strongest
cell
l IE Name:
customized
IE for
WCDMA or
LTE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 396


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Function Function Description Example Example


Type Name Description

Calculation Count This function KPI(Exp) = This function


counts the Count(EVENT( calculates the
number of the event1)); number of
specified event1 in the
parameter in a data flow.
data flow.
The parameter
can be IE,
Event, or
Message.

Average This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Average calculates the
average value (IE(ie1)); average value
of an IE. of ie1 in the
data flow.

Max This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Max (IE(ie1)); calculates the
maximum value maximum value
of an IE. of ie1 in the
data flow.

Min This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Min (IE(ie1)); calculates the
minimum value minimum value
of an IE. of ie1 in the
data flow.

Sum This function KPI(Exp) = This function


calculates the Sum (IE(ie1)); calculates the
sum of an IE. sum of ie1 in
the data flow.

Table 19-19 Select SIP Message


Name Description

Direction Indicates the packet transmission direction.


The values are as follows:
l UE->Network
l Network->UE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 397


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Name Description

Message Indicates the name of a message. The values


are as follows:
l INVITE
l PRACK
l UPDATE
l ACK
l BYE
l REGISTER
l NOTIFY
l CANCEL
l REFER
l MESSAGE
l INFO
l PUBLISH
l OPTIONS

Response Code Indicates the response code.

Information Indicates a message. The values are as


follows:
l Empty
l Call-ID
l Cseq
l tag
The default value is Empty.
NOTE
Select the Information field first. Then, enter
the field value which is used as a filtering
criterion.

19.35 Parameters for Custom Delay


This section describes the parameters in the Custom Delay dialog box. You can refer to this
section to set the related parameters when you modify custom delays.

Custom Delay Manager dialog box


Parameter Description

Filter Searches a custom delay name by filtering custom delays.

System Current system. The ALL: indicates all custom delays in the
current system.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 398


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Group Custom delay group.

New Creates a custom delay.

Edit Modifies a delay.

Delete Deletes a delay.

Custom OneDelay Config window


Parameter Description

Name Name of a custom delay.

System Current system. The ALL:


indicates all custom delays
in the current system.

Group Custom delay group.

Begin/End Message Index The start or end signaling


messages in the signaling
Type message display area
Direction l Index indicates the serial
number.
Item l Type indicates the type.
Information l Direction indicates the
packet transmission
direction.
l Item indicates a selected
item.
l Information indicates
message information.

Add Message Filter A search box where event/


signaling names can be
searched for.

IE tab page A tab page where IE can be


selected. Double-click an IE
in the IE tree. The IE
Condition Setting dialog
box is displayed. For details
about the parameters, see
Parameters on the IE
Condition Setting tab
page.

Event tab page A tab page where events can


be selected.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 399


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

L3 Message tab page A tab page where L3


Message can be selected.

IP Key Message tab page A tab page where IP


signaling messages can be
selected. Double-click SIP
Message. The Select SIP
Message dialog box is
displayed. For details about
the parameters, see Table
19-17.

Delete Delete the selected start


signaling (start event) or
signaling (end event).

Condition area Exclude 1. Select the check box


before Exclude.

2. Click .
3. Add events or signaling
messages.
NOTE
Exclude indicates that a delay
is measured when an event or
a signaling message does not
exist between the added start
signaling (start event) and end
signaling (end event).

Include 1. Select the check box


before Include.

2. Click .
3. Add events or signaling
messages.
NOTE
Include indicates that a delay
is measured when an event or
a signaling message exists
between the added start
signaling (start event) and end
signaling (end event).

Times Out Sets the delay threshold,


Unit: ms.
NOTE
If the duration of a delay is
longer than the value specified
in Times Out, the Assistant
does not report the delay.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 400


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Overlay Sets the timing start


principle.
NOTE
If Overlay is selected, after
receiving the end message, the
Assistant uses the time of the
latest begin message as the
counting time; if Overlay is
not selected, the Assistant uses
the time of the begin message
as the counting time.

Custom SegmentDelay Config window


Parameter Description

Name Name of a custom delay.

System Current system. The ALL:


indicates all custom delays
in the current system.

Group Custom delay group.

Message Index The start or end signaling


messages in the signaling
Type message display area
Direction l Index indicates the serial
number.
Item l Type indicates the type.
Information l Direction indicates the
packet transmission
Timeout direction.
l Item indicates a selected
item.
l Information indicates
message information.
l Timeout indicates time-
out.

Add Message Filter A search box where event/


signaling names can be
searched for.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 401


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

IE tab page A tab page where IE can be


selected. Double-click an IE
in the IE tree. The IE
Condition Setting dialog
box is displayed. For details
about the parameters, see
Parameters on the IE
Condition Setting tab
page.

Event tab page A tab page where events can


be selected.

L3 Message tab page A tab page where L3


Message can be selected.

IP Key Message tab page A tab page where IP


signaling messages can be
selected. Double-click SIP
Message. The Select SIP
Message dialog box is
displayed. For details about
the parameters, see Table
19-17.

Delete Delete the selected start


signaling (start event) or
signaling (end event).

Max Delay Sets the delay threshold,


unit:ms.
NOTE
If the duration of a delay is
longer than the value specified
in Max Delay, the Assistant
does not report the delay.

Table 19-20 Parameters on the IE Condition Setting tab page


Parameter Description

IE Name Selected IE name.

Condition area Value IE value. The following


values can be selected:
l <
l >
l and
l or

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 402


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

19.36 Parameters for Setting an Automatic Analysis Task


This section describes the parameters in the Automatic Analysis Setting dialog box. You can
refer to this section when setting an automatic analysis task on the Assistant.

Table 19-21 Description of parameters in the Automatic Analysis Setting dialog box

Parameter Description

Project Indicates the project name and project monitoring directory.

Mode Indicates the automatic import mode.


The Assistant provides two automatic import modes, namely, time
mode and text mode.
l Time mode: Indicates the time mode.
Start time is considered as the condition for triggering an
automatic import, whereas Time mode is considered as the
number of times that the automatic import is performed.
l Text mode: Indicates the text mode.
The OK.txt file is considered as the condition for triggering an
automatic import.
In text mode, you need to manually upload the OK.txt file to the
corresponding folder. After identifying the OK.txt file, the
Assistant starts to analyze DT logfiles in the folder.

Start time Indicates the start time of the automatic import.


This parameter is valid when Mode is set to Time mode.

Times Indicates the number of times that the automatic import is performed.
The Assistant performs an automatic import when Start time arrives.
This parameter is valid when Mode is set to Time mode.

Monitor path Indicates the path in which DT logfiles are monitored.

19.37 Parameters for Executing an Automatic Analysis


Task
This section describes the parameters for executing an automatic analysis task. You can refer
to this section when you view the properties of an automatic analysis task.

Parameter Description

Enables you to execute an automatic analysis tasks.

Enables you to stop an automatic analysis task.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 403


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

Enables you to set an automatic analysis task.

Logfile Indicates the name of the logfile analyzed by the existing


automatic analysis task.

Size(M) Indicates the size of the logfile analyzed by the existing


automatic analysis task. The unit of the parameter value is MB.

Process Indicates the progress of the existing automatic analysis task for
analyzing the logfile.

Status Indicates the status of the logfile analyzed by the existing


automatic analysis task.

19.38 Parameters for Measurement Information


This section describes the parameters in the Measurement Information window.

GSM(MS) Tab Page


IE Name Description

CellName Indicates the cell name.

CI Indicates the cell ID.

BSIC Indicates the base station identity code


(BSIC), which is composed of the network
color code (NCC) and base station code
(BCC).

ARFCN Indicates the ARFCN that is scanned.

RxLev Indicates the received signal strength.

C1 Indicates the cell selection parameter.

C2 Indicates the cell reselection parameter.

C31 Indicates the GPRS cell selection parameter.

C32 Indicates the GPRS cell reselection


parameter.

GSM(Scanner) Tab Page


IE Name Description

CellName Indicates the cell name.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 404


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

IE Name Description

CI Indicates the cell ID.

BSIC Indicates the base station identity code


(BSIC), which is composed of the network
color code (NCC) and base station code
(BCC).

ARFCN Indicates the ARFCN that is scanned.

RxLev Indicates the received signal strength.

WCDMA(UE) Tab Page


IE Name Description

CellName Indicates the cell name.

P-SC Indicates the measured primary scrambling


code of a neighboring GSM cell.

CellID Indicates the cell ID.

UARFCN Indicates the UTRAN ARFCN.

Ec/I0 Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to


the total power density of the received
bandwidth.

RSCP Indicates the received signal code power


(RSCP).

WCDMA(Scanner) Tab Page


IE Name Description

CellName Indicates the cell name.

P-SC Indicates the measured primary scrambling


code of a neighboring GSM cell.

CellID Indicates the cell ID.

UARFCN Indicates the UTRAN ARFCN.

Ec/I0 Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to


the total power density of the received
bandwidth.

RSCP Indicates the received signal code power


(RSCP).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 405


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

LTE(UE) Tab Page


IE Name Description

EARFCN Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio


frequency channel number (EARFCN).

CellID Indicates the cell ID.

CellName Indicates the cell name.

PCI Indicates the physical cell identifier (PCI).

RSRP Indicates the reference signal received


power (RSRP).

RSRQ Indicates the reference signal received


quality (RSRQ).

PCC SINR Indicates the signal to interference plus


noise ratio (SINR) of the PCC.
NOTE
If the test data of Qualcomm TM6200,
Qualcomm TM6250, Qualcomm TM6275, or
Qualcomm TM6280 is analyzed, the minimum
SINR is displayed in SINR.
If the test data of E398S, E2701, B593S, or UE
1.0/2.0/3.0 is analyzed, the average SINR is
displayed in SINR.

RSSI Indicates the received signal strength


indicator (RSSI).

LTE(Scanner) Tab Page


IE Name Description

EARFCN Indicates the EARFCN.

CellID Indicates the cell ID.

CellName Indicates the cell name.

PCI Indicates the physical cell identifier (PCI).

RSRP Indicates the RSRP.

RSRQ Indicates the RSRQ.

Analyzing RSSI Data Indicates the RSSI.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 406


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

WLAN Tab Page


IE Name Description

BSSID Indicates the MAC address of an access


point (AP).

SSID Indicates the AP service set ID.

Privacy Indicates whether to enable the AP security


mode.

Channel Indicates the channel that is used by the


current AP.

RSSI Indicates the received signal strength.

Status Indicates whether the UE connects to the


WLAN network. The value can be:
l Connected: The UE is connected to the
WLAN network.
l Available: The UE can connect to the
WLAN network.

Architecture WLAN networking architecture. The value


can be:
l Infrastrature
Basic structure mode. It consists of the
AP, UE, and SLS system. The area
covered by WLAN of this architecture is
called the basic service set.
l Ad-hoc
peer-to-peer mode. It is also called the
equivalent architecture-based mode or
self-organized network. It is used by one
wireless UE to directly communicate
with one or multiple UEs, with no center
base station. With this architecture,
multiple mobile UEs are interconnected
within a limited range.

Manufacture Manufacturer of the AP device. You can


obtain this information according to the
MAC address of the AP.

19.39 Parameters for Map Setting


This section describes the parameters in the Map Setting dialog box. You can set the color of
lines connecting drive test (DT) points to the cells, borders, and grids.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 407


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Cell Connection Type Area


Parameter Description

Serving Cells Line Color Enables you to set the color of lines
connecting DT points to the serving
cells.

Line Style Enables you to set the style of lines


connecting DT points to the serving
cells.

Neighbor Cells Line Style Enables you to set the style of lines
connecting DT points to the serving
cells.

Color of Nth Enables you to set the color of the


N-th neighboring cell. N ranges
from 1 to 6.

Cell And Grid Setting Area


Parameter Description

Cell Color GSM Enables you to select a field from


the GSM drop-down list so that the
Assistant can adapt to the color
setting for the field.

WCDMA Enables you to select a field from


the WCDMA drop-down list so that
the Assistant can adapt to the color
setting for the field.

LTE Enables you to select a field from


the LTE drop-down list so that the
Assistant can adapt to the color
setting for the field.
NOTE
After you select PCI Mode3 from the
LTE drop-down list, the following
contents are displayed in the lower part
of the window:
l Color Of PCI mod 3 = 0: Indicates
that the color is set for the cell for
which the remainder of PCI/3 is 0.
l Color Of PCI mod 3 = 1: Indicates
that the color is set for the cell for
which the remainder of PCI/3 is 1.
l Color Of PCI mod 3 = 2: Indicates
that the color is set for the cell for
which the remainder of PCI/3 is 2.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 408


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

TD-SCDMA Enables you to select a field from


the TD-SCDMA drop-down list so
that the Assistant can adapt to the
color setting for the field.

Grid Size Fixed Setting Enables you to set the grid size.

Default Setting Refers to the default system setting.

Sampling Point Setting Area


Parameter Description

Type RAT types:


l GSM
l WCDMA
l LTE
l TD-SCDMA

Field Set the radio parameter values to be displayed on the map track
of IEs.
The IE Name, IE Value, Latitude, and Longitude parameters
are displayed by default. After importing engineering
parameters, you may select the engineering parameters to be
displayed on the map track of IEs.

19.40 Parameter Description: Indoor Report


This section describes the parameters in the Indoor Report Setting dialog box. You can refer
to this section to set the related parameters when you modify the indoor reports.

Base Information setting Window


Parameter Description

SiteName Site Enter the names of sites to be exported.

Building Build Click Browse and select a building.


information
Cell Click Browse and select a cell.

Cell Information Click Select Site. The cell information is


displayed.

Save Setting Save Path Click Browse and select a path to save exported
reports.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 409


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Coverage test setting Window


Parameter Description

DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Name: Enter a name.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Elevator room, basement, or parking lot
– Floor
– Outdoor
l LogFile: Select data from the drop-down list.
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.

Name Indicates a test item name.

File Indicates the test data.

Image Click ... and select an image.

Remove Indicates that a test item can be deleted.

Spillage test setting Window


Parameter Description

DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Name: Enter a name.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Frequency not lock
– Frequency lock
l LogFile: Select data.
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.

Name Indicates a test item name.

File Indicates the test data.

Image Click ... and select an image.

Remove Indicates that a test item can be deleted.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 410


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Handover test setting Window


Parameter Description

DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Name: Enter a name.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Elevator and floor
– Entry and exit of buildings
– Cells in buildings
– Entry and exit of parking lots or
basements
l LogFile: Select a type from the following
list:
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.

Name Indicates a test item name.

File Indicates the test data.

Image Click ... and select an image.

Remove Indicates that a test item can be deleted.

Data service test setting Window


Parameter Description

DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Cell Name: Select a cell name from the drop-
down list.
l TestPalce: Select a far point, middle point, or
close point from the drop-down list.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Upload
– Download
l Channel: Select a single-channel or a dual-
channel.
l PCI: Enter a PCI.
l LogFile: Select data.
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 411


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 19 Interface Reference

Parameter Description

CellName Indicates the name of a cell.

Place Indicates the location of a DT test area.

Type Indicates the type of data transmission.

Channel Indicates the type of a data transmission channel.

File Indicates the test data.

Image Click ... and select an image.

Remove Indicates that a test item can be deleted.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 412


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20 FAQs

About This Chapter

This describes the FAQs, analyzes their causes, and provides the solutions. This also describes
the skills for using the Assistant.
20.1 How Do I Uninstall the Main Program of the Assistant?
20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information
This section describes how to import configuration information. If the Assistant installed on
two PCs has the same configuration information, such as the settings of the theme analysis
type and report template, you can export the configuration information from one PC to the
other PC. This improves the analysis efficiency.
20.3 How Do I Export Configuration Information
This section describes how to export configuration information. If the Assistant installed on
two PCs has the same configuration information, such as the settings of the theme analysis
type and report template, you can export the configuration information from one PC to the
other PC. This improves the analysis efficiency.
20.4 What Should I Do to Troubleshoot the Failure of Starting the Assistant After the
Microsoft Office Software Is Uninstalled?
This describes how to troubleshoot the failure of starting the Assistant after the Microsoft
Office software is uninstalled.
20.5 How to Prepare an Engineering Parameter File?
The Assistant allows you to import the engineering parameter file in .xls format or .csv
format. Before importing the file, you need to manually match the required fields and optional
fields. To avoid repeating operations, you are advised to check and modify the engineering
parameter file to be imported so that its fields are consistent with those in the Assistant
database.
20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme Analysis Result Is Displayed?
This section describes the causes of the problem that no theme analysis result is displayed and
provides the corresponding solutions.
20.7 What Should I Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the Drilldown and
Data View Synchronization?
This provides the cause and solution of the problem that the map view is displayed in red
during the drilldown and data view synchronization.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 413


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.8 What Should I Do to Solve the Common Problems in Automatic Analysis Tasks?
This describes the common problems in automatic analysis tasks. This also describes the
causes of these problems and provides the corresponding solutions.
20.9 What Should I Do When IEs Fail to Be Displayed on a Map in the Further Analysis
Report in Quick Analysis Mode?
This section describes the problem that IEs fail to be displayed on a map in quick analysis
mode and the corresponding solution.
20.10 How to Handle the Problem of Abnormal Breakdown of the Assistant When Moving a
Legend on the Map?
This section describes the cause of the problem that the Assistant breaks down abnormally
when you move a legend on the map and provides the corresponding solution.
20.11 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?
This section describes the cause of the problem that the message Error: ESN is not correct!
is displayed when the license edition of the Assistant is used. It also provides the
corresponding solution.
20.12 What Should I Do When the Assistant Fails to Start the Google Earth?
This section describes the problem that the Assistant fails to start the Google Earth and the
corresponding solution.
20.13 How to View Segmentation Points of DT Logs?
20.14 How Do I Resolve the Problem that an Error Message Is Displayed When an Excel
Report Is Exported?
This section describes how to resolve the problem that an error message is displayed when an
Excel report is exported.
20.15 How Do I Resolve the Problem that the Assistant Window Is Displayed in the Front but
Other Windows Cannot Be Displayed?
This section describes the problem that the Assistant window is displayed in the front but
other windows cannot be displayed.
20.16 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Selected Data Points Cannot Be Highlighted When
a Multi-selection Tool on a Map Is Used to Select IEs?
This section describes how to resolve the problem that selected data points cannot be
highlighted and the solution to the problem when a multi-selection tool (rectangle, circle, or
polygon) on a map is used to select IEs.
20.17 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Assistant Icons Are Displayed as Garbled
Characters?
This section describes the cause of the problem that Assistant icons are displayed as garbled
characters and how to resolve the problem.
20.18 How Do I Solve the Compatibility Problem Between the Project of an Earlier Version
and the Assistant?
This section describes how to solve the compatibility problem between the project of an
earlier version and the Assistant.
20.19 What Do I Do If the Manually Calculated KPIs Are Slightly Different from Those
Displayed on the Assistant?
For the KPIs involving IEs, the values displayed on the IE page may be slightly different from
the manually calculated values.
20.20 What Do I Do If the Volumes of Data Related to RF Modes Are Different Before and
After Parsing?

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 414


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.21 What do I do if one time repeately appear when using Time Binning way to analyze
data and display the IEs?
20.22 If the IEs Under the Delay Node Have No Value, They Still Need to Be Displayed in
the IE Tree

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 415


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.1 How Do I Uninstall the Main Program of the


Assistant?
Question
How do I uninstall the main program of the Assistant?

Answer

1. Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Suite > Assistant V300R018 > Uninstall.
The window for uninstalling the Assistant is displayed.
2. Click Remove.
3. Click Next.
4. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
5. When the uninstallation is complete, click Finish.

20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information


This section describes how to import configuration information. If the Assistant installed on
two PCs has the same configuration information, such as the settings of the theme analysis
type and report template, you can export the configuration information from one PC to the
other PC. This improves the analysis efficiency.

Context
The imported configuration information will overwrite the existing configuration information.
The Assistant allows you to import the following configuration information:

l Information about the configured KPI template, IE template, and report template,
including:
– Predefined KPIs and user-defined KPIs
– Predefined IEs and user-defined IEs
– Predefined report template, benchmark report template, single site verification
report template, and user-defined report template
l Legend configuration information
l Setting of the theme analysis type

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Tool > Import on the toolbar.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 416


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

If you need to... Then...

Import all configuration information Perform Step 2.

Import certain configuration information Perform Step 3.

Step 2 Import all configuration information.


1. Select Full.

A message is displayed, asking you whether to restart the Assistant after the new
configuration information is applied.

– Click Yes to continue importing the configuration information. The Assistant will
close after applying the new configuration information.
– Click No to cancel the import of configuration information. No further action is
required.
2. Click Yes. In the Open dialog box, select a file to be imported.
3. Click Open.

The system prompts that data in the imported file will overwrite the existing
configuration information.

– Click Yes to overwrite the existing configuration information.


– Click No to cancel the import of configuration information.
4. Click OK.
After the configuration information is imported successfully, the Assistant automatically
closes. Restart the Assistant to make the imported configuration information take effect.

Step 3 Import certain configuration information.


1. Select Custom.

A message is displayed, asking you whether to restart the Assistant after the new
configuration information is applied.

– Click Yes. The Assistant will close after applying the new configuration
information.
– Click No to cancel the import of configuration information.
2. Click Yes. In the Open dialog box, select a file to be imported.
3. Click Open.
4. In the displayed Import Dialog dialog box, select the configuration information to be
imported.
5. Click OK to import the configuration information.
If you want to cancel the import, click Cancel.
After the configuration information is imported successfully, the Assistant automatically
closes. Restart the Assistant to make the imported configuration information take effect.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 417


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

Follow-up Procedure
After the configuration information is imported successfully, you can perform task analysis
based on the imported system configuration.

20.3 How Do I Export Configuration Information


This section describes how to export configuration information. If the Assistant installed on
two PCs has the same configuration information, such as the settings of the theme analysis
type and report template, you can export the configuration information from one PC to the
other PC. This improves the analysis efficiency.

Context
The Assistant allows you to export the following configuration information:
l Information about the configured KPI template, IE template, and report template,
including:
– Predefined KPIs and user-defined KPIs comprise a whole KPI set and are not
related to settings on the project setting GUI.
– Predefined IEs and user-defined IEs
– Predefined report template, benchmark report template, single site verification
report template, and user-defined report template
l Legend configuration information
l Setting of the theme analysis type

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Tool > Export on the toolbar.

If you need to... Then...

Export all configuration information Select Full.

Export certain configuration Select Custom. In the displayed Custom Export


information dialog box, select the configuration information to
be exported.

Step 2 Select a path for saving the exported configuration information.

Step 3 Click Save. After the import is complete, the system displays a message, indicating that the
configuration information is exported successfully.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 418


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.4 What Should I Do to Troubleshoot the Failure of


Starting the Assistant After the Microsoft Office Software
Is Uninstalled?
This describes how to troubleshoot the failure of starting the Assistant after the Microsoft
Office software is uninstalled.

Symptom
When you starts the Assistant, the system displays a message indicating that the Microsoft
Office software is not installed. Then, the Assistant fails to be started.

Cause
Normal operation of the Assistant software depends on the Office Web Components (OWC)
10, which is installed with the GENEX Shared components or the Microsoft Office software.
If you uninstall the GENEX Shared components or the Microsoft Office software, or upgrade
the Microsoft Office software, the OWC10 component is also uninstalled. Then, the Assistant
software functions abnormally.

Solution
Reinstall the GENEX Shared components or the Microsoft Office 2003 or 2007.

20.5 How to Prepare an Engineering Parameter File?


The Assistant allows you to import the engineering parameter file in .xls format or .csv
format. Before importing the file, you need to manually match the required fields and optional
fields. To avoid repeating operations, you are advised to check and modify the engineering
parameter file to be imported so that its fields are consistent with those in the Assistant
database.

Context
The engineering parameter file must contain specific parameters to be imported into the
Assistant for analysis. The levels of parameters are different from each other, for example:
l Required field: It must exist and match the field in the Assistant database.
l Optional field: Regardless of whether the optional field is matched, the engineering
parameter file can be imported into the Assistant for analysis.
Table 20-1, Table 20-2, Table 20-3, Table 20-4 and Table 20-5 lists the level of each
parameter of the GSM engineering, WCDMA engineering, CDMA engineering, TD-SCDMA
engineering, and LTE engineering parameter in the Assistant.`

Table 20-1 Level of each field of the GSM engineering parameter


Level Field

Required field Azimuth, CI, BCCH, Longitude, Latitude, LAC, BTS ID, Site Name

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 419


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

Level Field

Optional field Cell Name, CGI, TCH, BSIC, GPRS Support, Frequency Band,
EDGE Support, Hopping Mode, BSC Name, Project Phase, RAC,
MA, Site Type, BTS Type, Antenna, City, Region, Height,
Mechanical Downtilt, Electrical Downtilt, Altitude, Polarization,
Antenna Gain, H-Beamwidth, V-Beamwidth, Cell Radius, Cell Type,
Active, Scene, TMA Type, TMA Gain, NCellN

Table 20-2 Level of each field of the WCDMA engineering parameter


Level Field

Required field CI, ARFCN, PSC, Longitude, Latitude, Azimuth, NodeB ID, NodeB
Name

Optional field RNC ID, RAC, LAC, NodeB Type, Sector ID, Cell Name,
DownTilt, Electrical Downtilt, Mechanical
Downtilt,Height,Altitude, Antenna, Antenna Gain, H-Beamwidth, V-
Beamwidth, Feeder Type, Feeder Length(DL), NodeBCE, Cell Type,
Cell Radius, Active, Scene, TMA

Table 20-3 Level of each field of the CDMA engineering parameter


Level Field

Required field PN, Longitude, Latitude, Azimuth, Cell ID, ARFCN, Sector ID

Optional field DownTilt, Site ID, Site Name, Carrier ID, SID, NID, Antenna
Height, BeamWidth, Area

Table 20-4 Level of each field of the LTE engineering parameter


Level Field

Required field Longitude, Latitude, eNodeB ID, eNodeB Name, Sector ID, Local
Cell ID, Cell ID, DLEARFCN, PCI, Azimuth, Cell Name

Optional field TAC, eNodeB Type, Downtilt, Electrical Downtilt, Mechanical


Downtilt, Height, Altitude, Antenna, Antenna Gain, H-Beamwidth,
V-Beamwidth, Feeder Type, Feeder Length(DL), Active, Scene,
TMA

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 420


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

Table 20-5 Level of each field of the TD-SCDMA engineering parameter


Level Field

Required field eNodeBID, eNodeBName, SectorID, Local CellID, CellID,


EARFCN, PCI, Longitude, Latitude, Azimuth

Optional field eNodeBType, CellName, Downtilt ,E-DownTilt, M-DownTilt,


GroudHeight, Altitude, AntennaType, AntennaGain, H-Beamwidth,
V-Beamwidth, FeederType, FeederLength, ActiveStatus, Outdoor,
TMA, TAC

Procedure
You can prepare an engineering parameter file by using either of the following method: (1)
Create an .xls file, which must contain the required field. Figure 20-1 shows an instance of
the created .xls file.

Figure 20-1 Instance of .xls file

(2) Choose Tools > Export BTS Information Template > GSM on the main menu of the
Assistant to download the GSM engineering parameter template and then fill the engineering
parameter information in this template.

20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme Analysis Result


Is Displayed?
This section describes the causes of the problem that no theme analysis result is displayed and
provides the corresponding solutions.

Symptom
After related configuration items are set, you choose View > GSM Theme Result to view
GSM theme results, but no theme analysis result is displayed in the GSM Theme Result
window.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 421


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

Cause I and Solution


l Cause:
The imported engineering parameters and the analyzed DT logfiles are not from the
same test area.
l Solution:
Ensure that the imported engineering parameters and the analyzed logfiles are from the
same test area.

Cause II and Solution


l Cause:
When setting the theme analysis type, you set the matching mode of engineering
parameters and DT logfiles to BCCH-BSIC. In this mode, the values of BCCH-BSIC
may be changed during base station frequency replanning. Therefore, the system cannot
identify serving cells according to the values of BCCH-BSIC.
l Solution:
– Ensure that the engineering parameters are correct and can match the DT logfiles.
– Set the matching mode to LAC-CI.

Cause III and Solution


l Cause:
When importing engineering parameters, the system does not import all the engineering
parameters required by theme analysis.
l Solution:
Before performing theme analysis, ensure that all the following engineering parameters
are successfully imported into the Assistant: Longitude, Latitude, LAC, CI, BCCH,
Azimuth, BSIC, Cell Type, BTS ID, Scene, and H-Beamwidth.
l Solution:
Import the preceding engineering parameters successfully.

20.7 What Should I Do When the Map View Is Displayed


in Red During the Drilldown and Data View
Synchronization?
This provides the cause and solution of the problem that the map view is displayed in red
during the drilldown and data view synchronization.

Symptom
The map view is displayed in red during the drilldown and data view synchronization.

Cause
The font used by the AssistantV3 and GENEX Assistant does not exist in Microsoft
Windows or cannot be displayed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 422


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

Solution
Check whether the font used by the AssistantV3 and GENEX Assistant exists in Microsoft
Windows and can be displayed normally. If the font does not exist or cannot be displayed,
reinstall the GENEX Assistant. After the installation, restart the PC.

20.8 What Should I Do to Solve the Common Problems in


Automatic Analysis Tasks?
This describes the common problems in automatic analysis tasks. This also describes the
causes of these problems and provides the corresponding solutions.

The System Does Not Detect All the Logfiles in the Monitoring Directory
l Symptom:
The system fails to detect the logfiles that are added to the monitoring directory.
l Cause I and solution:

This failure occurs because you do not click to start an automatic analysis task.

Click to start an automatic analysis task. The system starts detecting logfiles.
l Cause II and solution:
The setting in Monitor path is inconsistent with the actual directory where the logfiles
are saved.
Check and ensure that the setting in Monitor path is consistent with the actual directory
where the logfiles are saved.

The System Can Detect Logfiles Normally but Fails to Import Them
l Symptom:
The system can detect logfiles normally but fails to import them. Status is in the waiting
status for 30 seconds.
l Cause I and solution:
The OK.txt file does not exist in the logfile folder to be analyzed.
Add the OK.txt file to the logfile folder to be analyzed, and then trigger the import of
logfiles. The system starts parsing and importing the logfiles.
l Cause II and solution:
The system is performing another automatic analysis task and does not start importing
the logfiles in the monitoring directory.
Wait until the previous automatic analysis task is complete.

Failed to Set an Automatic Analysis Task by Selecting a Project


l Symptom:
After choosing Project > Automatic Analysis Setting, you find that the project list in
the Automatic Analysis Setting pane is empty. You cannot select a project to set an
automatic analysis task.
l Cause:

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 423


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

All the projects in the workspace do not meet the requirements for an automatic analysis
task. If you have manually analyzed a project, the project does not support the automatic
analysis any more.
l Solution:
Create a project and ensure that this project is not manually analyzed.

Failed to Stop the Automatic Analysis Task by Clicking the Button for Stopping
A Task
l Symptom:

After you click , the automatic analysis task cannot be stopped.


l Cause:
The system is performing an automatic analysis task, and completely stopping an
automatic analysis task takes a period of time.
l Solution:
Wait until the automatic analysis task is stopped completely.

The System Fails to Analyze Logfiles


l Symptom:
After the system analyzes logfiles, Status is failed.
l Cause:
All the analyzed logfiles do not meet the requirements of the Assistant due to the
improper logfile format or incorrect FMT data template.
l Solution:
– Ensure that the logfile format is .gen, .phu, .fm5, .fm7, or .fm8. The system does not
support the .fmt format.
– Use the data template provided by the Assistant to generate the FMT logfiles.

20.9 What Should I Do When IEs Fail to Be Displayed on a


Map in the Further Analysis Report in Quick Analysis
Mode?
This section describes the problem that IEs fail to be displayed on a map in quick analysis
mode and the corresponding solution.

Problem Description
In the case that an analysis group is created for a project in quick analysis mode, if the created
analysis group contains the DT logfiles that are already analyzed for other analysis groups, the
IE information contained in these logfiles cannot be displayed on the map in the generated
analysis report.

Possible Cause
In quick analysis mode, if the analysis group created for a project contains DT logfiles that are
already analyzed for other analysis groups, the Assistant cannot read the detailed IE

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 424


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

information contained in these analyzed DT logfiles. As a result, these IEs fail to be displayed
on the map.

Handling Procedure
Operate the created project in traditional analysis mode.

20.10 How to Handle the Problem of Abnormal


Breakdown of the Assistant When Moving a Legend on
the Map?
This section describes the cause of the problem that the Assistant breaks down abnormally
when you move a legend on the map and provides the corresponding solution.

Symptom
The Assistant breaks down abnormally when you move a legend on the map.

Solution
Check whether the screen word-capturing function of the Kingsoft Powerword program is
enabled. If the screen word-capturing function is enabled, disable this function.

20.11 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?


This section describes the cause of the problem that the message Error: ESN is not correct!
is displayed when the license edition of the Assistant is used. It also provides the
corresponding solution.

Symptom
When the license edition of the Assistant is used, the message Error: ESN is not correct! is
displayed and the Assistant cannot be started properly.

Cause
The ESN changes and cannot match the license.

Solution
Apply for multiple licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC.The
Assistant cannot identify the ESN of the hard disk on the PC because of PC configuration. In
this case, the Assistant selectively identifies the ESN of the network adapter on the PC. If
multiple network adapters exist on the PC, the network adapter ESN changes after the
operating system is started. therefore, you are advised to apply for licenses based on the
number of network adapters on the PC. When the message Error: ESN is not correct! is
displayed, load the corresponding license file to the system again.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 425


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.12 What Should I Do When the Assistant Fails to Start


the Google Earth?
This section describes the problem that the Assistant fails to start the Google Earth and the
corresponding solution.

Problem Description
After the Google Earth is installed by running googleupdatesetup.exe in the case that the PC
is connected to the Internet, the Assistant is started but the functions of the Google Earth
cannot be used.

Possible Cause
The version of the Google Earth installed through googleupdatesetup.exe is inconsistent with
the version of the Google Earth used by the Assistant.

Handling Procedure
Use the installation program of the specified version of the Google Earth. The specified
version is 7.1.2.2041 and the installation program is
GoogleEarthWin-7.1.2.2041.1417763245.exe.

20.13 How to View Segmentation Points of DT Logs?


Question
How to view segmentation points of drive test (DT) logs?

Answer
1. Import DT logs.
2. Run the analysis task.
3. On the Project tab page, double-click the Common node.
4. View the segmentation points of DT logs.
– Right-click FileID and choose Display On Map from the shortcut menu. The
segmentation points of DT logs are displayed on a map, as shown in Figure 20-2.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 426


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

Figure 20-2 Segmentation points of DT logs

– Right-click FileID and choose Display On Sheet from the shortcut menu. The
segmentation points of DT logs are displayed in a sheet.

20.14 How Do I Resolve the Problem that an Error


Message Is Displayed When an Excel Report Is Exported?
This section describes how to resolve the problem that an error message is displayed when an
Excel report is exported.

Symptom
During Excel report export, an error message is displayed, indicating that a server exception
occurs.

Root Cause
The Excel process is terminated unexpectedly during Excel report export. As a result, Excel
invoking fails.

Solution
During report export, do not open the report that is being exported. If server exceptions occur,
re-import reports.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 427


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.15 How Do I Resolve the Problem that the Assistant


Window Is Displayed in the Front but Other Windows
Cannot Be Displayed?
This section describes the problem that the Assistant window is displayed in the front but
other windows cannot be displayed.

Symptom
When the Assistant is running, the Assistant window is always displayed on the top. As a
result, other windows cannot be displayed.

Root Cause
A large number of system resources are occupied when the Assistant is running for a long
time. As a result, other windows cannot obtain required resources and cannot be displayed on
the top.

Solution
Minimize the Assistant to view other windows.

20.16 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Selected Data


Points Cannot Be Highlighted When a Multi-selection
Tool on a Map Is Used to Select IEs?
This section describes how to resolve the problem that selected data points cannot be
highlighted and the solution to the problem when a multi-selection tool (rectangle, circle, or
polygon) on a map is used to select IEs.

Symptom
The data points that are not in the selected status exist in selected data when a multi-selection
tool on a map is used to select IEs.

Root Cause
The third-party control, MAPX, used by the Assistant does not support highlighted display of
multiple data points of the same longitude and latitude.

Solution
Use a single-selection tool and press Ctrl to select and highlight multiple data points of the
same longitude and latitude.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 428


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.17 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Assistant Icons


Are Displayed as Garbled Characters?
This section describes the cause of the problem that Assistant icons are displayed as garbled
characters and how to resolve the problem.

Symptom
On the Assistant, choose Report > Report Template to open the GUI. Then, close the GUI.
Assistant icons are displayed as garbled characters, as shown in the following figure.

Root Cause
The problem is caused by the third-party control used by the Assistant.

Solution
Restart the Assistant without interrupting use of functions. After the restart, Assistant icons
become normal.

20.18 How Do I Solve the Compatibility Problem Between


the Project of an Earlier Version and the Assistant?
This section describes how to solve the compatibility problem between the project of an
earlier version and the Assistant.

Symptom
When using the Assistant of the later version to open the project of an earlier version, you can
check counters or perform other operations, but some counters may be incompletely analyzed.

Cause
After you use the Assistant of the later version to open the project of an earlier version,
modify the project setting, and perform the analysis again, the database structures of the
earlier and later versions are changed. As a result, some counters are incompletely analyzed.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 429


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

Solution
Do not import projects of earlier versions to the Assistant of the later version. Re-create a
project on the Assistant of the later version for analysis.

20.19 What Do I Do If the Manually Calculated KPIs Are


Slightly Different from Those Displayed on the Assistant?
For the KPIs involving IEs, the values displayed on the IE page may be slightly different from
the manually calculated values.

Symptom
The KPI values displayed on the IE page is slightly different from the manually calculated
values.

Root Cause
l Precision reason
When KPI values are calculated, the displayed values are slightly different from those
displayed on the Assistant due to the IE precision reason.
l The time mechanisms used by events and KPIs are different.
The start time and end time used for manual calculations are different from the time used
by the Assistant. As a result, the manually calculated values and the values displayed on
the Assistant are slightly different.
The slight difference is normal and the KPI display on the Assistant is correct.

Handling Method
You do not need to take measures.

20.20 What Do I Do If the Volumes of Data Related to RF


Modes Are Different Before and After Parsing?

Symptom
The volumes of data related to RF Modes are different before and after parsing. This is
normal.

Root Cause
When the data related to RF Mode is parsed on the Assistant, KPI calculations are required.
As a result, the volumes of parsed data are different between the Probe and Assistant, and
sometimes the difference is great.

Handling Method
You do not need to take measures.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 430


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

20.21 What do I do if one time repeately appear when


using Time Binning way to analyze data and display the
IEs?

Symptom
When you use Time Binning way to analyze the DT data and display the IEs, the same time
maybe displayed in different records, which appears occasionally.

Root Cause
The longitude and latitude are not analyzed in the Time Binning way.

Handling Method
You are advised to use the No Binning way.

20.22 If the IEs Under the Delay Node Have No Value,


They Still Need to Be Displayed in the IE Tree

If the IEs Under the Delay Node Have No Value, They Still Need to Be
Displayed in the IE Tree
The Interrupt Time Delay node is used as an example, as shown in Figure 20-3.

Figure 20-3 Delay node

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 431


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 20 FAQs

LTE to GSM interrupt Time Delay(RLC DL)(ms) has no value, and it is displayed on the
IE tree on the left.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 432


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

21 Appendixes

About This Chapter

21.1 IE Descriptions
This section describes all the MS IEs and scanner IEs on all networks (These IEs are
displayed by the Assistant). You can refer to this section when viewing corresponding IEs in a
view window.
21.2 B Description of Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the networks. You can refer to this section
when setting event parameters.
21.3 C Description of Predefined KPIs
This describes the system predefined KPIs of the networks. You can refer to this part when
viewing the detailed meanings of KPIs.
21.4 D Description of Predefined Reports
This section describes the predefined reports. You can refer to this section for information
about system report templates. The report can be in Excel or Word format, and the available
report types include BenchMark, Cluster, and SSV.
21.5 Description of Shortcut Keys
This section describes some shortcut keys of the Assistant.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 433


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

21.1 IE Descriptions
This section describes all the MS IEs and scanner IEs on all networks (These IEs are
displayed by the Assistant). You can refer to this section when viewing corresponding IEs in a
view window.

NOTE

Only No Binning is supported when the consistency of IEs on the Probe and that on the Assistant is
checked, because the Binning algorithm of the Probe differs from that of the Assistant.
The delays involving secondary calculations of data export are displayed under the Delay node in the IE
navigation tree even if there is no delay value.

21.1.1 Common IEs


This section describes common IEs for GSM and WCDMA networks. You can refer to this
section when viewing corresponding IEs in the IE view window.

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Common

Filemark - Indicates a type of text that records


geographical information about the test
position.

GSM Service l CS Indicates the service status in the GSM


l GPRS network.
l EDGE
l Idle
l Dedicated

RF Mode l GSM Indicates the network technology.


l WCDMA
l LTE
l No Service
l Unknown

WCDMA RB DL l R99 Indicates the WCDMA downlink radio


l HSDPA bearer type.
l HSUPA
l NS-HSUPA
l Unknown

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 434


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

WCDMA RB UL l R99 Indicates the WCDMA uplink radio bearer


l HSDPA type.
l HSUPA
l NS-HSUPA
l Unknown

WCDMA RRC State l Idle Indicates the instantaneous RRC state of a


l URA PCH WCDMA UE during a drive test.
l CELL PCH
l CELL DCH
l CELL FACH
l Connecting

WCDMA Service l AMR Indicates the service status in the WCDMA


l VP network.
l PS Common
Indicator
l Idle
l Dedicated

Speed Value range: 0 to Indicates the GPS rate.


500 (unit: km/h) NOTE
This indicator does not support drilldown.

FileID - Indicates the ID that is automatically


assigned to each imported segmentation log.
NOTE
This indicator does not support drilldown.

FileName - Indicates the name of each imported


segmentation log.
NOTE
This indicator does not support drilldown.

FileEndTime - Indicates the file end time.

FileStartTime - Indicates the file start time.

GridTotal(30*30) - Indicates the grid size.

Test Information - Indicates test information, such as device


information, total number of data packets,
and the time when the first/last packet is
received.

FTP Test FTP Type - Indicates the FTP test type, such as FTP
Upload and FTP Download.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 435


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

FTP Real Time Time unit: second Indicates the FTP test duration.

FTP Real Time Size unit: bit Indicates the FTP download or upload data
size.

FTP Real Time unit: second Indicates the FTP test completion duration.
Complete

Baidu NetDisk unit: kbit/s Indicates the download throughput of the


Throughput DL Baidu NetDisk.

Baidu NetDisk unit: kbit/s Indicates the upload throughput of the Baidu
Throughput UL NetDisk.

PBMThroughputUL unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput for the


available bandwidth.

PBMThroughputDL unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput for the


available bandwidth.

PBMThroughputDL unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink throughput


Avg for the available bandwidth.

PBMThroughputUL unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput for


Avg the available bandwidth.

PBMThroughputDL unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink throughput


AvgLTE for the available LTE bandwidth.

PBMThroughputUL unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput for


AvgLTE the available LTE bandwidth.

PBMThroughputDL unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink throughput


AvgWCDMA for the available WCDMA bandwidth.

PBMThroughputUL unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput for


AvgWCDMA the available WCDMA bandwidth.

RSRPGridValueAvg unit: dBm Indicates the average RSRP grid value.

LTEGridRate value range: 0 to Indicates the LTE grid rate.


100, unit: %

SINRGridValueRate unit: dB Indicates the SINR grid value.

PBMThroughputUL unit: kbit Indicates the PBM uplink data size.


Len

PBMThroughputUL- unit: s Indicates the PBM data transmission


Time duration on the uplink.

PBMThroughputDL unit: kbit Indicates the PBM downlink data size.


Len

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 436


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

PBMThroughputDL- unit: s Indicates the PBM downlink duration.


Time

Serving Cell Unit: m Indicates the distance between the


Distance measurement point and the serving cell.

PS State Session Initial Indicates the dynamic information generated


(FTP UL/FTP DL) during the initiation of the FTP service. For
details, see 21.2.1 FTP Service Process.

Data Transfer (FTP Indicates the dynamic information generated


UL) during the transmission of the FTP service
data. For details, see 21.2.1 FTP Service
Process.

Session Initial Indicates the dynamic information generated


during the non-FTP service.

Data Transfer Indicates the dynamic information generated


during the non-FTP service data transfer.

Delay

Session Setup Time Unit: millisecond Indicates the setup delay of a session.
Delay The setup delay of a session indicates the
interval between the RAS Dial Attempt
event and the Session Start event.

Ping RTT at Unit: millisecond Indicates the round trip time (RTT) delay in
Application Level the ping test.

Attach Time Delay Unit: millisecond Indicates the statistics about delay time from
Attach request to Attach success

Detach Time Delay Unit: millisecond Indicates the statistics about delay time from
Detach request to Detach success

PDP Activation Unit: millisecond Indicates the statistics about GSM PDP
Time Delay activation delay time.
PDP activation delay time = Time when the
Activate PDP Context Accept message is
received - Time when the Activate PDP
Context Request message is sent

LTE to GSM CSFB Unit: millisecond Indicates the LTE-to-GSM CSFB access
Time(MOC+MTC) delay.
LTE to GSM CSFB Time = Delay from
LTECSFBToGSMServiceRequest to
LTECSFBToGSMServiceSuc.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 437


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

LTE to WCDMA Unit: millisecond Indicates the LTE-to-WCDMA CSFB access


CSFB Time(MOC delay.
+MTC) LTE to WCDMA CSFB Time = Delay from
LTECSFBToWCDMAServiceRequest to
LTECSFBToWCDMAServiceSuc.

GSM CS Call Setup Unit: millisecond Indicates the GSM MOC and MTC call
Time(MOC+MTC) setup delay.
GSM CS Call Setup Time(MOC+MTC) =
Duration from GSM MOC and MTC call
setup request time to GSM MOC and MTC
call setup success time

WCDMA CS Call Unit: millisecond Indicates the WCDMA MOC and MTC call
Setup Time(MOC setup delay.
+MTC) WCDMA CS Call Setup Time(MOC+MTC)
= Duration from WCDMA MOC and MTC
call setup request time to WCDMA MOC
and MTC call setup success time

LTE to TD-SCDMA Unit: millisecond Indicates the LTE-to-WCDMA access delay


CSFB Time(MOC for CSFB services.
+MTC) LTE to TD-SCDMA CSFB Time(MOC
+MTC) = Time when an alerting is received
- Time when a service request or an extended
service request is sent

LTE to GSM CSFB Value range: 0 to Indicates the LTE-to-GSM CSFB access
Access Success 100 (unit: %) success rate.
Rate(MOC+MTC) LTE to GSM CSFB Access Success Rate =
Number of LTE-to-GSM CSFB access
success times/(Number of LTE-to-GSM
CSFB access success times + Number of
LTE-to-GSM CSFB access failure times) x
100

LTE to WCDMA Value range: 0 to Indicates the LTE-to-WCDMA CSFB access


CSFB Access 100 (unit: %) success rate.
Success Rate(MOC LTE to WCDMA CSFB Access Success
+MTC) Rate = Number of LTE-to-WCDMA CSFB
access success times/(Number of LTE-to-
WCDMA CSFB access success times +
Number of LTE-to-WCDMA CSFB access
failure times) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 438


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

GSM CS Call Setup Value range: 0 to Indicates the GSM MOC and MTC call
Success Rate(MOC 100 (unit: %) setup success rate.
+MTC) GSM CS Call Setup Success Rate(MOC
+MTC) = Number of GSM MOC and MTC
call setup success times/(Number of GSM
MOC and MTC call setup success times +
Number of GSM MOC and MTC call setup
failure times) x 100

WCDMA CS Call Value range: 0 to Indicates the WCDMA MOC and MTC call
Setup Success 100 (unit: %) setup success rate.
Rate(MOC+MTC) WCDMA CS Call Setup Success Rate(MOC
+MTC) = Number of WCDMA MOC and
MTC call setup success times/(Number of
WCDMA MOC and MTC call setup success
times + Number of WCDMA MOC and
MTC call setup failure times) x 100

PS Analysis

FTP - Indicates the statistics about the FTP


throughput, including the timeout rate,
average rate, maximum rate, minimum rate,
and other network information during each
FTP service.

Ping - Indicates the statistics about the Ping


service, including the number of bytes in the
data packet, Ping test time, and other Ping
service state information.

HTTP - Indicates the statistics about the HTTP


service, including the average download
time, total download time, average download
rate, and total download bytes.

PDP - Indicates the statistics about the PDP


service, including the PDP success rate,
average PDP activation time, average PDP
deactivation time, and other PDP service
state information.

Download - Indicates the WAP page download statistics,


including the total number of downloads,
number of successful downloads, data
volume, average download data volume,
total download time, and download status
information such as downloading, login
failure, download failure, and download
success.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 439


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Refresh - Indicates the WAP page refresh statistics,


including the total number of refreshes,
number of successful refreshes, refresh
status (successful or failed), and average
refresh time.

Logon - Indicates the WAP page login statistics,


including total number of logins, number of
successful logins, login status (successful or
failed), and average login time.

Server - Indicate the server mode.


As the server, the Probe listens to the
specified port, performs the related
operations according to the configuration
after receiving a connection request or data
from the client, and displays the network
performance counter.

Client - Indicates the client mode.


As the client, the Probe sends TCP or UDP
packets to the specified server in a period
according to the configuration.

Session App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate at the uplink
Throughput UL application layer during the whole session.
For details about the session process, see
FTP service process.
NOTE
The UE IEs App.Throughput UL and Session
App Throughput UL are different.
App.Throughput UL is filtered within the time
ranging from Datatransferstart to
DatatransferEnd/Session End or Session Drop,
whereas Session App Throughput UL is the
average rate at the uplink application layer during
the whole session, including the Session Drop and
Session Error events that occur during the
session.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 440


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Session App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate at the downlink
Throughput DL application layer during the whole session.
For details about the session process, see
FTP service process.
NOTE
The UE IEs App.Throughput DL and Session
App Throughput DL are different.
App.Throughput DL is filtered within the time
ranging from Datatransferstart to
DatatransferEnd/Session End or Session Drop,
whereas Session App Throughput DL is the
average rate at the uplink application layer during
the whole session, including the Session Drop and
Session Error events that occur during the
session.

Video Streaming - Indicates the statistical information about


streaming services, including the start time,
end time, number of pauses, transmission
rate, comment on videos, and result.

PBM - Indicates the statistical information about


PBM, including the start time, end time,
server IP address, file size, average,
maximum, and minimum rate, type, and
result.

CS Analysis

Voice Call - Indicates the statistical information about


voice calls, including the start time, end
time, number of events and signaling
messages, call type, and result.
Right-click Voice Call and choose Add
Message/Event from the shortcut menu. In
the displayed window, select a message or
event to be displayed.

HTTP DL MODE l Disconnected Indicates the mode for disconnecting the


by Time active data connection.
l Disconnected
by Size

HTTP DL MODE Obtained according The parameter value is Valid time or Valid
VALUE to HTTP DL Size according to HTTP DL MODE value
MODE types.

HTTP UL MODE l Disconnected Indicates the mode for disconnecting the


by Time active data connection.
l Disconnected
by Size

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 441


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HTTP UL MODE Obtained according The parameter value is Valid time or Valid
VALUE to HTTP UL Size according to HTTP UL MODE value
MODE types.

PBMThroughputUL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink PBM throughput rate.

PBMThroughputDL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink PBM throughput rate.

21.1.2 Description of GSM MS IEs


This section describes the GSM MS IEs. You can refer to this section when setting or viewing
GSM IEs on the Assistant.

IE Name Range/Unit Description

GPRS

Current CS Value range: 1 to 4 Indicates the coding scheme currently used on


DL the downlink.

Current CS Value range: 1 to 4 Indicates the coding scheme currently used on


UL the uplink.

Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the modulation coding scheme (MCS)
DL currently used on the downlink.

Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the MCS currently used on the uplink.
UL

Coding Value range: Indicates the coding scheme used on the


Scheme DL l CS1 to CS4. downlink.
l MCS1 to MCS9. This IE also indicates the coding scheme that is
mostly used on the downlink within a period of
500 ms.

Coding Value range: Indicates the coding scheme used on the uplink.
Scheme UL l CS1 to CS4. This IE also indicates the coding scheme that is
l MCS1 to MCS9. mostly used on the uplink within a period of
500 ms.

EGPRS BEP Value range: 0 to 31 Indicates the variation coefficient of the BEP.
Cv

EGPRS BER Value range: 0 to 7 Indicates the average value of Bit Error
Mean Probability (BEP).

LLC Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the uplink retransmission rate at the
Retransmissio (unit: %) logical link control (LLC) layer.
n UL

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 442


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

LLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) downlink at the LLC layer.
DL

LLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the uplink
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) at the LLC layer.
UL

Number of - Indicates the timeslots used on the downlink.


Timeslot DL

Number of - Indicates the timeslots used on the uplink.


Timeslot UL

RAC Value range: 0 to Indicates the routing area code (RAC).


65535

RLC BLER Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the downlink block error rate (BLER)
DL (unit: %) at the Radio Link Control (RLC) layer.

RLC Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the uplink retransmission rate at the
Retransmissio (unit: %) RLC layer.
n UL

RLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) downlink at the RLC layer.
DL

RLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the uplink
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) at the RLC layer.
UL

SNDCP Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) downlink at the Subnetwork Dependent
DL Convergence Protocol (SNDCP) layer.

SNDCP Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the uplink
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) at the SNDCP layer.
UL

Tx Power PS Value range: -64 to 63. Indicates the transmit power in the PS domain.
l GSM850: 5 dBm to This IE is valid only in dedicated mode.
39 dBm
l GSM900: 5 dBm to
39 dBm
l DCS1800: 0 dBm
to 36 dBm
l PCS 1900: 0 dBm
to 33 dBm

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 443


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

MAC Mode l Null Indicates the MAC mode.


l Transfer
l Idle

Access Burst l 8-bit format Indicates the access sequence.


l 11-bit format

CTR ACK - Indicates the CTR ACK mode.


Mode

GSM

BCCH along Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the base transceiver station identity
with BSIC (7, 7) code (BSIC) corresponding to the ARFCNs of
the broadcast control channel.

BER Full Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the bit error rate (Full value).
(unit: %) BER Full = Number of error bits (Full value)/
Total number of bits (Full value) x 100%.

BER Sub Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the bit error rate (Sub value).
(unit: %) BER Sub = Number of error bits (Sub value)/
Total number of bits (Sub value) x 100%.

BSIC Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the identity code of a base transceiver
(7, 7) station.

C/A +1 Value range: -100 to Indicates the inter-frequency carrier-to-


+100 (unit: dB) interference ratio (CIR).
C/A +1 = Received signal strength at the
serving frequency - Received signal strength at
the adjacent frequency (+200 kHz).

C/A -1 Value range: -100 to Indicates the inter-frequency CIR.


+100 (unit: dB) C/A -1 = Received signal strength at the serving
frequency - Received signal strength at the
adjacent frequency (-200 kHz).

C/A +2 Value range: -100 to Indicates the inter-frequency CIR.


+100 (unit: dB) C/A +2 = Received signal strength at the
serving frequency - Received signal strength at
the adjacent frequency (+400 kHz).

Channel Type - Indicates the channel type used by the vocoder.

C/A -2 Value range: -100 to Indicates the inter-frequency CIR.


+100 (unit: dB) C/A -2 = Received signal strength at the serving
frequency - Received signal strength at the
adjacent frequency (-400 kHz).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 444


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

CGI - Indicates the cell global identity, consisting of


the mobile country code (MCC), mobile
network code (MNC), location area code
(LAC), and cell ID.

C/I Average Unit: dB Indicates the average value of the CIR.

C/I Best Value range: -30 to Indicates the best C/I, the ARFCN with the best
+35 (unit: dB) C/I, and the received signal strength of the
ARFCN with the best C/I.

C/I Worst Value range: -30 to Indicates the worst C/I, the ARFCN with the
+35 (unit: dB) worst C/I, and the received signal strength of
the ARFCN with the worst C/I.

C Value Value range: 0 to 63 Indicates the normalized signal value received


(unit: dBm) by the MS.

FER Full Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the frame error rate (Full value).
(unit: %) FER Full = Number of error frames (Full
value)/Total number of frames (Full value) x
100%.

FER Sub Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the frame error rate (Sub value).
(unit: %) FER Sub = Number of error frames (Sub
value)/Total number of frames (Sub value) x
100%.

Hopping List - Indicates the ARFCNs of the channels in the


hopping frequency list, for example, 1, 10, 19,
and 28.

HSN Value range: 0 to 63 Indicates the hopping sequence number. The


hopping sequence number indicates which
hopping frequency list is being used.

LAC Value range: 0 to Indicates the location area code of a serving


65535 cell.

MAIO Value range: 0 to 63 Indicates the mobile allocation index offset. The
mobile allocation index offset indicates the
position from which the frequency hopping
starts in the hopping frequency list. This IE is
valid only when the frequency hopping is used.

MCC - Indicates the mobile country code of a serving


cell.

MNC - Indicates the mobile network code of a serving


cell, which is a two-digit number or a three-
digit number.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 445


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

Mode - The following working modes are provided:


l 1: No service
l 2: Idle mode
l 3: Dedicated mode
l 4: Limited service mode
l 5: Scan mode
l 6: Packet mode
l 7: Packet Idle mode

Neighbor Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the ARFCNs of the broadcast control
BCCH channel (BCCH) of a neighboring cell.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124
l DCS1800: 512 to 885
l PCS1900: 512 to 815

Neighbor Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the identity code of a base station of a
BSIC (7, 7) neighboring cell.

Neighbor C1 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell selection criterion of a


+127 (unit: dB) neighboring cell. This IE is valid only in idle
mode.

Neighbor C2 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell reselection criterion of a


+127 (unit: dB) neighboring cell. This IE is valid only in idle
mode.

Neighbor C31 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell selection criterion of a GPRS
+127 (unit: dB) neighboring cell. This IE is valid only in packet
mode.

Neighbor C32 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell reselection criterion of a
+127 (unit: dB) GPRS neighboring cell. This IE is valid only in
packet mode.

Neighbor Value range: -110 to Indicate the RX level of a neighboring cell.


RxLev -47 (unit: dBm)

Power Control Value range: 0 to 31 Indicates the transmit power level scheduled by
Level the base station. This IE is valid only in
dedicated mode.

Radio Link Value range: 0 to 64 Indicates the current value of the radio link
Timeout timeout counter.
Current

Radio Link Value range: 4 to 64 Indicates the maximum value of the radio link
Timeout Max timeout counter. This IE is valid only in
dedicated mode.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 446


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level (Full value) in the idle
Full -47 (unit: dBm) state.

RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level in the idle state.
Idle -47 (unit: dBm)

RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level in the service state or the
(Idle+Sub) -47 (unit: dBm) idle state.

RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level (Sub value) in the service
Sub -47 (unit: dBm) state.

RxLev Full Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength (Full
-47 (unit: dBm) value).

RxLev Idle Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength of the
-47 (unit: dBm) serving cell in the idle state.

RxLev (Idle Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength (Sub
+Sub) -47 (unit: dBm) value) or the received signal strength in the idle
state.

RxLev Sub Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength (Sub
-47 (unit: dBm) value).

RxQual Full Value range: -0 to 7 Indicates the received signal quality (Full
(unit: dBm) value).

RxQual Sub Value range: -0 to 7 Indicates the received signal quality (Sub
(unit: dBm) value).

ServBCCH Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the ARFCNs of the broadcast control
channel (BCCH) of a serving cell.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124
l DCS1800: 512 to 885
l PCS1900: 512 to 815

ServBSIC Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the identity code of a base station of a
(7, 7) serving cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 447


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

ServCell Band - Indicates the frequency band of a serving cell.


The following frequency bands are provided:
l DCS1800
l DCS1900
l GSM1800
l GSM1900
l GSM850
l GSM900
l GSM900E

ServCellID Value range: 0 to Indicates the ID of a serving cell.


65535

ServCell C1 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell selection criterion of a serving
+127 (unit: dB) cell. This IE is valid only in idle mode.

ServCell C2 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell reselection criterion of a


+127 (unit: dB) serving cell. This IE is valid only in idle mode.

ServCell C31 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell selection criterion of a GPRS
+127 (unit: dB) serving cell. This IE is valid only in packet
mode.

ServCell C32 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell reselection criterion of a
+127 (unit: dB) GPRS serving cell. This IE is valid only in
packet mode.

TA Value range: 0 to 63 Indicates the timing advance. This IE is valid


only in dedicated mode.
This parameter is used for compensating the
time delay in the propagation of radio signals,
representing the distance between an MS and
the base station.

TCH ARFCN - Indicates the TCH ARFCN. This IE is valid


only for voice services.
l When the TCH ARFCN is the same as the
BCCH ARFCN, the BCCH ARFCN is
displayed.
l When the TCH ARFCN is different from the
BCCH ARFCN, the TCH ARFCN is
displayed. If the TCH ARFCN is in
frequency hopping (FH) mode, only the
frequency hopping group is displayed.

Total - Indicates the total grids with poor received


RxLevSub signal strength (Sub value).
Bad Grid

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 448


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

Total CI Bad - Indicates the total poor C/I grids.


Grid Poor grids refer to those in which the sampling
points whose C/I is less than or equal to 12 dB
take up 20% or more of the total sampling
points.

TCH Assigned - This IE is valid only for voice services.


on BCCH l When the TCH ARFCN is the same as the
BCCH ARFCN, BCCH is displayed.
l When the TCH ARFCN is different from the
BCCH ARFCN, NoBCCH is displayed.

Tx Power All Value range: 0 to 40 Indicates the combination of Tx Power (CS)


(unit: dBm) and Tx Power (PS).

Tx Power CS Value range: Indicates the transmit power in the PS domain.


l GSM850: 5 dBm to This IE is valid only in dedicated mode.
39 dBm
l GSM900: 5 dBm to
39 dBm
l DCS1800: 0 dBm
to 36 dBm
l PCS1900: 0 dBm
to 33 dBm

Neighbor Cells

BCCH for Nth Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the BCCH value of the Nth strongest
Best in GSM neighboring cell sorted by RxLev.
Neighbor N is a positive integer.
Cells

BSIC for Nth Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the BSIC value of the Nth strongest
Best in (7, 7) GSM neighboring cell sorted by RxLev.
Neighbor N is a positive integer.
Cells

RxLev for Nth Value range: -110 to Indicates the RxLev value of the Nth strongest
Best in -47 (unit: dBm) GSM neighboring cell sorted by RxLev.
Neighbor N is a positive integer.
Cells

Serving and Neighboring Cells

TSC Value range: 0 to 7 Indicates the training sequence.

NCell Count - Indicates the number of neighboring cells.

UE State > NAS

RA Color Value range: 0 to 7 or Indicates the result of a UE random access.


0 x FF.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 449


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

Other Radio Parameters

ACS Value: 0 or 1 Indicates the added parameters for re-selection.

PI - Indicates whether a mobile station uses C2 as a


cell re-selection parameter and whether C2
exists.

Delay

GSM Call Unit: millisecond Indicates the setup delay of an outgoing call or
Setup Time an incoming call on the GSM network.
Delay The value can be obtained by using the
following formula: Call setup delay =
T(GSMCallSetup) - T(GSMCallAttempt).

GSM Attach Unit: millisecond Indicates the interval between the time when the
Time Delay Attach request is sent and the time when the
Attach is successful.
The value can be obtained by using the
following formula: Attach delay = T(Attach
Complete) - T(Attach Request).

GSM Detach Unit: millisecond Indicates the interval between the time when the
Time Delay Detach request is sent and the time when the
Detach is successful.
The value can be obtained by using the
following formula: Detach delay = T(Detach
Complete) - T(Detach Request).

GSM PDP Unit: millisecond Indicates the PDP activation delay on the GSM
Activation network.
Time Delay PDP activation delay = Time when the Activate
PDP Context Accept message is received -
Time when the Activate PDP Context Request
message is sent

Codec Usage

AMR Codec Unit: kbit/s Indicates the voice rate on the uplink.
UL The values are as follows:
l 4.75
l 5.15
l 5.90
l 6.70
l 7.40
l 7.95
l 10.20
l 12.20

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 450


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

AMR Codec Unit: kbit/s Indicates the voice rate on the downlink.
DL The values are as follows:
l 4.75
l 5.15
l 5.90
l 6.70
l 7.40
l 7.95
l 10.20
l 12.20

Codec Mode - Indicates the voice coding scheme on the


DL downlink.
The values are as follows:
l FR
l EFR
l HR
l FAMR
l HAMR

Codec Mode - Indicates the voice coding scheme on the


UL uplink.
The values are as follows:
l FR
l EFR
l HR
l FAMR
l HAMR

EDGE

Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the MCS currently used on the uplink.
UL

Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the MCS currently used on the
DL downlink.

GMSK_CV_B - Indicates the variation coefficient of the GMSK


EP BEP.

8PSK_CV_BE - Indicates the variation coefficient of the 8PSK


P BEP.

GMSK_Mean - Indicates the average GMSK BEP.


_BEP

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 451


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

8PSK_Mean_ - Indicates the average 8PSK BEP.


BEP

EDGE DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the throughput rate on the downlink at


APP the application layer.
Throughput

EDGE UL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the throughput rate on the uplink at


APP the application layer.
Throughput

21.1.3 IEs of the GSM DTI Scanner


This section describes the IEs of the GSM DTI scanner displayed on the Assistant. You can
refer to this section when analyzing the IE data provided by the GSM DTI scanner on the
Assistant.

IE Name Range/Unit Description

Nth Best Range: -141 to Indicates the Nth best receiving level of the M
RxLev_M -47, Unit: dBm frequency band.
Value range of N: 1 to 6.

ARFCN For - Indicates the frequency corresponding to the Nth


Nth Best best receiving level of the M frequency band.
RxLev_M Value range of N: 1 to 6.

BSIC For Nth - Indicates the base station identity code (BSIC)
Best RxLev_M corresponding to the Nth best receiving level of the
M frequency band.
Value range of N: 1 to 6.

C/I For Nth Unit: dB Indicates the C/I corresponding to the Nth best
Best RxLev_M receiving level of the M frequency band.
Value range of N: 1 to 6.

RxLev for - The RxLev value of frequency N is displayed.


ARFCN

1st Best C/I_M Unit: dB Indicates the best C/I of the M frequency band.

ARFCN For Unit: dB Indicates the frequency corresponding to the best


1st Best C/I_M C/I of the M frequency band.

Worst C/I_M Unit: dB Indicates the worst C/I of the M frequency band.

ARFCN For Unit: dB Indicates the frequency corresponding to the worst


Worst C/I_M C/I of the M frequency band.

Average C/I_M Unit: dB Indicates the average C/I of the M frequency band.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 452


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

C/A+1 Range: -100 to Indicates the C/I of the neighboring frequency.


100; unit: dB Formula: RxLev of the current frequency - RxLev
of the neighboring frequency (+200 kHz)

C/A-1 Range: -100 to Indicates the C/I of the neighboring frequency.


100; unit: dB Formula: RxLev of the current frequency - RxLev
of the neighboring frequency (-200 kHz)

C/A+2 Range: -100 to Indicates the C/I of the neighboring frequency.


100; unit: dB Formula: RxLev of the current frequency - RxLev
of the neighboring frequency (+400 kHz)

C/A-2 Range: -100 to Indicates the C/I of the neighboring frequency.


100; unit: dB Formula: RxLev of the current frequency - RxLev
of the neighboring frequency (-400 kHz)

Average RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the average strength of signals in the M-N
on M-N frequency band.

21.1.4 Description of WCDMA UE IEs


This section describes WCDMA UE IEs. You can refer to this section when setting or viewing
WCDMA IEs on the Assistant.

Table 21-1 WCDMA UE IEs


IE Name/IE Set Description

Active Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the active set. For
details, see Table 21-2.

Monitor Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the Monitor Set. For
details, see Table 21-8.

Detected Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the Detected Set.
For details, see Table 21-5.

Ec/Io Max For SC in Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to Ec/Io Max For SC
Active Set in Active Set. For details, see Table 21-17.

RSCP Max For SC Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RSCP Max For SC
in Active Set in Active Set.For details, see Table 21-18.

Ec/Io For SC in All Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to Ec/Io For SC in All
Set Set.For details, see Table 21-19.

RSCP For SC in All Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RSCP For SC in All
Set Set.For details, see Table 21-20.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 453


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name/IE Set Description

RACH and PRACH Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RACH and PRACH.
For details, see Table 21-16.

UE State Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to UE State. For


details, see Table 21-13.

RLC Parameters Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RLC Parameters.
For details, see Table 21-14.

Power Control Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the Power Control.
For details, see Table 21-9.

BLER Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the block error rate
(BLER). For details, see Table 21-3.

UMTS Cell Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to UMTS Cell
Reselection Reselection. For details, see Table 21-12.

AMR Codecs Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to AMR Codecs. For
details, see Table 21-15.

RLC Throughput Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the RLC
Throughput. For details, see Table 21-10.

HSDPA Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the HSDPA. For
details, see Table 21-6.

HSUPA Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the HSUPA. For
details, see Table 21-7.

WCDMA Service Indicates the WCDMA service type, including AMR, VP, and PS.
Type

Whole PP (UE) Indicates an IE that is used to specify the pilot pollution information
about all DT points that meet the conditions for producing pilot
pollution.

PTT Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the PTT. For details,
see Table 21-11.

Table 21-2 Active Set IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Active Set Size Value range: 0 to 6 Indicates the number of active sets.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 454


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth
In Active Set (unit: dB) strongest signal strength within an active
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive integer.

UARFCN DL for Unit: MHz Indicates the downlink UARFCN of the


Nth Best in Active cell with the Nth strongest signal strength
Set within an active set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive integer.

Peak Ec/Io for Nth Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the ratio of the peak Ec/Io of the
Best In Active Set (unit: dB) cell with the Nth strongest signal strength
within an active set.
N is a positive integer.

Peak RSCP for Nth Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the peak received signal code
Best In Active Set (unit: dBm) power (RSCP) of the cell with the Nth
strongest signal strength within an active
set.
N is a positive integer.

RSCP For Nth Best Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the RSCP of the cell with the Nth
In Active Set (unit: dBm) strongest signal strength within an active
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 455


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

SC For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the PSC of the cell with the Nth
Active Set strongest signal strength within an active
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive integer.

CarrierInfo for Nth - Indicates the carrier information of the cell


Best In Active Set with the Nth strongest signal in an active
set.
N is a positive integer.

Active Set - Indicates the downlink frenquency in an


Frequency DL active set.

Cell ID Value range: 0 to Indicates the cell ID.


65535

Total Ec/Io in Unit: dBm Indicates the total Ec/Io of wanted signals
Active Set in the active set.

Total RSCP in Unit: dBm Indicates the total RSCP in the active set.
Active Set

Total RSCP Bad - Indicates the total poor RSCP grids.


Grid Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Total RSCP is less
than or equal to -95 dBm take up 20% or
more of the total sampling points.

Total Cover Not - Indicates the total grids with poor uplink
Balanced Grid and downlink coverage balance.
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Total RSCP plus
Tx power is less than or equal to -85 dBm
take up 80% or less of the total sampling
points.

Total Ec/Io Bad - Indicates the Total poor Ec/Io grids.


Grid Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Ec/Io is less than or
equal to -14 dB take up 10% or more of
the total sampling points.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 456


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Total Pilot Pollution - Indicates the total grids with pilot


Grid pollution.
Sampling points with pilot pollution refer
to those in which the number of cells
whose EC/Io is less than 3 dB lower than
that of the cell with the strongest RSCP
greater than or equal to 3 in the condition
that CPICH RSCP is greater than or equal
to -100 dBm. Grids with pilot pollution
refer to those in which sampling points
with pilot pollution take up 10% or more
of the total sampling points.

Total Good - Indicates the total grids with good


Coverage With coverage and severe interference.
Interference Grid Grids with good coverage and severe
interference refer to those in which the
sampling points whose RSCP is greater
than or equal to -80 dBm and Ec/Io is less
than or equal to -12 dB take up 20% or
more of the total sampling points.

LAI for Nth Best in - Indicates the location area identity (LAI)
Active Set of the cell with the Nth strongest signal in
an active set.
N is a positive integer.

RAI for Nth Best in - Indicates the routing area identity (RAI) of
Active Set the cell with the Nth strongest signal in an
active set.
N is a positive integer.

Table 21-3 BLER IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

BLER for FACH Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on the forward access
(unit: %) channel (FACH).

BLER for RACH Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on the random access
(unit: %) channel (RACH).

BLER for Channel Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on channel N.
N (unit: %) N is an integer ranging from 0 to 32.

BLER for Total Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on all channels.
Channel (unit: %)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 457


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-4 Delay IE


IE Name Value Description
Range/
Unit

Access CS Incoming Call Unit: Indicates the setup delay of a


Setup Delay Time millisecond CS incoming call.
(VP/AMR) Setup delay of a CS incoming
call = Time of the alerting for
the incoming call - Time
when the Paging Type1 or
Paging Type2 message is
received for the first time

CS Outgoing Call Unit: Indicates the setup delay of a


Setup Delay Time millisecond CS outgoing call.
(VP/AMR) Setup delay of a CS outgoing
call = Time of the alerting for
the outgoing call - Time when
the RRC Connection Request
message is sent for the first
time

PS Service Setup Unit: Indicates the setup delay of


Delay Time millisecond the PS service.
Setup delay of the PS service
= Time when the Activate
PDP Context Accept message
is received - Time when the
RRC Connection Request
message is sent for the first
time

Attach Delay Time Unit: Indicates the interval between


millisecond the time when the Attach
request is sent and the time
when the Attach is successful.

Detach Delay Time Unit: Indicates the interval between


millisecond the time when the Detach
request is sent and the time
when the Detach is
successful.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 458


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/
Unit

PDP Activation Unit: Indicates the PDP activation


Delay Time millisecond delay on the WCDMA
(PDPReq) network.
PDP activation delay = Time
when the Activate PDP
Context Accept message is
received - Time when the
Activate PDP Context
Request message is sent

PDP Activation Unit: Indicates the RRC setup delay


Delay Time millisecond on the WCDMA network.
(RRCReq)

R99 HO Intra Freq HHO Unit: Indicates the delay of the


Delay Time millisecond intra-frequency hard
handover (HHO).

Inter Freq HHO Unit: Indicates the delay of the


Delay Time millisecond inter-frequency HHO.

Inter-Rat Voice R99 to GSM Unit: Indicates the HHO delay of


HHO Delay Time millisecond the CS service from the R99
network to the GSM network.

Voice GSM to R99 Unit: Indicates the HHO delay of


HHO Delay Time millisecond the CS service from the GSM
network to the R99 network.

PS GSM to R99 Unit: Indicates the HHO delay of


HHO Delay Time millisecond the PS service from the GSM
network to the R99 network.

PS R99 to GSM Unit: Indicates the HHO delay of


HHO Delay Time millisecond the PS service from the R99
network to the GSM network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 459


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/
Unit

Traffic 3G to 2G CS HO Unit: Indicates the system handover


Traffic Delay Time millisecond delay in case that the CS
service is abnormal.
The value can be obtained by
using the following formula:
System handover delay in
case that the CS service is
abnormal = After - Before.
"Before" indicates the time
when the first voice package
is received before the
handover attempt of the CS
service from a 3G network to
a 2G network. "After"
indicates the time when the
first voice package is received
after the CS service is
successfully handed over to a
2G network from a 3G
network.

3G to 2G PS HO Unit: Indicates the system handover


Traffic Delay Time millisecond delay in case that the PS
service is abnormal.
The value can be obtained by
using the following formula:
System handover delay in
case that the PS service is
abnormal = After - Before.
"Before" indicates the time
when the first IP packet is
received before the handover
attempt of the PS service
from a 3G network to a 2G
network. "After" indicates the
time when the first IP packet
is received after the PS
service is successfully handed
over to a 2G network from a
3G network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 460


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/
Unit

AMR E2E Delay Unit: Indicates the delay of the


Time millisecond AMR end-to-end (E2E)
service.
The value can be obtained by
using the following formula:
Delay of the AMR E2E
service = MOC time - MTC
time.
"MOC time" indicates the
time when the first voice
frame is sent after the
outgoing call is responded.
"MTC time" indicates the
time when the first voice
frame is received after the
incoming call is responded.

Other WCDMA Call Unit: Indicates the duration of an


Duration Time millisecond outgoing call or an incoming
call.

Table 21-5 Detected Set IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the Ec/Io of the cell with the
In Detected Set (unit: dB) strongest signal strength within a detected
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.

Peak Ec/Io for Nth Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the peak Ec/Io of a detected set.
Best In Detected Set (unit: dB)

Peak RSCP for Nth Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the peak RSCP of a detected set.
Best In Detected Set (unit: dBm)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 461


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

RSCP For Nth Best Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the RSCP of the cell with the
In Detected Set (unit: dBm) strongest signal strength within a detected
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.

SC For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the PSC of the cell with the
Detected Set strongest signal strength within a detected
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.

UARFCN DL for Unit: MHz Indicates the downlink UARFCN of the


Nth Best in Detected cell with the strongest signal strength
Set within an active set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.

Table 21-6 HSDPA IEs

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HS-SCCH Decoding Success Rate Value range: 0 to Indicates the HS-SCCH decoding
100 (unit: %) success rate.
HS-SCCH Decoding Success
Rate = Number of successful HS-
SCCH decoding/Number of HS-
SCCH decoding attempts x 100%

Serving Cell PSC CarrierN Value range: 0 to Indicates the scrambling code of
511 an HSDPA serving cell carrierN
in Idle, Cell_FACH, Cell_PCH,
or URA_PCH mode.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Serving Cell Ec/Io CarrierN Value range: -40 Indicates the Ec/Io value of the
to 0 (unit: dB) HSDPA serving cell carrierN.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 462


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Serving Cell RSCP CarrierN Value range: Indicates the RSCP of the
-128 to 0 (unit: HSDPA serving cell carrierN.
dBm) N is a nonnegtive integer.

CarrierN or Total
NOTE
N is a nonnegtive integer:
l If the value of N is 0, the primary carrier is used.
l If the value of N is 1, the secondary carrier is used.
l Total indicates all carriers.

DSCH SBLER CarrierN(Delta) Value range: 0 to Indicates the instantaneous


100 (unit: %) scheduled block error rate of
carrierN at the MAC layer.

HS-DSCH Res.BLER Value range: 0 to Indicates the residual block error


CarrierN(Delta) 100 (unit: %) rate on the high speed downlink
shared channel (HS-DSCH) of
carrierN.

HS-DSCH Retrans Rate Value range: 0 to Indicates the instantaneous


CarrierN(Delta) 100 (unit: %) retransmission rate on the high
speed downlink shared channel
(HS-DSCH) of carrierN.

HS-PDSCH Codes CarrierN Value range: 0 to Indicates the average number of


15 codewords of carrierN occupied
by a UE within 200 milliseconds.

MAC Layer Rate CarrierN(Delta) Value range: 0 to Indicates the instantaneous


6114 (unit: transmission rate of carrierN at
kbit/s) the MAC layer, excluding
transmission failures and
retransmissions.

Scheduled Rate CarrierN(Delta) Value range: 0 to Indicates the instantaneous


6114 (unit: scheduled rate of carrierN at the
kbit/s) MAC layer.

SCCH Success Rate Value range: 0 to Indicates the instantaneous


CarrierN(Delta) 100 (unit: %) success rate of the HS-SCCH of
carrierN.

Served Rate CarrierN(Delta) Value range: 0 to Indicates the instantaneous


6114 (unit: transmission rate of carrierN at
kbit/s) the MAC layer, including
transmission failures and
retransmissions.

HS-DSCH CQI

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 463


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

CarrierN or CQI Value range: 0 to Indicates the average value of the


Average 30 channel quality indicator (CQI).
NOTE
N is a Dual Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the CQI of stream 1 in
nonnegtive CQI1 30 dual-stream transmission mode.
integer:
l If the value
Dual Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the CQI of stream 2 in
of N is 0, CQI2 30 dual-stream transmission mode.
the primary
carrier is Single Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the single-stream CQI.
used. CQI 30
l If the value
of N is 1,
the
secondary
carrier is
used.
l Avrg
indicates the
average of
all carriers.

>=Mpct CQI(Mpct) Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of CQIs


NOTE 100 greater than or equal to M.
M is 16 or 26.
Single Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of CQIs
CQI(Mpct) 100 greater than or equal to M in
single-stream transmission mode.

Dual Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of CQIs


CQI1(Mpct) 100 greater than or equal to M of
stream 1 in dual-stream
transmission mode.

Dual Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of CQIs


CQI2(Mpct) 100 greater than or equal to M of
stream 2 in dual-stream
transmission mode.

HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics

CarrierN or Total
NOTE
N is a nonnegtive integer:
l If the value of N is 0, the primary carrier is used.
l If the value of N is 1, the secondary carrier is used.
l Total indicates all carriers.

Ack->Nack/DTX Value range: 0 to Indicates the success rate of the


100 (unit: %) correct frame transmissions.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 464


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Block Fail - Indicates the number of frames


that fail to be transmitted at the
RLC layer. After several failures
at the MAC layer, the RLC
initiates the retransmission.

Block Suc - Indicates the number of frames


successfully transmitted at the
RLC layer. The value of Block
Suc is the same as the value of
SB Suc.

Dual Stream1 SBLER Value range: 0 to Indicates the scheduled block


100 (unit: %) error rate of stream 1 in dual-
stream transmission mode, which
is calculated by the following
formula: NACK1 / (ACK1 +
NACK1) x 100%.

Dual Stream2 SBLER Value range: 0 to Indicates the scheduled block


100 (unit: %) error rate of stream 2 in dual-
stream transmission mode, which
is calculated by the following
formula: NACK2 / (ACK2 +
NACK2) x 100%.

Dup.SB Suc - Indicates the number of


retransmissions of the same TB,
that is, the number of negative
acknowledgement (NACK)
messages to which the NodeB
translates from the ACK
messages provided by the UE
upon successful decoding.

HS-SCCH Less Operation Rate Value range: 0 to Indicates the rate of the transport
100 (unit: %) blocks (TBs) that use the HS-
SCCH Less Operation mode to
total TBs.

Percent 1 TB Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of


100 (unit: %) single-stream transmissions used
in the multiple input multiple
output (MIMO).

Percent 2 TB Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of dual-


100 (unit: %) stream transmission used in the
MIMO.

Percent Single Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of data


100 (unit: %) using single-stream transmission.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 465


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Percent Dual Stream Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of data


100 (unit: %) using dual-stream transmission.

QPSK unit: frame Indicates the number of frames


modulated in Quadrature Phase
Shift Keying (QPSK) mode.

Res.BLER Value range: 0 to Indicates the residual block error


100 (unit: %) rate at the RLC layer, which is
calculated by the following
formula: Number of frames that
fail to be transmitted at the RLC
layer / Total number of
transmissions at the RLC layer x
100%.

Single Stream SBLER Value range: 0 to Indicates the scheduled block


100 (unit: %) error rate of single-stream
transmission, which is calculated
by the following formula:
NACK / (ACK + NACK) x
100%.

16QAM Unit: frame Indicates the number of frames


modulated in 16 Quadrature
Amplitude Modulation (16QAM)
mode.

64QAM Unit frame Indicates the number of frames


modulated in 64QAM mode.

QPSK Ratio Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of


100 (unit: %) frames modulated in Quadrature
Phase Shift Keying (QPSK)
mode.

16QAM Ratio Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of


100 (unit: %) frames modulated in 16
Quadrature Amplitude
Modulation (16QAM) mode.

64QAM Ratio Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of


100 (unit: %) frames modulated in 64QAM
mode.

Modulation - Indicates the modulation mode


which takes the largest proportion
during a period, such as QPSK,
16QAM, and 64QAM modes.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 466


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

SB Fail - Indicates the number of transfer


block (TB) transmission failures
at the MAC layer.

SB Suc - Indicates the number of


successful TB transmissions at
the MAC layer.

SBLER Value range: 0 to Indicates the scheduled block


100 (unit: %) error rate at the MAC layer,
which is calculated by the
following formula: Number of
transmission failures / Total
number of transmissions x 100%.

TB TX Unit: kbit/s Indicates the rate of MIMO in


single-stream transmission mode.

TBs TX Unit: kbit/s Indicates the rate of MIMO in


dual-stream transmission mode.

1st SBLER Value range: 0 to Indicates the scheduled block


100 (unit: %) error rate of the first frame at the
MAC layer.

1 Times - Indicates the number of frames


successfully transmitted at the
MAC layer during the first
transmission.

2 Times - Indicates the number of frames


successfully transmitted in the
second retransmission after the
first transmission fails.

3 Times - Number of frames successfully


transmitted in the third
transmission after the first and the
second transmissions fail.

4 Times - Indicates the number of frames


successfully transmitted in the
fourth transmission after the first
three transmissions fail.

5 Times - Indicates the number of frames


successfully transmitted in the
fifth transmission after the first
four transmissions fail.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 467


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

>= 6 Times - Indicates the number of frames


successfully transmitted in the
sixth or later retransmission after
all the previous transmissions
fail.

Table 21-7 HSUPA IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

CarrierN
NOTE
N is a nonnegtive integer:
l If the value of N is 0, the primary carrier is used.
l If the value of N is 1, the secondary carrier is used.
l Total indicates all carriers.

Average AG Value range: 0 to 31 Indicates the average value of the absolute


grant (AG).

Average SG Value range: 0 to 38 Indicates the average value of the serving


grant (SG).

Buffer Limited Rate Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the limited rate of the buffer.
(unit: %)

Combined RG Hold Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the holding rate of the relative
Rate (unit: %) grant (RG) after the combination.

Combined RG UP Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the increase rate of the RG after
Rate (unit: %) the combination.

Combined RG Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the decrease rate of the RG after
Down Rate (unit: %) the combination.

E-DCH PSC Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the primary scrambling code of
the EDCH.

HSUPA SBLER Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the scheduled block error rate of
(unit: %) the HSUPA.

HSUPA 1st SBLER Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the scheduled block error rate of
(unit: %) the first frame.

Happy Rate Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the happy rate.


(unit: %)

MAC-e PDU Non- Value range: 0 to Indicates the non-discontinuous


DTX Rate 2000 (unit: kbit/s) transmission rate of MAC-e PDUs.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 468


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

MAC-e PDU Served Value range: 0 to Indicates the served rate of MAC-e PDUs.
Rate 2000 (unit: kbit/s)

MAC-e PDU Value range: 0 to Indicates the available rate of MAC-e


Available Rate 2000 (unit: kbit/s) PDUs.

Non-DTX Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the non-discontinuous


Probability (unit: %) transmission probability.

Power Limited Rate Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the power limited rate.
(unit: %)

SG Limited Rate Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the serving grant limited rate.
(unit: %)

SERV CELL Value range: 0 to 5 Indicates the SERV CELL of the HSDPA
serving cell.

Res.Bler Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the residual block error rate at
(unit: %) the RLC layer, which is calculated through
the following formula: Number of frames
that fail to be transmitted at the RLC layer|
Total number of transmissions at the RLC
layer x 100%.

Table 21-8 Monitor Set IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth
In Monitor Set (unit: dB) strongest signal strength within a monitor
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive intager.

Peak Ec/Io for Nth Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the peak Ec/Io of the cell with
Best In Monitor Set (unit: dB) the Nth strongest signal strength within a
monitor set.
N is a positive intager.

Peak RSCP for Nth Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the peak RSCP of the cell with
Best In Monitor Set (unit: dBm) the Nth strongest signal strength within a
monitor set.
N is a positive intager.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 469


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

RSCP For Nth Best Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the RSCP of the cell with the Nth
In Monitor Set (unit: dBm) strongest signal strength within a monitor
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive intager.

UARFCN DL for Unit: MHz Indicates the downlink UARFCN of the


Nth Best in Monitor cell with the Nth strongest signal strength
Set within a monitor set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive intager.

SC For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the PSC of the cell with the Nth
Monitor Set strongest signal strength within a monitor
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive intager.

NCell Position for - Indicates the location of the neighboring


Nth Best in Monitor cell of the cell with the Nth strongest
Set signal within a monitor set.
N is a positive intager.

Table 21-9 Power Control IEs


IE Name Value Range/ Description
Unit

Rx Power Value range: Indicates the received power.


-128 to 0 (unit:
dBm)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 470


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

SIR Value range: -20 Indicates the signal to


to 30 (unit: dB) interference ratio of the dedicated
physical control channel
(DPCCH).

Tx Power Value range: -60 Indicates the transmit power.


to 44 (unit: dBm)

RTWP Value range: Indicates the received total


-120 to -50 (unit: wideband power.
dBm)

PUSCH PUSCH Max Value range: -40 Indicates the maximum transmit
TxPower to 23 (unit: dBm) power of the PUSCH or PUCCH.

PUSCH Path Unit: dB Indicates the path loss of the


Loss PUSCH.

FiType Value: 0 or 1, Indicates the power control


where 0 indicates adjustment type of the PUSCH.
the accumulated
type and 1
indicates the
absolute type.

CurrectFiValue - Indicates the Fi value adjusted


based on TPC value.

SumFiValue - Indicates the accumulation value


of all Fi adjustment values.

RB Number - Indicates the number of resource


blocks.

DynamicNomin - Indicates the dynamic nominal


alPUSCH cell-level physical uplink control
channel (PUCCH) power.

DynamicUEPU - Indicates the dynamic UE-level


SCH PUSCH power.

Alpha Factor Value range: 0 to Indicates the cell-level alpha


7. The values of factor.
0 to 7 correspond
to the alpha
factors 0, 0.4,
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8,
0.9, and 1.

Delta Tfi - -

PUCCH PUCCH Max - Indicates the maximum transmit


TxPower power of the PUSCH or PUCCH.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 471


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

PUCCH Path Unit: dB Indicates the path loss of the


Loss PUSCH.

Format The value range Indicates the format of the


for HUAWEI PUCCH.
B390 is from 0
to 5. The values
0 to 5 correspond
to the formats 1,
1a, 1b, 2, 2a, and
2b. The value
range for
HUAWEI UE
1.0, HUAWEI
UE 1.1, and
HUAWEI UE
2.0 is from 1 to
6. The values 1
to 6 correspond
to the formats 1,
1a, 1b, 2, 2a, and
2b.

PUCCH TPC Value range: 0 to Indicates the TPC adjustment


Value 7 value index of the PUCCH.

CurrectGiValue - Indicates the Gi value adjusted


based on TPC value.

SumGiValue - Indicates the accumulation value


of all Gi adjustment values.

DynamicNomin - Indicates the dynamic nominal


alPUCCH cell-level PUSCH power.

DynamicUEPU - Indicates the dynamic UE-level


CCH PUSCH power.

DeltaFPUCCH - Indicates the value of the delta


F_PUCCH(F).

PUCCHHn - Indicates the PUCCH H(n).

Table 21-10 RLC Throughput IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

RLC PDU Value range: 0 to Indicates the throughput of uplink PDUs at


Throughput UL 14336 (unit: kbit/s) the RLC layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 472


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

RLC SDU Value range: 0 to Indicates the throughput of uplink SDUs at


Throughput UL 14336 (unit: kbit/s) the RLC layer.

RLC PDU Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the retransmission rate of uplink
Retransmission Rate (unit: %) PDUs at the RLC layer.
UL

RLC PDU Value range: 0 to Indicates the throughput of downlink


Throughput DL 14336 (unit: kbit/s) PDUs at the RLC layer.

RLC SDU Value range: 0 to Indicates the throughput of downlink


Throughput DL 14336 (unit: kbit/s) signaling data units (SDUs) at the RLC
layer.

RLC PDU Errors Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the error rate of downlink packet
Rate DL (unit: %) data units (PDUs) at the RLC layer.

Table 21-11 PTT IE

IE Name Range/Unit Description

Initial PTT Latency Unit: ms The delay indicates that


when the call is set up for
the first time, time from that
the calling party presses the
PTT button to initiate the
call to that the UE is
informed to be authorized
with Traffic Handling
Priority (THP) in voice or
vision mode.

In-call PTT Latency Unit: ms The delay indicates that in


an activated Qchat call, time
from that the calling party
presses the PTT button to
request for speaking to that
the UE is informed to be
authorized with THP in
voice or vision mode.

Initial Media Latency Unit: ms The delay indicates that


when the call is initially set
up, time from that the
calling party is informed to
be authorized with THP to
that the called party hears
the voice. For group calls,
the measurement time point
is when the first group
member hears the speaker.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 473


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

In-call Media Latency Unit: ms The delay indicates that in


an activated Qchat call, time
from that the calling party
starts to talk to that the
called party hears the voice.
For group calls, the
measurement time point is
when the first group
member hears the speaker.

PTT HO Latency Unit: ms The delay indicates the


duration of radio link
interruption during the UE
handover to a new cell.
During the interruption, the
UE fails to send and receive
data.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 474


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Range/Unit Description

RRCStateOrig - The RRC can be in one of


the following states when
the PTT initiates a call:
l Disconnected: indicates
that no RRC connection
is available between the
UE and the RNC.
l Connecting: indicates
that an RRC connection
is being set up between
the UE and the RNC.
l CELL_FACH: indicates
that the UE is
transmitting data in the
common FACH or
RACH channel after an
RRC connection is set
up.
l CELL_DCH: indicates
that the UE uses
dedicated channels for
communication after an
RRC connection is set
up.
l CELL_PCH: indicates
that the UE does not
transmit data and only
listens to paging
indication messages on
the downlink PICH
channel after an RRC
connection is set up.
l URA_PCH: indicates
that the UE is receiving
data discontinuously and
only listens to PICH
messages in the
registration area after an
RRC connection is set
up.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 475


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-12 UMTS Cell Reselection IE


IE Name Value Description
Range/Unit

UARFCN Nth Value range: 0 Indicates the UMTS absolute radio


UARFCN in to 16383 frequency channel number (UARFCN) of
Neighboring the Nth strongest cell sorted by RSRP. For
Cells example:
l 1st UARFCN in Neighboring Cells
indicates the UARFCN of the first
strongest cell.
l 7th UARFCN in Neighboring Cells
indicates the UARFCN of the seventh
strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

P-SC Nth PSC in Value range: 0 Indicates the scrambling code of the Nth
Neighboring to 511 strongest cell sorted by RSRP. For
Cells example:
l 1st P-SC in Neighboring Cells indicates
the scrambling code of the first
strongest cell.
l 7th P-SC in Neighboring Cells
indicates the scrambling code of the
seventh strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

Ec/Io Nth Ec/Io in Value range: Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to
Neighboring -40 to 0 (unit: the total power density of the received
Cells dB) bandwidth (Ec/Io) of the Nth strongest cell
sorted by RSRP. For example:
l 1st Ec/Io in Neighboring Cells
indicates the Ec/Io of the first strongest
cell.
l 7th Ec/Io in Neighboring Cells
indicates the Ec/Io of the seventh
strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

RSCP Nth RSCP Value range: Indicates the received signal code power
in -200 to -30 (RSCP) of the Nth strongest cell sorted by
Neighboring (unit: dBm) RSRP. For example:
Cells l 1st RSCP in Neighboring Cells
indicates the RSCP of the first strongest
cell.
l 7th RSCP in Neighboring Cells
indicates the RSCP of the seventh
strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 476


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

ARFCN Nth ARFCN Value range: 0 Indicates the broadcast channel frequency
in to 1023 of the Nth strongest cell sorted by RSSI.
Neighboring l GSM-R For example:
Cells 850: 128 to l 1st ARFCN in Neighboring Cells
251 indicates the ARFCN of the first
l P-GSM strongest cell.
900: 1 to l 3rd ARFCN in Neighboring Cells
124 indicates the ARFCN of the third
l E-GSM strongest cell.
900: 0 to N is a positive integer.
124 and
975 to
1023
l DCS 1800:
512 to 885
l PCS 1900:
512 to 810

BSIC Nth BSIC in Value range: Indicates the base station identity code
Neighboring (0,0) to (7,7) (BSIC) of the Nth strongest cell sorted by
Cells RSSI. For example:
l 1st BSIC in Neighboring Cells
indicates the BSIC of the first strongest
cell.
l 3rd BSIC in Neighboring Cells
indicates the BSIC of the third
strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

RSSI Nth RSSI in Value range: Indicates the received signal strength
Neighboring -120 to 0 indicator (RSSI) of the Nth strongest cell
Cells (unit: dBm) sorted by RSSI. For example:
l 1st RSSI in Neighboring Cells indicates
the RSSI of the first strongest cell.
l 3rd RSSI in Neighboring Cells
indicates the RSSI of the third strongest
cell.
N is a positive integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 477


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-13 UE State


IE Name Value Description
Range/Unit

UE UE - Indicates the UE type.


Information Category

NAS Register - Indicates the registration state.


State

Table 21-14 RLC Parameters


IE Name Value Range/ Description
Unit

RLC UL Mode l AM: RLC AM Indicates the RLC uplink mode.


(Acknowledge
Mode) mode
l UM: RLC UM
(Un-
acknowledge
Mode) mode
l TM: RLC TM
(Transparent
Mode) mode

RLC DL Mode l AM Indicates the RLC downlink mode.


l UM
l TM

Table 21-15 AMR Codecs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Vocoder Mode - Indicates the vocoder mode


on the uplink or downlink,
such as AMR, EFR, FR,
HR or AMR-WB.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 478


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

AMR Frame Rate The values are as follows: Indicates the frame rate on
l 12.2 kbit/s the uplink or downlink when
the value of Vocoder Mode
l 10.2 kbit/s is AMR.
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s

AMR-WB Frame Rate The values are as follows: Indicates the frame rate on
l 6.60 kbit/s the uplink or downlink when
the value of Vocoder Mode
l 8.85 kbit/s is AMR-WB.
l 12.65 kbit/s
l 14.25 kbit/s
l 15.85 kbit/s
l 18.25 kbit/s
l 19.85 kbit/s
l 23.05 kbit/s
l 23.85 kbit/s

Codec Mode - Indicates the codec mode.

Table 21-16 RACH and PRACH


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Sub Channel Mask - Indicates the 12-bit mask of


the available signal.

Table 21-17 Ec/Io Max For SC in Active Set


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io Max For SCN in unit: dB Indicates the coverage chart


Active Set of the scrambling code N for
the strongest cell in an
active set.
NOTE
The strongest cell refers to the
cell with the largest Ec/Io.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 479


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-18 RSCP Max For SC in Active Set


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

RSCP Max For SCN in unit: dBm Indicates the coverage chart
Active Set of the scrambling code N for
the strongest cell in an
active set.
NOTE
The strongest cell refers to the
cell with the largest RSCP.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Table 21-19 Ec/Io For SC in All Set


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io For SCN in All Set unit: dB Indicates the Ec/Io


distribution chart of the
scrambling code N in all
active sets.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Peak Ec/Io For SCN unit: dB Indicates the ratio of the


peak Ec/Io of the scrambling
code N in all sets.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Table 21-20 RSCP For SC in All Set


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

RSCP For SCN in All Set unit: dBm Indicates the RSCP
distribution chart of the
scrambling code N in all
sets.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Peak RSCP For SCN unit: dBm Indicates the peak received
signal code power (RSCP)
of the scrambling code N in
all sets.
N is a nonnegtive integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 480


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

21.1.5 Description of WCDMA Scanner IEs


This section describes the detailed information about the WCDMA Scanner IE window that
is displayed on the Assistant. You can refer to this section when analyzing the data of the
WCDMA scanners (Anritsu, R&S, and PCTEL) by using the Assistant.

IE Set IE Name Description

All Scanner Nth Indicates the UARFCN of the Nth


UARFCN strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

Scanner Nth PSC Indicates the PSC of the Nth strongest


cell.
N is a positive integer.

Scanner Nth RSCP Indicates the coverage chart of the Nth


strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

Scanner Nth Ec/Io Indicates the Ec/Io distribution chart of


the Nth strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.

UARFCN Ec/Io For Nth Best Indicates the Ec/Io of the first N best
Service Cell serving cells among all the drive test
points. Value N is a positive integer.

RSCP For 1st Best Indicates the RSCP of the first N best
Service Cell serving cells among all the drive test
points. Value N is a positive integer.

SC For 1st Best Indicates the SC of the first N best


Service Cell serving cells among all the drive test
points. Value N is a positive integer.

Whole PP(Scanner) Indicates the pilot pollution information


of all the DT points that meet the
conditions for producing the pilot
pollution.

CW RSSI Indicates the received signal strength


indicator (RSSI) of the test ARFCN
during a CW test.

RSSI Indicates the RSSI reported during an


RSSI test.

Ec/Io Max For SC Indicates the Ec/Io distribution chart of


the scrambling codes for the strongest
cell.
NOTE
The strongest cell refers to the cell with the
largest Ec/Io.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 481


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Description

RSCP Max For SC Indicates the coverage chart of the


scrambling codes for the strongest cells.
NOTE
The strongest cell refers to the cell with the
largest RSCP.

Ec/Io For SC Indicates the Ec/Io distribution chart of


the tested scrambling code.

RSCP For SC Indicates the coverage chart of the tested


scrambling code.

Average RSSI on M- Indicates the average strength of signals


N of M-N frequency bands.

21.1.6 Description of CDMA UE IEs


This section describes WCDMA UE IEs. You can refer to this section when setting or viewing
WCDMA IEs on the Assistant.

Table 21-21 WCDMA UE IEs


IE Name/IE Set Description

Active Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the active set. For
details, see Table 21-22.

Candidate Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the candidate set.
For details, see Table 21-23.

Neighbor Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the neighbor set. For
details, see Table 21-24.

Power Control Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the power control.
For details, see Table 21-25.

FER Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the FER. For details,
see Table 21-26.

RLP Throughput Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the RLP throughput.
For details, see Table 21-27.

Table 21-22 Active Set IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Active Set Size Value range: 0 to 6 Indicates the number of active sets.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 482


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
In Active Set (unit: dB) Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth strongest
signal strength within an active set.

PN For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
Active Set PN of the cell with the Nth strongest signal
strength within an active set.

Table 21-23 Candidate Set IEs

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
In Candidate Set Set (unit: dB) Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth strongest
signal strength within an candidate set.

PN For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
Candidate Set PN of the cell with the Nth strongest signal
strength within an candidate set.

Table 21-24 Neighbor Set IEs

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
In Neighbor Set Set (unit: dB) Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth strongest
signal strength within an neighbor set.

PN For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
Neighbor Set PN of the cell with the Nth strongest signal
strength within an neighbor set.

Table 21-25 Power Control IE

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Tx Power Range: -120 to -10. Indicates the received signal power.


Unit: dBm.

Tx adj Range: -127 to -36. Indicates the transmit power.


Unit: dBm.

Rx Power Range: -127 to 128. Indicates the power control value, that is,
Unit: dB. the adjustment step of the transmit
power.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 483


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-26 FER IE

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

FFCH FER Unit: % Indicates the frame error rate on the


forward FCH.

FSCH0 FER Unit: % Indicates the frame error rate on the


forward SCH 0.

FSCH1 FER Unit: % Indicates the frame error rate on the


forward SCH 1.

Table 21-27 PLP Throughput IE

IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Rx Instant Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous throughput


on the downlink.

Tx Instant Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous throughput


on the uplink.

21.1.7 Description of LTE UE IEs


This section describes LTE UE IEs. You can refer to this section when setting or viewing LTE
IEs on the Assistant.

In the windows related to LTE UEs, PCC refers to the primary component carrier, and SCC
refers to the secondary component carrier. Code0 refers to code word 0, and Code1 refers to
code word 1. UL refers to uplink transmission, and DL refers to downlink transmission.

Table 21-28 LTE UE IEs

IE Set Description

Serving and Contains IEs related to Serving and Neighboring. For details,
Neighboring Cells see Table 21-29.

Antenna Measurement Contains IEs related to Antenna Measurement. For details, see
Table 21-30.

Delay Contains IEs related to Delay. For details, see Table 21-31.

Power Contains IEs related to Power. For details, see Table 21-32.

Throughput Contains IEs related to Throughput. For details, see Table


21-33.

CQI Contains IEs related to CQI. For details, see Table 21-34.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 484


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Description

BLER Contains IEs related to BLER. For details, see Table 21-35.

Camp Cell Information Contains IEs related to Camp Cell Information. For details,
see Table 21-36.

Radio Parameter Contains IEs related to Radio Parameter. For details, see
Table 21-37.

UE State Contains IEs related to UE State. For details, see Table 21-38.

MIMO Contains IEs related to MIMO. For details, see Table 21-39.

MCS Contains IEs related to MCS. For details, see Table 21-40.

Iperf Contains IEs related to Iperf. For details, see Table 21-41.

Custom Contains IEs related to Custom. For details, see Table 21-42.

HARQ Contains IEs related to HARQ. For details, see Table 21-43.

PRB Contains IEs related to PRB. For details, see Table 21-44.

Bandwidth Contains IEs related to Bandwidth. For details, see Table


21-45.

Intra RAT Interrupt Contains IEs related to Intra RAT Interrupt Delay. For
Delay details, see Table 21-46.

Inter-RAT Contains IEs related to Inter-RAT Measurements. For details,


Measurements see Table 21-47.

Secondary Cell Contains IEs related to Secondary Cell Information. For


Information details, see Table 21-48.

Interrupt Time Delay Contains IEs related to Interrupt Time Delay. For details, see
Table 21-49.

L3 Messages Contains IEs related to Layer 3 radio resource control (RRC)


and NAS signaling messages in the LTE system.

Cell Reselection Contains IEs related to Cell Reselection Parameter. For


Parameter details, see Table 21-50.

Freq Scanning Contains IEs related to Freq Scanning. For details, see Table
21-51.

Cell Scan Contains IEs related to Cell Scan. For details, see Table 21-52.

VoLTE Parameters Contains IEs related to VoLTE Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-53.

PDSCH Parameters Contains IEs related to PDSCH Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-54.

PHY MAC RLC PDCP Contains IEs related to PHY MAC RLC PDCP RRC NAS
RRC NAS Information Information. For details, see Table 21-55.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 485


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Description

PHY Channel Contains IEs related to PHY Channel Information. For


Information details, see Table 21-56.

eMBMS Parameters Contains IEs related to eMBMS Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-57.

Table 21-29 Serving and Neighboring Cells


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Serving and Indicates the downlink E-UTRA


Neighboring Serving DL Value range: 0 to absolute radio frequency channel
Cells EARFCN 262143 number (EARFCN) of the serving
NOTE cell.
N is a
positive Serving UL Value range: 0 to Indicates the uplink EARFCN of the
integer. EARFCN 262143 serving cell.

Serving DL Indicates the downlink bandwidth of


-
Bandwidth the serving cell.

Serving UL Indicates the uplink bandwidth of the


-
Bandwidth serving cell.

Value range: 0 to Indicates the physical cell identifier


Serving PCI
503 (PCI).

Value range: -145 Indicates the measurement value of


Serving RSRP to -40 (unit: the reference signal received power
dBm) (RSRP).

Indicates the measurement value of


Serving Value range: -40
the reference signal received quality
RSRQ to 0 (unit: dB)
(RSRQ).

Value range: -140 Indicates the measurement value of


Serving RSSI to -10 (unit: the received signal strength indicator
dBm) (RSSI).

Serving Cell Value range: 0 to Indicates the Cell ID of the serving


ID 255 cell.

Serving Value range: 0 to Indicates the eNodeB ID of the


eNodeB ID 1048575 serving cell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 486


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the PCI value of the Nth


strongest LTE neighboring cell sorted
Nth PCI in by RSRP.
Neighboring - For example, First PCI in
Cells Neighboring Cells indicates the PCI
value of the first strongest LTE
neighboring cell sorted by RSRP.

Indicates the RSRP value of the Nth


strongest LTE neighboring cell sorted
Nth RSRP in by RSRP.
Neighboring - For example, First RSRP in
Cells Neighboring Cells indicates the
RSRP value of the first strongest LTE
neighboring cell sorted by RSRP.

Indicates the RSRQ value of the Nth


strongest LTE neighboring cell sorted
by RSRP.
Nth RSRQ in
Neighboring - For example, Nth RSRQ in
Cells Neighboring Cells indicates the
RSRQ value of the first strongest
LTE neighboring cell sorted by
RSRP.

Indicates the RSSI value of the Nth


strongest LTE neighboring cell sorted
Nth RSSI in by RSRP.
Neighboring - For example, First RSSI in
Cells Neighboring Cells indicates the
RSSI value of the first strongest LTE
neighboring cell sorted by RSRP.

Indicates the EARFCN of the Nth


strongest LTE neighboring cell sorted
Nth EARFCN by RSRP.
in Value Range: 0
Neighboring to 262143 For example, First EARFCN in
Cells Neighboring Cells indicates the
EARFCN of the first strongest LTE
neighboring cell sorted by RSRP.

Indicates the PCI of the Nth strongest


detected cell sorted by RSRP.
Nth PCI in For example, First PCI in Detected
-
Detected Cells Cells indicates the PCI of the first
strongest detected cell sorted by
RSRP.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 487


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the RSRP of the Nth


strongest detected cell sorted by
RSRP.
Nth RSRP in
- For example, First RSRP in
Detected Cells
Detected Cells indicates the RSRP of
the first strongest detected cell sorted
by RSRP.

Indicates the RSRQ of the Nth


strongest detected cell sorted by
RSRP.
Nth RSRQ in
- For example, First RSRQ in
Detected Cells
Detected Cells indicates the RSRQ
of the first strongest detected cell
sorted by RSRP.

Indicates the RSSI of the Nth


strongest detected cell sorted by
RSRP.
Nth RSSI in
- For example, First RSSI in Detected
Detected Cells
Cells indicates the RSSI of the first
strongest detected cell sorted by
RSRP.

Indicates the EARFCN of the Nth


strongest detected cell sorted by
Nth EARFCN RSRP.
Value Range: 0
in Detected For example, First EARFCN in
to 262143
Cells Detected Cells indicates the
EARFCN of the first strongest
detected cell sorted by RSRP.

Enables the system to display the


Value range: -140
RSRP of serving cells, neighboring
RSRP for PCI to -40 (unit:
cells, and detected sets by PCI (PCI0
dBm)
to PCI513).

Enables the system to display the


Value range: -40 RSRQ of serving cells, neighboring
RSRQ for PCI
to 0 (unit: dB) cells, and detected sets by PCI (PCI0
to PCI513).

Enables the system to display the


Value range: -140
RSSI of serving cells, neighboring
RSSI for PCI to -10 (unit:
cells, and detected sets by PCI (PCI0
dBm)
to PCI513).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 488


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Enables the system to display the


signal to interference plus noise ratio
Value range: -20
SINR for PCI (SINR) of serving cells, neighboring
to 50 (unit: dB)
cells, and detected sets by PCI (PCI0
to PCI513).

Indicates the value of SINR.


NOTE
If the test data of Qualcomm terminals is
analyzed, the average value of SINR
Antenna0 and SINR Antenna1 is
Value range: -20 displayed in SINR.
SINR
to 50 (unit: dB) If the test data of TUE or HiSilicon
terminals is analyzed, the average SINR
is displayed in SINR.
For details about the Qualcomm,
HiSilicon and TUE terminals, see PA
Recommended Terminal List.

Value range: -145


Serving RSRP Displays RSRP of the serving cells
to -40 (unit:
for PCI by PCI group (PCI0 to PCI513).
dBm)

Serving Value range: -40 Displays RSRQ of the serving cells


RSRQ for PCI to 0 (unit: dB) by PCI group (PCI0 to PCI513).

Value range: -140


Serving RSSI Displays RSSI of serving cells by
to -10 (unit:
for PCI PCI group (PCI0 to PCI513).
dBm)

Serving PCC Value range: -20 Displays SINR of serving cells by


SINR for PCI to 50 (unit: dB) PCI group (PCI0 to PCI513).

Neighboring Indicates the number of neighboring


-
Cells Count cells.

Detected Cells Indicates the number of detected


-
Count cells.

Value range: 0 to Indicates the path loss of a serving


Pathloss
150 (unit: dB) cell.

Value: FDD or
Duplex Mode Indicates the duplex mode.
TDD

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 489


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-30 Antenna Measurement


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Antenna None
Value range: -140 Indicates the RSRP measurement
Measurement RSRPMeas
to -40 (unit: value of the CRS for antenna N of
NOTE CRS RSRP
dBm) non-RSRP measurement set.
N is zero or a AntennaN
positive
integer. None
Value range: -140 Indicates the RSRP measurement
RSRPMeas
to -40 (unit: value of the CRS for antenna N of
DRS RSRP
dBm) non-RSRP measurement set.
AntennaN

None
RSRPMeas Indicates the RSRP measurement
Value range: -140
CRS DRS value of the CRS on the RB of the
to -40 (unit:
Used RB DRS for antenna N of non-RSRP
dBm)
RSRP measurement set.
AntennaN

UE Number Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of transmit


of Tx Antenna 2 antennas of a UE.

UE Number Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of receiving


of Rx Antenna 2 antennas of a UE.

Value range: -140


CRS RSRP Indicates the RSRP measurement
to -40 (unit:
Antenna N value of the CRS for antenna N.
dBm)

Value range: -140 Indicates the measurement value of


DRS RSRP
to -40 (unit: RSRP for the dedicated reference
Antenna N
dBm) signal (DRS) of antenna N.

CRS DRS
Value range: -140 Indicates the measurement value of
Used RB
to -40 (unit: RSRP for CRS on the RB of the DRS
RSRP
dBm) for antenna N.
Antenna 0

RSRQ Value range: -40 Indicates the measurement value of


Antenna N to 0 (unit: dB) RSRQ for antenna N.

Value range: -140 Indicates the measurement value of


RSSI Antenna
to -10 (unit: the reference received signal strength
N
dBm) indicator of antenna N.

SINR Value range: -20 Indicates the measurement value of


Antenna N to 50 (unit: dB) the SINR of antenna N.

Value range: -20


Max SINR Indicates the maximum of the SINR.
to 50 (unit: dB)

Value range: -20


Min SINR Indicates the minimum of the SINR.
to 50 (unit: dB)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 490


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

RSRP
Indicates an RSRP measurement
measSubfram -
subframe set.
ePattern

None RSRP
Indicates a non-RSRP measurement
measSubfram -
subframe set.
ePattern

Table 21-31 Delay


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Delay Indicates the delay of the evolved


packet system (EPS) service request.
The delay of the EPS service request
indicates the interval between the
ActiveRequest event and the
ActiveSuc event.
Active Request indicates an RRC
LTE Service request event. The RRC request
request (EPS) Unit: ms cause values are as follows:
Time Delay
l mt-Access
l mo-Data
l highpriorityaccess
ActiveSuc indicates the event that the
E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer (E-
RAB) is successfully set up for the
first time.

Indicates the E-RAB setup delay.


LTE ERAB The E-RAB setup delay indicates the
Setup Time Unit: ms interval between the
Delay ERABSetupAttempt event and the
ERABSetupSuc event.

Indicates the RRC setup delay.


LTE RRC
Setup Time Unit: ms The RRC setup delay indicates the
Delay interval between the RRCSetupReq
event and the RRCSetupSuc event.

Indicates the session setup delay.


LTE Session
Setup Time The session setup delay indicates the
Unit: ms interval between the Session Start
Delay (on
SessionStart) event and the Data Transfer Start
event.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 491


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the intra-frequency


LTE Intra handover delay.
Frequency The intra-frequency handover delay
Unit: ms
HO Time indicates the interval between the
Delay IntraFreqHOAttempt event and the
IntraFreqHOSuc event.

Indicates the inter-frequency


LTE Inter handover delay.
Frequency The inter-frequency handover delay
Unit: ms
HO Time indicates the interval between the
Delay InterFreqHOAttempt event and the
InterFreqHOSuc event.

LTE MAC Indicates the uplink interruption


HO Interrupt Unit: ms delay due to a handover at the MAC
UL Delay layer.

LTE MAC Indicates the downlink interruption


HO Interrupt Unit: ms delay due to a handover at the MAC
DL Delay layer.

LTE RLC HO Indicates the uplink interruption


Interrupt UL Unit: ms delay due to a handover at the RLC
Delay layer.

LTE RLC HO Indicates the downlink interruption


Interrupt DL Unit: ms delay due to a handover at the RLC
Delay layer.

LTE PDCP Indicates the uplink interruption


HO Interrupt Unit: ms delay due to a handover at the PDCP
UL Delay layer.

LTE PDCP Indicates the downlink interruption


HO Interrupt Unit: ms delay due to a handover at the PDCP
DL Delay layer.

4G to 2G Indicates the LTE-to-GSM handover


Inter-RAT HO Unit: ms delay at the control plane.
Time Delay

4G to 3G Indicates the LTE-to-UMTS


Inter-RAT HO Unit: ms handover delay at the control plane.
Time Delay

Indicates the delay of MOC control


LTE MOC plane.
Access The delay of MOC control plane
Unit: ms
Delay(control indicates the interval between
plane) RRCConnectionReconfiguration-
Complete and Paging.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 492


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the delay of MTC control


plane.
LTE MTC
Access The delay of MTC control plane
Unit: ms indicates the interval between
Delay(control
plane) RRCConnectionReconfiguration-
Complete and RRCConnectionRe-
quest.

VoLTE Fast
Return LTE Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE fast return delay.
Delay

IMS Register
Unit: ms Indicates the IMS registration delay.
Delay

LTE SCC1
Activated Unit: ms Indicates the SCC activation delay.
Delay

LTE SCC1
Deactivated Unit: ms Indicates the SCC deactivation delay.
Delay

Indicates the duration from the time


Invite to
when the Invite message is received
100trying Unit: ms
to the time when the 100trying
Delay(MOC)
message is received (MOC).

Indicates the duration from the time


100trying to when the 100trying message is
183session Unit: ms received to the time when the
Delay(MOC) 183session message is received
(MOC).

Indicates the duration from the time


183session to
when the 183session message is
update Unit: ms
received to the time when the update
Delay(MOC)
message is received (MOC).

Indicates the duration from the time


update to
when the update message is received
180ringing Unit: ms
to the time when the 180ringing
Delay(MOC)
message is received (MOC).

Indicates the duration from the time


100trying to when the 100trying message is
180ringing Unit: ms received to the time when the
Delay(MOC) 180ringing message is received
(MOC).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 493


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the duration from the time


183session to when the 183session message is
180ringing Unit: ms received to the time when the
Delay(MOC) 180ringing message is received
(MOC).

Indicates the duration from the time


RRCSetupSuc
when the RRC connection is set up to
to 100trying Unit: ms
the time when the 100trying message
Delay(MOC)
is received (MOC).

Indicates the duration from the time


Invite to
when the invite message is received
183session Unit: ms
to the time when the 183 message is
Delay(MTC)
received.

Indicates the duration from the time


RRCSetupSuc
when the RRC connection is set up to
to Invite Unit: ms
the time when the INVITE message
Delay(MTC)
is received (MTC).

LTEpagingrec Indicates the duration from the time


eived to when the LTEpagingreceived
VolteCallAtte Unit: ms message is received to the time when
mpt the VolteCallAttempt message is
Delay(MTC) received (MTC).

100trying to Indicates the duration from the time


ERABEstablis when the 100trying message is
hAttempt(QCI Unit: ms received to the time when the
=1) ERABEstablishAttempt(QCI=1)
Delay(MOC) message is received.

183 session to
Indicates the duration from the time
ERABEstablis
when the 183 message is received to
hAttempt(QCI Unit: ms
the time when the ERABEstablishAt-
=1)
tempt(QCI=1) message is received.
Delay(MTC)

183 session to Indicates the duration from the time


ERABEstablis when the 183 message is received to
hAttempt(QCI Unit: ms the time when the ERABEstablishAt-
=1) tempt(QCI=1) message is received
Delay(MOC) (MOC).

VolteCallAtte Indicates the duration from the time


mpt to when the VolteCallAttempt(MOC)
LTERRCSetu Unit: ms message is received to the time when
pSuc the LTERRCSetupSuc message is
Delay(MOC) received.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 494


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

LTEpagingrec Indicates the duration from the time


eived to when the LTEpagingreceived
LTERRCSetu Unit: ms message is received to the time when
pSuc the LTERRCSetupSuc message is
Delay(MTC) received.

Table 21-32 Power


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Power Indicates the transmit power of the


PUSCH Value range: -50
physical uplink shared channel
Power to 23 (unit: dBm)
(PUSCH).

Indicates the transmit power of the


PUCCH Value range: -50
physical uplink control channel
Power to 23 (unit: dBm)
(PUCCH).

Value range: -140 Indicates the transmit power of the


P-SCH Power to -40 (unit: primary synchronization channel.
dBm)

Value range: -140 Indicates the transmit power of the


S-SCH Power to -40 (unit: secondary synchronization channel.
dBm)

Value range: -50 Indicates the automatic gain control


AGC Power
to 30 (unit: dBm) (AGC) transmit power.

Indicates the transmit power of the


Value range: -50
SRS Power channel to send sounding reference
to 30 (unit: dBm)
signals (SRSs).

Value range: -50 Indicates the transmit power of the


RACH Power
to 30 (unit: dBm) random access channel (RACH).

Power Value range: -23 Indicates the UE transmit power


Headroom to 100 (unit: dB) headroom of the PCC or SCC.

SRS RB
Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the resource block.
Number

Power PUSCH Max Value range: -50 Indicates the maximum transmit
Control > TxPower to 30 (unit: dBm) power of the PUSCH.
PUSCH
PUSCH Path Unit: dB Indicates the path loss of the PUSCH.
Loss

FiType l Accumulated Indicates the power control


l Absolute adjustment type of the PUSCH.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 495


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

PUSCH TPC Value range: 0 to Indicates the PUSCH TPC


Value 7 adjustment value index that is used to
calculate CurrGiValue.

CurrectFiValu - Indicates the Fi value adjusted based


e on TPC value.

SumFiValue - Indicates the accumulation value of


all Fi adjustment values.

RB Number - Indicates the number of RBs.

UL RB Num - Indicates the number of uplink RBs.

UL RB Start - Indicates the number of uplink initial


RBs.

DynamicNom - Indicates the dynamic nominal cell-


inalPUSCH level PUSCH power.

DynamicUEP - Indicates the dynamic UE-level


USCH PUSCH power.

Alpha Factor Value range: 0 to Indicates the cell-level alpha factor.


7. The values of
0 to 7 correspond
to the alpha
factors 0, 0.4,
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8,
0.9, and 1.

Delta Tfi - -

Cell index - Indicates the index of a cell.

PUSCH Value range: -50 Indicates the maximum transmit


TxPower Max to 30 (unit: dBm) power of the PUSCH.

PUSCH Value range: -50 Indicates the average transmit power


TxPower Avg to 30 (unit: dBm) of the PUSCH within one second.

PUSCH Unit: % Indicates the percentage of TX power


TxPower of the PUSCH that is greater than 18
Occupancy(>1 dBm within one second.
8dBm)

Power PUCCH Path Unit: dB Indicates the path loss of the


Control > Loss PUCCH.
PUCCH
Format Value: 1, 1a, 1b, Indicates the format of the PUCCH.
2, 2a, 2b,1bCS,
3;

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 496


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

PUCCH TPC Value range: 0 to Indicates the TPC adjustment value


Value 7 index of the PUCCH.

CurrectGiValu - Indicates the Gi value adjusted based


e on TPC value.

SumGiValue - Indicates the accumulation value of


all Gi adjustment values.

DynamicNom - Indicates the dynamic nominal cell-


inalPUCCH level PUCCH power.

DynamicUEP - Indicates the dynamic UE-level


UCCH PUCCH power.

DeltaFPUCC - Indicates the value of the delta


H F_PUCCH(F).

PUCCHHn - Indicates the PUCCH H(n).

PUCCH Value range: -50 Indicates the maximum transmit


TxPower Max to 30 (unit: dBm) power of the PUCCH.

PUCCH Value range: -50 Indicates the average transmit power


TxPower Avg to 30 (unit: dBm) of the PUCCH within one second.

PUCCH Unit: % Indicates the percentage of TX power


TxPower of the PUCCH that is greater than 18
Occupancy(>1 dBm within one second.
8dBm)

Power SRS TxPower Unit: % Indicates the percentage of TX power


Control > Occupancy(>1 of the PUCCH that is greater than 18
SRS 8dBm) dBm within one second.

SRS TxPower Value range: -50 Indicates the average transmit power
Avg to 30 (unit: dBm) of the SRS within one second.

SRS TxPower Value range: -50 Indicates the maximum transmit


Max to 30 (unit: dBm) power of the SRS.

Table 21-33 Throughput


IE Set Value
IE Name Description
Range/Unit

Throughpu Indicates the downlink


PCC PHY
t PHY throughput of the anchor
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
Throughput carrier at the Medium Access
DL
Control (MAC) layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 497


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value
IE Name Description
Range/Unit

Indicates the downlink


SCCM throughput of the
PHY supplementary carrier M at the
Unit: kbit/s Medium Access Control
Throughput
DL (MAC) layer..
The value of M is 1 to 4.

PCC Indicates the throughput of


CodeN code word N of the anchor
Unit: kbit/s carrier.
PHY
Throughput The value of N is 0 to 1.

Indicates the uplink throughput


PCC PHY
of the anchor carrier at the
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
Medium Access Control
UL
(MAC) layer.

Indicates the uplink throughput


SCCM of the supplementary carrier M
PHY at the Medium Access Control
Unit: kbit/s
Throughput (MAC) layer..
UL
The value of M is 1 to 4.

Indicates the downlink


PCC MAC
throughput of the anchor
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
carrier at the Medium Access
DL
Control (MAC) layer

Indicates the downlink


SCCM throughput of the
MAC supplementary carrier M at the
Unit: kbit/s Medium Access Control
Throughput
DL (MAC) layer..
MAC The value of M is 1 to 4.
Throughput
Indicates the uplink throughput
PCC MAC
of the anchor carrier at the
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
Medium Access Control
UL
(MAC) layer

Indicates the uplink throughput


SCCM of the supplementary carrier M
MAC at the Medium Access Control
Unit: kbit/s
Throughput (MAC) layer.
UL
The value of M is 1 to 4.

LTE RLC
RLC Indicates the downlink
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
Throughput throughput at the RLC layer.
DL

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 498


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value
IE Name Description
Range/Unit

LTE RLC
Indicates the uplink throughput
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
at the RLC layer.
UL

PDCP
Indicates the downlink
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
throughput at the PDCP layer.
PDCP DL
Throughput PDCP
Indicates the uplink throughput
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
at the PDCP layer.
UL

PCC Indicates the throughput of the


PDSCH Unit: kbit/s anchor carrier on the PDSCH
throughput channel.

SCC1 Indicates the throughput of the


PDSCH Unit: kbit/s supplementary carrier1 on the
throughput PDSCH channel.

PCC Indicates the throughput of


CodeN code word N of the anchor
Unit: kbit/s carrier on the PDSCH channel.
PDSCH
throughput The value of N is 0 to 1.

Indicates the throughput of


SCCM code word N of the the
CodeN supplementary carrier M on the
Unit: kbit/s PDSCH channel.
PDSCH
throughput l The value of M is 1 to 2.
PDSCH l The value of N is 0 to 1.
Throughput
PCC Indicates the throughput on the
PDSCH Unit: kbit/s PDSCH channel of the anchor
THRP carrier at the application layer.

Indicates the throughput on the


SCCM PDSCH channel of the
PDSCH Unit: kbit/s supplementary carrier M at the
THRP application layer.
The value of M is 1 to 2.

PCC Indicates the uplink throughput


PDSCH on the PDSCH channel of the
Unit: kbit/s
ULTHRP anchor carrier at the
PHYTHRP application layer.

SCC1 Indicates the uplink throughput


PDSCH on the PDSCH channel of the
Unit: kbit/s
ULTHRP supplementary carrier 1 at the
PHYTHRP application layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 499


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value
IE Name Description
Range/Unit

PCC Indicates the downlink


PDSCH throughput on the PDSCH
Unit: kbit/s
DLTHRP channel of the anchor carrier at
PHYTHRP the application layer.

Indicates the downlink


SCCM throughput on the PDSCH
PDSCH channel of the supplementary
Unit: kbit/s carrier M at the application
DLTHRP
PHYTHRP layer.
The value of M is 1 to 2.

Indicates the downlink


throughput on the PDSCH
SCCM channel of code word N of the
PDSCH supplementary carrier M at the
Unit: kbit/s
DLTHRP application layer.
CodeN
l The value of M is 1 to 2.
l The value of N is 0 to 1.

Table 21-34 CQI


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

CQI Indicates the subband L CQI of Rank


N on codeword M.
SubBandCQI Value range: 0 to l The value of L is 0 to 24.
L_M_N 15
l The value of M is 1 to 4.
l The value of N is 0 or 1.

Indicates the subband CQI of Rank N


SubBandCQI Value range: 0 to on codeword M.
Average_M_N 15 l The value of M is 1 to 4.
l The value of N is 0 or 1.

Indicates the wideband CQI of Rank


WideBandCQ Value range: 0 to N on codeword M.
I_M_N 15 l The value of M is 1 to 4.
l The value of N is 0 or 1.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 500


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

The values are as


follows:
l MODE
APERIODIC
RM12
l MODE
APERIODIC
RM20
Report Mode l MODE Indicates the channel reporting mode.
APERIODIC
RM22
l MODE
APERIODIC
RM30
l MODE
APERIODIC
RM31

Number of Value range: 0 to


Indicates the number of subbands.
Subbands 7

Indicates the PMI of the entire


bandwidth.
NOTE
l When the value range is 0 to 15,
there are four transmit antennas, and
Value range: 0 to RI is 1 or 2.
Sing WB PMI
15 l When the value range is 0 to 1, there
are two transmit antennas, and RI is
2.
l When the value range is 0 to 3, there
are two transmit antennas, and RI is
1.

Indicates the PMI of multiple


bandwidth subsets.
NOTE
l When the value range is 0 to 15,
there are four transmit antennas, and
Single MB Value range: 0 to RI is 1 or 2.
PMI 15 l When the value range is 0 to 1, there
are two transmit antennas, and RI is
2.
l When the value range is 0 to 3, there
are two transmit antennas, and RI is
1.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 501


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Csi
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
1.
eSet1

Csi
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
2.
eSet2

Csi
MeasSubfram
Indicates the average CQI of the
eSet1 -
measurement subframe set 1.
SubBandCQI
Average

Csi
MeasSubfram Indicates the maximum wideband
eSet1 - CQI of the measurement subframe set
WideBandCQ 1.
IMax

CQI AckMcsOffset Value range: 0 to Indicates the MCS offset index of the
Configuratio Index 15 acknowledgment (ACK).
n Information
AperiodCQIR Value range: Indicates the aperiodic CQI report
eportMode Mode 1-2, Mode mode of the PUSCH.
2-0, Mode 2-2,
Mode 3-0, Mode
3-1

BandwidthPar Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of bandwidth


tNumber 4 parts.

CQIMcsOffse Value range: 0 to Indicates the MCS offset index of the


tIndex 15 CQI.

MultiRi Value range: 0 to Indicates the multi-RIs.


32

NOffsetRi Value range: Indicates the rank indicator (RI)


-160 to 0 offset.

ParaH Value range: 1 to Indicates the parameter H.


17

ParaK Value range: 0 to Indicates the parameter K.


4

PeriodCQIRe Value range: Indicates the periodic CQI report


portMode Mode 1-0, Mode mode of the PUCCH.
1-1, Mode 2-0,
Mode 2-1, Butt

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 502


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

CQIPeriodicit Value range: 1 to Indicates the CQI periodicity.


y 160

PmiMode Value range: 0 to Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index


2 (PMI) mode.

PUCCHFeed The values are as Indicates the CQI feedback type of


BackType follows: the PUCCH.
l Subband CQI
PMI 2
l Subband CQI
Feedback
l Wideband
CQI,PMI
l RI Feedback
l Wideband
CQI
Feedback
l RI Wideband
PMI 1
l RI PTI
l Wideband
PMI
l WB CQI, WB
PMI 1, WB
CQI 2
l WB CQI, WB
PMI 1, WB
CQI 2

CQI Value range: Indicates the transmission mode.


Transmission TM1 to TM9
Mode

SubFrameOffs Value range: 0 to Indicates the CQI subframe offset.


et 159

RiMcsOffsetI Value range: 0 to Indicates the MCS offset index of RI.


ndex 15

RiBitNumber Value range: 0- Indicates the number of RI bits.


RI to 2-RI, Unit:
bits

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 503


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-35 BLER


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

BLER Indicates the number of incorrectly


Initial Error transmitted transport blocks (TBs) of
-
TB Count code word 0 or code word 1 for the
first time.

Indicates the total number of


Initial Total
- transmitted TBs of code word 0 or
TB Count
code word 1 for the first time.

Residual Error Indicates the number of residual error


-
TB Count TB blocks.

Residual Total Indicates the total number of residual


-
TB Count TB blocks.

Indicates the real-time BLER on the


PDCCH Range: 0 to 100.
physical downlink control channel
BLER Unit: %
(PDCCH).

Indicates the number of uplink or


ReTx Num -
downlink retransmission.

Scheduling Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the scheduling BLER on


BLER Unit: % code word 0 or 1.

Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the initial BLER on code


Initial BLER
Unit: % word 0 or 1.

Residual Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the Residual BLER on code


BLER Unit: % word 0 or 1.

Retransfer Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the retransmission BLER on


BLER Unit: % code word 0 or 1.

Initial Total Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the initial total BLER of


BLER Unit: % code words 0 and 1.

Residual Total Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the residual total BLER of


BLER Unit: % code words 0 and 1.

Initial Tx Indicates the number of initial


-
Num transmitted RBs.

Residual Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the residual BLER on code


BLER Unit: % words 0 or 1.

Indicates the real-time BLER of the


PDSCH Range: 0 to 100. code word N on the physical
CodeN BLER Unit: % downlink shared control channel
(PDSCH).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 504


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-36 Camp Cell Information


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Camp Cell Cell ID - Indicates the cell ID.


Information
l Frequency
Indicates the duplex mode.
division
NOTE
duplex (FDD)
Different binning modes correspond to
Work Mode mode different sampling rules. For the same
l Time division DT data, different binning modes
duplex correspond to different number of
sampling points.
(TDD) mode

Indicates the length of the cyclic


CP Length -
prefix (CP).

Indicates the cell global identification


(CGI).
NOTE
CGI - Different binning modes correspond to
different sampling rules. For the same
DT data, different binning modes
correspond to different number of
sampling points.

Indicates the physical cell identifier


(PCI) of the camped cell.
NOTE
Value range: 0 to Different binning modes correspond to
PCI
503 different sampling rules. For the same
DT data, different binning modes
correspond to different number of
sampling points.

l Synchronizati
on
SyncFlag l Non- Indicates the synchronization flag.
synchronizati
on

Indicates the uplink center frequency


UL Frequency -
of a cell.

Indicates the downlink center


DL Frequency -
frequency of a cell.

Value range: 0 to
UL EARFCN Indicates the uplink EARFCN.
262143

Value range: 0 to
DL EARFCN Indicates the downlink EARFCN.
262143

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 505


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

l 1.4 MHz
l 3 MHz
UL l 5 MHz
Indicates the uplink bandwidth.
BandWidth l 10 MHz
l 15 MHz
l 20 MHz

l 1.4 MHz
l 3 MHz
DL l 5 MHz
Indicates the downlink bandwidth.
BandWidth l 10 MHz
l 15 MHz
l 20 MHz

eNBTxAntenn Indicates the number of eNodeB


-
asNumber transmit antennas.

UERxAntenna Indicates the number of UE receiving


-
sNumber antennas.

UETxAntenna Indicates the number of UE transmit


-
sNumber antennas.

NeighbourAnt Indicates the number of antennas


Value: 1, 2, or 4
ennasNumber configured for a neighboring cell.

RI Value: Rank1, Indicates the rank value for


ConfigIndex1 Rank2, or Rank4 ConfigIndex1 in the eICIC scenario.

RI Value: Rank1, Indicates the rank value for


ConfigIndex2 Rank2, or Rank4 ConfigIndex2 in the eICIC scenario.

csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
1.
eSet1

csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
2.
eSet2

PDSCH RB Indicates the number of RBs on the


-
Number/s PDSCH channel per second.

PDSCH RB
Indicates the number of RBs on the
Number/Sub -
PDSCH channel per subframe.
Frame

PUSCH RB Indicates the number of RBs on the


-
Number/s PUSCH channel per second.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 506


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

PUSCH RB
Indicates the number of RBs on the
Number/Sub -
PUSCH channel per subframe.
Frame

Freq Band Value range: 1 to Indicates the frequency band index of


Indicator 43 a serving cell.

Value range: 000 Indicates the mobile country code


MCC
to 999 (MCC).

Value range: 000 Indicates the mobile network code


MNC
to 999 (MNC).

Value Range: 0
TAC Indicates the tracking Area Code.
to 65535.

SpecialSubFra Value range: Indicates the special subframe


mePatterns SSP0 to SSP8 configuration type.

SubFrameAssi Value range: 0 to Indicates the subframe allocation


gnmentType 6 type.

Table 21-37 Radio Parameter


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Radio Radio
Parameter Parameter - Indicates the cell ID.
CellIndex

Indicates the total number of physical


downlink control channels
(PDCCHs) granted within 1 second
in the uplink.
PDCCH UL Value range: 0 to NOTE
Grant Count 1000 The last scheduling in the previous
period occurs at the start point of the
following period. Therefore, the
scheduling will be calculated in the
following period and there are 1001
scheduling times within one second.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 507


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the total number of


PDCCHs granted within 1 second in
the downlink.
NOTE
PDCCH DL Value range: 0 to The last scheduling in the previous
Grant Count 1000 period occurs at the start point of the
following period. Therefore, the
scheduling will be calculated in the
following period and there are 1001
scheduling times within one second.

Indicates the number of occupied


PDSCH RB
- resource blocks (RBs) on the current
Number
PDSCH.

The values are as


follows:
Rank l Rank1
Indicates the rank.
Indicator l Rank2
l Rank3
l Rank4

The values are as


follows:
SubframeSetN l Rank1 Indicates the rank of the
Rank measurement subframe set N.
l Rank2
Indicator N is a positive integer.
l Rank3
l Rank4

Indicates the target signal to


DrsRank1 Value range: -20 interference plus noise ratio (SINR)
SINR to 50 (unit: dB) of dedicated reference signals of
Rank 1.

Indicates the target SINR of


DrsRank2 Value range: -20
dedicated reference signals on
SINR1 to 50 (unit: dB)
codeword 0 of Rank 2.

Indicates the target SINR of


DrsRank2 Value range: -20
dedicated reference signals on
SINR2 to 50 (unit: dB)
codeword 1 of Rank 2.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 508


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Value range: 0 to
1
The legend
segments are as
RxChCorFact follows: Indicates the antenna-related
or l 0 to 0.3: coefficient of the receive channel.
green
l 0.3 to 0.6:
yellow
l 0.6 to 1: red

Value range: 0 to
1
The legend
segments are as
TxChCorFact follows: Indicates the antenna-related
or l 0 to 0.3: coefficient of the transmit channel.
green
l 0.3 to 0.6:
yellow
l 0.6 to 1: red

RxCoeFactor0 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 01-related


1 1 coefficient of the receive channel.

RxCoeFactor0 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 02-related


2 1 coefficient of the receive channel.

RxCoeFactor0 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 03-related


3 1 coefficient of the receive channel.

RxCoeFactor1 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 12-related


2 1 coefficient of the receive channel.

RxCoeFactor1 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 13-related


3 1 coefficient of the receive channel.

RxCoeFactor2 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 23-related


3 1 coefficient of the receive channel.

TxCoeFactor0 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 01-related


1 1 coefficient of the transmit channel.

TxCoeFactor0 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 02-related


2 1 coefficient of the transmit channel.

TxCoeFactor0 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 03-related


3 1 coefficient of the transmit channel.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 509


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

TxCoeFactor1 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 12-related


2 1 coefficient of the transmit channel.

TxCoeFactor1 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 13-related


3 1 coefficient of the transmit channel.

TxCoeFactor2 Value range: 0 to Indicates the antenna 23-related


3 1 coefficient of the transmit channel.

Indicates the demodulation reference


Value range: 0 to signal (DMRS) hopping group. This
30 IE is displayed after the frequency
hopping (FH) test is complete. Only
l The legend HUAWEI UE1.0, UE1.1, and UE2.0
segments are support this IE.
DMRS HOP as follows:
You can choose Test LTE Send
l 0 to 10: green Command to control a terminal to
l 10 to 20: conduct the DMRS FH test.
yellow NOTE
l 20 to 30: red The DMRS FH test can be conducted
only when both the eNodeB and UE
support frequency hopping.

Value range: 16
PUSCH TB Indicates the size of a transport block
to 75376 (unit:
Size (TB) on the PUSCH.
byte)

Frame Value range: 0 to


Indicates the number of a frame.
Number 1023

SubFrame Value range: 0 to


Indicates the number of a subframe.
Number 9

Indicates the number of rank N times


within the statistical period (1
RankN Num/s - second).
N is a positive integer.

PDSCH RB Indicates the number of RBs on the


-
Number current PDSCH.

Timing Value range: 0 to


Indicates the timing advance of a UE.
Advance 63

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 510


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the value of SINR.


NOTE
If the test data of Qualcomm terminals is
analyzed, the average value of SINR
Antenna0 and SINR Antenna1 is
Value range: -20 displayed in SINR.
SINR
to 50 (unit: dB) If the test data of TUE or HiSilicon
terminals is analyzed, the average SINR
is displayed in SINR.
For details about the Qualcomm,
HiSilicon and TUE terminals, see PA
Recommended Terminal List.

SINR
Attenna0 - Indicates the SINR difference
-
SINR between two antennas.
Attenna1

Value: TM1, Indicates the transmission mode.


TM2, TM3, NOTE
Transmission This IE is a counter in the LTE protocol.
TM4, TM5,
Mode Transmission modes map different
TM6, TM7,
antenna port mapping relationship and
TM8, or TM9 transmission multiplexing relationship.

l AM
(Acknowledg
e Mode)
l UM (Un-
RLC Mode acknowledge Indicates the data transmission mode.
Mode)
l TM
(Transparent
Mode)

Rank1 Value range: -20


Indicates the SINR of Rank 1.
SINR(dB) to 50 (unit: dB)

Rank2 Value range: -20 Indicates the SINR of codeword 0 of


SINR1(dB) to 50 (unit: dB) Rank 2.

Rank2 Value range: -20 Indicates the SINR of codeword 1 of


SINR2(dB) to 50 (unit: dB) Rank 2.

Rank3 Value range: -20 Indicates the SINR of codeword 0 of


SINR1(dB) to 50 (unit: dB) Rank 3.

Rank3 Value range: -20 Indicates the SINR of codeword 1 of


SINR2(dB) to 50 (unit: dB) Rank 3.

Rank4 Value range: -20 Indicates the SINR of codeword 0 of


SINR1(dB) to 50 (unit: dB) Rank 4.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 511


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Rank4 Value range: -20 Indicates the SINR of codeword 1 of


SINR2(dB) to 50 (unit: dB) Rank 4.

PUSCH RB Value range: 0 to


Indicates the number of uplink RBs.
Number 100

Value range: 16
PDSCH TB0 Indicates the size of the downlink
to 75376 (unit:
Size TB0.
byte)

Value range: 16
PDSCH TB1 Indicates the size of the downlink
to 75376 (unit:
Size TB1.
byte)

Indicates the number of layers when


Number of Value range: 1 to
data is transmitted by layers on the
Layers 4
PDSCH.

Number of Value range: 0 to


Indicates the number of TBs.
TBs 3

RI Rank1, Rank2, Indicates the rank value for


ConfigIndex1 or Rank4 ConfigIndex1 in the eICIC scenario.

RI Rank1, Rank2, Indicates the rank value for


ConfigIndex2 or Rank4 ConfigIndex2 in the eICIC scenario.

csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
1.
eSet1

csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
2.
eSet2

PDSCH RB Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of RBs on the


Number/s 100000 PDSCH channel per second.

PDSCH RB Value range: 0 to


Indicates the number of RBs on the
Number/Sub 100
PDSCH channel per subframe.
Frame

PUSCH RB Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of RBs on the


Number/s 100000 PUSCH channel per second.

PUSCH RB Value range: 0 to


Indicates the number of RBs on the
Number/Sub 100
PUSCH channel per subframe.
Frame

HO to Same Indicates the number of handovers to


-
PCI Cell cells with the same PCI.

Indicates the MOC delay at the


MOCDelay -
control layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 512


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the MTC delay at the


MTCDelay -
control layer.

Cell Index - Indicates the cell ID.

Value range: 0 to
PCI Indicates the physical cell identifier.
503

Value range: Indicates the measurement value of


RSRP -140 to -40 (unit: the reference signal received power
dBm) (RSRP).

Indicates the measurement value of


Value range: -40
RSRQ the reference signal received quality
to 0 (unit: dB)
(RSRQ).

Value range:
Indicates the received signal strength
RSSI -140 to -10 (unit:
indicator.
dBm)

Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio


Value range: 0 to
EARFCN frequency channel number
262143
(EARFCN).

PucchFmt3Cn Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of Pucch


t 1000 format3 statistic times.

Indicates the times when the Pucch


PucchFmt3Csi Value range: 0 to
format3 report CSI and ACK
AckCnt 1000
simultaneously.

LTE RSRP
Continuously Indicates the continuous RSRP weak
unit: m
Weak Cover coverage distance.
Distance

LTE RSRP
Continuously
unit: m Indicates the RSRP without values.
No Cover
Distance

LTE UE
Continual
Indicates the continuous UE high-
High Power unit: m
power transmit distance.
Transmit
Distance

LTE
Continuously
Indicates the continuous poor SINR
Bad Sinr unit: m
distance.
Cover
Distance

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 513


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-38 UE State


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

NAS Indicates the Evolved Packet System


EMM State -
(EPS) mobility management state.

EMM Sub Indicates the EPS mobility


-
State management sub state.

RCC Idle, Connected,


RRC State Indicates the RRC connection state.
or Unknown

Last TA TAC (Tracing Value range: 0 to Indicates the code of the closest
Area Code) 65535 tracking area (TA).

Timing Value range: 0 to


Indicates the timing advance of a UE.
Advance 63

PLMN
(Public Land Indicates the public land mobile
-
Mobile network (PLMN).
Network)

UE l Closed loop
Information l Open loop
l Single-
Antenna antenna
Indicates the antenna selection mode.
Selection transmit
l Power aiding
l Invalid
antenna

APN - Indicates the access point name.

IP Indicates the IP address of the V4


-
Address(V4) version.

IP Indicates the IP address of the V6


-
Address(V6) version.

Value range: 1 to
QCI Indicates the QoS class identifier.
9

Indicates the voice over Long Term


QCI1 -
Evolution (VoLTE).

Secondary Valid Flag Value: Valid or Indicates whether a secondary cell


Cell State Invalid uses the SCC flag.

Active State Value: Active or Indicates whether the SCC is


Deactive activated.

Index Value range: 1 to Indicates the index of the SCC.


7

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 514


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Deactive The values are as Indicates the cause of the failure to


Reason follows: activate the secondary cell.
l SCELL_DEA
CTIVE_INI
l SCELL_DEA
CTIVE_MCE
l SCELL_DEA
CTIVE_TIM
ER
l SCELL_DEA
CTIVE_RRC

EARFCN Value range: 0 to Indicates the EARFCN of the SCC.


262143

PCI Value range: 0 to Indicates the PCI.


503

Period Active Value range: 0 to Indicates the total number of times


Count 0xFFF the secondary cell is activated within
the cell statistical period.

Period L3 Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of times the


Deactive 0xFFF SCell is deactivated through Layer 3
Count within the cell statistical period.

Period MCE Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of times the


Deactive 0xFFF secondary cell is deactivated through
Count the MCE within the cell statistical
period.

Period Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of times the


Timeout 0xFFF secondary cell is deactivated through
Deactive the timer within the cell statistical
Count period.

Active Sum Value range: 0 to Indicates the total number of times


0xFFFFFFF the secondary cell is activated.

L3 Deactive Value range: 0 to Indicates the total number of times


Sum 0xFFFFFFF the secondary cell is deactivated
through Layer 3.

MCE Value range: 0 to Indicates the total number of times


Deactive Sum 0xFFFFFFF the secondary cell is deactivated
through the MCE.

Timeout Value range: 0 to Indicates the total number of times


Deactive Sum 0xFFFFFFF the secondary cell is deactivated
through the timer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 515


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-39 MIMO


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

MIMO Indicates the single-antenna port that


1T1R - contains one transmitter and one
receiver.

Indicates the single-antenna port that


1T2R - contains one transmitter and two
receivers.

Indicates the Space Frequency Block


2T2R SFBC - Code (SFBC) for two transmitters
and two receivers.

Indicates open loop multiplexing for


2T2R OL SM -
two transmitters and two receivers.

Indicates Multiple Input Multiple


MultiUser -
Output (MIMO) for multiple users.

Indicates the close loop multiplexing


2T2R CL
- Rank 1 for two transmitters and two
Rank1
receivers.

Indicates the close loop multiplexing


2T2R CL
- Rank 2 for two transmitters and two
Rank2
receivers.

Indicates the number of single


Single Port5 -
transmit port 5.

Indicates the numbers of double-


Single Port56 - antenna ports, which are port 5 and
port 6.

Indicates the SFBC for four


4T2R SFBC -
transmitters and two receivers.

Indicates open loop multiplexing for


4T2R OL SM -
four transmitters and two receivers.

Indicates the close loop multiplexing


4T2R CL
- Rank 1 for four transmitters and two
Rank1
receivers.

Indicates the close loop multiplexing


4T2R CL
- Rank 2 for four transmitters and two
Rank2
receivers.

Value range: 1 to Indicates the precoding matrix index


PMI
15 (PMI).

Indicates the SFBC for four


4T4R SFBC -
transmitters and four receivers.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 516


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the open-loop multiplexing


4T4R OL
- Rank 2 for four transmitters and four
Rank2
receivers.

Indicates the open-loop multiplexing


4T4R OL
- Rank 3 for four transmitters and four
Rank3
receivers.

Indicates the open-loop multiplexing


4T4R OL
- Rank 4 for four transmitters and four
Rank4
receivers.

Indicates the closed-loop


4T4R CL
- multiplexing Rank 1 for four
Rank1
transmitters and four receivers.

Indicates the closed-loop


4T4R CL
- multiplexing Rank 2 for four
Rank2
transmitters and four receivers.

Indicates the closed-loop


4T4R CL
- multiplexing Rank 3 for four
Rank3
transmitters and four receivers.

Indicates the closed-loop


4T4R CL
- multiplexing Rank 4 for four
Rank4
transmitters and four receivers.

Indicates the single-stream beam


BF Port7 -
forming port (port 7).

Indicates the single-stream beam


BF Port8 -
forming port (port 8).

Indicates the dual-stream beam


BF Port78 -
forming ports (port 7 and port 8).

Indicates the single-stream TM9 port


TM9 PORT7 -
(port 7).

Indicates the single-stream TM9 port


TM9 PORT8 -
(port 8).

Indicates the dual-stream TM9 ports


TM9 PORT78 -
(port 7 and port 8).

Indicates the triple-stream TM9 ports


TM9 PORT79 -
(port 7, port 8, and port 9).

Indicates the quadruple-stream TM9


TM9
- ports (port 7, port 8, port 9, and port
PORT710
10).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 517


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

1T1R Used Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 1T1R in


Percentage(%) 100 MIMO.

1T2R Used Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 1T2R in


Percentage(%) 100 MIMO.

2T2R SFBC
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R
Used
100 SFBC in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

2T2R OL SM
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R OL
Used
100 SM in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

MultiUser
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of MultiUser
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

2T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R CL
Rank1 Used
100 Rank1 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

2T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R CL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

Single Port5
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of Single
Used
100 Port5 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

Single Port56
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of Single
Used
100 Port56 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T2R SFBC
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R
Used
100 SFBC in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T2R OL SM
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R OL
Used
100 SM in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R CL
Rank1 Used
100 Rank1 in MIMO.
Percentage

4T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R CL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

PMI Used Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of PMI in


Percentage(%) 100 MIMO.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 518


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

4T4R SFBC
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R
Used
100 SFBC in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T4R OL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R OL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T4R OL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R OL
Rank3 Used
100 Rank3 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T4R OL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R OL
Rank4 Used
100 Rank4 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank1 Used
100 Rank1 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank3 Used
100 Rank3 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank4 Used
100 Rank4 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

BF Port7
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of BF Port7
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

BF Port8
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of BF Port8
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

BF Port78
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of BF Port78
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

TM9 PORT7
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT7 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

TM9 PORT8
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT8 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 519


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

TM9 PORT78
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT78 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

TM9 PORT79
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT79 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

TM9
PORT710 Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used 100 PORT710 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)

DL PMI PMI Index - Indicates the precoding matrix index.

UL PMI Indicates the value of precoding


PMI(I1) -
matrix index 1.

Indicates the value of precoding


PMI(I2) -
matrix index 2.

Table 21-40 MCS


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Uplink MCS Count

Indicates the number of times MCS N


Value range: 0 to of codeword 0 or codeword 1 is
MCS N Count invoked during a period.
1000
N is a nonnegative integer.

Indicates the number of times in each


MCSTotalCou
- MCS of all codewords is invoked
nt
during a period.

Indicates the number of MCS Expects


MCSExpect/s -
per second.

MCS RB Count

Indicates the number of RBs in each


MCS N Value range: 0 to MCS on codeword 0 or codeword 1
RBCount 100000 during a period.
N is a nonnegative integer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 520


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the total number of RBs in


each MCS on codeword 0 or
MCSTotalRB
- codeword 1 during a period. The
Count
value is the sum of MCS0Count to
MCS31Count.

MCS Modulation

Indicates the modulation of codeword


0 or codeword 1 which takes the
MCS N largest proportion within a period,
- such as BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, and
Modulation
64QAM.
N is a nonnegative integer.

MCS Modulation Percentage

Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of BPSK of


BPSK Ratio
100% all codes.

Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of QPSK of


QPSK Ratio
100% all codes.

Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of 16QAM


16QAM Ratio
100% of all codes.

Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of 64QAM


64QAM Ratio
100% of all codes.

Downlink MCSExpecAll Indicates the number of all codes


-
(csi Code/s MCS Expects per second.
MeasSubfra
meSet1) Indicates the number of times each
MCSTotal - MCS of all codewords is invoked
during a period.

MCS Count_N
N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0 or codeword1.

Indicates the number of times each


MCS of codeword 0 or codeword 1 is
csiMeas MCS invoked during a period.
-
M Count_N M is a nonnegative integer.
N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0
or codeword1.

Indicates the total number of times


each MCS of codeword 0 and
csiMeas codeword 1 is invoked during a
MCSTotalCou - period.
nt_N
N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0
or codeword1.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 521


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the number of Code N MCS


MCSExpectC Expects per second.
-
ode N /s N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0
or codeword1.

MCS Modulation_N
N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0 or codeword1.

Indicates the modulation of codeword


csiMeas MCS 0 or codeword 1.
M -
Modulation_N N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0
or codeword1.

MCS Modulation Percentage

Indicates the percentage of QPSK of


csiMeas Code Value range: 0 to all code N .
N QPSK Ratio 100% N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0
or codeword1.

Indicates the percentage of 16QAM


csiMeas Code of all code N .
Value range: 0 to
N 16QAM
100% N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0
Ratio
or codeword1.

Indicates the percentage of 64QAM


csiMeas Code of all code N .
Value range: 0 to
N 64QAM
100% N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0
Ratio
or codeword1.

csiMeas Total Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of QPSK of


QPSK Ratio 100% all codes.

csiMeas Total Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of 16QAM


16QAM Ratio 100% of all codes.

csiMeas Total Value range: 0 to Indicates the percentage of 64QAM


64QAM Ratio 100% of all codes.

MCSExpectC Indicates the number of Code 0 MCS


-
ode0/s Expects per second.

MCSExpectC Indicates the number of Code 1 MCS


-
ode1/s Expects per second.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 522


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-41 Iperf


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Iperf Bandwidth Unit: Mbit/s Indicates the bandwidth.

Indicates the ID that identifies a data


ID -
transmission service.

Delay Unit: ms Indicates the Delay.

Jitter - Indicates the jitter.

Lost Indicates the number of lost


-
Datagrams datagrams.

Indicates the datagram loss ratio,


Value range: 0 to which is the ratio of the number of
Lost Rate
100 lost datagrams to the total number of
datagrams.

Indicates that the downlink data at the


Server UDP - User Datagram Protocol (UDP) layer
is transmitted in S mode.

Indicates that the uplink and


downlink data at the Transmission
TCP or Client Control Protocol (TCP) layer is
-
UDP transmitted in Client/Server (C/S)
mode, or the uplink data at the UDP
layer is transmitted in C mode.

Total Indicates the total number of


-
Datagrams transmitted datagrams.

Transmit Indicates the number of transmitted


-
Bytes bytes.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 523


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-42 Custom


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Custom Indicates the information about the


pilot pollution of all the drive test
points that meet the pilot pollution
conditions.
Pilot pollution occurs when multiple
strong pilots exist in a cell but no
Pilot Pollution Value range: 0 to pilot is strong enough to be the
Point 8 dominant pilot. Pilot pollution causes
network performance deterioration,
handover call drop, and system
capacity reduction. Pilot pollution
analysis helps locate pilot pollution
areas precisely, facilitating the cause
analysis on pilot pollution.

Serving RSRP RSRP difference between the serving


- 1st Neighbor Unit: dBm cell and the strongest neighboring
RSRP cell.

Table 21-43 HARQ


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

HARQ Indicates the maximum number of


MAX ReTx Value range: 0 to
times HARQ of the carrier is
Count 27
retransmitted.

l Repetition
Indicates whether to retransmit the
Repetition l Non- carrier.
Repetition

Indicates the period for retransmitting


HARQs of the carrier.
Period - NOTE
This period is displayed only when
Repetition of the data reported by a
terminal is Repetition.

Indicates the number of successful


TB0 DL
transmissions corresponding to the
HARQ Value range: 0 to
downlink TB0 from the first time to
Successful 27
the 28th time within a statistical
Count
period of the carrier.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 524


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the number of successful


TB1 DL
transmissions corresponding to the
HARQ Value range: 0 to
downlink TB1 from the first time to
Successful 27
the 28th time within a statistical
Count
period of the carrier.

Indicates the number of times the


TB0 DL
- downlink TB0 ACK messages are
HARQ ACK
transmitted for the carrier.

TB0 DL Indicates the number of times the


HARQ - downlink TB0 NACK messages are
NACK transmitted for the carrier.

Indicates the number of times the


TB1 DL
- downlink TB1 ACK messages are
HARQ ACK
transmitted for the carrier.

TB1 DL Indicates the number of times the


HARQ - downlink TB1 NACK messages are
NACK transmitted for the carrier.

Indicates the number of successful


UL HARQ
transmissions from the first time to
Successful -
the 28th time within a statistical
Count
period of the carrier.

Indicates the number of times the


UL HARQ
- uplink HARQ ACK messages are
ACK
transmitted for the carrier.

Indicates the number of times the


UL HARQ
- uplink HARQ NACK messages are
NACK
transmitted for the carrier.

UL Initial Value range: 0 to Indicates the uplink initial BLER of


BLER 100 (unit: %) carriers.

DL Initial Value range: 0 to Indicates the downlink initial BLER


BLER 100 (unit: %) of carriers.

UL ReTx Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of uplink carrier


Num 1000 retransmissions.

Value range: 0 to
1000
NOTE
This counter does
DL ReTx not have legend Indicates the number of downlink
Num and share the carrier retransmission times.
same legend with
the <b>UL ReTx
Num</b>
counter.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 525


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-44 PRB


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

UL/D Indicates the number of times timeslot M


L PRB PCC PRB Value range: 1 to of each RB is scheduled in the uplink.
SlotM SlotM CountN 1000
M and N are nonnegative integers.
Count
Indicates the number of times timeslot 0
of each RB is scheduled in the uplink.
PCC UL This value is the sum of Slot0RB0 to
-
SlotMRB Total Slot0RB99.
M is a nonnegative integer.

UL/D
UL/DL PRB Indicates the number of uplink/downlink
L PRB -
Total physical RBs.
Total

UL/D Indicates the number of uplink/downlink


L VRB CountN - virtual RBs.
VRB N is a nonnegative integer.
Count
N csiMeas RB Indicates the total number of RBs in a
-
Total measurement set.

None Indicates the number of RBs that are not


csi NONcsiMeas in a measurement set.
-
MeasS RBN
N is a nonnegative integer.
ubfram
eSet1 NONcsiMeas Indicates the total number of RBs that are
-
RB Total not in a measurement set.

Table 21-45 Bandwidth


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

UL
Indicates the number of uplink RBs
RB Value range: 0 to
RBNum N within a statistical period. The value of N
Numb 100
ranges from 0 to 99.
er

UL
Value range: 0 to Indicates the start point of the uplink RB.
RB RBStart N
99 The value of N ranges from 0 to 99.
Start

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 526


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

DL
SubBa
Indicates the number of times a subband
nd
Value range: 0 to is scheduled in the downlink. The
Sched SubBand N
1000 number of subbands ranges from 0 to 24,
ule
and the value of N ranges from 0 to 24.
Numb
er

Table 21-46 Intra RAT Interrupt Delay


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Intra RAT MacHoDlInter Indicates the downlink interruption


Unit: µs
Interrupt ruptTime delay due to the MAC handover.
Delay
MacHoUlInter Indicates the uplink interruption delay
Unit: µs
ruptTime due to the MAC handover.

MacHoDtStop Indicates the stop time of the MAC


Unit: µs
Time layer data.

MacHoDtCon Indicates the contention time of the


Unit: µs
Time MAC layer data.

MacRcvFpga Indicates the start time stamp of the


Unit: µs
SyncTime baseband response random access.

MacRcvHOR Indicates the start time stamp of the


Unit: µs
eqTime MAC random access at Layer 3.

Indicates the time stamp of the RAR


MacRcvRarTi
Unit: µs access message received by the
me
MAC.

Indicates the time stamp of the first


MacRx1stAck
Unit: µs ACK message that is received after
Time
the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the first


MacRx1stCrc packet for which the CRC is
Unit: µs
RightTime performed correctly and is received
by the target cell after the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the first


user plane data packet for which the
MacRx1stDrb
Unit: µs CRC is performed correctly and is
Time
received by the target cell after the
handover.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 527


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the time stamp of the first


MacRx1stPkt
Unit: µs packet that is received by the target
Time
cell after the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the first


control plane data packet for which
MacRx1stSrb
Unit: µs the CRC is performed correctly and is
Time
received by the target cell after the
handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the first


MacRx1stUlg
Unit: µs uplink authorized message that is
rantTime
received after the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the last


MacRxLastAc
Unit: µs ACK message that is received before
kTime
the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the last


packet for which the CRC is
MacRxLastCr
Unit: µs performed correctly and is received
cRightTime
by the source cell before the
handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the last


user plane data packet for which the
MacRxLastDr
Unit: µs CRC is performed correctly and is
bTime
received by the source cell before the
handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the last


MacRxLastPk
Unit: µs packet that is received by the source
tTime
cell before the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the last


control plane data packet for which
MacRxLastSr
Unit: µs the CRC is performed correctly and is
bTime
received by the source cell before the
handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the last


MacRxLastUl uplink authorized message that is
Unit: µs
grantTime received by the MAC before the
handover.

MacSend1stPr Indicates the time stamp of the first


Unit: µs
eambleTime preamble sent by the MAC.

MacSendLast Indicates the time stamp of the last


Unit: µs
PreambleTime preamble sent by the MAC.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 528


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Indicates the time stamp of the MAC


MacSendMsg handover completion, which is the
Unit: µs
3Time time stamp when the RRC Request
message of Message 3 is sent.

Indicates the time stamp of the first


MacTx1stDrb user plane data packet for which the
Unit: µs
Time CRC is performed correctly and is
sent after the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the first


MacTx1stSrb control plane data packet for which
Unit: µs
Time the CRC is performed correctly and is
sent after the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the user


MacTxLastDr
Unit: µs plane data packet that is sent before
bTime
the handover.

Indicates the time stamp of the


MacTxLastSr
Unit: µs control plane data packet that is sent
bTime
before the handover.

Indicates the contention time of the


PdcpHoDlDtC
Unit: µs Packet Data Convergence Protocol
ontTime
(PDCP) downlink data transmission.

Indicates the delay in the PDCP


PdcpHoDlDt
Unit: µs downlink data transmission
DelayTime
interruption.

PdcpHoDlDtS Indicates the stop time of the PDCP


Unit: µs
topTime downlink data transmission.

PdcpHoUlDtC Indicates the contention time of the


Unit: µs
ontTime PDCP uplink data transmission.

PdcpHoUlDt Indicates the delay in the PDCP


Unit: µs
DelayTime uplink data transmission interruption.

PdcpHoUlDtS Indicates the stop time of the PDCP


Unit: µs
topTime uplink data transmission.

PdcpRxPktTi Indicates the time that the first packet


Unit: µs
me is sent to the PDCP.

RlcDLHoCmp Indicates the time that the RLC


Unit: µs
Time downlink handover is complete.

RlcHoDlInterr Indicates the RLC downlink


Unit: µs
uptTime interruption time.

RlcHoUlInterr Indicates the RLC uplink interruption


Unit: µs
uptTime time.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 529


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

RlcHoDtStop Indicates the stop time of the RLC


Unit: µs
Time layer data.

RlcHoDtCont Indicates the contention time period


Unit: µs
Time of the RLC layer data.

RlcRxPduTim Indicates the time that the first PDU


Unit: µs
e that is received by the RLC.

Indicates the time that the first data


RlcUlFirstRlc
Unit: µs packet is sent on the uplink of the
PktTime
RLC after the handover.

Indicates the ID of the resource block


RlcUlLastRlc of the last data packet that is sent on
-
PktRbId the uplink of the RLC before the
handover.

Indicates the time that the last data


RlcUlLastRlc
Unit: µs packet is sent on the uplink of the
PktTime
RLC before the handover.

Indicates the time that the handover


RlcULRxHoI
Unit: µs command is received on the uplink of
ndTime
the RLC.

PdcpHoUlInte Indicates the RDCP uplink


Unit: µs
rruptTime interruption time.

PdcpHoDlInte Indicates the RDCP downlink


Unit: µs
rruptTime interruption time.

Table 21-47 Inter-RAT Measurements


IE Set Value Range/
IE Name Description
Unit

Inter- GER Nth RSSI - Indicates the RSSI of the Nth


RAT AN strongest GSM cell, which is
Meas measured on the LTE network. For
urem example:
ents l 1st RSSI indicates the RSSI of the
first strongest GSM cell, which is
measured on the LTE network.
l 2nd RSSI indicates the RSSI of
the second strongest GSM cell,
which is measured on the LTE
network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 530


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Value Range/


IE Name Description
Unit

Nth BSIC - Indicates the BSIC of the Nth


strongest GSM cell, which is
measured on the LTE network. For
example:
l 1st BSIC indicates the frequency
of the first strongest GSM cell,
which is measured on the LTE
network.
l 2nd BSIC indicates the frequency
of the second strongest GSM cell,
which is measured on the LTE
network.

Nth - Indicates the frequency of the Nth


CarrierFreq strongest GSM cell, which is
measured on the LTE network. For
example:
l 1st CarrierFreq indicates the
frequency of the first strongest
GSM cell, which is measured on
the LTE network.
l 2nd CarrierFreq indicates the
frequency of the second strongest
GSM cell, which is measured on
the LTE network.

UTR Nth utra- - Indicates the RSCP of the Nth


A RSCP strongest GSM cell sorted by
CarrierFreq + PhysCellId, which is
measured on the LTE network.

Nth utra- - Indicates the Ec/No corresponding to


Ec/No the RSCP of the Nth strongest GSM
cell sorted by RSCP, which is
measured on the LTE network.

Nth - Indicates the PCI of the Nth strongest


PhysCellId GSM cell, which is measured on the
LTE network. For example:
l 1st PhysCellId indicates the
physical ID of the first strongest
cell on the GSM network, which is
measured on the LTE network.
l 2nd PhysCellId indicates the
physical ID of the second
strongest cell on the GSM
network, which is measured on the
LTE network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 531


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-48 Secondary Cell Information


IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description
Unit

Secondary SCC PCI Value range: 0 to Indicates the PCI of an SCC.


Cell 503
Information
SCC Cell ID - Indicates the cell ID of an SCC.

SCC UL Value range: 0 to Indicates the uplink EARFCN of an


EARFCN 262143 SCC.

SCC DL Value range: 0 to Indicates the downlink EARFCN of


EARFCN 262143 an SCC.

SCC UL Unit: MHz Indicates the uplink center frequency


Frequency of an SCC.

SCC DL Unit: MHz Indicates the downlink center


Frequency frequency of an SCC.

SCC Ul l 1.4 MHz Indicates the uplink bandwidth of an


BandWidth l 3 MHz SCC.
l 5 MHz
l 10 MHz
l 20 MHz

SCC Dl l 1.4 MHz Indicates the downlink bandwidth of


BandWidth l 3 MHz an SCC.
l 5 MHz
l 10 MHz
l 20 MHz

SCC UL CP - Indicates the uplink CP length of an


Length SCC.

SCC DL CP - Indicates the downlink CP length of


Length an SCC.

SCC Value range: 1, Indicates the number of transmit


eNBTxAnten 2, and 4 antennas of an eNodeB.
naNumber

SCC Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of receiving


UERxAntenn 2 antennas of a UE.
aNumber

SCC Value range: 1 to Indicates the number of transmit


UETxAntenna 2 antennas of a UE.
Number

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 532


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

SCC - Indicates the transmission mode.


Transmission
Mode

SCC RSRP - Indicates the RSRP of an SCC.

CA State Value: Active or Indicates whether the CA is activated.


Deactive l If LTEScellActivated or
L2MceActiveScell1 appears, the
<b>CA State</b> counter exists
and the value is <b>Active</b>.
l If LTEScellDeactivated or
L2MceDeactiveScell1 appears, the
<b>CA State</b> counter exists
and the value is <b>Deactive</b>.

Table 21-49 Interrupt Time Delay


IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description
Unit

Interrupt LTE to GSM Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


Time Delay interrupt Time uplink RLC layer data service from
Delay (RLC the LTE network to the GSM
UL) network, which is the difference
between the time when the last uplink
RLC data packet whose size is not 0
on the LTE network to the time when
the uplink RLC data packet whose
size is not 0 on the GSM network.

LTE to GSM Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


interrupt Time downlink RLC layer data service
Delay (RLC from the LTE network to the GSM
DL) network, which is the difference
between the time when the last
downlink RLC data packet whose
size is not 0 on the LTE network to
the time when the downlink RLC data
packet whose size is not 0 on the
GSM network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 533


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

LTE to GSM Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


interrupt Time uplink application layer data service
Delay (APP from the LTE network to the GSM
UL) network, which is the difference
between the time when the last uplink
application layer data packet whose
size is not 0 on the LTE network to
the time when the uplink application
layer data packet whose size is not 0
on the GSM network.

LTE to GSM Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


interrupt Time downlink application layer data
Delay (APP service from the LTE network to the
DL) GSM network, which is the
difference between the time when the
last downlink application layer data
packet whose size is not 0 on the LTE
network to the time when the
downlink application layer data
packet whose size is not 0 on the
GSM network.

LTE to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


WCDMA uplink RLC layer data service from
interrupt Time the LTE network to the WCDMA
Delay (RLC network, which is the difference
UL) between the time when the last uplink
RLC data packet whose size is not 0
on the LTE network to the time when
the uplink RLC data packet whose
size is not 0 on the WCDMA
network.

LTE to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


WCDMA downlink RLC layer data service
interrupt Time from the LTE network to the
Delay (RLC WCDMA network, which is the
DL) difference between the time when the
last downlink RLC data packet whose
size is not 0 on the LTE network to
the time when the downlink RLC data
packet whose size is not 0 on the
WCDMA network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 534


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

LTE to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


WCDMA uplink application layer data service
interrupt Time from the LTE network to the
Delay (APP WCDMA network, which is the
UL) difference between the time when the
last uplink application layer data
packet whose size is not 0 on the LTE
network to the time when the uplink
application layer data packet whose
size is not 0 on the WCDMA
network.

LTE to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


WCDMA downlink application layer data
interrupt Time service from the LTE network to the
Delay (APP WCDMA network, which is the
DL) difference between the time when the
last downlink application layer data
packet whose size is not 0 on the LTE
network to the time when the
downlink application layer data
packet whose size is not 0 on the
WCDMA network.

WCDMA to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


LTE interrupt uplink RLC layer data service from
Time Delay the WCDMA network to the LTE
(RLC UL) network, which is the difference
between the time when the last uplink
RLC data packet whose size is not 0
on the WCDMA network to the time
when the uplink RLC data packet
whose size is not 0 on the LTE
network.

WCDMA to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


LTE interrupt downlink RLC layer data service
Time Delay from the WCDMA network to the
(RLC DL) LTE network, which is the difference
between the time when the last
downlink RLC data packet whose
size is not 0 on the WCDMA network
to the time when the downlink RLC
data packet whose size is not 0 on the
LTE network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 535


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

WCDMA to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


LTE interrupt uplink application layer data service
Time Delay from the WCDAM network to the
(APP UL) LTE network, which is the difference
between the time when the last uplink
application layer data packet whose
size is not 0 on the WCDMA network
to the time when the uplink
application layer data packet whose
size is not 0 on the LTE network.

WCDMA to Unit: ms Indicates the interruption delay of the


LTE interrupt downlink application layer data
Time Delay service from the WCDMA network to
(APP DL) the LTE network, which is the
difference between the time when the
last downlink application layer data
packet whose size is not 0 on the
WCDMA network to the time when
the downlink application layer data
packet whose size is not 0 on the LTE
network.

Table 21-50 Cell Reselection Parameter


IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description
Unit

Cell DRXCycles Value range: 0 Indicates the number of


Reselection to 63 discontinuous reception (DRX)
Parameter cycles.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 536


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Measurement The values are Indicates the measurement type.


Rules as follows:
l Measure
intra
frequency
neighbor
cells
l Measure low
priority
neighbor
cells
l Measure
equal
priority
neighbor
cells
l Measure
high priority
neighbor
cells
l Measure all
neighbor
cells

Max UE Tx Unit: dB Indicates the maximum transmit


Power power of a UE.

QRxLevel Unit: dB Indicates the minimum receive level


Min of a cell.

PMax Value range: -30 Indicates the maximum value that is


to 33 (unit: applicable for the intra-frequency
dBm) neighboring E-UTRAN cells.

SIntra Search Value range: 0 Indicates the threshold (in dBm) for
to 62 (unit: intra-frequency signal measurements.
dBm)

SNonIntra Value range: 0 Indicates the threshold (in dBm) for


Search to 62 (unit: E-UTRAN inter-frequency and inter-
dBm) RAT measurements.

Serving Value range: -30 Indicates the receiving level of the


RxLevel to 50 (unit: serving cell.
dBm)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 537


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-51 Freq Scanning


IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Freq FreqInfo Unit: MHz Indicates the scanned frequency


Scanning information on the LTE network.

FreqPower Unit: dBm Indicates the signal strength of each


frequency during frequency scan on
the LTE network.

Table 21-52 Cell Scan


IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Cell Scan EARFCN Value Range: 0 to Indicates the frequency involved in


262143 the cell searching test.

PCI Value Range: 0 to 503 Indicates the ID of the cell

RSRP Value range: -140 to -40 Indicates the measurement value of


(unit: dBm) the reference signal received power
(RSRP).

RSRQ Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the measurement value of


(unit: dB) the reference signal received
quality (RSRQ).

RSSI Value range: -140 to -10 Indicates the measurement value of


(unit: dBm) the received signal strength
indicator (RSSI).

SINR Value range: -20 to 50 Indicates the value of SINR.


(unit: dB)

DLBandWi Value: 5, 10, or 20 (unit: Indicates the downlink bandwidth.


dth MHz)

SCHRP Unit: dBm Indicates the reference signal


received power of the SCH_RP
synchronization channel.

Iot Unit: dB Indicates the Iot value.

Table 21-53 VoLTE Parameters


IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

VoLTE VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the hang-up delay.


Parameters Call End
delay

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 538


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description


NOTE RTP Delay Unit: ms Indicates the delay.
MOC Avg
indicates
the calling RTP Jitter Unit: ms Indicates the jitter.
part, and
MTC
Avg
indicates
eSRVCC Unit: ms Indicates the eSRVCC uplink
the called
part. UL handover delay on the user plane.
Delay(User
Plane)

eSRVCC Unit: ms Indicates the eSRVCC downlink


DL handover delay on the user plane.
Delay(User
Plane)

eSRVCC Unit: ms Indicates the eSRVCC handover


DL to UL delay on the user plane.
Delay(User
Plane)

Send Bit Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink coding rate.


Rate

Receive Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink coding rate.


Bit Rate

DL Max - Indicates the maximum number of


Continue consecutively lost packets on the
Packet downlink for audios.
Lost
Count(QCI
1)

UL Max - Indicates the maximum number of


Continue consecutively lost packets on the
Packet uplink for audios.
Lost
Count(QCI
1)

DL Max - Indicates the maximum number of


Continue consecutively lost packets on the
Packet downlink for videos.
Lost
Count(QCI
2)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 539


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

UL Max - Indicates the maximum number of


Continue consecutively lost packets on the
Packet uplink for videos.
Lost
Count(QCI
2)

RTP Lost Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the packet loss rate for
Rate(%) (unit: %) audios.
(QCI1)

RTP Lost Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the packet loss rate for
Rate(%) (unit: %) videos.
(QCI2)

VoLTE HO Unit: ms Indicates the uplink handover


UL interruption delay for audios on the
Interrupt user plane.
Delay(User
Plane)(ms)
(QCI1)

VoLTE HO Unit: ms Indicates the downlink handover


DL interruption delay for audios on the
Interrupt user plane.
Delay(User
Plane)(ms)
(QCI1)

VoLTE HO Unit: ms Indicates the uplink handover


UL interruption delay for videos on the
Interrupt user plane.
Delay(User
Plane)(ms)
(QCI2)

VoLTE HO Unit: ms Indicates the downlink handover


DL interruption delay for videos on the
Interrupt user plane.
Delay(User
Plane)(ms)
(QCI2)

VoLTECall Unit: ms Indicates the RRC connection setup


SetupDela delay for VoLTE outgoing calls.
yOnRRC(
MOC)

VoLTECall Unit: ms Indicates the RRC connection setup


SetupDela delay for VoLTE incoming calls.
yOnRRC(
MTC)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 540


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the average VoLTE fast


Fast return delay.
Return
LTE Delay
Avg

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE video


Video outgoing call setup delay.
Phone
Setup
Delay(MO
C)

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE video


Video incoming call setup delay.
Phone
Setup
Delay(MT
C)

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE video call


Video setup delay.
Phone
Setup
Delay(MO
C+MTC)

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE call setup


Call Setup delay.
Delay

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE handover


Handover delay.
Delay

VoLTE Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput


PDCP DL whose QCI is 1 at the PDCP layer.
Throughpu
t(QCI1)

VoLTE Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput


PDCP UL whose QCI is 1 at the PDCP layer.
Throughpu
t(QCI1)

VoLTE Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput


PDCP DL whose QCI is 2 at the PDCP layer.
Throughpu
t(QCI2)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 541


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

VoLTE Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput


PDCP UL whose QCI is 2 at the PDCP layer.
Throughpu
t(QCI2)

VoLTE Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the percentage of the


Padding (unit: %) uplink VoLTE service padding.
UL Rate

VoLTE Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the percentage of the


Padding (unit: %) downlink VoLTE service padding.
DL Rate

IMS Unit: ms Indicates the average IMS


Register registration delay.
Delay

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the uplink VoLTE SPS


SPS UL average scheduling duration.
Duration

VoLTE Unit: ms Indicates the downlink VoLTE SPS


SPS DL average scheduling duration.
Duration

VoLTE Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the uplink VoLTE SPS


SPS UL (unit: %) scheduling rate.
Rate

VoLTE Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the downlink VoLTE SPS


SPS DL (unit: %) scheduling rate.
Rate

VoLTE IP Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the uplink VoLTE IP


RoHC UL (unit: %) packet header compression
Rate (ROHC) rate.

VoLTE IP Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the downlink VoLTE IP


RoHC DL (unit: %) packet header compression
Rate (ROHC) rate.

VoLTE Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the uplink VoLTE TTI


TTI UL (unit: %) (transmission time interval)
Schedule schedule rate.
Rate

VoLTE Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the downlink VoLTE TTI


TTI DL (unit: %) schedule rate.
Schedule
Rate

Audio RTP Unit: ms Indicates the audio RTP delay.


Delay

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 542


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Video RTP Unit: ms Indicates the video RTP delay.


Delay

Audio RTP Unit: ms Indicates the audio RTP jitter.


Jitter

Video RTP Unit: ms Indicates the video RTP jitter.


Jitter

Table 21-54 PDSCH Parameters


IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

PDSCH SCC1 Value range: 1 to 4 Indicates the number of layers


Parameters PDSCH during layered data transmission
Number of through the PDSCH.
Layers

SCC1 Value range: 0 to 3 Indicates the number of TBs


PDSCH
Number of
TBs

SCC1 Value range: 0 to 15 Indicates the hybrid automatic


PDSCH repeat ID of TB0.
HARQ ID
TB0

SCC1 Value range: 0 to 15 Indicates the hybrid automatic


PDSCH repeat ID of TB1.
HARQ ID
TB1

SCC1 Value range: 0 to 3 Indicates the TB0 redundancy


PDSCH version number.
Redundanc
y version
TB0

SCC1 Value range: 0 to 3 Indicates the TB1 redundancy


PDSCH version number.
Redundanc
y version
TB1

SCC1 Value: 0 or 1 Indicates the TB0 retransmission


PDSCH data ID. 0 indicates the
New Data retransmission data, and 1 indicates
Indicator the non-retransmission data.
TB0

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 543


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

SCC1 Value: 0 or 1 Indicates the TB1 retransmission


PDSCH data ID. 0 indicates the
New Data retransmission data, and 1 indicates
Indicator the non-retransmission data.
TB1

SCC1 Value Indicates the TB0 cyclic


PDSCH l CRC fail redundancy check (CRC) result.
CRC result
TB0 l CRC pass

SCC1 Value Indicates the TB1 CRC result.


PDSCH l CRC fail
CRC result
TB1 l CRC pass

SCC1 l Present Indicates whether TB0 discards the


PDSCH l None reselection data caused by ACK/
Discarded NACK signaling detection errors.
Retx l Present indicates that TB0
present discards the reselection data.
TB0
l None indicates that TB0 does
not discard the reselection data.

SCC1 l Present Indicates whether TB1 discards the


PDSCH l None reselection data caused by ACK/
Discarded NACK signaling detection errors.
Retx l Present indicates that TB1
present discards the reselection data.
TB1
l None indicates that TB1 does
not discard the reselection data.

SCC1 l Yes Indicates whether TB0 has


PDSCH l No combined the existing data with the
Did retransmitted data.
Recombini
ng TB0

SCC1 l Yes Indicates whether TB1 has


PDSCH l No combined the existing data with the
Did retransmitted data.
Recombini
ng TB1

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 544


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-55 PHY MAC RLC PDCP RRC NAS Information


IE Set IE Value Range/ Description
Name Unit

PDCP PDCP Cipher SRB Value: Indicates the signaling


Parame DL Alg Cipher l None radio bearer (SRB) cipher
ters config/ Algo algorithm.
PDCP l Snow3G
UL l AES
config
SRB - Indicates the SRB cipher
Cipher key index.
Key Idx

SRB Value: Indicates the SRB integrity


Integ l None algorithm.
Algo
l Snow3G
l AES

SRB - Indicates the SRB integrity


Integ key index.
Key Idx

DRB Value: Indicates the data radio


Cipher l None bearer (DRB) cipher
Algo algorithm.
l Snow3G
l AES

DRB - Indicates the DRB cipher


Cipher key index.
Key Idx

Number - Indicates the number of


active activated radio bearers
RB (RBs).

RB RB ID - Indicates the RB ID.


statistic
RB-Cfg - Indicates the RB
Idx configuration index.

EPS ID - Indicates the EPS ID.

RB Value: Indicates the RB mode.


Mode l AM
l UM

RB Value: Indicates the RB type.


Type l SRB
l DRB

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 545


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

SN Value (bit): Indicates the SN length.


Length l 5
l 7
l 12

ROHC - Indicates the ROHC


Enabled enabling ID.

Discard Unit: ms Indicates the discard timer


Timer length.

PDCP DL Rb Cfg - Indicates the radio bearer


Statistics/PDCP Idx (RB) configuration index.
UL Statistics
Num - Indicates the number of
Data data packets received at
PDU the PDCP layer.
Rx

Num - Indicates the number of


Data data packet bytes received
PDU at the PDCP layer.
Rx
Bytes

Num - Indicates the number of


Control control-plane data packets
PDU received at the PDCP
Rx layer.

Num - Indicates the number of


Control control-plane data packet
PDU bytes received at the
Rx PDCP layer.
Bytes

Num - Indicates the number of


Data data packets transmitted at
PDU the PDCP layer.
Tx

Num - Indicates the number of


Data data packet bytes
PDU transmitted at the PDCP
Tx layer.
Bytes

Num - Indicates the number of


Control control-plane data packets
PDU transmitted at the PDCP
Tx layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 546


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

Num - Indicates the number of


Control control-plane data packet
PDU bytes transmitted at the
Tx PDCP layer.
Bytes

Num - Indicates the number of


ROHC data packets whose robust
Fail header compression
(ROHC) fails at the PDCP
layer.

PHY PCFICH_Informat System Value range: 0 to Indicates the system frame


Parame ion Frame 1023 number (SFN).
ters Number

Sub- Value range: 0 to 9 Indicates the subframe


frame number.
Number

PDCCH - Indicates the physical


Demap downlink control channel
Status (PDCCH) demapping
status.

PCFIC - Describes the PCFICH


H CFI control format indicator
(CFI).

PHICH Value: Describes the physical


Include l 0: Indicates hybrid ARQ indicator
d PHICH channel (PHICH)
information. information indicator bit.
l 1: Indicates no
PHICH
information.

PHICH Value range: 0 to Indicates the PHICH SFN.


Timing 1023
SFN

PHICH Value range: 0 to 9 Indicates the PHICH


Timing subframe number.
Sub-fn

PHICH Value: Indicates ACK/NACK


Value l 0: PHICH feedback from the hybrid
NAK automatic repeat request
(HARQ) carried by the
l 1: PHICH PHICH.
ACK

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 547


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

PHICH Value: Indicates ACK/NACK


1 Value l 0: PHICH feedback from the HARQ
NAK carried by PHICH1.
l 1: PHICH
ACK

RNTI Value: Indicates the RNTI type.


Type l C_RNTI
l SPS_RNTI
l P_RNTI
l RA_RNTI
l TEMP_C_RN
TI
l SI_RNTI
l TPC_PUSCH_
RNTI
l TPC_PUCCH_
RNTI
l MBMS RNTI

Aggreg Value: Indicates the PDCCH


ation l Agg1 aggregation level.
Level
l Agg2
l Agg4
l Agg8

CellInd - Indicates cell index


ex information.

CFI1 - Indicates the number of


Number times that the control
format indicator (CFI) of
the physical control format
indicator channel
(PCFICH) is 1.

CFI2 - Indicates the number of


Number times that the CFI of the
PCFICH is 2.

CFI3 - Indicates the number of


Number times that the CFI of the
PCFICH is 3.

CFI4 - Indicates the number of


Number times that the CFI of the
PCFICH is 4.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 548


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

PHICH - Indicates the number of


Ack ACK messages sent
Number through the PHICH.

PHICH - Indicates the number of


Nack NACK messages through
Number the PHICH.

New Value: Indicates the downlink


DL Tx l False transmission ID.
l True

PDCCH PDCCH Value range: 0 to Indicates the PDCCH


Information Timing 1023 SFN.
SFN

PDCCH Value range: 0 to 9 Indicates the PDCCH


Timing subframe number.
Sub-fn

HARQ Value range: 0 to Indicates the HARQ


Number 14 process number.

RB Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Number 100 resource blocks (RBs).

RNTI Value: Indicates the RNTI type.


Type l RA_RNTI
l P_RNTI
l SI_RNTI
l C_RNTI
l SPC_RNTI
l TC_RNTI

TB1 Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the modulation


MCS and coding scheme (MCS)
of TB1.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 549


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

TB1 TB Unit: bit. Value Indicates the size of TB1.


Size range:
l Single layer of
a single
codeword:
16-75376
l Two-layer of a
single
codeword:
16-149776
l Four-layer of a
single
codeword:
16-299856

TB2 Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the MCS of TB2.


MCS

TB2 TB Unit: bit. Value Indicates the size of TB2.


Size range:
l Single layer of
a single
codeword:
16-75376
l Two-layer of a
single
codeword:
16-149776
l Four-layer of a
single
codeword:
16-299856

TPC Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the transmit


Value power control value.

Predeco Value range: 0 to Indicates the delivered


ding 63 precoding matrix indicator
Informa (PMI) index for DCI1B/
tion 1D:eNB.
Indicates the precoding
information on DCI2/2A.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 550


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

Format Value: Indicates the DCI format.


l DCI0
l DCI1
l DCI1A
l DCI1B
l DCI1C
l DCI1D
l DCI2
l DCI2A
l DCI2B
l DCI2C
l DCI3
l DCI3A
l DCI4

DCI Statistic CellInd - Indicates the index of a


Information ex cell.

DCI DL Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Number 1000 downlink control
information (DCI) on the
downlink PDCCH.
NOTE
The last scheduling in the
previous period occurs at the
start point of the following
period. Therefore, the
scheduling will be calculated
in the following period and
there are 1001 scheduling
times within one second.

DCI UL Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Number 1000 DCIs on the uplink
PDCCH.
NOTE
The last scheduling in the
previous period occurs at the
start point of the following
period. Therefore, the
scheduling will be calculated
in the following period and
there are 1001 scheduling
times within one second.

DCI0 - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 0.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 551


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

DCI1 - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 1.

DCI1A - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 1A.

DCI1B - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 1B.

DCI1C - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 1C.

DCI1D - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 1D.

DCI2 - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 2.

DCI2A - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 2A.

DCI2B - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 2B.

DCI2C - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 2C.

DCI3 - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 3.

DCI3A - Indicates the number of


Number DCIs when DCI is 3A.

Timing First Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Information Path 65535 times that the first path
Fail traced periodically fails to
Number be determined.

First Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Path 65535 times that the first path
Fail traced periodically fails to
Three be determined for three
Number consecutive times.

First Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Path 65535 times that the first path
Fail traced periodically fails to
Three be determined for three
Switch consecutive times but is in
Number the handover state.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 552


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

First Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Path 65535 times that the first path
Number traced periodically is
determined.

First Value range: 0 to Indicates the threshold that


Path 4294967296 the first path is traced
String periodically.
Value

First Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Path 65535 times that the first path
Success traced periodically is
Number determined successfully.

First Value range: 0 to Indicates the value of the


Path 4294967296 first path that is traced
Value periodically.

Adjust Value range: 0 to Indicates the adjustment


Point 65535 point that is traced
periodically.

Frequen Unit: Hz Indicates the downlink


cy frequency offset.
Offset

Max Value range: 0 to Indicates the position of


Path 65535 the maximum path that is
Position traced periodically.

Max Value range: 0 to Indicates the value of the


Path 4294967296 maximum path that is
Value traced periodically.

CCE Statistic CCE1 - Indicates the number of


Information Number CCEs with the aggregation
level of 1.

CCE2 - Indicates the number of


Number CCEs with the aggregation
level of 2.

CCE4 - Indicates the number of


Number CCEs with the aggregation
level of 4.

CCE8 - Indicates the number of


Number CCEs with the aggregation
level of 8.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 553


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

CCE16 - Indicates the number of


Number CCEs with the aggregation
level of 16.

CCE32 - Indicates the number of


Number CCEs with the aggregation
level of 32.

CCE Information CCE - Indicates the control


Start channel element (CCE)
start position.

CCE - Indicates the CCE


Number aggregation level.

Format Value: Indicates the downlink


l DCI0 control information (DCI)
format.
l DCI1
l DCI1A
l DCI1B
l DCI1C
l DCI1D
l DCI2
l DCI2A
l DCI2B
l DCI2C
l DCI3
l DCI3A
l DCI4

RNTI Value: Indicates the radio network


Type l 0: RA_RNTI temporary identifier
(RNTI) type.
l 1: P_RNTI
l 2: SI_RNTI
l 3: C_RNTI
l 4: SPC_RNTI
l 5: TC_RNTI

Measurement ID Measur Value range: 0 to Indicates the measurement


Configuration ement 31 ID.
ID

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 554


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

Measur Value range: 0 to Indicates the measurement


ement 31 target ID.
Object
ID

Report Value range: 0 to Indicates the reported


Configu 31 configuration ID.
ration
ID

Measurement Measur Value range: 0 to Indicates the measurement


Object ement 31 target ID.
Configuration Object
ID

Carrier Value range: 0 to Indicates the carrier


Frequen 65535 frequency.
cy

Physica Value range: 0 to Indicates the physical cell


l Cell 503 ID.
ID

Cell Value range: -24 Indicates the cell


Individ to 24 (unit: dB) individual offset.
ual
Offset

Measurement Report Value range: 0 to Indicates the reported


Reporting Configu 31 configuration ID.
Configuration ration
ID

Trigger l Event A1 Indicates the trigger type.


Type l Event A2
l Event A3
l Event A4
l Event A5
l B1
l B2
l Periodic

Thresho l RSRP: -140 Indicates the threshold.


ld1 dB to 44 dB NOTE
l RSRQ: -20 dB The threshold is valid only if
the Trigger Type value is
to -3 dB
Event A1, Event A2, Event
A4, or Event A5.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 555


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

Hystere Value range: 0 to Indicates the hysteresis


sis(dBm 15 (unit: dBm) value.
)

Time to Value (ms): Indicates the time to


Trigger l 0 trigger.
l 40
l 64
l 80
l 100
l 128
l 160
l 256
l 320
l 480
l 512
l 640
l 1024
l 1280
l 2560
l 5120

Offset(d Value range: -15 Indicates the offset value.


Bm) to 15 (unit: dB) NOTE
This parameter value is valid
only if the Trigger Type
value is Event A3.

Trigger l RSRP Indicates the trigger


Quantit l RSRQ quantity.
y

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 556


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

MAC MAC Rach Rach Value: Indicates the random


Parame Attempt Result l Success access result.
ters
l Failure at
MSG2
l Failure at
MSG4 due to
CT timer
expired
l Failure at
MSG4 due to
CT resolution
is not passed
l Aborted

Preambl Value range: 0 to Indicates the preamble


e Index 63 sequence index before the
random access.

Preambl - Indicates the preamble


e Power power offset.
Offset

Backoff - Indicates the backoff


Value parameter value contained
in the Msg2.

TCRNT - Indicates the cell radio


I network temporary
identifier (C-RNTI).

TA - Indicates the timing


value advance (TA) value.

MAC Entity CellInd - Indicates the index of a


ex cell.

TA Value range: 0 to Indicates the value of the


TimerL 10240 timer for the tracing area
ength (TA) at the MAC Layer.

ULSub - Indicates the number of


Carrier subcarriers in each
RBNum resource block on the
ber uplink at the MAC Layer.

ULSym - Indicates the number of


bolNum symbols for each timeslot
ber on uplink channels at the
MAC Layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 557


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

ULSyst - Indicates the number of


emRBN system resource blocks
umber that use the uplink
bandwidth at the MAC
Layer.

DLSyst - Indicates the number of


emRBN system resource blocks
umber that use the downlink
bandwidth at the MAC
Layer.

Antenn - Indicates the number of


aPortNu antenna ports at the MAC
mber Layer.

DL Data Active - Indicates the number of


Transport Demult service data units received
FailNu on the downlink at the
mber MAC Layer that fail to be
demultiplexed when
PDSCHs are in activated
state.

Active - Indicates the number of


Demult service data units received
ySucces on the downlink at the
sNumbe MAC Layer that are
r demultiplexed successfully
when PDSCHs are in
activated state.

ActiveP - Indicates the number of


DSCHC times that the correct
rcCorre cyclic redundancy checks
ctNumb (CRCs) are performed on
er the service data units
received on the downlink
at the MAC Layer when
PDSCHs are in activated
state.

ActiveP - Indicates the number of


DSCHC times that the incorrect
rcError cyclic redundancy checks
Number (CRCs) are performed on
the service data units
received on the downlink
at the MAC Layer when
PDSCHs are in activated
state.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 558


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

PDSCH - Indicates the number of


CrcCorr times that the correct
ectNum CRCs are performed on
ber the data packets received
on the downlink at the
MAC Layer regardless of
the states of PDSCHs.

PDSCH - Indicates the number of


CrcErro times that the incorrect
rNumbe CRCs are performed on
r the data packets received
on the downlink at the
MAC Layer regardless of
the states of PDSCHs.

PDSCH - Indicates the total number


TotalDa of data packets received on
taNumb the downlink PDSCHs at
er the MAC Layer.

UL Data Receive Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Transport DCI0N 1000 DCI0s that are received on
umber the uplink at the MAC
Layer.

ParseD Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


CI0Suc 1000 DCI0s that are
cessNu successfully parsed by the
mber uplink at the MAC Layer.

SendPU Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


CCHSu 1000 data packets that are
ccessNu successfully sent on the
mber uplink PUCCHs at the
MAC Layer.

SendPU Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


SCHSu 1000 data packets that are
ccessNu successfully sent on the
mber uplink PUSCHs at the
MAC Layer.

PUSCH Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


Dynami 1000 data packets that are
cNumb dynamically scheduled on
er uplink PUSCHs.

PUSCH Value range: 0 to Indicates the number of


SemiSta 1000 data packets that are semi-
ticNum statically scheduled on
ber uplink PUSCHs.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 559


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

RLC RLC UL Number - Indicates the number of


Parame Config/RLC DL active activated radio bearers
ters Config RB (RBs).

RB Value: Indicates the RB mode.


mode l AM
l UM

LC ID - Indicates the link control


(LC) ID.

RB ID - Indicates the RB ID.

RB-Cfg - Indicates the RB


Idx configuration index.

RB type Value: Indicates the RB type.


l SRB
l DRB

T Unit: ms Indicates the length of the


Reorder reordering timer at the
ing receive (RX).

SN Unit: bit Indicates the SN length.


length NOTE
This parameter value is valid
only if the RB mode value is
set to UM.

T Poll Value range: 5 to Indicates the polling


Retx 500 (ms) retransmission interval
managed by the transmit
(TX).
NOTE
This parameter value is valid
only if the RB mode value is
set to AM.

Max - Indicates the maximum


Retx number of retransmissions.
Thresho NOTE
ld This parameter value is valid
only if the RB mode value is
set to AM.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 560


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Value Range/ Description


Name Unit

RRC PRACH HighSp True or False. Indicates the high speed


Parame Configure eedFlag False indicates the flag.
ters Parameter low speed
(restricted). True
indicates the high
speed
(unrestricted).

Table 21-56 PHY Channel Information


IE Set IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

PDSCH System Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the system frame number
Parameter Frame (SFN).
Number

Sub-frame Value range: 0 to 9 Indicates the subframe number.


Number

PDSCH - Indicates the PDSCH ID.


Channel
ID

HARQ ID Value range: 0 to 15 Indicates the hybrid automatic


repeat request process ID.

RNTI Type l C-RNTI Indicates the type of radio network


l SPS C-RNTI temporary identifier (RNTI).
l P-RNTI
l RA-RNTI
l Temporary C-RNTI
l SI-RNTI
l TPC-PUSCH
l TPC-PUCCH
l MBMS-RNTI

NDI - Indicates the network ID.

Retransmis Value range: 0 to 7 Indicates the number of


sion retransmission times.
Number

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 561


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-57 eMBMS Parameters


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

PMCH SNR Value range: -20 to 50 Indicates the SNR of the Physical
(unit: dB) Multicast Channel.

PMCH BLER Range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the block error rate of the
%) PMCH.

MCCH MCS Value range: 0 to 31 Indicates the MCS of the MCCH.

MTCH MCS Value range: 0 to 31 Indicates the MCS of the MTCH.

PMCH Throughput - Indicates the average throughput of


the PMCH.

Service Area ID Value range: 0 to 255 Indicates the service area ID of the
eMBMS.

RB Value range: 0 to 100000 Indicates the number of RBs occupied


by the PMCH.

DL Grant Count Value range: 0 to 1000 Indicates the number of downlink


scheduling times.

CSAP Value range: 0 to 256. Indicates the common subframe


Unit: rfs. allocation period.

MSP Value range: 0 to 1024. Indicates the MCH scheduling period.


Unit: rfs.

SymbolsDiscarded- - Indicates the number of lost packets at


NumBeforeFEC the TMGI application layer (before
FEC modification).

SymbolsDiscarded- - Indicates the number of lost packets at


NumAfterFEC the TMGI application layer (after FEC
modification).

TotalReceivedSym- - Indicates the total number of data


bols packets at the TMGI application layer.

SymbosDiscardRate Range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the packet loss rate at the
%) TMGI application layer.

21.1.8 Description of NB-IoT IEs


This section describes the information elements (IEs) regarding NB-IoT. You can refer to this
section for IE information about Radio Parameters, MCS and Throughput.
In the windows related to NB-IoT, UL refers to uplink transmission and DL refers to
downlink transmission.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 562


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-58 NB-IoT IE

IE Set Description

Radio Parameters Contains IEs related to Radio Parameters.


For details, see Table 21-59.

Throughput Contains IEs related to Throughput. For


details, see Table 21-60.

MCS Contains IEs related to MCS. For details,


see Table 21-61.

BLER Contains IEs related to BLER. For details,


see Table 21-62.

Table 21-59 Radio Parameters

IE Name Value Value range/Unit Description

EARFCN Value range: 0 to 262143 Indicates the E-UTRA


absolute radio frequency
channel number.

PCI Value range: 0 to 503 Indicates the ID of the primary


cell.

RSRP Value range: -140 to -40, Unit: Indicates the reference signal
dBm received power.

RSRQ Value range: -140 to -40, Unit: Indicates the reference signal
dB received quality.

RSSI Value range: -140 to -10, Unit: Indicates the received signal
dBm strength indicator.

SINR Value range: -20 to 50, Unit: Indicates the average SINR.
dB

Tx Power Value range: -50 to 23, Unit: Indicates the transmit power.
dBm.
NOTE
If the value is less than -50 or
more than 23, it will be -7 and 23
respectively.

UL Repetition Number - Indicates the number of uplink


retransmission.

DL Repetition Number - Indicates the number of


downlink retransmission.

Coverage Level Value range: 0, 1 and 2 Indicates the coverage level.

UL RU - Indicates the uplink scheduling


resource units.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 563


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Value range/Unit Description

DL RU - Indicates the downlink


scheduling resource units.

DL Subframe Number - Indicates the number of


downlink subframes.

Subcarrier SN - Indicates the number of uplink


subcarriers.

MCC Value range: 000 to 999 Indicates the mobile country


code (MCC) for the locked
public land mobile network
(PLMN).

MNC Value range: 00 to 99 or 000 to Indicates the mobile network


999 code (MNC) for the locked
public land mobile network
(PLMN).

TAC Value range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the tracking Area


Code.

Cell ID Value range: 0 to 268435455 Indicates the ID of a cell.

Last Preamble Power Value range: -50 to 23 Indicates the preamble TX


power.

MSG3–5 Power Value range: -50 to 23 Indicates the MSG3/MSG5


TX power.

RLF - Indicates the number of link


failures.

Out of Sync - Indicates the number of out-


of-synchronization times.

Attach Delay Unit: ms Indicates the attach delay.

RRC Connection Delay Unit: ms Indicates the RRC connection


setup delay.

Paging Time Unit: ms Indicates the paging delay.

Time to PSM Unit: ms Indicates the delay of entering


the PSM mode.

UL Retransmission Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the Uplink


Rate retransmission BLER.

DL Retransmission Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the downlink


Rate retransmission BLER.

Sub Carrier Spacing Value range: 3.75 and 15. Indicates the sub carrier
Unit: KHz. spacing.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 564


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Value range/Unit Description

DCI N0 Repetition - Indicates the number of


Number downlink control information
N0 retransmission.

DCI N1 Repetition - Indicates the number of


Number downlink control information
N1 retransmission.

UL ACK - Indicates the uplink ACK


observation.

UL NACK - Indicates the uplink NACK


observation.

DL ACK - Indicates the downlink ACK


observation.

DL NACK - Indicates the downlink NACK


observation.

UL RLC Unit: byte Indicates the uplink


throughput at the RLC layer.

DL RLC Unit: byte Indicates the downlink


throughput at the RLC layer.

UL MAC Unit: byte Indicates the uplink


throughput at the MAC layer.

DL MAC Unit: byte Indicates the downlink


throughput at the MAC layer.

Preambles Sent - Indicates the number of sent


preambles.

Preambles ACKed - Indicates the number of ACK


messages after preambles are
sent.

PDCCH DCI Messages - Indicates the number of sent


Sent DCI messages.

PDCCH DCI Messages - Indicates the number of


Received received DCI messages.

PDSCH DCI Messages - Indicates the number of


Sent messages sent on the PDSCH.

PDSCH DCI Messages - Indicates the number of


Received messages received on the
PDSCH.

Repetitions PDSCH - Indicates the data repeatedly


Delivery sending times on the PDSCH.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 565


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Value range/Unit Description

PDSCH Messages Total Unit: byte Indicates the size of data


received on the PDSCH.

PUSCH Messages Sent Unit: byte Indicates the size of data sent
by UEs.

PUSCH Messages Unit: byte Indicates the size of data


Received received by base stations.

Repetitions PUSCH - Indicates the data repeatedly


Delivery sending times on the PUSCH.

PUSCH Message Total Unit: byte Indicates the size of data sent
on the PUSCH.

Table 21-60 Throughput

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Throughput RLC UL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink


throughput rate at the RLC
layer.

Throughput RLC DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink


throughput rate at the RLC
layer.

Throughput MAC UL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink


throughput rate at the MAC
layer.

Throughput MAC DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink


throughput rate at the MAC
layer.

Table 21-61 MCS

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

MCS Expect/s Value range: 0 to 1000 Indicates the expected MCS


per second.

BPSK Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the rate of frames


modulated in Binary Phase
Shift Keying (BPSK) mode.

QPSK Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the rate of frames


modulated in Quadrature
Phase Shift Keying (QPSK)
mode.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 566


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

UL Count - Indicates the number of times


each MCS is invoked during
an uplink period.

UL Modulation - Indicates the uplink


modulation mode, such as
BPSK and QPSK modes.
NOTE
If this parameter value is NULL,
it is invalid.

DL Count - Indicates the number of times


each MCS is invoked during a
downlink period.

DL Modulation - Indicates the downlink


modulation mode, such as
BPSK and QPSK modes.
NOTE
If this parameter value is NULL,
it is invalid.

Single-tone Subcarrier Value range: 1 to 12 Indicates the number of


Number subcarriers in single-tone
mode.

Table 21-62 BLER


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

RLC UL(%) Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the uplink initial
BLER.

RLC DL(%) Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the downlink initial
BLER.

MAC UL(%) Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the uplink


retransmission BLER.

MAC DL(%) Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the downlink


retransmission BLER.

21.1.9 Description of LTE Scanner IEs


This section describes LTE scanner IEs. You can refer to this section when using the Assistant
to analyze the scanner data on the LTE network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 567


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

EARFCN Scanner Nth Value range: 0 Indicates the EARFCN of the Nth
EARFCN to 262143 strongest cell sorted by RSRP. For
example:
l Scanner 1st EARFCN indicates the
EARFCN of the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th EARFCN indicates the
EARFCN of the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

CI Scanner Nth Value range: 0 Indicates the CI of the Nth strongest cell
ECI to 255 sorted by RSRP. For example:
l Scanner 1st ECI indicates the CI of the
first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th ECI indicates the CI of the
sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

PCI Scanner Nth - Indicates the PCI of the Nth strongest cell
PCI sorted by RSRP. For example:
l Scanner 1st PCI indicates the PCI of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th PCI indicates the PCI of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

RSRP Scanner Nth Value range: Indicates the RSRP of the Nth strongest
RSRP -140 to -40 cell sorted by RSRP. For example:
(unit: dBm) l Scanner 1st RSRP indicates the RSRP
of the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th RSRP indicates the RSRP
of the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

RSRQ Scanner Nth Value range: Indicates the RSRQ of the Nth strongest
RSRQ -40 to 0 (unit: cell sorted by RSRP. For example:
dB) l Scanner 1st RSRQ indicates the RSRQ
of the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th RSRQ indicates the RSRQ
of the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 568


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

RSSI Scanner Nth Value range: Indicates the RSSI of the Nth strongest cell
RSSI -140 to -10 sorted by RSRP. For example:
(unit: dBm) l Scanner 1st RSSI indicates the RSSI of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th RSSI indicates the RSSI of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

SIR Scanner Nth Unit: dB Indicates the SIR of the Nth strongest cell
SIR sorted by RSRP. For example:
l Scanner 1st SIR indicates the SIR of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th SIR indicates the SIR of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

SINR Scanner Nth - Indicates the SINR of the Nth strongest


SINR cell sorted by RSRP. For example:
l Scanner 1st SINR indicates the SINR
of the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th SINR indicates the SINR
of the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

Multi Path Scanner Nth - Indicates the multipathing delay of the Nth
Delay Multi Path strongest cell sorted by RSRP. For
Delay example:
l Scanner 1st Multi Path Delay indicates
the Multi Path Delay value of the first
strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th Multi Path Delay indicates
the Multi Path Delay value of the sixth
strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

ISSI Scanner Nth Unit: dBm Indicates the ISSI of the Nth strongest cell
ISSI sorted by RSRP.
l Scanner 1st ISSI indicates the ISSI of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th ISSI indicates the ISSI of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 569


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

Nth PCI_M - Indicates the PCI of the cell with


EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.

Nth RSRP_M Value range: Indicates the RSRP of the cell with
-140 to -40 EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
(unit: dBm) strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.

Nth RSRQ_M Value range: Indicates the RSRQ of the cell with
-40 to 0 (unit: EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
dB) strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.

Nth RSSI_M Value range: Indicates the RSSI of the cell with
-140 to -10 EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
(unit: dBm) strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.

Nth SINR_M - Indicates the SINR of the cell with


EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.

Nth Multi Path Delay_M - Indicates the multi-path delay of the cell
with EARFCN M and the Nth strongest
signal strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.

Value range: Enables the system to display the RSRP by


RSRP for PCI -140 to -40 PCI.
(unit: dBm)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 570


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

Value range: Enables the system to display the RSRQ


RSRQ for PCI -40 to 0 (unit: by PCI.
dB)

Value range: Enables the system to display the RSSI by


RSSI for PCI -140 to -10 PCI.
(unit: dBm)

Value range: Enables the system to display the SINR by


SINR for PCI -20 to +50 PCI.
(unit: dB)

Value range: Enables the system to display the RSRP of


Serving RSRP for PCI -140 to -40 serving cells by PCI.
(unit: dBm)

Value range: Enables the system to display the RSRQ of


Serving RSRQ for PCI -40 to 0 (unit: serving cells by PCI.
dB)

Value range: Enables the system to display the RSSI of


Serving RSSI for PCI -140 to -10 serving cells by PCI.
(unit: dBm)

Value range: Enables the system to display the SINR of


Serving SINR for PCI -20 to +50 serving cells by PCI.
(unit: dB)

Enables the system to display the pilot


Value range: 0 pollution information about the drive test
Pilot Pollution Point
to 8 (DT) points that meet the pilot pollution
conditions.

Indicates the average RSSI between band


Average RSSI on M-N unit: dBm
M and N.

21.1.10 Predefined IEs


This section describes the IEs under the Custom node on the Project tab page. You can refer
to this section when viewing corresponding IEs in the IE view window.

Table 21-63 Common predefined IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit/ Description
Value

App DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink throughput


Throughput at the application layer.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 571


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit/ Description


Value

App UL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput at


Throughput the application layer.

Period App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink throughput


Throughput DL at the application layer calculated in a
period.
NOTE
Users can set the statistical period as required.
For detailed operations, see 17.5 Predefined
IEs.
Such IEs can be correctly calculated only in
NoBining analysis mode.

Period App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput at


Throughput UL the application layer calculated in a period.

Calling Setup - Indicates the number of access success


Success times when the call setup delay is greater
Delay(>8s) than 8s.

Email Download - Indicates the number of times when the


Delay(>=20s) complete email receiving delay is greater
than or equal to 20s.

Email UpLoad - Indicates the number of times when the


Delay(>=20s) email sending delay is greater than or equal
to 20s.

Download - Indicates the latitude when the download


Session LAT test ends.
End

Download - Indicates the longitude when the download


Session LON test ends.
End

Download - Indicates the PSC when the download test


Session SC End ends.

Download - Indicates the location area code (LAC)


Session LAC when the download test ends.
End

Upload Session - Indicates the latitude when the upload test


LAT End ends.

Upload Session - Indicates the longitude when the upload test


LON End ends.

Upload Session - Indicates the PSC when the upload test


SC End ends.

Upload Session - Indicates the location area code (LAC)


LAC End when the upload test ends.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 572


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit/ Description


Value

HTTP Browsing - Indicates the number of times when the


Display complete page opening delay is greater than
Delay(>=10s) or equal to 10s.

HTTP Browsing - Indicates the number of times when the


Page Response page opening delay is greater than or equal
Delay(>=5s) to 5s.

Http Video - Indicates the number of times when the


Delay(>=8s) video play delay is greater than or equal to
8s.

Network Disk - Indicates the number of times when the web


Download disk download start delay is greater than or
Delay(>=5s) equal to 5s.

Network Disk - Indicates the number of times when the web


Upload disk upload start delay is greater than or
Delay(>=5s) equal to 5s.

Email Download - Indicates the number of times when the


Delay(>=10s) email message receiving delay is greater
than or equal to 10s.

BaiduNetDiskTh Unit: kbit/s Indicates the Baidu netdisk downlink


roughputDL throughput rate.

BaiduNetDiskTh Unit: kbit/s Indicates the Baidu netdisk uplink


roughputUL throughput rate.

Table 21-64 Predefined GSM IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit/ Description
Value

GSM BCCH C/I - Indicates the downlink interference on the


broadcast control channel (BCCH).
The downlink interference is generated on
the BCCH when both of the following
conditions are met: (1) RxLev > -85 dBm;
(2) C/I < 9 dB

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 573


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit/ Description


Value

GSM DL The values are as Indicates the downlink interference on the


Interference follows: TCH.
l Good: indicates that l RxLev_Sub ≥ -85dBm, Rxqual_Sub ≥ 7
no cells are l RxLev_Sub ≥ -80dBm, Rxqual_Sub ≥ 6
experiencing
downlink l RxLev_Sub ≥ -75dBm,Rxqual_Sub ≥ 5
interference on the The downlink interference on the TCH is
traffic channel generated if either of the preceding
(TCH). conditions is met.
l Bad: indicates that
there are cells
experiencing
downlink
interference on the
TCH.

GSM Island The values are as Indicates the isolated island effect.
follows: The isolated island occurs when both of the
l Good: indicates that following conditions are met: (1) TA ≥ 2;
no cells are (2) RxLev Sub > -80.00 dBm
experiencing the
isolated island effect.
l Bad: indicates that
there are cells
experiencing the
isolated island effect.

GSM Poor The values are as Indicates GSM poor coverage.


Coverage follows: The GSM poor coverage occurs when the
l Good: indicates that following condition is met: RxLev(Idle +
no cells are Sub) < -90 dBm
experiencing GSM
poor coverage.
l Bad: indicates that
there are cells
experiencing GSM
poor coverage.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 574


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-65 Predefined WCDMA IEs (UE)


IE Name Value Range/Unit/ Description
Value

WCDMA Poor The values are as Indicates WCDMA poor coverage.


Coverage follows: WCDMA poor coverage occurs when the
l Good: indicates that following condition is met: RSCP For 1st
no cells are Best In Active Set < -95dBm
experiencing
WCDMA poor
coverage.
l Bad: indicates that
there are cells
experiencing
WCDMA poor
coverage.

WCDMA DL The values are as Indicates the downlink interference on a


Interference follows: WCDMA network.
l Good: indicates that l Ec/Io For 1st Best In Active Set <
no cells are -10dBm
experiencing l RSCP For 1st Best In Active Set ≥
downlink interference -95dBm
on a WCDMA
network. The downlink interference is generated on a
WCDMA network if both of the preceding
l Bad: indicates that conditions are met.
there are cells
experiencing
downlink interference
on a WCDMA
network.

R99 App Value range: 0 to 14336 Indicates the uplink throughput at the R99
Throughput UL (unit: kbit/s) application layer.

HSUPA App Value range: 0 to 6144 Indicates the uplink throughput at the
Throughput UL (unit: kbit/s) HSUPA application layer.

R99 App Value range: 0 to 14336 Indicates the downlink throughput at the
Throughput DL (unit: kbit/s) R99 application layer.

HSDPA App Value range: 0 to 43008 Indicates the downlink throughput at the
Throughput DL (unit: kbit/s) HSDPA application layer.

Whole PP(UE) - Indicates the pilot pollution information of


all the DT points that meet the pilot
pollution conditions.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 575


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-66 Predefined WCDMA IEs (Scanner)


IE Name Value Range/Unit/ Description
Value

WCDMA Poor The values are as Indicates WCDMA poor coverage.


Coverage follows: WCDMA poor coverage occurs when the
l Good: indicates that following condition is met: RSCP For 1st
no cells are Best In Active Set < -95dBm
experiencing
WCDMA poor
coverage.
l Bad: indicates that
there are cells
experiencing
WCDMA poor
coverage.

WCDMA DL The values are as Indicates the downlink interference on a


Interference follows: WCDMA network.
l Good: indicates that l Ec/Io For 1st Best In Active Set <
no cells are -10dBm
experiencing l RSCP For 1st Best In Active Set ≥
downlink interference -95dBm
on a WCDMA
network. The downlink interference is generated on a
WCDMA network if both of the preceding
l Bad: indicates that conditions are met.
there are cells
experiencing
downlink interference
on a WCDMA
network.

Whole - Indicates the pilot pollution information of


PP(Scanner) all the DT points that meet the pilot
pollution conditions.

LTE Value range: 0 to 8 Indicates LTE overlapping coverage.


Overlapping
Coverage(Scann
er)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 576


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-67 Predefined LTE IEs


IE Name Value Range/Unit/Value Description

Pilot Pollution Point Value range: 0 to 8 Indicates the pilot pollution


information of all the DT
points that meet the pilot
pollution conditions. Pilot
pollution occurs when
multiple strong pilots exist
at a DT point but no pilot is
strong enough to be the
dominant pilot. When pilot
pollution occurs, the
network quality deteriorates,
call drops occur during
handovers, and the system
capacity decreases. Based
on pilot pollution analysis,
you can accurately locate
the pilot pollution area and
analyze the causes.

Serving RSRP - 1st Unit: dBm Indicates the RSRP


Neighbor RSRP difference between the
serving cell and the
strongest neighboring cell.

Period PHY Throughput DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink


throughput at the physical
layer calculated in a period.

Period PHY Throughput UL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink


throughput at the physical
layer calculated in a period.

Period MAC Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink


DL throughput at the Medium
Access Control (MAC)
layer calculated in a period.

Period MAC Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink


UL throughput at the MAC
layer calculated in a period.

Period RLC Throughput DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink


throughput at the Radio
Link Control (RLC) layer
calculated in a period.

Period RLC Throughput UL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink


throughput at the RLC layer
calculated in a period.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 577


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit/Value Description

Period PDCP Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink


DL throughput at the Packet
Data Convergence Protocol
(PDCP) layer calculated in a
period.

Period PDCP Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink


UL throughput at the PDCP
layer calculated in a period.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period before the
Before LTEInterFreqHOSuc LTEInterFreqHOSuc event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period after the
After LTEInterFreqHOSuc LTEInterFreqHOSuc event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average In period before or after the
LTEInterFreqHOSuc LTEInterFreqHOSuc event
occurs. The default period is
6 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period before the
Before LTEInterFreqHOFail LTEInterFreqHOFail event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period after the
After LTEInterFreqHOFail LTEInterFreqHOFail event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average In period before or after the
LTEInterFreqHOFail LTEInterFreqHOFail event
occurs. The default period is
6 seconds.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 578


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit/Value Description

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period before the
Before LTEIntraFreqHOSuc LTEIntraFreqHOSuc event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period after the
After LTEIntraFreqHOSuc LTEIntraFreqHOSuc event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average In period before or after the
LTEIntraFreqHOSuc LTEIntraFreqHOSuc event
occurs. The default period is
6 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period before the
Before LTEIntraFreqHOFail LTEIntraFreqHOFail event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average period after the
After LTEIntraFreqHOFail LTEIntraFreqHOFail event
occurs. The default period is
3 seconds.

RSRP/SINR/PDCP - Indicates the average value


Throughput DL/PDCP of each parameter during a
Throughput UL/Average In period before or after the
LTEIntraFreqHOFail LTEIntraFreqHOFail event
occurs. The default period is
6 seconds.

CA PDCP Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink


DL(CDF=5%) throughput rate at the PDCP
layer when CA is activated.

Custom PDCP Throughput Unit: Mbit/s Custom PDCP Throughput


DL(CDF=5%) DL = PDCP Throughput
DL/1000

LTE Overlapping Value range: 0 to 8 Indicates overlapping


Coverage(UE) coverage.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 579


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit/Value Description

LTE No Serving Cell(UE) Value range: 0 to 8 Indicates no serving cell.

Neighboring Cells Values: Good and Bad Indicates neighboring cell


Interference(UE) interference.

Mod3 Interference(UE) Values: Good and Bad Indicates Mod3 interference.

21.1.11 Description of WLAN UE IEs


This section describes WLAN UE IEs.

IE Set IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

AP Scan Result Top N Nth Best -10 to -140 Indicates the receive signal
RSSI RSSI strength of the Nth strongest
cell sorted by RSSI. The
value of N is less than or
equal to 6.
For example:
l 1st Best RSSI indicates
the signal strength of the
first strongest cell sorted
by RSSI.
l 2nd Best RSSI indicates
the signal strength of the
second strongest cell
sorted by RSSI.

Top N Channel for 1 to 14 Indicates the ARFCN of the


Channel Nth Best Nth strongest cell sorted by
RSSI RSSI. The value of N is less
than or equal to 6.
For example:
l Channel for 1st Best RSSI
indicates the ARFCN of
the first strongest cell
sorted by RSSI.
l Channel for 2nd Best
RSSI indicates the
ARFCN of the second
strongest cell sorted by
RSSI.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 580


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

Top N BSSID for - Indicates the basic service set


BSSID Nth Best identifier (BSSID) for the
RSSI basic (Access Point) AP of
the Nth strongest cell sorted
by RSSI. The value of N is
less than or equal to 6.
For example:
l BSSID for 1st Best RSSI
indicates the BSSID for
the basic AP of the first
strongest cell sorted by
RSSI.
l BSSID for 2nd Best RSSI
indicates the BSSID for
the basic AP of the second
strongest cell sorted by
RSSI.

TopN SSID for - Indicates the network name


SSID Nth Best of the Nth strongest cell
RSSI sorted by RSSI. The value of
N is less than or equal to 6.
For example:
l SSID for 1st Best RSSI
indicates the network
name of the first strongest
cell sorted by RSSI.
l SSID for 2nd Best RSSI
indicates the network
name of the second
strongest cell sorted by
RSSI.

TopN Privacy for - Indicates the rights of users in


Privacy Nth Best the Nth strongest cell sorted
RSSI by RSSI. The value of N is
less than or equal to 6.
For example:
l Privacy for 1st Best RSSI
indicates the rights of
users in the first strongest
cell sorted by RSSI.
l Privacy for 2nd Best RSSI
indicates the rights of
users in the second
strongest cell sorted by
RSSI.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 581


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

TopN Manufactur - Indicates the device


Manufac er for Nth manufacturer of the Nth
turer Best RSSI strongest cell sorted by RSSI.
The value of N is less than or
equal to 20.
For example:
l Manufacturer for 1st Best
RSSI indicates the device
manufacturer of the first
strongest cell sorted by
RSSI.
l Manufacturer for 2nd Best
RSSI indicates the device
manufacturer of the
second strongest cell
sorted by RSSI.

RSSI for RSSI for -10 to -140 Indicates the RSSI value of a
Channel Channel dynamically displayed
XX ARFCN. XX indicates the
ARFCN. For example, RSSI
for Channel 2437 indicates
the RSSI value of
dynamically displayed
Channel 2437.

RSSI for RSSI for -10 to -140 Indicates the RSSI value of a
BSSID BSSID XX dynamically displayed
BSSID.

RSSI for RSSI for -10 to -140 Indicates the RSSI value of a
SSID SSID XX dynamically displayed SSID.

Associated AP Result BSSID - Indicates the MAC address of


the AP.

SSID - Indicates the network name


of the AP.

Channel - Indicates the access channel


number.

RSSI - Indicates the strength of the


radio network signal received
by the UE.

Max RSSI - Indicates the maximum


strength of the radio network
signal.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 582


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Description


Range/Unit

Min RSSI - Indicates the minimum


strength of the radio network
signal.

Avg RSSI - Indicates the average strength


of the radio network signal.

Noise - Indicates the noise.

SINR - Indicates the signal to


interference plus noise ratio
(SINR).

Capability - Indicates the network access


performance. It is mainly
used to determine the
network encryption mode.

SupportedR - Indicates the rates supported


ate by WLAN.

Frequency - Indicates the WLAN


frequency.

Bandwidth - Indicates the WLAN


bandwidth.

21.1.12 Description of TD-SCDMA UE IEs


This section describes the information elements (IEs) of the TD-SCDMA network. You can
refer to this section when configuring or viewing IE information of the TD-SCDMA network
using the Assistant.

In the windows related to TD-SCDMA UEs, PCC refers to the primary component carrier,
and SCC refers to the secondary component carrier.

Table 21-68 TD-SCDMA UE IE


IE Set Description

Radio Parameters Contains IEs related to Radio Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-69.

Serving and Contains IEs related to Serving and Neighboring. For details,
Neighboring Cells see Table 21-70.

Throughput Contains IEs related to Throughput. For details, see Table


21-71.

Power Control Contains IEs related to Power Control. For details, see Table
21-72.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 583


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set Description

TD System Paramenters Contains IEs related to TD System Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-73.

DPCH Parameters Contains IEs related to DPCH Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-74.

L3 Messages Contains IEs related to layer 3 messages on the TD-SCDMA


network.

Table 21-69 Radio Parameters


Name Value Range/Unit Description

UARFCN Value range: 0 to 65535 UARFCN of the serving cell

CPI Value range: 0 to 127 Serving cell identifier

RSSI Value range: -131 to 25 (unit: Carrier received signal


dBm) strength indicator (RSSI) of
the serving cell

SIR - Signal-to-interference ratio


(SIR) of the serving cell

Sync TxPower Value range: -50 to 33 (unit: Power level for sending the
dBm) SYNC_UL

UpPCH TxPower Value range: -50 to 33 (unit: Transmit power of the uplink
(dBm) dBm) pilot channel

C/I (dB) Value range: -30 to 60 (unit: Carrier-to-interference ratio


dB)

Table 21-70 Serving and Neighboring Cells


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Indicates the primary UARFCN of the


N UARFCN - primary serving cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 16.

Indicates the serving cell identifier.


N CPI -
The value of N ranges from 1 to 16.

Indicates the received signal code power.


N RSCP Unit: dBm
The value of N ranges from 1 to 16.

Indicates the interference signal code power.


N ISCP Unit: dBm
The value of N ranges from 1 to 16.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 584


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Indicates the received signal strength


N RSSI Unit: dBm indicator.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 16.

Table 21-71 Throughput


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

UL RLC Indicates the uplink throughput at the RLC


-
Throughput(bps) layer.

DL RLC Indicates the downlink throughput at the RLC


-
Throughput(bps) layer.

UL PDCP Indicates the uplink throughput at the PDCP


-
Throughput(bps) layer.

DL PDCP Indicates the downlink throughput at the


-
Throughput(bps) PDCP layer.

UL APP Indicates the uplink throughput at the APP


-
Throughput(bps) layer.

DL APP Indicates the downlink throughput at the APP


-
Throughput(bps) layer.

HS-DSCH Indicates the throughput on the HS-DSCH


-
Throughput(bps) channel.

Table 21-72 Power Control


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

Target DCH SIR Value range: 0 to 62 Indicates the signal-to-interference ratio


(SIR) of the target dedicated channel
(DCH).

DPCH SIR - Indicates the SIR on the downlink pilot


channel.

TPC Step Value range: 1 to 3 Indicates the power control step.

Table 21-73 TD System Paramenters


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

LAC Value range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the location area code.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 585


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

MCC Value range: 000 to 999 Indicates the mobile country code (000
to 999).

T3212 - Indicates the timer for periodic location


update.

Max Allowed UL - Indicates the allowed maximum


Txpower transmit power of the UE.

Table 21-74 DPCH Parameters


IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

ISCP Worst Value range: -116 to -25 Indicates the worst interference signal
code power (ISCP) value on the
PDSCH channel.

ISCP Average Value range: -116 to -25 Indicates the average ISCP value on all
timeslots of the PDSCH channel.

ISCP Best Value range: -116 to -25 Indicates the optimal ISCP value on all
timeslots of the PDSCH channel.

21.1.13 MOS Description


This section describes the mean opinion score (MOS). You can refer to this section when
setting and viewing the MOS information on the Assistant.

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

MOS POLQA DL Value range: 1 to Indicates the POLQA downlink


4.75 score. The MOS is calculated using
the P863 algorithm.

POLQA UL Value range: 1 to Indicates the POLQA uplink score.


4.75 The MOS is calculated using the
P863 algorithm.

AVG DELAY Unit: ms Indicates the average delay between


the speech sample file and the test
result file

PESQ LQ DL Value range: 0 to Indicates the PESQ LQ downlink


4.5 score, which is the extended scoring
standard based on PESQ_SCORE.
This scoring standard is closer to the
actual MOS ranging from 1 to 5.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 586


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

PESQ LQ UL Value range: 0 to Indicates the PESQ LQ uplink score,


4.5 which is the extended scoring
standard based on PESQ_SCORE.
This scoring standard is closer to the
actual MOS ranging from 1 to 5.

PESQ Score Value range: -0.5 Indicates the PESQ downlink score. It
DL to 4.5 is the earliest MOS test standard of
International Telecommunication
Union (ITU). This standard has a
certain difference from the actual
MOS marking standard (1 to 5
scores). The protocol is ITU-T P.862.

PESQ Score Value range: -0.5 Indicates the PESQ uplink score,
UL to 4.5 which is the earliest MOS test
standard defined by the ITU. This
standard has a certain difference from
the actual MOS marking standard (1
to 5 scores). The protocol is ITU-T P.
862.

PESQ P862.1 Value range: 0 to Indicates the PESQ P862.1 downlink


DL 5 score. It is the latest MOS standard
defined by the ITU, through which a
PESQ_SCORE value can directly
map to an MOS_LQ value.

PESQ P862.1 Value range: 0 to Indicates the PESQ P862.1 uplink


UL 5 score. It is the latest MOS standard
defined by the ITU, through which a
PESQ_SCORE value can directly
map to an MOS_LQ value.

PESQ Ie DL Value range: 0 to Indicates the PESQ Ie downlink


140 score. The PESQ Ie score is
calculated using the PESQ_SCORE.
e is a shrink factor. It is the input of
ITU-T G.107 E_model.

PESQ Ie UL Value range: 0 to Indicates the PESQ Ie uplink score.


140 The PESQ Ie score is calculated using
the PESQ_SCORE.
e is a shrink factor. It is the input of
ITU-T G.107 E_model.

Low Score - Indicates the low score diagnosis.


Diagnosis

VQM MOS Value range: 0 to Indicates the MOS of a video.


Score 5

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 587


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Set IE Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Stop Duration Unit: ms Indicates the total stop duration.

21.1.14 vMOS Result


This section describes the vMOS. You can refer to this section when setting and viewing the
vMOS information on the Assistant.

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

MobilevMOS Value range: 0 to 5 Indicates the mobile vMOS.

QualityScore Value range: 0 to 5 Indicates the video source quality score.

LoadingScore Value range: 0 to 5 Indicates the initial buffer score.

StallingScore Value range: 0 to 5 Indicates the stall score.

RealTimeMobilevMOS Value range: 0 to 5 Indicates the real-time mobile vMOS.


NOTE
It is not selected by default.

RealTimeThroughput Unit: Mbps Indicates the real-time throughput.


NOTE
It is not selected by default.

RealTimeBitRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the real-time video bit rate.


NOTE
It is not selected by default.

RealTimeServerPosi- - Indicates the video source position.


tion NOTE
It is not selected by default.

InitialBufferingLaten- Unit: ms Indicates the initial buffer delay (user-


cy(UserPerceivedDe- perceived delay).
lay)

StallingRatio Value range: 0 to 1 Indicates the stall duration proportion.

BitRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the bit rate.

Quality - Indicates the video definition.

InitialBufferingSuccess Values: Indicates initial buffer is successful.


l Success
l Fail
l Others

MaxRateofInitialBuf- Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum real-time rate


feringDownloadPhase during initial buffer download.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 588


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

AverageRateofInitial- Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average initial buffer rate


BufferingPhase(UserPe (downlink) (user-perceived rate).
rceived)

AverageRateofPlaying- Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate during video


phase(Downlink) playback (downlink).

MaxRateofWholePhas Unit: kbit/s Indicates the video download peak rate.


e(Downlink)

AverageRateofWhole- Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average video download


Phase(Downlink) rate.

MaximumSingleRe- Unit: ms Indicates the maximum rebuffer delay at a


BufferingLatency time.

ReBufferingTimes - Indicates the number of rebuffer times.

TotalReBufferingLa- Unit: ms Indicates the total rebuffer delay.


tency

TotalPlayDuration Unit: ms Indicates the total playback duration .

FirstReachableHo- Unit: ms Indicates the average RTT of the first


pAvgRTT reachable hop after the video playback is
complete.

FirstReachableHo- Unit: ms Indicates the average RTT of the first


pAvgRTT(BeforeVideo reachable hop before video playback.
)

VideoE2ERTT(PingWe Unit: ms Indicates the video E2E RTT(Ping Web


bServer512B) Server 512B).

WebsiteName - Indicates the name of a video website.

VideoSize Unit: MB Indicates the video size.

VideoDuration Unit: s Indicates the video duration .

AverageRateofInitial- Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate during initial


BufferingDownload- buffer (downlink).
Phase

InitialBufferingDown- Unit: ms Indicates the actual download duration


loadLatency during initial buffer.

VideoIPAddress - Indicates the video IP address.

FirstReachableHopI- - Indicates the IP address of the first


PAddress reachable hop.

VideoURL - Indicates the video web IP address.

VideoTestScenario - Indicates the video playback scenario.

PlayWaitingTime Unit: ms Indicates the playback wait duration.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 589


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

IE Name Value Range/Unit Description

PlayWaitingByte Unit: Byte Indicates the playback wait buffer byte.

21.1.15 L3 Message Description


This section describes the information elements (IEs) regarding L3 Message.

Table 21-75 L3 Message

IE Name Description

Index Indicates the Index.

MS Indicates the terminal type.

Date Indicates the message occurrence date.

Time Indicates the message occurrence time.

Direction Indicates the packet transmission direction.

Channel Type Indicates the channel through which data packets are
transmitted.

Message Name Indicates the name of a message.

Message Data Indicates the information of a message.

21.1.16 IP Key Message Description


This section describes the meanings of the IEs related to IP Key Message.

Table 21-76 IP Key Message Description

IE Name Description

Index Indicates the index.

Source Indicates the terminal type.

Time Indicates the message occurrence time.

Direction Indicates the packet transmission direction.

Event Indicates the name of a message.


You can double-click a message name to view details
about the message.

Information Indicates key information.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 590


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

NOTE

Double-click an IP key message. On the displayed IP Message Detail Information page, select a
information record, press Ctrl+C, and copy the record to a text editor to view the record information.
Alternatively, right-click a information record, choose Copy from the shortcut menu, and copy the
record to a text editor to view the record information.

21.2 B Description of Predefined Events


This section describes the predefined events in the networks. You can refer to this section
when setting event parameters.

21.2.1 FTP Service Process


This section describes the FTP service process of the WCDMA or GSM radio access
technology (RAT).

FTP service flowchart


Figure 21-1 shows the FTP service process.

Figure 21-1 FTP service flowchart

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 591


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Description of the FTP service process

Table 21-77 Description of the FTP service process


Icon Event Description Remarks
Numb
er

1 RAS Dial Remote access Icon number 1 to 2 indicate the RAS


Attempt service (RAS) activation delay.
dial attempt During the RAS request, the events RAS
event Hangup and RAS Error may occur. For
2 RAS Dial RAS dial details, see Packet Service Events or Call
success event Connection Events.

3 PDPActivationRe Packet Data Icon number 3 to 4 indicate the PDP


q Protocol activation delay.
(PDP) During a PDP request, the PDP failure
activation event may occur. For details, see Packet
request event Service Events or GMM Process Events.
4 PDPActivationSu PDP activation
c success event

5 Session Start Data service Icon number 5 to 6 indicate the


start event initialization of the FTP service.
Icon number 6 to 7 indicate FTP data
6 Data Transfer Data
transfer time. During the interaction, the
Start transmission
events Session Drop and Session Error
starts.
may occur.
7 Data Transfer Data Icon number 5 to 8 indicate the session
End transmission service duration.
completes.

8 Session End Data service


completion
event

21.2.2 General Events


This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section
when configuring general events and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

MMS Send Attempt MMS sending attempt

MMS Send Failure MMS sending failure

MMS Send Success MMS sending success

MMS Receive Attempt MMS receiving attempt

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 592


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

MMS Receive Failure MMS receiving failure

MMS Receive Attempt MMS receiving success

PBMDLStart Start of sending PBM downlink data

PBMDLSuccess Success in sending PBM downlink data

PBMDLFailuer Failure in sending PBM downlink data

PBMULStart Start of sending PBM uplink data

PBMULSuccess Success in sending PBM uplink data

PBMULFailuer Failure in sending PBM uplink data

21.2.3 GSM Predefined Events


This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the GSM network.

Packet Service Events


This describes the packet service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when
configuring the packet service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related
operations.

Name Meaning

GSMAttachAttempt Attach attempt

GSMAttachSuc Attach success

GSMAttachFail Attach failure

Data Transfer Start Data Transfer Start

Data Transfer End Data Transfer End

GSMDetachAttempt Detach attempt

GSMDetachSuc GSM detach success

GSMPDPActivationReq PDP activation request

GSMPDPActivationSuc PDP activation success

GSMPDPActivationFail PDP activation failure

PDPDeactivationReq PDP deactivation request

GSMPDPDeactivationSuc PDP deactivation success

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 593


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

GSMRAUpdateReq Routing area update request

GSMRAUpdateSuc Routing area update success

GSMRAUpdateFail Routing area update failure

RAS Dial Attempt RAS dial attempt

RAS Dial RAS dial success

RAS Hangup RAS hangup

RAS Error RAS error

Session Start Session start

Session End Session end

Session Drop Session drop

Session Error Session Error

GSMCMServiceReq Connection management service request

GSMCMServiceAcpt Connection management service accept

GSMCMServiceReqRej Connection management service request failure

DownloadFailed Download failure

UploadFailed Upload failure

HTTPFailed HTTP service failure

Voice Service Events


This section describes the voice service events of the GSM. You can refer to this section when
configuring the voice service events on the GSM network and perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

GSMCallAttempt(MOC) GSM mobile originating call attempt

GSMCallAttempt(MTC) GSM mobile terminating call attempt

GSMCallAttemptRetry GSM call attempt retry

GSMAssignmentSuc GSM assignment success

GSMAssignmentFail GSM assignment failure

GSMCallSetup GSM call setup

GSMOutgoingCallEstablished GSM outgoing call establishment success

GSMIngoingCallEstablished GSM incoming call establishment success

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 594


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

GSMCallSetupFailRF GSM call establishment failure

GSMCallSetupFailNotRF GSM call establishment failure (not RF reason)

GSMCallCompleted GSM call completed

GSMCallDropped GSM call dropped

GSMHandoverReq GSM inter-cell handover request

GSMHandoverSuc GSM inter-cell handover success

GSMHandoverFail GSM inter-cell handover failure

GSMIntracellHandoverReq GSM intra-cell handover request

GSMIntracellHandoverSuc GSM intra-cell handover success

GSMIntracellHandoverFail GSM intra-cell handover failure

GSMSDCCHAssigned GSM SDCCH assignment success

GSMSDCCHCallDrop GSM SDCCH call dropped

GSMCellReselection GSM cell reselection

GSMLocationUpdateSuc GSM location update success

GSMLocationUpdateFail GSM location update failure

GSMSMSSentAttempt GSM SMS sent attempt

GSMSMSSentSuc GSM SMS sent success

GSMSMSSentFail GSM SMS sent failure

GSMSMSReceived GSM SMS received

PagingResponse Paging response

Out of Service (GSM) Indicates an out-of-service event (GSM).

GtoL HO Attempt Indicates a GSM to LTE handover attempt event.

GtoL HO Successed Indicates a GSM to LTE handover success event.

GtoL HO Failed Indicates a GSM to LTE handover failure event.

21.2.4 WCDMA Predefined Events


This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the WCDMA network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 595


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Authentication Events
This describes the authentication events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring the authentication events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.

Name Meaning

AuthenticationReq Authentication request

AuthenticationRsp Authentication success

AuthenticationFail Authentication failure

Security Events
This describes the security events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring security events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.

Name Meaning

SecurityModeReq Security mode request

SecurityModeSuc Security mode success

SecurityModeFail Security mode failure

Authentication Ciphering Events


This describes the authentication ciphering events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part
when configuring the authentication ciphering events on the WCDMA network, and then
perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

AuthenCipherReq Authentication ciphering request

AuthenCipherSuc Authentication ciphering success

AuthenCipherFail Authentication ciphering failure

RRC Events
This describes the radio resource control (RRC) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this
part when configuring RRC events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related
operations.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 596


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

RRCSetupReq RRC connection setup request

RRCSetupSuc RRC connection setup success

RRCSetupFail RRC connection setup failure

RRCConnectionRel RRC connection release

RRCConnectionAbnormalRel RRC connection abnormal release

RRCState RRC State

Out of Service (WCDMA) Indicates an out-of-service event (WCDMA).

Radio Bearer Establishment Events


This describes the radio bearer (RB) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring RB events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

RBSetupReq RB setup request

RBSetupSuc RB setup success

RBSetupFail RB setup failure

Call Connection Events


This describes the call connection events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring call connection events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related
operations.

Name Meaning

CallCompleted Call completed

CallDropped Call dropped

CallSetupFailRFReason Call setup failure

CallSetupFailNotRFReason Call canceled

IncomingCallSetupFailRFReason Incoming call setup failure

OutgoingCallSetupFailRFReason Outgoing call setup failure

IncomingCallSetupFailRFReason(AMR) Incoming call setup failure for AMR service

OutgoingCallSetupFailRFReason(AMR) Outgoing call setup failure for AMR service

CMServiceReq Connection management service request

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 597


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

CMServiceAcpt Connection management service accept

CMServiceReqRej Connection management service request


failure

DataServiceReq Data service request

DataServiceSetupFail Failure to set up the data service

DataServiceDropped Call drop of data service

IncomingCallAttempt Incoming call attempt

IncomingCallSetupSuc Incoming call setup success

IncomingCallSetupSuc(AMR) Incoming call setup success for AMR service

IncomingCallEstablished Incoming call established

LinkRestoreAttempt Link restored attempt

LinkRestoreSuc Link restored success

LinkRestoreFail Link restored failure

OutgoingCallAttempt Outgoing call attempt

OutgoingCallSetupSuc Outgoing call setup success

OutgoingCallSetupSuc(AMR) Outgoing call setup success for AMR service

OutgoingCallEstablished Outgoing call established

PagingType1 Paging type 1

PagingType2 Paging type 2

RAS Dial Attempt RAS dial attempt

RAS Dial RAS dial success

RAS Hangup RAS hangup

RAS Error RAS error

Session Start Session start

Data Transfer Start Data Transfer Start

Data Transfer End Data Transfer End

Session End Session end

Session Drop Session dropped

WCDMASMSSentAttempt WCDMA SMS sending attempt

WCDMASMSSent WCDMA SMS sending success

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 598


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

WCDMASMSReceiveAttempt WCDMA SMS reception attempt

WCDMASMSReceived WCDMA SMS reception success

PagingResponse Paging response

Truncatedcall Dropped Call drop due to initiation failure of


incomplete file

GMM Process Events


This describes the GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) process events of the WCDMA. You
can refer to this part when configuring the GMM process events on the WCDMA network,
and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

AttachAttempt Attach attempt

AttachSuc Attach success

AttachFail Attach failure

Detach Detach

PDPActivationReq PDP activation request

PDPActivationSuc PDP activation success

PDPActivationFail PDP activation failure

RAUpdateReq Routing area update request

RAUpdateSuc Routing area update success

RAUpdateFail Routing area update failure

MM Process Events
This describes the mobility management (MM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer
to this part when configuring the MM process events on the WCDMA network, and then
perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

LAUpdateReq Location update request

LAUpdateSuc Location update success

LAUpdateFail Location update failure

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 599


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

IMSIDetach International mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) detach

IdentityReq Identity request

IdentityRsp Identity response

Handover Events
This section describes the handover events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring the soft handover and hard handover events on the WCDMA network, and then
perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

SoftHOAttempt Soft handover attempt

SoftHO Soft handover

SoftHOFail Soft handover failure

Event1A Event 1A

Event2A Event 2A

Event3A Event 3A

Event4A Event 4A

Event1B Event 1B

Event2B Event 2B

Event3B Event 3B

Event4B Event 4B

Event1C Event 1C

Event2C Event 2C

Event3C Event 3C

Event1D Event 1D

Event2D Event 2D

Event3D Event 3D

Event1E Event 1E

Event2E Event 2E

Event1F Event 1F

Event2F Event 2F

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 600


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

PhChannelRecfgSuc Physical channel reconfiguration success

PhChannelRecfgFail Physical channel reconfiguration failure

TrChannelRecfgSuc Transport channel reconfiguration success

TrChannelRecfgFail Transport channel reconfiguration failure

RBReconfigSuc Radio bearer reconfiguration success

RBReconfigFail Radio bearer reconfiguration failure

RBRelease Radio bearer release

RBReleaseFail RB release failure

WCDMAIntraFreqHHOAttempt Intra-frequency hard handover attempt

WCDMAIntraFreqHHOSuc Intra-frequency hard handover

WCDMAIntraFreqHHOFail Intra-frequency hard handover failure

WCDMAInterFreqHHOAttempt Intra-frequency hard handover attempt

WCDMAInterFreqHHOSuc Inter-frequency hard handover

WCDMAInterFreqHHOFail Inter-frequency hard handover failure

CellReselectionConnectMode Cell reselection connection mode

CSConnectionHO2Gto3GAttempt CS handover attempt from 2G to 3G

CSConnectionHO2Gto3GSuc CS handover succeeded from 2G to 3G

CSConnectionHO2Gto3GFail CS handover failed from 2G to 3G

CSConnectionHO3Gto2GAttempt CS handover attempt from 3G to 2G

CSConnectionHO3Gto2GSuc CS handover succeeded from 3G to 2G

CSConnectionHO3Gto2GFail CS handover failed from 3G to 2G

PSConnectionHO2Gto3GAttempt PS handover attempt from 2G to 3G

PSConnectionHO2Gto3GSuc PS handover succeeded from 2G to 3G

PSConnectionHO2Gto3GFail PS handover failed from 2G to 3G

PSConnectionHO3Gto2GAttempt PS handover attempt from 3G to 2G

PSConnectionHO3Gto2GSuc PS handover succeeded from 3G to 2G

PSConnectionHO3Gto2GFail PS handover failed from 3G to 2G

CellResel3Gto2G Cell reselection from 3G to 2G

CellResel2Gto3G Cell reselection from 2G to 3G

CompressedModeActivation Compression mode activation

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 601


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

CompressedModeDeActivation Compression mode deactivation

WtoL Redirection Attempt Indicates a WCDMA to LTE redirection attempt


event.

WtoL Redirection Successed Indicates the WCDMA to LTE redirection success


event.

WtoL Redirection failed Indicates a WCDMA to LTE redirection failure


event.

WtoG Redirection Attempt Indicates a WCDMA to GSM redirection attempt


event.

WtoG Redirection Successed Indicates the WCDMA to GSM redirection success


event.

WtoG Redirection failed Indicates a WCDMA to GSM redirection failure


event.

WtoL CellReselection Attempt Indicates a WCDMA to LTE reselection attempt


event.

WtoL CellReselection Successed Indicates a WCDMA to LTE reselection success


event.

WtoG CellReselection Attempt Indicates a WCDMA to GSM reselection attempt


event.

WtoG CellReselection Successed Indicates a WCDMA to GSM reselection success


event.

HSDPA Events
This section describes the HSDPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this section when
configuring HSDPA events on the WCDMA network and perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

H2HIntraFreqCellChangeSuc HSDPA to HSDPA intra-frequency serving cell update


success

H2R99IntraFreqSHOSuc HSDPA to R99 intra-frequency soft handover success

H2R99IntraFreqHHOSuc HSDPA to R99 intra-frequency hard handover success

R992HIntraFreqSHOSuc R99 to HSDPA intra-frequency soft handover success

R992HIntraFreqHHOSuc R99 to HSDPA intra-frequency hard handover success

H2HIntraFreqCellChangeFail HSDPA to HSDPA intra-frequency serving cell update


failure

H2R99IntraFreqSHOFail HSDPA to R99 intra-frequency soft handover failure

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 602


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

H2R99IntraFreqHHOFail HSDPA to R99 intra-frequency hard handover failure

R992HIntraFreqSHOFail R99 to HSDPA intra-frequency soft handover failure

R992HIntraFreqHHOFail R99 to HSDPA intra-frequency hard handover failure

H2GHHOSuc HSDPA to 2G hard handover success

H2GHHOFail HSDPA to 2G hard handover failure

H2HInterFreqCellChangeSuc HSDPA to HSDPA inter-frequency serving cell update


success

H2HInterFreqCellChangeFail HSDPA to HSDPA inter-frequency serving cell update


failure

H2R99InterFreqHHOSuc HSDPA to R99 inter-frequency hard handover success

H2R99InterFreqHHOFail HSDPA to R99 inter-frequency hard handover failure

R992HInterFreqHHOSuc R99 to HSDPA inter-frequency hard handover success

R992HInterFreqHHOFail R99 to HSDPA inter-frequency hard handover failure

CompressedModeActivation Compression mode activation

CompressedModeDeActiva- Compression mode deactivation


tion

PDPContextAbnormalRel PDP context is released abnormally

HSUPA Events
This describes the HSUPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring HSUPA events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.

Name Meaning

CellChangeUtoUBySHOAttempt HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered


by soft handovers

CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOAttempt HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered


by intra-frequency hard handovers

CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOAttempt HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered


by inter-frequency hard handovers

CellChangeUtoUBySHOSuc HSUPA serving cell update success triggered


by soft handovers

CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOSuc HSUPA serving cell update success triggered


by intra-frequency hard handovers

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 603


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOSuc HSUPA serving cell update success triggered


by inter-frequency hard handovers

CellChangeUtoUBySHOFail HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered


by soft handovers

CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOFail HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered


by intra-frequency hard handovers

CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOFail HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered


by inter-frequency hard handovers

PSConnectionHOUtoGPRSAttempt Handover attempt between HSUPA and


GPRS

PSConnectionHOUtoGPRSSuc Handover success between HSUPA and


GPRS

PSConnectionHOUtoGPRSFail Handover failure between HSUPA and


GPRS

PSConnectionHOGPRStoUSuc GPRS to HSUPA inter-system handover


success

PSConnectionHOGPRStoUFail GPRS to HSUPA inter-system handover


failure

ChannelChangeInterCellIntraFreEtoDAt- HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intra-frequency


tempt hard handover attempt

ChannelChangeInterCellIntraFreEtoDSuc HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intra-frequency


hard handover success

ChannelChangeInterCellIntraFreEtoDFail HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intra-frequency


hard handover failure

ChannelChangeInterCellInterFreEtoDAt- HSUPA to R99 inter-cell inter-frequency


tempt hard handover attempt

ChannelChangeInterCellInterFreEtoDSuc HSUPA to R99 inter-cell inter-frequency


hard handover success

ChannelChangeInterCellInterFreEtoDFail HSUPA to R99 inter-cell inter-frequency


hard handover failure

ChannelChangeIntraCellEtoDAttempt HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type


change attempt

ChannelChangeIntraCellEtoDSuc HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type


change success

ChannelChangeIntraCellEtoDFail HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type


change failure

ChannelChangeIntraCellDtoEAttempt R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type


change attempt

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 604


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

ChannelChangeIntraCellDtoESuc R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type


change success

ChannelChangeIntraCellDtoEFail R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type


change failure

ChannelChangeEtoFAttempt EDCH to FACH channel change attempt

ChannelChangeEtoFSuc EDCH to FACH channel change success

ChannelChangeEtoFFail EDCH to FACH channel change failure

ChannelChangeFtoEAttempt FACH to EDCH channel change attempt

ChannelChangeFtoESuc FACH to EDCH channel change success

ChannelChangeFtoEFail FACH to EDCH channel change failure

PTT Events
This section introduces push to talk (PTT) events in the WCDMA technology. When
configuring WCDMA PTT events, you can refer to this section and perform required
operations.

Name Definition

PTTCallAttempt PTT call attempt event

PTTCallSetupSuc PTT call setup success event

PTTCallSetupFail PTT call setup failure event

PTTCallDropped PTT call drop event

PTTHOAttempt PTT handover attempt event

PTTHOSuc PTT handover success event

PTTHOFail PTT handover failure event

21.2.5 CDMA Predefined Events


This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations.

The system defines the following states of the MS:


l INITorIDLE: indicates the state combining the initial state with the idle state.
l SYS_ACC: indicates the system access state.
l TC: indicates the traffic state.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 605


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

EV-DO Events
This describes events of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the CDMA2000 EV-DO network, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

DO-ATConnectReq AT connection request

DO-ATConnectSuc AT connection success

DO-ATConnectFail AT connection failure

DO-ANConnectReq AN connection request

DO-ANConnectSuc AN connection success

DO-ANConnectFail AN connection failure

DO-ANNormalRelease AN normal release

DO-ATNormalRelease AT normal release

DO-CallDrop Call dropped

DO-ReverseSoftHOReq Reverse soft handoff request

DO-ReverseSoftHOSuc Reverse soft handoff success

DO-ReverseSoftHOFail Reverse soft handoff failure

DO-SessionReq Session request

DO-SessionSuc Session success

DO- Indicates the LTE to eHRPD cell reselection


CellReselectionLTE2eHRPDAttempt attempt event.

DO- Indicates the LTE to eHRPD cell reselection


CellReselectionLTE2eHRPDSuccess success event.

DO- Indicates the LTE to eHRPD cell reselection failure


CellReselectionLTE2eHRPDFailure event.

Packet Service Events (1x)


This describes the packet service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part
when configuring the PS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related
operations.

Name Meaning

1x-PSOutgoingCallReq PS outgoing call request

1x-PSOutgoingCallSuc PS outgoing call success

1x-PSOutgoingCallFail PS outgoing call failure

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 606


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

1x-PSCallDropped PS call dropped

1x-PSCallCompleted PS call completed

SMS Events (1x)


This describes the SMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the SMS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related
operations.

Name Meaning

1x-SMSSentReq SMS sending request

1x-SMSSendCon SMS sending connected

1x-SMSSend SMS sending

1x-SMSSendComplete SMS sending complete

1x-SMSReceiveReq SMS reception request

1x-SMSReceiveCon SMS reception connected

1x-SMSReceive SMS received

1x-SMSReceiveComplete SMS reception complete

Voice Service Events (1x)


This describes the voice service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the CS voice service events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the
related operations.

Name Meaning

1x-CSOutgoingCallReq CS outgoing call request

1x-CSOutgoingCallSuc CS outgoing call success

1x-CSOutgoingCallFail CS outgoing call failure

1x-CSIncomingCallReq CS incoming call request

1x-CSIncomingCallSuc CS incoming call success

1x-CSIncomingCallFail CS incoming call failure

1x-CSCallDropped CS call dropped

1x-CSCallCompleted CS call completed

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 607


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

1x-SoftHandoffReq Soft handoff request

1x-SoftHandoffSuc Soft handoff success

1x-SoftHandoffFail Soft handoff failure

1x-InterFreqHandoffReq Inter-frequency hard handoff request

1x-InterFreqHandoffSuc Inter-frequency hard handoff success

1x-InterFreqHandoffFail Inter-frequency hard handoff failure

1x-IntraFreqHandoffReq Intra-frequency hard handoff request

1x-IntraFreqHandoffSuc Intra-frequency hard handoff success

1x-IntraFreqHandoffFail Intra-frequency hard handoff failure

21.2.6 LTE Predefined Events


This section describes the predefined events on the LTE network. You can configure LTE
network events by referring to the following descriptions.

LTE Events
This section describes the predefined LTE events. You can refer to this section when
configuring the LTE events.

Name Description

LTEAttachAttempt Indicates an attach attempt.

LTEAttachSuc Indicates a successful attach.

LTEAttachFail Indicates that the attach fails.

LTEDetachAttempt Indicates a detach attempt.

LTEDetachSuc Indicates a successful detach.

LTERRCSetupReq Indicates a Radio Resource Control (RRC)


connection setup request.

LTERRCSetupSuc Indicates that an RRC connection is successfully set


up.

LTERRCSetupFail Indicates that an RRC connection fails.

LTERRCDrop Indicates an RRC call drop.

LTEERABSetupAttempt Indicates an E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer (E-


RAB) setup attempt.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 608


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description

LTEERABSetupSuc Indicates that an E-RAB connection is successfully


set up.

LTEERABSetupFail Indicates that an E-RAB connection fails.

LTEERABNormalRel Indicates a normal E-RAB release.

LTEERABAbnormalRel Indicates an abnormal E-RAB release.

LTEActiveRequest Indicates an LTE service activation request.

LTEActiveSuc Indicates an LTE service activation success event.

LTEActiveFail Indicates an LTE service activation failure event.

LTEEvent A1 Indicates an A1 measurement report.

LTEEvent A2 Indicates an A2 measurement report.

LTEEvent A3 Indicates an A3 measurement report.

LTEEvent A4 Indicates an A4 measurement report.

LTEEvent A5 Indicates an A5 measurement report.

LTEEvent B1 Indicates an B1 measurement report.

LTEEvent B2 Indicates an B2 measurement report.

LTEHOA3Measurement Indicates a handover A3 measurement report.

LTEHOPrepareAttempt Indicates the number of handover attempts obtained


from the handover A3 event.

LTEInterFreqHOAttempt Indicates an inter-frequency handover attempt.

LTEInterFreqHOSuc Indicates that an inter-frequency handover is


successful.

LTEInterFreqHOFail Indicates that an inter-frequency handover fails.

LTEIntraFreqHOAttempt Indicates an intra-frequency handover attempt.

LTEIntraFreqHOSuc Indicates that an intra-frequency handover is


successful.

LTEIntraFreqHOFail Indicates that an intra-frequency handover fails.

LTETAUpdateAttempt Indicates a tracking area update request.

LTETAUpdateSuc Indicates that the tracking area is successfully


updated.

LTETAUpdateFail Indicates that the tracking area fails to be updated.

LTERRCReestablishAttempt Indicates an RRC re-establishment attempt.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 609


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description

LTERRCReestablishSuc Indicates that an RRC re-establishment attempt is


successful.

LTERRCReestablishFail Indicates that an RRC re-establishment attempt fails.

LTECellReselectionL2G Indicates an LTE-to-GSM cell reselection event.

LTECellReselectionL2W Indicates an LTE-to-WCDMA cell reselection event.

LTECellReselection Indicates an LTE cell reselection event.

LTECellReselectionL2T Indicates an LTE-to-TD-SCDMA cell reselection


event.

LTECSFBToWCDMAServiceRe- Indicates an LTE to WCDMA CSFB service request.


quest(MOC)

LTECSFBToTD- Indicates an LTE to TD-SCDMA CSFB service


SCDMAServiceRequest(MOC) request.

LTECSFBToGSMServiceRe- Indicates an LTE to GSM CSFB service request.


quest(MOC)

LTECSFBToWCDMAService- Indicates an LTE-to-WCDMA CSFB access success


Suc(MOC) event.

LTECSFBToTD- Indicates an LTE-to-TD-SCDMA CSFB access


SCDMAServiceSuc(MOC) success event.

LTECSFBToGSMService- Indicates an LTE-to-GSM CSFB access success


Suc(MOC) event.

LTECSFBServiceToWCDMA- Indicates an LTE-to-WCDMA fallback failure event.


Fail(MOC)

LTECSFBServiceToTD- Indicates an LTE-to-TD-SCDMA fallback failure


SCDMAFail(MOC) event.

LTECSFBServiceToGSM- Indicates an LTE-to-GSM fallback failure event.


Fail(MOC)

LTECSFBToWCDMAServiceRe- Indicates an LTE-to-WCDMA CSFB service request


quest(MTC) (MTC).

LTECSFBToTD- Indicates an LTE-to-TD-SCDMA CSFB service


SCDMAServiceRequest(MTC) request (MTC).

LTECSFBToGSMServiceRe- Indicates an LTE-to-GSM CSFB service request


quest(MTC) (MTC).

LTECSFBToWCDMAService- Indicates an LTE-to-WCDMA CSFB access success


Suc(MTC) event (MTC).

LTECSFBToTD- Indicates an LTE to TD-SCDMA CSFB access


SCDMAServiceSuc(MTC) success event (MTC).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 610


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description

LTECSFBToGSMService- Indicates an LTE-to-GSM CSFB access success


Suc(MTC) event (MTC).

LTECSFBServiceToWCDMA- Indicates an LTE to WCDMA fallback failure event


Fail(MTC) (MTC).

LTECSFBServiceToTD- Indicates an LTE-to-TD-SCDMA fallback failure


SCDMAFail(MTC) event (MTC).

LTECSFBServiceToGSM- Indicates an LTE-to-GSM fallback failure event


Fail(MTC) (MTC).

LTE4Gto3GHOCmd Indicates an LTE intra-RAT LTE-to-UMTS handover


command.

LTE4Gto2GHOCmd Indicates an LTE intra-RAT LTE-to-GSM handover


command.

LTE4Gto3GHOSuccess Indicates an LTE inter-RAT LTE-to-UMTS handover


success event.

LTE4Gto2GHOSuccess Indicates an inter-RAT LTE-to-GSM handover


success event.

LTE4Gto3GHOFail Indicates an LTE inter-RAT LTE-to-UMTS handover


failure event.

LTE4Gto2GHOFail Indicates an LTE inter-RAT LTE-to-GSM handover


failure event.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToGSM- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to GSM


Req request.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToWCD- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to WCDMA


MAReq request.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToTD- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to TD-


SCDMAReq SCDMA request.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToGSM- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to GSM


Suc success event.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToWCD- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to WCDMA


MASuc success event.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToTD- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to TD-


SCDMASuc SCDMA success event.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToGSM- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to GSM


Fail failure event.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToWCD- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to WCDMA


MAFail failure event.

LTEInterRATRedirectionToTD- Indicates an LTE inter-RAT redirection to TD-


SCDMAFail SCDMA failure event.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 611


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description

LTERandomAccess Indicates a random access event.

LTEInter-eNodeBHOAttempt Indicates an inter-eNodeB handover attempt.

LTEInter-eNodeBHOSuc Indicates an inter-eNodeB handover success event.

LTEInter-eNoseBHOFail Indicates an inter-eNodeB handover failure event.

LTEIntra-eNodeBHOAttempt Indicates an intra-eNodeB handover attempt.

LTEIntra-eNodeBHOSuc Indicates an intra-eNodeB handover success event.

LTEIntra-eNoseBHOFail Indicates an intra-eNodeB handover failure event.

LTESMSSendAttempt Indicates an SMS send request.

LTESMSSendSuc Indicates an SMS send success event.

LTESMSSendFail Indicates an SMS send failure event.

LTESMSReceiveAttempt Indicates an SMS receive request.

LTESMSReceiveSuc Indicates an SMS receive success event.

LTESMSReceiveFail Indicates an SMS receive failure event.

LTEHandoverAttempt Indicates a handover attempt.

LTEHandoverSuc Indicates a handover success event.

LTEHandoverFail Indicates a handover failure event.

LTECSFBreturnLTE Indicates a CSFB return to LTE event.

LTEOutofService Indicates an out-of-service event.

LTEPrach:Msg1(RA) Indicates a message one (random access) event.

LTEPrach:Msg2(RAR) Indicates a message two (random access response)


event.

LTEPrach:Msg3(UE ID) Indicates a message three (UE ID) event.

LTEPrach:Msg4 Indicates a message four (random access) event.

LTERandomAccessAttempt Indicates a random access request.

LTERandomAccessSuccess Indicates a random access success event.

LTERandomAccessFailed Indicates a random access failure event.

LTEPagingReceived Indicates a paging message received event.

LTEPagingResponseSuccess Indicates a paging response success event.

LTEPagingResponseFailed Indicates a paging response failure event.

LTESCellAdded Indicates an added LTE secondary serving cell


(SCell).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 612


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description

LTESCellReconfigured Indicates a configured LTE SCell.

LTESCellDeleted Indicates a deleted LTE SCell.

LTESCellActivated Indicates an activated LTE SCell.

LTESCellDeactivated Indicates a deactivated LTE SCell.

LTEEventA1MeasConfig Indicates an LTE A1 measurement control event.

LTEEventA2MeasConfig Indicates an LTE A2 measurement control event.

LTEEventA3MeasConfig Indicates an LTE A3 measurement control event.

LTEEventA4MeasConfig Indicates an LTE A4 measurement control event.

LTEEventA5MeasConfig Indicates an LTE A5 measurement control event.

LTEEventB1MeasConfig Indicates an LTE B1 measurement control event.

LTEEventB2MeasConfig Indicates an LTE B2 measurement control event.

LTETTIBConfig Indicates LTE subframe binding control.

LTECSFBCallDrop Indicates a CSFB call drop (MOC).

LTECSFBCallEstablished(MOC) Indicates a CSFB call connection setup (MOC).

LTECSFBCallEstablished(MTC) Indicates a CSFB call connection setup (MOC).

LTE Hisilicon Predefined Events


This section describes the predefined Hisilicon events on the LTE network. You can configure
Hisilicon events on the LTE network by referring to the following descriptions.

Name Meaning

CELL_SEARCH_SPEC_PLMN Indicates the event of searching for


specified PLMN cells.

CELL_SEARCH_PLMN_LIST Indicates the event of searching for cells in


a PLMN list.

CELL_SEARCH_SUIT Indicates the event of searching for suitable


cells.

CELL_SEARCH_ANYCELL Indicates the event of searching for any


cells.

SIB_RCV Indicates the event of receiving system


messages.

CELL_CAMPED_ON Indicates the event of camping serving cells.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 613


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

CELL_RESEL Indicates the event of starting reselecting


cells.

RRC_CONN_SETUP Indicates the event of setting up RRC


connections.

RRC_CONN_RELEASE Indicates the event of releasing RRC


connections.

RB_SETUP Indicates the event of setting up RBs.

HANDOVER_START Indicates the event of requesting handovers.

RRC_CONN_REEST Indicates the event of setting up RRC


connections again.

SMC_ACTIVE Indicates the event of activating the SMC.

RRC_CONN_REQ Indicates the event of requesting RRC


connections.

RRC_CONN_SETUP_CMPL Indicates the event of completing the RRC


connection setup.

HANDOVER_SUCC Indicates the handover success event.

MAC_RA_SUCC Indicates the successful MAC-layer random


access event.

MAC_RANDOM_ACCESS_SUCC Indicates the successful MAC access event.

MAC_RANDOM_ACCESS_FAIL Indicates the failed MAC access event.

MAC_UL_HARQ_MAX_NUM Indicates the maximum uplink MAC HARQ


value.

21.2.7 vMOS Predefined Events


This section describes the predefined events of the vMOS. You can refer to this section for
configuring predefined events of the vMOS, and then perform the related operations.

Event Name Definition

vMOS Startbuffering Buffer start This event is generated when


the first buffering start message
is returned over the video
website API.

vMOS InitialBuffering- Initial buffer success Initial buffer success.


Success

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 614


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Event Name Definition

vMOS InitialBuffering- End of the initial buffer with a This event is generated when
Finish(2xBitRate) double bit rate the initial buffer is complete and
the buffer zone is filled with
downloaded bytes. Buffer zone
size = 2 x Video source bit rate
which is returned over the
website API.

vMOS InitialBuffering- Initial buffer failure The video playback is not


Failed started due to the reasons, such
as unprepared media player and
media player preparation errors.
This event is generated when
the video playback is complete.

vMOS InitialBuffering- Initial buffer failure This event is generated when


Failed(15sTimeout) the video playback does not
start 15s after the StartBuffering
event time point and the
StartPlay event does not appear.

vMOS StartPlay Playback start This event is generated when


the first playback start message
is returned over the video
website API.

vMOS PlayFailed Playback failure During the entire playback


phase, the playback fails if the
single rebuffering duration
exceeds 8s or the multiple
rebuffering duration exceeds
15s.
NOTE
Only when the single rebuffering
duration exceeds 300 ms, the
rebuffering is involved in a
calculation.

vMOS FinishPlay Playback end This event is generated when


the playback finish message is
returned over the video website
API.

vMOS Rebuffering Rebuffer After the playback start status


point is returned, the rebuffering
start status point is returned.

vMOS InitialBufferin- Initial buffer not completed Initial buffer not completed due
gOthersState to other reasons (such as
software exceptions)

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 615


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

21.2.8 VoLTE Events


This section describes the predefined voice over Long Term Evolution (VoLTE) events. You
can refer to this section when configuring VoLTE events.

Event Description

VoLTECallAttempt(MOC) Indicates the VoLTE MOC setup attempt event.

VoLTECallSetupSuc(MOC) Indicates the VoLTE MOC setup success event.

VoLTECallSetupFail(MOC) Indicates the VoLTE MOC setup failure event.

VoLTECallEstablished (MOC) Indicates the VoLTE MOC response event.

VoLTECallEnd Indicates the VoLTE call end event.

VoLTECallDrop Indicates the VoLTE call drop event.

VoLTECallAttempt(MTC) Indicates the VoLTE MTC setup attempt event.

VoLTECallSetupSuc(MTC) Indicates the VoLTE MTC setup success event.

VoLTECallSetupFail(MTC) Indicates the VoLTE MTC setup failure event.

VoLTECallEstablished (MTC) Indicates the VoLTE MTC response event.

SRVCCHandoverAttempt Indicates the SRVCC handover attempt event.

SRVCCHandoverSuc Indicates the SRVCC handover success event.

SRVCCHandoverFail Indicates the SRVCC handover failure event.

ERABEstablishAttempt(QCI=1) Indicates the E-RAB setup attempt event (QCI=1).

ERABEstablishSuc(QCI=1) Indicates the E-RAB setup success event (QCI = 1).

ERABEstablishFail(QCI=1) Indicates the E-RAB setup failure event (QCI=1).

ERABNormalRelease(QCI=1) Indicates a normal E-RAB release event (QCI=1).

ERABAbnormalRelease(QCI=1) Indicates an abnormal E-RAB release event


(QCI=1).

ERABEstablishAttempt(QCI=2) Indicates the E-RAB setup attempt event (QCI=2).

ERABEstablishSuc(QCI=2) Indicates the E-RAB setup success event (QCI =2).

ERABEstablishFail(QCI=2) Indicates the E-RAB setup failure event (QCI=2).

ERABNormalRelease(QCI=2) Indicates a normal E-RAB release event (QCI=2).

ERABAbnormalRelease(QCI=2) Indicates an abnormal E-RAB release event


(QCI=2).

ERABEstablishAttempt(QCI=5) Indicates the E-RAB setup attempt event (QCI=5).

ERABEstablishSuc(QCI=5) Indicates the E-RAB setup success event (QCI =5).

ERABEstablishFail(QCI=5) Indicates the E-RAB setup failure event (QCI=5).

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 616


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Event Description

ERABNormalRelease(QCI=5) Indicates a normal E-RAB release event (QCI=5).

ERABAbnormalRelease(QCI=5) Indicates an abnormal E-RAB release event


(QCI=5).

VoLTEVideoPhoneAttempt(MOC) Indicates the VoLTE MOC setup attempt event.

VoLTEVideoPhoneAttempt(MTC) Indicates the VoLTE MTC setup attempt event.

VoLTEVideoPhoneSetu- Indicates the VoLTE MOC setup success event.


pSuc(MOC)

VoLTEVideoPhoneSetupSuc(MTC) Indicates the VoLTE MTC setup success event.

VoLTEVideoPhoneEstablished Indicates the VoLTE MOC response event.


(MOC)

VoLTEVideoPhoneEstablished Indicates the VoLTE MTC response event.


(MTC)

VoLTEVideoPhoneSetup- Indicates the VoLTE MOC setup failure event.


Fail(MOC)

VoLTEVideoPhoneSetupFail(MTC) Indicates the VoLTE MTC setup failure event.

VoLTEVideoPhoneEnd Indicates the VoLTE call end event.

VoLTEVideoPhoneDrop Indicates the VoLTE call drop event.

VoLTEHandoverAttempt Indicates the VoLTE handover attempt event.

VoLTEHandoverSuc Indicates the VoLTE handover success event.

VoLTEHandoverFail Indicates the VoLTE handover failure event.

VoLTECallRadioLinkFail Indicates the VoLTE radio link failure event.

IMSRegisterAttempt Indicates the IMS registration attempt event.

IMSRegisterSuc Indicates the IMS registration success event.

IMSRegisterFail Indicates the IMS registration failure event.

VoLTECalltoVideoPhone Indicates a VoLTE service in which voice-to-video


transformation occurs.

VoLTEVideoPhoneVideoEnd Indicates the video is end during the VoLTE call.

21.2.9 CDMA and LTE Interoperation Events


This section describes the predefined events of CDMA and LTE interoperations. You can refer
to this section when configuring CDMA and LTE interoperation events.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 617


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Event Description

CellReselectioneHRPD2LTEAttem Indicates the eHRPD to LTE cell reselection attempt


pt event.

CellReselectioneHRPD2LTESucce Indicates the eHRPD to LTE cell reselection success


ss event.

CellReselectioneHRPD2LTEFailur Indicates the eHRPD to LTE cell reselection failure


e event.

LTE2eHRPDHOAttempt Indicates the LTE to eHRPD handover attempt


event.

LTE2eHRPDHOSuccess Indicates the LTE to eHRPD cell handover success


event.

LTE2eHRPDHOFailure Indicates the LTE to eHRPD cell handover failure


event.

21.2.10 WLAN Events


This section describes the WLAN events. You can configure WLAN events by referring to the
following descriptions.

Name Meaning

STA Associate Attempt WLAN association attempt

STA Associate Success WLAN association success

STA Associate Fail WLAN association failure

Authentication Complete WLAN authentication is complete

DHCP Request WLAN IP address assignment request

IP Address Assigned WLAN IP address assignment is complete

Roaming WLAN roaming

Disconnect WLAN disconnection

Dormant WLAN dormant

21.2.11 TD-SCDMA Events


This section describes the predefined events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to
this section for configuring events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 618


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Radio Resource Control Events


This section describes radio resource control events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can
refer to this section for configuring radio resource control events on the TD-SCDMA
network.

Name Definition

TDSRRCSetupReq Radio resource control (RRC) connection


setup request event

TDSRRCSetupSuc RRC connection setup success event

TDSRRCSetupFail RRC connection setup failure event

TDSRRCConnectionRel RRC connection release event

TDSRRCConnectionAbnormalRel \RRC connection abnormal release event

TDSRRCState RRC state

Authentication Events
This section describes authentication events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring authentication events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSAuthenticationReq Authentication request event

TDSAuthenticationRsp Authentication success event

TDSAuthenticationFail Authentication failure event

Encryption Events
This section describes encryption events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring encryption events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSSecurityModeReq Encryption request event

TDSSecurityModeSuc Encryption success event

TDSSecurityModeFail Encryption failure event

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 619


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Authentication and Encryption Events


This section describes authentication and encryption events of the TD-SCDMA network. You
can refer to this section for configuring authentication and encryption events on the TD-
SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSAuthenCipherReq Authentication and encryption event

TDSAuthenCipherSuc Authentication and encryption success event

TDSAuthenCipherFail Authentication and encryption failure event

Radio Bearer Setup Events


This section describes radio bearer (RB) setup events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can
refer to this section for configuring RB setup events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSRBSetupReq RB setup request event

TDSRBSetupSuc RB setup success event

TDSRBSetupFail RB setup failure event

SMS and MMS Events


This section describes short message sevice (SMS) and multimedia messaging service (MMS)
events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this section for configuring SMS and
MMS events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSSMSSentAttempt SMS sending attempt event

TDSSMSSent SMS sending success event

TDSSMSReceiveAttempt SMS receiving attempt event

TDSSMSReceived SMS receiving event

Call Connection Events


This section describes call connection events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to
this section for configuring call connection events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 620


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Definition

TDSPagingType1 Type 1 paging event

TDSPagingType2 Type 2 paging event

TDSPagingResponse Paging response

TDSOutgoingCallAttempt Outgoing call attempt event

TDSIncomingCallAttempt Incoming call response event

TDSOutgoingCallSetupSuc Outgoing call setup success event

TDSOutgoingCallSetupFailRFReason Outgoing call setup failure event

TDSIncomingCallSetupFailRFReason Incoming call setup failure event

TDSOutgoingCallSetupFailNotRFReason Outgoing call setup failure due to Non-RF


reasons

TDSIncomingCallSetupFailNotRFReason Incoming call setup failure due to Non-RF


reasons

TDSOutgoingCallEstablished Outgoing call answer event

TDSIncomingCallEstablished Incoming call answer event

TDSCallDropped Call drop event

TDSCallCompleted Call completion event

TDSLinkRestoreAttempt Link restore preparation event

TDSLinkRestoreSuc Link restore success event

TDSLinkRestoreFail Link restore failure event

TDSCompressModeActivation Compressed mode activation event

TDSCompressModeDeActivation Compressed mode deactivation event

Data Service Events


This section describes data service events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring data service events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

DataServiceReq Data service request

DataServiceAcpt Service request acceptance

DataServiceReqRej Data service request rejection

DataServiceSetupFail Data service setup failure

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 621


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Definition

DataServiceDropped Call drop of data services

DataServiceCompleted Data service completion

RAS Dial Attempt Remote access service (RAS) dial attempt


event

RAS Dial RAS dial success event

RAS Hangup RAS hangup event

RAS Error RAS error event

Session Start Task execution start event

Session End Task execution end event

Session Drop Unexpected end of task execution

Session Error Task failure event

Data Transfer Start Data transmission start

DataTransfer End Data transmission end

GMM Process Events


This section describes GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) process events of the TD-
SCDMA network. You can refer to this section for configuring GMM process events on the
TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSAttachAttempt Attach attempt

TDSAttachSuc Attach success event

TDSAttachFail Attach failure event

TDSPDPActivationReq Packet Data Protocol (PDP) activation request


event

TDSPDPActivationSuc PDP activation success event

TDSPDPActivationFail PDP activation failure event

TDSPDPDeactivationReq PDP deactivation request

TDSPDPDeactivationSuc PDP deactivation success

TDSPDPContextAbnormalRel Abnormal PDP release

TDSDetachAttempt Detach event

TDSDetachSuc Detach success

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 622


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Definition

TDSRAUpdateReq Route update request event

TDSRAUpdateSuc Route update success event

TDSRAUpdateFail Route update failure event

TDSCellReselection Cell reselection

MM Process Events
This section describes Mobility Management (MM) process events of the TD-SCDMA
network. You can refer to this section for configuring MM process events on the TD-SCDMA
network.

Name Definition

TDSLAUpdateReq Location update request event

TDSLAUpdateSuc Location update success event

TDSLAUpdateFail Location update failure event

TDSIMSIDetach International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) detach


event

TDSIdentityReq Identity authentication request event

TDSIdentityRsp Identity authentication response event

Handover Events
This section describes handover events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring soft or hard handover events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSHOAttempt Handover attempt event

TDSHOSuc Soft handover success event

TDSHOFail Soft handover failure event

TDSEvent1A Event 1A

TDSEvent2A Event 2A

TDSEvent3A Event 3A

TDSEvent4A Event 4A

TDSEvent1B Event 1B

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 623


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Definition

TDSEvent2B Event 2B

TDSEvent3B Event 3B

TDSEvent4B Event 4B

TDSEvent1C Event 1C

TDSEvent2C Event 2C

TDSEvent3C Event 3C

TDSEvent1D Event 1D

TDSEvent2D Event 2D

TDSEvent3D Event 3D

TDSEvent1E Event 1E

TDSEvent2E Event 2E

TDSEvent1F Event 1F

TDSEvent2F Event 2F

TDSPhChannelRecfgSuc Physical channel reconfiguration success


event

TDSPhChannelRecfgFail Physical channel reconfiguration failure


event

TDSTrChannelRecfgSuc Transmission channel reconfiguration


success event

TDSTrChannelRecfgFail Transmission channel reconfiguration


failure event

TDSRBReconfigSuc RB reconfiguration success event

TDSRBReconfigFail RB reconfiguration failure event

TDSRBRelease RB release event

TDSRBReleaseFail RB release failure event

TDSIntraFreqHHO Intra-frequency hard handover event

TDSIntraFreqHHOFail Intra-frequency hard handover failure event

TDSInterFreqHHO Inter-frequency hard handover event

TDSInterFreqHHOFail Inter-frequency hard handover failure event

TDSCellReselectionConnectMode Connection mode of cell reselection

TDSCSConnectionHO2Gto3GAttempt CS domain 2G-to-3G handover attempt


event

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 624


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Definition

TDSCSConnectionHO2Gto3GFail CS domain 2G-to-3G handover failure event

TDSCSConnectionHO3Gto2GAttempt CS domain 3G-to-2G handover attempt


event

TDSCSConnectionHO3Gto2GSuc CS domain 3G-to-2G handover success


event

TDSCSConnectionHO3Gto2GFail CS domain 3G-to-2G handover failure event

TDSCellResel3Gto2G 3G-to-2G cell reselection event

TDSCellResel2Gto3G 2G-to-3G cell reselection event

HSDPA Events
This section describes High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) events of the TD-
SCDMA network. You can refer to this section for configuring HSDPA events on the TD-
SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSH2HIntraFreqCellChangeSuc HSDPA-to-HSDPA intra-frequency serving


cell update success event

TDSH2HIntraFreqCellChangeFail HSDPA-to-HSDPA intra-frequency serving


cell update failure event

TDSH2GHHOSuc HSDPA-to-2G hard handover success event

TDSH2GHHOFail HSDPA-to-2G hard handover failure event

TDSH2HInterFreqCellChangeSuc HSDPA-to-HSDPA inter-frequency serving


cell update success event

TDSH2HInterFreqCellChangeFail HSDPA-to-HSDPA inter-frequency serving


cell update failure event

HSUPA Events
This section describes HSUPA events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring HSUPA events on the TD-SCDMA network.

Name Definition

TDSPSConnectionHOUtoGPRSAttempt Handover request event between HSUPA


and GPRS

TDSPSConnectionHOUtoGPRSSuc Handover success event between HSUPA


and GPRS

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 625


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Definition

TDSPSConnectionHOUtoGPRSFail Handover failure event between HSUPA and


GPRS

TDSPSConnectionHOGPRStoUSuc GPRS-to-HSUPA inter-system handover


success event

TDSPSConnectionHOGPRStoUFail GPRS-to-HSUPA inter-system handover


failure event

Internal Events
This section describes internal events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring internal events.

Name Definition

GtoTDSIdle -

WtoGIdle -

CALL_SETUP_MSG -

End_UEDISCONNECTED -

End_STOPTEST -

UEDisconnected -

21.2.12 IP Packet Predefined Events

HTTP Events

HTTP Browsing Events


This section describes the HTTP Browsing events. You can refer to this section when
configuring HTTP browsing events, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

DNSQuery DNS request

DNSResponseSuccess DNS response success

DNSFailure DNS failure

HTTPBrowsingGet HTTP browsing GET request

HTTPBrowsingGetSuccess HTTP browsing GET success

HTTPBrowsingGetFailure HTTP browsing GET failure

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 626


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

HTTPBrowsingPost HTTP browsing post request

HTTPBrowsingPostFailure HTTP browsing post failure

HTTPBrowsingPostSuccess HTTP browsing post success

HTTPBrowsingAccessRequest HTTP browsing access request

HTTPBrowsingAccessRequestACK HTTP browsing access request


acknowledgement

HTTPBrowsingAccessFailure HTTP browsing page access failure

HTTPBrowsingAccessSuccess HTTP browsing page setup success

HTTPBrowsingRequest HTTP browsing page content download


request

HTTPBrowsingSuccess HTTP browsing content download success

HTTPBrowsingGetFailure HTTP browsing content download failure

HTTPBrowsingDataStart HTTP browsing data transmission

HTTP Download Events


This section describes the HTTP Download events. You can refer to this section when
configuring HTTP download events, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

DNSQuery DNS request

DNSResponseSuccess DNS response success

DNSFailure DNS failure

HTTPDownloadGet HTTP download GET request

HTTPDownloadGetSuccess HTTP download GET success

HTTPDownloadGetFailure HTTP download GET failure

HTTPDownloadAccessRequest HTTP download access request

HTTPDownloadAccessRequestACK An HTTP download page setup request


response is sent.

HTTPDownloadAccessSuccess HTTP download page setup success

HTTPDownloadAccessFailure HTTP download page access failure

HTTPFileDownloadRequest HTTP download request

HTTPFileDownloadSuccess HTTP download page download file success

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 627


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

HTTPFileDownloadFailure HTTP download page download file failure

HTTP Upload Events


This section describes the HTTP Upload events. You can refer to this section when
configuring HTTP upload events, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

DNSQuery DNS request

DNSResponseSuccess DNS response success

DNSFailure DNS failure

HTTPUploadPost HTTP upload post request

HTTPUploadPostFailure HTTP upload post failure

HTTPUploadPostSuccess HTTP upload post success

HTTPUploadAccessRequest HTTP upload page setup request

HTTPUploadAccessRequestACK HTTP upload page access request


acknowledgement

HTTPUploadAccessSuccess HTTP upload page response failure

HTTPUploadAccessFailure HTTP upload page access failure

HTTPFileUploadReques HTTP upload file GET request

HTTPUploadGetFailure HTTP upload GET failure

HTTPUploadGetSuccess HTTP upload GET success

PS Session Events
This section describes the PS Session events. You can refer to this section when configuring
PS Session events, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

PS Session Start Session start

PS Session End Session completion

PS Session Error Session error

PS Session Drop Abnormal session completion

PS Data Transfer Start Data transmission start

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 628


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

PS Data Transfer End Data transmission completion

Video Streaming Events


This section describes the Video Streaming events. You can refer to this section when
configuring video streaming events, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

HTTPVideoAccessRequest HTTP video access request

HTTPVideoGet HTTP video request

HTTPVideoResponseSuccess HTTP video success response

HTTPVideoResponseFailure HTTP video failure response

HTTPVideoAccessSuccess HTTP video access success

HTTPVideoAccessFailure HTTP video access failure

HTTPVideoFirstBufferStart HTTP video first buffer start

HTTPVideoFirstBufferSuccess HTTP video first buffer success

HTTPVideoFirstBufferFailure HTTP video first buffer failure

HTTPVideoDownloadComplete HTTP video download completion

HTTPVideoGetDataTransferStart HTTP video get data transmission start

HTTPVideoGetDataTransferSuccess HTTP video get data transmission


completion

HTTPVideoGetDataTransferFailure HTTP video get data transmission failure

Email Events
This section describes the Email events. You can refer to this section when configuring email
events, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning

SMTP EmailSendStart SMTP email sending request

SMTP EmailSendSuccess SMTP email sent successfully

SMTP EmailSendFailure Failure to send an SMTP email

POP3 EmailDownloadRequest Indicates a POP3 email download request.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 629


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning

POP3 EmailDownloadSuccess Indicates that a POP3 email is successfully


downloaded.

POP3EmailDownloadFailure Indicates that a POP3 email fails to be


downloaded.

IMAP EmailDownloadRequest Indicates an IMAP email download request.

IMAP EmailDownloadSuccess Indicates that an IMAP email is successfully


downloaded.

IMAP EmailDownloadFailure Indicates that an iMAP email fails to be


downloaded.

21.3 C Description of Predefined KPIs


This describes the system predefined KPIs of the networks. You can refer to this part when
viewing the detailed meanings of KPIs.

21.3.1 Description of Common Predefined KPIs


This section describes the common predefined KPIs. See this section when viewing the
common predefined KPIs.

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Accessibili Session Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of session
ty Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) setups.
Session Setup Success Rate = Data
Transfer Start / Session Start×100.

Call Setup Success Value range: 0 Indicates the call setup success rate.
Rate(MOC) to 100 (unit: %) Call Setup Success Rate(MOC) =
Number of call setup success times
(MOC)/Number of call attempts
(MOC) x 100

Call Access Value range: 0 Indicates the call completion rate


Success to 100 (unit: %) Call Access Success Rate(MOC) =
Rate(MOC) Total number of call setup success
times of different RATs for an
MOC/Total number of call setup
times of different RATs x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 630


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

All Call Drop Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate
to 100 (unit: %) All Call Drop Rate = Total number
of call drop times of different RATs
for an MOC and MTC/(Total
number of call setup success times
of different RATs for an MOC x 2)
x 100

NetdiskDown Value range: 0 Indicates the Netdisk download start


Begin DL Success to 100 (unit: %) success rate.
Rate NetdiskDown Begin DL Success
Rate = Number of Netdisk
download start times/Number of
Netdisk download requests x 100

NetDiskDown Value range: 0 Indicates the Netdisk download


Success DL Rate to 100 (unit: %) completion success rate.
DiskDown Success DL Rate =
Number of successful Netdisk
downloads/Number of Netdisk
download requests x 100

NetdiskUP Begin Value range: 0 Indicates the Netdisk upload start


UL Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) success rate.
NetdiskUP Begin UL Success Rate
= Number of Netdisk upload start
times/Number of Netdisk upload
requests x 100

NetDiskUP Success Value range: 0 Indicates the Netdisk upload


UL Rate to 100 (unit: %) completion success rate.
NetDiskUP Success UL Rate =
Number of successful Netdisk
uploads/Number of Netdisk upload
requests x 100

DNS Host Name Value range: 0 Indicates the DNS parsing success
Resolution Success to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate DNS Host Name Resolution
Success Rate = Number of DNS
parsing success times/Number of
DNS parsing requests x 100

TCP Connection Value range: 0 Indicates the TCP connection


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) success rate.
TCP Connection Success Rate =
Number of successful TCP
connections/Number of TCP
connection requests x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 631


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Coverage DT Distance Unit: m Indicates the drive test distance.

Total DT Duration Unit: s Indicates the total drive test


duration.

WCDMA DT Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of duration


Duration Time Rate to 100 (unit: %) when the WCDMA network is used.
WCDMA DT Duration Time Rate =
Duration when the WCDMA
network is used/Total DT duration

GSM DT Duration Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of duration


Time Rate to 100 (unit: %) when the GSM network is used.
GSM DT Duration Time Rate =
Duration when the GSM network is
used/Total DT duration

LTE DT Duration Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of duration


Time Rate to 100 (unit: %) when the LTE network is used.
LTE DT Duration Time Rate =
Duration when the LTE network is
used/Total DT duration

TD-SCDMA DT Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of duration


Duration Time Rate to 100 (unit: %) when the TD-SCDMA network is
used.
TD-SCDMA DT Duration Time
Rate = Duration when the TD-
SCDMA network is used/Total DT
duration

Video Play Value range: 0 Indicates the video playing success


Reproduction to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Success Rate Video Play Reproduction Success
Rate = Number of video playing
start times/Number of video playing
requests x 100

Call Setup Success Value range: 0 Indicates the call setup delay
Delay to 100 (unit: %) distribution.
Distributing(MOC) Call Setup Success Delay
Distributing(MOC) = Number of
times the call setup delay is greater
than or equal to 8s/Number of call
setup success times (MOC) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 632


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Delay Ping Round Trip Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of ping
Time Avg services.
The value is calculated using the
following formula: Average ping
delay = Total ping delay/Total
number of successful pings.

Session Setup Time Unit: ms Indicates the average session setup


Delay Avg delay.
The value is calculated using the
following formula: Average session
setup delay = Total session setup
delay/Total number of data transfer
start times.
The session setup delay indicates
the interval between the Session
Start event and the Data Transfer
Start event.

PDP Activate Time Unit: ms Indicates the average PDP


Delay Avg activation delay from the time when
the PDP activation request is sent.
The average delay from the time
when the PDP activation request
message is sent to the time when the
PDP activation successful message
is received.

HTTP Browsing Unit: ms Indicates the average homepage


Display Delay Avg opening delay.
HTTP Browsing Display Delay Avg
= Total duration of homepage
opening delay/Number of successful
homepage opening times

HTTP Browsing Unit: ms Indicates the average homepage


Page Response opening delay.
Delay HTTP Browsing Page Response
Delay = Total duration of homepage
opening delay/Number of successful
homepage opening times

Http Video Delay Unit: ms Indicates the average video play


Avg delay.
Http Video Delay Avg = Total video
play delay/Number of video play
start times

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 633


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Http Video Delay - Indicates the video play delay


Distributing (>=8) distribution.
Http Video Delay Distributing
(>=8) = Number of times when the
video play delay is greater than or
equal to 8s/Number of video play
start times

Call Setup Success Unit: ms Indicates the average call setup


Avg Delay(MOC) delay.
Call Setup Success Avg
Delay(MOC) = Total call setup
delay/Number of call setup success
times (MOC)

Email Upload Value range: 0 Indicates the email sending delay


Delay(>=20s) to 100 (unit: %) distribution.
Distributing Email Upload Delay(>=20s)
Distributing = Number of times
when the email sending delay is
greater than or equal to 20s/Number
of successful email sending times

Email Download Value range: 0 Indicates the email message


Delay(>=10s) to 100 (unit: %) receiving delay distribution.
Distributing Email Download Delay(>=10s)
Distributing = Number of times
when the email message receiving
delay is greater than or equal to 10s/
Number of successful email
message receiving times x 100

Email Download Unit: ms Indicates the average email message


Delay Avg receiving delay.
Email Download Delay Avg = Total
email message receiving delay/
Number of successful email
message receiving times

Call Setup Success Unit: ms Indicates the average call setup


Delay Avg(MOC) success delay time.
Call Setup Success Delay
Avg(MOC) = Total number of call
delays for an MOC/Total number of
call setup success times for an MOC

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 634


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

NetdiskDown Start Unit: ms Indicates the average Netdisk


DL Delay Avg download start delay.
Average Netdisk Download Start
Delay = Total Netdisk download
start delay/Number of Netdisk
download start times

NetdiskDown Start Unit: ms Indicates the Netdisk download start


DL Delay delay distribution.
Distributing NetdiskDown Start DL Delay
Distributing = Number of times
when the Netdisk download start
delay is greater than or equal to 5s/
Number of Netdisk download start
times

NetdiskUP Start Unit: ms Indicates the average Netdisk


UL Delay Avg upload start delay.
NetdiskUP Start UL Delay Avg =
Total Netdisk upload start delay/
Number of Netdisk upload start
times

NetdiskUP Start Unit: ms Indicates the average Netdisk


UL Delay upload start delay distribution.
Distributing NetdiskUP Start UL Delay
Distributing = Number of times
when the Netdisk upload start delay
is greater than or equal to 5s/
Number of Netdisk upload start
times

FTP DL Setup Avg Unit: ms Indicates the average FTP download


Delay setup delay.
FTP DL Setup Avg Delay = Total
FTP download setup delay/Number
of successful FTP download setups.

FTP DL Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the FTP download setup


Delay to 100 (unit: %) delay distribution.
Distributing(≤10s) FTP DL Setup Delay
Distributing(≤10s) = Number of
times when the FTP download setup
delay is less than or equal to 10s/
Number of successful FTP
download setups.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 635


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

FTP UL Setup Avg Unit: ms Indicates the average FTP upload


Delay setup delay.
FTP UL Setup Avg Delay = Total
FTP upload setup delay/Number of
successful FTP upload setups.

FTP UL Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the FTP upload setup


Delay to 100 (unit: %) delay distribution.
Distributing(≤10s) FTP UL Setup Delay
Distributing(≤10s) = Number of
times when the FTP upload setup
delay is less than or equal to 10s/
Number of successful FTP upload
setups.

HTTP Browsing Unit: ms Indicates the HTTP homepage open


Page Access Delay delay distribution.
HTTP Browsing Page Access Delay
= Number of times when the HTTP
homepage open delay is less than or
equal to 10s/Number of HTTP
service access success times x 100

Video Streaming Unit: ms Indicates the streaming playback


Play Delay delay.
Video Streaming Play Delay =
Initial buffering completion time -
Playback request send time

HTTPDownloadGe Unit: ms Indicates the application download


tSuccessDelay server connection delay.
HTTPDownloadGetSuccessDelay =
Server connection completion time -
Server connection request send time

EmailReceiveRspo Unit: ms Indicates the email attachment


nseDaley receive response delay.
EmailReceiveRsponseDaley =
Email attachment receive time -
Email attachment receive request
send time

MMS Send Daley Unit: ms Indicates the MMS send delay.


Avg MMS Send Daley Avg = MMS
receive time - MMS send time

MMS Received Unit: ms Indicates the MMS receive delay.


Delay MMS Received Delay = MMS
receive time - MMS send time

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 636


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HTTP Browsing Value range: 0 Indicates the home page opening


Page Access Delay to 100 (unit: %) delay distribution.
Distributing(>=5s) HTTP Browsing Page Access Delay
Distributing(>=5s) = Number of
times the home page opening delay
is greater than or equal to 5s/
Number of DNS parsing requests x
100

TCP Connection Unit: ms Indicates the average TCP


Delay Avg connection delay.
TCP Connection Delay Avg = Total
TCP connection delays/Number of
successful TCP connections

HTTP Browsing Unit: ms Indicates the HTTP response delay.


Response Success HTTP Browsing Response Success
Delay Delay = Total HTTP response
delay/Number of HTTP response
success times

HTTP Browsing Unit: ms Indicates the average HTTP


Roundtrip Time browsing round trip time.
Average HTTP Browsing Roundtrip Time
Average = Total HTTP browsing
round trip time/Number of round
trip times

HTTP Download Unit: ms Indicates the average HTTP


Roundtrip Time download round trip time.
Average HTTP Download Roundtrip Time
Average = Total HTTP download
round trip time/Number of round
trip times

HTTP Upload Unit: ms Indicates the average HTTP upload


Roundtrip Time round trip time.
Average HTTP Upload Roudntrip Time
Average = Total HTTP upload
round trip time/Number of round
trip times

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 637


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HTTP Browsing Unit: ms Indicates the average start delay in


Data Start Delay data transmission for web page
Avg browsing.
HTTP Browsing Data Start Delay
Avg = Total start delay in data
transmission for web page
browsing/Number of data
transmission start times for web
page browsing

Retainabili Indicates the Value range: 0 Indicates the session drop rate.
ty session drop rate. to 100 (unit: %) Session Drop Rate = Session Drop /
Data Transfer Start×100.

Average Call Unit: s Indicates the average call duration


Duration Time during a DT.
Average call duration = Total call
duration in a DT/Total number of
calls in the DT.

Video Play Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the video play


Rate to 100 (unit: %) disconnection rate.
Video Play Drop Rate = Number of
video play disconnection times/
Number of video play start times x
100

PBMThroughputU Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of grids


LBelow1M to 100 (unit: %) whose uplink rate is less than 1
Rate(Grid) Mbit/s.
PBMThroughputULBelow1M
Rate(Grid) = Number of grids
whose uplink rate is less than 1
Mbit/s/Total number of grids x 100

PBMThroughputD - Indicates the downlink


LNormalization normalization rate.
Rate PBMThroughputDLNormalization
Rate = Downlink rates of sampling
points/Peak rates corresponding to
the serving cell DL bandwidth

PBMThroughputU - Indicates the uplink normalization


LNormalization rate.
Rate PBMThroughputULNormalization
Rate = Uplink rates of sampling
points/Peak rates corresponding to
cell bandwidth

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 638


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

FTP DL Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the FTP download service


Rate(<1M) to 100 (unit: %) drop rate (FTP download rate is less
than 1 Mbit/s).
FTP DL Drop Rate(<1M) =
Number of times when the average
FTP download rate is less than 1
Mbit/s/Total number of FTP
downloads

FTP DL Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the FTP download service


Rate(<512K) to 100 (unit: %) drop rate (<512 kbit/s).
FTP DL Drop Rate(<512K) =
Number of times when the average
FTP download rate is less than 512
kbit/s/Total number of FTP
downloads

FTP UL Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the FTP upload service


Rate(<512K) to 100 (unit: %) drop rate (<512 kbit/s).
FTP UL Drop Rate(<512K) =
Number of times when the average
FTP upload rate is less than 512
kbit/s/Total number of FTP upload
times

FTP UL Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the FTP upload service


Rate(<256K) to 100 (unit: %) drop rate (<256 kbit/s).
FTP UL Drop Rate(<256K) =
Number of times when the average
FTP upload rate is less than 256
kbit/s/Total number of FTP upload
times

Video Streaming - Indicates the number of successful


Play Success streaming playback.
Counter

Video Streaming - Indicates the number of streaming


Play Request playback requests.
Counter

Video Streaming - Indicates the number of streaming


Drop Time Counter service drops during a specified
period.
Video Streaming Drop Time
Counter = Total number of
streaming service drops/Streaming
playback duration

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 639


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HTTPDownloadGe Value range: 0 Indicates the connection success


t Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate of the application download
server.
HTTPDownloadGet Success Rate =
Number of successful server
connections/Number of server
connection requests x 100

MMS end-and-end Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of


Received Suc Rate to 100 (unit: %) receiving an end-to-end MMS.
MMS end-and-end Received Suc
Rate = Number of times when a
receiver receives an MMS/Number
of time when a sender successfully
sends an MMS x 100

MMS end-and-end Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of


Received Suc Rate to 100 (unit: %) receiving an end-to-end MMS.
MMS end-and-end Received Suc
Rate = Number of times when a
receiver receives an MMS/Number
of time when a sender successfully
sends an MMS x 100

MMS Sent Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of cells


Success(<10%) cell to 100 (unit: %) whose MMS sent success rate is
Rate low.
MMS Sent Success(<10%) cell Rate
= Number of cells whose MMS sent
success rate is less than 10%/Total
number of cells in an area x 100.

MMS end-and-end Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of cells


Received to 100 (unit: %) whose MMS receive success rate is
Success(<10%) cell low.
Rate MMS end-and-end Received
Success(<10%)cell Rate = Number
of cells whose MMS receive
success rate is less than 10%/Total
number of cells in an area x 100.

MMS Sent and Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of cells


Received to 100 (unit: %) whose MMS receive delay is long.
Time(>10s) Cell MMS Sent and Received
Rate Time(>10s) Cell Rate = Number of
cells whose MMS receive delay is
greater than 10s/Total number of
cells in an area x 100.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 640


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HTTP Browsing Value range: 0 Indicates the web page browsing


Throughput to 100 (unit: %) throughput distribution.
Distributing(<= HTTP Browsing Throughput
256) Distributing(<= 256) = Number of
sampling points whose web page
browsing throughput is less than or
equal to 256 kbit/s/Total number of
sampling points for web page
browsing throughput x 100

Service Ping Packet Lost Value range: 0 Indicates the ping packet loss rate.
integrity Rate to 100 (unit: %) Ping packet loss rate = Total
number of ping packet loss times/
Total number of ping packet
transmission times.

App. Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


DL Avg throughput at the application layer.

App. Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink


UL Avg throughput at the application layer.

FTP DL Success Value range: 0 Indicates the File Transfer Protocol


Rate to 100 (unit: %) (FTP) download success rate.
FTP download success rate =
Number of successful FTP
downloads/Number of FTP
download attempts.

FTP UL Success Value range: 0 Indicates the FTP upload success


Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
FTP upload success rate = Number
of successful FTP uploads/Number
of FTP upload attempts.

FTP DL APP. Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average download rate


Throughput Avg at the application layer.
Average download rate at the
application layer = Size of the
downloaded files/Download
duration.

FTP UL APP. Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink rate at


Throughput Avg the application layer.
Average uplink rate at the
application layer = Size of the
uploaded files/Upload duration.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 641


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Ping Success Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of ping
to 100 (unit: %) services.
Ping success rate = Number of
successful pings/Total number of
pings.

WAP Logon Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WAP


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) logins.
WAP Logon Success Rate =
Number of successful WAP logins/
Total number of WAP logins.

WAP Page Refresh Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WAP
Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) page refreshes.
WAP Page Refresh Success Rate =
Number of successful WAP page
refreshes/Total number of WAP
page refreshes.

WAP DL Success Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WAP


Rate to 100 (unit: %) downloads.
WAP DL Success Rate = Number of
successful WAP downloads/Total
number of WAP downloads.

WAP DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average WAP


Throughput Avg download rate.
WAP DL Throughput Avg = Total
bytes of WAP download x 8/Total
duration of WAP download.

Ping Success Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of ping
to 100 (unit: %) services.
Ping success rate = Number of
successful pings/Total number of
pings.

MMS Send Success Value range: 0 Indicates the MMS sending success
Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
MMS Send Success Rate = Number
of MMS sending successes/Number
of MMS sending attempts.

MMS Receive Value range: 0 Indicates the MMS receive success


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
MMS Receive Success Rate =
Number of successful MMS send
times/Number of MMS sending
attempts.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 642


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

MMS Receive Unit: ms Indicates the average successful


Success Time Avg MMS receive delay.
MMS Receive Success Time Avg =
Total MMS receive delay/Number
of successful MMS receive times

MMS Receive App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average MMS receive
Throughput Avg rate.
MMS Receive App Throughput
Avg = Total App Throughput
generated in the period from MMS
Receive attempt to MMS Receive
Success and that from MMS
Receive attempt to MMS Receive
Failed/Total number of App
Throughput generated in the period
from MMS Receive attempt to
MMS Receive Success and that
from MMS Receive attempt to
MMS Receive Failed.

MMS Send Success Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of


Time Avg successful MMS sending.
MMS Send Success Time Avg =
Total MMS sending delay/Number
of successful MMS send times

MMS Send App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average MMS send
Throughput Avg rate.
MMS Send App Throughput Avg =
Total App Throughput between
MMS Send attempt and MMS Send
Success/Failed/Number of App
Throughput between MMS Send
attempt and MMS Send Success/
Failed.

Email Download Value range: 0 Indicates the email message


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) receiving success rate.
Email Download Success Rate =
Number of successful email
message receiving times/Number of
email receiving requests x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 643


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Data Drop Unit: Kbyte Indicates the data disconnection


Distributing distribution.
Data Drop Distributing = (App.
Throughput DL Total Size + App.
Throughput DL Drop Total Size)/
Session Drop Counter

App. Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average download rate


DL Avg at the application layer.
App. Throughput DL Avg = Total
download volume at the application
layer/Total download duration

App. Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average upload rate at


UL Avg the application layer.
App. Throughput UL Avg = Total
upload volume at the application
layer/Total upload duration

PBMThroughputD Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink rate


LAvg(Grid) in grids.
PBMThroughputDLAvg(Grid) =
Sum of downlink rates in all grids/
Number of PBM sampling grids in
which downlink rates are measured

PBMThroughputD Unit: kbit/s Indicates the proportion of grids


LBelow4M whose downlink rate is less than 4
Rate(Grid) Mbit/s.
PBMThroughputDLBelow4M
Rate(Grid) = Number of grids
whose downlink rate is less than 4
Mbit/s/Total number of grids x 100

PBMThroughputU Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink rate in


LAvg(Grid) grids.
PBMThroughputULAvg(Grid) =
Sum of uplink rates in all grids/
Number of PBM sampling grids in
which uplink rates are measured

NetDiskDown Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average Netdisk


Throughput Avg download rate.
NetDiskDown Throughput Avg =
Size of downloaded files/Download
duration of the files

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 644


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

NetDiskUP Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average Netdisk


Throughput Avg upload start rate.
NetDiskUP Throughput Avg = Size
of uploaded files/Upload duration of
the files

HTTP DL Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the HTTP download rate


Rate Distributing to 100 (unit: %) distribution.
(≤N kbit/s/M) HTTP DL Setup Rate Distributing
(≤N kbit/s/M) = Number of
sampling points where the HTTP
download rate is less than or equal
to N kbit/s (Mbit/s)/Total number of
sampling points for the HTTP
download rate x 100

Video Streaming Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of low


DL Rate(≤N kbit/s) to 100 (unit: %) streaming download rate.
Video Streaming DL Rate(≤N
kbit/s) = Number of sampling points
where the streaming download rate
is less than or equal to N kbit/s
(Mbit/s)/Total number of sampling
points for the streaming download
rate x 100

FTP DL Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of sampling


Distributing(RSRP to 100 (unit: %) points with low download rate in an
≥-90dBm&SINR≥6 environment with good radio
dB&DL signals.
Rate≤1Mbps) The value is calculated using the
following formula: FTP DL Setup
Distributing(RSRP≥-90dBm&SINR
≥6dB&DL Rate≤1Mbps) = Number
of sampling points whose
RSRP≥-90dBm, SINR≥6dB, and
download rate≤1 Mbit/s/Total
number of sampling points × 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 645


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

FTP DL Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of sampling


Distributing(RSRP to 100 (unit: %) points with low download rate in an
≥-90dBm&SINR≥6 environment with good radio
dB&DL Rate≤512 signals.
kbit/s) The value is calculated using the
following formula: FTP DL Setup
Distributing(RSRP≥-90dBm&SINR
≥6dB&DL Rate≤512 kbit/s) =
Number of sampling points whose
RSRP≥-90dBm&SINR≥6dB&down
load rate is less than or equal to 512
kbit/s/Total number of sampling
points of downlink rate × 100

Video Streaming Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of


Play Success to 100 (unit: %) streaming playback completion.
Compete Rate Video Streaming Play Success
Compete Rate = Number of
streaming video playback
completion times/Total number of
streaming video start times x 100

Custom Video Play Stop Value range: 0 Indicates the video freeze rate.
Duration Rate to 100 (unit: %) Video Play Stop Duration Rate =
Number of video play buffer ending
times/Number of video play start
times x 100

Video Play Stop Unit: ms Indicates the average video freeze


Duration Time Avg duration.
Video Play Stop Duration Time Avg
= Total video freeze duration/
Number of video play buffer ending
times

Video Streaming Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average streaming rate.


Avg Rate Video Streaming Avg Rate =
Received video data volume/
Receive time

EmailReceiveRspo Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of the


nseSuc Rate to 100 (unit: %) email attachment receive response.
EmailReceiveRsponseSuc Rate =
Number of successful email
attachment receive times/Number of
email attachment receive requests x
100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 646


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

EmailReceiveCom- Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of the


plete Suc Rate to 100 (unit: %) email attachment receive
completion.
EmailReceiveComplete Suc Rate =
Number of successful email
attachment receive times/Number of
email attachment receive attempts x
100

Email Receive Rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the email attachment


receive rate.
Email Receive Rate = Size of an
attachment/Receive time

HTTP Download Value range: 0 Indicates the HTTP download


Success Rate(10s) to 100 (unit: %) success rate when HTTP Mode is
Disconnected by Time and Value
is 10.
HTTP Download Success Rate(10s)
= Number of success times/
(Number of success times +
Number of failures) x 100

HTTP Download Value range: 0 Indicates the HTTP download


Success Rate(3M) to 100 (unit: %) success rate when HTTP Mode is
Disconnected by Size and Value is
3000.
HTTP Download Success Rate(3M)
= Number of success times/
(Number of success times +
Number of failures) x 100

HTTP Download Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average value of


Throughput Session App Throughput DL
Avg(3M) during HTTP download when
HTTP Mode is Disconnected by
Size and Value is 3000.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 647


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HTTP Download Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of Session


Throughput >1M to 100 (unit: %) App Throughput DL values
Rate(3M) greater than 1 MB during HTTP
download when HTTP Mode is
Disconnected by Size and Value is
3000.
HTTP Download Throughput >1M
Rate(3 M) = Number of Session
App Throughput DL values greater
than 1 MB during HTTP download/
Total number of Session App
Throughput DL values during
HTTP download x 100

HTTP Download Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of Session


Throughput >3M to 100 (unit: %) App Throughput DL values
Rate(3M) greater than 3 MB during HTTP
download when HTTP Mode is
Disconnected by Size and Value is
3000.
HTTP Download Throughput >3M
Rate(3 M) = Number of Session
App Throughput DL values greater
than 3MB during HTTP download/
Total number of Session App
Throughput DL values during
HTTP download x 100

HTTP Download Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average value of


Throughput Session App Throughput DL
Avg(10s) during HTTP download when
HTTP Mode is Disconnected by
Time and Value is 10.

HTTP Upload Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average value of


Throughput Session App Throughput UL
Avg(1M) during HTTP upload when HTTP
Mode is Disconnected by Size and
Value is 1000.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 648


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HTTP Upload Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of Session


Throughput >1M to 100 (unit: %) App Throughput UL values
Rate(1M) greater than 1 MB during HTTP
upload when HTTP Mode is
Disconnected by Size and Value is
1000.
HTTP Upload Throughput >1M
Rate(1 M) = Number of Session
App Throughput UL values greater
than 1 MB during HTTP upload/
Total number of Session App
Throughput UL values during
HTTP upload x 100

HTTP Upload Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of Session


Throughput >3M to 100 (unit: %) App Throughput UL values
Rate(1M) greater than 3 MB during HTTP
upload when HTTP Mode is
Disconnected by Size and Value is
1000.
HTTP Upload Throughput >3M
Rate(1 M) = Number of Session
App Throughput UL values greater
than 3 MB during HTTP upload/
Total number of Session App
Throughput UL values during
HTTP upload x 100

HTTP Upload Value range: 0 Indicates the HTTP upload success


Success Rate(1M) to 100 (unit: %) rate when HTTP Mode is
Disconnected by Size and Value is
1000.
HTTP Upload Success Rate(1 M) =
Number of success times/(Number
of success times + Number of
failures) x 100

HTTP Upload Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average value of


Throughput Session App Throughput UL
Avg(10s) during HTTP upload when HTTP
Mode is Disconnected by Time
and Value is 10.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 649


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Combine Call Setup Success Value range: 0 Indicates the call setup success rate
Rate(CS to 100 (unit: %) of concurrent services (PS before
Concurrent PS) CS) during a call.
Call Setup Success Rate(CS
Concurrent PS) = [1 - Concurrent
service (PS before CS) call drop
rate] x 100

21.3.2 Description of Predefined GSM KPIs


This section describes the predefined GSM KPIs. You can refer to this section when viewing
the predefined GSM KPIs.

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Accessibi GSM Attach Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of attaches.
lity Success Rate to 100 (unit: Attach success rate =
%) GSMAttachSuc/
GSMAttachAttempt x 100

Incoming Call Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of incoming


Setup Success Rate to 100 (unit: call setups.
%) Incoming call setup success rate =
GSMCallSetup (MTC)/
(GSMCallSetup (MTC) +
GSMCallSetupFailRF (MTC)) x
100

Outgoing Call Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of outgoing


Setup Success Rate to 100 (unit: call setups.
%) Outgoing call setup success rate =
GSMCallSetup (MOC)/
(GSMCallSetup (MOC) +
GSMCallSetupFailRF (MOC)) x
100

GSM PDP Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of PDP


Activation Success to 100 (unit: context activations.
Rate %) PDP activation success rate =
GSMPDPActivationSuc/
GSMPDPActivationReq x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 650


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

SDCCH Call Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate of an
Rate to 100 (unit: SDCCH.
%) SDCCH call drop rate =
GSMSDCCHCallDrop/
GSMSDCCHAssigned x 100

GSM Paging Value range: 0 Indicates the paging success rate.


Success Rate to 100 (unit: GSM Paging Success Rate = Number
%) of paging response messages sent by
a mobile-terminated MS/Number of
setup messages sent by a mobile-
originated MS x 100

GSM Call Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the voice service call drop
Rate to 100 (unit: rate.
%) GSM Call Drop Rate = Number of
voice service call drops/Number of
voice service calls x 100

Coverage GSM DT Duration Unit: s Indicates the duration of a drive test


(DT).

Coverage Value range: 0 Indicates the coverage of GSM900


Rate(GSM 900) to 100 (unit: frequency band.
%) Coverage rate(GSM 900) = GSM900
coverage distance/Total GSM
coverage distance x 100

Coverage Value range: 0 Indicates the coverage of DCS1800


Rate(DCS1800) to 100 (unit: frequency band.
%) Coverage rate(DCS1800) = DCS1800
coverage distance/Total GSM
coverage distance x 100

Coverage Value range: 0 Indicates the coverage of GSM850


Rate(GSM 850) to 100 (unit: frequency band.
%) Coverage rate(GSM 850) = DCS1800
coverage distance/Total GSM
coverage distance x 100

Kilometer per Drop - Indicates the kilometer call drop rate.


Call Kilometer per drop call = Total
distance of a drive test/
GSMCallDropped

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 651


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Frequency Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of the


DCS1900 Rate to 100 (unit: DCS1900 frequency band duration.
%) Frequency DCS1900 Rate =
(DCS1900 frequency band duration/
Total duration of drive tests) x 100

C/I Bad Grid Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of poor C/I
to 100 (unit: grids.
%) C/I Bad Grid Rate = Number of poor
grids/Total number of grids x 100
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose C/I is less
than or equal to 12 dB take up 20% or
more of the total sampling points.

Delay InterCell HO Time Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of inter-


Delay Avg cell handovers.
The average delay is measured from
the time when an MS sends a
Handover Command message to the
time when an MS receives a
Handover Complete message.

Outgoing Call Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of


Setup Time Delay outgoing call setups.
Avg The average delay is measured from
the time when the calling MS sends a
Channel Request message to the time
when the calling MS receives an
Alerting message.

Attach Success Unit: s Indicates the average delay of


Time Delay Avg successful attaches.
The average delay is measured from
the time when an MS sends an Attach
Request message to the time when an
MS receives an Attach Accept
message or an Attach Complete
message.

GSMInterRATHOG Unit: ms Indicates the GSM-to-LTE handover


2L Delay delay.
GSMInterRATHOG2L Delay = Total
GSM-to-LTE handover delay/
Number of GSM-to-LTE handovers

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 652


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Mobility InterCell HO Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of inter-cell


Success Rate to 100 (unit: handovers.
%) InterCell HO success rate =
GSMHandoverSuc/
(GSMHandoverSuc +
GSMHandoverFail) x 100

IntraCell HO Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of intra-cell


Success Rate to 100 (unit: handovers.
%) IntraCell HO success rate =
GSMIntracellHandoverSuc/
(GSMIntracellHandoverSuc +
GSMIntracellHandoverFail) x 100.

Location Update Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of location


Success Rate to 100 (unit: updates.
%) Location update success rate =
GSMLocationUpdateSuc/Location
update requests

GSMInterRATHOG Value range: 0 Indicates the GSM-to-LTE handover


2Lsuc Rate to 100 (unit: success rate.
%) GSMInterRATHOG2Lsuc Rate =
Number of successful GSM-to-LTE
handover/Number of GSM-to-LTE
handover attempts x 100

Retainabi Call Drop Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the GSM call drop rate.
lity to 100 (unit: Call drop rate = GSMCallDropped/
%) (GSMCallSetup (MOC) +
GSMCallSetup (MTC)) x 100.

Service RLC Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


integrity DL Avg throughput at the RLC layer from
Data Transfer Start to Data
Transfer End.

RLC Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink


UL Avg throughput at the RLC layer from
Data Transfer Start to Data
Transfer End.

LLC Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


DL Avg throughput at the LLC layer from
Data Transfer Start to Data
Transfer End.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 653


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

LLC Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink


UL Avg throughput at the LLC layer from
Data Transfer Start to Data
Transfer End.

All RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


Throughput DL Avg throughput at the RLC layer during
the whole DT.

All RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink


Throughput UL Avg throughput at the RLC layer during
the whole DT.

All LLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


Throughput DL Avg throughput at the LLC layer during
the whole DT.

All LLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink


Throughput UL Avg throughput at the LLC layer during
the whole DT.

21.3.3 Predefined WCDMA KPIs


This section describes the predefined WCDMA KPIs. You can refer to this section when
viewing predefined WCDMA KPIs.

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Accessibili WCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of incoming


ty Incoming Call to 100 (unit: %) call setups during the processing of
Setup Success services.
Rate Incoming Call Setup Success Rate =
IncomingCallSetupSuc/
(IncomingCallSetupSuc
+IncomingCallSetupFailRFReason)
x 100%

WCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of incoming


Outgoing Call to 100 (unit: %) call setups during the processing of
Setup Success AMR services.
Rate Incoming Call Setup Success Rate =
IncomingCallSetupSuc(AMR)/
(IncomingCallSetupSuc(AMR)
+IncomingCallSetupFailRFRea-
son(AMR)) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 654


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Data Service Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate of data
Drop Rate(on to 100 (unit: %) services.
PDP)

PDP Activation Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of PDP


Success to 100 (unit: %) activations (counted by PDP requests).
Rate(On PDP Activation Success Rate(On
PDPReq) PDPReq) = PDPActivationSuc/
(PDPActivationSuc +
PDPActivationFail) x 100%

PDP Activation Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of PDP


Success to 100 (unit: %) activations (counted by RRC requests).
Rate(On PDP Activation Success Rate(On
RRCReq) RRCReq) = PDPActivationSuc/
(PDPActivationReq +
DataServiceSetupFail) x 100%

RRC Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of RRC


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) setups.
RRC Setup Success Rate =
RRCSetupSuc/RRCSetupReq x
100%

WCDMA to Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA-to-LTE


LTE to 100 (unit: %) reselection success rate.
Reselection WCDMA to LTE Reselection Success
Success Rate Rate = Number of successful
WCDMA-to-LTE reselections/Number
of WCDMA-to-LTE reselections
attempts x 100%

WCDMA to Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA-to-GSM


GSM to 100 (unit: %) reselection success rate.
Reselection WCDMA to GSM Reselection Success
Success Rate Rate = Number of successful
WCDMA-to-GSM reselections/
Number of WCDMA-to-GSM
reselections attempts x 100%

WCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA MOC


Setup Success to 100 (unit: %) completion rate.
Rate(MOC) WCDMA Call Setup Success
Rate(MOC) = Number of call setup
success times (MOC)/Number of call
attempts (MOC) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 655


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

WCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA paging success


Paging Success to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate WCDMA Paging Success Rate =
Number of transmitted paging response
messages (MTC)/Number of
transmitted setup messages (MOC) x
100%

WCDMA Dial Value range: 0 Indicates the PS service setup success


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
WCDMA Dial Success Rate = Number
of successful PS service setup times/
Number of PS service setup attempts x
100%

WCDMA - Indicates the count of


Outgoing Call OutgoingCallSetupFailRFReason.
Setup
FailRFReason
Counter

WCDMA - Indicates the count of


Outgoing Call OutgoingCallSetupFailRFRea-
Setup son(AMR).
FailRFReason
Counter(AMR)

WCDMA - Indicates the count of


Incoming Call IncomingCallSetupFailRFReason.
Setup
FailRFReason
Counter

WCDMA - Indicates the count of


Incoming Call IncomingCallSetupFailRFRea-
Setup son(AMR).
FailRFReason
Counter(AMR)

WCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of outgoing


Outgoing Call to 100 (unit: %) call setups during the processing of
Setup Success services.
Rate Outgoing Call Setup Success Rate =
OutgoingCallSetupSuc/
(OutgoingCallSetupSuc
+OutgoingCallSetupFailRFReason)
x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 656


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

WCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of outgoing


Outgoing Call to 100 (unit: %) call setups during the processing of
Setup Success AMR services.
Rate(AMR) Outgoing Call Setup Success Rate =
OutgoingCallSetupSuc(AMR)/
(OutgoingCallSetupSuc(AMR)
+OutgoingCallSetupFailRFRea-
son(AMR)) x 100%

Coverage WCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the coverage rate.


Coverage Rate to 100 (unit: %) WCDMA Coverage Rate = (Coverage
distance at which the radio
environment meets both specified
conditions/Total DT distance) x 100%.
The specified conditions are as
follows: (1) RSCP ≥ -95 dBm; (2)
Ec/Io ≥ -12 dB.

Soft HO Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of soft


to 100 (unit: %) handovers.
Soft Handover Rate = (A2 + A3 + A4
+ A5 + A6)/(A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5
+ A6) x 100%
A1 is the number of active sets that
have one cell after the soft handover.
A2 is the number of active sets that
have two cells after the soft handover.
A3 is the number of active sets that
have three cells after the soft handover.
A4 is the number of active sets that
have four cells after the soft handover.
A5 is the number of active sets that
have five cells after the soft handover.
A6 is the number of active sets that
have six cells after the soft handover.

Soft HO Unit: % Indicates the soft handover overhead.


Overhead Soft Handover Overhead = (A2 x 1 +
A3 x 2 + A4 x 3 + A5 x 4 + A6 x
5)/(A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6) x
100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 657


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

UE Pilot Value range: 0 Indicates the pilot pollution rate of a


Pollution Rate to 100 (unit: %) UE.
UE Pilot Pollution Rate = Number of
sampling points with pilot pollution
problem/Total number of sampling
points x 100%
The sampling points with pilot
pollution problem must meet the
following conditions:
l Number of all sets with pilot signals
>3
l Total pilot signal strength ≥ -100
dBm
l Difference between the strongest
pilot signal and any other pilot
signals < 5 dBm

WCDMA DT Unit: m Indicates the WCDMA DT distance.


Distance

Scanner Pilot Value range: 0 Indicates the pilot pollution rate of a


Pollution Rate to 100 (unit: %) scanner.
Scanner Pilot Pollution Rate = Number
of sampling points with pilot pollution
problem/Total number of sampling
points x 100%
The sampling points with pilot
pollution problem must meet the
following conditions:
l Number of all sets with pilot signals
> or = 4
l Total pilot signal strength > or = -95
dBm
l Difference between the strongest
pilot signal and any other pilot
signals < 5 dBm

DC Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the dual carrier rate.


to 100 (unit: %) DC Rate = Number of times that DC
features are used/(Number of times that
DC features are used + Number of
times that SC features are used) x
100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 658


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HS-SCCH Value range: 0 Indicates the HS-SCCH decoding


Decoding to 100 (unit: %) success rate.
Success Rate HS-SCCH Decoding Success Rate =
Number of successful HS-SCCH
decoding/Number of HS-SCCH
decoding attempts x 100%

Total RSCP Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of poor Total


Bad Grid Rate to 100 (unit: %) RSCP grids.
Total RSCP Bad Grid Rate = Number
of poor grids/Total number of grids x
100%
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Total RSCP is
less than or equal to -95 dBm take up
20% or more of the total sampling
points.

Coverage Not Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of sampling


Balanced to 100 (unit: %) points with uplink and downlink
Samples Rate coverage balance.
Coverage Not Balanced Samples Rate
= Number of sampling points whose
Total RSCP plus Tx power is less than
or equal to -85 dBm/Total number of
sampling points x 100%

Coverage Not Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of grids with


Balanced Grid to 100 (unit: %) poor uplink and downlink coverage
Rate balance.
Coverage Not Balanced Grid Rate =
Number of poor grids/Total number of
grids x 100%
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Total RSCP
plus Tx power is less than or equal to
-85 dBm take up 80% or less of the
total sampling points.

WCDMA Soft Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of soft


Handover Rate to 100 (unit: %) handovers.
WCDMA Soft Handover Rate =
Number of sampling points whose
active set is greater than one/Total
number of sampling points x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 659


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

WCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of multi-path


Softer to 100 (unit: %) soft handovers.
Handover Rate WCDMA Softer Handover Rate =
Number of sampling points whose
active set is greater than two/Total
number of sampling points x 100%

Total Ec/Io Bad Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of poor Total
Grid Rate to 100 (unit: %) Ec/Io grids.
Total Ec/Io Bad Grid Rate = Number of
poor grids/Total number of grids x
100%
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Ec/Io is less
than or equal to -14 dB take up 10% or
more of the total sampling points.

Pilot Pollution Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of grids with


Grid Rate to 100 (unit: %) pilot pollution.
Pilot Pollution Grid Rate = Number of
grids with pilot pollution/Total number
of grids x 100%
Sampling points with pilot pollution
refer to those in which the number of
cells whose EC/Io is less than 3 dB
lower than that of the cell with the
strongest RSCP greater than or equal to
3 in the condition that CPICH RSCP is
greater than or equal to -100 dBm.
Grids with pilot pollution refer to those
in which sampling points with pilot
pollution take up 10% or more of the
total sampling points.

Good Coverage Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of grids with


with to 100 (unit: %) good coverage and severe interference.
Interference Good Coverage with Interference Grid
Grid Rate Rate = Number of grids with good
coverage and severe interference/Total
number of grids x 100%
Grids with good coverage and severe
interference refer to those in which the
sampling points whose RSCP is greater
than or equal to -80 dBm and Ec/Io is
less than or equal to -12 dB take up
20% or more of the total sampling
points.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 660


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Total Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of sampling


RSCP(≥-85dB to 100 (unit: %) points whose total RSCP is greater than
m)Rate or equal to -85 dBm.
Total RSCP (≥ -85 dBm) Rate =
Number of sampling points whose total
RSCP is greater than or equal to -85
dBm/Total number of sampling points
x 100%

WCDMA CS Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of the CS


Duration Time to 100 (unit: %) service duration on a UMTS network.
Rate WCDMA CS Duration Time Rate =
Duration of a CS service test terminal
on a UMTS network/Total test duration
x 100%

WCDMA PS Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of the PS


Duration Time to 100 (unit: %) service duration on a UMTS network.
Rate WCDMA PS Duration Time Rate =
Duration of a PS service test terminal
on a UMTS network/Total test duration
x 100%

Total Ec/Io Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of DC1


DC1(≥-12dB)R to 100 (unit: %) sampling points whose total Ec/Io is
ate greater than or equal to -12 dB.
Total Ec/Io DC1 (≥ -12 dB) Rate =
Number of DC1 sampling points
whose total Ec/Io is greater than or
equal to -12 dB/Total number of
sampling points x 98

Total Ec/Io Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of DC2


DC2(≥-12dB)R to 100 (unit: %) sampling points whose total Ec/Io is
ate greater than or equal to -12 dB.
Total Ec/Io DC2 (≥ -12 dB) Rate =
Number of DC2 sampling points
whose total Ec/Io is greater than or
equal to -12 dB/Total number of
sampling points x 99

Ec/Io Average - Indicates the average Ec/Io of DC1


(DC Primary sampling points.
UARFCN) Ec/Io Average (DC Primary UARFCN)
= Total Ec/Io of DC1 sampling points/
Total number of sampling points

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 661


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Ec/Io Average - Indicates the average Ec/Io of DC2


(DC Secondary sampling points.
UARFCN) Ec/Io Average (DC Secondary
UARFCN) = Total Ec/Io of DC2
sampling points/Total number of
sampling points

Total Ec/ Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of sampling


Io(≥-12dB)Rate to 100 (unit: %) points whose total Ec/Io is greater than
or equal to -12 dB.
Total Ec/Io (≥ -12 dB) Rate = Number
of sampling points whose total Ec/Io is
greater than or equal to -12 dB/Total
number of sampling points x 100%

WCDMA DT km Indicates the WCDMA kilometer call


Distance Call drop rate.
Drop Rate WCDMA DT Distance Call Drop Rate
= Total test kilometers/Number of
signaling call drops + Number of
service drops

Delay WCDMA Unit: ms Indicates the average setup delay of the


Incoming Call called UE during the processing of
Setup Time adaptive multi rate services.
Delay Avg The average delay is measured from
the time when the Paging Type1
message or Paging Type2 message is
sent by the called UE to the time when
the Alerting message is received during
the processing of services.

WCDMA Unit: ms Indicates the average setup delay of the


Outgoing Call calling UE during the processing of
Setup Time services.
Delay Avg The average delay is measured from
the time when the RRC Connect
Request message is sent by the calling
UE to the time when the Alerting
message is received during the service
processing.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 662


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

PDP Activate Unit: ms Indicates the average PDP activation


Time Delay delay from the time when the PDP
Avg(On activation request is sent.
PDPReq) The average delay is measured from
the time when the PDP activation
request message is sent to the time
when the PDP activation successful
message is received.

PDP Activate Unit: ms Indicates the average PDP activation


Time Delay delay from the time when the RRC
Avg(On request is sent.
RRCReq) The average delay is measured from
the time when the Activate PDP
Context Accept message is sent by a
UE to the time when the first RRC
Connection Request message is
received.

Voice R99 to Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of voice


GSM HHO service hard handovers from WCDMA
Time Delay R99 to GSM.
Avg The average delay is measured from
the time when
CSConnectionHO3Gto2Gsuc occurs
in the time when
CSConnectionHO3Gto2GAttempt
occurs.

PS R99 to GSM Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of PS


HHO Time service hard handovers from WCDMA
Delay Avg R99 to GSM.
The average delay is measured from
the time when the Cell Change Order
From UTRAN message is sent to the
time when the Routing Area Update
Accept message is received.

WCDMA to Unit: ms Indicates the WCDMA-to-LTE


LTE reselection delay.
Reselection This delay is measured from the time
Delay when the WCDMA-to-LTE reselection
attempt is initiated to the time when the
WCDMA-to-LTE reselection is
complete.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 663


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

WCDMA to Unit: ms Indicates the WCDMA-to-GSM


GSM reselection delay.
Reselection This delay is measured from the time
Delay when the WCDMA-to-GSM
reselection attempt is initiated to the
time when the WCDMA-to-GSM
reselection is complete.

W to G HO Unit: ms Indicates the WCDMA-to-GSM


Delay handover delay.
W to G HO Delay = Total WCDMA-
to-GSM handover delay/Number of
WCDMA-to-GSM handovers

WCDMA Call Unit: ms Indicates the WCDMA end-to-end


end to end voice setup delay.
Setup Success WCDMA Call end to end Setup
Delay Success Delay = altering message
receive time - sending time of the
rrcConnectionRequest signaling (its
cause value is OriginatingCoversatio-
nalCall) or CM service request.

Retainabili WCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate of services.
ty Drop Rate to 100 (unit: %) Call Drop Rate = CallDropped/
(IncomingCallSetupSuc+
OutgoingCallSetupSuc) x 100%

Voice Service Value range: 0 Indicates the voice service call drop
Quality Drop to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate Voice Service Quality Drop Rate =
Number of voice service call drop
times/Number of voice service call
times x 100%

WCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the call message drop rate
Message Drop to 100 (unit: %) (calculated based on a 90s long call).
Rate(Call WCDMA Call Message Drop
Duration Rate(Call Duration Time≤90s) =
Time≤90s) Number of long call drops/Total
number of long calls x 100%

WCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA voice signaling


Service Drop to 100 (unit: %) call drop rate.
Rate WCDMA Call Service Drop Rate =
Number of voice service call drop
times/Number of voice service call
times x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 664


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

WCDMA SMS Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA SMS end-to-


end-and-end to 100 (unit: %) end receive success rate.
Received Suc WCDMA SMS end-and-end Received
Rate Suc Rate = Number of received
messages/Number of sent messages x
100%

WCDMA SMS Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of cells whose


end-and-end to 100 (unit: %) WCDMA SMS end-to-end receive
Received success rate is low.
Success(<10%) WCDMA SMS end-and-end Received
Cell Rate Success(<10%) Cell Rate = Number of
cells where the SMS end-to-end
receive success rate is lower than the
threshold (10%)/Total number of cells
x 100%

WCDMA SMS Value range: 0 Indicates the proportion of cells whose


Sent and to 100 (unit: %) WCDMA SMS end-to-end send and
Received receive delay are excessively long.
Time(>10s) WCDMA SMS Sent and Received
Cell Rate Time(>10s) Cell Rate = Number of
cells whose SMS send or receive delay
is greater than the threshold (10s)/Total
number of cells x 100%

Mobility Channel Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of channel


Change DCH to 100 (unit: %) changes from Dedicated Channel
To EDCH (DCH) to Enhanced Dedicated Channel
Success Rate (EDCH).
Channel Change DCH To EDCH
Success Rate = ChannelChangeIntra-
CellDtoESuc/ChannelChangeIntra-
CellDtoEAttempt x 100%

HSUPA to Value range: 0 Indicates the HSUPA-to-GPRS inter-


GPRS InterRAT to 100 (unit: %) RAT handover success rate.
HO Success HSUPA to GPRS InterRAT HO
Rate Success Rate = PSConnectionHOU-
toGPRSSuc/(PSConnectionHOU-
toGPRSSuc + PSConnectionHOU-
toGPRSFail) x 100%

H to G HHO Value range: 0 Indicates the HSDPA-to-GSM hard


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) handover success rate.
H to G HHO Success Rate =
H2GHHOSuc/(H2GHHOSuc
+H2GHHOFai) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 665


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

H to H Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of cell


InterFreqCellCh to 100 (unit: %) changes from HSDPA to HSDPA inter-
ange Success frequency serving cells.
Rate H to H InterFreqCellChange Success
Rate = H2HInterFreqCellChange-
Suc/(H2HInterFreqCellChangeSuc +
H2HInterFreqCellChangeFail) x
100%

H to H Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of cell


IntraFreqCellCh to 100 (unit: %) changes from HSDPA to HSDPA intra-
ange Success frequency serving cells.
Rate H to H IntraFreqCellChange Success
Rate = H2HIntraFreqCellChange-
Suc/(H2HIntraFreqCellChangeSuc +
H2HInterFreqCellChangeFail) x
100%

H to R99 Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of HSDPA-


InterFreqHHO to 100 (unit: %) to-WCDMA R99 inter-frequency hard
Success Rate handovers.
H to R99 InterFreqHHO Success Rate
= H2R99InterFreqHHOSuc/
(H2R99InterFreqHHOSuc/
H2R99InterFreqHHOFail) x 100%

H to R99 Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of HSDPA-


IntraFreqHHO to 100 (unit: %) to-WCDMA R99 intra-frequency hard
Success Rate handovers.
H to R99 IntraFreqHHO Success Rate
= H2R99IntraFreqHHOSuc/
(H2R99IntraFreqHHOSuc +
H2R99IntraFreqHHOFail) x 100%

H to R99 Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of HSDPA-


IntraFreqSHO to 100 (unit: %) to-WCDMA R99 intra-frequency soft
Success Rate handovers.
H to R99 IntraFreqSHO Success Rate
= H2R99IntraFreqSHOSuc/
(H2R99IntraFreqSHOSuc +
H2R99IntraFreqSHOFail) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 666


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

InterCell Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of EDCH-to-


Channel to 100 (unit: %) DCH inter-cell channel changes.
Change EDCH InterCell Channel Change EDCH To
To DCH DCH Success Rate =
Success Rate ChannelChangeInterCellIntraFreE-
toDSuc/(ChannelChangeInterCellIn-
traFreEtoDSuc + ChannelChangeIn-
terCellIntraFreEtoDFail) × 100%

InterFreq Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of inter-


EDCHServing to 100 (unit: %) frequency EDCH serving cell hard
Cell Change handovers.
HHO Success InterFreq EDCHServing Cell Change
Rate HHO Success Rate =
CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOSuc/
(CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOSuc +
CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOFail) x
100%

IntraCell Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of EDCH-to-


Channel to 100 (unit: %) DCH intra-cell channel changes.
Change EDCH IntraCell Channel Change EDCH To
To DCH DCH Success Rate =
Success Rate ChannelChangeIntraCellEtoDSuc/
(ChannelChangeIntraCellEtoDSuc +
ChannelChangeIntraCellEtoDFail) x
100%

IntraFreq Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of intra-


EDCHServing to 100 (unit: %) frequency EDCH serving cell hard
Cell Change handovers.
HHO Success IntraFreq EDCHServing Cell Change
Rate HHO Success Rate =
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOSuc/
(CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOSuc +
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOFail) x
100%

IntraFreq Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of intra-


EDCHServing to 100 (unit: %) frequency EDCH serving cell soft
Cell Change handovers.
SHO Success IntraFreq EDCHServing Cell Change
Rate SHO Success Rate =
CellChangeUtoUBySHOSuc/
(CellChangeUtoUBySHOSuc +
CellChangeUtoUBySHOFail) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 667


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

PS R99 to GSM Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


HHO Success to 100 (unit: %) R99-to-GSM PS service handovers.
Rate PS R99 to GSM HHO Success Rate =
PSConnectionHO3Gto2GSuc/
PSConnectionHO3Gto2GAttempt x
100%

R99 InterFreq Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


HHO Success to 100 (unit: %) R99 inter-frequency hard handovers.
Rate R99 InterFreq HHO Success Rate =
InterFreqHHO/(InterFreqHHOFail
+ InterFreqHHO) x 100%

R99 IntraFreq Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


HHO Success to 100 (unit: %) R99 intra-frequency hard handovers.
Rate R99 IntraFreq HHO Success Rate =
IntraFreqHHO/(IntraFreqHHOFail
+ IntraFreqHHO) x 100%

R99 SHO Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) R99 soft handovers.
R99 SHO Success Rate = SoftHO/
SoftHOAttempt x 100%

R99 to H Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


InterFreqHHO to 100 (unit: %) R99-to-HSDPA inter-frequency hard
Success Rate handovers.
R99 to H InterFreqHHO Success Rate
= R992HInterFreqHHOSuc/
(R992HInterFreqHHOSuc +
R992HInterFreqHHOFail) x 100%

R99 to H Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


IntraFreqHHO to 100 (unit: %) R99-to-HSDPA intra-frequency hard
Success Rate handovers.
R99 to H InterFreqHHO Success Rate
= R992HIntraFreqHHOSuc/
(R992HIntraFreqHHOSuc +
R992HIntraFreqHHOFail) x 100%

R99 to H Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


IntraFreqSHO to 100 (unit: %) R99-to-HSDPA intra-frequency soft
Success Rate handovers.
R99 to H IntraFreqSHO Success Rate
= R992HIntraFreqSHOSuc/
(R992HIntraFreqSHOSuc +
R992HIntraFreqSHOFail) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 668


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Voice R99 to Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WCDMA


GSM HHO to 100 (unit: %) R99-to-GSM voice service hard
Success Rate handovers.
Voice R99 to GSM HHO Success Rate
= CSConnectionHO3Gto2GSuc/
(CSConnectionHO3Gto2GSuc +
CSConnectionHO3Gto2GFail) x
100%

WCDMA to Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA-to-LTE


LTE to 100 (unit: %) redirection success rate.
Redirection WCDMA to LTE Redirection Success
Success Rate Rate = Number of WCDMA-to-LTE
redirection success times/(Number of
successful WCDMA-to-LTE
redirection + Number of WCDMA-to-
LTE redirection failures) x 100%

WCDMA to Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA-to-LTE


LTE handover to 100 (unit: %) handover success rate.
Success Rate WCDMA to LTE handover Success
Rate = Number of successful
WCDMA-to-LTE handovers/(Number
of successful WCDMA-to-LTE
handovers + Number of WCDMA-to-
LTE handover failures) x 100%

WCDMA to Unit: ms Indicates the WCDMA-to-LTE


LTE handover handover delay.
Success Delay WCDMA to LTE handover Success
Delay = Total WCDMA-to-LTE
handover delay/Number of WCDMA-
to-LTE handovers

W to G HO Suc Value range: 0 Indicates the WCDMA-to-GSM


Rate to 100 (unit: %) handover success rate.
W to G HO Suc Rate = Number of
successful WCDMA-to-GSM
handovers/(Number of successful
WCDMA-to-GSM handovers +
Number of WCDMA-to-GSM
handover failures)

Service Total BLER DL Value range: 0 Indicates the average downlink


integrity Avg to 100 (unit: %) transmission BLER of all the channels.

RLC PDU Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink PDU


Throughput DL throughput at the RLC layer.
Avg

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 669


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

RLC PDU Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink PDU


Throughput UL throughput at the RLC layer.
Avg

RLC SDU Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink SDU


Throughput DL throughput at the RLC layer.
Avg

RLC SDU Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink SDU


Throughput UL throughput at the RLC layer.
Avg

HSDPA App. Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


Throughput DL throughput of the HSDPA at the
Avg application layer.

HSUPA App. Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput


Throughput UL of the HSUPA at the application layer.
Avg

R99 App. Unit: kbit/s Indicates average downlink throughput


Throughput DL at the R99 application layer.
Avg

Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the throughput drop rate.


Drop Rate Throughput drop rate = Total
downloaded data amount at the PDCP
layer/Total throughput drop times for
each RAT

WCDMAPBM Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink rate


ThroughputDL falling back to the WCDMA network
Avg(Grid) in grids.
WCDMAPBMThroughput-
DLAvg(Grid) = Sum of downlink rates
in all grids/Number of PBM sampling
grids in which downlink rates are
measured

WCDMAPBM Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink rate falling


ThroughputUL back to the WCDMA network in grids.
Avg(Grid) WCDMAPBMThroughputU-
LAvg(Grid) = Sum of uplink rates in
all grids/Number of PBM sampling
grids in which uplink rates are
measured

PTT PTT Call Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the push to talk (PTT) call
Rate to 100 (unit: %) drop rate.
PTTCallDropped/PTTCallSetupSuc
x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 670


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

PTT Call Value range: 0 Indicates the PTT call access failure
Access Failure to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate PTTCallSetupFail/PTTCallAttempt
x 100%

PTT Handover Value range: 0 Indicates the PTT handover failure


Failure Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
PTTHOFail/PTTHOAttempt x 100%

Custom R4/R99 Unit: s Indicates the R4/R99 duration.


Duration Time R4/R99 Duration Time = R4 duration +
R99 duration

HSDPA Unit: s Indicates the HSDPA duration.


Duration Time

HSPA+ Unit: s Indicates the HSPA+ duration.


Duration Time

HSPA Unit: s Indicates the HSPA+ (64QAM)


+ (64QAM) duration.
Duration Time

HSPA+ (DC) Unit: s Indicates the HSPA+ (DC) duration.


Duration Time

HSPA Unit: s Indicates the HSPA+ (64QAM+DC)


+ (64QAM duration.
+DC) Duration
Time

R4/R99 Value range: 0 Indicates the R4/R99 duration


Duration Time to 100 (unit: %) proportion.
Rate R4/R99 Duration Time Rate = R4
duration + R99 duration/Total service
duration x 100%

HSDPA Value range: 0 Indicates the HSDPA duration


Duration Time to 100 (unit: %) proportion.
Rate HSDPA Duration Time Rate = HSDPA
duration/Total service duration x 100%

HSPA+ Value range: 0 Indicates the HSPA+ duration


Duration Time to 100 (unit: %) proportion.
Rate HSPA+ Duration Time Rate = HSPA+
duration/Total service duration x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 671


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

HSPA Value range: 0 Indicates the HSPA+ (64QAM)


+ (64QAM) to 100 (unit: %) duration proportion.
Duration Time HSPA+ (64QAM) Duration Time Rate
Rate = 64QAM duration of the HSPA+/Total
service duration x 100%

HSPA+ (DC) Value range: 0 Indicates the HSPA+ (DC) duration


Duration Time to 100 (unit: %) proportion.
Rate HSPA+ (DC) Duration Time Rate =
DC duration of the HSPA+/Total
service duration x 100%

HSPA Value range: 0 Indicates the HSPA+ (64QAM+DC)


+ (64QAM to 100 (unit: %) duration proportion.
+DC) Duration HSPA+ (64QAM+DC) Duration Time
Time Rate Rate = 64QAM and DC duration of the
HSPA+/Total service duration x 100%

21.3.4 Predefined LTE KPIs


This section describes the LTE predefined key performance indicators (KPIs). You can refer
to this section when querying LTE KPIs.

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Coverage LTE Coverage Value range: Indicates the coverage rate.


Rate 0 to 100 Coverage rate = Signal coverage in
(unit: %) kilometers/Drive test (DT) distance in
kilometers x 100
The coverage rate must meet the
following conditions:
l The reference signal received power
(RSRP) value is greater than or
equal to -110 dBm.
l The average signal to interference
plus noise ratio (SINR) value is
greater than or equal to -3 dBm.

Kilometer per Value range: Indicates the call drop ratio per
Drop Service 0 to +∞ kilometer.
Call drop ratio per hour = DT duration
in hours/(ERABAbnormalRel x 1000)

LTE DT Unit: m Indicates the DT distance.


Distance

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 672


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Time per Drop Value range: Indicates the call drop ratio per hour.
Service 0 to +∞ Call drop ratio per hour = DT duration
in hours/(ERABAbnormalRel x 3600)

LTE Total Call Unit: ms Indicates the duration from an LTE E-


Duration Time RAB setup to a normal or abnormal
LTE E-RAB release.
The value is obtained by summing up
the time differences from the LTE
ERABSetupSuc occurrence time to the
LTE ERABNormalRel or
ERABAbnormalRel occurrence time.

LTE DT Value range: Indicates the percentage of the LTE


Distance Rate 0 to 100 network camping distance.
(unit: %) LTE DT Distance Rate = UE's camping
distance on the LTE network/Total DT
distance x 100

LTE overlapping Value range: Indicates the LTE overlapping coverage


coverage Rate 0 to 100 rate.
(unit: %) LTE overlapping coverage Rate =
Number of sampling points with the
overlapping coverage rate of 3 or
higher/Total number of sampling points
x 100

LTE Voice Value range: Indicates the voice service call drop
Service Quality 0 to 100 rate.
Drop Rate (unit: %) LTE Voice Service Quality Drop Rate =
Number of voice service call drop
times/Number of voice service call
times x 100

UL HARQ Value range: Indicates the uplink HARQ


NACK Rate 0 to 100 retransmission proportion.
(unit: %) UL HARQ NACK Rate = Total number
of retransmitted uplink transport blocks
(TBs)/Total number of transmitted
uplink TBs x 100

DL HARQ Value range: Indicates the downlink HARQ


NACK Rate 0 to 100 retransmission proportion.
(unit: %) DL HARQ NACK Rate = Total number
of retransmitted downlink TBs/Total
number of transmitted downlink TBs x
100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 673


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Single Scheduler Value range: Indicates the average scheduling


Rate 0 to 100 proportion in single-stream
(unit: %) transmission mode.
Single Scheduler Rate = Number of
scheduled RBs in single-stream
transmission mode/Total number of
scheduled RBs x 100

Double Value range: Indicates the average scheduling


Scheduler Rate 0 to 100 proportion in dual-stream transmission
(unit: %) mode.
Double Scheduler Rate = Number of
scheduled RBs in dual-stream
transmission mode/Total number of
scheduled RBs x 100

Transmission Value range: Indicates the duration proportion of


ModeN Time 0 to 100 transmission modeN.
Length Rate (unit: %) Translation modeN Time Length Rate =
Sum of all transmission modeN
durations/Total duration of all
transmission modes x 100

LTE Overlapping Value range: Indicates the LTE overlapping coverage


Coverage 0 to 100 distance rate.
Distance Rate (unit: %) LTE Overlapping Coverage Distance
Rate = LTE Overlapping(>=3)
coverage distance/ LTE DT distance x
100

PCC VoLTE Unit: dBm Indicates the PUSCH average transmit


TxPower Avg power.

PCC VoLTE Value range: Indicates the percentage of the PUSCH


TxPower High 0 to 100 transmit power greater than 18 dBm.
Rate(>18) (unit: %)

PUCCH VoLTE Unit: dBm Indicates the PUCCH average transmit


TxPower Avg power.

PUCCH VoLTE Value range: Indicates the percentage of the PUCCH


TxPower High 0 to 100 transmit power greater than 18 dBm.
Rate(>18) (unit: %)

SRS VoLTE Unit: dBm Indicates the SRS channel average


TxPower Avg transmit power.

SRS VoLTE Value range: Indicates the percentage of the SRS


TxPower High 0 to 100 channel transmit power greater than 18
Rate(>18) (unit: %) dBm.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 674


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE Value range: Indicates the percentage of the grids


RSRP(>=-100dB 0 to 100 whose RSRP is greater than or equal to
m) Grid Rate (unit: %) -100 dBm.
LTE RSRP(>=-100dBm) Grid Rate =
Number of grids whose RSRP is
greater than or equal to -100 dBm/Total
number of grids x 100

LTE Weak Value range: Indicates the percentage of the distance


Succession 0 to 100 at which the RSRP is less than -110
Distance (unit: %) dBm for 100 consecutive meters.
Rate(<-110dBm) LTE Weak Succession Distance
Rate(<-110dBm) = Sum of the distance
at which the RSRP is less than -110
dBm for 100 consecutive meters/LTE
test distance x 100

LTE Network Value range: Indicates the LTE grid percentage


Grid Rate 0 to 100 (rasterization).
(unit: %) LTE Network Grid Rate = Number of
LTE grids/Total number of grids x 100

LTE RS- Value range: Indicates the percentage of the grids


SINR(>=-5dB) 0 to 100 whose RS and SINR difference is
Grid Rate (unit: %) greater than or equal to -5 dB.
LTE RS-SINR(>=-5dB) Grid Rate =
Number of grids whose RS and SINR
difference is greater than or equal to -5
dB/Total number of grids x 100

LTE Succession Value range: Indicates the percentage of the distance


SINR(<-5dB) 0 to 100 at which the RS and SINR difference is
Distance Rate (unit: %) less than -5 dB for 100 consecutive
meters.
LTE Succession SINR(<-5dB) Distance
Rate = Sum of the distance at which the
RS and SINR difference is less than -5
dB for 100 consecutive meters/LTE test
distance x 100

LTE Value range: Indicates the percentage of the distance


RSRP(<-110dB 0 to 100 at which the RSRP is less than -110
m) Succession (unit: %) dBm for 50 consecutive meters.
Distance Rate LTE RSRP(<-110dBm) Succession
Distance Rate = Sum of the distance at
which the RSRP is less than -110 dBm
for 50 consecutive meters/LTE test
distance x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 675


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE Value range: Indicates good coverage (the RSRP is


Coverage(RSRP 0 to 100 greater than or equal to -100 and the RS
>=-100&RS- (unit: %) and SINR difference is greater than or
SINR>=-5)Rate equal to -5).
LTE Coverage(RSRP>=-100 and RS-
SINR>=-5)Rate = Number of sampling
points whose RSRP is greater than or
equal to -100 and the RS and SINR
difference is greater than or equal to -5/
Total number of sampling points x 100

LTE Value range: Indicates good coverage (the RSRP is


Coverage(RSRP 0 to 100 greater than or equal to -110 and the RS
>=-110&RS- (unit: %) and SINR difference is greater than or
SINR>=-5)Rate equal to -5).
LTE Coverage(RSRP>=-110 and RS-
SINR>=-5)Rate = Number of sampling
points whose RSRP is greater than or
equal to -100 and the RS and SINR
difference is greater than or equal to -5/
Total number of sampling points x 100

LTE Value range: Indicates good coverage (the RSRP is


Coverage(RSRP 0 to 100 greater than or equal to -105 and the RS
>=-105&RS- (unit: %) and SINR difference is greater than or
SINR>=0)Rate equal to 0).
LTE Coverage(RSRP>=-105 and RS-
SINR>=0)Rate = Number of sampling
points whose RSRP is greater than or
equal to -105 and the RS and SINR
difference is greater than or equal to 0/
Total number of sampling points x 100

LTE Value range: Indicates good coverage with poor


Coverage(RSRP 0 to 100 quality (the RSRP is greater than or
>=-100&RS- (unit: %) equal to -100 and the RS and SINR
SINR<-5)Rate difference is less than -5).
LTE Coverage(RSRP>=-100 and RS-
SINR<-5)Rate = Number of sampling
points whose RSRP is greater than or
equal to -100 and the RS and SINR
difference is less than -5/Total number
of sampling points x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 676


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE Bad Value range: Indicates the percentage of the poor-


(SINR<5dB) 0 to 100 quality coverage distance at which the
Distance Rate (unit: %) RS and SINR difference is less than -5
dB for 100 consecutive meters.
LTE Bad (SINR<5dB) Distance Rate =
Sum of the distance at which the RS
and SINR difference is less than -5 dB
for 100 consecutive meters/LTE test
distance x 100

LTE Bad Value range: Indicates the percentage of the poor-


(SINR<0dB) 0 to 100 quality coverage distance at which the
Distance Rate (unit: %) RS and SINR difference is less than 0
dB for 100 consecutive meters.
LTE Bad (SINR<0dB) Distance Rate =
Sum of the distance at which the RS
and SINR difference is less than 0 dB
for 100 consecutive meters/LTE test
distance x 100

LTE Voice Call Value range: Indicates the percentage of LTE voice
Setup Rate 0 to 100 call setups.
(unit: %) LTE Voice Call Setup Rate = Number
of times a mobile-originated UE
initiates the Extend Sevice Request
messages at the LTE side/Total number
of times a mobile-originated UE
initiates call setups x 100

LTE Out of Value range: Indicates the LTE out-of-service


Service Duration 0 to 100 duration.
Rate (unit: %) LTE Out of Service Duration Rate =
LTE out-of-service duration/Total test
duration x 100

LTE UE Value range: Indicates the percentage of continuous


Continual High 0 to 100 UE high-power transmit distance.
Power Distance (unit: %) LTE UE Continual High Power
Rate Distance Rate = Continuous UE high-
power transmit distance/Total LTE test
distance x 100

LTE Value range: Indicates the percentage of continuous


Continuously 0 to 100 poor SINR distance.
Bad SINR (unit: %) LTE Continuously Bad SINR Distance
Distance Rate Rate = Continuous poor SINR distance/
Total LTE test distance x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 677


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE RSRP Value range: Indicates the percentage of continuous


Continuously 0 to 100 RSRP weak coverage distance.
Weak Cover (unit: %) LTE RSRP Continuously Weak Cover
Distance Rate Distance Rate = Continuous LTE weak
coverage distance/Total LTE test
distance x 100

LTE RSRP Value range: Indicates the percentage of RSRP


Continuously No 0 to 100 without values.
Cover Distance (unit: %) LTE RSRP Continuously No Cover
Rate Distance Rate = Continuous non-LTE-
coverage distance/Total LTE test
distance x 100

Accessibilit LTE Attach Value range: Indicates the attach success rate.
y Success Rate 0 to 100 LTE Attach Success Rate = AttachSuc/
(unit: %) (AttachSuc + AttachFail) x 100

LTE RRC Setup Value range: Indicates the Radio Resource Control
Success Rate 0 to 100 (RRC) setup success rate.
(unit: %) LTE RRC Setup Success Rate =
RRCSetupSuc/(RRCSetupSuc +
RRCSetupFail) x 100

E-RAB Setup Value range: Indicates the E-UTRAN Radio Access


Success Rate 0 to 100 Bearer (E-RAB) setup success rate.
(unit: %) E-RAB Setup Success Rate =
ERABSetupSuc/(ERABSetupSuc +
ERABSetupFail) x 100

Call Setup Value range: Indicates the call setup success rate.
Success Rate 0 to 100 Call Setup Success Rate =
(unit: %) RRCSetupSuccessRate x
ERABSetupSuccessRate

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 678


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Service Request Value range: Indicates the evolved packet system


(EPS) Success 0 to 100 (EPS) service request success rate.
Rate (unit: %) EPS Success Rate = LTEActiveSuc/
LTEActive Request
LTEActiveRequest indicates an RRC
request event. The RRC request cause
values are as follows:
l mt-Access
l mo-Data
l highpriorityaccess
LTEActiveSuc indicates that the E-
RAB is successfully set up for the first
time.

CSFBToWCDM Value range: Indicates the circuit switched fallback


A Access 0 to 100 (CSFB) mobile originated call (MOC)
Success (unit: %) to WCDMA access success rate.
Rate(MOC) CSFBToWCDMA Access Success Rate
= Number of successful access/
(Number of successful access +
Number of access failures) x 100

CSFBToWCDM Value range: Indicates the circuit switched fallback


A Access 0 to 100 (CSFB) mobile terminated call (MTC)
Success (unit: %) to WCDMA access success rate.
Rate(MTC) CSFBToWCDMA Access Success Rate
= Number of successful access/
(Number of successful access +
Number of access failures) x 100

CSFBToTD- Value range: Indicates the CSFB MOC to TD-


SCDMA Access 0 to 100 SCDMA access success rate.
Success (unit: %) CSFBToTD-SCDMA Access Success
Rate(MOC) Rate = Number of successful access/
(Number of successful access +
Number of access failures) x 100

CSFBToTD- Value range: Indicates the CSFB MTC to TD-


SCDMA Access 0 to 100 SCDMA access success rate.
Success (unit: %) CSFBToTD-SCDMA Access Success
Rate(MTC) Rate = Number of successful access/
(Number of successful access +
Number of access failures) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 679


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

CSFBToGSM Value range: Indicates the CSFB MOC to GSM


Access Success 0 to 100 access success rate.
Rate(MOC) (unit: %) CSFBToGSM Access Success Rate =
Number of successful access/(Number
of successful access + Number of
access failures) x 100

CSFBToGSM Value range: Indicates the CSFB MTC to GSM


Access Success 0 to 100 access success rate.
Rate(MTC) (unit: %) CSFBToGSM Access Success Rate =
Number of successful access/(Number
of successful access + Number of
access failures) x 100

RRC Reestablish Value range: Indicates the RRC re-establishment


Success Rate 0 to 100 success rate.
(unit: %) RRC Reestablish Success Rate =
Number of successful RRC re-
establishment/(Number of successful
RRC re-establishment + Number of
RRC re-establishment failures) x 100

CSFB Call Setup Value range: Indicates the call setup success rate
Suc Rate 0 to 100 after the CSFB.
(unit: %) CSFB call setup success rate = Number
of successful call setups after the
CSFB/Number of call attempts after the
CSFB x 100

LTE PS Value range: Indicates the proportion of resumable


ResumeTransmi 0 to 100 data for LTE concurrent services.
t(CS Concurrent (unit: %) LTE PS ResumeTransmit(CS
PS) Concurrent PS) = Number of resumable
data transmissions for concurrent
services (PS concurrent CS)/Number of
data service initiation times for
concurrent services (PS concurrent CS)
x 100

SessionStart Suc Value range: Indicates the data service initiation


Rate 0 to 100 success rate for LTE concurrent
(unit: %) services (CS concurrent PS).
SessionStart Suc Rate = Number of
successful data service initiation times
for concurrent services (CS concurrent
PS)/Number of data service initiation
times for concurrent services (CS
concurrent PS) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 680


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

CSFBToGSM Value range: Indicates the success rate for an MTC


Access Success 0 to 100 to fall back from the LTE network to
Rate (unit: %) the GSM network during the CSFB
process.
CSFBToGSM Access Success Rate =
Number of successful MOC and MTC
access times after the CSFB/(Number
of successful MOC and MTC access
times after the CSFB + Number of
MOC and MTC access failures after the
CSFB) x 100

CSFB to GT Value range: Indicates the proportion of MOC access


Access 0 to 100 delays exceeding 9s.
Delay(>9) (unit: %) CSFB to GT Access Delay(>9)
Rate(MOC) Rate(MOC) = Number of MOC access
delays exceeding 9s after LTE fall back
to GSM or TD-SCDMA/Total number
of MOC access delays after LTE fall
back to GSM or TD-SCDMA x 100

CSFB to GT Value range: Indicates the proportion of MTC access


Access 0 to 100 delays exceeding 9s.
Delay(>9) (unit: %) CSFB to GT Access Delay(>9)
Rate(MTC) Rate(MTC) = Number of MTC access
delays exceeding 9s after LTE fall back
to GSM or TD-SCDMA/Total number
of MTC access delays after LTE fall
back to GSM or TD-SCDMA x 100

WCDMA Return Value range: Indicates the returning success rate


LTE Success 0 to 100 from WCDMA to LTE for data
Rate(PS) (unit: %) services.
WCDMA Return LTE Success
Rate(PS) = Number of times a UE
successfully returns to an LTE network/
Number of times data services are
terminated after a UE falls back to a
WCDMA network x 100

LTE RRC Setup Value range: Indicates the RRC connection setup
Success Rate 0 to 100 success rate (service-related).
(unit: %) LTE RRC Setup Success Rate =
Number of successful RRC connection
setups (service-related)/Number of
RRC connection setup attempts
(service-related) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 681


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE Radio Setup Value range: Indicates the radio setup success rate.
Success Rate 0 to 100 LTE Radio Setup Success Rate = E-
(unit: %) RAB setup success rate x RRC
connection setup success rate (service-
related) x 100

Retainabilit Service Drop Value range: Indicates the call drop rate.
y Rate 0 to 100 Service drop rate =
(unit: %) ERABAbnormalRel/ERABSetupSuc x
100

LTE RRC Drop Value range: Indicates the RRC call drop rate.
Rate 0 to 100 LTE RRC Drop Rate = Number of
(unit: %) RRC call drop times/Number of
successful RRC establishment x 100

LTE SMS Value range: Indicates the LTE SMS message


Receive Success 0 to 100 receiving success rate.
Rate (unit: %) LTE SMS Receive Success Rate =
Number of successfully receiving LTE
SMS messages/(Number of
successfully receiving LTE SMS
messages + Number of failures in
receiving LTE SMS messages) x 100

LTE SMS Send Value range: Indicates the LTE SMS message
Success Rate 0 to 100 sending success rate.
(unit: %) LTE SMS Send Success Rate =
Number of successfully sending LTE
SMS messages/(Number of
successfully sending LTE SMS
messages + Number of failures in
sending LTE SMS messages) x 100

3Gto4GHOSucc Value range: Indicates the UMTS-to-LTE handover


essRate 0 to 100 success rate.
(unit: %) 3Gto4GHOSuccessRate = Number of
successful UMTS-to-LTE handovers/
(Number of successful UMTS-to-LTE
handovers + Number of UMTS-to-LTE
handover failures) x 100

Throughput DL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink data offline rate.


drop Avg Throughput DL drop Avg = Total
download data volume at the PDCP
layer/Total offline times on RAT
networks

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 682


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Throughput UL Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink data offline rate.


drop Avg Throughput UL drop Avg = Total
upload data volume at the PDCP layer/
Total offline times on RAT networks

LTE Session Unit: ms Indicates the LTE service offline


duration drop average time.
avg time LTE Session duration drop avg time =
Total LTE service time/LTE service
offline times

LTE Session Value range: Indicates the LTE service offline rate.
Drop Rate 0 to 100 LTE Session Drop Rate = Session Drop
(unit: %) Counter/Session Setup Success Counter
x 100

LTEPBMDropRa Value range: Indicates the LTE PBM call drop rate.
te 0 to 100 LTEPBMDropRate = Number of call
(unit: %) drops for PBM services/Total number
of PBM tests x 100

LTEPBMThroug Value range: Indicates the proportion of LTE


hputDLBelow4 0 to 100 downlink services with low rates.
M Rate (unit: %) LTEPBMThroughputDLBelow4M Rate
(RSRP≥-100,SIN (RSRP≥-100,SINR≥-5) = Number of
R≥-5) collection points whose RSRP ≥ -100
dBm, SINR ≥ -5 dB, and downlink rate
≤ 4 Mbit/s/Total number of collection
points x 100

LTEPBMThroug Value range: Indicates the proportion of grids whose


hputDLBelow4 0 to 100 LTE downlink rate is less than 4 Mbit/s.
M Rate(Grid) (unit: %) LTEPBMThroughputDLBelow4M
Rate(Grid) = Number of grids whose
LTE downlink rate is less than 4
Mbit/s/Total number of grids x 100

LTEPBMThroug Value range: Indicates the proportion of LTE uplink


hputULBelow1 0 to 100 services with low rates.
M Rate (unit: %) LTEPBMThroughputULBelow1M Rate
(RSRP≥-100,SIN (RSRP≥-100,SINR≥-5) = Number of
R≥-5) collection points whose RSRP ≥ -100
dBm, SINR ≥ -5 dB, and uplink rate ≤
1 Mbit/s/Total number of collection
points x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 683


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTEPBMThroug Value range: Indicates the proportion of grids whose


hputULBelow1 0 to 100 LTE uplink rate is less than 1 Mbit/s.
M Rate(Grid) (unit: %) LTEPBMThroughputULBelow1M
Rate(Grid) = Number of grids whose
LTE uplink rate is less than 1 Mbit/s/
Total number of grids x 100

LTE CSFB Call Value range: Indicates the voice signaling call drop
Dropped Rate 0 to 100 rate for LTE CSFB services.
(unit: %) LTE CSFB Call Dropped Rate =
Number of voice signaling call drops/
Total number of calls x 100

CSFB Call Drop Value range: Indicates the CSFB call drop rate.
Rate 0 to 100 CSFB Call Drop Rate = Number of
(unit: %) CSFBCallDrop events/(Number of
CSFBCallEstablished(MOC) events +
Number of CSFBCallEstablish-
ed(MTC) events) x 100

LTE SMS end- Value range: Indicates the E2E success rate of
and-end 0 to 100 receiving SMs on LTE networks.
Received Suc (unit: %) LTE SMS end-and-end Received Suc
Rate Rate = Number of received SMs/
Number of sent SMs x 100

LTE SMS end- Value range: Indicates the proportion of cells in


and-end 0 to 100 which the E2E success rate of receiving
Received (unit: %) SMs on LTE networks is low.
Success(<10%) LTE SMS end-and-end Received
Cell Rate Success(<10%) Cell Rate = Number of
cells in which the E2E success rate of
receiving SMs is lower than the
threshold (10%)/Total number of cells x
100

LTE SMS Sent Value range: Indicates the proportion of cells in


and Received 0 to 100 which the E2E SMs sending or
Time(>10s) Cell (unit: %) receiving delay on LTE networks is
Rate excessively long.
LTE SMS Sent and Received
Time(>10s) Cell Rate = Number of
cells in which the E2E SMs sending or
receiving delay is greater than the
threshold (10s)/Total number of cells x
100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 684


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Service MAC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput


integrity Throughput UL at the MAC layer.
Avg

MAC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


Throughput DL throughput at the MAC layer.
Avg

PHY Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput


UL Avg at the physical layer.

PHY Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


DL Avg throughput at the physical layer.

LTE RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput


Throughput UL at the RLC layer.
Avg

LTE RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


Throughput DL throughput at the RLC layer.
Avg

PDCP Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink throughput


Throughput UL at the PDCP layer.
Avg

PDCP Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


Throughput DL throughput at the PDCP layer.
Avg

Per RB Unit: kbit Indicates the average download volume


Throughput DL per RB.
Avg Per RB Throughput DL Avg = Data
download volume at the PDCP layer/
Total number of scheduled RBs during
the download process

PUSCH UL Value range: Indicates the average BLER on the


BLER Avg 0 to 100 PUSCH.
(unit: %) PUSCH UL BLER Avg = Number of
incorrectly transmitted TBs on the
PUSCH/Total number of transmitted
TBs on the PUSCH

PDSCH DL Value range: Indicates the average BLER on the


BLER Avg 0 to 100 PDSCH.
(unit: %) PDSCH DL BLER Avg = Number of
incorrectly transmitted TBs on the
PDSCH/Total number of transmitted
TBs on the PDSCH

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 685


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Per Slot DL - Indicates the average number of


Scheduler PRB scheduled PRBs per timeslot in the
Number downlink.
Per Slot DL Scheduler PRB Number =
DL scheduler PRB Counter/2

Per Slot UL - Indicates the average number of


Scheduler PRB scheduled PRBs per timeslot in the
Number uplink.
Per Slot UL Scheduler PRB Number =
UL scheduler PRB Counter/2

Per Second DL - Indicates the average number of


Scheduler PRB scheduled PRBs per second in the
Number downlink.
Per Second DL Scheduler PRB Number
= Total number of scheduled PRBs
during the download process/Total
download duration

Per Second UL - Indicates the average number of


Scheduler PRB scheduled PRBs per second in the
Number uplink.
Per Second UL Scheduler PRB Number
= Total number of scheduled PRBs in
the uplink/Total upload duration

LTE UL MAC Value range: Indicates the average uplink BLER at


Bler Avg 0 to 100 the MAC layer.
(unit: %) LTE UL MAC Bler Avg = Number of
uplink transport error blocks/Total
number of uplink transport blocks x
100

LTE DL MAC Value range: Indicates the average downlink BLER


Bler Avg 0 to 100 at the MAC layer.
(unit: %) LTE DL MAC Bler Avg = Number of
downlink transport error blocks/Total
number of downlink transport blocks x
100

LTEPBMThroug Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average LTE downlink


hputDLAvg(Grid rate in grids.
) LTEPBMThroughputDLAvg(Grid) =
Sum of downlink rates in all grids/
Number of PBM sampling grids in
which downlink rates are measured

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 686


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTEPBMThroug Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average LTE uplink rate in


hputULAvg(Grid grids.
) LTEPBMThroughputULAvg(Grid) =
Sum of uplink rates in all grids/Number
of PBM sampling grids in which uplink
rates are measured

HTTP Browsing Value range: Indicates the percentage of times the


Page Response 0 to 100 home page opening delay is greater
Delay(>=5s) (unit: %) than or equal to 5s.
Counter Rate HTTP Browsing Page Response
Delay(>=5s) Counter Rate = Number
of times the home page opening delay
is greater than or equal to 5s/Number of
successful home page opening times x
100

HTTP Browsing Value range: Indicates the percentage of times the


Page Response 0 to 100 home page opening delay is greater
Delay(>=10s) (unit: %) than or equal to 10s.
Counter Rate HTTP Browsing Page Response
Delay(>=10s) Counter Rate = Number
of times the home page opening delay
is greater than or equal to 10s/Number
of successful home page opening times
x 100

Mobility Intra Frequency Value range: Indicates the handover attempt success
HO Attempt 0 to 100 rate.
Success Rate (unit: %) Intra Frequency HO Attempt Success
Rate = IntraFreqHOAttempt/
HOPrepareAttempt x 100

Intra Frequency Value range: Indicates the intra-frequency handover


Handover 0 to 100 success rate.
Success (unit: %) Intra Frequency Handover Success
Rate(QCI=1) Rate(QCI=1) =
IntraFreqHOSuc(QCI=1)/
(IntraFreqHOSuc(QCI=1) +
IntraFreqHOFail(QCI=1)) x 100

Intra Frequency Value range: Indicates the intra-frequency handover


Handover 0 to 100 success rate.
Success (unit: %) Intra Frequency Handover Success
Rate(QCI=2) Rate(QCI=2) =
IntraFreqHOSuc(QCI=2)/
(IntraFreqHOSuc(QCI=2) +
IntraFreqHOFail(QCI=2)) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 687


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Intra Frequency Value range: Indicates the intra-frequency handover


Handover 0 to 100 success rate.
Success (unit: %) Intra Frequency Handover Success
Rate(QCI=5) Rate(QCI=5) =
IntraFreqHOSuc(QCI=5)/
(IntraFreqHOSuc(QCI=5) +
IntraFreqHOFail(QCI=5)) x 100

Inter Frequency Value range: Indicates the inter-frequency handover


Handover 0 to 100 success rate.
Success (unit: %) Inter Frequency Handover Success
Rate(QCI=1) Rate(QCI=1) =
InterFreqHOSuc(QCI=1)/
(InterFreqHOSuc(QCI=1) +
InterFreqHOFail(QCI=1)) x 100

Inter Frequency Value range: Indicates the inter-frequency handover


Handover 0 to 100 success rate.
Success (unit: %) Inter Frequency Handover Success
Rate(QCI=2) Rate(QCI=2) =
InterFreqHOSuc(QCI=2)/
(InterFreqHOSuc(QCI=2) +
InterFreqHOFail(QCI=2)) x 100

Inter Frequency Value range: Indicates the inter-frequency handover


Handover 0 to 100 success rate.
Success (unit: %) Inter Frequency Handover Success
Rate(QCI=5) Rate(QCI=5) =
InterFreqHOSuc(QCI=5)/
(InterFreqHOSuc(QCI=5) +
InterFreqHOFail(QCI=5)) x 100

TA update Value range: Indicates the tracking area update


Success Rate 0 to 100 success rate.
(unit: %) Tracking area update success rate =
TAUpdateSuc/(TAUpdateSuc +
TAUpdateFail) x 100

4G to 3G HO Value range: Indicates the inter-RAT LTE-to-UMTS


Success Rate 0 to 100 handover success rate.
(unit: %) 4G to 3G HO Success Rate = Number
of successful inter-RAT LTE-to-UMTS
handovers/(Number of successful inter-
RAT LTE-to-UMTS handovers +
Number of inter-RAT LTE-to-UMTS
handover failures) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 688


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

4G to 2G HO Value range: Indicates the inter-RAT LTE-to-GSM


Success Rate 0 to 100 handover success rate.
(unit: %) 4G to 2G HO Success Rate = Number
of successful inter-RAT LTE-to-GSM
handovers/(Number of successful inter-
RAT LTE-to-GSM handovers +
Number of inter-RAT LTE-to-GSM
handover failures) x 100

Inter RAT Value range: Indicates the inter-RAT redirection to


Redirection To 0 to 100 GSM success rate.
GSM Success (unit: %) Inter RAT Redirection To GSM
Rate Success Rate = Number of successful
inter-RAT redirection to GSM/(Number
of successful inter-RAT redirection to
GSM + Number of inter-RAT
redirection to GSM failures) x 100

Inter RAT Value range: Indicates the inter-RAT redirection to


Redirection To 0 to 100 WCDMA success rate.
WCDMA (unit: %) Inter RAT Redirection To WCDMA
Success Rate Success Rate = Number of successful
inter-RAT redirection to WCDMA/
(Number of successful inter-RAT
redirection to WCDMA + Number of
inter-RAT redirection to WCDMA
failures) x 100

Inter RAT Value range: Indicates the inter-RAT redirection to


Redirection To 0 to 100 TD-SCDMA success rate.
TD-SCDMA (unit: %) Inter RAT Redirection To TD-SCDMA
Success Rate Success Rate = Number of successful
inter-RAT redirection to TD-SCDMA/
(Number of successful inter-RAT
redirection to TD-SCDMA + Number
of inter-RAT redirection to TD-
SCDMA failures) x 100

Inter-eNodeB Value range: Indicates the inter-eNodeB handover


HO Success Rate 0 to 100 success rate.
(unit: %) Inter-eNodeB HO Success Rate =
Number of successful inter-eNodeB
handovers/(Number of successful inter-
eNodeB handovers + Number of inter-
eNodeB handover failures) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 689


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Intra-eNodeB Value range: Indicates the intra-eNodeB handover


HO Success Rate 0 to 100 success rate.
(unit: %) Intra-eNodeB HO Success Rate =
Number of successful intra-eNodeB
handovers/(Number of successful intra-
eNodeB handovers + Number of intra-
eNodeB handover failures) x 100

PDSCH RB - Indicates the downlink subframe


Number Sub scheduling rate.
Frame Avg PDSCH RB Number Sub Frame Avg =
Total number of subframes scheduled
for the UE/Service download duration

PUSCH RB - Indicates the uplink subframe


Number Sub scheduling rate.
Frame Avg PUSCH RB Number Sub Frame Avg =
Total number of subframes scheduled
for the UE/uplink service duration

Voice Return to Value range: Indicates the success rate of voice


LTE Success 0 to 100 services that return to LTE.
Rate (unit: %) Success rate of voice returns to LTE =
(GSM Call End Return LTE +
WCDMA Call End Return LTE)/
(SRVCC Handover Success + LTE
CSFB To GSM ServiceSuc + LTE
CSFB To GSM ServiceSuc + LTE
CSFB To WCDMA ServiceSuc +LTE
CSFB To WCDMA ServiceSuc (MTC)
+ CSFB To GSM Service Fail (MOC)
+ CSFB To GSM Service Fail (MTC) +
CSFB To WCDMA Service Fail
(MOC)+ CSFB To WCDMA Service
Fail (MTC))× 100

LTE Value range: Indicates the LTE-to-WCDMA fallback


CSFBtoWCDM 0 to 100 success rate for CSFB concurrent
A Call Setup Suc (unit: %) services (CS concurrent PS).
Rate(CS Success rate of LTE-to-WCDMA
Concurrent PS) CSFB (CS concurrent PS) = Total
number of initiated calls after falling
back to WCDMA/Total number of
initiated calls on LTE networks x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 690


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE HO Success Value range: Indicates the intra-LTE handover


Rate 0 to 100 success rate.
(unit: %) LTE HO Success Rate = (Number of
successful intra-frequency handovers +
Number of successful inter-frequency
handovers on an LTE network)/
(Number of intra-frequency handover
attempts + Number of inter-frequency
handover attempts on the LTE network)
x 100

Delay Session Setup Unit: ms Indicates the average session setup


Time Delay Avg delay.
Average session setup delay = Total
session setup delay/Total number of
data transfer start
The session setup delay indicates the
interval between the Session Start event
and the Data Transfer Start event.

Ping Round Trip Unit: ms Indicates the average ping delay.


Time Average ping delay = Total ping delay/
Total number of successful pings

Attach Success Unit: ms Indicates the average attach delay.


Time Delay Avg Average attach delay = Total attach
delay/Total number of attach attempts
The attach delay indicates the interval
between the AttachAttempt event and
the AttachSuc event.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 691


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Service request Unit: ms Indicates the average EPS service


(EPS) time Avg request delay.
Average EPS service request delay =
Total EPS service request delay/
Number of successful EPS service
requests
The EPS service request delay indicates
the interval between the
LTEActiveRequest event and the
LTEActiveSuc event.
LTEActiveRequest indicates an RRC
request event. The RRC request cause
values are as follows:
l mt-Access
l mo-Data
l highpriorityaccess
LTEActiveSuc indicates that the E-
RAB is successfully set up for the first
time.

Intra Frequency Unit: ms Indicates the average intra-frequency


HO Time Delay handover delay.
Avg Average intra-frequency handover
delay = Total intra-frequency handover
delay/Number of successful intra-
frequency handovers
The intra-frequency handover delay
indicates the interval between the
IntraFreqHOAttempt event and the
IntraFreqHOSuc event.

Inter Frequency Unit: ms Indicates the average inter-frequency


HO Time Delay handover delay.
Avg Average inter-frequency handover
delay = Total inter-frequency handover
delay/Number of successful inter-
frequency handovers
The inter-frequency handover delay
indicates the interval between the
InterFreqHOAttempt event and the
InterFreqHOSuc event.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 692


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

E-RAB Setup Unit: ms Indicates the average E-RAB setup


Time Delay Avg delay.
Average E-RAB setup delay = Total E-
RAB setup delay/Number of successful
E-RAB setups
The E-RAB setup delay indicates the
interval between the
ERABSetupAttempt event and the
ERABSetupSuc event.

RRC Setup Time Unit: ms Indicates the average RRC setup delay.
Delay Avg Average RRC setup delay = Total RRC
setup delay/Number of successful RRC
setups
The RRC setup delay indicates the
interval between the RRCSetupReq
event and the RRCSetupSuc event.

CSFBToWCDM Unit: ms Indicates the average CSFB-to-


A Access Time WCDMA access delay.
Delay Avg

CSFBToTD- Unit: ms Indicates the average CSFB-to-TD-


SCDMA Access SCDMA access delay.
Time Delay Avg

CSFBToGSM Unit: ms Indicates the average CSFB-to-GSM


Access Time access delay.
Delay Avg

4G to 3G Inter- Unit: ms Indicates the average LTE-to-UMTS


RAT HO Time handover delay at the control plane.
Delay Avg

4G to 2G Inter- Unit: ms Indicates the average LTE-to-GSM


RAT HO Time handover delay at the control plane.
Delay Avg

Inter RAT HO Unit: ms Indicates the average handover


Prepare Time preparation delay at the control plane.
Delay Avg

Inter RAT Unit: ms Indicates the average inter-RAT


Redirection To redirection to GSM delay.
GSM Time
Delay Avg

Inter RAT Unit: ms Indicates the average inter-RAT


Redirection To redirection to WCDMA delay.
WCDMA Time
Delay Avg

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 693


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Inter RAT Unit: ms Indicates the average inter-RAT


Redirection To redirection to TD-SCDMA delay.
TS-SCDMA
Time Delay Avg

GSM to LTE Unit: ms Indicates the average GSM-to-LTE


Time Delay Avg handover delay.

LTE TA Update Unit: ms Indicates the TA update delay.


Suc Time Delay LTE TA Update Suc Time Delay Avg =
Avg Total duration of TA update delays/
Number of successful TA update

LTE Unit: ms Indicates the average delay for an MOC


CSFBToGSM to fall back from the LTE network to
Setup Time the GSM network during the CSFB
Delay process.
Avg(MOC) LTE CSFBToGSM Setup Time Delay
Avg(MOC) = Total number of the
average delays for an MOC to fall back
from the LTE network to the GSM
network during the CSFB process/
Number of successful call setup for an
MOC

LTE Unit: ms Indicates the average delay for an MTC


CSFBToGSM to fall back from the LTE network to
Setup Time the GSM network during the CSFB
Delay process.
Avg(MTC) LTE CSFBToGSM Setup Time Delay
Avg(MTC) = Total number of the
average delays for an MTC to fall back
from the LTE network to the GSM
network during the CSFB process/
Number of successful call setup for an
MTC

LTE SCC1 Unit: ms Indicates the SCC activation average


Activated Delay delay.
Avg LTE SCC1 Activated Delay Avg =
Total SCC activation delay/Number of
SCC activation

LTE SCC1 Unit: ms Indicates the SCC deactivation average


Deactivated delay.
Delay Avg LTE SCC1 Deactivated Delay Avg =
Total SCC deactivation delay/Number
of SCC deactivation

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 694


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE HO Delay Unit: ms Indicates the intra-LTE handover delay.


LTE HO Delay = Total intra-LTE
handover delay/Number of intra-LTE
handovers

CSFB Return Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of returning


LTE Avg Delay to LTE.
CSFB Return LTE Avg Delay = Total
MOC and MTC return delays to LTE/
Total successful calls initiated by the
MOC and MTC

LTE Call Setup Unit: ms Indicates the LTE call setup delay (CS
Delay(CS concurrent PS).
Concurrent PS) LTE Call Setup Delay(CS Concurrent
PS) = Time when an MTC hears the
ringback tone - Time when an MOC
initiates a call

LTE Unit: ms Indicates the average LTE-to-WCDMA


CSFBtoWCDM fallback delay for concurrent services.
A Call Setup Suc LTE CSFBtoWCDMA Call Setup Suc
Delay(CS Delay(CS Concurrent PS) = Total
Concurrent PS) delays of falling back to WCDMA/
Total number of fallback times to
WCDMA

CSFB Return Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of returning


LTE Avg to LTE (CS concurrent PS).
Delay(CS CSFB Return LTE Avg Delay(CS
Concurrent PS) Concurrent PS) = Total MOC and MTC
return delays to LTE/Total successful
calls initiated by the MOC and MTC

CSFB Access Unit: ms Indicates the average CSFB access


Time delay of MOC or MTC.
Delay(MOC CSFB Access Time Delay(MOC
+MTC) +MTC) = Total CSFB access delay of
MOC and MTC/Number of successful
CSFB accesses of MOC and MTC

CSFBToGSM Unit: ms Indicates the average CSFB-to-GSM


Access Time access delay.
Delay Avg CSFBToGSM Access Time Delay Avg
= Total CSFB-to-GSM access delay/
Number of successful CSFB-to-GSM
accesses

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 695


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE SMS Sent Unit: ms Indicates the LTE E2E SMs sent and
and Received received delay.
Delay LTE SMS Sent and Received Delay =
Message received time - Message sent
time

WCDMA Return Unit: ms Indicates the average delay for a UE


LTE Success used for data services to return to an
Delay Avg LTE network from a WCDMA
network.
WCDMA Return LTE Success Delay
Avg = Sum of the average delay for a
UE used for data services to return to
an LTE network/Number of times a UE
used for data services successfully
returns to an LTE network

HTTP Browsing Value range: Indicates the video play delay


Display 0 to 100 distribution.
Delay(>=5s) (unit: %) HTTP Browsing Display Delay(>=5s)
Rate Rate = Number of times the video play
delay is greater than or equal to 5s/
Number of DNS parsing requests x 100

Radio Access Unit: ms Indicates the average radio access


Delay Avg delay.
Radio Access Delay Avg = Total radio
access delays/Number of successful
radio access times

Radio Access Value range: Indicates the LTE radio access delay
Delay (>=5s) 0 to 100 distribution.
Rate (unit: %) Radio Access Delay (>=5s) Rate =
Number of times the radio access delay
is greater than or equal to 5s/Number of
successful radio access times x 100

PDP Activate Value range: Indicates the PDP context activation


Delay (>=4s) 0 to 100 delay distribution.
Rate (unit: %) PDP Activate Delay (>=4s) Rate =
Number of times the PDP context
activation delay is greater than or equal
to 4s/PDP context activation requests x
100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 696


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

DNSQuery Value range: Indicates the DNS parsing delay


Delay(>=1s) 0 to 100 distribution.
Rate (unit: %) DNSQuery Delay(>=1s) Rate =
Number of times the DNS parsing
delay is greater than or equal to 1s/
Number of successful DNS parsing
times x 100

TCP Connection Value range: Indicates the TCP connection delay


Delay(>=1s) 0 to 100 distribution.
Rate (unit: %) TCP Connection Delay(>=1s) Rate =
Number of times the TCP connection
delay is greater than or equal to 1s/
Number of successful TCP connection
times x 100

CA CA Rate Value range: Indicates the CA frequency band rate.


0 to 100 CA Band Rate = Number of sampling
(unit: %) points between LTESCellAdded and
LTESCellDeleted/Total number of
sampling points x 100

CA PDCP Unit: Mbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput rate


Throughput DL at the PDCP layer when CA is
activated.

CA PDCP Unit: Mbit/s Indicates the average downlink


Throughput DL throughput rate at the PDCP layer when
AVG CA is activated.

PDCP Value range: Indicates the ratio of downlink


Throughput DL 0 to 100 throughput rates less than 10 Mbit/s at
Rate(<10M) (unit: %) the PDCP layer.
PDCP Throughput DL Rate = Number
of collection points in which the
downlink PDCP throughput rate is less
than 10 Mbit/s/Total number of
collection points when CA is activated
x 100

CA PDCP Value range: Indicates the ratio of the downlink


Throughput DL 0 to 100 throughput rates at the PDCP layer
Rate(<10M) (unit: %) when CA is activated.
CA PDCP Throughput DL Rate =
Number of collection points in which
the downlink PDCP throughput rate is
less than 10 Mbit/s when CA is
activated/Total number of collection
points x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 697


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

CA PCC MAC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink PCC


Throughput DL MAC throughput rate when CA is
AVG activated.
CA PCC MAC Throughput DL AVG =
Total downlink PCC MAC throughput
rates when CA is activated/Number of
downlink PCC MAC throughput rates
when CA is activated

SCC1 MAC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink SCC1


Throughput DL MAC throughput rate when CA is
AVG activated.
SCC1 MAC Throughput DL AVG =
Total downlink SCC1 MAC throughput
rates when CA is activated/Number of
downlink SCC1 MAC throughput rates
when CA is activated

CA Serving Unit: dBm Indicates the average serving RSRP


RSRP AVG when CA is activated.
CA Serving RSRP AVG = Total
serving RSRP when CA is activated/
Number of serving RSRP when CA is
activated

CA SCC1 RSRP Unit: dBm Indicates the average SCC1 RSRP


AVG when CA is activated.
CA SCC1 RSRP AVG = Total SCC1
RSRP when CA is activated/Number of
SCC1 RSRP when CA is activated

CA Serving Unit: dBm Indicates the average serving RSRP


RSRP>-110 whose values are greater than -110
AVG dBm when CA is activated.
CA Serving RSRP>-110 AVG = Total
serving RSRP whose values are greater
than -110 dBm when CA is activated/
Number of serving RSRP whose values
are greater than -110 dBm when CA is
activated

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 698


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

CA Serving Value range: Indicates the ratio of serving RSRP


RSRP>-110 Rate 0 to 100 whose values are greater than -110
(unit: %) dBm when CA is activated.
CA Serving RSRP>-110 Rate =
Number of collection points whose
serving RSRP is greater than -110 dBm
when CA is activated/Total number of
collection points when CA is activated
x 100

CA SCC1 Value range: Indicates the ratio of SCC1 serving


RSRP>-110 Rate 0 to 100 RSRP whose values are greater than
(unit: %) -110 dBm when CA is activated.
CA SCC1 RSRP>-110 Rate = Number
of collection points whose SCC1
serving RSRP is greater than -110 dBm
when CA is activated/Total number of
collection points when CA is activated
x 100

CA PCC SINR Unit: dB Indicates the average PCC SINR when


AVG CA is activated.
CA PCC SINR AVG = Total PCC
SINRs when CA is activated/Number
of PCC SINRs when CA is activated

CA SCC1 SINR Unit: dB Indicates the average SCC1 SINR when


ANG CA is activated.
CA SCC1 SINR ANG = Total SCC1
SINRs when CA is activated/Number
of SCC1 SINRs when CA is activated

CA Serving PCC Unit: dB Indicates the ratio of serving PCC


SINR>-3 Rate SINRs that are greater than -3 dB when
CA is activated.
CA Serving PCC SINR>-3 Rate =
Number of collection points whose
serving PCC SINR is greater than -3
dBm when CA is activated/Total
number of collection points when CA is
activated x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 699


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

CA SCC1 Unit: dB Indicates the ratio of SCC1 SINRs that


SINR>-3 Rate are greater than -3 dB when CA is
activated.
CA SCC1 SINR>-3 Rate = Number of
collection points whose SCC1 SINR is
greater than -3 dB when CA is
activated/Total number of collection
points when CA is activated x 100

CA PCC - Indicates the average PCC PDCCH DL


PDCCH DL grant count when CA is activated.
Grant Count CA PCC PDCCH DL Grant Count
AVG AVG = Total PCC PDCCH downlink
grant counts when CA is activated/
Number of PCC PDCCH downlink
grant counts when CA is activated

CA SCC1 - Indicates the average SCC1 PDCCH


PDCCH DL DL grant count when CA is activated.
Grant Count CA SCC1 PDCCH DL Grant Count
AVG AVG = Total SCC1 PDCCH DL grant
counts when CA is activated/Number
of SCC1 PDCCH DL grant counts
when CA is activated

CA PCC PDSCH - Indicates the average PCC PDSCH RB


RB Number number when CA is activated.
AVG CA PCC PDSCH RB Number AVG =
Total values of PCC PDSCH RBs when
CA is activated/Number of PCC
PDSCH RBs when CA is activated

CA SCC1 - Indicates the average SCC1 PDSCH


PDSCH RB RB number when CA is activated.
Number AVG CA SCC1 PDSCH RB Number AVG =
Total values of SCC1 PDSCH RBs
when CA is activated/Number of PCC
PDSCH RB when CA is activated

CA Active Rate Value range: Indicates the CA rate.


0 to 100 CA Activate Rate = Number of RSRP
(unit: %) sampling points in the CA active state/
Number of RSRP sampling points
between LTESCellAdded and
LTESCellDeleted x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 700


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Custom Transmission Value range: Indicates the percentage of the


Mode N Rate 0 to 100 transmission mode N, where N ranges
(unit: %) from 1 to 9.
Transmission Mode N Rate = Number
of times when the transmission mode is
N/Total number of transmission mode
times x 100

LTE DL CQI - Indicates the average downlink CQI.


Avg LTE DL CQI Avg = (Total downlink
code 0 CQIs + Total downlink code 1
CQIs)/(Report times of downlink code
0 CQIs + Report times of downlink
code 1 CQIs)

LTE DL MAX Value range: Indicates the maximum MCS frequency


MCSCode0 Rate 0 to 100 rate for downlink code 0 on LTE
(unit: %) networks.
LTE DL MAX MCSCode0 Rate = Sum
of the maximum value of each MCS for
code 0/Total number of MCS report
times x 100

LTE DL MAX Value range: Indicates the maximum MCS frequency


MCSCODE1 0 to 100 rate for downlink code 1 on LTE
Rate (unit: %) networks.
LTE DL MAX MCSCODE1 Rate =
Sum of the maximum value of each
MCS for code 1/Total number of MCS
report times x 100

LTE UL MAX Value range: Indicates the maximum MCS frequency


MSCCODE Rate 0 to 100 rate for uplink code on LTE networks.
(unit: %) LTE UL MAX MSCCODE Rate = Sum
of maximum value of each MCS/Total
number of MCS report times x 100

LTE DL Value range: Indicates the maximum CQI frequency


MAXCQICODE 0 to 100 rate for downlink code 0 on LTE
0 Rate (unit: %) networks.
LTE DL MAXCQICODE0 Rate = Sum
of the maximum value of each CQI for
code 0/Total number of CQI report
times x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 701


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

LTE DL Value range: Indicates the maximum CQI frequency


MAXCQICODE 0 to 100 rate for downlink code 1 on LTE
1 Rate (unit: %) networks.
LTE DL MAXCQICODE1 Rate = Sum
of the maximum value of each CQI for
code 1/Total number of CQI report
times x 100

LTE DL Value range: Indicates the maximum CQI frequency


MAXCQI Rate 0 to 100 rate for downlink code on LTE
(unit: %) networks.
LTE DL MAXCQI Rate = Sum of the
maximum value of each CQI/Total
number of CQI report times x 100

LTE Baidu Value range: Indicates the percentage of LTE


NetDisk 0 to 100 NetDisk download with good radio
Throughput (unit: %) signals and low throughput.
DL(<4M) Rate LTE Baidu NetDisk Throughput
DL(<4M) Rate = Number of sampling
points whose RSRP is greater than or
equal to -100, the SINR is greater than
or equal to -5, and the downlink rate is
less than 4 Mbit/s/Total number of
sampling points x 100

LTE Baidu Value range: Indicates the percentage of LTE


NetDisk 0 to 100 NetDisk upload with good radio signals
Throughput (unit: %) and low throughput.
UL(<1M) Rate LTE Baidu NetDisk Throughput
UL(<1M) Rate = Number of sampling
points whose RSRP is greater than or
equal to -100, the SINR is greater than
or equal to -5, and the uplink rate is less
than 1 Mbit/s/Total number of sampling
points x 100

21.3.5 VoLTE Predefined KPIs


This section describes the VoLTE predefined KPIs. You can refer to this section when
querying VoLTE-related KPIs.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 702


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

SRVCCHandoverSuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the SRVCC


Rate %) handover success rate.
SRVCCHandoverSuccess-
Rate = Number of handover
success times/(Number of
handover success times +
Number of handover failure
times) x 100%

VoLTECallSetupSuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the success rate of


Rate(MOC) %) outgoing VoLTE call setups.
VoLTECallSetupSuccess-
Rate(MOC) = Number of
successful outgoing call
setups/(Number of
successful outgoing call
setups + Number of failed
outgoing call setups) x
100%

VoLTECallSetupSuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the success rate of


Rate(MTC) %) incoming VoLTE call setups.
VoLTECallSetupSuccess-
Rate(MTC) = Number of
successful incoming call
setups/(Number of
successful incoming call
setups + Number of failed
incoming call setups) x
100%

ERABEstablishSuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the E-RAB setup


Rate(QCI=1) %) success rate (QCI = 1).
ERABEstablishSuccess-
Rate(QCI=1) = Number of
successful E-RAB setup
times/(Number of successful
E-RAB setup times +
Number of failed E-RAB
setup times) x 100%

ERABEstablishSuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the E-RAB setup


Rate(QCI=2) %) success rate (QCI = 2).
ERABEstablishSuccess-
Rate(QCI=2) = Number of
successful E-RAB setup
times/(Number of successful
E-RAB setup times +
Number of failed E-RAB
setup times) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 703


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

ERABEstablishSuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the E-RAB setup


Rate(QCI=5) %) success rate (QCI = 5).
E-RABEstablishSuccess-
Rate(QCI=5) = Number of
successful E-RAB setup
times/(Number of successful
E-RAB setup times +
Number of failed E-RAB
setup times) x 100%

VoLTE Call Drop Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE call
%) drop rate.
VoLTECallDropRate =
Number of VoLTE call drop
times/(Number of outgoing
VoLTE call answering times
+ Number of VoLTE
incoming call answering
times) x 100%

ERABAbnormalReleaseR- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the eRAB


ate(QCI=1) %) abnormal release call drop
rate (QCI = 1).
ERABAbnormalReleaseR-
ate(QCI=1) = Number of
eRAB abnormal release call
drop times/(Number of
eRAB normal release call
drop times + Number of
eRAB abnormal release call
drop times) x 100%

ERABAbnormalReleaseR- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the eRAB


ate(QCI=2) %) abnormal release call drop
rate (QCI = 2).
ERABAbnormalReleaseR-
ate(QCI=2) = Number of
eRAB abnormal release call
drop times/(Number of
eRAB normal release call
drop times + Number of
eRAB abnormal release call
drop times) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 704


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

ERABAbnormalReleaseR- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the eRAB


ate(QCI=5) %) abnormal release call drop
rate (QCI = 5).
ERABAbnormalReleaseR-
ate(QCI=5) = Number of
eRAB abnormal release call
drop times/(Number of
eRAB normal release call
drop times + Number of
eRAB abnormal release call
drop times) x 100%

VoLTECallSetupDe- Unit: ms Indicates the average VoLTE


lay(MOC) Avg MOC delay.
The value can be obtained
using the following formula:
VoLTECallSetupDe-
lay(MOC) Avg = VoLTE
MOC duration/Call times.

VoLTECallSetupDe- Unit: ms Indicates the average VoLTE


lay(MTC) Avg MTC delay.
The value can be obtained
using the following formula:
VoLTECallSetupDe-
lay(MTC) Avg = VoLTE
MTC duration/Call times.

VoLTE Call End Delay Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE hang-


up delay.
The value can be obtained
using the following formula:
VoLTECallEndTime =
VoLTE hang-up duration/
Hang-up times.

VoLTE Video Phone Setup Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the success rate of
Success Rate(MOC) %) outgoing VoLTE call setups.
VoLTEVideoPhoneSetu-
pSuccess Rate(MOC) =
Number of successful
VoLTE outgoing call setups/
(Number of successful
VoLTE outgoing call setups
+ Number of failed VoLTE
outgoing call setups) x
100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 705


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

VoLTE Video Phone Setup Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the success rate of
Success Rate(MTC) %) incoming VoLTE call setups.
VoLTEVideoPhoneSetu-
pSuccess Rate(MTC) =
Number of successful
VoLTE incoming call
setups/(Number of
successful VoLTE incoming
call setups + Number of
failed VoLTE incoming call
setups) x 100%

VoLTEHandoverSuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE intra-


Rate %) RAT handover success rate.
VoLTEHandoverSuccess-
Rate = Number of VoLTE
intra-RAT handover success
times/(Number of VoLTE
intra-RAT handover success
times + Number of VoLTE
intra-RAT handover failure
times) x 100%

VoLTECallRadioLinkFail- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE radio


Rate %) link failure rate.
VoLTECallRadioLinkFail-
Rate = Number of VoLTE
radio link failures/(Number
of outgoing VoLTE call
answering times + Number
of VoLTE incoming call
answering times) x 100%

VoLTEVideoPhoneDrop- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE video


Rate %) phone drop rate.
VoLTEVideoPhoneDrop-
Rate = Number of VoLTE
Video Phone Drops/
(Number of outgoing
VoLTE call answering times
+ Number of VoLTE
incoming call answering
times) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 706


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

VoLTESRVCCProportion Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the enhanced


%) single radio voice call
continuity (eSRVCC)
handover proportion.
VoLTE SRVCC Proportion
= Number of
SRVCCHandoverAttmpt/
(Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MOC) + Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MTC) + Number of
VoLTEVideoPhoneEstab-
lished(MOC) + Number of
VoLTEVideoPhoneEstab-
lished(MTC)) x 100%

VoLTE IntraRAT Duration Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: VoLTE IntraRAT Duration
Proportion %) Proportion = VoLTE intra-
RAT call duration/Total
VoLTE MOC duration x
100%

VoLTE Video Phone Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE video
Duration Proportion %) call duration proportion.
VoLTE Video Phone
Duration Proportion =
VideoPhoneDuration (video
call duration)/
VideoPhoneTotalDuration
(total call duration) x 100%

VoLTE Fast Return LTE Unit: ms Indicates the average VoLTE


Delay Avg fast return delay.
VoLTE Fast Return LTE
Delay Avg = Total VoLTE
fast return delays/Number of
VoLTE fast return delay
statistic times

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 707


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

LTE VoiceCall CSFB Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the CSFB call
Proportion(MOC) %) completion proportion
(MOC).
LTE VoiceCall CSFB
Proportion(MOC) = Number
of VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MOC)/(Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MOC) + Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MOC)) x 100%

LTE VoiceCall CSFB Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the CSFB call
Proportion(MTC) %) completion proportion
(MTC).
LTE VoiceCall CSFB
Proportion(MTC) = Number
of VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MTC)/(Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MTC) + Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MTC)) x 100%

VoLTE IntraRAT Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE intra-
Proportion(MOC) %) RAT call completion
proportion (MOC).
VoLTE IntraRAT
Proportion(MOC) = Number
of VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MOC)/(Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MOC) + Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MOC)) x 100%

VoLTE IntraRAT Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE intra-
Proportion(MTC) %) RAT call completion
proportion (MTC).
VoLTE IntraRAT
Proportion(MTC) = Number
of VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MTC)/(Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MTC) + Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MTC)) x 100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 708


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

VoLTE SPS UL Duration Unit: ms Indicates the uplink one-


Avg time SPS scheduling
average duration.

VoLTE SPS DL Duration Unit: ms Indicates the downlink one-


Avg time SPS scheduling
average duration.

VoLTE IP RoHC UL Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the uplink VoLTE
%) IP packet header
compression (ROHC) rate.

VoLTE IP RoHC DL Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the downlink
%) VoLTE IP packet header
compression (ROHC) rate.

IMS Register Success Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the IMS
%) registration success rate.
IMS Register Success Rate
= Number of successful IMS
registration/(Number of
successful IMS registration
+ Number of IMS
registration failures) x 100%

IMS Register Delay Avg Unit: ms Indicates the average IMS


registration delay.
IMS Register Delay Avg =
Total IMS registration delay/
Number of IMS registration
delay measurement

VoLTE Call Drop Count Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE
1km %) kilometer call drop rate.
VoLTE Call Drop Count
1km = Number of VoLTE
call drops/Distance (km)

VoLTE RTP High Lost Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the Real-Time
Rate(QCI=1) %) Transport Protocol (RTP)
high packet loss rate.
VoLTE RTP High Lost
Rate(QCI=1) = Count of
RTP Lost Rate(QCI=1)
greater than 3%/Count of
RTP Lost Rate(QCI=1) x
100%

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 709


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

Audio HO DL Interrupt Unit: ms Indicates the average audio


Delay(User Plane) downlink handover interrupt
delay on the user plane.
Audio HO DL Interrupt
Delay(User Plane) = Total
audio downlink handover
interrupt delays (user plane)/
Number of interrupt delay
statistic times

Audio HO UL Interrupt Unit: ms Indicates the average audio


Delay(User Plane) uplink handover interrupt
delay on the user plane.
Audio HO UL Interrupt
Delay(User Plane) = Total
audio uplink handover
interrupt delays (user plane)/
Number of interrupt delay
statistic times

Video HO DL Interrupt Unit: ms Indicates the average video


Delay(User Plane) downlink handover interrupt
delay on the user plane.
Video HO DL Interrupt
Delay(User Plane) = Total
video downlink handover
interrupt delays (user plane)/
Number of interrupt delay
statistic times

Video HO UL Interrupt Unit: ms Indicates the average video


Delay(User Plane) uplink handover interrupt
delay on the user plane.
Video HO DL Interrupt
Delay(User Plane) = Total
video uplink handover
interrupt delays (user plane)/
Number of interrupt delay
statistic times

21.3.6 vMOS KPI


This section describes the vMOS KPIs. You can refer to this section when performing a
vMOS test, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 710


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Definition Remarks Scope

InitalBufferingSuc- Initial buffer success InitalBufferingSuc- 0-100%


cessRate rate cessRate = Number
of call records for
initial buffer
success/Total
number of call
records x 100%

VideoPlaySuccess- Success rate of VideoPlaySuccess- 0-100%


Rate video playing Rate = Number of
call records for
playing success/
Total number of call
records x 100%
NOTE
The call records for
successful playback
refer to those
containing FinishPlay
events but not
PlayFailed and
InitialBufferingFailed
events.

NoRebufferingVi- Proportion of video NoRebufferingVi- 0-100%


deoPlaySuccessRate playbacks without deoPlaySuccessRata
rebuffering = Number of call
records for non-stall
playing success/
Total number of call
records x 100%

AverageStopCount Average number of AverageStopCount = —


rebuffering times Total number of stall
during each video times/Total number
playback of call records

21.3.7 NB-IoT KPIs


This section describes the NB-IoT KPIs. You can refer to this section when performing the
NB-IoT test, and then perform the related operations.

Name Description Remarks

Access Success Rate Indicates the access success Random access success rate.
rate. Access Success Rate =
Number of random access
success times/Total number
of random access times

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 711


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description Remarks

Packet Sent Delay Indicates the packet sent Packet Sent delay.
delay Packet Sent Delay =
ERRC_DATA_CNF(msg_id
=0 packet receive time -
L3_EMM_CONTROL_PL
ANE_SERVICE_REQ
packet receive time

RRC Connection Indicates the RRC RRC connection delay on


Delay(Custom) connection delay on Custom.
Custom. RRC Connection
Delay(Custom) =
RLC_UL_POLL_RESET_P
OLLSN_ACKED packet
receive time -
ERRC_EST_REQ packet
receive time

Attach Delay(Custom) Indicates the attach delay on Attach delay on Custom.


Custom Attach Delay(Custom) =
ERRC_DATA_CNF(msg_id
= 3) packet receive time -
ERRC_EST_REQ packet
receive time

Packet Transmission on Indicates the Packet Packet transmission delay in


PSM Delay transmission delay in PSM PSM state.
state. Packet Transmission on
PSM Delay =
DSP_NPUSCH_CNF
packet receive time -
PDH_DATA_REQ packet
receive time

RRC Connection Delay Indicates the RRC RRC connection delay.


connection delay. RRC Connection Delay =
ConnectionSetupComplete
packet receive time -
RRCConnectionRequest
packet receive time

FirstDataPacket Delay Indicates the first data First data packet delay.
packet delay FirstDataPacket Delay =
LL1_UL_DATA_REQ
packet receive time -
RRCConnectionSetCom-
plete packet receive time

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 712


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description Remarks

Attach Delay Indicates the attach delay. Attach delay.


Attach Delay =
AttachAccept packet receive
time - AttachRequest packet
receive time

PSS Sync Time Indicates the PSS sync delay PSS sync time.
PSS Sync Time =
DSP_PSS_SEARCH_CN
packet receive time -
DSP_PSS_SEARCH_REQ
packet receive time

SSS Sync Time Indicates the SSS sync delay SSS sync time.
SSS Sync Time =
DSP_SSS_SEARCH_CN
packet receive time -
DSP_SSS_SEARCH_REQ
packet receive time

PBCH Sync Time Indicates the PBCH sync PBCH sync time.
delay PBCH Sync Time =
DSP_NPBCH_CNF packet
receive time -
DSP_NPBCH_REQ packet
receive time

Paging Time Indicates the Paging delay Paging time.


Paging Time =
DSP_NPRACH_REQ
packet receive time -
LL1_DCI_FORMAT_N2
packet receive time

MSG1 to MSG3 Delay Indicates the MSG1 to MSG1 to MSG3 delay.


MSG3 Delay MSG1 to MSG3 Delay =
MSG3 packet receive time -
MSG1 packet receive time

MSG3 to MSG4 Delay Indicates the MSG3 to MSG3 to MSG4 delay.


MSG4 Delay MSG3 to MSG4 Delay =
MSG4 packet receive time -
MSG3 packet receive time

MSG4 to MSG5 Delay Indicates the MSG4 to MSG4 to MSG5 delay.


MSG5 Delay MSG4 to MSG5 Delay =
MSG5 packet receive time -
MSG4 packet receive time

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 713


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description Remarks

Packet Delivery Delay Indicates the packet delivery Packet delivery delay.
delay Packet Delivery Delay =
ERRC_DATA_CNF(msg_id
=0) packet receive time -
L3_EMM_CONTROL_PL
ANE_SERVICE_REQ
packet receive time

RRC Connection Release Indicates the RRC RRC connection release


Delay(Custom) connection release delay on delay on Custom.
Custom. RRC Connection Release
Delay(Custom) =
RRC_INT_CONNECTION
_RELEASE packet receive
time - LL1_DATA_INDQ
packet receive time

Time to PSM Indicates the time to PSM Time to PSM.


Time to PSM = PSM packet
receive time - release packet
receive time

SIB1 Sync Time Indicates the SIB1 sync SIB1 sync time.
delay SIB1 Sync Time =
LL1_SIB1_DATA_IND
packet receive time -
LL1_MIB_DATA_IND
packet receive time

SIB2 Sync Time Indicates the SIB2 sync SIB2 sync time.
delay SIB2 Sync Time =
PDH_UL_DATA_STATUS_
IND packet receive time -
PDH_DATA_REQ packet
receive time

Packet Lost Rate Indicates the packet lost rate Packet lost rate.
Packet Lost Rate = (Number
of PDH_DATA_REQ -
Number of
PDH_UL_DATA_STATUS_
IND) / Number of
PDH_DATA_REQ

UL Retransmission Rate Indicates the uplink Proportion of uplink data


retransmission rate. retransmission.
UL Retransmission Rate =
Number of uplink
retransmitted TBs/Total
number of TBs

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 714


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Description Remarks

DL Retransmission Rate Indicates the downlink Proportion of downlink data


retransmission rate. retransmission.
DL Retransmission Rate =
Number of downlink
retransmitted TBs/Total
number of TBs

RLF Count Indicates the call radio link Call radio link fail rate..
fail rate. Service Drop Rate =
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= 4)/
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= n)

Service Drop Rate Indicates the call drop rate. Call drop rate.
Service Drop Rate =
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= 4)/
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= n)

RRC Connection Success Indicates the RRC RRC connection success


Rate connection success rate. rate.
RRC connection success
rate = Number of
RRCConnectionSetupCom-
plete / Number of
RRCConnectionRequest

21.3.8 Predefined KPIs for CDMA and LTE Interoperation


This section describes the predefined KPIs for CDMA and LTE interoperations. You can refer
to this section when querying related KPIs.

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

LTE2eHRPDCellReslection- Unit: s Indicates the LTE to eHRPD


Delay cell reselection delay.
LTE2eHRPDCellReslection-
Delay = Time when the LTE
to eHRPD cell reselection is
successful - Time when the
LTE to eHRPD cell
reselection attempt starts

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 715


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

KPI Name Value Range/Unit Description

LTE2eHRPDHODelay Unit: s Indicates the LTE to eHRPD


cell handover delay.
LTE2eHRPDHODelay =
Time when the LTE to
eHRPD cell handover is
successful - Time when the
LTE to eHRPD cell
handover attempt starts

eHRPD2LTECellReslection- Unit: s Indicates the eHRPD to LTE


Delay cell reselection delay.
eHRPD2LTECellReslection-
Delay = Time when the
eHRPD to LTE cell
reselection is successful -
Time when the eHRPD to
LTE cell reselection attempt
starts

LTE2eHRPDCellReslection- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the LTE to eHRPD


SuccessRate %) cell reselection success rate.
LTE2eHRPDCellReslection-
SuccessRate = Number of
successful LTE to eHRPD
cell reselection times/
Number of LTE to eHRPD
cell reselection attempt
times x 100

LTE2eHRPDHOSsuccess- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the LTE to eHRPD


Rate %) cell handover success rate.
LTE2eHRPDHOSsuccess-
Rate = Number of
successful LTE to eHRPD
cell handover times/Number
of LTE to eHRPD cell
handover attempt times x
100

eHRPD2LTECellReslection- Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the eHRPD to LTE


SuccessRate %) cell reselection success rate.
eHRPD2LTECellReslection-
SuccessRate = Number of
successful eHRPD to LTE
cell reselection times/
Number of eHRPD to LTE
cell reselection attempt
times x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 716


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

21.3.9 Predefined TD-SCDMA KPIs


This section describes the predefined TD-SCDMA KPIs. You can refer to this section when
querying TD-SCDMA KPIs.

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

Accessibili TD-SCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of


ty Outgoing Call to 100 (unit: %) outgoing call setups.
Setup Success Rate TD-SCDMA Outgoing Call Setup
Success Rate = Number of
OutgoingCallSetupSuc events of
AMR services/(Number of
OutgoingCallSetupSuc events of
AMR services + Number of
CallSetupFailRFReason events of
AMR services) x 100

TD-SCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of


Incoming Call to 100 (unit: %) incoming call setups.
Setup Success Rate TD-SCDMA Incoming Call Setup
Success Rate = Number of
successful AMR incoming call
setups/(Number of successful AMR
incoming call setups + Number of
failed AMR incoming call setups) x
100

TD-SCDMA PDP Value range: 0 Indicates the PDP activation


Activation Success to 100 (unit: %) success rate since the RRC request
Rate(On RRCReq) is sent.
TD-SCDMA PDP Activation
Success Rate(On RRCReq) =
Number of PDP activation success
events/(Number of PDP activation
success events + Number of
DataServiceSetupFailure events) x
100

TD-SCDMA PDP Value range: 0 Indicates the PDP activation


Activation Success to 100 (unit: %) success rate since the PDP request
Rate(On PDPReq) is sent.
TD-SCDMA PDP Activation
Success Rate(On PDPReq) =
Number of PDP activation success
events/(Number of PDP activation
success events + Number of PDP
activation failure events) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 717


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

TD-SCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the registration success


Attach Success to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate TD-SCDMA Attach Success Rate =
Number of Attach success events/
(Number of Attach success events +
Number of Attach failure events) x
100

Coverage TD-SCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the coverage rate when the
Coverage to 100 (unit: %) RSCP is greater than or equal to -95
Rate(RSCP ≥ -95 dBm and the Ec/IO is greater than
dBm & Ec/IO ≥ or equal to -12 dB.
-12dB) TD-SCDMA Coverage Rate(RSCP
≥ -95 dBm & Ec/IO ≥ -12dB) =
Coverage distance/Total distance of
a drive test x 100

TD-SCDMA UE Value range: 0 Indicates the pilot pollution rate.


Pilot Pollution Rate to 100 (unit: %) TD-SCDMA UE Pilot Pollution
Rate = Number of sampling points
with pilot pollution/Total number of
sampling points in a drive test x 100

TD-SCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the pilot pollution rate.


Scanner Pilot to 100 (unit: %) TD-SCDMA Scanner Pilot
Pollution Rate Pollution Rate = Number of
sampling points with pilot
pollution/Total number of sampling
points in a drive test x 100

Delay TD-SCDMA RRC Unit: Indicates the RRC setup delay.


Setup Delay Time millisecond TD-SCDMA RRC Setup Delay
Time = Start time of the RRC
Connection Request event - Start
time of the RRC ConSetup
Complete event

TD-SCDMA Unit: Indicates the average delay of


Outgoing Call millisecond outgoing call setups.
Setup Time Delay TD-SCDMA Outgoing Call Setup
Avg Time Delay Avg = Start time of the
OutgoingCallAttempt event - Start
time of the OutgoingCallSetupSuc
event

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 718


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

TD-SCDMA Unit: Indicates the average delay of


Incoming Call millisecond incoming call setups.
Setup Delay Time TD-SCDMA Incoming Call Setup
Avg Delay Time Avg = Start time of the
IncomingCallAttempt event - Start
time of the IncomingCallSetupSuc
event

TD-SCDMA PDP Unit: Indicates the average delay from the


Activate Delay millisecond time when the RRC request is sent
Time Avg(On to the time when PDP activation
RRCReq) success event occurs.
TD-SCDMA PDP Activate Delay
Time Avg(On RRCReq) = Start
time of the Activate PDP Context
Accept event - Start time of the
RRC Connection Request event

TD-SCDMA Unit: Indicates the Attach delay.


Attach Success millisecond TD-SCDMA Attach Success Delay
Delay Time Avg Time Avg = (Start time of the
Attach Request event - Start time of
the Attach Complete event)/Total
number of Attach setups x 100

TD-SCDMA Unit: Indicates the Detach delay.


Detach Success millisecond TD-SCDMA Detach Success Delay
Delay Time Avg Time Avg = (Start time of the
Detach Request event - Start time of
the Detach Complete event)/Total
number of Detach setups x 100

TD-SCDMA PDP Unit: Indicates the average delay from the


Activate Delay millisecond time when the PDP request is sent
Time Avg(On to the time when PDP activation
PDPReq) success event occurs.
TD-SCDMA PDP Activate Delay
Time Avg(On PDPReq) = Start time
of the Activate PDP Context Accept
event - Start time of the Activate
PDP Context Request event

Mobility TD-SCDMA RRC Value range: 0 Indicates the RRC setup success
Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
TD-SCDMA RRC Success Rate =
Number of RRC setup success
events/(Number of RRC setup
success events + Number of RRC
setup failure events) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 719


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

TD-SCDMA H to Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of


G HHO Success to 100 (unit: %) handovers from HSDPA to GPRS.
Rate TD-SCDMA H to G HHO Success
Rate = Number of HSDPA to GPRS
handover success events/(Number
of HSDPA to GPRS handover
success events + Number of
HSDPA to GPRS handover failure
events) x 100

TD-SCDMA HO Value range: 0 Indicates the handover success rate.


Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) TD-SCDMA HO Success Rate =
Number of handover success
events/(Number of handover
success events + Number of
handover failure times) x 100

Retainabili TD-SCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the AMR call drop rate.
ty Drop Rate to 100 (unit: %) TD-SCDMA Call Drop Rate =
Number of call drop times/Total
number of calls x 100

TD-SCDMA Data Value range: 0 Indicates the data service drop rate
Service Drop to 100 (unit: %) since the RRC request is sent.
Rate(On RRC) TD-SCDMA Data Service Drop
Rate(On RRC) = Number of Data
Service Drop events/Number of
DataServiceReq events x 100

TD-SCDMA Data Value range: 0 Indicates the data service drop rate
Service Drop to 100 (unit: %) since the PDP activation success
Rate(On PDP) event occurs.
TD-SCDMA Data Service Drop
Rate(On PDP) = Number of Data
Service Drop events/Number of
PDP activation success events x 100

Service TD-SCDMA RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


integrity PDU Throughput throughput of PDU bytes at the
DL Avg RLC layer from DataTransferStart
to DataTransferEnd.

TD-SCDMA RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink


PDU Throughput throughput of PDU bytes at the
UL Avg RLC layer from DataTransferStart
to DataTransferEnd.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 720


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Type KPI Name Value Range/ Description


Unit

TD-SCDMA RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average downlink


SDU Throughput throughput of SDU bytes at the
DL Avg RLC layer from DataTransferStart
to DataTransferEnd.

TD-SCDMA RLC Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average uplink


SDU Throughput throughput of SDU bytes at the
UL Avg RLC layer from DataTransferStart
to DataTransferEnd.

TD-SCDMA Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average HSDPA rate at


HSDPA App. the APP layer from
Throughput DL DataTransferStart to
Avg DataTransferEnd.

TD-SCDMA Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average HUDPA rate


HSUPA App. at the APP layer from
Throughput UL DataTransferStart to
Avg DataTransferEnd.

21.3.10 WLAN Pre-Defined KPIs


This section describes the pre-defined Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) for the WLAN
network. You can refer to this section when querying the WLAN-related KPIs.

KPI KPI Name Value Description


Category Range/Unit

Delay Associate Time The value Indicates the duration from the
Delay must be less association attempt to the association
than 5 (unit: success. The calculation formula is as
s). follows: Association success time -
Association attempt time.

DHCP Req to IP The value Indicates the duration from the DHCP
Adr Assigned must be less IP address getting attempt time to the
Time Delay than 5 (unit: DHCP IP address getting time. The
second). calculation formula is as follows:
DHCP IP address getting time - DHCP
IP address getting attempt time.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 721


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

21.3.11 IP Packet Predefined KPIs


HTTP KPI

HTTP Browsing KPIs


This section describes the HTTP Browsing KPIs. You can refer to this section when
performing the HTTP Browsing test, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning Description

DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Rate of failures to resolve a
Failure Rate failure rate DNS host name to the host
address.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Failed DNS host name
resolution request/(Failed
DNS host name resolution
request + Successful DNS
host name resolution
request) x 100.

DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Time when a host name is
Time time resolved to the host address.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time of StandardQueryRes-
ponse - Time of
StandardQuery.

HTTP Browsing IP-service HTTP Browsing IP service Time from when the
access time access time terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request - Time when the
terminal sends a TCP SYN
event.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 722


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

HTTP Browsing Display HTTP Browsing data Time from when the
Delay transmission time terminal initiates an HTTP
GET request to when the
terminal receives the last
data packet.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
receives the last data packet
- Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request.

HTTP Browsing Roundtrip HTTP Browsing round trip Time from when the
Total Time time (RTT) terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
receives a TCP SYN ACK
event.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
sends a TCP SYN event -
Time when the terminal
receives a TCP SYN ACK
event.

HTTP Browsing Average HTTP Browsing average Average data transmission


Throughput throughput rate of all HTTP browsing.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
the amount of data/data
transmission time

HTTP Browsing IP-Service HTTP Browsing IP service Users fail to set up a TCP/IP
Access Failure Rate access failure rate connection to the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of failed attempts to
set up IP connections to the
server/All attempts to set up
IP connections to the server
x 100.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 723


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

HTTP Browsing Page HTTP Browsing page Rate of page response


Response Success Rate response success rate successes to total page
responses
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
∑Number of page response
successes/∑Number of page
access attempts x 100

HTTP Browsing Page HTTP Browsing page Time from when the
Response Delay response delay terminal initiates a TCP
SYN setup message to when
the terminal receives a
success response message
returned from the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Page response success time -
Page access attempt time.

HTTP Browsing Page HTTP Browsing page Rate of the number of


Display Success Rate display success rate received correct responses
to the number of all web
page browsing requests
initiated by the terminal.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
∑Number of times page
contents are successfully
downloaded/∑(Number of
times page contents are
successfully downloaded +
Number of times page
contents fail to be
downloaded) x 100.

HTTP Download KPIs


This section describes the HTTP Download KPIs. You can refer to this section when
performing the HTTP download test, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 724


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Rate of failures to resolve a
Failure Rate failure rate DNS host name to the host
address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Failed DNS host name
resolution requests/All DNS
host name resolution
requests x 100

DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Time when a host name is
Time time resolved to the host address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time of StandardQueryRes-
ponse - Time of
StandardQuery

HTTP Download IP-service HTTP Download IP service Time from when the
access time access time terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request - Time when the
terminal sends a TCP SYN
event

HTTP Download delay HTTP Download data Time from when the
transmission time terminal initiates an HTTP
GET request to when the
terminal receives the last
data packet
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
receives the last data packet
- Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request

HTTP Download Average HTTP Download average Average data transmission


Throughput throughput rate of all HTTP download.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
the amount of data/data
transmission time

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 725


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

HTTP Download IP-Service IP service access failure rate Users fail to set up a TCP/IP
Access Failure Rate connection to the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of failed attempts to
set up IP connections to the
server/All attempts to set up
IP connections to the server
x 100

HTTP Download Session HTTP Download session Rate of incomplete sessions


Failure Rate failure rate to successfully started
sessions
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Incomplete sessions/
Successfully started sessions
x 100

HTTP Download Response HTTP Download response Rate of page response


Success Rate success rate successes to total page
responses
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
∑Number of page response
successes/∑Number of page
access attempts x 100

HTTP Download Display HTTP Download display Rate of the number of


Success Rate success rate received correct responses
to the number of all web
page browsing requests
initiated by the terminal
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of times page
contents are successfully
downloaded/Number of
page content download
requests x 100

HTTP Upload KPIs


This section describes the HTTP Upload KPIs. You can refer to this section when performing
the HTTP upload test, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 726


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Rate of failures to resolve a
Failure Rate failure rate DNS host name to the host
address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Failed DNS host name
resolution requests/All DNS
host name resolution
requests x 100

DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Time when a host name is
Time time resolved to the host address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time of StandardQueryRes-
ponse - Time of
StandardQuery

HTTP Upload IP-service HTTP Upload IP service Time from when the
access time access time terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
initiates an HTTP POST
request
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP POST
request - Time when the
terminal sends a TCP SYN
event

HTTP Upload delay HTTP Upload data Delay from the page request
transmission time to the upload success when
the terminal initiates an
HTTP POST request to
when the terminal receives
the last data packet
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
receives the last POST
response - Time when the
terminal initiates an HTTP
POST request

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 727


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

HTTP Upload Average HTTP Upload average Average data transmission


Throughput throughput rate of all HTTP download.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
the amount of data/data
transmission time

HTTP Upload IP-Service HTTP Upload IP service Users fail to set up a TCP/IP
Access Failure Rate access failure rate connection to the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of failed attempts to
set up IP connections to the
server/All attempts to set up
IP connections to the server
x 100

HTTP Upload Session HTTP Upload session Rate of incomplete sessions


Failure Rate failure rate to successfully started
sessions
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Incomplete sessions/
Successfully started sessions
x 100

HTTP Upload Response HTTP Upload page Rate of page response


Success Rate response success rate successes to total page
responses
The value is calculated by
using the following formula:
Number of page response
successes/(Number of page
response successes +
Number of page response
failures) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 728


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

HTTP Upload Success Rate HTTP Upload success rate Rate of times that the
terminal initiates the web
page upload service
successfully to total
attempts
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of times page
contents are successfully
downloaded/(Number of
times page contents are
successfully downloaded +
Number of times page
contents fail to be
downloaded) x 100

Video Streaming KPIs


This section describes the Video Streaming KPIs. You can refer to this section when
performing the video streaming test, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning Description

HTTP Streaming First Play HTTP video first play The buffer success rate of all
Success Rate success rate HTTP videos.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of HTTP video first
buffer successes/Number of
HTTP video first buffer
startups x 100.

HTTP Streaming First Average HTTP video first Average delay from when
Buffer Delay Avg buffer delay the on-demand video play
starts to when the first buffer
ends of all HTTP videos.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(HTTP video first buffer
success time - HTTP video
access request time)/HTTP
video first buffer successes.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 729


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

HTTPVideo Throughput Average HTTP video data Average data transmission


Avg transmission rate rate of all HTTP videos.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
HTTP video file total size/
(HTTP video first buffer
time - HTTP video buffer
success time).

Email KPIs
This section describes the Email KPIs. You can refer to this section when performing the
email test, and then perform the related operations.

Name Meaning Description

SMTP Email Upload SMTP email sending Success rate of email


Success Ratio success rate sending
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of times the SMTP
is sent successfully/(Number
of times the SMTP is sent
successfully + Number of
times the SMTP is sent
failed) x 100

SMTP Email Upload Mean Average delay of SMTP Time from when the users
Time email sending start to send an email to
when the users receive a
notification indicating a
sending success
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(Time when the SMTP
email is successfully sent -
Time when the SMTP email
sending request is initiated)/
Number of sent SMTP
emails

SMTP Email Upload Mean Average rate of sending Average rate of users
Data Rate SMTP emails sending an email
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Size of the uploaded email
file/Duration required for
uploading the email x 100.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 730


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

POP3 Email Download POP3 email sending success Success rate of email
Success Ratio rate sending
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of times the POP3
is sent successfully/(Number
of times the POP3 is sent
successfully + Number of
times the POP3 is sent
failed) x 100

POP3 Email Download Average delay of POP3 Time from when the users
Time email sending start to send an email to
when the users receive a
notification indicating a
sending success
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(Time when the POP3 email
is successfully sent - Time
when the POP3 email
sending request is initiated)/
Number of sent POP3
emails

POP3 Email Download Average rate of sending Average rate of users


Mean Data Rate POP3 emails sending an email
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Size of the uploaded email
file/Duration required for
uploading the email x 100.

IMAP Email Download IMAP email sending Success rate of email


Success Ratio success rate sending
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of times the IMAP
is sent successfully/(Number
of times the IMAP is sent
successfully + Number of
times the IMAP is sent
failed) x 100

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 731


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Name Meaning Description

IMAP Email Download Average delay of IMAP Time from when the users
Mean Time email sending start to send an email to
when the users receive a
notification indicating a
sending success
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(Time when the IMAP email
is successfully sent - Time
when the IMAP email
sending request is initiated)/
Number of sent IMAP
emails

IMAP Email Download Average rate of sending Average rate of users


Mean Data Rate IMAP emails sending an email
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Size of the uploaded email
file/Duration required for
uploading the email x 100.

21.4 D Description of Predefined Reports


This section describes the predefined reports. You can refer to this section for information
about system report templates. The report can be in Excel or Word format, and the available
report types include BenchMark, Cluster, and SSV.

21.4.1 Predefined GSM Reports


This section describes the predefined GSM reports and helps you understand the report
templates for CS services and PS services provided by the system: CS analysis report
template and PS analysis report template.

CS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined GSM CS report template. The template contains the
common CS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators of the template to
generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The CS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile information and the template information.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 732


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l Statistics information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, call setup delays, bands,
handovers, and SMSs.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about some common IEs, such as RxLev Sub,
RxQual Sub, BER Sub, PESQ P862.1, FER Sub, C/I Worst, MS Power Control Level,
and TA.
l Failure event information
This part contains the DT point information and legend information of most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.

Basic Report Information


The basic report information is as follows:
l DT logfile information, including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, MS name, and
start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information, that is, the template type of the report.

Statistical Information
l Statistical information about KPIs
Statistics on the 20 common KPIs by default. For details about the KPIs, see 21.3.2
Description of Predefined GSM KPIs. If the KPIs in the predefined template cannot
satisfy your needs, you can modify the template and select KPIs as required. For details
about how to customize KPIs, see 17.1 Customizing KPIs.
l Statistical information about call setup delays
Number of call setup delays recorded in a logfile in each time segment and its
percentage. By default, the predefined CS report template provides nine time segments:
[0,2), [2,4), [4,6), [6,8), [8,10), [10,12), [12,15), [15,20), and [20,+∞). The unit is
microsecond.
l Statistical information about bands
Number of CS services at each band (GSM 850 MHz, GSM 900 MHz, DCS 1800 MHz,
or PCS 1900 MHz) and its percentage.
l Statistical information about handovers
KPI information related to handovers, including both inter-frequency handovers and
inter-band handovers.
l Statistical information about SMSs
Times for sending and receiving SMSs.

IE Statistical Information
The statistical information about the common IEs is collected. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information of the IE on the map.
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of the IE, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 733


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l Statistical table of the IE.

Failure Event Information


The information about most failure events in the logfiles is collected. The information about
each failure event comprises the following parts:
l DT point information of the failure event on the map.
l Event and legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical table on the count of failure events.
NOTE

In addition to the DT point information of failure events, the map also displays the DT point information of
RxLev Sub by default.

PS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined PS report template. The template contains common PS
analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the template to
generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to generate a
new report template as required.

Overview
The PS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, MS name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.
l PS service statistical information
This part contains the statistical information on session events, attach events, PDP
activation tests, ping tests, FTP tests, WAP tests, and HTTP tests.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
statistical information on RxLev Full, bit error probability (BEP), and coding scheme.
l Failure event information
This part contains the DT point information and legend information about most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.

Basic Report Information


This part provides the basic information about the report, including the DT logfile name, DT
logfile size, MS name included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT
logfile.

PS Service Statistical Information


This part provides the detailed information about common PS services, including KPI names
and KPI values of the corresponding PS services. The following statistical information about
common PS services is collected:
l Session events

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 734


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l Attach events
l PDP activation tests
l Ping tests
l FTP tests
l WAP tests
l HTTP tests

IE Statistical Information
l Statistical information about frequency bands
Provides the number of PS services at each frequency band (GSM850, GSM900,
DCS1800, or PCS1900) and its percentage.
l Basic information about GPRS and EDGE
Provides the number of times users use data services on the GPRS and EDGE networks
and their usage. Provides also the coverage rate of the GPRS and EDGE networks.
l Statistical information about common events
Provides the statistics on cell reselection and route update.
l Statistical information about RxLev Full
Provides detailed statistics on RxLev Full and presents these statistics on maps, charts,
and tables.
l Statistical information about throughput
Provides statistics on the uplink and downlink throughput at the Application (APP) layer,
Radio Link Control (RLC) layer, and Logical Link Control (LLC) layer and presents
these statistics on maps and charts.
l Statistical information about BEP
Provides statistics on the average values and variation coefficients of BEP and presents
these statistics on charts.
l Statistical information about coding scheme
Provides the percentages of CS1 to CS4 and MCS 1 to MCS 9 used at the uplink and
downlink.

Failure Event Information


This part provides the information about most failure events in the logfiles. The information
about each failure event comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the failure event on the map
l Event and legend information involved in the map
l Statistical table on the count of failure events
NOTE

In addition to DT point information about failure events, the map also displays the DT point information
about RxLev Sub by default.

21.4.2 Predefined WCDMA reports


This section describes the predefined WCDMA reports. The description in this section helps
you understand four types of service report templates provided by the system: CS analysis
report template, PS analysis report template and Scanner analysis report template.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 735


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

CS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined WCDMA CS report template. The template contains
common CS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The CS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the basic information about the DT logfile and the template.
l Statistical Information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, call setup delays, call drops,
handovers, and UE pilot pollution rate.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, such as RSCP,
Ec/IO, BlER, Tx Power, and SC.
l Event information
This part contains the DT point information and legend information about most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.

Basic Report Information


The basic report information included in this part is as follows:
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, MS name
included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.

KPI Statistical Information


This part provides the statistical information about common KPIs. For details about the KPIs,
see 21.3.3 Predefined WCDMA KPIs. If the KPIs in the predefined template cannot satisfy
your needs, you can modify the template and reselect KPIs as required. For details about how
to customize KPIs, see 17.1 Customizing KPIs.

IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of IEs, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of IEs.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 736


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Failure Event Information


This part provides the common event information in the logfile. The information about each
event comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the event on the map
l Event and legend information involved in the map
l Statistical table on the count of the events

PS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined WCDMA PS report template. The template contains
common PS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The PS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.
l PS service statistical information
This part contains the statistical information on session events, attach events, PDP
activation tests, ping tests, FTP tests, WAP tests, HTTP tests, and UE Pilot Pollution
Rate.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
SERV CELL, BLER, and SIR.
l Event information
This part contains the DT point information, legend information, and statistical
information about common events on the map.

Basic Report Information


This part provides the basic information about the report, including the DT logfile name, DT
logfile size, UE name recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT
logfile.
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name
recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.

PS Service Statistical Information


This part provides the detailed statistical information about common PS services, including
KPI names and KPI values of the corresponding PS services. Statistical information about the
following common indicators of PS services is collected:
l PDP Activation Success Rate

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 737


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l Session Drop Rate


l R99 SHO Success Rate
l H to H IntraFreqCellChange Success Rate
l IntraFreq EDCHServing Cell Change SHO Success Rate
l PS Setup Delay Time Avg

IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of IEs, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of IEs.

Event Information
This part provides the statistical information about common events in the DT logfile. The
information about each event comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the event on the map
l Event and legend information involved in the map
l Statistical table on the count of failure events

Scanner Analysis Report


The Assistant provides a predefined WCDMA Scanner report template. The template contains
common Scanner analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use
the template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template
to generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The Scanner analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
his part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, Scanner name, and start time and
end time of the DT logfile.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example, SC
For 1st Best In Active Set, RSCP For 1st Best In Active Set, Ec/Io For 1st Best In Active
Set.

Basic Report Information


This part provides the basic information about the report, including the DT logfile name, DT
logfile size, Scanner name recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT
logfile.
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, Scanner name
recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 738


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.


l DT track information.

IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of IEs, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of IEs.

21.4.3 Predefined LTE reports


This section describes the predefined LTE reports. The description in this section helps you
understand two types of service report templates provided by the system: UE analysis report
template and Scanner analysis report template.

ATU Analysis Report


The Assistant provides a predefined LTE ATU report template. The template contains
common ATU analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The ATU analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic Report Information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, and start time and end time of
the DT logfile.
l Statistical Information
This part contains statistical information of KPIs.

Basic Report Information


This part provides the basic information about the statistical report, including the DT logfile
name, DT logfile size, ATU name included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of
the DT logfile.

l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, ATU name
included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 739


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Statistical Information
This part provides the detailed information about common services, including KPI names and
KPI values of the corresponding services.

UE Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined LTE UE report template. The template contains common
UE analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the template to
generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to generate a
new report template as required.

Overview
The UE analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.
l Statistical information
This part contains the statistical information on attach events, ping tests, FTP tests, and
HTTP tests.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
Serving EARFCN, PCI, and SINR.
l Event information
This part contains the DT point information, legend information, and statistical
information about common events on the map.

Basic Report Information


This part provides the basic information about the report, including the DT logfile name, DT
logfile size, UE name recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT
logfile.
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name
recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.

Statistical Information
This part provides the detailed statistical information about common services, including KPI
names and KPI values of the corresponding services. Statistical information about the
following common indicators of services is collected:
l Attch Success Rate
l Ping Round Trip Time Avg
l FTP Upload Success Rate
l HTTP Download Throughput
l RRC Setup Success Rate

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 740


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l HO Attempt Success Rate


l EARB Setup Success Rate
l Call Setup Success Rate

IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs and presents the information
on maps and in charts. Statistical information about the following IEs is collected:
l Serving EARFCN
l Serving PCI
l Serving RSRP
l Serving RSRQ
l Serving SINR anttena 0
l Serving SINR anttena 1
l PUSCH Power
l PUCCH Power
l AGC Power
l SRS Power
l App Throughput UL
l App Throughput DL

Event Information
This part provides the statistical information about common events in the DT logfile. The
information about each event comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the event on the map
l Event and legend information involved in the map
l Statistical table on the count of failure events

Scanner Analysis Report


The Assistant provides a predefined LTE Scanner report template. The template contains
common Scanner analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use
the template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template
to generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The Scanner analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
his part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, Scanner name, and start time and
end time of the DT logfile.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
EARFCN For 1st Best In ServiceCell, PCI For 1st Best In ServiceCell, RSRP For 1st
Best In ServiceCell.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 741


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Basic Report Information


This part provides the basic information about the report, including the DT logfile name, DT
logfile size, Scanner name recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT
logfile.
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, Scanner name
recorded in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.

IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs and presents the information
on maps and in charts. Statistical information about the following IEs is collected:
l EARFCN For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l PCI For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l RSRP For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l RSRQ For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l RSSI For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l SIR For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l SINR For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l Mutil Path Dalay For 1st Best In ServiceCell

21.4.4 Predefined TD-SCDMA Reports


This section describes the predefined TD-SCDMA reports. The description in this section
helps you understand two types of service report templates provided by the system: CS
analysis report template and PS analysis report template.

CS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined TD-SCDMA CS report template. The template contains
the common CS analysis counters and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The CS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic Report Information
This part contains the basic information about the DT logfile and the template.
l Statistical Information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, call setup delays, call drops,
handovers, and UE pilot pollution rate.
l IE Statistical Information
This part contains detailed information about common IEs, including RSCP, ISCP,
BLER, Tx Power, and SC.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 742


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l Event Information
This part contains the point information and legend information about most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.

Basic Report Information


The basic report information included in this part is as follows:
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, MS name
included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.

KPI Statistical Information


This part provides the statistical information about common KPIs. For details about the KPIs,
see 21.3.9 Predefined TD-SCDMA KPIs. If the KPIs in the predefined template cannot
satisfy your needs, you can modify the template and reselect KPIs as required. For details
about how to customize KPIs, see 17.1 Customizing KPIs.

IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l Point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of the IE, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of the IE.

Failure Event Information


This part provides the common event information in the logfile. The information about each
event comprises the following parts:
l Point information about the event on the map
l Event and legend information involved in the map
l Statistical table on the count of the events

PS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined TD-SCDMA PS report template. The template contains
common PS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.

Overview
The PS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic Report Information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 743


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l PS Service Statistical Information


This part contains the statistical information about session events, attach events, PDP
activation tests, ping tests, FTP tests, WAP tests, HTTP tests, and UE pilot pollution rate.
l IE Statistical Information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, including
statistical information on SERV CELL, BLER, and SIR.
l Event Information
This part contains the point information and legend information about most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.

Basic Report Information


This part provides the basic information about the statistical report, including the DT logfile
name, DT logfile size, UE name included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the
DT logfile.
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name
included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.

PS Service Statistical Information


This part provides the detailed information about common PS services, including KPI names
and KPI values of the corresponding PS services. Statistical information about the following
common indicators of PS services is collected:
l PDP Activation Success Rate
l Session Drop Rate
l R99 SHO Success Rate
l H to H IntraFreqCellChange Success Rate
l IntraFreq EDCHServing Cell Change SHO Success Rate
l PS Setup Delay Time Avg

IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l Point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of the IE, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of the IE.

Event Information
This part provides the common event information in the logfile. The information about each
event comprises the following parts:
l Point information about the event on the map

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 744


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

l Event and legend information involved in the map


l Statistical table on the count of failure events

21.4.5 SSV Analysis Report


The Assistant provides a predefined SSV report template. The template contains the common
SSV analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the template to
generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators of the template to generate a
new report template as required.

Overview
The SSV report can be generated as Word or Excel files. Word files includ GSM SSV, LTE
SSV, WCDMA SSV and LTE VoLTE SSV, Excel files includ CDMA SSV, GSM SSV, LTE
SSV, LTE VoLTE SSV, TD-SCDMA SSV and WCDMA SSV.
The SSV analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the site information, the cell information and the test Environment and
Kits information.
l Statistics information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, Events, and IEs.

Basic Report Information


The basic report information is as follows:
l Site Information, including the site name, ID, Longitude, Latitude, cell name and so on.
l Cell Information, including cell name, cell ID, Azimuth, PCI and so on.
l Test Environment & Kits, including the name and version of the software and kits.

Statistical Information
l Statistical information about KPIs
The statistical information about the common KPIs is collected.
l Statistical information about Events
The statistical information about the common Events is collected.
l Statistical information about IEs
The statistical information about the common IEs is collected.

21.4.6 Cross Table Predefined Report


Cross table predefined reports present IEs related to HSDPA indicators, cross relationships
between different IEs, and comparison charts, which helps users learn about the relationships
between HSDPA indicators.

Overview
Cross table predefined reports are generated as .xls files that contain multiple worksheets
named CQI-Throughput Carrier0, CQI-Modulation Carrier0, ECIO-Throughput Carrier0,

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 745


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

ECIO-Modulation Carrier0, CQI-Throughput Carrier1, CQI-Modulation Carrier1, ECIO-


Throughput Carrier1, and ECIO-ModulationCarrier1. These worksheets are used for
presenting IEs related to HSDPA indicators.

Basic Information
l CQI-Throughput Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l CQI-Modulation Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Throughput Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Modulation Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l CQI-Throughput Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l CQI-Modulation Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationship between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Throughput Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Modulation Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and the CDF percentage.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 746


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Figure 21-2 CQI-Modulation Carrier0 worksheet

No. Description

(1) Displays statistics on the number of DT points whose modulation modes


are QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM corresponding to the CQI values of the
serving cell and displays PDF percentage and CDF percentage.

(2) Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell
and the modulation modes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM in area
(1) in a bar-line combination chart. The scale interval of the right axis is
10%.

(3) Displays the cross relationships between the CQI of the serving cell and
the modulation modes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM in area (1) in
bar charts and line charts. The scale interval of the right axis is 5%.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 747


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Parameter Description

PDF(%) Indicates the percentage of DT points that uses a specific modulation mode
corresponding to a certain CQI value of the serving cell to all DT points.

CDF(%) Indicates the cumulative percentage of DT points that uses a specific


modulation mode to the all DT points.

21.4.7 Speech Quality Evaluation Predefined Report


Speech quality evaluation reports provide mean opinion score (MOS) statistical results in
different coding schemes, percentage of MOS values in a certain range to all MOS values,
coding scheme used for each MOS value range, and comparison chart. With these reports,
users can learn about the relationships between MOS values and coding schemes.

Overview
MOS reports are generated as .xls files that contain three worksheets. The three worksheets
are used to present the relationship between MOS and HAMR, relationship between MOS and
FAMR, and relationship between MOS and coding schemes.

Basic Information
l MOS-HAMR worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between AMR half-rate (HAMR) and MOS PESQ value
ranges.

Figure 21-3 MOS HAMR worksheet

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 748


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Table 21-78 Description of MOS HAMR worksheet

No. Description

(1) Displays the data distribution statistics on HAMR within a certain


MOS PESQ value range and displays the corresponding PDF
percentage and CDF percentage.

(2) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a bar chart.

(3) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a line chart.

Parameter Description

PDF(%) Indicates the percentage of DT points that use HAMR within


different MOS PESQ value ranges to all DT points.

CDF(%) Indicates the cumulative percentage of DT points that use HAMR


within different MOS PESQ value ranges to all DT points.

l MOS-FAMR worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between AMR full-rate (FAMR) and MOS PESQ value
ranges.

Figure 21-4 MOS FAMR worksheet

Table 21-79 Description of MOS FAMR worksheet

No. Description

(1) Displays the data distribution statistics on FAMR within a certain


MOS PESQ value range and displays the corresponding PDF
percentage and CDF percentage.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 749


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

No. Description

(2) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a bar chart.

(3) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a line chart.

Parameter Description

PDF(%) Indicates the percentage of DT points that use FAMR within


different MOS PESQ value ranges to all DT points.

CDF(%) Indicates the cumulative percentage of DT points that use FAMR


within different MOS PESQ value ranges to all DT points.

l MOS-CODEC MODE worksheet


Displays the cross relationships between MOS PESQ value ranges and coding schemes
such as FR, HR, and EFR.

Figure 21-5 MOS CODEC MODE worksheet

Table 21-80 Description of MOS CODEC MODE worksheet


No. Description

(1) Displays the data distribution statistics on coding schemes such as


full-rate (FR), half-rate (HR), and enhanced full-rate (EFR) within a
certain MOS PESQ value range and displays the corresponding PDF
percentage and CDF percentage.

(2) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a bar chart.

(3) Displays the PDF percentage change and CDF percentage change of
different coding schemes within different MOS PESQ value ranges
in area (1) in a line chart.

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 750


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Parameter Description

PDF(%) Indicates the percentage of DT points that use different coding


schemes within a certain MOS PESQ value range to all DT points.

CDF(%) Indicates the cumulative percentage of DT points that use different


coding schemes within different MOS PESQ value ranges to all DT
points.

21.5 Description of Shortcut Keys


This section describes some shortcut keys of the Assistant.

Common Shortcut Keys


Function Shortcut Key

Opening the online help F1/Ctrl+Shift+F1/Ctrl+F1

Saving the current active page as a file in F2


BMP format in the C:\Users\xxxxxx
\Documents\GENEX Assistant Projects
\project name\picture directory

Saving the current active page as a file in F3


JPEG format in the C:\Users\xxxxxx
\Documents\GENEX Assistant Projects
\project name\picture directory

Starting automatic analysis Ctrl+A

Querying the KPI Result window Ctrl+K

Analyzing GEN files F9

Setting project templates Ctrl+P

Managing GEN files Ctrl+F

Analysis set management dialog box Ctrl+G

Loading map files Ctrl+D

Creating a project Ctrl+N

Opening a project Ctrl+O

Saving a project Ctrl+S

Hiding or displaying the menu bar Ctrl+F1

Saving a project as another project F12

Creating a project Alt+1

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 751


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Function Shortcut Key

Opening a project Alt+2

Saving a project Alt+3

Saving a project as another project Alt+4

Closing a project Alt+5

Creating a project Alt+F+N

Opening a project Alt+F+O

Saving a project Alt+F+S

Saving a project as another project Alt+F+A

Closing a project Alt+F+C

Setting the system Alt+F+Y

Exit Alt+F+X

Project Menu Alt+P

Setting a project Alt+P+P

Opening an outdoor map Alt+P+D

Opening an outdoor map Alt+P+I

Viewing a map Alt+P+M

GSM Engineering Parameter Alt+P+G

Querying GSM engineering parameters Alt+P+G+V

Loading neighboring GSM cell Alt+P+G+N


configurations

Exporting a neighboring GSM cell list Alt+P+G+E

WCDMA Engineering Parameter Alt+P+W

Querying WCDMA engineering parameters Alt+P+W+V

Loading WCDMA neighboring cell Alt+P+W+N


configurations

Exporting a WCDMA neighboring cell list Alt+P+W+E

LTE Engineering Parameter Alt+P+L

Querying LTE engineering parameters Alt+P+L+V

Loading LTE neighboring cell configurations Alt+P+L+N

Exporting an LTE neighboring cell list Alt+P+L+E

TD-SCDMA Engineering Parameter Alt+P+T

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 752


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Function Shortcut Key

Querying TD-SCDMA engineering Alt+P+T+V


parameters

Loading TD-SCDMA neighboring cell Alt+P+T+N


configurations

Exporting a TD-SCDMA neighboring cell list Alt+P+T+E

CDMA Engineering Parameter Alt+P+C

Querying CDMA engineering parameters Alt+P+C+V

Loading CDMA neighboring cell Alt+P+C+N


configurations

Exporting a CDMA neighboring cell list Alt+P+C+E

Exporting a template Alt+P+E

Exporting a GSM engineering parameter Alt+P+E+G


template

Exporting a WCDMA engineering parameter Alt+P+E+W


template

Exporting a CDMA engineering parameter Alt+P+E+C


template

Exporting an LTE engineering parameter Alt+P+E+L


template

Exporting a TD-SCDMA engineering Alt+P+E+T


parameter template

Managing GEN files Alt+P+F

Managing analysis groups Alt+P+A

Analysis Menu Alt+A

Analyzing GEN files Alt+A+R

Automatic Analysis Wizard Alt+A+A

Customizing functions Alt+A+C

Customizing KPIs Alt+A+C+K

Customizing IEs Alt+A+C+I

Customizing Delay Alt+A+C+D

Customizing One Delay Alt+A+C+D+O

Customizing Segment Delay Alt+A+C+D+S

Customizing Legend Alt+A+C+L

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 753


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Function Shortcut Key

Customizing Ranged Alt+A+C+L+R

Customizing Individual Alt+A+C+L+I

Customizing Combine Query Alt+A+C+Q

Customizing Event Alt+A+C+E

Replaying backward Alt+A+V

Replaying backward in single step mode Alt+A+P

Pausing Alt+A+S

Replaying forward in single step mode Alt+A+N

Replaying forward Alt+A+F

Previous Label Alt+A+P

Adding a label Alt+A+L

Next Label Alt+A+N

View Menu Alt+V

KPI Result Alt+V+K

Measurement Information Alt+V+M

Drilldown Menu Alt+V+D

WCDMA Drilldown Tab Alt+V+D+W

BLER Alt+V+D+W+B

Data Service Alt+V+D+W+D

Radio Parameters Alt+V+D+W+R

Serving/Active Set+Neighbors Alt+V+D+W+S

HSDPA Link Statistics Alt+V+D+W+H

HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics Alt+V+D+W+C

HSUPA link Statistic Alt+V+D+W+U

GSM drilldown tab page Alt+V+D+G

Serving+Neighbor Cell Alt+V+D+G+S

Serving Cell Alt+V+D+G+C

Basic Information Alt+V+D+G+B

Radio Parameter Alt+V+D+G+R

GPRS Parameter Windows Alt+V+D+G+W

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 754


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Function Shortcut Key

GPRS Parameter Chart Alt+V+D+G+H

TD-SCDMA Drilldown Tab Alt+V+D+T

Serving and Neighboring Cells Alt+V+D+T+S

Radio Parameters Alt+V+D+T+P

Throughput Alt+V+D+T+T

BLER Alt+V+D+T+B

UE State Alt+V+D+T+U

LTE Drilldown Tab Alt+V+D+L

Serving+Neighboring Cells Alt+V+D+L+S

Radio Parameters Alt+V+D+L+R

Throughput Alt+V+D+L+T

BLER Alt+V+D+L+B

Antenna Measurement Alt+V+D+L+A

MIMO Alt+V+D+L+M

LTE Modulation Alt+V+D+L+L

Inter-RAT Measurements Alt+V+D+L+I

Positioning Drilldown Tab Alt+V+D+P

Map Alt+V+D+P+M

Message Drilldown Tab Alt+V+D+M

L3 Message Alt+V+D+M+L

Event Alt+V+D+M+E

Templates Drilldown Tab Alt+V+D+T

Custom Window Alt+V+D+T+W

Custom Chart Alt+V+D+T+C

Chart Drilldown Tab Alt+V+D+C

GSM/WCDMA/LTE/TD-SCDMA Chart Alt+V+D+C+C

GSM/WCDMA/LTE RRC Chart Alt+V+D+C+R

GSM/WCDMA/LTE Data Chart Alt+V+D+C+D

Save Alt+V+S

Save As Alt+V+A

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 755


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Function Shortcut Key

Delete Alt+V+E

Tile Horizontally Alt+V+H

Tile Vertically Alt+V+V

Switch Alt+V+T

Close All Windows Alt+V+T+C

Windows Manager Alt+V+T+W

Close All Alt+V+C

Project Bar Display or not Alt+V+P

Legend Bar Display or not Alt+V+L

Report Menu Alt+R

Report Wizard Alt+R+R

Benchmark Alt+R+B

SSV Alt+R+S

Custom Report Alt+R+C

Business Statistics Report Alt+R+C+B

Custom Cluster Report Alt+R+C+C

Report Template Alt+R+T

Tools Menu Alt+T

Import Alt+T+I

Full Alt+T+I+F

Custom Alt+T+I+C

Export Alt+T+E

Full Alt+T+E+F

Custom Alt+T+E+C

Export FMT Template for TEMS Alt+T+T

View ESN Alt+T+V

License Info Alt+T+L

Update License Alt+T+U

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 756


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Shortcut Keys for Linkage


Function Shortcut Key

Filtering search box contents in an analysis Enter


set

Filtering search box contents on the IE Enter


addition GUI in a report template

Right-click the L3Messages node and Ctrl+C


choose Display on sheet from the shortcut
menu. In the displayed Display on sheet
window, copy the selected line of data.

Right-click the L3Messages node and Enter


choose Display on sheet from the shortcut
menu. In the displayed Display on sheet
window, search for the next matching
character string.

Right-click the IE node and choose Display Up/Down


on sheet from the shortcut menu. In the
displayed Display on sheet window, switch
data up and down.

Right-click the IE node and choose Display PageUp/PageDown


on sheet from the shortcut menu. In the
displayed Display on sheet window, switch
to the previous or next page.

Right-click the IE node and choose Display Ctrl+C


on sheet from the shortcut menu. In the
displayed Display on sheet window, copy
the selected line of data.

Right-click the IP Key Messages node and Ctrl+C


choose Display on sheet from the shortcut
menu. In the displayed Display on sheet
window, copy the selected line of data.

Right-click the IP Key Messages node and Enter


choose Display on sheet from the shortcut
menu. In the displayed Display on sheet
window, search for the next matching
character string.

Searching for matching contents in the Enter


search box on the office report template
GUI

Searching for matching contents in the Enter


search box on the KPI customizing or event
editing GUI

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 757


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

Function Shortcut Key

Copying selected contents on the View KPI Ctrl+C


Result GUI

copying selected contents in the Event table Ctrl+C


on the View KPI Result GUI

Selecting all contents in the editing box on Ctrl+A


the KPI customizing or event editing GUI

Pasting contents on the KPI customizing or Ctrl+V


event editing GUI

Searching for matching contents in the Enter


search box on the delay customizing GUI

Performing the next step on the Report Enter


Wizard GUI

Searching for matching contents in the Enter


search box on the KPI customizing GUI

Progress bar Shielding the Esc key

Determining the engineering parameters to Enter


be imported on the GUI for importing
engineering parameters

Determining whether the automatic analysis Enter


import list is changed on the automatic
analysis import wizard GUI

Determining whether the configurations in Enter


the new project dialog box are changed

Performing the next step in the dialog box Enter


for creating projects

Selecting or canceling the selected terminal Right/Left


in the analysis set management dialog box

No linkage when you click a map Ctrl

Moving locations on a map Up/Down/Right/Left

Moving locations upward and downward on Ctrl+mouse wheel


a map

Dragging a map using the mouse as the Pan Ctrl+Alt+Left-Click


tool

Selecting multiple or consecutive data Ctrl/Shift


records on a sheet

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 758


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Assistant
User Guide 21 Appendixes

URL
URLs used by the software are as follows:
l http://www.huawei.com
l http://earth.google.com/kml/2.0
l http://maps.google.com

Issue 01 (2017-03-21) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 759


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy